CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
 OF THE SAGE ENDOWMENT 
 FUND GIVEN IN 1891 BY 
 
 HENRY WILLIAMS SAGE 
 
University Library 
 dides original and comp 
 
 3 1924 031 323 045 
 
 iLsinx 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031323045 
 
NOTES UPON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 BOOKS I. AND II. 
 
NOTES UPON THUCYDIDES 
 
 OEIGIML AND COMPILED. 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN G. SHEPPARD, M.A. 
 
 HEAD MASTEB OF EISSEBMINSTER SCHOOL; 
 EOBM£BLT FELLOW OP WADHAM GOLI>E&E, OXFOBD; 
 
 LEWIS EVANS, M.A. 
 
 HEAD MASTBB OP SAKDBACH SCHOOL; 
 POBMEELY EELLOW OP WADHAM COLLEGE, OXPOBD. 
 
 BOOKS I. AND n. 
 
 LONDON: 
 JOHN W. tAKKEK AND SON, WEST STKAND. 
 1857- r:n ,, . 
 
PEE FACE. 
 
 THE present publication was suggested by Mr. Dawson Turner's 
 Notes on Herodotus, and is intended to supply those wants, 
 tbe existence of which the very large sale of that useful volume 
 seems to indicate. It is perhaps well to state thus much lest the 
 reader should misunderstand the character of the work, and be in- 
 duced to estimate it by a standard which it does not affect to 
 reach. It does not, for instance, deal in conjectural emenda- 
 tion, it does not contain a digest of various readings, or any- 
 thing like an apparatus criticus for Thucydides, and it leaves 
 untouched, or only briefly notices many matters, which a per- 
 fect edition of an historical writer ought to discuss. What 
 it attempts is something more humble,, but at the same time, 
 we trust, not altogether useless ; for it endeavours to furnish 
 University Students with that amount of information which their 
 second examination may be regarded as likely to require. What 
 this amount exactly is, under present circumstances, cannot very 
 easily be estimated. The period usually devoted to the preparation 
 for a University degree, when compared with the immensely in- 
 creased requirements of the various examinations, will, to the 
 student at any rate, appear but brief; and the arrangement of the 
 relative claims of different authors upon his time, is perhaps one of 
 the greatest difficulties with which he has to contend. If, for in- 
 stance, he desires to raise himself to the standard of philosophical 
 acquirement proposed by Mr. Pattison,* and of historical knowledge 
 by Mr. Froude,t how is he to find leisure for that careful and critical 
 study of the classical authors which Prof. ConingtonJ has so truly 
 described as the only useful way of practising such study at all ? 
 
 We do not presume to answer a question which must in some 
 measure perplex those much more competent to enter upon it than 
 ourselves ; but we ventui'e to say that thus much at any rate is 
 clear. The very conditions of the case render the examination, 
 under such circumstances, of what commentators have written in 
 
 * Oxford Essays, 1855. t Ibid. t Inaugural Lecture. 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 various languages upon the text of Thucydides, nothing less than 
 a physical impossibility. And yet, unless we are prepared to sur- 
 render much of what hitherto has been included under the 'idea' of 
 scholarship, an acquaintance to some extent with the labours of the 
 great scholars of this and other ages, and a practical imitation of 
 their 'method,' is surely necessary to any one who aspires to be 
 called by that once respected name. 
 
 One help towards overcoming the difficulty might perhaps be 
 found, if competent persons were to collect, within moderate 
 compass, so much matter bearing upon the various works, or por- 
 tions of works taken up for examination, as would afford a reason- 
 able amount of incidental information, and at the same time convey 
 an adequate notion of the way in which these subjects have been 
 treated by the great masters of classical criticism. 
 
 This accordingly is what we have tried to do here : imperfectly, 
 perhaps, but to the best of a judgment tolerably instructed by ex- 
 perience. If these notes do not contain much less than what 
 candidates for the second University examination will require, they 
 may perhaps fairly deprecate criticism for not containing more. 
 
 Persons who exercise their wit upon the pursuit of classical 
 studies, are fond of declaring that the chief duty of the editor of a 
 classical work consists in abusing his predecessors. Happily, to an 
 editor of Thucydides this is impossible. To pass over, for the sake 
 of brevity, though scarcely ■ perhaps with justice, many early com- 
 mentators of great learning and varied merit, the names of Poppo, 
 Arnold, Goller, Bloomfield, and Kriiger demand the sincerest 
 respect from any person whose lot it may be to labour in the same 
 field of knowledge. Poppo's great work is truly a monument of 
 erudition constructed with materials gathered from every possible 
 source; Arnold's affords a treasure of historical and geographical 
 knowledge, and though certainly deficient in the more strictly 
 critical portion, must ever remain an admirable specimen of sound 
 sense, good taste, and eloquent language. Goller has the German 
 fault of over-subtlety, and sometimes confuses himself as well as 
 his readers ; but he has done much for Thucydides, and merits the 
 highest praise. High praise also must be assigned to the industry 
 of Dr. Bloomfield, whose laborious and voluminous edition is par- 
 ticularly valuable for its references to later Greek literature, and' 
 the historical writers who have imitated Thucydides. It would be 
 no small merit in any writer to follow respectably where others of 
 
i'UKi'ACE. Vil 
 
 such ability and learning have gone before him. But Kriiger has 
 done more than this, — much more. We cannot mention the name of 
 an author from whom we have learnt so much, without declaring 
 that his edition, in respect of acuteness, soundness of judgment, 
 and general accuracy, seems to us to occupy one of the highest, if 
 not the highest place, among Commentaries upon Thucydides.* 
 
 Of Translations we have consulted three : — Mr. Dale's ; a Ger- 
 man Version, lately pubHshed by Engelman at Leipsic ; and the last 
 Trench Version, by M. Zevort (Paris, 1852). Mr. Dale's work is 
 too well known to require any notice from us. If we have men- 
 tioned it occasionally for the purpose of expressing difference of 
 opinion rather than agreement, this arises from the nature of our 
 relative ofiices, and not from any desire to disparage so able a per- 
 formance. The Translation pubUshed by Engelman — so far as we 
 are competent to form a judgment, embodying, as it does, so much 
 careful exposition — is even of a still higher character, and deserves 
 to be classed as one of the most successful, among the many suc- 
 cessful attempts of the kind for which Germany is distinguished. 
 
 M. Zevort has produced a readable version in a lively manner, 
 but what he himself states generally, is at any rate true of his own 
 language : ' Thucydide ne saurait etre traduit a proprement parler.' 
 The French idiom offers no counterpart to the massive dignity of 
 the Greek, and M. Zevort has himself so well appreciated the difB.- 
 culties of the style with which he has had to deal, that we shall, we 
 think, consult the interest of the student by referring him to the 
 able Preface prefixed to his Translation. 
 
 The learned Editor of Notes upon the Apostolical Epistles, Dr. 
 Peile, has kindly placed at our disposal a few remarks upon several 
 difficult passages, written by him many years ago. Of these we 
 have made some use, and should have made still more, had it not 
 been from the hope that he may himself some day be induced to 
 give them to the world in a more expanded and complete form. 
 
 These, then, are mainly the sources from which the following 
 notes, where they are not original, have been drawn. There are 
 of course others, such as Mr. Grote's great Work, Cramer's Greece, 
 the Easti Hellenici, and Mr. Jelf's edition of Kiihner, which it is 
 
 * The edition of the first two Books, by the late T. K. Arnold, seems so 
 entirely a work of the scissors, as not to require a separate mention. Even 
 where Mr. Arnold's, own opinions are expressed, they appear much too hastily 
 formed. 
 
viii PKEPACE. 
 
 unnecessary to particularise. We hope that we have written with 
 care, but we know that many faults, both of omission and commis- 
 sion, must occur in a work of this nature, even when performed 
 by scholars very far more accurate and able than ourselves. To 
 any one who wiU kindly take the trouble to point out such errors, 
 we shall feel sincerely grateful, for it is only by co-operation of this 
 sort, given, as we trust it would be received, in a right spirit, that 
 we can hope to effect anything truly and permanently useful. 
 
 ' Le moi est haissable,' says a distinguished Frenchman ;* and 
 therefore the occasional recurrence of the personal pronoun in the 
 following pages may to some persons be offensive. It will be found 
 in those portions of the Work executed before I had the advantage 
 of any assistance from my present Coadjutor, and in various scat- 
 tered remarks, which had long been in preparation. Upon the whole 
 it seemed a less evil than perpetual circumlocution ; nor could I in 
 any other way have expressed my own judgment between conflicting 
 opinions with sufficient simplicity to be satisfactory to myself. 
 After all, quite as much presumption may be latent in a periphrasis 
 as in a personal pronoun, and the latter appears to keep up more 
 clearly that unity in the various elements of a Commentary, which 
 it is hoped they may exhibit from having been moulded into form 
 by a single mind. 
 
 The notes to the first two books are here given in a separate form. 
 Those to the next two are far advanced, and will, I trust, speedily 
 follow. These will form a Commentary upon that portion of our 
 author generally taken up by students as one subject for the second 
 classical examination in the University of Oxford, and for this ob- 
 ject they are primarily designed, but they may perhaps also be 
 found suited to the use of the higher classes in schools, for which 
 purpose, indeed, they have been already employed. 
 
 I subjoin a short Appendix on the Aorist usage to which re- 
 ference is frequently made in the Commentary; and some few 
 remarks upon a celebrated passage which could not conveniently 
 be comprised within the limits of a note. 
 
 J. G. S. 
 
 * M. Philarfete Chaales, Etudes stir L' AntiquiU, p. 2. 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 Chapter I. — (a.) 0ovkv8£8iis. This simple statement of their name and 
 style appears to have been adopted by the ancient historians to identify their 
 works. Cf. the preface of Herodotus. Krtig, adds Hecatseus (cited by De- 
 metrius tt. Ip/J,. 2) and Ocellus (iieilClem. Al. vi. p. 741) cf. Dio. Chrys. 53, 
 p. 555. The formula recurs t. 26 . where see note. In summing up the years 
 of the war, he simply uses his name. But when spoken of as General — iv. 
 1 04 — h is full official style is given, and bis Father's name appended. 
 |i)v47pa\|/6. The compound j tgrb implies the compilation an d ar rangement of 
 "materials. So Sallust ' conscribere' and ' componere .' Sail. Hist. i. i. 
 <i)S eTco\iy.r\ira,v.—Mow they carried it on — i.e., its details and method, and 
 therefore more than Hv iir., which some have suggested. Cf. ra lireira ws iiro- 
 
 Xe/i-riSTi j^rrffKroiicu, v. •26, Jelf, § 899, 7. 
 
 ev9vs Ka6i(rTa|iivov — 
 
 as soon as it loas set on foot, cf. Jelf, 5 30, 2 . We must understand that he made 
 notes a nd collected documents from, the very .first. The re gular composition 
 was the work of _a_lat er perio d — iBiob ably in part of _EIg. evilB MiiUer(5i6^. 
 jOtiTGreece, p. 485) is of opinion that all he wrote at ^capte Hyle was onlv a 
 preliminary labou r in the way of memoirs . E e did not commence the actual 
 arrangement of particulars till after the en d ~of the wa r, w hen he was again 
 iresiding in hi s own cou ntry. This is shown partly by the frequent references 
 to the duration, the issue, and the general connexion of the war, but especially 
 by the fact that the History was left unfinished. Cf. i. 13, 93; ii. 13, 65; 
 v. 16. 'He lived to complete six books entirely; to the seventh, as some 
 think, his final touches are wanting; the eighth is altogether unfinished.' Am. 
 See Appendix ii. eXir eras. The intermediate sense of the word 
 
 signifying ' expectation. ' No idea < f hope can be implied here, or in such cases as 
 Soph. Ajax vv. 606, 795, Trach. in. The scholiast therefore was right in 
 his remark, iXwicat, 06 ^6vov iirl a' ddcp dW aTrXws i-jrl TJj rou fj,4XKovros iK^dtrei 
 XiyiTM. The koX preceding i\irl(7i ,s is generally supposed to involve a repeti- 
 tion of ^vviypai'e. KJriig. render ;, ' and after he had therefrom formed the 
 expectation.' 0510X071 irarov twv irpoY. This substitution of the 
 
 superlative for the comparative s iems to take its rise from the anxiety of the 
 writer to say a thing more strongl r than the common forms of speech allow. 
 It has place, therefore, where verj strong emphasis is intended, and is cognate 
 to the idiom where two superla ives are coupled together, — e.g., TrXeTiTTov 
 iX^ia-TTii, Soph. Phil. v. 631 ; 'MortHighest' in our version of the Psalms. It is 
 very common in Greek. See fJ.fyicrl[riv tuv irpt) airijs i. 10. dfofiao-TdraTa twv Tplv 
 
3 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^ooe I. 
 
 yevi/ieva, i. II. neytcrrr) Sii tQiI wpb avTijs yey^VTjTai, i. 50. fniyuTTOf 5^ rav 
 irplv kMvvov, vi. 13. See for instances Jelf, § 503, 3. But the idiom has a 
 deeper root than the peculiarity pf any special language. Livy wrote, Bellum 
 maxime memorabile omnium qui wnquam gesta sunt xxi. i, and Tacitus, Ccele- 
 rorum Britannorum fugacissiml, Agric. 36. Accordingly, too, we find in 
 Milton, 'Adam, the goodliest of his sons since bom, the fairest of her daughters 
 ' Eve.' The importance of particularly noticing such a form of speech arises 
 from its application to the famous expression, TpoirdroKos ttjs KricrecoSf Col, i. 
 15, which on the same principle] signifies, ' born iefore all creation.' 
 dK)i.d^ovT£s ■fjo-ov — ' were in a state of vigour, or at the acmi, or highest point 
 of their strength,' — implies slightly more than the final verb ■ffKjj.a^ov. Of. note 
 on dva/j,ipi,vrio-K6/j,evos, Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 121./ Bekker reads ^(raj" 
 quasi ^icray (' weder Thukydideisohe noch Attisohe' Kriig.) upon the strength 
 of such phrases as Uvai h rois ttoX^/xoi's. But Pop. rightly remarks, Thuc. 
 would surely h.ive written -^eaav here as elsewhere. / opuv — the condition- 
 alizing participle, equivalent, as usual, when without the article, to Uti. iilipa , 
 ' because he saw, ' 8lavoaij|j.£vov — having it in (or passing through) their 
 
 minds — thinTcimg of it. Eeierence is made to Syracuse and the Dorian states 
 of Sicily; perhaps also to Ai^os. 
 
 (6.) K£vT)(ris K.T.X. 'This was by far the greatest stir (or commotion) <Aa* 
 ever arose among the Greeks, and a very considerable portion of the barba- 
 rians, or, so to speak, the greater part of mankind.' us eiTreo/ may also be 
 rendered ' propemodum dixerim,' ' I had almost said.' Cf. Jelf, 864, i and 
 for Tr\€L<!Tov avBpdnroiv see Jelf 422, B. KlvTi<ri.s like our word 'movement' (cf. 
 the 'movement party'), seems to be applied by later writers at any rate, to the 
 internal rather than the external relations 6f a, country. ' Thucyd. expressly 
 ea,lls this war greater than the Persian, ch. 23, and no other war except the 
 Persian could within his knowledge enter into comparison with it.' Am. 
 8^, when added to a word, intensifies its meaning and directs attention to it. 
 Hence its use with superlatives. See (i\i7oi! 6^ ' feio indeed,' i. 3^. Jelf 723 i. 
 Pappdpuv. According to Poppo, t he Thracians, the Maced onians, several of 
 t he Epirot trib es, the Sicilians, an d^^p^aps also the Persians^ - 
 
 (ilpEi TivC; The phrase signifieTan appfiSiiHSle^d therefore considerable 
 part. Cf. ch. 23 u. So also the Latin,' aliquot.' rot vclp irpi 
 
 oiTuv. Inasmuch as Thuc. cbntrasts (c. 3 and c. 12) ri. irpi t&v TprnKuv 
 and Ti. lierb. ri. TpaXKd, Pop^o considers that these words mean the wars 
 between the Trojan and PersiaA wars, as well as these two themselves, whUe 
 the iraXaiSrepa refer to those before the Trojan war. iiptiv—' make 
 
 out,' on ddimra, cf. infra, ch.l 7 a. TeKji^piov. Consult Arist. 
 
 Met. i. ■.=, where it wiU be seen that r^Kp-iipiov is the infaUible proof (a posteriori) 
 as distinguished from anp-eiov, the mere indication. £v ktX 
 
 The construction of the relative is not clear. Some with Sohaifer, repeat the 
 preposition iK, 'from the proof s, f nm which it happens that I feel confidence ' 
 Tliis derives some support from s passage in Isoo. iii. -i, raCra iK tQv Ipyav 
 6.V T« oix ^TTov fi tS>v Uyoip ttictt, 6a€i(v. Others again, as Kruger, consider it 
 a mere case of Attic attraction, ffl;- for S.s or &. 'From the proofs which it 
 occurs to me to credit,'— i.e., I am led to credit— (So Kriig. 'Ichfiudemich 
 veranhisst.')— Mpom carrying my investigations as far lack as possible. This is 
 
Chap. 2. J 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 simple and preferable. Cf. HercM. iv. l6, ftroy j/tets Arpeic^MS irl ixaKphraTov 
 dtol t' ijev6/i,e6a d/coj i^lKeiT8ai.\ o4-|Ji^7aXtt. Connect the two 
 
 , single term. ' / hold them to have been of 
 I meaning between this collocation and con- 
 
 words by a hyphen, so as to form ) 
 no importance.' The distinction ip 
 
 7 3rb (as D. has done), is not in the present 
 1 to observe that Thuc. has a tendency to the 
 ' as logicians call it, and that such compound 
 oi'-6a\d(r<not, ch. 7. ovk- 
 137. Is Ttt &XXa. ' Cseteris in 
 
 rebus' (Betant. Lex. Thucyd. ), ajl matters not included under iro\i/j,ovs. A 
 favourite formula. Cf. oh. 6. 
 
 necting the negative with the V3 
 
 passage great. But it is desirable 1 
 
 use of the 'particula infinitans, ' 
 
 negatives are not rare. oiK-dveiSit;6i'Tav, ch. 5. 
 
 do"0aXeis, ch. 6. o{i-dtakv<nv, ch. 
 
 Chaptee II. — (a.) ^alvirai, I With a participle expressed, or understood 
 is the Latin ' coTistat,' 'H is clear,' 'it is an established point,' and is to be dis- 
 tinguished by the younger studeni from SoKel, which states a matter of surmise 
 or opinion. (See ch. 3, ad init.).! With the infinitive (palverai. it is slightly 
 different — it seems to be, not it evidently is. nvuv del irXeiovcov — ■ 
 
 ' by some who, as it might happen, [from time to time were more numerous.' The 
 idiom is of frequent recurrence thpugh more usually del is placed between the 
 article and an adj. or part. IfiiropCas — 'traffic by sea;' for traffic 
 
 by land must have been common, notwithstanding the fact of their communica- 
 tions being somewhat restricted 1 y disti-ust. 'EXXcts. Herodotus 
 wrote T^s vvv 'BXXdSos Trpirepoy ii lle\a(ryliis Kokivixiv-qs, ii. 56. This Krtig. 
 says is to be modified by what 1 'hucydides asserts in the following ch. — i.e., 
 Pelasgian was only the name of a predominant tribe. See Grote as referred to 
 ch. iii., note (b.) 
 
 (5.) v6|i6|j.evoi TO, airuv 8<rov airo^Tiv. ' Cultivating each their own land, 
 so far as to get a living off it,' — i.e., mly cultivating it to such an extent as to pro- 
 duce the necessaries of life, cf. Jelf § 666. irepiouo-tav \pr\f.&.Tmi — 'stqch,' an 
 amount of moveable property over and above what was required for daily use; 
 this is the force of wepi in similar Words. Cf. irai' t6 TripiTTov S.Kaipov. 
 vflv AuTtioVTCS — referring more especially to vines and olives. The word 
 Krug. remarks is the proper one to express planting in contradistinction to 
 dpoCi' and airelpeiv, and 77? irerpevrevii.ivrt (Hom. ipvra'Kta) is contrasted with 
 dp6(riju,os and ffTTi/ji/ios. &8t|Xov Sv — ' it being uncertain.' (Cf. the same 
 
 phrase, viii. 96.) Matth. calls this t he nom. absolute. Most grammarians are now 
 inclined, with Kriiger, to regard it as an accusative arising from the idea of 
 duration or extension of time. See Matth. § 564. Host 131, v. 4. Jelf's 
 Kuhner. § 581, 700. aTCixCcrrmv Sfia ovtmv — and they being at 
 
 the same time without the defence )f walls, sc. aiT&v, to be supplied, as often, 
 from the context. di u^KaCov — ' necessary sustenance, ' raro generis 
 
 communis est. Pop. ov x<>^«'f'»s airavCo-ravTO — made no dif- 
 
 ficulty in abandoning. 
 
 (c.) Ti vvv 0€o-(raXCa KoXowiiivTi. Pop. remarks that these assertions are 
 confirmed and illustrated by the accounts of the movements of population given 
 in MilUer's Minyce and Plass's ffistory of Ancient Greece. Arcadia was to 
 Greece what Wales was to England, and Brittany to France : a rugged district, 
 inhabited by a rugged race, which offered fao temptation to foreign invasions. 
 
 B 2 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 (d:) dp«T^v — 'honitatem, fert'lKtatem.' Pop. d/)er?i is simply 'excellence.' 
 The nature of the excellence is d jtermined bj- the adjunct. It cannot surprise 
 us that the word came to signify kot' i^oxv" ' moral excellence' or 'virtue.' 
 Notice the etymology among a martial people from 'Apvs, as Virtus from ' Vir.' 
 On the goodness of the soil, Krtig. refers to Herod, vii. 129; Xen. Sell. vi. i, 
 II ; Strab. ix. p. 430. tio-£. This is in general understood to refer 
 
 to particular individuals. Kriig,, however, understands it of tribes, or states, 
 thinking this interp. necessitated by iyyiymiiei'aL ar, iir. It does not, how- 
 ever, seem unreasonable (T. K. A.) to translate, 'growing up to a greater extent 
 among particular persons. ' 
 
 (e.) T^v 70W ' Attiktjv — Attica accordingly, ot at any rate. 705;/ is a parti- 
 cularizing, and also corroborative particle. The ye brings down the statement 
 to what follows by directing special attention to it, and the oSj/ expresses con- 
 formity with what precedes. Cf. at youv dWat. d.-irotKiat, i. 38. Ik tov 
 lirl irXcto-Tov. This, by the Sohol. and others, has been connected with oicrav, 
 as though the latter were equivalent to etvat. But it is better, with Am. and 
 Pop. , to ta]£e the words per se, and make them a single adverbial expression 
 nearly equivalent to i^ ^PXV^ — from a very long time hade. For iK . . . odtrav, 
 cf. dia dvTKTXoOo'av, c. 7- XeirToYCcov. ' Attica was not considered, 
 even in ancient times, a fertile district ; its rocky surface is covered with a very 
 thin crust of earth.' Niebuhr, Yortrdge iiber alte Ldnder-imd Volkerkunde, 
 S. 92 (quoted by Engelman). It seems to have been a light soil, ' tenuis argilla ,' 
 suitable for the olive. Virg. Georg. ii, 180, 212. Poppo refers to Dodwell, 
 vol. ii. p. 5, and Kruse's Hellas, ii. i. We may add Bceckh's Pub. CEcon. 
 Athens, p. 40. It was from these circumstances that agriculture was so highly 
 valued at Athens. Xen. CEcon. 4; Aris. Pol. vi. 4. ot ovtoC. Goll, 
 quotes from Wyttenbach, ' Locus communis in Atticorum laudibus et orationi- 
 bus quod ai3r4x^'"'fsfuerint.' Hence the custom of wearing violets (ioo-T^0avo() 
 and golden grasshoppers in their hair. Cf infra. It will be enough to refer the 
 student to Vl&to'a Menexenus, Aristoph. Yespce, 1071, and the celebrated funeral 
 orations by Demosthenes and Lysias. Kal irapdSei'yiJia roSe k.t.X, 
 The enormous controversy which these words have occasioned is well known; 
 Perhaps we shall best enable the stud( nt to master it by placing the several 
 points of dispute before him. (i)Whi,t is the Xiyos? (2) flTiat is meant by 
 ^s TO S.Wa.'i (3) What is the subject oflaiifi/fl^j/ai? (4) What increase is implied 
 in ai^Ti8rjvaL ? With respect to the fii 3t there does not seem any reasonable 
 diflSlculty. Thuo. had never asserted in express terms Sia rds /leroiKlas k.t.X. ; 
 but in the previous part of the chapter he had described the general insecurity 
 of property, and the /ieravaffrd^eis whi( h resulted from it, and as a consequence 
 of them he added dt' airb oflre ^e^^^ei wSXeuv iTcrxuoi' oihe rfj d\\-g TrapaaKeirj, 
 This therefore must be considered as tl ,e \6yos repeated in the words SiA ris 
 /ier. (2) h rh &\\a is sometimes re|idered 'm all other respects,' as at the 
 close of ch.i. But 'other' than what/? It is not easy to see. Nor had Thuo. 
 made any such assertion. What he siid was, that the other parts of Greece did 
 not increase owing to their unsettled Condition. It is better therefore, following 
 the second Scholiast, to consider it as ' in its other parts.' (3) Poppo once sug- 
 gested, and Haack adopts the idea, tl at t^^'Xttik^v is the subject of ai^rievvai 
 
Chap. 
 
 3-J 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ' on account of the immigrations, Atiisa did not increase in other respects (wealth 
 and power) correspondingly with its pcbulation.' But it is impossible to force 
 this meaning from o^oi'us; and if it wdre, it is contrary to fact, and also contrary 
 to the whole argument. For, having represented throughout frequent change 
 of population as the great obstacle to progress, it would be absurd to confirm 
 his argument by asserting a similar wtnt of progress where the population was 
 permanent. Other editors therefore iiupply t^v 'WKKdSa as the subject of ai^-q- 
 Brivai — though the word has not been used, and can only be extracted from the 
 context. Or it is possible that ai^i]B',)vai. may be impersonal — in which case the 
 meaning would be the same — ' that there was no similar increase elsewhere.' 
 (4) While some suppose a general inw-ease in material resources to be implied in 
 ai^ridijvai., others, as Peile, considei- the increase as confined to population. 
 This he thinks established by ch. 12, where what in connexion with Tjcrvxd<racra 
 is described by ai^T]8TJvai, is afterwards expressed by airomlas i^iirefiiri. The 
 whole will then run — And this which follows is not the least proof of my state- 
 ment, that 'twas owing to its migratmns (n. b. the reason placed in the promi- 
 nent part of the sentence) that Greece in Uo other parts i»ae not similarly in- 
 creased, for out of the rest of Greece, those who, Sec. ydp, as elsewhere, intro- 
 duces the proof intended by rbSe — as just below SijXoi Si /J.01 Kal ToSe irpb 7ap 
 rdv IpuUuiv. Peile quotes Arist. Av. 5 14, & Si Seivbrarbv 7' eariv airdvToiv . . . 
 6 y^p Zei5s. I should myself rather prefer the impersonal usage of ai^-qOijfai, 
 for I think Thucyd. purposely means to speak ratlier vaguely of districts which 
 were not then styled Hellas at all, ajpd in some cases perhaps not subsequently 
 included in it. We must add, that pome editors, as Pop. and GoU. strike out ' 
 the is, thus making to dWa so. ttjs 'BXAdSos the subject of ai^ridfjvai, and 
 giving exactly the same sense as above. This is neat and simple. And I think 
 we may urge in its favour that common formulae like is rd dWa are apt to run 
 in the head of transcribers, and to slip from their pens when anything like them 
 occurs in the copy. TJlrich (quoted by Engelman) very ingeniously reads ixeroi.- 
 K-fi(jus for fj,eToiKlas is. The change in uncial letters wo^ild be insignificant. , 
 And Plato's authority in three places {Apol. 40. u. ; Pkced. 117. c. ; Laws, viii. 
 850, a.), is cited for the word. P^'Paiov. 'Understand tl (cf. Kiihner, 
 
 § 421 ; Jelf, 381) or t6 draxupeic irap. 'AStjc. (cf. Matth. § 568).' Pop. 
 f.ilt,o> 'in — 'still greater,' i. e., it was already greater than others simply from 
 its tranquillity, but became yet more so from the influx of foreigners. 
 'luvCav. The term is used by a sort of irpoXijiJ/is, for, as Gbll. remarks, the 
 country acquired the name from the settlement of these very Ionian colonists in 
 it (cf. SeXe^oOcra, vi. 4). 
 
 Chapter III. — (a.) oo-StveCav. Here as in Herod, i. 143. Pausan. vii. 17, 
 'political inability,' resulting from tie absence of Trepiouo-ia x/")/"'^''"'^''- Bloomf. 
 irpb-irpoTtpov. A not uncommon f irm of Pleonasm, as may be seen by com- 
 paring (with Pop.) irpoiypaypa vpiWov i. 23; irpoTrifi.fa.vTes irpirepov . 29; 
 irplv irpodiayvojTe i. 78. OoKel etx"' — '"^^ dvai. Remark the varia- 
 
 tion from the indio. to the infiniti-Je. Stl is omitted before the indie, to give 
 vivacity to the narration. The plssage quoted by Jelf, g 804, 6, from Thuo. 
 v. 37, yvois Sti, .... SMtpBapTfioiiivovs aiiToiis for itacpffap'^aoi'Ta.i. is not 
 
 In 
 
 — ,^^ 
 
 i. 
 
 # 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 (6.) TO. [Uv — 'during the times 
 used like rt) d7r6 rovSe, t& irdXai., and 
 rovTup, Dem. de Cor. § i88, (Edip 
 cerning Hellen, and the meaning to t 
 
 exactly parallel, for there, as a long ellipse occurring between Srt and its verb, an 
 anaoolouthon not unnaturally ensues. An exactly similar case to that in the 
 text is quoted by Pop. fr. Plato Laches. 184, B. 
 
 )efore the Trojan war.' The words are 
 I similar expressions. Pop. quotes r^t Tp6 
 Col. V. 291. The whole question con- 
 b e attached to the mythus, is too elaborate 
 to be discussed here. The student will do well to consult Grote Pref. to 
 MistoriJ, and vol. i. p. 137, as well as the remarks with which vol. i. concludes. 
 See also Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 79. Kal irdvu oiSJ etvai — 'never 
 
 even to have had any existence at all.' In what follows. Pop. makes out the 
 construction by supplying Idvri, the phrase (car IBpti being taken adverbially, 
 so that it becomes /car' (di/ri (tributim) dXKa re Iffy-rj Kal rb neXaa-yiKbi/ Wvos 
 ■n-ap^xeaSat.. It may be questioned whether Goll. and KrUg. are not right in 
 regarding /car' ^6vrj here, and Ka&' eKdarovs a little below as virtually accusa- 
 tives and subjects of the verb. As examples of a similar accusative we have 
 '0 Nt/cfas Kara re '46vrj .... Kal ^vfnraai rdSe TrapeKeXe^ero ; and again as a 
 nominative, iv6v/j.et<r6e Ka0' cKaa-TOVs re Kal iiixiravTei. etrayofivav, 
 
 I It is a common brachylogy to find the pronoun supplied to a genitive abso- 
 lute from a word in the sentence itself, or in that preceding it (Jelf, 894) ; 
 
 I or when the gen. part, is wholly indefinite, the pronoun is without difficulty 
 
 I supplied by the mind, or the indef. words trpdyixara, dvOpcairoc, as Thuc. i. 
 116, iirayyekBivTwv (Jelf, 696, 3.) The peculiarity of the present case is the 
 change of subject from iffxvffdvraj', 'when they grew powerful, and people 
 called them in.' so. as the Britons Hengist and Horsa. The word appears 
 
 I to have acquired a technical sense, for we find it ii. 68, v. 45, and in Herod. 
 viii. 112. T'(j 6)j.iXCa (tclX^ov — 'more from intercourse than from 
 
 amy regular compact ;' p.SXkov enim Issepe sic ponit ut altera pars compara- 
 tionis intelligenda sit, viii. 81, 140. 1 Pop. and ch. 5 a, 8 c. Others, as 
 Kriig., understand ' 'mor e than i n former times' It has been suggested also 
 that jaaXXop may signify 'magis, magisque,' 'indies ssepius,' or, as we say, 
 ■ more and more every day. ' Airao-iv T|8iivaTo cKviKiJcrai, sc. 
 
 "BXXT/j'as KoKelixBai — could not win its way to become the received name for 
 all also. Thuc. repeats the same phraseology, iirl r6 fi,v9CiSes eKvenxriKdra 
 i. 21. Pop. cites an imitation by Pausanias ii. ig, 3, 7rS<ri>' ^feW/cTjire, and 
 also Tac. Ger. u. 2, ' Na tionis no men non in nomen genti s evaluisse.' 
 T£K(ji.r]pioi — fr. TSKfi.'fipLov, a word of Thucyd. own. Krtig. 
 
 (c.) ov8a(Jio€ Tois |i|jnravTas uvdjiao-ev — sc. "EXX-rjvas. Pop. But we may 
 simply say, ' has nowhere called them hy u, collective name.' Kriig. remarks 
 upon this that Ilaj'AXT/i'es II. ii. v. 530, is undoubtedly spurious. 
 Tois litT* 'Axl>Xm%. Of II. B. V. 684, Oi 5" eXxov ^Bl-qv ifS' 'EWdda 
 KaWijiimiKa, Mvp/uSdves 3' ^/caXeCcro Kal "EXXiji'es Kal ' kxami dva- 
 
 KaXet. Bl. remarks the dvh here has an intensive force, as in avairdBuv 
 &o. With this Pop. agrees, who renders it ' nominatim,' ' honoris causd.' 
 Undoubtedly this force of the word arose from the primitive meaning of 
 &vd, 'over and over again,' as such repetition would occur in encomiums. 
 It is not impossible that the primary meaning may be the true one here. 
 Of. Soph. Phil. V. 800. oi [i^v oiiSi pafj^dpovs — ' neque vero 
 
Chap. 3.J 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 harbaros quidem.' Nor, moreover^ dM he either speak of pdp^apoi, hecause 
 not as yet had even the Hellenes, JT fancy, been separated off into one counter- 
 name, the represeuta,tive of a counter, or antagonistic notion, sc. 'not Greeks. ' 
 All mankind were distinguished ii ito Greeks and barbarians — Plato, Politic, p. 
 262, D — and the former were by i ature, ipso facto, the enemies and masters of 
 the latter. See Dem. u. Mid. 14; Plato de Hep. v. p. 470, C; Isocrat. 
 Panath. c. 66, and Ar. Pol. i I, 5, Si6 ^idaiv ol Tronjrai ^ap^dpuv 5' 
 'EX\i;>/as Hpx^i" E«6s. Eurip. /ph. Aul. 1379. (The metaphor is derived 
 from a counterpoise, or equivaleit in the balance.) avTCiraXov 
 
 seems rather out of its place in the collocation, but this, as Krtig. remarksi 
 may be justified by the emphasi 1 which it requires. It is no contradiction 
 to this statement that Horn. /^. ii. 867, calls the Carians ^ap^ap6(t>(^voi, for 
 there no national appellative is I intended, — the word only has its original 
 reference to unintelligible speech. See Nitzch. Od. i. ]8o. SeeNiebuhr, vol. i. 
 pp. 2 7> 28. ' Nations whose laijguages were more nearly akin than Latin and 
 Greek, would still speak so as not to be mutually understood, and this is all 
 Herodotus was thinking of. That there was an essential affinity notwith- 
 standing the difference, is probable from the ease with which so many Pelasgic 
 nations ripened into Hellens, as well as from the existence of an element nearly 
 akin to the Greek in the Latin language, the Pelasgic origin of which seems 
 unquestionable.' Compare 'Notnen Latinum,' 'Nomen Italicum,' &.C., with 
 f? Svoiia. 
 
 (d.) 01 8' oSv ws ^KacTToi — KX-qO^VTes. After careful consideration of all that 
 has been written upon this difficult passage, I conclude that Thuc. meant to 
 say, ' The Hellenes received their name first of all by separate communities, — 
 i.e., such as spoke an Hellenic dialect intelligible to one another, were so called, 
 wherever found ; — subsequently all such were collectively embraced under one 
 great distinctive appellation, sc. Hellenes. But during neither of these periods 
 did they enter upon any great common enterprise. ' We must translate. The 
 several Hellenic communities then (o5c resuming what had been said), first so 
 called separately city by city (such, that is to say, as spoke a dialect intelligible 
 to each other), and afterwards collectively (sc. so called) did not, &c. I cannot 
 agree with Peile that ol 'iKaaroi. are the same with Karh TriXeis. The ol 
 iKatTTOi refer both to koto; iriXeis and ol ^i/j-Travres { = when they came to be 
 tmited), and the two latter expressions imply different periods rather than 
 different persons. Poppo's version is not very clear. ' Ii vera qui pro se 
 quisque et oppidatim, quotquot mutuo se intelligebant, et omnes v/na postea 
 Hellenes sunt vocati.' On ihs 'iKaaroi, cf. Jelf, § 7i4) 2 0, § 870, 4, and on 
 odv, Jelf, § 737, 3. In the existing state of linguistic and ethnological science, 
 it was not unnatural for Thucydides, and Herodotus i. 57, to imagine that the 
 Pelasgic and Hellenic were generioally distinct dialects, and that consequently 
 the races who spoke them were generioally distinct also. The contrary is now 
 known to be the case. Head, as above, Niebuhr, vol. i. p. 27. 
 o-TpareCav may surely be considered as a cognate accusative after ^vvffKBov, as 
 a-rparelas i^ijXSov, c. 15, without supposing, as some do, an eUipse of eis. 
 See the instances quoted, Jelf, § S58, r. ■irX€Cw is Attic Greek for 
 
 TvKeiov, as Eurip. Herac. 258, toO OeoC TrXeiu cj>povG>v, Bl. It seems to be 
 analogous to XP^^"'" XPV'^^O'h ^"0. cognat. So ifKeicTa xp^^^'h '^- '■°5- i^h"' 
 
8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 &o. xRV'^S^'h Kriig. Translate, ' because by this time they ijoere making more 
 use of the sea.' 
 
 Chaptek IV. — (a.) MCvcos. Read Grote, vol. i. ch. 12. ' Cretan Legends. 
 Minos and his Family,' Thirlwall. i. p. r44. iraXaCraTos iKTi\n-a.ro — like 
 
 the Latin ' primus adeptus est' — ' was the first person whom we hear of as having 
 acquired,' Kriig. says Thuoyd. preferred the form Tra\atTaTos, though most 
 MSS. here, andini. 18, haveTraXaiiraTos. ' EXXi)Vikt)S, — Trplrrspov yap 
 
 Ka/DiKT) iKaXeiTo, Schol. ICdpas l|e\d<ras. Herod, (i. 171) appears 
 
 to contradict this, by asserting that the Carians or Leleges lived in the islands 
 under the protection of Minos, and did not pay tribute. But Thuoyd. qualifies 
 hia own statement by i(j> 6(Xov ^Stivaro, and we may suppose with Arn. that 
 Minos treated the Carians very mildly, not expelling them altogether from their 
 homes, but allowing them to amalgamate with his own settlers. The Dorian 
 and Ionian colonies at a later period completely cleared the islands, sweeping 
 away all vestiges of the ancient race and their language. Isocrates ascribes 
 this exploit to the Athenians, Panegyric. 0. 16, tcls Ku/cXdSas vqtTov^, irepl Ss 
 ^yhovTo TToXKal irpay^are'LaL, Kara r^v Mivoj tou 'Kprp-bs bvvaaTeiav, ra&ras rh 
 reXevTatov virb Kapwj' Karexo/x^vas, ^K^aXovres iKeivovs, ovk i^ibubaaadai- ras 
 X^pa^ ^rbXiMfiaaVj aXKit. to^s p^dXiffra ^iov rwv 'EXXtJj'Wj/ deop,4vov$ Karc^Kicrav ds 
 auras. T<5 Te X'go-TiKov — 'Pirac?/,' in the abstract. Pop. and others 
 
 have noticed that the re here, as elsewhere in Thucyd., appends sentences to 
 propositions already complete, more commonly than in other writers. Yet 
 even here the appended clause is a sort of epexegesis, or carrying out of what 
 precedes, the suppression of piracy being part of the same act as the expulsion 
 of the Carians — tr. ^ and therein cleansed the sea of piracy.' See on the whole 
 question, oh. ix, a. Toi Vevai. The infinitive with the article in 
 
 the genitive to express the final cause of an action. See Jelf, § 492, who 
 quotes Cgesar de B, G. iv.. Naves dejiciendi operis a barbaris missse. The old 
 grammars supposed an ellipse of iveKi, Matth. 540-1. Tr, for the sake of his 
 revenues coming in to him more freely. ' Sic et iireicripxardaL et iinr\dv,' Pop., 
 and of. ii. 13, wpoaiovTuv. There is a similar use of the Gen. in N. T. Cf. 
 iirLareiXai. rod dTr^xetr^at, Acts xv. 20. 
 
 Chaptek V. — (a.) [laXXov — 'i.e. p,aXKov rj irphripov. Cf. v. 8r; viii. 9,' 
 Pop. ainav ttSwaTuTdTojv. The negative here is a privative, as 
 
 in oi p-iyaka, ch. i, av^tp ov p.^yas, viii. 100. But ' this privative force really 
 belongs to the original negative notion, as may be seen when these words are 
 resolved into their full form, as iviip Ss oi /x^yas iarlv,' Jelf, § 738, 2. i. The 
 whole expression is what is called a 'Litotes,' i.e. a figure of speech where less 
 is said than is meant, and therefore, perhaps, as in Irony, more implied. In 
 such cases, the negative, instead of being prefixed to the noun, precedes its 
 article, or governing preposition. rots do-9€v^<ri Tpo4>iis — ' support 
 
 for the needy.' Krug. collects several passages where 6 i-aBev^^ means ' the 
 poor man,* as opposed to 'the rich.' Of these one is sufiicient, 6 r' d.(76evri% 
 TrXoiiffios re, Eur. Supp. 433. Karol KcSjias olKov(i4vas. This may 
 
 either mean (i) that the towns were little better than villages, i.e. that 
 they consisted of straggling houses, constraoted upon no regular plan, or (2) that 
 
Chap. 5.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES- 9 
 
 the towns actually consisted of an aggregate of villages, as indeed was the case 
 with Sparta, cf. ch. 10 a. This Pop. thinks is confirmed by ch. x. ' Any society 
 of men united together as one Commonwealth under the same laws is called 
 in G-reek 7r6\is. Thus a TriXis may be a mere collection of huts in a forest ; or, 
 like Lacedsemon itself, a number of straggling houses unenclosed by walls,' 
 Am. Tov pCo\) t!)V irXetoTov liroi.oSvTo — 'they were in the habit of 
 
 making the greater part of their livelihood;' the English idiom coincides with 
 this use of iroieladai, which is by no means uncommon. Kriig. compares awb 
 yeupyias rbv jSiov -rroLeiffdaL, Xen. (Econ. vi. The younger scholar will observe 
 that /3£os is not fii?; — animal life — but social, and moral life, or, as here, the 
 means of living. aiir\vvi]v 'ixovros — ' not yet involving any shame,' 
 
 i carrying with it any shame.' The phrases <l>6l>vov t'xeiy, ^sch. Prom. 865, 
 ^ofj,(pr]i/ ^xeiv, Pind. Isth. v. 61, are similar, upon -which Hermann {ad Vig. p. 
 753), remarks. In his locutionibus omnibus ^x^'" retinet suam vim, sic ut notet 
 -: — ' conjunctuni quid cum quo esse,' quoted by Krtig. 01 iraXaCoi 
 
 Twv iroiTiTcov — ' The old among {i. e. of) the poets = the old poets. ' See for the 
 fact Od. iii. v. 71, where Nestor asks the question of Telemachus. Hymn 
 Apoll.-v. 451. Indeed, the custom belongs naturally to a rude state of society. 
 Csesar, B. G. vi. 21, says of the Germans, ' Latrocinia nullam habent infamiam, 
 quae extra fines cujusque civitatis fiunt.' Similar statements have been made 
 concerning the North American Indians and other savage tribes. Zevort | 
 instances the Eazzias of the African Arabs, and we might refer to the Scotch / 
 ' Harryings.' Vide Lay of the Last Minstrel, William of Deloraine, &c. I 
 
 KaXws. Well rendered by Bloomf. ' handsomely,' in the sense of ' dexterously ;' 
 as handsome is derived from the low German 'handsaem, ' 'handy.' He also 
 aptly quotes Spenser (given in Johnson's Diet.) ' under it he may convey any 
 fit pillage that oometh handsomely in his way.' The Schol. hag eicre^ws, (pCkav- 
 dpdnras; Dale has 'cleverly,' Engelman, 'geschiokt;' Zevort, 'Les pirates 
 habiles.' 
 
 (5.) rds Tril<rT€is k. t.X. Some (e.g. Bothe and Owen) have very naively 
 objected that it is not the poet who asks the question,-as though a writer 
 were not in such matters to be identified with the characters of his work, — ' in 
 the enquiries made from those who landed anywhere, always putting the same ques- 
 tion, ' or, in their questions . . . alvjays asking. See Kara, Tricmv, ch. 1 36 ; 
 Jelf, § 583, 74. When in ch. 10 Thucyd. says "O/nipos ireirolr}Ke k.t.\. he 
 does not mean that Homer made the Greek fleet. el elo-iv — transi- 
 
 tion to the oratio recta. See Jelf, 886, d. Here oiK-dveiditovTOjv is to be taken 
 as one word — making no reproach of it, cf. ch. i a. Kriig. remarks that, owing 
 to this close connexion, we have re-ote, and not oiSre. lirijieX^s — 
 
 those whose business it might happen to be that they should know—i. e. because 
 their interest required it. Bl. quotes ols iTniJ.e\is ravra elSivai., Xen. Mem. 
 iv. 7. 
 
 (c.) TM TTttXaCcp TpoTTCp. Most cditors understand this of piracy and free- 
 booting. Krug. observes that we have a reference to t^s iraXalas Xi)crre/as 
 immediately afterwards, and that the words iraKalif Tp6ir<^ vip-erai. are not very 
 appropriate for the description of a social habit, a mode of living. He therefore 
 believes the allusion to be to rara Kci/xas otKcicrBai. AoKpovs— 
 
 'AKOpvavtts. Grote, vol. ii. p. 388, says, ' These were undoubtedly the most 
 
lO NOTES ON THUCYDIUES. L^ook I. 
 
 backward members of the Hellenic aggregate. Though not absolutely without 
 a central town, they lived dispersed in villages, retiring, when attacked, to in- 
 accessible heights, perpetually armed, and in readiness for aggression and 
 plunder wherever they found an opportunity. There is no infoi-mation respect- 
 ing them from the commencement of the historical period down to the Persian 
 war.' Thuo. i. 6; iii. 94. rb <nSi\po<i>opiUr6a,i—' The wearing of 
 
 weapons' — i. e. continuously, and when engaged in peaceful occupations. Bl. 
 quotes from Dr. Clark — 'Among the Circassians the labours of the plough 
 become a warlike occupation, and the sower goes to cast his grain attended by 
 his sabre and his fusil. ' 
 
 Chapter VI. — (a.) €0-i8iipo<|)dp6i. Kriig. says that we have the act. voice, 
 and not the middle, as in last chapter, because i) "BAXas cannot be conceived of 
 as wearing weapons for itself; — 'for its personal protection.' 
 d4>pdKTOvs olK'rio-sis — ' domicilia non munita.' Sunt TriKeis dTelxi-cToi.. Cf. vi. 85. 
 Pop. There seem to be no historical grounds for supposing that dwelling- 
 homes ever were fenced. The position of ^vv/jdri must be noticed. ' They made 
 their daily way of living habitually with arms' — ^vvriBi} is what Dr. Donaldson 
 calls a tertiary predicate, Gr. Or. p. 200. This nomenclature will be elsewhere 
 discussed. Kriig. makes the whole equivalent to ri dUura, ^v iiroLTjaavTO ficB' 
 StXoiv, ^vvriSris ^v. This would make ^vv^St] a simple predicate, which does not 
 seem to be what the author exactly meant. Jelf, § 458, 2, seems to express it 
 more correctly. 'They made a habit of wearing arms in their daily life.' 
 o-t](Jietov IcttI TaiJTa ttjs 'E\\. 'in oiiTu vni6\ieva. ' These parts of Greece, iy 
 being so inhabited still, afford a proof.' Dale's version — ' Those parts of Greece 
 which still live in this way, are a proof from want of attention to the absence 
 of the article before veii6fj,ev!i, is incorrect. kv rots irpuToi. An idiom 
 
 much discussed. Jelf, § 444, a, considers roh as an instance of the article used 
 for (or rather retaining its original force of) the demonstrative pronoun, and 
 compares iK roO, hence, irpb too, before, &c. ; yet translates not 'horum,'but 
 ' omnium primi.' In § 139, 4, he seems to adopt the explanation given below 
 as that of Arnold. Matthise, § 290, also says that the article appears to be 
 used as a pronoun in the phrase iv Toh, and draws two conclusions, (i) that the 
 formula iv toU stands by itself, and is not to be joined with the superlative 
 following (2) that rots is neuter because the superlative even in the fern, is 
 sometimes used with it. He subjoins that hardly any explanation of the 
 phrase can be given to suit all passages, since usage has given to it a greater 
 extension than it originally had. Arnold's explanation is that of Hemsterh. ad 
 Luc, t. i. p. 170, i.e. h Tofs is to be coupled with the dative superlative 
 (understood) of the word which stands in the superlative and nominative — e. g. 
 if TOis [TT/Jcirois] wpCiToi. — 'first among the first,' i..e. the very first. Kriig. and 
 Madvig think that the participle was originally supplied, and that when in 
 rots came to be used adverbially the gender of the Toh was no longer con- 
 sidered. Kriig. accordingly interprets this passage iv tois [Ka.TaBeiJ,ivoi.s] irpiiiroL 
 KaridevTo. Hennann noticing the idiom {ad Vig. p. 765) explains, iv toU roioii- 
 Tois offiri, fidXiara toioutos — 'in iis qiice talia sunt maxima talis.' Yet certainly 
 in several places where the phrase occurs, a qualified, and not an exaggerated 
 superlative is required. Cf. iii. 17, 81 ; vii. 24, and Arnold seems right in 
 
Chap. 6.j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. II 
 
 translating— 'amo«£f the first,' 'one of the first'—' hut we suppose not neces- 
 sarily the, very first,' says Peile. We may doubt whether this be not the very 
 meaning to be assigned to iv toU Tpdirois as contradistinguished from iv rots 
 irpioToi. avEi|Jilv^ — as the Latin 'distinctus' refers primarily to a 
 
 loose method of wearing the dress, and is therefore applied to a lax and luxurious 
 mode of life— N. B. the position of the article with the noun, and of. supra 
 ivf-rjOri. KoX 01 Trpio-^inpoi .... (jjopoOvres. Difficulties have 
 
 been made concerning this passage, because a luxurious mode of living was 
 no reason why they should cease to wear linen tunics, but the contrary. 
 Thuoyd. meant to say that the wearing of such tunics up to a late date was 
 a proof of the existence of greater luxury among the Athenians. For the 
 short period which had elapsed since the cessation of the practice was a proof 
 of its long continuance, and its long continuance was a proof of luxury. We 
 may join Sth rt> a^podtairov to oi iroXis XP<>''°^ iireiSij and tr., ' And the elder 
 members of the wealthy classes among them, not till very lately {owmg to their 
 luxurious way of living) left off wearing,' <bc. oi iroXis xpi^vos 
 
 ^ir£i8'f| must be compared with oi TcoWh ir-rj iwuSi], at the close of the eh. and 
 6fi T d0' o5 ch. 14, whence it is plain that the phrase was used parenthetically, 
 and almost adverbially, like our own 'it's not long since,' 'it's no great while.' 
 A writer, speaking of us, might say, 'Their older men, not till very lately 
 (owing to their old fashioned habits) left oflf wearing pig tails.' Kriig. takes 
 5ia t6 d^poS. in clese connexion with (popoDm-es, meaning, I suppose, ' and it's 
 no long time since their old men left off wearing, from luxurious motives, linen 
 tunics. But this, with the existing collocation, seems to me unnatural. 
 avTois. Kriig. well remarks is not the same thing here as airSii'. Am. 
 excellently expresses the difference in his version. It is not long since they saw 
 their elderly men leave off, &c. Kpa^i\ov. The exact nature of 
 
 this mode of dressing the hair seems to have puzzled the Scholiasts, who might 
 reasonably have been expected to know more about it than we. Some imagine 
 it to have consisted in rolling the hair from the temples round the head in the 
 shape of a crown. The verb dva^eludai, however, seems to indicate that the 
 hair was gathered up to the top of the head, and there fastened upon a pin 
 made like a grasshopper, so forming a sort of horn — and Suidas indeed ex- 
 pressly says as much. Winckelman admits that it must have been a bunch of 
 hair formed in some such way, and resembling a bunch of ivy hemes. And 
 the etymology, Kpto^vXos for Kopvix^vKos, seems to indicate this. We cannot 
 suppose that it was nothing more than gathering the hair at the back of the head 
 as may be seen in the Greek statues, for this would be nothing distinctive or 
 remarkable. See Diet, of Or. and Rom. Antiq. for mode of dressing the hair, 
 under ' Coma.' The heads of ApoUo or Niobe there given may illustrate a 
 Kpa^iXos. Aristopb. refers to t^e custom, Nub. v. 984, Equit. 1331, and 
 Virgil, Ciris, v. 127. Mitchell on Arist. Yesp. 230, supposes that the Athenians 
 imitated the Egyptians, who Wore the chafer, their favourite symbol, in a 
 similar manner. The custom, Kriig. adds, continued up to the battle of 
 Marathon. Cf. Atkenceus, vi. 512, who quotes Heracleides Ponticus, 'AXovpyij 
 fiivydp riiiwlaxovTO l/jidTia, ttoikiKovs S'inriSvvov xirfflj/as, Kopip-^ovs S' dvaSoipevoi 
 rSiv TpiX'^") XP""'""' rkmyas irepl ri p.eTonrov Kal rds Kdpas i<popovi>. Kal oSrot 
 ^irav ol toioOtoi, oi rijp iv MapaOdvi yiKrjo-ai^es p-dxv- Lite the violet crown, 
 
I a ITOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 it was intended to symbolize their indigenous origin — both the violet and the 
 grasshopper being regarded as the children of the earth. Bl. and GoU. assert 
 that wearing linen garments could not in itself constitute luxui-y ; and that 
 these must have been the ttoIkiKoi mentioned by Athenseus xii. p. 512, and by 
 ^lian, Yar. His. iv. 22, 'embroidered dresses,' probably boixowed from 
 Egypt. But Kriig. observes that there was a ' luxus ' even in wearing linen 
 tunics, which were very costly [Voss, Mythol. Br. iii. p. 262, flf.], and such a 
 custom would necessarily be considered effeminate, for we learn from Herod, 
 [v. 87] that these tunics were worn by the Athenian women. 
 «v^po-£i. The old reading was iv Sp<rei ; but the editors now universally give 
 the former, which is contained in several MSS., and is supported by analogy, 
 as it is from ivkptrw, old fut. of ivelpa. It also occurs in several later writers, 
 as ^lian, Procopius, &c. See Bloomf. owj)' o5 Kal "Iiovwv. 
 
 0. MUUer {Dorians § 26) says that, on the contrary, the Athenians borrowed 
 the custom from their Asiatic brethren. And Zevort (the French translator) per- 
 tinently remarks, 'II est peu probable, en effet, qua une epoque oil les A th Aniens 
 vivaient disperses dans les bourgades Isoldes, et livrds au travaux des champs, 
 ils eussent dej^ adopte un costume qui suppose tout a la fois beaucoup de 
 loisir, et des richesses que le Commerce seul pouvait procurer.' See however 
 on the other side Bekker's Excursus in the Charicles. 
 
 (c.) |j.CTpCa lo-fl-i^TL 'A sober style of dress, and suitable or conformable to 
 the present manners, the LacediZTrionians were the first to adopt., or, take into 
 use.' This Miiller confirms at length. The Lacoiiian himation was worn the 
 whole year through by the younger people, and even by the Laconizing party at 
 Athens. See vol. ii. p. 266. 01 rd y,tli,a> KtKTT\f.evoi. This 
 
 certainly seems to indicate that Thucyd. did not believe in the existence of 
 equality in property at Lacedaemon. Indeed the opinion respecting the re. 
 division of property by Lycurgus, and the banishment of gold and silver from 
 the state, rests upon the authority of Plutarch, and, as is well known, he is by 
 no means' trustworthy. The reader should by all means consult Grote [ii. 
 520 — 525] on the other side. 
 
 (d.) eYu(jivw9T](rav. The story runs that Orsippus of Megara accidentally 
 dropped his girdle in the race, and was consequently victorious. His ex- 
 ample was purposely followed by Acanthius the Lacedaemonian, and hence 
 arose the practice of running without girdles. But as these circumstances 
 are supposed to have occurred in the fifteenth Olympiad, it is evident that 
 great latitude must be allowed to the expression 01) iroKka, Ittj. Or we 
 may adopt the hypothesis of Bochk, [/mcW^J*. i. p. 555 — quoted by Pop.], 
 that the runners in the Diaulus immediately followed the example of Orsippus, 
 but that the other athletes, to whom the belt was no practical inconve- 
 nience, did not discard its use until shortly before the time of Thucydides. 
 Krtig. suggests that Thucyd. is not speaking in reference to the Olympic, 
 but to the other public games. Miiller, in his Donans, is wrong in saying 
 that Thucydides is contradicted by Plato Rep. v. p. 452, for Plato does not 
 assert that the Cretans were the first to leave oif their girdles, but simply 
 that they were the first to commence gymnastic exercises ; ijpxovro rCiv 
 •yvp,va(rluv Trpwrov p.iv K/jijtes, ?7reiTO 5^ AaKeSai/nij/ioi — and that yv/j.ytis does 
 pot necessarily mean naked, see note in Sheppard's Tlieophrastus, ch. xxii. 
 
.Chap. 7. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 13 
 
 P- 204. es TO c|>avcpdv. Poppo's exposition appears best, AiroSivres 
 
 Kal es rb <f>a.vspbv irpoeXBdvTes. Such a 'sensus prsegnans ' of the participle 
 is by no means uncommon — there is no design implied in the expression. 
 
 Atira ' Some think that X£7ra is the dative from rb Xma, gen. — aos 
 
 dat — ai', the p being by every day pronunciation shortened to XiVa, and then 
 i\aiov is the adj. of i\da, so that Xitt' iXalif is 'vfith olive oil,' but the quantity 
 and the elision render this very doubtful.' Jelf, § 113, 10. It looks much 
 more like an ace. from Afi^s, gen. XiTris, which may have existed as well as 
 Xt/36s. Hence XiirTo^aL, and XeKL/x/xhos 'ready anointed for the conibat^ and 
 XeXififiki/oi iidxn^, S. T. C. v. 380, ' eager for the fray.' Siatwuara 
 
 ' belts across the body.' This may throw some light on crT^pvoiv Sia/ixd^ P. F. v. 
 65. Jo-Tiv ots. Jelf, §817, 8. deXa rCeerai Kal K. T. X, 
 
 Kriig. writes that the construction ought to have been &6\uiv rcde/xhav sine Kai, 
 for Thucydides does not mean to tell us that the barbarians had games, but that 
 they wore girdles at them. This is true : yet there are many cases in which 
 Kal is not a simple copulative. We may express it in English — 'And even now 
 the barbarians have games where they wear the belt.' 
 
 (c.) oiioidTpoira Si.aiTu|jicvov. This Jelf, § 552, f. resolves into the adverbial 
 accusative like fiirpia ^iji/, Ion 632 ; oiS' oXtjBti i^uxri, Plat. Rep. 495. 0. 
 Kriig. connects iroWd with bp.oi.6Tpotra, and explains upon the principle of 
 a cognate accusative, so that dtatrCiVTaL ttoWci, 5tair7)p.aTa ofioLbTpoira is 
 equivalent to TroXXa Stair^/xara & dtairuvrac ofiotbrpoTrd icTrcv. He compares 
 arrlTraXa yavfiaxetv vii. 34, 5-7 r, 4. For the fact he refers to Herod, vi. 58. 
 
 Chapteb vii. — (a.) irXw'iiicoTspwv Svtwv. The plural agrees with a noun 
 understood, implying some indefinite notion. So in English we say, ' Things 
 are looking better,' and so on. Eender, therefore, ' When things began to admit 
 more of navigation,' — i.e., ' when navigation became more general,' said not of 
 a pai-tioular case, but generally, Cf. TrXui/xiire/ja iyivero, ch. 8, and dSivara 
 ?iv, ch. I, which latter means that the subject comes under the category of things 
 impossible, and is thus more general and indefinite than the sing. dSOvaTou ; 
 tr. one of things impossible, rather than, in more positive terms, an impossible 
 thing. IlXcii'/ios, says Kiiig., ia from the Ionic TrXcioj as irXwifu i. 13, 4. 
 Bekker has irXiiip-os, 'but Lobeck ad Phryn. (writes T. K. A.), after showing 
 that i!-\ili'i.iJ.os occurs j?Esoh. defalsd Leg. p. 337, and Theoprast. Ohar. iii. says. 
 Si qua est igitur lectionum discrepantia Atticis utique prior scriptura adserenda 
 videtur.' ircpiouo-tas. This is of course in exact contrast to 
 
 irepiovalav x/jij/idrwj' oiiK ^xovres, ch. 2, which see, avTois Tots 
 
 o.l'yiaXois — the beach itself, — i.e., the very beach, dircXdp.pavov — •- 
 
 ' cut them off from the main land,' so., by a wall across the neck of the isthmus. 
 This implies the subsequent occupation of the ground, Cf. iv. 45. iv. 113. iv. 
 102, See the case of Potidsea and its walls, i. 56. ^Kao-ra — ' in 
 
 each several case,' 'relatum ad incolas, ut paulo post dvifKuxixivoi.' Pop. 
 dvTwrYovo-av — or perhaps with Kriig. and Poppo's conjecture, the pros, part, 
 d.vTl(7x°^^^^' '^^ construction I should compare with ^k toO eirl TrXeccrToif 
 oSffO!/, ch. 2, where see note. Tr. on account of the long continuance (or wide 
 prevalence) of piracy. dvTix^iv is to hold out in the sense which we give to 
 j;he word as equivalent to continue. Cf. with Pop, ii. 64, vii. 71. The reading 
 
14 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 of many MSS., i.e., &vTi,<rxov(rac is bad, thougliGoU. would fain defend it. Por 
 this would imply that after long resistance to piracy, many ancient cities 
 changed their sites, — a fact of which there is no historical evidence whatever. 
 On piracy in general, see the stories which Herod, commences his History and 
 Harm. Pol. Antiq.,%Yi. 6, 7. ov-6oXd(ro-ioi — like ou-ja^7aXa, ch. i, 
 
 to be taken as a, single term. So we say * non-residents,' 'non-combatants.' 
 ' Who dwelt on the sea-side without being seamen.' Hobbes. kAtu) and &va 
 as the prepositions Kari, and Avh respectively denote, 'down on the sea-coast' 
 and ' up the country.' Xenophon's ^»a6asis is an instance familiar to every 
 one. dvuKio-^^voi — 'situate up the cowntry,' There is no necessity 
 
 to read d.vii)Ki<r/j,hai., for cities and their inhabitants are frequently confused 
 together in construction : vi. 88, 94 ; viii. 64. Pop. refers to dmiKli^ecrSai, 
 ' emigrare in regionem a mari remotam,' i. 58, and viii. 31. 
 
 Chapter Till. — {a.) Kapes Kal ^oCvtKts. Concerning the Carians, cf. 
 ch. iv. and Herod, i. 171. On the occupation of Thasus by the Phoenicians, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 44 ; vi. 47 ; also iv. 147 ; vi. 44. uKio-av. Some MSS. have 
 
 i^KTiaav, which Krtlg. in his note appears to prefer, though he prints i^maav in 
 the text. He compares i^Kriaav ttiv 2iKe\lav iv. 6, ' dwelt in Sicily.' 
 A^Xov. See the account given, iii. 104. BrgKuv dvaipeScuruv. 
 
 BfiK-rj is properly the 'grave,' that which contains the urn, or sarcophagus. But 
 the verb ivaipia is not improperly used, as the earth would of necessity be 
 taken up and carried off. (Krtig.) Or we may say, ' when the graves were taken 
 up,' meaning their contents. v-rrkf {jfiio-v — ' above half.' This is 
 
 an instance of the omission of the defining article in a very familiar expression, 
 such as, indeed, is common in our own language. We say ' in town,' ' above 
 bridge, ' ' below bar, ' and the like. The same was the case in Greek with h 
 TieKoirowfidif, ch. 28 ; 'Iit6/i6s (of Corinth) ; BacriXeis (of Persia) ; IIAXis, 
 "Aypos, Xirovdal. Krtig. defends the same expression, iwep ij/iLo-v too fiXXou 
 CTparei/iaTos, Xen. Anab. v. 10, where Schneider would insert the article. 
 Ktihner, Gr. Or. § 484, mentions several such words, ' which occur frequently 
 in common speech, and are thus so generally in use, that even without the 
 article they can express a defined and individualized object.' Cf. ch. 16. See 
 more in Schsefer's note, CE. T. v. 640. Add Kipas, ch. 48 b, and viKpovs, ch. 
 54 b, and cf. 89 c, 10 1 b, 136 c. fvaa-itvrt^ . . . ^vvTe6a)i|i.^VT|. This 
 
 is generally interpreted with Pop., Agniti habitu armorum, sc. armaturd, quippe 
 qua: cum, iis sepulta esset, ^vvTe6aiip.ivQ seems to me to stand almost parentheti- 
 cally, expressing the reason why they were able to examine them, recognised 
 from the garniture of their armour, inasmuch as it was found in the grave with 
 them, and from the mode of interment, the same as thai which they now employ. 
 GoU., with several MSS., has ^vvreda/xpihot, which makes equally good sense, 
 from the fact of their being buried along with their arms. But the two nom. plur. 
 participles are in this case awkward, and it does not seem certain that the custom 
 was confined to the Carians. Vide Soph. Ajax, v. 1409. For the peculiarities of 
 the Cretan armour, see Herod, i. 171. They invented 'crests' (X60ous) : the 
 interior double handle, or double hand for the shield (6xavov), which took the 
 place of the old single strap {Te\dp.ojp), and what may almost be called armorial 
 bearings, — i.e., (n/jueio, crests or devices drawn upon the shield. The Schol. 
 
Chap. 9.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 15 
 
 says the Plicenieians were recognised because they were buried with their faces 
 to the west. But Pop. argues this was no sufficient distinction, as other 
 nations did the same thing, — e.g., the Athenians. He refers to Plutarch, 
 Solon. X. ; -:E1. Var. His. v. 14. 
 
 (h.) Karao-TilvTos 8^ — The S^ is in apodosi 'inquam,' and (as often) resumes 
 the narrative from ch. 4. KaKovp'yoi. — 'Evil-doers,' sc. pirates. 
 
 Sreirsp. The use of wep as a sufSx seems to indicate that especial stress is to 
 be laid on the word to which it is joined. &^, who; Sirirep, the very man who : 
 el, if: direp, if, as we may assume: Sre, when; SreTrep, just when, at the very 
 time when. See the note on eMp, ch. 59 b. ' The word is rare. See Hes. Theog. 
 291. Herod. V. 99; vi. 106' (T. K. A.) and II. iv. 259. t?|v Kxtjo-iv. 
 
 Kriig. explains KTi&fievoi xpv/J.a.'ra. It would be better to point out to the tiro 
 how the termination in iris indicates the actual process of acquisition. Cf. the 
 same phrase, ch. 1 3. PcpawSrepov (j>kodv — ' dwelt with more stabi- 
 
 lity,' this has reference to the pieTa.va(TTdaeis before mentioned, ch. 2. 
 irXoDo-iwTfpoi eavTMV. In phrases of this sort the subject, instead of being 
 compared with anything else, is compared with itself at another time or 
 place. All the grammars furnish abundant instances. See Matth. § 460, and 
 Jelf, § 782 g, where, however, instead of translating Seivdraros <ravTov, 'when 
 you so entirely surpassed yourself,' it would be more accurate to say, ' wh^n you 
 were at your hesf — 'when you reached the highest point in cleverness you ever 
 did reach.' l<|>U|j,£Vot •ydp. These words convey the reason for the 
 
 statement ^e^aidrepov (§kovv. SovXeCav. KrUg. renders this word 
 
 Unteniriirfigheii.' 'Subordinate position,' for Slavery, in the strict sense of the 
 term, was, he says, unknown to the most ancient Greeks ; he refers to 
 Athenseus, vi. p. 264 [Tauchnitz, p. 77]; Herod, vi. 137; Diet. Antiq. 1034. 
 Trpoo-eiroioBvTO — 'tried to bring over to themselves,' a word of which Thucyd. is 
 fond. See i. 57, and particularly the note on iii. ch. 47 a. 
 
 (c.) Kal iv ToiJTai t$ Tpoiru — Kriig. translates ' Yerhdltnisse'- — 'mutual rela- 
 tions,' cf i. 97, ^c o'l(f Tpbirif Kariarri. (iaXXov — 'more than here- 
 tofore.' See note, ch. 3 b, ' for perhaps their former relations were not alto- 
 gether extinct, ' Krtig. 
 
 Chaptee IX.— 'A-ya|j.^|j.V(DV . . . irpoBxav . . . o4k 6,y(av-a.y&p<u.. The mean- 
 ing obviously is, Agamemnon, in my opinion, collected the armament, because he 
 surpassed his contemporaries in power, and not so much because he tooJc with 
 him &c. There is nothing more important for junior students to observe 
 than the distinction between the participle with and without the article. 
 With the article it is simply identified with the subject of the verb. With- 
 out the article it expresses the cause or condition under which the verb is 
 predicated of the subject, and may be always given in English by introducing 
 'when,' 'because,' 'since,' 'seeing that,' and the like. 6 raSra vpd^as air4- 
 Bavev, ' The man who did this was hilled.' irpd^as ravTO. dirieavev, ' He was 
 hilled since he did this.' See as parallel irpotxorre% ch. 18, note b. Jelf's 
 long remarks upon the participle, § 68 r, may be read for illustrations. 
 Kal va.VTt.Ktf T6 ft|ia k.t. X. Keiske proposed to substitute 5e for re, and 
 thereby hangs the whole controversy concerning the meaning and usage of 
 the latter word. Dr. Peile has devoted great pains to its elucidation f ■* 
 
1 6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 App. C], and his conclusions seem to me the most reasonable which I have 
 met with upon the subject. It will, however, be necessary for the student 
 to study the dissertation for himself, as it cannot be reproduced here in any 
 abridgement which would be intelligible. Let it suffice to quote one or two 
 sentences in which he states results. ' re serves to connect the several items 
 which make up the detail of a poetic picture, so that they impress the mind 
 with the perception of but one continuous subject or group.' 're introduces a 
 new term which is but an enlargement upon one leading (former) term, or 
 train of thought' — ' in point of fact, it communicates nothing more than the 
 mind has already associated with something preceding — it is an indication of 
 some previous perception, and as long as the mind is associating only a 
 series of particulars included under the same general perception, so long it 
 expresses its thoughts by re . . . re, hence its use as an affix to the relative 
 pronoun, and in such phrases as oZos re. ' I will give one remarkable case in 
 order to fix this doctrine concerning re on the student's memory. Soph. Aj. 
 1 3 10, Trjs uris vir^p yuvaiKos, ^ toO trou $' o^aifiovos 'K^yuj. Here Hermann 
 substitutes y for 8'. But the line contains a sneer which Agam. properly 
 in the next line calls an afexicros \6yos ; it means that he doubts whether 
 she might not be called wife to both — on lehalf of you/r wife, or, must I say, 
 your irother' s jointly — where re blends the two men in the same relation to 
 one woman. The student may also be assisted in arriving at a conception of 
 what is meant by attention to such passages as the difficult one (ii. 62, ad finem), 
 T?;i/ rdXfiav 7? ^6ve(ns ix^P^'^^P^^ Trap^Xerat, iXwiSi re ^<7<tov TnaTeiet, where the 
 clause introduced by re does not contain a separate, additional idea, but is rather 
 the epexegesis of that expressed in the first. Tr. not — and also trusts less to 
 Hope, but, in thai it trusts less to Hope, or, cmd viithal trusts less to Hope, 
 The student should also read the remarks of Dr. Donaldson, who connects 
 re etymologically with Kev. New Cratylus, % 149, 186, 195. Peile's version 
 of the present passage is, concurrently therewith (re fi/ia) he became master, 
 &c. Tw8dp€w. The authorities for this compact entered 
 
 into by the suitors of Helen to secure her to. the one whom she might 
 select, are, ApoUodorus, iii. 10. 9 ; Pausanias, iii. 10. 9. See also Eurip, Jph. 
 Aul. 51-80; Soph. Ajttx, 1 100. Kriig. conjectures that the use of the name 
 Peloponnesus may have originated in the poetry of Tyrtseus, from whom he 
 quotes the line, eipetav II^XoTros I'lja-ov a<j>i.K6ixe8a. The whole fragment (Strabo, 
 viii. 5. p. 362) may be seen in Grote. 
 
 (5.) ne\oTrovvT)er£uv may depend upon o! SfSey/ihoi.—' those of the Pelopon- 
 nesians that have received,' or it may follow o-a^^crraTa — 'the clearest accowats 
 of Peloponnesian affairs.' Am. thinks that the absence of the article and the 
 use of TleKoTraiivrialoiv for IleXoTrowTjo-iaKfiv militate against the last. Neither 
 objection is fatal, but both are strong enough together to make most editors 
 prefer the first interpretation. Poppo finally (ed. 2da.) adheres to the last, in- 
 fluenced by the imitations of Dio Cass. p. 8, (jiaaiv oi rk iTa(p^o-TaTa rSiv Sa^fc 
 vl^lv eiddres; and Dion. Hal. Ant. Rom. p. 888, oi ri 'Poi/i.aluv a-a<p4o-TaTa ^fijra- 
 Kores. It may be doubted whether this be a sound principle, for, ' imitatores 
 servumpecus' are likely to imitate a peculiarity simply because it is one, without 
 much investigation as to its origin. I incline to the opinion of Pop. (large 
 edition) that ri has been misplaced, following, as it ought to do, the to, in 
 
Chap. 9.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 17 
 
 <ra<f>k<XTa.Ta, the transcriber made some confusion. eirr)XiiTr]v i!vTO i^a% 
 
 <rx«Cv — Foreigner though he was, nevertheless had the naming of the country; or, as 
 GoU. and Arn., gave occasion to the naming of the country. This sense might be 
 thought to require Tra/jatrx"". But the passages quoted by Goll. on a-yavdKTrjinv 
 ?X") ii- 4i> and by Arn. iii. 82, iv. i, Herod, v. loi, vi. 86, certainly show that 
 he is justified in saying that ^x^'" is sometimes ' in se habere causam et rationem,' 
 and hence ' ansam dare alicui rei.' Pop. has ' ohtimtisse hunc honorem utregio 
 cognomen ab eo acciperet.' iTrt\Kin]V — fr. iirepxa/iai, i.e., from the 3rd 
 
 per. sing, of an old Perf., as we have tj\v<ti.s from the 2nd. .(Esch. Agam. v. 243. 
 The form is unusual (but seeXen. (Econ. xi. 4, quoted by Kriig.), ^ttt/Xus being 
 the common nominative. ' On the general question (says T. K. A.) see Thirlwall, 
 vol. i. p. 70.' He urges that the testimony of Thucyd. is here of little weight, 
 because he is not stating his own convictions, but merely relating what he heard 
 from Peloponnesian antiquarians. {uvevcxflfjvai. Pop. has 'obtigisse,' 
 
 'fell to their lot;' so Krtig., 'zugefallen,' which he rightly remarks is unusual, 
 ' accidisse' being the more common force of the word. He quotes, however, 
 Herod, iv. 157, oiS^v (r<pi xpri'^rbv (TvvetpipeTo; and Eurip. Serac. gig, av/upepeTai, 
 t4 jToXXa iroWoh : and this is sufficient support. The old rendering, ' were car- 
 ried to a greater length by his posterity,' is untenable. Mr. Piddle, Terminalia, 
 ii. says, ' the subject is Sivaiiiv. This power became by subsequent additions still 
 greater.' «v rf "Attik^. This shows that the name of Attica — 
 
 'Aktik'/i, the Sea-board — must have extended at this period more widely than it 
 afterwards did — at any rate as far aa the Scironian rocks, where, according to 
 Euripides, Eurystheus was caught by lolaus, and not slain, but captured, Kd\- 
 XuTTov dKpoOlvLov. Seraclcid. 860. At this period Megara belonged to Attica, 
 and may have shared in the name. The traditionary accounts vary as to the 
 captor of Eurystheus, — Apollodorus, ii. 8. 1, and Died. iv. 57, siding with 
 Thucyd. ; and Pausanias, i. 44, 4, and Strabo, viii. p. 377 (579), with Euripides. 
 Popp. The fact is of little importance, except so far as it seems to illustrate 
 the difficulty of obtaining trustworthy historical evidence on these matters. 
 The reader may find an attempt to account for the divergence of the legends by 
 Pflugk. Eurip. Herac. p. 8. 'HpaKXciSwv — without the article, as 
 
 here and elsewhere, when patronymics afe used as proper names. Kriig. On 
 the Heraoleids read Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. (MlTpds. The name of 
 
 this sister of Atreus is variously given, as Nicippe, Leuoippe, Menippe, and 
 Amphibia. Kara to oIksIov — 'on the ground of relationship.' 
 
 AeivoVTa tov iraT^po — so. Pelops. The legend has a double form. According 
 to one, Hippodamia, wife of Pelops, from hatred to her step-son, induced her 
 own children, Atreus and Thyestes, to slay him, and Atreus accordingly fled 
 to escape his father's vengeance. In the other, Pelops himself slays Chrysippus, 
 and Atreus flies, dreading the same fate. For the Pelopidse, see Grote, vol. i. , 
 g]j^ yij^ ovK^Ti — no longer came bacTc. The phrase may be some- 
 
 what unusual but there is no reason to change it into oiy/c ^iravex^PV^^^t as 
 Kriie has suggested. Indeed, he himself points out that it is defended by 
 ote^Ttd0Cc«>', i. gi, cf I2C. ^6^<o. Jelf, §607. Hepo-eiSdiv. 
 
 Eurvstheus was son of Sthenelus, and grandson of Perseus. See MiiUer's 
 Dorians, i. ch. 3, and Grote, vol. i. ch. 4. All the preceding paragraph, it must 
 be admitted, is a specimen of exceedingly confused narrative and inartificial com- 
 
 o 
 
1 8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 position. But it was written in the earliest stage of prose writing. It is 
 possible to re-arrange the whole as Kriig. has done, and still to confess with 
 him, that the great accumulation of participles makes the new arrangement as 
 bad as the old. 
 
 (c.) Tf|v o-TpaTcCav. 'Pro hoc, ethic, et alibi non raro apud Thucyd. ubi 
 expeditionis bellicse notio requiritur in MSS. aut omnibus aut plurimia arpaTlav 
 legatur.' Pop. The latter is found, moreover, in places in Aristophanes {e.g., 
 Acharn. 251,1 143, Eq. 587), where the metre requires it. It does not, therefore, 
 seem possible to retain the distinction of Ammonius and the grammarians, ■ <TTpa- 
 Tela abstraotum esse verbi aTpareieiv, nomina in -la esse concreta et coUeotiva.' 
 The truth is, perhaps, that in all languages such expressions as 'the expedition' 
 and ' the expeditionary army' are wont to be confused. oi \iiifvri, 
 
 K. T. X. — * not from favour so much as from fear.' This is supposed to be a 
 tacit contradiction to ' x'^P"' ' ^rpdiTjcn tpipovras,' Od. E. v. 307. T^eiov (in 
 Thuc. more commonly irX^ov) is synonymous with /aSXXoj', which occurs ii. 39, 
 3. Kriig. 
 
 (d.) cl Tw LKavbs T€Kp.T]piwo-ai — ' if in anybody's opinion he is sufficient autho- 
 rity to grovmd cro inference upon,' or ' competent to furnish sure evidence,' 
 That Thucyd. did not unhesitatingly foUow him is clear from i. 10; ii. 41 ; 
 Ti. 2. Pop. On the omission of fo-ri see Jelf 376, e. Iv rov 
 
 o-K'^iTTpou T^ irapaSdo-ci, II. ii. loS. 'It was the custom with the ancients at 
 that early period, when writings were not yet distributed into books or 
 chapters, to make a division according to the prominent subjects anywhere 
 treated on. This was especially the case with Homer, portions of whose Iliad 
 were called by the names rdtpos IlaTp6K\ov, Ne/tuo/tiai'Teia, as here. Of Mark 
 xii. 26, M T^s pdrov: Eom. xi. 2.' Bloomf. Cf Miiller's Zit. of Anc. 
 Greece, 50-52, and on the Khapsodists p. 32, 33. Grote on the Ehapsodists, &c., 
 vol. ii. ch. 21. 
 
 (/.) IIoXX^o-i v^o-oicri. Miiller (Jlginetica, p. 24.) points out that this can 
 only have reference to the Argolio Islands and those in the .^gean Sea which 
 lay round about, for Zaoynthos, Dulichia and Paphos belonged to others. 
 ' Quales sunt Calauria, Hydrea, Tiparenus, Cecryphalea, fortasse iEgina quan- 
 quam de h^c dubitat Muller. ' Pop. ' 
 
 Chapter X. — (a.) n^v — without a corresponding 8^. The opposition is to 
 be found in § 4. Kriig. (iiKpov — ' an insignificant place.' The 
 
 predicative adjective of the general notion in the neuter sing. See Jelf, § 381, 
 and the passages there quoted. Poppo says, 'non legitur hie generalis 
 sententia,' and therefore understands TriXur/na, But if we say, ' a poor sort of 
 place,' we surely do predicate a general notion. Mycenae was destroyed by 
 the Argives, B. c. 468, thirty-seven years before the Peloponnesian war. Strabo 
 says that in his time not ;.. vestige remained of Mycense. Yet of the gate of 
 the Lions, and the Treasury of Atreus, in a style so unlike the later Greek 
 architecture, considerable remains are yet to be seen, and will probably last as 
 long as the world. Arn. See the Vignette in Thirlwall's Greece. Small Ed. 
 ijv— Observe not et-q ; the fact is admitted to be true, but it is contended that 
 
 the fact affords no ground for supposing the expedition not to have been great 
 
 ''And because Mycence was but an insignificant place, or, if any of the towns of 
 
Chap. IO.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 9 
 
 iJiat day now seem to he of small account, one, should not, taking this as a sure 
 jyroof, disbelieve, ' Ac. On '/n-f; with indicat. SoKei see Jelf, § 749. 
 
 (■.•f) 7^ve<r6ai This is what has been called the redwndant negative. 
 
 It owes its origin to the genius of the Greek language, which, where the 
 prominent idea in the speaker's mind is a negative, attaches a negative participle 
 to the predicate, whether another has preceded or no. Similar is the practice 
 of the uneducated with us, and with all nations. The best notice of the 
 subject is to be found in Buttman's excellent edition of the Meidias. Appendix. 
 See also Jelf, § 747, 748, 750. Kar^X'^ — 'obtinet' in Latin — from 
 
 which our word ' obtains ' — expressing that the report extends and dominates 
 over a certain extent. So Eurip. Hipp. v. 1464, cftTJuai. Karixovinv. Cf. 11 c. 
 Pop. refers to iii. 89 ; viii. 28. KrtLg. to Valckn. on Eur. Hipp. v. 1465. 
 
 (6.) el Xi)(|>6€Ct). On d with the optative, expressing the most general and 
 indefinite form of hypothesis, see Jelf, § 855. KaTao-Kevtjs tA 
 
 ISd<)>i). Am. has a long note on the distinction between KaTaaKevr) and vapa- 
 OKevr], which amounts to this ; that-the former is the stationary and permanent 
 stock — the 'fixtures,' as it were: the latter denotes, on the contrary, what is 
 moveable and temporary — what can be prepared for an occasion. The former 
 would include the fortifications and public buildings of a city ; the latter naval 
 and military armaments, &o. This seems correct as a general rule, though as 
 he admits that passages occur which are difficult to reconcile with it, as Kwra- 
 ffKevii ToO ■n-oXi/j.ov, viii. 5 . It is certainly used in i. 89, (which see) so as to 
 include the moveable furniture of a household: compare ii. 38, 65; vi. 31, 
 from which it appears as though Pop. were right in caUing it ' totam domfls 
 instruendae rationem,' so far as these passages are concerned. Kriig. says it can 
 here mean nothing but ' Anlage,' — or KT(ir,uara, as the Schol. call them, 
 ' Foundations.' He quotes Plut. Alcihiades, 36, riji' tuv Teix'^" KaracrKev^y, B, 
 KareffKciaffav iv Qp4KV- ■^™- quotes from Dodswell's Tour, ii. p. 303 — 4, lan- 
 guage with respect to the ruins of Sparta , in exact accordance with Thucyd. 
 anticipations. T. K. A. appends from Wordsworth, p. 335, ' The only Hellenic 
 ruin of any note is a spacious theatre. The prophecy, therefore, of Thucyd. 
 has been fully verified.' See as regards Athens, Grote, vol. vi. p. 24. 
 irpiSs — 'in comparison with, from the notion of being placed alongside of,' cf. 
 Jelf, § 638. TOV ifkvri tAs 8<1o )i.o(pas — ' Two-fifths.' The principle 
 
 upon which the article is used in these cases seems to be that, when the exist- 
 ence of any whole number is assumed, the existence of all its parts is assumed 
 
 also they consequently become definite quantities and admit the article. 
 
 The second Lacedaemonian portion was Messenia, the national name of which 
 was almost disused. Krug. quotes Xen. Hell. vi. 2, 31. The remaining portions 
 were Arcadia, Argolis, and Elis. Some have supposed that Thucyd. means two- 
 fifths, physically and not politically speaking. T|7oBvTai — properly 
 said of a military leading in time of war, but, as Kriig. remarks, this soon 
 merges into a general and political one. From about 580 B.C. Sparta acted as 
 the recognised commander not only of the Peloponnese but of the whole Greek 
 name. The confederacy itself, however, was formed by the inhabitants of that 
 peninsula alone on fixed and regular laws ; whereas, the other Greeks only 
 annexed themselves to it temporarily. Muller's Dorians, b. i. ch. 9. 
 irjXcus. The article has been supposed (see Am.) to be absent upon the principle 
 
 2 
 
20 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^ooK 1. 
 
 mentioned in ch. 8, note (a), which see. But the cases are not parallel, for it is 
 not here the familiar expression employed by citizens for their city, as in CEd. 
 Tyr. V. 630, Kdfioi ir6\eu5 /j,hc<rTi. Therefore, either tr. with Kriig., ' it being 
 neither a city that has been compactly built, nor,' &c., or regard Tr6\eas as a 
 gloss. It has been doubted whether ^vvoiKi<rSela-ijs refers to the consolidation 
 of some separate Demes, like that supposed to have been effected by Theseus at 
 Athens, or whether the words merely refer to the loose and straggling way 
 in which the town was built. There is no historical evidence to support the 
 first notion ; and Karoi K(bfias — ' village- fashion,' immediately following point to 
 the second. We know that there were four or five such Kd/xai clustered toge. 
 ther, though not surrounded by a wall (as Bloomf states them to have been), 
 at least before the time of Alexander the Great. Their names were, according 
 to Miiller, Pitane, Messoa, Limnse, and Cynosura. ciKa^Eo-Bai de- 
 
 pends upon ol/iaL above. Cf. Grote, vol. ii. p. 344. ' It was noticed that Sparta, 
 even in the days of her greatest power, was not (properly speaking) a city, but 
 a mere agglutination of five adjacent villages.' <|>av£pds 6<|'6<os — 
 
 ' the appea/rance presented to the eye.' 
 
 (c.) Sxlrcis — external appearance. Cf. Jelf, §355, i. |ie7C<jTi)V 
 
 Twv irph avTTjs. See note, ch. i. a. X€L'iro|x^VT]V — ^left behind by,' 
 
 i.e., inferior to. Kriig. quotes i. 144, 5. And toiJtu;' 0/Xo! eiepyerSi' oiSepbs 
 XetTrerai. Xen. Mem. ii. 4, 7. fjv — sc, toL7j<tlv or according to 
 
 Pop., arparelav, imphed in ivravSa, which is equivalent to Tepl rairris ttjs 
 arpareias. Kal oiTws — 'even in this way,' i.e., even accepting the 
 
 naturally exaggerated account of Homer. )^iX£<i>v k. t. X. — ' con- 
 
 sisting of 1200 ships.' The Schol. on II. Book ii., says 11 66, and Eustath. 
 it86. dvSpmv. By a similar idiom we say 'a ship of 1000 tona,^ 
 
 or 'of 100 guns. 'Kriig. quotes irXoia irirou, referring to Lob. ad Phryn., p. 262. 
 
 (d.) airtpiTm. — 'rowed themselves,' or 'did their own rowing,' i.e., there 
 
 were no mariners distinct from the fighting-men. irpoo-KtiTovs 
 
 'men at the oar.' 
 
 («.) oi Iv TcXei — ' Men in power.' The authorities. The same phrase occurs 
 ii. 10, -1, and a similar one, iii. 28, oi iv tois Tpdyjiaai., ' Those in the adminis- 
 tration of affairs,' repeated by Theophrastus, ch. vi. p. loi, ed. Sheppard. 
 (i^XXovTas. We might expect p.e\\bvT0iv, for certainly (as Arn. remarks) the 
 word does not refer to the ireplvEws or ' supernumeraries' alone. Arn.'s expla- 
 nation is that what precedes is equivalent to veplveai iroWois fiera, <T<j>wy dyeiv, 
 and that therefore (by a irptis rh cnjiiaiv6u-evov) /iiWovras follows just as if he 
 had so written it. Pop. says, 'adomnem Grsoorum exercitum speotant; sed 
 cum illi (ireplvem) hoc continentur accusatives, ut 140, i., Thuc. coUocavit ad 
 quos usitatius alteram nomen opponeretur. Vide iv. 118; viii. 6^.' 
 Ttt irXota — ' tlieir vessels.' KaTd<f>paKTa — decked. ' Qute ab Arri. 
 
 Anab. vii. 6, i, Tre(j>payp.ivai a Latinis tectse vocantur.' Pop. See ch. 14 
 and Sheppard's note on virb toO KaraarpiiixaTos, Theoph. p. 237. The Schol. 
 explains aeaavi,haij.kva, ' with the hatches down. ' Bl. 
 
 (/.) 8' oSv. The MSS. have yovv, but as the proper meaning of that 
 particle (cf. ch. 2, e) is inappropriate here, almost all editors adopt the above 
 correction of Bekker. rb |i,^<rov o-KoirowTi — to one regarding the 
 
 mean, striking an average, sc. between 50 and 120. This dative denotes the 
 
Chap. 12.] " NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 21 
 
 person to whose estimate the matter is referred. Matth. § 388, gives instances. 
 Pop. refers to ri i^aBev a,TrTo/j.et>ij!, ii. 49, 5. And, ' In univeraum sestimanti 
 plus apud peditem roboris.' Tao. Germ., c. 6. los airb irdo-ris — 
 
 ' considering that it was dispatched from all Greece.' See Jelf, § 701. Matthis 
 §628. ov iroXXoC — i.e., 1200X85 = 102,000. 
 
 Ohaptbk XI. — (a.) o«x ■}\ 6X17. too-. 6o-. tj axpilf" — 'Not so much the 
 want of men as the want of money.' ttjs Tpo<|)iis. The article implies, 
 
 ' the necessary sustenance.' iroX6(i.ovvTa pioTcvo-eiv — ' would be enabled 
 
 to get its living while prosecuting the war. ' A somewhat unusual use of ^toreioi, 
 but not unparalleled, aa is proved by Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2, 25, d6i.(iii.kvoi. awh 
 TTo'Xifji.ov ^loreiew. lirciS'^ Be. The 5^, though the reading of the 
 
 MSS. is awkward in its position, and therefore most editors, including Kriig., 
 read re. He observes that Sk does certainly correspond sometimes to a previous 
 re, but rarely, except in cases where what precedes the 5^ is emphatically 
 opposed to the former clause, as, for instance, here we might have had d<piK6- 
 fLevoi 5^. If we admit thus much, it seems unreasonable to demand the exact 
 collocation which logically expresses the antithesis, and we may pei'haps repre- 
 sent the 5i by translating, Nay, even when they had now arrived and won a 
 battle (but that they did so win one is clear, for they would not otherwise have 
 erected the fortifications of the naval camp, sc, because they could not in the 
 face of 1 victorious enemy), they manifestly, I say (5^ in apodosi), did not even 
 thereupon employ their whole force, but, &c. irpbs Yewp-ytav. The 
 
 Schol., from some unknown source, mentions Aoamas and Antimachus as 
 engaged in this cultivation. And, ' Diomedes primis annis belli Trojani, rr/v 
 Qpq,Kriv i-yciipyei. teste Eu.stath. ad II. p. 387.' Pop. XT|o-TeCav — 
 
 'predatory excursions.' Homer gives authority enough for this statement, 
 II. i. 366, and elsewhere. It will be remembered that the plot of the Ajax of 
 Sophocles turns upon the result of some such foray. 
 
 (b.) •§ Kal (jidWov — 'wherefore all the more.' Cf. i. 25, 4; ii. 2, 3; iv. i, 
 2. Krug. TOL 8^Ka '^n\ — 'i^e ten years,' ^.e., the famous ones of 
 
 the siege. pfci ovTet^ov — ' held out resisting force by force, ' or as 
 
 Kriig. has it, ' in the open field,' ' in pitched battles.' tw del iraparii- 
 
 XovTi. Kriig. prefers this to ry wipavn, the other reading, I suppose because 
 it is still more vague, ' the portion that for the time being happened to be with 
 them, ' and though there be less authority for it in the MSS., the least common 
 word is also the least likely to have been substituted by a copyist. 
 a,v irpoo-KafleJoiievoi.. The fij' is to be earned on to iVKov, for the participle 
 sine articulo would itself express the condition. Cf. ch. 9 a. And see the 
 matter discussed, iii. 82. 
 
 (c.) 6vo(iao-T<iTOTO. Cf. I a. KaTeo^tlKoros. Cf 10 a. For 
 
 the general question regarding the Trojan war, the student will of course con- 
 sult Grote, vol. i. , and Thirlwall, vol. i. 
 
 Chaptbb XII. — (a.) 'ir\. (iCTavfo-Taro t^ Kal KarcjiKC^tro — ' was still wnder- 
 going migrations of its inhabitants, and was in course of settlement.' He means 
 that it is not surprising that the Trojan expedition was of no great magnitude, 
 since, even subsequent to it, the same disturbing causes were at work. Bl. 
 
2 a NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I, 
 
 says the expression is one of poetic or Pindaric boldness. If so, we ought, 
 perhaps, to tr. ixcTavlaraTo, was shifting to and fro. T|<n)xd(ra<ra. 
 
 An exemplification of the common grammatical rule that the nominative pre- 
 cedes the infinitive, where the subject of the infin. is the same as that of the 
 preceding finite verb — the accus. which three MSS. exhibit is, therefore, not 
 necessary. The ^mj, according to Kriig. and GoU., who quotes i. 141 ; iv. 126, 
 belongs to both. Tr. ' so as not, from enjoying rest, to be developed,' i.e., did not 
 enjoy rest enough for development, and this mode of explanation will not be 
 necessary. lve<ix(iM<r6. This word with its kindred (says Kriig.) 
 
 seems to have been banished from Attic prose. It is an old-fashioned Attic, 
 i. e., Ionic word found in Herod., arid it has been pointed out that Aristot. 
 nses it, direp avrbs (6 Q4os) veoxp.oL ' C[U(e nova ipse edit et designat, ' Steph. Thes. 
 Tr. hei'e ' produced many revolutions.' owfi' ^v — refers to aTaixeis. 
 
 iKirCiTTovTes SktiJgv — 'persons who were ejected proceeded to found the cities, ' sc. 
 those which they were well known to have founded — thei/r cities. The yap 
 whicQ follows shows (as Popp. has seen) that the cities meant are those founded 
 by the Bceotians and Dorians, with others of contemporary date. 
 
 (5.) 'IX£ov &X<i)a-iv. In the statement of epochs like this, the article does not 
 occur, Krug. Cf. i. 23. 4; ii. -z. i ; vi. 4. 3. it, "ApvT]s. This 
 
 was the Ame in Thessaly. Kriig. and Lobeck assert that the name includes the 
 territory as well as the town. Homer mentions an Ame in Bceotia, II. ii. 507 
 (Gbll.), which, according to this account, could not have been founded until 
 sixty years afterwards. Heyne, ad locwn, explains the discrepancy upon the 
 principle mentioned above that there was a district so called at the time of the 
 Trojan war, but that the town was not built before the arrival of the .ffiolians 
 from Thessaly. diroSa(rp.ds — ' A sprinkling.' The authority for the 
 
 fact is to be found in the Homeric Catalogue, II. ii. 494, and Miiller {Orcho- 
 menus), supposes that it was merely in deference to Homer that Thucyd. records 
 it here. Yet he adds, that, with the exception of Orohomenus and Aspledon, 
 all Bceotia was in their hands. As Thucyd. only speaks of an dirodaafids, it is 
 plain that he did not servilely follow the Homeric account. It is probable, 
 therefore, as Am. conjectures, that Thucyd. had other sources of information. 
 ' The Boeotians in the tradition are a wandering race, first driven by the Cad- 
 mseans into Thessaly, to the vale of Arne, which cannot have been so small as 
 it is depicted in our maps, and afterwards again expelled by the Thessalians and 
 returning into Bceotia. In this narrative we find the influence of the same 
 Paralogism which so commonly comes before us in the history of the ancient 
 nations, that, viz., where two peoples of the same stock are found in diflFerent 
 localities, they are connected with each other by mutual migrations. If the 
 Boeotians and old Thessalians were of the same stock, according to one form of 
 the legend, the Bceotians would be represented as having wandered to Thessaly, 
 according to another, they would come out of Thessaly into Bceotia. I cannot 
 affirm that the Boeotians did not, in the Eraathian migration into Thessaly, pass 
 onward into Boaotia. If, however, this was the case, I cannot conceive that 
 they had previously been driven into Thessaly,' Niebuhr, Vor. iih. a. Lander «. 
 Volherh. S. 113, f., quoted in Engelman's Germ, translation. Aco- 
 
 pifjs. Upon the return of the Heracleids consult Arnold's note, Muller's 
 Dorians, vol, i. ch. 2, Thirlwall, vol. i. ch. 7, Grote, vol. ii. oh. 18. 
 
Chap. 13.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 23 
 
 (c.) ovK^Ti, avi.(rTa|J.^vi] — ' no longer subjected to evictions, or dislodgements of 
 tts population.' k^iiTi\nTt — is a more suitable reading than i^iwe/j.'pe, 
 
 because the historian does not merely state the fact ; he means to describe the 
 action as continuous — ' commenced the sending out of colonies.' 
 "luvos. Remark that the name of the inhabitants is used, and not that of 
 the country. Twv vii(ri.ci)T(3v. ' Prseter Euboeam Oycladum incolas 
 
 intelUgit velut Andrios, Tenios, Ceos, Naxios. Of. vii. 57, Herod, viii. 46/ 
 Pop. 'IraXCos. The truth of this will, of course, depend upon the 
 
 country included under the name. The student must consult Niebuhr, vol. i. 
 pp. i2-'20, E. T. 'The Greeks,' he says, 'who regarded the CEnotrians alone 
 as Italians, were long strangers to the wider extent in which the name was 
 applied within the country itself, and never used it so. . . . The region which 
 originally bore the name was, according to them, the peninsula bounded by the 
 isthmus, only twenty miles across between the Scylletic and the Napetine Gulf. 
 ... in other words it was the southernmost part of what was afterwards called 
 Bruttium.' Antiochus of Syracuse, to whom Aristotle refers {Pol. vii. 10), in 
 his own time drew a boundary for Italy ' by a line to Metapontum from the 
 river Laos, which, in after times, separated Lucania from Bruttium. ' 
 'imv & X'°P''«'- He is speaking of the Ambraciots and Anaotorians, says the 
 Sohol., ' Adde Corcyram, Leucadeiu, SoUium, Gorinthiorum colonias. Vide i, 
 24) 30, 55 ; ii. 30, 80. Zacynthum Achseorum, ii. 66,' Poppo. 
 
 Chapter XIII. — (a.) irpijTcpov Si fjo-av .... Pao-iXctai. We must 
 not, however, suppose that the TvpanvlSes immediately succeeded these. Nearly 
 everywhere there was a transition state where all real power was possessed and 
 disputed among the members of an hereditary oligarchy. In passing from this 
 into a more democratical stage of social existence, the government very gene- 
 rally fell into the hands of some ambitious individual, — in most cases, a mili- 
 tary chieftain. As long as he and his family retained it, they were Tiipavvoi 
 properly so called ; but as in the case of the Pisistratidse, it was frequently 
 wrested from them, and institutions more or less democratic succeeded. Read 
 Arnold's excellent essay, Appendix, vol. i. ; Thirlwall, vol. i., ch. 6, pp. 187, 
 192; and Hermann's Cfr. Antiq. § 54, 55, 56; MuUer's Dorians, vol. i., 
 p. 176. Iirl p>)Tots Y^pocri — 'certain defined and specific rights 
 
 and privileges.' 'yipas in genere omne praecipuum notat quod quis prse aliis 
 habet, etiam praecipuum honorem aliquem.' Damn. Lex. Horn, quoted by Bl. 
 See on the y'epea §aiTl\ua at Sparta, Herod, vi. 56 — 59, on ^Tri indicating a 
 condition of tenure, cf. Jelf, § 634, 3, c. Read Arist. Polities, iii., 9, 10. 
 Tj TTepl Toirs Tipoi'iKoiis xpbvovs ^aaCKela ^v sKbvTtav p.h/, k'wl 5e Ttct (hpttrpikyois' 
 ffTpaT7]yiis yap ?jv Kal diKaffT^s 6 ^atriXeOs, /cat rCjv irpbs robs Qeod? Kvpios. See 
 also Herod, vi. 56. Kriig. remarks that ^ttI prjToU is a settled formula. Cf. 
 i. 12'j; Herod, v. 57; Isocrat. 17, 19; Plato, Sympos. 213 a.; and irarpiKal 
 is 'founded by their fathers,' of. vii. 69, viii. 6; Isocrat. ix. 35. 
 dvTeCxoVTo — held to, applied themselves to. On the change from singular to 
 plural, Kriig. refers to his own note on Xen. AnaJ>. i. 7, 17, KCpos t^ Kcd ij 
 ffrparia irapriKBe, Kal iykvovTO el<roi ttjs rdippov. 
 
 (J.) |jieTax,Ei.pC(rai — ^lit. ' to take in hand,' rare in the active, though occurring 
 vi. 16, vii. 87. Kriig. adds iv. 18. Kal SajiCois — i.e., 'as well as for 
 
24 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 the Corinthians,' cf. Jelf, § 592, r. But, says Kriig,, the raCs here mentioned 
 were certainly not Triremes, as Pliny asserts, N. H. vii. 56, as these were rare 
 before the Persian war. The Phocseans had nothing but Penteconters, Her. 
 i. 163. 
 
 (c.) (lAXiirra — ' wngefdhr,' ' nearly .' Kriig. Philologers are divided about 
 the meaning of this word. ' Vehementer disoeptatum est, ' Pop., whose note 
 see. Prom the most careful and extended induction which I have been able to 
 make of its use in Thucydides, I should incline to the belief that the word is 
 employed, wherever an exact statement is impossible, to denote the very closest 
 approximation to it which the writer can make. It is therefore of necessity 
 sometimes to be rendered at the least, and sometimes at the most, according to 
 the point of view from which the subject is contemplated; and it is this appa- 
 rent contradiction which has so much perplexed commentators. See Peile's 
 note, ch. 18, who argues that the word means always 'at the least,' Ho the 
 fidl,' 'every whit.' Cf. Fasti Hellenid, p. 239, on the date. Is t^iv 
 
 TcXeuT^v — 'computed up to the close of this war.' The more usual form of ex- 
 pression is with a dative, as in the next sentence tuijttj, and in the well- 
 known line, Kal tIs xp6>'os roiaS' iariv oi^eXr/XvBiis,' CE. T., v. 735; Matth. 
 §388. 
 
 (d.) Kaviiax'a iraXaiTdTT). See Herod, iii. 53. Eefers to the expedition 
 undertaken by Periander to avenge the death of his son Lycophron, who had 
 been banished to Corcyra, and murdered there. 
 
 (c.) del 8^ iroTC. 'The Trore is to be referred to dei; the 6r) has a slightly 
 intensive force,' BI. lp.iriSpiov. Kriig. refers to Arist. Pol. vii. 
 
 5, 5, where he is pointing out the most desirable site for a city. 
 Tots iraXaiois ironiTats. Homer has &<pvdov re "KbpivSov, 11. ii. 5 70. It does 
 not, however, appear certain that editors have a right to add, ' alluding, how- 
 ever, solely to Homer,' anymore than in oh. 5 b. lirXii'C^ov. The 
 active here rests upon the best MSS. authority, though elsewhere we almost 
 always meet with the middle. The act. is rather archaic and poetical (Hesiod 
 B. K. 'H. V. 632), and once or twice in this preface Thuc. seems to have affected 
 such expressions. d|Ji(|>(STEpa. This must mean, ' hy sea as well as 
 by land,' and so both Pop. and Kriig. interpret it; others have imagined it to 
 imply,' 'in the JEgvecm and in the Corinthian gulf .' ^ They compare i. 100, 112. 
 On the adverbial use of the word, cf. Matth. § 425, Jelf, § 579, 6. 
 The subject of Kad-qpovv is 0! 'KoplvBioi, as being the principal subject in the 
 whole statement. Iirl Kvpov. Jelf, § 633, z. 
 
 (/.) "Icoo-iv. The Phocseans, Her. i. 163; the Milesians, iii, 39; the inhabi- 
 tants of the islands, Herod, i. 27; (Krug.) Samians, e.g., and Chians. 
 ■uUos. The Ionic, or old Attic gen., cf. &aTeoi, ruxlaos. Thucyd. employs 
 both forms of the gen., for we have uloC V. 16. IIoXuKpa'rijs. Cf. 
 
 iii. 104, and read Herod, iii. 39, et seq. ; Grote, vol. iv. p. 321. 
 'Pi]veCav. See the account, iii. 104. This is mentioned here (Kriig. thinks) 
 because Thucyd. already was intending to introduce the circumstances there 
 recorded. 
 
 (g.) oIk£Sovt€s. There is no article, and therefoi-e the form of expression 
 itself points out, that some battle must be intended which was fought during 
 the actual process of colonizing the place. Arn. therefore is right in saying that 
 
Chap. 14.J NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 35 
 
 the sea-fight mentioned by Herod, i. 166, cannot be the one here meant, though 
 he is not quite so right in translating, 'the Pkocceans who were fomiding 
 Massalia,' as if we had found oi oMl^ovTes. This, however, does not affect his 
 statement that the real founders of Massalia were a body of Phocseana sent forth 
 fifty-five years before the reduction of the mother city by the Persians. They 
 were subsequently joined by the citizens then expelled from their homes, and 
 it is probably owing to this double settlement that so much chronological 
 confusion has occurred concerning the event. See the discrepancies in Poppo's 
 note. 
 
 Chapter XIV. — (a.) IlevTCKovTiSpois. Vessels with a single bank of oars, 
 twenty-five on each side. irXoCovs (laKpois — ^long, light boats, pro- 
 
 bably containing many men, and going at great speed. Bl. compares them to 
 the piratical barges of earlier times, and refers to Wachsmuth, Antiq. Gr. ii. i. 
 See Xen. Anah. v. i, i. 
 
 (b.) Tcl MT|8iKtt, Tcl nepo-iKd — when used as epochs, denote the second 
 Persian war. Ej-iig. adds, the second determination of the date by reference 
 to Darius, is given by Thueydides in order to mention the third Persian war. 
 We must remark that Thueydides passes over the usurpation of the pseudo- 
 Smerdis, recorded by Herodotus. irepl SiKcXCav. These words, as 
 
 Pop. points out, may either mean *in SiciliEfc circumcirca, ' i.e., *in the different 
 parts or quarters of Sicily,' cf. vi. i, 6, or 'in SiciliS, et finitimS Italia,' 
 'the parts round about Sicily.' Cf. ii. 16. The Tipavvoi, were Gelo and Hiero. 
 (Herod, vii. 158), 'et praeter eos sine dubio Theronem, Anaxilaum, aUos,' 
 Pop. es 'irXfi8os — up to, — i.e., crniounting to a large rmmber. 
 
 Krtig. cites Bergler on Aristoph. Ach. v. 686, is rdxos waki. 
 KepKvpaCois i. 25, Herod, vii. 68. 
 
 (c.) Miiller, in his uEginetica, states a suspicion that the navy of jEginawas 
 purposely depreciated by Thueydides. ThirlwaU, vol. ii. p. 66, conjectures 
 that the Athenians had no insignificant fleet in the time of Pisistratus. 
 Pop. A Tiv€s &XX01 — sc. vairrmh iKiKT7}VTo. The Thasians, for 
 
 instance, or Lesbians. lb. Jelf, § 895, 2. - Ppax^a. Krug. inter- 
 
 prets small, 'trifling,' as i. 141, iirl Ppaxe^t ■irpo<j>d(Tei,. Pop., too, has ppaxia, 
 =/i«/)auti. 130, 140; ii. 22. o^i t€, d<))' oi — literally, Theperiod 
 
 is recent, counting from which up to the present, i.e., if you take that event as an 
 epoch, and count from it to the present, you will find the time short. C£ d0' 
 oB, ch. 18. The phrase must be taken ' en masse,' and the latter clause is not in 
 translating to be carried forward to the verb. Tr., therefore, 'tis no long while 
 ago since, or thai Themistocles, &c. We may compare oi iroXis XP^""^ ^ireiSrj 
 .... oi iroKka iT-q iTrei.Si]. Peile refers to the Latin 'ZoKjfo^os* tempore,' and 
 V. 26, 'ir-q di is rovro tA ^iptTravTO. iyhero T(f? 5roXc/i(j> 'iirTO, Kal etKO<n. It 
 seems hypercritical to suppose with Krug. a(p' o5 to be spurious. Such 
 familiar expressions indicating measure of time or space, will not always stand 
 strict logical analysis, as jS^yai KeWei> bdevirep '!JKei, {(Ed. Col. v. 1227), Ho go 
 thence whence he came.' irpo<r8oKCp.oD Svtos — 'being expected,' as 
 
 we say. Cf. 'ApTi§i,ov Trpo<rS6Kiiiov is ttiv Kiirpov elvai. Herod, v. 108. The 
 sea-fight mentioned by Herodotus, vi. 88, between the .ailginetans and Athenians 
 - occurred shortly before the battle of Marathon, and it is natural to suppose 
 
2,6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 that Thucyd. refers to the same here. But Pop. and others assume that toO 
 Pap^dpov must mean Xerxes and not Darius, because I suppose the latter did 
 not conduct the expedition in person. They therefore consider the time here 
 specified to he that between the two Persian wars (' Die Worte bezeichnen 
 offenbar die Zeit zwischen den beiden Perser Kriegen,' Engelman), and are 
 obliged to resort to an hypothesis (started by Miiller, JEginetica) that (mother 
 ^ginetan war broke out after the battle of Marathon. But this seems to me 
 to be founded on a misconception of rod ^appdpov, which does not necessarily 
 mean the Persian king at all, but stands for the people, just as the Latins said 
 'Bomanus,' 'Posnas,' and we say 'the Gaul,' or 'the Turk,' meaning by the 
 term the whole nation, and so precisely, ch. i8, 6 ^dp^apos. 
 Ivavudxicav — at Salamis. 8ia irdo-iis — so. ttjs vias. Or we may 
 
 consider it, with Krilg., an adverbial expression like dxi TpibTrjs, where p.oipa 
 or some such noun has been suppressed. 
 
 Chapter XV. — (a.) 8(j.ms. Notwithstanding their insufficient navies. 
 SiopKi]. If the word differs at all in signification from avrapK'^s, Kjiig's sug- 
 gestion may be correct, that, viz., it indicates a country incapable of accommo- 
 dating a gradually expanding population, whereas aOrapKrjs has reference to an 
 inability to supply the wants of its existing inhabitants. Prom vi. 90 (sub 
 finem) they appear nearly identical in meaning ; but Sid, may have the force 
 of 'thoroughly,' 'throughout.' 
 
 (6 ) 8o-oi Kal I'Y^vovTo. This is one of those cases where the force of the 
 conjunction may (as Arn. has well said) be expressed by an emphasis on the 
 auxiliary verb, 'as many as did take place.' See ch. 97 and 105. The idiom 
 seems to class itself with those cases where Kal introduces something to which 
 the attention is directed in contrast to what has preceded — the adversative /cai— 
 as in the phrase tI xp^ i^al X^yeii', concerning the right interpretation of which 
 scholars are not agreed. Hermann, e.j'., explains, rl KolxpTl^fyeiv, 'non solum 
 quid, sed etiam an aliqflid dlcendum sit dubitat.' Klotz, on the contrary — 'Si 
 dico t£ xp^ ""■^ X^7eic, propria hoc qusro, quid sit dioendum, etiam si solum 
 de dioendo cogitemus. ' I think Hermann is correct, and that the phrase means, 
 ' well if one must speak, what are we to say ? ' where the speaking is introduced 
 in contradistinction to the more suitable silence. So tI Kai ^oiXeuBe, Si veiirepoi; 
 ' what do you want ?' said when the parties addressed ought not to want any- 
 thing ; so here the Kal iyhoyro is in contrast with oiJSeis ^vfitrrr). 
 ckS^|j.ovs o-Tparetas. It may serve as an instance of GoUer's hypercriticism 
 and over subtlety to mention that he would strike out the words ttoXiJ dri t^s 
 iairuiv as tautological after ^/cSiJ/xous. Now this word, as is notorious, denotes 
 the simple idea 'abroad,' as ^7ri5i}/ious would 'at home;' and of course it is 
 quite as possible to he at a great distance abroad, as at a small one — cf . eirl i^oSop 
 (kStip-ov ii. 10, 'for a foreign expedition,' i. e., beyond the limits of their own 
 states. For the construction Krtig. compares rbv Uphv irliKeixov ia-rpdrevaav, i. 
 112. And Lobeok, Ajax v. 290. T. K. A. remarks it is an extension of the 
 strict cognate accusative i^bSom i^levai, aTparelav dTpaTeiciiBai, tr. , ' went out 
 foreign expeditions,' cf. Jelf, §. 588. i. iir^Kooi IvveoT^Keorov. 
 
 Eemark the absence of the article — ■' associated themselves in a subordinate posi- 
 tion,' so. ol "EXXt/ves. airoi — 'themselves unaided,' so. by iir-^KOOt. 
 
Chap. 17.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 37 
 
 dirJi Ti]s lo-qs — ' xquo jure,' 'excsquo.' Haaok. We must, as in oh. 14, con- 
 sider the phrase adverbial from the ellipse of /iolpas. Kriig. renders — 'm 
 relations of equality, imdependence of each other, ' of. iii. 40, toO AttJ Trjs iVijs 
 iX^poO. 
 
 (c.) n<5\6|iiov. Eefer to Herod. V. 99. Thirl wall i. p. 456. 'Bellum ortum 
 est de Lelanto vel Lelantio campo. Vide Strab. x. p. 688.' Pop. 'Clavier 
 considers 800 B. c. as the date of the war for the Lelantio territory, mentioned 
 Herod. V. 99 ; Thuo. i. 15 ; Aristot. Pol. iv. 32.' Hermann, P. A. of 
 Greece, § 11, 12. BUo-tt) — ^lit. stood apart — divided into the al- 
 
 liance. Knig. compares SteKpldrjirai', i. 18. 
 
 Chapter XVI. — (a.) iTnyivero. This verb would naturally govern both 
 SXXoi! and Kal'Iaffi. The latter words, however, as Kriig. remarks, also link 
 themselves in construction to ^TreaTpdrevae, It is in fact one of the anaco- 
 loutha of Thuoyd. , who sometimes introduces a fresh clause with a new type of 
 construction, apparently forgetting that the previous clause is imperfect, if the 
 form into which it has been thrown be not followed out. Cf. v. 95, oi 
 to<toOtoi> ^Xdirrei 7} Ix^P"' i/^'^" ^"■o" V 0'X(a (not ^Xdirrei, but) da-8epdas 
 Trapadelyfia rots dpxofi^voLs ^rfKoifxevov. This, with other idioms of the same 
 sort, depends upon a principle of the utmost importance for the right under- 
 standing of Greek authors, noticed by Mr. ShiUeto in his edition of Demosthenes 
 De Falsd Leg. — that viz., the Greeks almost never, where it is possible to 
 avoid it, make a twofold statement alike in both clauses ; they vary the con- 
 struction even to aflfeotation. Express Kai "lucri in English — 'and as their pa/rti- 
 cidar impediment to the lonians, Cyrus and the Persian mona/rchy made a descent 
 upon them,' f.i\ av|T|6fjvai. Great diiBculties have been made 
 
 about the absence of the article rod. But, as Kriig. says, the simple infinitive 
 follows, because KoiM/Mra i-n-eyivero is exactly equivalent to iKaXidijaav, cf. 
 Jelf, § 668, 2. 6VTbs"AXvos. ' This side Salys' — as this expresses 
 
 a familiar division by a familiar boundary, the absence of the article may well 
 be defended on the principle mentioned above (ch. 8 a), though, as a general 
 rule, Kriig. may be right in saying, the Greeks to Trdrafios prefix the proper 
 name with the article, 6"AXd5 irSra^ios. See for the facts, Herod, i. 28. 
 e8oi}X<o(r£. The younger student should compare Sov\w(r6p.evos voce medi^, ch. 
 18, and he will see that the middle is avoided here, because reference is not 
 made to the reflex effect of the action upon the actor, or his interests, but 
 simply to its effect upon the sufferer. Kriig. also notices this — 'Hier nur das 
 Leiden des Objects, nicht das Interesse des Subjects zu bezeichnen ist.' 
 Kal T«ls VT|0-ovs. Herodotus (i. 143, 151, T69) relates, that upon the submis- 
 sion of the continental cities to Harpagus, the islands voluntarily gave them- 
 selves up. But, adds Poppo, either the submission of the islands was simu- 
 lated and temporary, or Thucydides overlooks this surrender, and is thinking 
 of their reduction beneath the Persian power, after the battle of Lade, at the 
 close of the Ionian revolt. See iii. 141. 
 
 Chapter XVII. — (a.) rb k^' iavrav. ' Their omi interests.' Pop. and Kriig. 
 ' What concerned themselves.' Am. 'That which depends or rests upon themselves.' 
 Ktihn. Or. Gr. 611. These of course amount to the same thing. It is however 
 
28 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 possible to interpret with Peile — 'whai was for their own time, i.e., would last 
 their own time. ' ?s re rb o-ufia. KrUg. understands this of personal 
 
 security. It probably includes the notion of luxury as well. 8i 
 
 a<r<(>aX6Cos — 'talcing measures for security.' Krug. This scarcely seems 
 accurate. The preposition 5ia must I think as usual denote 'in a state of,' i.e. 
 it indicates that the subject is passing through some status. See what is said, ch. 
 40 0. and the whole will mean — 'Keeping as quiet as possible,' allowing as few 
 opportunities for change or commotion as they could. On the administration 
 of these Tipamoi, see Hermann's Political Antiq. of Greece, § 64. He adds in'a 
 note, 'Were the tyrants generally warlilie? Thuc. i. 17 seems to deny it, 
 but it is positively asserted by Plat. Eep. viii. p. 566, a. and Aristot. Pol. v. 
 9. 5.' ^Kovv. Arn. remarks the verb does not merely signify 
 
 'they inhabited,' but 'they lived in and conducted,' as in ii. 37, iii. 37. So 
 bioiKelv TT]v irbXiv — is, 'to administer the affairs of the city.' air* 
 
 ainav. The preposition 'has a mixed meaning partly expressive of derivation, 
 and partly of agency.' Arn. But as the doer of an act is considered as the 
 source from which it proceeds, both ideas naturally coincide and are expressed by 
 the same word. See however, Matth. § 573, Jelf, §623, c. el (i.'f| el. 
 
 The use of el fiij for ' unless' is readily explained by the elhpse of some predicate 
 to be supplied from the rest of the sentence. The second el appears to me to 
 belong to ri — i. e. ' si quid,' and such also is the case with three instances which 
 Jelf, § 860, 7 has cited as exhibiting a second el in connexion with el /nf/. Pop. 
 supplies after el f/.T) ^i ri, the words di^ibXayov ^pyov iirpaxOT}) ^^^ says that the 
 whole runs thus : ' Nisi si quid adversus suos quique finitimos Vfiemorid dignum 
 fecerunt, (quod certi fecerimt Sidlice Tyramni), nam {hi) Siciliai Tyranni,' dc. 
 In e^ fj.7] h ri, says Bl., we have an Attic phrase for el /a-J; S, ti. 
 
 (5.) 01 yap Iv SiKeXCc^. The yap has reference, as frequently, not to an ex- 
 pressed, but an implied assertion — ' But not all, for the Sicilian tyrants ' — This 
 is more simple and natural than with Krtig. to refer it to is rb aCiixa tpKovv, &c. 
 iraVTixoflev — 'from causes operating on all sides.' See i. 124, and iii. 53 c. 
 KareCxeTo — dToX|iOT4ptt clvai. There does not seem to me any real difficulty 
 here. Of course the words do not mean — 'was prevented from being timid; 
 but the two infinitives proleptically express the result of /careixfro, and fx'fire . . . 
 Te are like the Latin ' neque . . et ' — Greece was kept in check, so as both not to 
 perform in confederacy any brilliant {(pavepbv) exploit, and to be in its separate 
 communities somewhat deficient in enterprise. The absence of &aTe is of no im- 
 portance, cf. iii. 23. vi. 69. 
 
 Chaptbk XVIII. — (a.) iiraSi\ Si. 'The construction of this sentence is 
 throughout involved and irregular,' Bl. 'Protasis prima sententiS alio modo 
 post parenthesin repetitur verbis fiera 5^ r^v twv Tvpdvvujv KardXvatv, et per 
 duplicem particulam yhp causam, et causae oausam indicat.' GoU. 
 Tupdvvoi. 'The following tyrants are stated by ancient historians to have been 
 deposed by the Spartans ; the Cypsehdse of Corinth and Ambracia, the former 
 in Olymp. 49. 3 (584 B.C.), the latter probably somewhat later; the Pisistratidse 
 in Athens, who were allied with the Thessalians in Olymp. 67. 3 (510 B.C.); 
 their adherent, Lygdamis of Naxos, probably about the same time ; jilsohines 
 ofSicyon, about the 65th Olymp. (520 B.C.); Symmachus of Thasos, Aulis of 
 
Chap. i8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 29 
 
 Phocis, and Aristogenes of Miletus, of whom we know only the names ; the 
 larger numbers were dethroned under the kings Anaxandrides and Ariston, 
 Cleomenes and Demaratus,' Miiller' s i)oria»is, vol. i. p. 189. The deposition of 
 tyrants, as opposed to the principles of Dorian aristooratioal government, was 
 evidently part of the fixed policy of Sparta, and upon these grounds we must 
 account for the great armament sent against Polycrates of Samos, which Herod, 
 iii. 54 represents as despatched to avenge the plunder of a cauldron and breast- 
 plate. 'It is easy to perceive' (says MUlIer, vol. i. p. 187) 'in the dynasties of 
 the Sicyonian, Corinthian, Epidaurian, and Megarian tyrants, a powerful 
 coalition against the supremacy of the Dorians, and the ancient principles of 
 that race, the more powerful as they knew how to render subservient to their 
 own ends the opinions which had lately arisen.' For a full understanding of 
 the subject, the student must read Midler's Dorians, vol. i. ch. 7, 8. 
 Iirl iroKi — ' to a great extent;' to be understood locally, says Kriig. ; but Engel- 
 man has ' grossen Theils. ' 01 irXelo-Toi Kal TcXfuratoi. ' The junior 
 
 student should observe that, in accordance with GranviUe Sharp's important 
 canon, the same persons are denoted by both participles. The canon in ques- 
 tion is : ' When two or more assumable attributives' (i.e. adjectives, participles, 
 or nouns denoting quality, relation, or condition) 'joined by a copulative or 
 copulatives are assumed of the same person or thing, before the first attributive 
 the article is inserted, before the remaining ones it is omitted.' On the theolo- 
 gical importance of the canon in such expressions as 0e6s Kal Sojtt//) yiixwv, and 
 for ample illustration, consult Middleton on the Greek Article, part i. ch. 3. 
 At the same time it must be admitted that apparent exceptions to the canon are 
 so numerous as somewhat to shake implicit confidence in its correctness. The 
 matter is one which has not received as yet its fuU discussion. The important 
 question appears to me to be this : Are the existing violations of the rule to 
 be ascribed to the falsehood or inaccuracy of the grammatical principle upon 
 which it rests ? or is the principle metaphysically and grammatically correct, 
 and are the violations of the rule owing to the looseness and rapidity of ordi- 
 nary discourse, which does not observe grammatical accuracy where the danger 
 of misapprehension is not a practical inconvenience ? In conversation we should 
 probably say, 'The man and horse,' without repeating the article; for there 
 could be no fear of our hearers identifying the two. But in grave and written 
 composition, should we say ' the warrior and statesman, ' if we meant two distinct 
 persons — Wellington, e.g. and Peel? I think not; and therefore, in all cases 
 of serious composition, where confusion was possible, I believe that the Greeks, 
 far more accurate thinkers and writers than ourselves, adhered to the principle 
 of the canon. I have been led into these remarks from the assertion of a 
 scholar whose opinion is entitled to the highest respect, that ' upon a pinch 
 Granville Sharp's canon always fails. ' As a general rule it certainly does fail, but 
 'upon a pinch,' i. e. where its violation would occasion confusion of thought, I 
 myself believe that it does mo* fail.' Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 56, note on 
 TOiis iSiKovfi^vovs Kai ayavaKTOvvras — ' those who express their indignation at the 
 injuries they are receiving.' I so expressed my opinion some time ago, and all 
 subsequent examination has confii-med my belief in its correctness. The reader 
 may, by way of illustration, compare with this passage, which means, the most 
 mwmerons, who were at the same time the last, wpuTOS xal T-eXeuraios Spa/j-iiv, 
 
30 JfOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 ^sch. Agam. v. 305. twv "R^Xoirovvrialoiv Kal ' XB-qvaloiv, i. i. tos iieyiarai Kal 
 iXaxliTTas vavs, i. lo. t^s 2aXa/Hi)'/as Kal UapaXov, iii. 33. if aiT(fi t6 d^iiceirSat 
 Kai iraSeiv, i. e. the mffermg encountered m the act of repelling the enemy, ol Aa- 
 KtSaLijMvLOi Kal ' XOrimToi., i. 18. t6 ^paSii Kal ,aAXoc, i. 84. i) irapavTUa re Xaji- 
 vpiiTtis Kid h ri lireira 56Ja, ii. 64. ri ^ov\6p,emv Kal vTroirrov, i. 90, The sus- 
 picious purport of their policy. (itTO T^v ktCo-iv. The majority of 
 MSS. have KTri<ri.v. For the latter it has been urged that the Heracleids cer- 
 tainly did not build Sparta, but found it, though a somewhat insignificant 
 place, already inhabited by Achseans (Miiller's Doriams). On the other hand, 
 Thucyd. himself, v. 16, says, Src t6 irp&Toii AaKeSat/iova K-l^ovTes Toiis ^aaCKias 
 KaBlaravTo; and Isocrat. Pan. u. 16, calls the Heracleids and Dorians olKiarks 
 ^irdprtis. These passages have induced most editors, and rightly too, to prefer 
 KTl(nv. Aupi^uv. Pop. has collected a large number of similar 
 genitives in his note upon 'B^erpi^wv, eh. 15 c. Cf. Wunder on Soph. Phil. r. 
 191. (TTatridiracra. This is said of the period before Lycurgus, 
 and, aa Am. suggests, probably refers, to the jealousies between the reigning 
 houses of Eurysthenes and Procles. See Herod, i. 65, vi. 52 ; Isoc. Pcmaih. 
 § 177; Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 315. ?ti] TCTpaK(So-ia. The question con- 
 cerning the age of Lycurgus is too long and difficult for a note. Thuc. here 
 makes it fall 804 B.C.; since the Bel. war ended B.C. 404; Apollodorus, in 884 
 B.C.; Messenia was conquered, and the war concluded by Theopompus, accord- 
 ing to Isocrates, about 750 B.C. [Am. says the date ought to be 724 B.C.]; and 
 Theopompus was next but one in descent to Charilaus, in whose reign Lycurgus 
 made his reforms. See, however, Clinton, P. S. p. 408; Miiller's Dorians, 
 oh. 7, p. 154, who states, 'We absolutely find no account of him (Lycurgus) as 
 an individual person.' Thirlwall, vol. i. ch. 8; Grote, vol. ii. ch. 6. 
 IxdXurra. Peile, comparing many passages, argues that fiaXurra must mean 
 ' at least,' ' every whit.' It is obvious that he is right here, and in ch. ^t, 54, 
 118, and others to which he refers. But see ch. 13, note c. If pAXurra de- 
 notes the nearest obtainable approximation, when it is the writer's intent to 
 make the number as large as possible, it will be ' at least, ' and when vice versa, 
 ' at most.' Is tJ|v Ttkivrifi — ' computed up to the close of this wa/r,' 
 and infra, h rbvSe rhv Trb'Kep.ov. Peile refers to Theoc. i. 26, Troro/iAferai e/s 
 6iio irAXas, not into, but as much as two pails. So again, iii. 85, 107, h with 
 a numeral, which, as in Theoorit., I should render 'up to.' (ictA 8^. 
 This is 6^ in apodosi recalling the statement with which the ch. commences 
 after the interruption of a long parenthesis. 
 
 (5.) Tip |ieYdX.<f crrdXcp. Note the article. twv |v|Ji'iroXe(i,T)<r(ivT<i)V. 
 
 Those who regard the aorist as any other past tense, must be puzzled by this 
 participle, as Pop. is, who remarks, ' non ut plerumque partioipium aoristi dici- 
 tur, nam primum bellum Persicum non erat communiter gestum. ' According 
 to our theory of the aorist, the form of the expression is exactly correct, indefi- 
 nite, and not indicative of any particular time. The confederated Greeks — almost 
 equivalent to tuv ^vp,p,dxuv, the confederate Greeks, cf. Appendix. 
 irpofix.<"'T€S. See ch. 9, note a. 8iavoT|6^VTes — ' having formed the 
 
 resolve,' The 8i4 denotes its passage through their thoughts. Cf. ch. 17 a. 
 d.va<rKcvaa-d,)i.cvoi. The correlative to KOTainceudfo/iai. It is used in military 
 writers to denote the breaking up of a camp. See Xen. Anah. vi. 2. 5, and 
 
Chap. 19.] KOTES ON THXJCYDIDES. 31 
 
 here it must mean something similar, i. e. ' having packed up all their moveable 
 furniture, amd taken it with them.' SiEKpCOrio-av — 'were sepa/rated 
 
 off into the pa/rties of the A. and £.' Cf. ch. is b. Pop. appropriately quotes 
 'dissidere in Arminium ao Segestera,' Tac. Ami. i. 55 ; so Siecpavri means 'were 
 manifestly seen to be the most powerful on the opposite sides.' Cf. iv. 51, 108, 
 yi. 17. 
 
 (c.) 6|j.oix|i£tt is an Ionic word (Herod, vii. 145), not in use, says Kriig.. by 
 the Attics. A distinction has been drawn that Jiz/i/taxia denotes alliance in 
 subordination to some leader; Sfiaix/J-ia a league upon terms of equality. But 
 it is impossible to pronounce positively upon the correctness of this. For the 
 circumstances see ch. 102. )utcI KivStivwv — amiid dangers, i. e. in 
 
 actual service. Kriig. compares i. 70, 5, ii. 42, 3, iii. 56, 3. vi. 31, i. Am. 
 paraphrases well: ' Their field of exercise was not the parade, but the field of 
 battle.' Bl. quotes a similar description of the Boman military system, Joseph. 
 £ell. Jud. iii. 5. i. 
 
 Chapter XIX. — (a.) if|7oiiVTo — 'exercised their f|7E|i.ovCa.' Matthise, from 
 a hasty consideration of this passage, was induced to believe that riyeicdai 
 governed the accusative. It evidently stands here independently, and the 
 accusative depends upon ^x""'''^^' iiri,Ttfiiluii iroXireveiv — 'to live 
 
 under a polity accommodated to oligarchical interests. ' It makes little difference 
 whether with Pop. we read iro\iTei<r<ii(n, or with Kriig. iro\iTeli(Tov(n, as there is 
 ample authority for either form of expression — the latter being rather more 
 direct and definite — how they shall, instead of, in order that they may. The 
 words are paralleled exactly by oiiK ^TriTTjSeidjs ^x^*-^ "^^ 82, i, and Karatrr'^ffetv 
 is rb ^TTiTiJSeioc iv. 76, 4, and especially i. 144. The method and extent of the 
 Spartan 'B.ye/J.ovla is set forth by Miiller, Dor. book i. ch. ix. § 3. The Spartan 
 supremacy was exercised in expeditions of the whole confederacy. A Spartan 
 King was Generalissimo, with many of the privileges of the old Homeric 
 Chieftain. The Spartans before a war sent round to the subordinate states an 
 order to furnish part of a contingent, the maximum of which was always a 
 determined quantity previously fixed ; but they never (like their rivals) exacted 
 a regular annual contribution independent of circumstances. On the internal 
 affairs, laws and institutions of the allied states, the confederacy had legally no 
 influence. It was, says Miiller, the only confederacy, which in the flourishing 
 times of Greece combined extensive powers with justice, and a respect for the 
 independence of its weaker members. irapaXoP(5vT€s, that -this 
 
 word does not imply a possession acquired by force or craft may be seen, (inter 
 alia) from its use, oh. 9 0, rifv ^a<ri,\elav irapaKa^eiv. For the manner of ac- 
 quisition see i. 99, 96. Tol KpaTurra must be connected as an 
 accusative with i^vB-qaav, cf. i. 6 d. And so ra Kpdria-Ta TrapaaKevdj^eaOai. 
 arUKov i. 31 a, and rh, dpufra irpdrretv, v. 9, 7. Kriig. These are apparently 
 adverbial usages. The cis is taken by some of the old editors with ri 
 KpdTurTO, 'as excellently as possible.' Bl. remarks that this sense is little appro- 
 priate, and prefers to consider ujs as equivalent to STav, ' tham when they once 
 most flowrished.' 'This refers to the period a little before the conclusion of the 
 thirty years' treaty, when the Athenians were masters not only of the islands^ 
 and the Asiatic Greek colonies, but had also united to their confederacy BcEotia 
 
33 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^oo^ !■ 
 
 and Achaia on the continent of Greece itself.' See chap, io8, iii, 115. Am, 
 The times of the five years' truce (ch. 112) and the battle of Coronea (ch. 113). 
 aKpai<|>vyjsisford — Kepaio — fr. Kepdwvius.nS.4idvrj% — ' fresh fromthefoimt," pure,' 
 ' unmingled,' ' unimpaired. ' Eurip, has vrjes a,Kpa.i.(p!'eis, Hec. V. 533; butKjiig. 
 remarks that the word does not elsewhere occur in Attic prose. Tr. thwn as (when) 
 m former days they flourished most vigorously iinth their confederation unimpaired. 
 avTots. Grrote has a note, vol. v. p. 356, in which he contends that aiirots in- 
 cludes both the Lacedaemonians and Athenians ; because as Thuc. had not said 
 that the Athenian empire at the beginning of the Pel. war had diminished in 
 magnitude, the comparison between two periods of it could not be clearly un- 
 derstood. The contrast, he says, is between confederate Greece before the war, 
 and bisected Greece in a state of war. I cannot regard this as probable ; airois 
 plainly belongs to the second clause introduced by ' kdTivaloi. 8J opposed to the 
 oi yXv AaKedaifidvLOi ; and according to Mr. Grote's interpretation, no satis- 
 factory meaning can be assigned to ttjs ^vfj.fiaxlo.s d.Kpai<f>vovSf which is a natural 
 expression for the Athenian league while fresh and unimpaired by desertion, 
 but as it seems to me, would be very improperly applied as an antithesis to 
 the entire breaking up of the confederacy against Persia. 
 
 Chaptbe XX. — (a.) tcL [i^v oSv. Most of the editors agree in observing 
 that the opposing clause is to be found in the next ch. though some consider it 
 to be iK 5i tCiv, k.t.\., and others with Kriig. /cai 6 iroXe/ios oSros. Very much 
 has been written about the words which follow. The difficulty seems to he, 
 that whereas the construction is complete with x^XfrA 6vTa as the subject of 
 xiffTeOcrai, — Trdvn i^ijs re/f/iij/jiiji are added, formingasortofoj^cc^itiecasegovenied 
 by the verb. To me these words aeem an after- thought or qualification. Thucy- 
 dides was about to say the to, TraXoiA are difficult to credit — but while enun- 
 ciating this, modifies it — 'yet not absolutely so, for on the whole they are credible 
 enough, but it is difficult to establish each consecutive link in the chain of evidence. ' 
 He therefore says, they are difficult to believe as established by argument after 
 argument consecutively, or perhaps, taking TnaTevaai more independently — difficult 
 for a man to become a believer in them upon am unbroken chain of evidence — i, e. if 
 a man does believe them, he must be satisfied with finding some links in the chain 
 less firmly established than others. That TL<rTeva-ai should be found where iruTrev- 
 erjvai might have been expected, is not contrary to the genius of the Greek lan- 
 guage. See the cases collected by Matthise, § 535, and compare xiXct'^ &p^a.i vii. 
 51. xakmwTipom eXvai x/jotrTroXe/icic vii. 51. Bl. cites Cicero De. Or., i, 58, 'res 
 difficiles perdiscere,' and see particularly note on eS iroietv, ch. 132 b. Eeiske 
 and Wyttenbach conjecture Trio-Tucrai — ' difficult to confirm by a strictly consecutive 
 chain of proof ,' a very obvious correction upon which most persons would hit, 
 were the reading of the text inadmissible. Kampfer explains, 'quum ouivis 
 testimonio forte deinceps oblato credere difficile sit.' But (as T. K. A. rightly 
 says) ^l^s denotes regular succession, not fortuitous occurrence. Pop. has, not 
 very correctly I think — 'res diffidlis creditu, eiiamisi exordine guodque testimo- 
 nium ad rem comprobamdam proferatur,' for where does etiamsi proferatw 
 come from? Kriig., with ingenuity reads wav ti — ' in each particular consecu- 
 tively to believe from proof But I cannot help considering the expression an 
 unnatural one, though he supports it from vii. 29. I find that Peile's transla- 
 
Chap. 30.j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 33 
 
 tion does not materially differ from that given, and he aptly compares iii. 1 3, 
 ToiaTjTas '^xovTEs irpo<pda'e(.s Kal ahias dTrio-Tfj^ev, carets ^kv tols d/cotioucrt 
 yi/Qvai us elK6Tii>s iSpdaa/iev — clear indeed {i.e. of such a nature that it ia 
 clear) for those who hear them to perceive that we have done it — as parallel to the 
 present case — x"'^^'"'^ S''''"" — ieing difficult {i.e. of such a nature that it is diffi- 
 cult) to huild one's belief of them upon a complete chain of evidence. Bl. is I think 
 quite wrong, ' Such I have found to he the state of affairs in ancient times, how- 
 ever hardly it may find credit, even when established on a regular chain of proofs. ' 
 {b.) ' A9riva£(ov ■yofiv. Some doubt has been expressed as to the meaning of 
 the particle. It obviously is, according to its etymology (cf. ch. 2 e.) 'This is 
 evidenced at any rate by the case of the Athenians if by nothing else.' 
 'Iir. Kal 06O-. K. T. \. The oi3k ttraaiv cannot be connected with ^aav, for it is ■ 
 plainly impossible that the Athenians could have been ignorant of this fact. 
 It is better, therefore, with Kriig. to consider these words as purely parenthetical. 
 iiiroToir^icravTes, K. t. \. Saving had some suspiicion that on that day, and just 
 as they were on the point of acting (lit. ' alongside of the matter,' vi. 57), a dis- 
 closure had been made by one of their accomplices — or, having suspected that some 
 disclosure, die. Bpdo-oVTas ti, KaV KuvSuveveiv. Compare the note 
 
 on elirivras ti KivSvveieiv iii. 53. It is clear that the phrase means, 'not to 
 risk their lives for nothing,' ' not to run the peril without having first done 
 something to make it worth while.' The words are well explained by Peile. 
 ' Bvi wishing before they were seized, having dons something, so and not other- 
 wise — if it must be so (or e'en), to run the risk of their lives. So in the well- 
 known prayer of Ajax — iv S^ (t>aet Kal 6\e(riTov — 'e'en Mil us' — 'Mil us if you 
 will.' Krug. refers to the Kal before Sivuvrai, iv. 98, -i, which see and cf. iiirep 
 rod dyadov rdxa Tis Kal ToA/t^ diroBai^eli'. Romans v. 7- AcwKopiov. 
 
 The temple of the daughters of Leos, who, according to the tradition, had been 
 sacrificed by their father during a famine, as an offering for the lives of the 
 people. The temple stood in the Ceramicus within the walls.' Am. 
 
 (c.) a.fi.vr\imlv. ' A rare word,' Krtig. ' I have only met with it in Soph. 
 El. v. 482, and Aratus, Diosem. 115,' Bl. |J.i^ <|''n<|wp irpooTCee- 
 
 <r8ai — ' sese adju/tigere,' sc. to the party voting — it means, therefore, ' to vote.' 
 The statement of Herod, vi. 57, to which this is supposed to refer, is somewhat 
 obscure. He speaks of the two senior senators who, in the absence of the 
 kings, represented them, as Sio fri^ovs Tideiiivovs, rpirTiv Se Ti)v iuvTwv. 
 Thucydides evidently understood this (if he did refer to it) to mean — 'each 
 giving two votes (so. as the monarch's representative), and then, severally, u. 
 third for themselves,' so that they would vote six times altogether. And so 
 must we understand it, though C. F. Hermann, P. A. G. % 25. 7, Heeren and 
 Mtiller consider that the words quoted do not imply with certainty that each king 
 had two votes — the latter, however, admitting that Herod, probably followed 
 this, the opinion generally received in Greece, vol. ii. p. 105, note. Arnold and 
 Miiller, Dorians (vol. ii. p. 105) state their belief that Thucyd. refers to Hel- 
 lanicuB rather than Herodotus, whose work he can scarcely have read. If, says 
 Am., Herod, i. 130, refers to the revolt of the Modes against Darius Nothus 
 A.c. 409, it may be questioned whether Thucyd. had ever seen his history ; not- 
 withstanding the well-known story of his having heard it read at the Olympic 
 games. This seems correct enough, for the termination of Thucyd. exfle dates in. 
 
34 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^o°= I- 
 
 the year 403 A.O., when probably the greater part of his work had been com- 
 posed. See oh. 236. Indeed Dahlmann seems to have established this view, 
 of. ch. 22 d. The second charge of inaccuracy here brought does not certainly in- 
 volve the assertion that there was no each place as Pitane, for Herod, iii. 55, 
 expressly says that he had been there himself ; but, as A. remarks, it denies that 
 the Demus of Pitane was ever of sufficient importance to allow its inhabitants to 
 form part of the national army, as in the old Greek and Roman system the mili- 
 tary divisions corresponded entirely with the civil ones. Notwithstanding the 
 denial of Thucyd. , Mtiller, Dorians, ii. p. 49, asserts that 'Pitane was of suffi- 
 cient importance to have its own gymnastic contests, and to furnish a battalion of 
 its own called Pitauates.' This he considers confirmed by the fact that Caracalla, 
 in imitation of antiquity, composed a '\6xosTltTamT7js of Spartans, Herodian, iv. 
 8, and that the Tarentines who retained the memory of the mother city more in 
 their names of places than in their customs, had a division of their army which 
 was called Pitanates. The nepiwoKoL XlLTavarai. are mentioned upon a coin of 
 Tarentum, Millinger, Plate i. n. 19. Schweighauser would reconcile both histo- 
 rians, by supposing that there was such a cohort levied for the occasion at the 
 battle of Platsea, and commanded by Amompharetus ; but, as this was not per- 
 petual, it had ceased to exist in the time of Thucydides. This is, however, only 
 that sort of hypothesis which any one can make, and besides Thuc. boldly says — 
 oii5' iy^vero TTihTrore. aTaXaCirccpos — ^ unpainstahing.* Pop. com- 
 
 pares (what is probably an imitation) ' vulgi indiligentiam veri,' Tac. Mist. iv. 
 49. ?Toi.|i.o — 'what is ready to hmd,' ' the first account that pre- 
 
 sents itself.' 
 
 Chaptbe XXI. — (a.) ifiai. Notwithstanding the difficulty of coming to any 
 satisfactory conclusion about ancient matters. Toiafiro — &, SiifXiov, 
 
 Pop. seems to understand, ' such as I have recovmted.' Kriig. makes &. itTJkdov 
 the object of vojiliav, and roiaOra the predicate — ' what I have recounted to be 
 such, (xaXio-Ta — 'as near as can he made out,' of. 13 c. Tr. 
 
 a|iapTdvoi so. vajxl^av — 'would not he wrong vn holding,' so also join 7r«rTeiiui', 
 ' and in not being more inclined to believe. ' XoYo7pd<)>oi. The prose 
 
 writers, generally historians. Scholars confine the words to the prose writers 
 antecedent to Herodotus, such as Hecatseus of Miletus, Charon of Lampsacus, 
 5Canthus the Lydian, Pherecydes of Leros, and Hellanious of Mylilene. The 
 student will find a more particular account, MuUer, Hist. Or. Lit. ch. xviii. p. 
 2$8, E. T. With aire ^vvideaav of course repeat TurTeioiv. 
 J«VT£8r]|j,i,. Perhaps, like our 'concoct,' implies the notion of making up a 
 fictitious story. Bl. cites Dem. p. 277, X670i;s c6Trpo<nlnrovs Kal /lidovs crvudels; 
 and in Xia,tin componere mendacia. irpotray. tf aXrfiar. — 'with a view to 
 
 what was more attractive to the ear, rather than to truth.' This double compara- 
 tive is common both in Greek and Latin, when two qualities are assigned to 
 the same subject, and it is supposed to possess more of the first than the second. 
 This is Jelf's explanation, § 782, f. It appears to me that the presence of the 
 second quality is only asserted by a sort of euphemism, or politeness. In fact, 
 it is gently implied that the subject is rather deficient therein, e. g. Herod, iii. 
 65, iirohi(Ta Taxirspa fj ffO(piliTepa, ' I have acted with more predpitamcy than 
 wisdom,' implying there was very little wisdom in the act at all. Madvig'g 
 
Chap. 22. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 35 
 
 explanation is similar to that of Jelf (Za«. Gr. § 307), 'A comparison of two 
 qualities which are found in the same subject in an unequal degree, is denoted 
 either by the positive with ' mag'is/ or by two comparatives, '^milii contio 
 fuit verier quam gratior populo,' Liv. xxii. 38, which seems to me equally open 
 to the above remark. See e.g. la crpaTriyol irXiove^ ^ ^eXrloyes, Arist. 
 AcJi. loii. avc^^XeVTa — ' which cannot ie submitted to the test,' or, 
 
 as Am. well gives it, 'which cannot le proved or disproved.' iXiyx^'-", it may 
 be well to remind the non-logical reader, may imply the establishment of a con- 
 clusion by indirect proof, as well as its direct refutation. Consult the logical 
 treatises of Arist. and his Rhetoric. Am. 's version of iiri ri fivB. iKviv. is not so 
 good — 'having taken their place among fahles.' See note on i. 3 b, and trans. 
 ' home won their way into mythus' — on AwliTTm as equal to &a-Te Hvicra eXvai., see 
 the long note and collection of passages, iii. 65, (pCMas Kal oi iroKeiilois. Com- 
 pare also i. 140, Tas ^vfKpopds afiadSis x'^PV"'"''- 
 
 (i.) T|-yi](rd|ievos, like the other participles, must be connected with aiiaprdvoi. 
 (OS iraXaitt etvai — 'formatters so antiquated,' i.e. 'considering they 'are anti- 
 quated;' the elvrxi is quite pleonastic, and belongs, as in &uc efoai, to an early 
 stage of the language. Indeed, most languages in such a stage have a tendency 
 to pleonastic usages of the verb ' to ie,' as may still be seen in the conversation 
 of the vulgar, cf. Jelf, § 869, 5. The words of course modify dTroxptlivTas ; ms, in 
 this case, is common enough. Cf. o^5^ dSivaTo? us AaK€daip.6va elireiv, iv. 84, ' a 
 pretty good speaker for a Lacedcemonian. ' Numerous examples may be seen in 
 Matth. § 628, 3. The Latins use ' ut' in precisely the same way. Cf Fre- 
 quentem cultoribus, ut inter montana popiilum, Liv. xxi. 34. Si^Xcoirei. 
 
 The ellipse is to be filled up as in Herod, i. 174, At^iir/ SijXoi eavTTjv iovaa 
 irepl^^vTos (T. K. A.). Compare iii. 84, ij dvBpairela <j>icLS iS7JKtii<rev aKpar^s 
 dpryri^ oSaa. avriov — sc. rwv 6,pxalav. ' Vetera extoUimus, recen- 
 
 tium incuriosi,' Tao. Ann. ii. 78. 
 
 Chaptee xxii. — (ffl.) The statement which follows, though apparently 
 clear enough, has been the subject of much controversy. Bloomf. declares that 
 the writer, in recording speeches, brings forward no sentiment but what was 
 really spoken ; that the words only are in some cases changed, because it would 
 have been impossible to retain in the memoiy the exact expressions used on 
 each occasion; that due regard is always had to the characteristics of the 
 speaker, and that the intent of the writer was ' pr^stare atque conservare simu- 
 lacrum eloquentiffl virorum clarissimorum,' Livy, xlv. 25. But this is incon- 
 sistent with the unmistakeably Thucydidsean impress to be found in every 
 speech. Perhaps the most strongly marked attempt at imitation is to be found 
 in the speech of Sthenelaidas. But this was a very short and very notorious 
 speech, and must have been tolerably well known. Otherwise, Athenians, Co- 
 rinthians, Boeotians, Syracusans, and even Spartans ; Pericles, Alcibiades, and 
 Nicias, so far as the mere form of expression goes, speak very much alike ; and 
 indeed there, are certain cases where it is hardly probable that Thucydides can 
 have had much positive and accurate information whereon to construct his 
 written orations. ' The speeches,' says Miiller, ' often stand in a relation to 
 one another, which could not have been justified by existing circumstances. 
 Thus, the speech of the Corinthians, in i. 1 20, is a direct answer to the speech of 
 
 13 2 
 
36 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Archidamus in the Spartan assembly, and to that of Pericles at Athens, though 
 the Corinthians did not hear either of them.' Lit. Anc. (freece, p. 489. On the 
 other hand, we must not believe them to be pure fictions like those of Livy, Taci- 
 tus, and Plutarch, and the majority of ancient historians. This extreme opinion 
 is adopted by the French translator: 'lis ne sent qu'un cadre adopts pour de- 
 tacher du corps de I'ouvrage des ^v&ements, des details de moeurs qui Thuoy- 
 dide a voulu mettre dans un plus grand jour.' Thucyd. evidently obtained all 
 the information available as to what was said, and what there was occasion to 
 say, and then placing himself in the position of the speakers, he recounts it in his 
 own words, as near to the imagined original as he can. But, as has been said, he 
 does not succeed in divesting himself of his identity. Arn. illustrates by what 
 appears to me a very similar case — that, viz. of Johnson, who reproduced ela- 
 borate parliamentary debates in the Gentleman's Magazine, with no other basis 
 to go upon than the substance of the debate faithfully reported. Probably 
 these exercises contain most of the arguments used at the time, yet every one 
 would recognise them as the composition of Johnson. Peile translates : Bnt as 
 the several speakers would have appeared to me {i/iol emphatic), had I been always 
 present, to speak inost to the purpose on each point that came hefore thein. This 
 connects the hv with kZbKovv. but he also, as Pop., suggests its being taken 
 with direiv, which seems to me more probable. ' As they appeared to me — when 
 writing my history — likdy to have spoken, so as at the same time to speak most to 
 tlie purpose.' See, for the collocation, ii. 83, 89, iii. 42, 89. Xoyiji 
 
 eWov. This is in direct antithesis to to 5' 'ipya tQv irpaxS^vrav — 'The speeches 
 that were spoken' — as opposed to 'the deeds which were done.' Pop. objects 
 that this cannot be so, since it is not the pi. \6yois. He accordingly supposes the 
 noun to be added, in order to form one of those verbal balances on which Lob. 
 Parol. Gr. Gr. ii. p. 525, has enlarged. But this seems hypercritical. Kbyoi, 
 ' speaking' in general, may surely refer to more than one ' speech. ' Kriig., in 
 my judgment correctly, renders ' durch Rede,' by means of speech. Of. ii. 46, 
 69. ev aira — sc. rip wo'Ke/i.^'iv. Kriig. cites aird, i. 69. It may 
 
 be of importance to the student to observe, that Thuc. thus uses the cases of this 
 pronoun, i. e, without an immediate antecedent. Of. iii. 84. Siauvii- 
 
 |j,oveii(rai^' 'remember throughout.' i\o]>.h/(f~' keeping as close as 
 
 possible to the general purport of what was really said — {ttjs ^v/iirda-ris means, 
 'taken as a whole') — so has it been set forth by me.' Or, as Krug. has it, 'So 
 have I made them speak.' 
 
 (b.) irpaxB^VTuv. 'Connect as closely as possible with ip T<p woXi/jiif,' 
 EJriig. ; who judiciously remarks that toi irpaxBivra is a term of very wide com- 
 pass indeed, embracing all sorts of transactions, and even speeches. Tlierefore 
 Ti. Ipya rOiv TvpaxShrav is only a small part of irpaxeivTa. Others understand 
 it as the mere verbal balance to the clause, Uyi^ d-wov. It seems to me to 
 imply, if we could so express it, 'the actuality of what was done,' 'the real acts 
 and results.' That the expression is emphatic and intensive is the opinion of 
 Hermann on Soph. Trach. v. 229, who translates, 'id quod iiere factwni est.' 
 Compare, as an apt illustration, a passage cited by Bloomf. from Quiutilian: 
 ' Historia soribitur non ad actum rd pugnamque prassentem, sed ad memoriam 
 posteritatis.' aXXd ots. ^riig. tTa,m\atea, ' I thought myself bound 
 
 only to set forth partly that at which I myself was present, partly that which so 
 
Chap. 23.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 37 
 
 far as was practicable, I had with exactness informed myself of from others' — 
 lit. ' having exactly informed, ' oh is accordingly governed by TapTJv ; tlie con- 
 struction changes, and instead of Kal & iire^riKBov, we liave koX iire^eKdiiv wapk 
 T&v SXKuv, This way of accounting for the construction apparently arises from 
 an unwillingness to apply iire^eKBiiv to ofs irapfiv aiiris. To me it does not seem 
 so entirely inappropriate — ' Carefully going over again all the particulars of 
 matters lohereof I was myself a/n eye-witness.' ' It is supposed that Thucyd. 
 served in the first seven years of the war, for in the eighth he was appointed to 
 command the Athenian fleet off the coast of Thrace.' T. K. A. from Owen. 
 
 (c.) eivoCas ^ |>.v<i(Jir)s ?x°'' — ^''- ^avrof, ' as each happened to be disp>osed in 
 respect of his recollection of the facts, or of his good-will to one of the tioo parties' 
 CKarepuv is the objective gen., as ' Xdifvaluv evvoli)., vii. 57. For the gen. eivoLas, 
 denoting the respect in which the action of the verb is taken, see Matth. § 367; 
 Jelf, § 528, and the long note; Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. iii. p. 77. 
 
 [d.) TO (i.'f| [jivGuSes. The junior student will observe that ri ov /ivSuSet 
 would convey the direct and positive negation of the presence of a mythic ele- 
 ment — 'the fact that they contain no myths.' But rb jj,^ ixvSCiSss is subjective, 
 and refers to the impression existing in the reader's mind — ' the fact that he 
 sees no myths in them, cf. ch. 1 4 1 e. ' This I believe to be correct, but the student 
 may consult Jelf, § 745, 5. 8<roi hk povXiii<rovTai.. This passage has 
 
 been characterized as 'very difficult' by the editors, and has been made the 
 subject of special criticisms by Krliger, Melhorn, Hennann, Osiander, and 
 others. Where Thucydides, in a somewhat complicated sentence, has already 
 employed words which would be subsequently suitable to express something 
 else, sooner than fall into tautology, he avoids their repetition, without supply- 
 ing their place. In the present case, as it appears to me, either fieXKSvTwi' or 
 iaecrSai is thus made to do double duty. Before consulting any commentator, 
 I conceived the arrangement of the whole to be, Scroi. Si ^ovXriaovrai rOiv re 7eco- 
 lj.4vtj3v rb (ratph (TKOireiv, Kal tCov p.eWbvT(jov irork aWis — Kara t6 avdpdnrelov — tolo^- 
 rav Kal TrapairX-qirliiiv iaeuBai [roiirous] ib<p^\ifi.a Kplveiv avTci, dpKoiivTws ?Jet 
 [1/1.01.] — 'Bict they who shall be desirous to attain to the correct view of past 
 transactions, a/nd of those likely at some future time {in all human probabi- 
 lity) to recur in such or similar shape, for these to regard what I have written 
 as useful, will be ample reward for me' Karci r6 6.v9poiwelov is the after- 
 thought qualification, parenthetically introduced in our author's manner. 
 Bl. Cf Herod, i. 86, oiSiv n piaWov is iavroD \iyay, rj is Hirav rb avSpa-wfiCov ; 
 and Terent. Heaut. iii. 1. 40, ' Si quid hujus simile fortfe aliquando evenerit, ut 
 sunt humana.' rb a-d(p€s — the clear and positive, as distinct from rb ^uSwScs, the 
 obscure and mythical view. For roiaCra Kal ■wapair'hTjaia, cf. i. 143, and else- 
 where, with T£ Kal, i. 140, viii. 78, Pop. Cf. ' Haec atque talia. ' &pKOVVTas 'i^ei, 
 Bl. observes, occurs again, iEsoh. Choeph. v. 879, r^iSe 5' apKoivras ixei.. I 
 really do not know that examination of the numerous commentaries has much 
 modified my original view. Hermann understands thus. ' Satis erat factum, si 
 qui vel res quce gestcB sunt, accurate considerare, vel ubifutura, ut fieri solet, ean- 
 dem aut similem formam habebunt, utilem judicare hunc librum voluerint. ' On 
 which Poppo remarks, /ic\X6;'Tuj' tali ratione bis cogitari posse nobis non videtur. 
 The version in which he himself acquiesces is — ' Quicunque autein volent, etin iis 
 qucE evenerint, id, quod pro explorato habendv,m sit, considerare, et in iis qu(B, ut 
 
38 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^oo^ ^• 
 
 sunt res humancB, talia vel similia eventura sint, si utilia hac (sc. haiic Tiistonam) 
 judicent, satis erit factum/ which, if I understand it, does not materially differ 
 from what I have given. Kriig. writes aKoireiv again with w^eXi/ia, and under^ 
 stands /J-eWdpTuv a second time, i.e. tS>v fi.eKK6vTav, fi.eXK6vTav t. Kal vr. la-effdai 
 — meaning, I suppose, future events about to take place in similar form, &c. &c. 
 (which is at least very awkward), and understands toi5tois, not ^jj-oi, after ?|ei — 
 'fiir die wird es (das Werh) genilgen,' for such persons my worlc will he satisfac- 
 tory. Wex, a late German writer, would combine u<pi\ifia Kpiveiv, and make 
 Tu>v iJ.e\\6vTuv—l(rea-8ai3, gen. case depending upon it, translating ' niitzliche 
 Winlce zur Beurtheilung von Ereignissen' — useful hints for determining events; 
 but I know of no such government for the genitive. KTf|(j.a Is aeC. 
 
 These words have acquired a world-wide celebrity in the sense of 'an everlasting 
 possession.' It may perhaps disappoint the student to hear that it is question- 
 able whether they can bear such an interpretation. MiiUer {Lit. Anc. Greece, 
 p. 487) says — 'Thucydides for such persons (so. Siroi iSoi/Xiio-ocrai) bequeathes 
 his book as a lasting study — it does not mean an everlasting memorial or monu- 
 ment. He opposes his work, which people were to keep by thera, and read 
 over and over again, to a composition which was designed to gratify an audience 
 on one occasion only.' a7tSvi<r|ia means a sort of prize- essay, and 
 
 has reference to the ordinary musical, poetical, and rhetorical contests in which 
 compositions possessing only an ephemeral and transitory interest, were no 
 doubt often produced merely for the sake of an iTrlSei^is. Zevort, the last French 
 translator (1853), repeating a popular opinion, writes — ' Thuoydide fait ici allu- 
 sion kH^rodote, sans le nommer. li laisse rarement &happer I'occasion d'attaquer 
 ce grand historien, dont le g^nie poetique et brillant contrastait avec I'esprit 
 rigoureux et positif de Thuoydide.' But Dahlmann, the biographer of Hero- 
 idotus, has shown that there is no ground whatever for Lucian's story about 
 Herodotus reciting his History at Olympia, and consequently very small reason 
 to suppose that Thucydides was acquainted with it (of. oh. 20, c). At any 
 rate these covert and disingenuous sneers at a great fellow-labourer in the field 
 of historical literature are but little consonant with a candid and noble mind, 
 such as was that of Thucydides. Quintilian had this passage in his eye when 
 he wrote his well known description of history, x. i, 31 : 'Historia scribitur ad 
 narrandum, uon ad probandum ; totumque opus, non ad actum rei, pugnamque 
 prtesentem, sed ad memoriam posteritatis, et ingenii famam componitur.' 
 luYKEiTai., as Kriig. remarks, stands to ^vvTiBivai. in the light of a perf pass. So 
 .i^schin. i. 125, ^|et Kal ?repos X670S tl^ iirh too airov <70(pLffT0u {TvyK^ifievo^ — ' 
 tr. ' it has been composed and is placed before you. ' 
 
 Chapteb XXIII. — (a.) Svoiv. Phi-yniohus has Sveip eirl ii6rqs yeviKTJs rtOerai, 
 oixl Si 50TI.K7JS, and Am. seems inclined to accept the rule. The MSS. vary greatly 
 in this and other places between the two. Bek. and Dind. adopt SveTv; Pop., 
 60II., and Kriig., dvolit. Consult Poppo's note, from which it appears that Svav 
 is not justly asserted by Bremi (de Corond, § 173) to have been a favourite old 
 Attic form of the genitive; that it is of very dubious authority in the 
 Tragoedians, and that it is only found in the worst MSS. of Demosthenes, 
 though most common in Plutarch and the later writers. From all this, it looks 
 like a modem form, introduced by the copyists to whom it was familiar, into 
 
Chap. 33 .J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 39 
 
 their tranaoripta of the older authors. The Scholiast says the two naval hattles 
 were Artemisium and Salamis ; the two on land, Thermopylae and Platsea. 
 Kriig. does not understand how these can be said to have decided the war, and 
 therefore believes reference to be made to the battles of Salamis, and Platffia, 
 and the double battle at Mycale. 
 
 (b.) inrh Pap^dpuv. None is recorded except Mycalessus vii. 29, Kriig. 
 o-<j>MV is added, because, though 7r6Xeis is the grammatical subject, 'kd-qvaioi. 
 KoX neXoTroccTjtrioi are really supplied by the mind. Thuc. refers to Plataea, iii. 
 68, and Thyrea, iv. 57. Kriig. Poppo adds Mytileue, iii. 50, but this was a 
 case of dismantling rather than of entire destruction. olK^ropas 
 
 (ler^PaXov. Potidaea, ii. 70; ^gina, ii. ■27; Soione, v. 32; Thyrea, iv. 57; 
 Pop. o^fre — KaC. Poppo remarks upon koX thus following otfre, 
 
 that the German idiom is similar, ' noch so viele Verbannungen und Metz- 
 eleien.' The Latins also, he says, after Jiejwe have not only attt and I'e, but 
 also que; and upon the strength of this passage he contends for a wider appli- 
 cation of the idiom than that allowed by Matthise, § 609. I had always referred 
 this oiVe back to the previous one, and rendered the present clause as embraced 
 beneath the oUre, ' nor so much hamishment and murder; and this I now see is 
 also Kriig. '3 view. 8icl to crrao-id^eiv. ' Ut Coroyras, iii. 69, 8 1 ; 
 
 Megaria, iv. 74; Samos, viii. 21.' Pop. 
 
 (c.) aKof) — 'hearsay,' or mere 'tradition,' as opposed to fact. Kriig. com- 
 pares Herod, iv. 16, rot KarOirepde ^\eye aKorj, (pets 'laaTjddi^as etvac rods raOra 
 \4yovTas. oiiK ftirwrra Ko/ria-'n] — ' have not been, incontrovertibly estab- 
 
 lished.' Seio-pLuv. See ii. 8; iii. 87, 89; iv. 52; v. 45, 50; viii. 6. Pop. 
 
 tTriayflV. ' Non occupabant, quae tamen explanatio verbis, c. 50, nonnihil 
 adjuvatur sed prcevalebant, ut Dion Cassius, p. 1140, iirl irXelov! 6 aeuxfibs 
 itretx^, ' Pop. The truth seems to be that iirix'^ is ' to extend over, ' and that Time 
 and Place are after it, as in many other cases regarded as identical in point of 
 construction — the metaphysical basis at the bottom of both ideas coinciding — 
 but as we have 7-ijs expressed here, I should not hesitate to tr. ' extended over 
 the greatest amount of country, ' certainly not of the habitable globe, as has been 
 suggested. The iTeuriJ,Sv vipt, ' on the score of earthquakes,' is, as Arn. says, 
 exactly equivalent to olov re ffei(7p,ol, and a. nominative case. 
 ckX^C^cis. a not uncommon change of construction. See for instance i. 52, 2, 
 and supply with Pop. ovk dirLffroL KariaTTjaav, irapd K. t. X.' — * 
 
 'placed along -side of,' i.e., 'compared with those recorded informer times.' 
 ai>Xy.oi. The ' Sicoitates' of Caesar, Kriig. 'ia-n irap'ots. Jelf, 
 
 § 817, 8, and elal Kal a'l, Jelf, § 8 [7, 3. i] oi\ ■fJKio-Ta . . . . rj 
 
 \oi.p,u8r|s vdo-os. Kriig. aptly illustrates this repetition of the article by Plat. 
 Gorg. 502, b. tI S^ St] i) ixeij,v'r] aiirri Kal BavfiaiTTTi 17 t^s Tpay(i>dlas iroiijiris. We 
 may add, t^v ^7ra77eXiai' t^v toijtov raiiniv rfiv Ka\i]v, and Midias, § 189, rds 
 dTTO/ipijT-ous — ras tovtov yovds. See other cases, Matth. § 277. From a com- 
 parison of these, it will, I think, appear that the article is doubled where the 
 writer means to dwell upon, and make a great deal of the notion denoted by the 
 noun to which it is attached. |i^pos ti. Tirones wiU remark that 
 
 fxipoi Ti ia an appreciable, and therefore considerable part, like ' aliquot in 
 Latin. Cf. ii. 47 for the effect of the pestilence, and for the phrase cf. iv. 30, 
 ii. 69, iii. 89, where see note. Peile quotes Juvenal, xii. no, 'Partem aliquam 
 
40 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 belli. ' luvcirefleTO — set upon them, or fell upon them, at once, properly 
 
 said of a hostile assault. 
 
 {d.) Xtl(ravT«s — sine artioulo, in that they hrolce, or hy hreaTcing the thirty 
 years' truce. TpvaKOVToireis. The same form occurs, i. 115; ii. 2. 
 
 rptaKovToijTides, i. 87; rpiaKOVTa^reis, v. I a. (cf. SeKa^TTjs, v. 25); TrefTTjKov- 
 raerls, v. 32; irevnjKOVTOijTT]!, v. 27. Kriig. For the history, see i. iij. 
 'Ei^ota,^ dXiiiciv i. II a. irpoi7pa<|»a irpiSTov. Commentators com- 
 
 pare for the pleonasm, irpoir^ix^avre^ irpdrepov, i. 29; irpbrcpov irpoHaKeTTO, 
 viii. 66; ^(j>6a.ffav irpoKaraXa^bvTes, iii. IT2 ; tt/jIj' TrpoSidyvure, i. 78. See, too, 
 Kriig. on Xen. Anab. i. 4, 14. toO |i.'f| jT)Tricrai. On this genitive, see 
 
 Jelf, § 492, 2, and supra, ch. 4a. 'iTpo(j>ao-iv is here 'ground,' 'occasion/ 
 
 a^rfa is perhaps more properly ' an alleged ca/nse,'' but both are used with adjectives 
 that modify and exchange their meaning. Kriig. says that Schoman on Isceus, 
 p. 181, has a note on the matter. What follows, Krtig. explains as a mixture 
 of two constructions, so. rrji' d\7j6eardTT}i' Trpbtpaatv Tois 'Adrfvaiovs TjyovtMit 
 fieyaXov^ yiyvopi^vovs, and roll's ' Adrjvaiovs iiyovfiat fxeydXovs yiyvofi4vovs dpav- 
 Kdffai h rb ToXe/xetv. Pop. argues that as rods 'AdTjvaiovs ijyoDfjLaL . . . 6Ti 
 fj.4yaXoi yiyvbixevoL TjvdyKatrav would be the ordinary idiom of the Greek 
 language, it is not strange to iind the accusative with the infinitive {ij.eydXovs 
 yiyvo^^vovs dvayKdaai) substituted for its equivalent the conjunction Stl with 
 the finite verb. At any rate, the junior student must not confound yiyi/op.hovs 
 with yeyevriii.ivov^ ; the latter is, ' because they had become great, ' the former, 
 ' because they were growing great,' denoting that the apprehensions of the one 
 party kept pace with the aggrandizement of the other. d<|>ave- 
 
 o-TdTT|V Xd'yo) — 'least openly urged in words.' 6S to <|>avepdv — 
 
 ' brought forwa/rd into the public sight.' Compare h rb ipavepbv dirodiipres, ch, 
 6, c. ; translate ' openly alleged. ' alrCai CKar^puv d<j>' ^v Kriig. 
 
 says is for alrlai. d(p ' Si* iKdrepoi. It seems quite as simple to trans, the causes 
 alleged by either party, owing to which they broke the treaty and settled into the 
 war. iKaripuv is here a true genetic case, or genitive denoting the source from 
 which the ahlai, were generated. But see Jelf, § 483, 4. 
 
 Chaptek XXIV. — (a.) tov'Ioviov KdXirov. ' It appears from this passage, 
 and from Herodotus, vi. 127, where Epidamnus is said to be on the Ionian 
 gulf, that this term included in the fifth century before the Christian era, the 
 southern part of the Adriatic, as well as the sea between Italy and Greece 
 , southward of the lapygian promontory, to which it was more properly 
 applied. It never seems, however, to have extended to the northern part of 
 the Adriatic which was called ' Adrias,' a name applying properly, as MitUer 
 thinks, to the coast near the mouths of the Po, where the old city of Adria or 
 Hatria was situated. 'Adrias' in Herodotus, i. 163, and v. 9, is the country 
 so called, and not the sea. Mtiller says that the earliest mention which he has 
 found of the sea under this name occurs in Lysias, advers. JAogiton. p. 908. 
 See Mtiller, Etrusher, Einleitung, iii. 4. The sea between Sicily and Greece 
 is by Thuoydides called the Sicilian sea, iv. 24, 53; vi. 13. Yet even this was 
 at a later period called ' Adrias,' as appears not merely from the well-known 
 passage in the Acts, xxvii. 27, where its meaning has been disputed, but also 
 from a similar passage in the life of Josephus, c. 3, where Josephus says that 
 
Chap. 34.] NOTES ON" THUCYDIDES. 41 
 
 on his way from Jerusalem to Rome he, too, was overtaken by a tempest, Karii 
 liiaov rbv 'ASplav, and was picked up by a ship of Cyrene, on her way to 
 Puteoli.' Arn. «oTrX&VTi. On this use of the dative of reference, see 
 
 Jelf, § 699, i, 'we should say, on your right hand as you sail in.' Epidamnus 
 was subsequently called Dyrraohium ; hence its modern name of Durazzo. 
 Kari S'f) rbv iraXaibv vdjiov. ' Qusnam fuerint jura, quae coloniaa originibus suis 
 debebant, uon alienum erit pauois hoc loco perstringere. Prime igitur ii, qui 
 in eoloniam mittebantur, armis et commeatu a civibus suis instruebantur de 
 publico, ut docet Libanius in argumento orationis Demosthenis, irepi rCiv iy 
 Xe^poi'iftrif). Prffiterea publica iis Diplomata debebantur, qu^ diro^Kia vocabant, 
 teste Hyperide in orat. Deliaoa apud Harpocrat. Sed quod praecipuum est, 
 sacra patria ooloni secum asportabant, ignemque sacrum e penetrali urbia de- 
 promtum et accensum ; quod docet Auctor Etymolog. in IlpvfaveLa : qui quidem 
 ignis si casu exstinctus esset, ex Prytaneo oonditorum accendi eum oportebat. 
 Moris quoque erat, ut colonise quotannis legates in inajorem pairiwm (sic 
 Curtius lib. 4, vertit, quam Grseci in^TpdiroXiv dicunt) mitterent Diis patriis 
 sacra facturos, ut testantur Polybius, cap. 114, legationum, et Cevetius, lib. 4. 
 Solenne etiam erat, ut colonife ab originibus suis Pontifices acciperent, ut con- 
 stat ex Thucydide, i. 25, § 4, et Scholiasts ad euudem locum; quin etiam, si 
 aliquando coloni aliam eoloniam aliquo deducere vellent, moris erat, ut ducem 
 a Tnajore patrid postularent, ut hoc in loco docet Thuoyd. ; nam CorcyrEei coloni 
 erant Corinthiorum, ideoque Phalium ex Metropoli arcessebant, ut colonise 
 Epidamnum deducendse dux esset. Plura hac de re vide in Valesii notis ad 
 Bxcerpta Polyhii, p. 7. Hvds. Add. Spamheim. Dissert, ix., de Usu et Freest. 
 Numism. p. 570, seqq.' Duk. There is little to be added to this note of 
 Duker's, except, perhaps, that the relation of a colony to a parent state was 
 considered analogous to that subsisting between children and parents, ws 
 yovevcn Trpbs T^Kva, Polyb. xii. 10, 3 ; and that war between the two was re- 
 volting to the natural instinct of the Greek mind. Let the student consult 
 for more particulars Hermann's Pol. Antiq. § 73, 74, 75. The 5r) here has 
 some slight approximation to that usage in which it is almost identical with 
 d-^Oev, i.e., when the writer does not personally vouch for his statement. Not 
 that Tliuc. means to deny it ; he only means, ' as was set forth by the parties 
 themselves.' Of. iii. 104, Kara xpriap^iv Srj riva, ' in accorda/nce, as it was 
 said, with a certain oracle.' tmv a!|>' "HpaKXeovs, Grote ii. p. 479. 
 
 (J.) crrao-CaVTes ev d\\T)Xoi.Sj more usually irpds. For the fact, see Arist. 
 Pol. V. I, 6. dirb iroXeiiou l<|)0<lpT]o-av — ' Were reduced to the 
 
 lowest ebb in consequence of a war.' So both Pop. and Kriig., and I think cor- 
 rectly. Kriig. compares d0' Sc iKTriTTTOvres i. 12. Giill. takes d7ro in the more 
 unusual sense of 'after,' and Am. notwithstanding his own note on d0' &v i. 
 12, connects the dx6 ttoX^/Uou with araalavTes. ttjs iroXXiis — 'the 
 
 greater part' — of. tt]v §aai.\ias yfiv ttji' iroXkriv ii. 48. Por other instances and 
 an account of the idiom see Matth. § 442, 2. 
 
 (c.) Tol TeXtDTttia 'in der letzten zeit.' Kriig. i. e. ' at last — in the period im- 
 mediately preceding this war' — for a similar adverbial use of the words, cf. iii. 
 65. Toiis Swarovs 'optimates,' — one of the recognized appellations of 
 
 the party opposed to the democracy. See more on the subject iii. 65, note b. 
 dir«XeoVT£s. Haase has conjectured eTriXeovres, but this is unnecessary— tr. 
 
4a NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 after tJieir departure, or expulsion. k\r\llovTO. Imperf. denoting 
 
 oontinued action. 
 
 {d. ) Toiis <J)^DY0VTas. ' The exiles ' — not in a past tense because the parti- 
 ciple almost becomes a substantive. Compare such cases as ij tIktoxhto., ' the 
 Mother.' And the instances given innoteiii. 14, b, t&v Sta^aWdvToiv. tuv 
 
 papjBdpuv TToXeiiov. The objective genitive. Kriig. cf. i. 32, 3, vi. 6, 3. 
 Kaflejdiievoi. Suppliants assumed a sitting posture ; to raise them from it was 
 equivalent to granting their prayer. See the account of Cylon's party i, 126, 
 
 Kadl^ovaiv itrl rtiv ^afiiiv Uirac 6.va<rTTi<ravTcs Si a&rois ol tGiv 'ABrjvaiav, 
 
 K.T.X. See also iii. 75, and the case of Themistoclesi. 136. £STb"Hpotov. 
 
 On this construotio praegnans as it is called, for i\86vTes is ri 'Hpaiov iKaBiiovTO, 
 see MatthisB, § 578. On the government of ravTa, cf. Jelf, § 529, 1. 
 
 Chapter XXV.— (a.) BeVSai. Kriig. says the metajihor is from games like 
 chess and draughts, Plato, Rep. 604, 0. Tr. were at a loss how to make am/ 
 satisfactory arrangement, or, disposition of the present state of affairs. 
 Ti|j.up(a is nothing more than ^oriBela, kelp, assistance, as below, and ch. 38, 
 58, 6g. Kriig., however, does not regard it as an ordinary Attic usage. 
 A TrapdSouv. Jelf, § 886, d. The optative is used after an historical tense in 
 indirect interrogative sentences, when the question is to be represented as pro-* 
 ceeding from some one else. 
 
 (6.) o-^&v 'for iavT&v in this sense is principally Ionic and Thucydidsean,' 
 Kriig. who appends a large number of parallel instances. 
 
 (c.) Kara, t« &\>,a 8i KaC. See oh. 4 a 8vt€s diroiKoi.. The 
 
 colonization of Coroyra by the Bacchid Chersikrates, was a lateral branch of the 
 colonization of Syracuse. See Miiller's Doricms, i. §119. oiiT€ ^Ap 
 
 K. T. X. As this is followed by no finite verb, we must class it among the ana- 
 coloutha so common to Thucydides, and supply irap'rjii.fkovv from the preceding 
 clause. Either Thuc. intended to add another verb and forgot it, or imagined 
 that Taprj/xiXovv would do duty for the remaining part of the sentence, not ob- 
 serving, as Arn. remarks, that the insertion of yap rendered this imp.ossible. 
 irttvt]Yip«o'i. The Olympian, Nemsean, &c., says the Scholiast. But this is a 
 specimen of their loose style of explanation. For how, as Kriig, obseives, 
 could they possibly be in a position to refuse them the right of irpoeSpta, e.g. at 
 the Isthmian games ? Eeference must be made to some festivals common to 
 both countries ; colonies sent Beupois to attend some of the festivals in the 
 mother country. KopivSCij) dvSpl "irpoKaTapx<iC'6voi.. The exact 
 
 meaning of this has been much disputed. It must mainly depend upon the 
 sense assigned to KarapxcaBai. Kriig. quotes from Buttmann's Ze.vilogus a 
 twofold explanation, (i.) The word denotes the initiatory consecration of a 
 victim for sacrifice. So we find it, Eurip. Ale. v. 74, where it denotes the act 
 of cutting off part of the hair on the victim's head by the sword of the person 
 officiating. So Virgil : — 
 
 ' tempora ferro 
 Summa notant pecudum.' — uEn. xii. 171. 
 
 (2.) It denotes the removal of a selected portion from a, whole, as fof 
 instance first fruits, for the purpose of consecrating it. This we find Od, 
 14, 427, TdvToBev apxi/isms ij,e\4iiiv, Kriig. therefore understands it ' import- '_ 
 
Chap. 25.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 43 
 
 ing to a Corinthian the first fruits of their sacrifice, or offering, in order that he 
 may bum it upon the aZtar.' Others, as Bloomf., take the dative as a Latin 
 ablative— a usage which Goll. wrongly would banish from Greek. Poppo says 
 it is not unusual in the poets,; and quotes Bernh. Synt. p. 104. Matthise, § 
 390. Add Jelf, § 608, obs. 3, and render, beginning hy a Corinthian man, i.e., 
 by the agency of one, regarding the person as an instrument, not any given 
 Corinthian, but probably the chief priest, who, as the Schohast tells us, was 
 sent from parent states to colonies, and whose duty it was to commence the 
 sacrifice by pouring a cup of wine on the head of the victim, then to sprinkle 
 it with the sacrificial meal, and cut oflF the hairs from the forehead and throw 
 them into the fire. To this Pop. (who has changed his opinion) in ed. 2nda, 
 seems to mcline, translating 'per virum Corinthium faoientes sacrorum initiuTn.' 
 He rejects his old rendering 'in usum viri Corinthii,' which indeed would seem 
 more appropriate to the Homeric times ; for, afterwards, the first viands of the 
 banquet were offered to the gods. Besides, this, as relating to many occasions, 
 would rather require KopivSiois avSpdai.. Compare for the word Herod, iv. 60, 
 Eurip. Ale. V. 74, and Karapxecdai tQiv lepQi>, Dem. in Midiam, p. 552. 
 Goll. places a stop at tuv lepdy, thereby making KopifSiij} a,v3pl depend upon 
 SlSoyres to, voiJ.Lfbp.eva yipa. &<rvip ai ftXXai airoiKCai. For these 
 
 see MilUer's Bor. vol. 1. ch. vi. § 7, 8. They were mainly Syracuse in Sicily, 
 Chalcis in jEtolia, Solium in Acarnania, Ambracia, Anactorium, Leuoadia, 
 Epidamnus, and ApoUouia, the whole forming ' a strong and continuous chain 
 along the coast.' ';r€pi<|>povovvTes. Perhaps the notion of neglect- 
 
 ing and despising arises from the contemptuous survey of an object — the looking 
 at it on all sides round implied in nrepl. I am not, however, so sure that is the 
 meaning in the passage cited by most editors — depo^arCj Kal irepL(j>povCj rhv 
 ■ijXiov, Arist. Nub. v. 226 : elsewhere in this sense we find i7rep<ppovelv. The 
 lial before x/'T/^arwi' is in connexion with the Kal before ttj is irb\ep.ov Kriig., 
 like 'turn,' and 'cum.' _ a|;.ota. This is classed by Jelf among those 
 
 cases where the predicative substantive does not signify a person but a thing, 
 and is th^n frequently joined with a subj. of different gender, sometimes of 
 different number. A familiar instance is oix apwayfibv TyyTitraTo rb elvai Xaa. 
 Qiip. Phil. ii. 6. See also Herod, vi. 100, 'Acax^vrjs iihv twv '"EperpU^v rd. 
 irpGiTa, and similarly ix. 77* Perhaps Kriig. has overlooked these last instances 
 when he positively declares that irres bp.ola cannot possibly be connected. I 
 should still, however, beinclined with him to place a stop at xpi"""! and connect 
 dvvdp,ei, ivres with dwardiTepoi, which seems amply sanctioned by SvvarTjV 
 Sivap,iv, vii. 6; bp,oia would then exhibit a sort of adverbial usage, and the 
 whole will mean — 'and at that period being as well in the power derived from 
 wealth, on a scale equal to the wealthiest Creeks, as in their preparation for the 
 wojr, more powerful than the Corinthians. ' irpo^X'iv depends upon 
 
 iiraLpbp.evoi (Kxiig.), as the particip. indicates pride and self-confidence. The 
 double gen. after irpoevoiKTia-cv is paralleled by vii. 34, 6i4 ttjv toD av4p,ov 
 diruffiv airuv is rb TriXayos. Pop. See more cases. Matth. § 380. Lob. ad 
 Soph. Ajax, V. 309. Jelf, § 543. ' Kal valet etiam.' Pop. and so 
 
 also Krug. — 'schon wegen.' It is generally admitted that the Phseacians were 
 the predecessors of the Corcyrseans in the Island. See the 6th Book of the 
 Odyssey. It has however been controverted. Pop. remarks that Thuc. does 
 not express his own opinion. etKoo-i Kal eKaT<5v. See Herod, vii.- 
 
44 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [^1^0°^ ^■ 
 
 i68, where it appears that sixty vessels were but a part of their fleet. They 
 had eighty triremes in the time of Timotheus. Isocr. 15-109. Kriig. 
 
 Chaptbe XXVI. — (a.) With respect to the subject of this ch. Grote 
 observes: — 'Though the Korkyi-eans, themselves democratically governed, 
 might have been expected to sympathise with these suppliants and their prayers, 
 yet their feeling was decidedly opposite, for it was the Epidamnian oligarchy 
 who were principally connected with Korkyra, from whence their fore- 
 fathers had emigrated, and where their family burial-places, as well as their 
 kinsmen were still to be found.' Vol. vi. p. 69. ?ir€|iirov. Pop. 
 
 remarks that in the case of verbs of 'going' and ' sending,' the imperfect fre- 
 quently stands where we might expect the aorist. He cites ^ttXeoi', ch. 29 ; 
 av-^yofTo, ch. 48; dir^cTT-eXXoc, vii. 20; 6,TriireiJ,irov, vii. ■zg. These cases belong 
 to the distinction noticed, Jelf, 401, 3, 4. 'The aor. merely narrates the fact; 
 if the narrator places himself, as it were, in the midst of the facts he relates, 
 and tells them as if he saw them with his own eyes, the imperfect is used.' 
 Indeed, we find the imperfect generally thus employed in the case of verbs, 
 which, like those above, denote a continuous action, occupying some time. 
 Tr. 'they proceeded to send.' '"■'iii — '<"* /""i," — i-e., by land. 
 
 They afterwards went forward by sea to ApoUonia, perhaps, as Bl. suggests, 
 to avoid the danger of passing through the territory of the Taulantii. 
 'AiroXXovCav. See Herod, ix. 92; Henn. P. A. G., § 86. 8&1 
 
 Tuv KepKvpaCuv |if| KwXvwvrai iiir' o.inS>v — 'from fear of the Corinthians, 
 lest they be hindered by them.* KuATjiovrai. is in the subjunctive rather than 
 optative after iTropeiiBrjcrav, by a sort of extension of the principle irpt) diiftaTuv 
 TToieic (Ar. Rhet.), which is seen in the prssens historicum. Kriig. remarks 
 that particular prominence is given to the main idea in the sentence by this 
 sort of repetition, and cites from Xen. Hell. ii. 3, 18, i<po^oOvTO rbv QripajUvriv 
 fiTj crv^'pvdfiaav irpbs aiirbv ol TroXiTai. 
 
 (5.) Mpio (TTcSXu. 'Navibus IS, id quod ex § 4 colligitur.' Pop. 
 kot' liri^peCav. It was needless to dispute concerning the force of this word, 
 since it is fully explained by Arist., Hket. ii. 2, 6 i-mipEd^wv (paiverai Kara- 
 ippoveTv' ^CFTL yctp 6 iin)pea.<Tp,hs ifj.To5i(y/j.bs rats ^ovK'qaeGLv, oiix tva ri aijrtji, 
 dXXa tva fiij iKeivc^i. It is therefore ' vexatious and contuTnelious opposition for 
 the sake of opposition,' It is opposed as an exact antithetical notion to 
 irpbs xd/jij'. Arist. Pol. iii. 16, 7. Td<|>ous — sc. of their ancestors 
 
 buried in Corcyra. 
 
 (c.) ovS^v oiTMv iirl\Kov<rav. air&v, says Krtig., is neuter. Cf. toDto 
 iiraKoiew, i. 140. But this seems to me to prove nothing. I should render, 
 'obeyed them in no respect,' ' listened to them not a whit.' And so in Kriig.'s 
 own instance. Spa d n aoO &v ,u.a\Xov iiraKoioi. SwK/sctTT/s, Plato, Zach. p. 
 200, c. dXXd. ' No single word of Latin or English will express 
 
 the force of iXXcJ,' Bl. There is evidently some ellipse, such as, 'Then the 
 Corcyreans (no longer hesitate), but proceed to war.' Kal couples 
 
 •jrpoffXa^bvres with pLerd. tQv (jivy&htijv, Kriig. irpoo'KaOettifj.evov — 
 
 ' sitting down before, ' not exactly equivalent to TroXiopKoOi-res, which denotes 
 active siege operations. Poppo remarks that the Corcyreeans did not com- 
 mence a regular siege until the Epidamnians had refused to listen to any pro- 
 posals. For the accusative after the participle, Pop. compares (renviiv -irposl- 
 
Chap. 37.J NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 45 
 
 foDtr' "Aprefuv, Eur. fl'ec. 935. irpodvov—gave notice, pro- 
 
 claimed. It is hardly necessary to speak of Dilogia or Zeugma here. 
 Xpno-Ao-eai— <««* as enemies. The MSS. have the aor., but most editors say 
 the future xp^o'^oSai. is required. The whole depends upon the question con- 
 cerning the aor. discussed, Appendix i. I(r6|ii5s — 'cm isthmus,' for 
 la■^f^CiSe! X'^P""'j and therefore more easily cut oflf by an diroTeix"''/^i5!. Cf. ch. 
 7 a. The whole is parenthetical. 
 
 noun, 
 
 Chapter XXVII. — (a.) ayYeXoi &ti— Messengers to say that. A yerbal 
 with a verb's construction. diroiKiav iK^jpuo-crov — 'pro- 
 
 claimed, or gave notice of a colony to Epidamnus, that any one who liked might 
 go upon the principle of equal rights.' iir. is the accusative after the verb, yet 
 livai follows the verb also. For a similar double construction, Krilg. refers to 
 i. 50, I. The article t§ I should explain as above, 'upon the principle of In 
 the common formula, says Kriig., ofioiq, refers to quality, and itry to quantity, 
 the latter being the antithesis to the idea conveyed by irXeove^la, There is 
 some doubt as to the persons among whom the equality was to subsist. It 
 would not be necessary to specify that the colonists should be equal among 
 themselves, for this would seem to follow as a matter of course. This is, 
 however, Arnold's view. It appears, too, that equality with those at home' 
 was a generally admitted principle, cf. ch. 34, iKirijiwovTiii, iirl t^ ofioloi 
 TO?s XeiTTOja^vois ehac. As this, then, seems to have been a special case, 
 equality with the previous Epidamnian colonists is probably the thing meant. 
 IBeXoi .... PoiXETai. Remark the union of the two moods. The first sup- 
 poses a possible case, the second something following actually upon it. Should 
 happen not to ie ready to start with the rest, and yet wishes to share in the colony, — 
 i.e., in the privileges just notified. The Corinthian drachma, like the ^Eginetan, 
 was worth ten Attic oboli, whereas the Attic drachma was six oboli; there- 
 fore, fifty Cor. drachmee would be worth more than eighty-three Attic drachmae. 
 Head Bockh, book i. ch. 4. MilUer, Dor. iii. 10, 12. fAvav Kriig. 
 
 makes to be dependent upon iic-fipvaaov, gave notice that he might stop lehind. 
 Those, however, who make the preceding Uvai. an epexegetical infinitive, con- 
 sider this as identical, — i.e., expressing the result of the whole sentence. 
 KttTapAXXovTes and KaTapdXXeiv — paid doton the money; not a mere deposit, 
 but equivalent to iKrivovres. Kriig. quotes el'/cotri roKavra Kplvas Toiis KopivBiovs 
 KarafiaXeiy, Plut. Themist. 24. 
 
 (5.) Hermann, P. A. G., % 34, observes that the relation of the Peloponnesian 
 States to Sparta was so little inconsistent with their political independence, 
 that many were at the same time heads of particular confederacies, as, for 
 instance, Elis. Xen. Hell. iii. 1, 23. Those who were asked for support were 
 either members of the Peloponnesian confederacy, or colonies of Corinth. 
 IlaXijs in Cephallenia. Miiller remarks, ' Herodotus, ix. 28, does not afford any 
 reason for supposing that Pale was a Corinthian colony ; yet both here and in 
 Thuc. i. 27, it appears as closely united with Corinth,' vol. i. p. 130, note. 
 Arguments respecting the origin of colonies are fi;equently drawn from coins. 
 But these are sometimes fallacious, for, as Miiller says, ' Barbarous towns fre- 
 quently adopted the devices of the neighbouring Greek cities.' 
 ^|i.irpoir^|J.i|>Ei.v. The use of the future after verbs indicating wish or purpose 
 
46 STOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 is common enough, as may be seen from Matthias, § 506, and from Krilg.'s note, 
 who compares vi. 57, 2, and many other passages. In such cases, the MSS. 
 as XRV"^"'^"''- last ch. , often exhibit the aorist. The reason of this falls within 
 the genera] discussion of the nature of that tense, vide Appendix. ' The act 
 spoken of is essentially future here, inasmuch as it is contingent upon the 
 acts of the other party,' Am. ; and see Jelf, § 405, i. 
 
 (c.) KopivSfuv. Proper names are often joined to a&rlis without an 
 article, KrUg. Here it is 'of the Corinthians themselves,' in contradistinction 
 to allies. In vi. 33, airSiv ' ABiivaloii', which Kriig. renders ' Athener ohne 
 heimischung Anderer/ it is much the same. 
 
 Chapter XXVIII. — (a.) oSs irapAaPov. T. K. A. (after Owen) remarks 
 that probably the Corcyrsans began to be alarmed at the powerful confederacy 
 which was formed against them, and ' had recourse to the mediation of the 
 liacedaemonians and Sycionians;' qy. Sicyonians. ci tI dvTiiroi- 
 
 oSvTai. Understand ttjs 'EinSdfipov, if they on their part make amy claim to it. 
 The directa oratio, and present tense, to impart liveliness to the narrative. 
 SCkus So€vai — as the Sohol. explains it, iiriTpi^ai, SiKaar-ripiifi Kal KpcSrjvai, to 
 submit the matter to the arlitration of a court. Kriig. cites i. 140, 5kas .ra» 
 Sia(popu}y cLK\'/}\ois Si56pa(, and the correlative Kal d^x^^^^^- 31iet the junior 
 student notice the distinction between these and 'Kap.^dveiv bUriv. ' For disputes 
 between citizens of different states, there was an entirely free and equal inter- 
 course of justice. Commeroium juris dandi repetendique,' MiiUer, Dor. i. 
 p. 202, who also remarks in reference to this case, ' Nor were disputes between 
 individual states brought before the congress of the allies, which on account of 
 the preponderance of Sparta, would have endangered their liberty, but they 
 were commonly referred to the Delphian oracle, or to arbitrators chosen by both 
 states,' Thuc. i. ^8 ; v. 79 ;' Ibid. Sparta itself was sometimes chosen arbi- 
 trator, as between Elis and Lepreum. See v. 31. • Although,' says Grote, 'the 
 Korkyraeans had been unwarrantably harsh in rejecting the first supplication 
 from Epidamnus, yet in their propositions made at Corinth, right and equity 
 were on their side.' Grote, vol. i. p. 73. Kpareiv. Some have 
 
 interpreted this, ' to possess the colony, ' but Kpariu often stands independently, 
 as in Soph. Ajax, v. 765, ^oiKov Kpareiv p,h ^iy 6e(f 5' del Kparew; cf. wkSc, 
 ch. 64 b, and this sense is more proper here, as the actual possession of the colony 
 was not the matter of dispute, but certain rights in connexion with it. So, too, 
 I see, says Kriig., who renders ' ohsiegen,' which, however, he explains by 'die 
 Colonic haben.' Yet, in the instance which he quotes, Kpareiv is independent, 
 — ^viz., T^ <l>i\j! KparoiiTji alnilyraros tov iii) vmrjaai KariiTTT). Some such 
 word before the infin. as ^XeYop is, he says, understood. Tr., but to whichsoever 
 party of the two it should be adjudged thai the colony belonged, that these should 
 be victors, sc. in the arbitration. <os ov fiirov oirots 'EiriSdjivoii — 
 
 inasmuch as, they would have them to Tcnow, that they (the Corinthians) had 
 nothing to do with Epidammus. This is in accordance with the well-known dis- 
 tinction made by Elmsley (Eurip. Herac. 693), and denied by Matthi^ (§ 568), 
 that, viz., the genitive absolute indicates a fact, the accus. absolute, some one's 
 impression about it, either acted upon tacitly, or expressed to others. 
 o4k cImv. The note of Schweighaiiser quoted by T. K. A., points out the well- 
 
Chap. 28.] ifOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 47 
 
 known fact that this expression does not mean 'non sivit,' but rogmit, precatus 
 est. It indicates unwilUngness on the part of the subject, hut does not imply 
 that this feeling of unwillingness can be carried out by any exercise of his 
 power. Valckn. describes it as a milder way of saying ' vetavit.' To me 
 it seems that the peculiar meaning very much depends upon the peculiar 
 force of the imperfect, Was not for letting, or allowing, for the real past tenses 
 of the verb do not appear to have this force, cf. oiSiva iri. daae TrapeXdeiv, ' did 
 mot after this permit any one else to come forward,' vi. 41. With the present 
 idiom compare i. 126; iii. 48; Soph. Phil. v. 442. A 81 (<,t|. 
 
 Here, as elsewhere, cl SJ would more accord with our own idiom, for the /41; 
 does not negative the preceding verb, but is to be taken as a, general negation 
 of what the former clause implies or recommends. Translate, 'for if otherwise.' 
 So the Germans, ' iiyidrigenf alls' Kriig., in his Grammar, says el hk fii) has 
 become a, sort of fixed formula, and where a negative notion goes before, is 
 still used to introduce the contrary supposition, though this is of course 
 affirmative. In the present passage, oiK dav is this preceding negation, 
 negatived by el Si jx-q. We may add as afamiliar example, Luke iv. 26, 
 CT^povs — the Athenians. tSv vBv 8vtci)V. The members of the Pelopon- 
 
 nesian confederacy. |jia?^ov is to be connected with iroieiaBai, ' rather to 
 
 make for themselves.' So Kriig. But Poppo prefers ^W/jous /iaXAoi', ' alios potius.' 
 (t.) aTT&yuiin. — ' withdraw the forty ships,' ch. 16. irpoT^pov k.t.X. 
 
 — 'Bitt before this were done, it was not fair that the others, sc. £pidamnianSf 
 should be undergoing a siege, while themselves were going to law.' avro^s — 
 
 ' the Coroyrmans and Corinthians.' Goll. understands it of the Corinthians 
 alone, and T. K. A. agrees with him, ' for if the Coroyreans are included, they 
 are engaged on both sides.' In this case we should have expected tracts, and 
 the objection is absurd, for the Coroyreans must have been included, if the Co- 
 rinthians were, else it would appear that the latter went to law with them- 
 selves. €Totp.oi 8^ ctvai . . . (nrovSds 8^ irof^o-ao-Bav. At first sight 
 it is obvious to expunge the second Si, which Pop. has accordingly done, and 
 rendered the whole ' paratos vero etiaim sese esse hdc conditione fosdiis facere ut 
 suo utrique loco maneant.' Against this it may be urged, as Kriig. has done, 
 that no MSS. sanction the cancelling of 5^, and that the words might imply the 
 existence of other proposed conditions of peace, beside that here mentioned. 
 Kriicr. accordingly makes both erol^oL eTvai and (Tirovd^s Si iroi'riffaadai dependent 
 upon an ?Xe70v, to be supplied from AvriXeyov, and to this ?Xe70i' we may at- 
 tach the force of ^KiXevov. [See note on Sheppard's Theophrastus, in voce.'] 
 'They prof essed to be ready to do so (sc. SiKdt;c(rffai) also upon the condition of 
 both parties remaining as they were [status quo ante], and that they would make 
 a truce so long as the a/rbitration continued.' Arn., who would also retain the 
 Si, attempts to explain it, as though froi/iot elvai Siare ixheiv^iroiixoi. eXvai 
 fiiveiv : but there is reason in the objection [T. K. A.] that although Jroi/toi, like 
 many similar words (especially UavSi) might well be followed by fiirre, yet the 
 insertion of dfi^oripovs as the subject of ehai renders that impossible here. In 
 other words, froi/iis elfjii ibcTTe tovto ttoic'iv is correct : ?T0i/(.6s el/xi Ihare 4fii Kal 
 <ri TOVTO -n-oieCv is not so. Peile thinks the difficulty may be removed 'by con- 
 struing eToifioi elr/ac in the same sense as iBiXeiv, and that they were ready also 
 in the terms thai {i. e. to agree that) both parties shall remain as they were, cmd 
 
48 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 malce a truce' — [bare in fact extending over the whole sentence, in which 5^ can 
 by no means be spared.' For the usage of ?TOi/ios I would compare Soph. Antig-, 
 
 Chapter XXIX. — (a.) ir\^p€is — 'fully manned.' Kriig. remarks that ifKij- 
 pGiSf ir\f)povv, TXtjpibfiaTa, were regular technical terms for the manning of ves- 
 sels either with marines or soldiers. irpoireii^l/avTes irpdrepov. This is 
 usually explained as a pleonasm ; but needlessly for irpoiriinreiv is the common 
 word, technically employed for the solemn conduct of a procession, envoys, 
 &c. Kriig. says the irpo has a local not temporal force, and is found in irpothai,. 
 irpo^pX^rBai, meaning out, away (G-ermanicfe 'ent'). Cf. iii. 100, i ; i. 29, 2 ; iv. 30, 
 3; 78, i; in. I. Sio^^iXCois. We heard of 3000, ch. 27. Probably no 
 more could be got ready in time. The Scholiast's explanation is, that through 
 contempt of the Corcyrseans, 1000 were left behind. Not a very likely thing. 
 
 (&.) ^£v|avT€s . . . ^TTitTKivaa-avris. Considerable doubt has been felt as to 
 what these two operations severally denote. The first, as applied to old vessels, 
 apparently not sea-worthy, must imply the most. Indeed the latter probably 
 refers merely to the smaller gear and tackling which every ship required before 
 'coming out of dock,' as we should say; iiricrKevci^eLV then would correspond 
 to 'rigging and fitting out,' Cf. vii. 34. The ^ei^avres has been supposed to 
 indicate the operation of ' wndergirding' with ropes, for the purpose of holding 
 the timbers together. That this was often done we know from Acts xxvii. 1 7, 
 Hor. Od. i. 14, 6, inter alia. And Arnold says that the operation was found 
 effectual with the Russian ships taken intheTagusin 1808. Itwasdone, Bloom. 
 shows, by ropes from poop to prow, and not across the middle of the ship. But 
 in this case should we not have had inro^ei^avTes ? It is much more likely that 
 reference is made to the binding and strengthening the old ships by the intro- 
 duction of fresh timbers, and the technical name for these timbers seems to have 
 been ^vyiifiaTa. With this agrees the explanation quoted by Pop. from Gre- 
 gorius. Cor. ad Mermogenem, iii. , t6 ll'd^avres ras ToKalas vaCs 6.vtI toD fi/yii- 
 finra Kparivavres [Schol. Thuc. i^vydi/iara airals ivB^res] Kurai. ^vydifnaTa 8J 
 KCiKoOvTaL tA, ^i\a ra awb tov toIxov ttjs yeilis Trpbs rhv Irepov SMTclvovra Toixov 
 — ^ ^vydi/j-ara rh ^i\a. ri, ip.pa\\6p,eva rais (xa.i>l<ni', Siare tri/feCJai rds crai/iSas 
 Tcts StrjpTjfi^pas 'ianv Sre. 
 
 (c.) 8i.^<j)9€ipav. Kriig. explains HtXovs iirolijaav. Hence the phrase 
 means ' disabled,' put 'hors de combat,' i. 54, no, ii. 2, 84. o^ioXo-yfci. 
 
 — 'terms of capitulation,' Cf. i. 98, ii. 107. irapao-r^o-ao-Boi — 
 
 meaning 'to make a person come and stand beside you' — naturally passes into 
 the sense of subdue, reduce. Pop. adds, ' Supple airiiti ue toi)s post Epidamn. 
 
 transponendum existimes, qus est suspicio Kruegeri.' eiriiXvSas 
 
 ' the new comers, ' called J^j/oi in ch. 26. In the next chapter they are mentioned 
 as oi fiXXoi, who were murdered contrary to the terms of the capitulation. 
 SVjo-avras 'i\av— having bound to keep, i. e, 'to keep in bonds.' The idiom is 
 common enough; the verb Ix^w denotes continuance down to the present 
 moment of the action denoted by the participle. See next ch. and ch. 38. 6. 
 irapA, iroKi, Mr. Eiddle has an excellent note explaining the usages of Tapd, 
 Terminalia ii. iraph signifies juxtaposition, and with the accusative motion 
 terminating in juxtaposition. The ordinary meaning holds good here; the dif- 
 
Chap. 31.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 49 
 
 Acuity must be thrown upon the subject joined to it brachylogically. ' They 
 conquered so as to attain to a great distoMce from their adversaries.' So vi. 37, 
 irapii too-oOtov yiyviiaKa, '1 go to the length of thinking — or so far from the »!*p- 
 position of my opponents as to think.' vii. 71, trap' 6\lyov ^ Si.i<j>evyov ■^ d?ri\- 
 \vvTo — ' as far as a little from perishing — as far as a little from escaping.' viii. 
 76, 7r6Xis . . . ■% trap' IKdxLarov 5?) fjKBt Tb'ASrji/alai' Kparos dtfiiXardat, 'a city 
 which attained to a very little distance from taking away;' and similarly iii. 39, 
 where see note on that disputed passage. 
 
 Chapter XXX. — (o.) AruKC|ji|jix|. What the Italians call Cap. Bianco, 
 and the Greeks, retaining the old name, Lerkimo, or Alefkimo. The latter is, 
 however, according to Leake, eight miles to the northward, Poppo. It is 'a 
 low cape advancing into the Channel at Corfu.' 
 
 (6.) iir' ofiKov — 'homeward.' With the gen. in the direction of an object; 
 with an accusat. quite up to an object. As the latter would be the motion put 
 into practice by an attacking enemy, iwl with an accusative is generally said to 
 denote hostile intent. Instances are innumerable. rfjs 7t]s 2t6|iov. 
 
 Partitive genitive, ' ravaged some of the land.' 
 
 (c.) Tov xpovov Tbv irXeioTov. Five or six months. The battle occurred 
 in the spring of 01. 86. i, B.C. 434; Krtig.; Others, B.C. 435. K'^P'v 
 
 The final iota is not elided before a vowel in Thucyd. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 13. irepiWvTi T(J 64pEi. The reading of most MSS. is irepidvri ti§ 
 
 Bipei, which is usually rendered superamte adhuc cestate. Arnold objects that 
 6^pei ' is not used absolutely as if it were dipovs, but expresses the time at 
 which the thing was done ; and TrepibvTL ri^ d^pet cannot signify reliqud (Bstatis 
 parte, as Haack and Poppo translate it, for then it should be either Tip trepibvTi, 
 TOV depoBs or Tif Bipei tQ irepiivTi. This may be true ; but why may not the 
 words mean, summer still heing left — i. e. some of it still remaiining over — ^like 
 portion of a stock not yet consumed. Still Keiske's conjecture, irepCCbvri, con- 
 firmed as it is by one good MS., and supported by Xen. Hellen. iii. 2. § 75, 
 irepCCbvTi. t(? hiavrip is preferable. But it must not be rendered, with the 
 Schol., when the summer came rownd — i. e. at the beginning of next summer. 
 The metaphor is taken from the act of describing a circle, which, as the line 
 comes round, is more and more nearly finished. Tr. as the summer was drawing 
 m to a close. Pop. reads irepibyn, but I cannot understand his proposed ver- 
 sion, ' cestate qumn ilia (tota) reliqua esset. ' 
 
 (d.) \a\i.&voi 1/fin — 'wh^n it was now winter.' Thucyd. employs a twofold 
 division of the year, %«/i(i;i' and 64pos, the limits of which were somewhat un- 
 defined. But the x"/'"'"' ™^y be considered to have begun about the middle of 
 autumn or the faU of the leaf, and to have lasted until the weather in early 
 spring was fit for military operations. See lib. ii. c. r, yiypairrai di e|^s lis 
 iKoara iylypero Karh 64pos Kal x«iM'3>'a. 
 
 Chaptek XXXI. — (a.) tov Iviovt<5v. As we interpret the preceding ch. 
 this year wiU be either B.C. 434 or 433, or, as Pop. says, from the summer of 
 434 to that of 433. opYO <|>^poVT€s. This seems to me analogous 
 
 to x'^'^fTiSs i^epov. The dative 6py^ is just such a dative as in the old language 
 passed into an adverb. (The junior student may be reminded that the adverbial 
 forms in-j;-ei-ws-o(, are dative terminations). Tr. bearing angrily the war 
 
 E 
 
50 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 against the Corcyreans — i.e. regarding it with wrathful and excited feelings. 
 T^he common ;^aXe7rfis tjtipew — ' cegri ferre,' would disincline me from believing 
 with Pop. that dpy^ (fi4povTes can mean animose, magna a/nimi a/rdore et impetu, 
 administramtes. And it is more than doubtful that ir6\e/iov (pipuv can stand 
 for bellum gerere. Bloom, is quite right in saying that irpoffvfids <pipuv rbv 
 wSXefiov, Herod, ix. i8, is quite another thing. There the meaning is, zealously 
 to endure the labours of the wa/r; and so too, rbv irdXep.ov Siecoowro irpoffifius 
 oifireu'. Thuc. iv. 21. 
 
 (6.) Kal .... ^o-av 7ap k. t.X ?8o|€V. This parenthesis is more in 
 
 the style of Herodotus than our author ; but Thucyd. repeats the same formula, 
 iii. 70, iii. 107. Neither in this case, says Kriig., nor in that of dXXoi ydp, 
 should we place a comma after the first word. Svo-irovSoi would naturally 
 
 govern a dative, but signifying as it does 'members of the same confederacy,' it 
 becomes virtually a substantive, and is constructed like one. So some verbs 
 change their original character and construction, cf. note on ii. 69, ipyvpoXojQcn. 
 ivpla-Kt<r6ai, N. B. mid. voice — 'procure for themselves,' as i<r€ypd<fiavTo is 'got 
 themselves enrolled,' cf. i. 33, 3. "irpco-p6D(ro(j.evoi. Perhaps the force of 
 
 the future is — 'with the intent of managing the matter by am, embassy.' Pop. 
 (larger edition) conjectures TrpeafifvSiJ.ei'oi. But, says Kriig., perhaps ■irpea^ei- 
 eadai means the actual discharge of ambassadorial functions, as cTpaTeieaBiu 
 does with reference to those of a soldier, and iroXireieadai those of a citizen. 
 I suppose he means that the present would not be used unless to describe 
 ambassadors in discharge of some actual duty. Whereas here we have merely 
 the general mention of the oflBoe in which they appeared. ot' 
 
 airmv £xip£(rK6o-9ai. By contrasting this with ^k aiir^s JleXoivovviiaov at the 
 beginning of the chapter, it will be seen that in such cases airh denotes a much 
 less intimate relation with the object spoken of than is implied by iK. For 
 &Trb is simply 'coming away from a thing ' — ^k properly 'coming out of, and 
 being derived from it.' Hence the former is used where there is uncertainty, 
 the latter where there is none, as in a somewhat curious passage, Eurip. 
 Hipp. v. 759, 60. 
 
 ^ yh.p air &p.(poT4'pwv, ij 
 Kprjcrias iK yds Sijcropvts ^Trraro, 
 
 which is translated — 'vel enim ab utrilque parte, vel certe e Greta proficiscens.' 
 Cf. note i. 128. 
 
 Chapter XXXII. — (a.) •irpov4>ciXo|i.^vt)s. It is perhaps hardly necessary to 
 consider that there is any Zeugma in the construction of this participle, though 
 it has a slightly different application to the two nouns — when neither ben^t nor 
 alliance is previously owing to them, i. e. when they have done nothing upon 
 which to found a claim for a return of favours, or for alliance. Cf. Herod. 1. 
 82, T) ^x^pv ■>! Trpoo(l>eCKop.hr] is 'Mrivalovs. This example might perhaps 
 induce us to write the word without a Crasis. But Kriig. shows that in Attic 
 Greek, the oases where Crasis does not take place, are occasioned by the fact 
 that the simple verb begins with an aspirate, as in wpoopav, irpoi^a. 
 jiAXio-Ta |iiv and A S^ \f.i\ denote, as usual, the best and most desirable course, 
 and what is next best — should mMke it appear that they ash what is even expe- 
 dient, but failing this, that they asi at least what is not prejudicial. 
 
Chap. 33.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 5 1 
 
 ava8i8d|ai. The preposition conveys the notion of going lack. Hence in such 
 .cases it seems to mean to explain from firstprinciples — i. e. fully and satisfactorily. 
 X<ipiv. This of course may be rendered two ways — that tliey (the speakers) 
 will retain a lasting sense of the ohligation. In favour of this it may be said 
 that JJouffii' in this case retains the same subject as d^ovrat. Or again — that they 
 (those addressed) wiK Aaw the gratitude felt towards them an everlasting possession. 
 This seems to give a better and more usual sense to ^i^aiov, cf. iii. 37 b, note. 
 (6.) €)^Dpol uap^leo-Bai — get these points clearly established for you — i.e. by our 
 explanations. This is one of the cases where the Germans, by the use of the 
 , auxiliary verb lassen, come nearer to an exact expression of the force of the 
 middle voice than we can do. T«TV)(t)K6 k. t. X. Translate — 'now it 
 
 has come to pass that the self-same practice is both in respect of you (i. e. as it 
 must seem to you) so far as regards owr request inconsistent, and as concerns ov/r 
 own interests at the present crisis inexpedient. ' The awkwardness arises from the 
 apparent tautology of Trpbs {jfj^a^ and is xp^^^v- ^ut there is a, distinction be- 
 tween the use of the prepositions, though a somewhat subtle one. They are 
 often found interchanged in MSS. A case occurs in Theophrastus [ch. ii. p. 
 64 ed. Sheppard] where I have quoted eh ^UK^as ihs irpis <rvfifj,dxovs iiropevero, 
 observing that here els seems to mean turning the eyes in the direction of the 
 . object, while -n-pbs gives a notion of some dependence placed upon, or aid expected 
 from it. In general terms we may say that ds denotes the more vague and 
 abstract relation, ivpbs the more positive and practical connexion. I find that 
 Peile's notion coincides with this. He translates irpis i/xas, ' apud vos,' h 
 Xpeiav, quod attinet ad. He says is Tr)V Tr6\i,v — 'urbem versus ' expresses motion 
 m the direction of, or towards the City, thougli the moving body may not 
 actually enter it. But irpbs rijv it6\iv, ad wrbem, can only mean motion continued 
 up to the city. He also calls attention to St. John i. i . It is, I think, clear, that 
 irpbsTbvQehv denotes a much more intimate relation than is rbv Geic. . . . Cf. ch. 
 102, ^vfj.fiaxto.v irpbs a^TotJS. See Soph. Ajax, v. 10 18, trpbsoidiv is ^ptv 6vp.o6p.evos. 
 
 (c.) irepUo-TTjKev <f>aivo|JL^VT] — ' has come round to approve itself,^ ox 'turned out 
 evidently to be.' This seems antithetical to rerixvi^^ d^ipupopov {Sv), and this 
 may cause the construction with a participle of which Kriig. says he knows no 
 other instance except the imitation in Dionysius Arch. vi. 43. irepiiarrjKev 
 7} SoKovaa r}p.wv TrpbvoLa Iblc}, irpbs iKarepov p.ipos direxdeiai' (pepop.zV7j. But see 
 note on rvxivrav, ch. 130. iru<|>po(rvv'r) denotes 'quietude,' are- 
 
 tiring and modest spirit, as distinct from a forward and presuming one. It is, 
 says Kriig. , dTrpayp,0(r6vrj as distinct from rroXvirpa'yiJ.oaivTi. 
 
 {d. ) KaTct [idvas. This is one of the formulse where Kriig. thinks pioipas was 
 originally supplied by the mind. [i^Vas 6 k£vSdvos. Probably this 
 
 is the danger to Athens herself, which they proceed to enlarge upon by way of 
 argument, ch. 33 and 36. ii.i\ [htcl KaKCas, S(S|t|s S^ )j.aXXov a|Ji.apTt<ji.. 
 
 It is quite plain that to take these words in the common grammatical way 
 vrith To\/iw/iec, makes nonsense. They have therefore veiy generally been con- 
 nected with dirpaypioaivTi only — 'a quietude not associated with anything vicious, 
 but rather originating in am error of judgment. ' This I always thought was to 
 put a great strain upon the collocation. Surely Thucyd. would have made 
 some combination with the article, e.g. t^ p.71 /j-erh Kadas d-irpayp-oavvQ k. t. X. 
 I have therefore ever translated the words as generally modifying the whole. 
 
 £ 2 
 
^2, NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book L 
 
 statement — 'And there is excuse for us, if m a case where there was no ill inten- 
 tion, but where we were rather influenced hy am, error of policy, we rum vemtme to 
 act in direct contradiction to our former quietude,' or, we may say, 'witlwat 
 any sinister intention now, hut owing to a premous error of judgment,' as how- 
 ever it was not their present, but their previous conduct which was regarded 
 with so much suspicion, I prefer the former. This, which was certainly quite an 
 independent view, is confirmed by Krilg., who has—'*/ we, not from malice, 
 iut rather from a defective judgment ;' adding that the defective judgment is 
 not connected with the present application for aid, but with their previous 
 isolation. Poppo's interpretation is slightly different. It is reasonable for us to 
 contradict our former practice, if we do it, not for any sinister object, but because 
 we have been deceived in our expectations, making db^ris ^liapriq., equivalent to 
 St I. Sb^rjs riiJ,a.pTOiJ,ev. 
 
 Chaptek XXXIII.— (a. ) t| liivTMxta t<]s TJntT^pas \fiia.i. ' The conjumctwe 
 of our request,' sc, with the existing circumstances. For ^vvTvxta Kriig. refers 
 to iii. 82, 2, 113, 5 ; V. II, 3 ; vi. 54, 1. Karafl'^io-eo-fle. The old 
 
 reading KaT6.d-qa6e is, as Am. says, barbarous. There can be but little doubt 
 that this trifling correction ought to be accepted, first because iroi-fiaeaBe 
 has gone before, and secondly because cijs h/ catching the transcriber's eye might 
 so readily have made him hesitate about writing the future indicative. We 
 must understand "the verb again with is &, so that the whole wiU be (caraSij- 
 aeade c!)s &v fjid'Kurra KaraBoKTSe — ' Ye will store up as nmch as you possibly cm 
 store up.' 
 
 (b.) tCs €virpa|Ctt (riraVKOT^pa, el. The absence of the conjunction ij is 
 variously accounted for. Pop. refers to Matthise, § 450, and Hermann ad 
 Eurip. Ale. V. 890, t£ yb^p d.vdpl KaKhv fieT^ov, d.p.apreTi' irLffTTJs aX6xov ', where 
 the infinitive is as a genitive, sine articulo. The genitive of the pronoun is 
 generally expressed as in Agam, v. 63, tI yhp yvvaiKl Toirov <f>iyyos ^Siov Spa- 
 Keiv, S,vSpa triXa^ Avdl^ai ; The present seems to me a somewhat similar case, 
 rair-q^ being implied. Whut could be nwre rare good fortu/ne than if, &c., iS 
 of course the regular way of speaking. But expressing ourselves less accu- 
 rately we might say, What piece of good fortune could be more rarel if the very 
 power presented itself, &c., or, inverting the expression, ' // the very power 
 which we wanted presented itself voluntarily, what piece of good fortu/ne covM 
 be rruyre rare !' £S toBs iroXXovis aperi\v — ' bringing with it in the 
 
 eyes of the world (apud populum) the reputation for cowage.' Such is the force 
 of d/jETiJ. Cf. with Am. ii. 45, and with Krilg. iii. 58, Soph. Phil. v. 1420, and 
 KaKla, iii. 61. i. ^ipuv h is, as Pop. remarks, properly perferre ad, but 
 Tacitus has ' Fama in posteros.' But is not this renown reaching to posterity? 
 irph iroXXwv \pr\[i,i.rav. Cf. Herod. 1. 86, t6p &p iyii irain rvpavvoun. irpoerl- 
 liTjaa p,ey6.\uv xp-r)ii,i,Tav is \6yovs i\6eii>. 6\lyois Si\. Whether 
 
 SiJ be an intensified form of S^, or an abbreviated form of ^5?J, of. ch. i b, we 
 arrive at much the same meaning. In the first place, it indicates that the mind 
 pauses and dwells upon some point of contrast with what has gone before : in 
 the latter, it indicates that the mind has at last reached a point upon which it 
 may pause and dwell. It therefore gives emphasis and intensity to any word 
 with which it is combined. iroWol SiJ, 'full many:' (i\i7ois 8^, but few indeed'/ 
 iropa-yfYVovToi — 'present themselves before the persons to whom they apply.' 
 
Ohap. 34.] ISTOTES ON THUCYDIDES.. 53 
 
 (c.) 81' (jviTEp. HevG Sii with an accusative as occasionally, throi('c/h the 
 influence or ar/ency of which. 'YV(i|ii]s anaprdvci — ' he misses, errs in Ms 
 
 judgment: ' A metaphoi- from archery,' Bloomf. and T. K. A. But if this be 
 true, yvdi/xTis is surely the object aimed at, not the instrument for reaching it ; 
 the target, not the arrow, and, therefore, 'judgment' should not be 
 spoken of as the instrument in operation. It is rather ' he fails to hit upon a 
 right jndijment: On this use oi yviifiTj, as 'aright opinion,' cf Soph. Ajax, v. 
 163, Toiruv yviljfji,as irpoSiSdaKciv, (Jto^u t<3 vf.tTiptf. The posses- 
 
 sive pronoun for the gen. of the personal, and here the objective genitive — 
 'fea/r of which you are the ohject,' so a little below ^s ttjc i/ieripav iTcxeipv'iv. 
 iroXe(it)o-e£ovTas — ' on the ' qui vive' for war.' Let the junior stud, notice these 
 verbs desiderative, formed from the first fut. act., by changing -a into -eiu. Cf. 
 iiraWa^iiev, i. 95. 4; iii. 84. i ; vapaSdaeiev, iv. 82. 2 ; ^vn^daciev, viii. 56. 
 3 ; vavixaxiiaeiev, viii. 79. 3, Pop. They correspond to the Lat. verbs in -urio, 
 formed from a supine. r-poKaraXaiJipdvovTas. This seems to me a 
 
 military metaphor, seizing upon us as an advanced post from which to prosecute 
 their attach against you. Such, at least, is the force of the word, Xen. Anab. i. 
 10. 6, and ch. 57 c. Suotv <|>6d(rai d|»dpT<i)o-iv — may not fail in ioth points 
 
 at once, or, that they may make sure of securing one or other of two things, either 
 to damage iis, or strengthen themselves. There is some awkwardness owing to 
 the condensed form of the expression. Hermann {de Ellips. p. 142), has ex- 
 panded it, ^ TQv (pddffat. ■^/aSs KaKU)(Tai, ^ rov cr0as avro^s ^€^ai,thaaff6ai. He 
 compares Soph. Elect. 1320, oiic &v Suoik i^p,apTov k.t.\. Poppo's remark is 
 * dvoTv pendet ex apApTutrcj', et (pddcraL propositum est, quia ad utrumque inci- 
 sum, ij KUKQcra.!. ij ^e^aiiiaaaBaL pertinet, atque adjunctum habet infinitivum ut 
 iii. 82. Cf. Matt. § 553,' i.e., notmiss loth points, viz., to secure beforehand the 
 damaging, &c. Kinig. takes it as we have done, a/idpTuinv (jtBdirai. dvoli'. Simi- 
 larly in TptQv tQ)v fieylarttjv ^vp.<f>opCjv, d^vveaias ij p.aXaKiasij dfji.eKeias, i. 122, the 
 use of the disjunctive conjunction proves that rpidv must also be taken disjunc- 
 tively, 'one of these three misfortunes.' There is a similar passage, Dem. de 
 Cor. § 166, x^P^^ ^^ To&rwv hvdiv xPW^f^^^^ 0^ Stafiapr-^ireadaL. Shilleto, ad 
 locum, rightly observes that it was a mistake of the earlier commentators to 
 propose the insertion of evis or Baripov, and adds, in an affirmative sentence we 
 must say, ' to fail in (Me of two things,' but in a negative, not to fail in both 
 things obviously implies to succeed in one or tlie other. 
 
 Chaptbe XXXIV. — (a.) paO^TUo-av. 'This form appears to have been 
 Archaic, for it is often found in laws, as Demos. 2r. 8, 94, and ^sch. i. 12, 35. 
 It was not, however, rejected by the Attics, as may be seen from Ko\aa-6-^w(Tav, 
 Thuc. iii, 39, irapa\ap,^aviTa<rav, Xen. Cyr. vii. 2, 14, Kpi.via9a(Tav, Hell. i. 9, 
 23, and many others. It was avoided by the Tragredians,' Kriig. 
 ^Kir^jiirovTai. The nominative is, of course, diroi.Koi, contained in diroiKia. 
 
 (6.) irpoKXiiOlvTes — 'challenged to decide the matter by law.' See ch. 28. 
 |j.€TeX9«i)v — to follow up — go through with— prosecute, cf. rip-oipiais p-erlovres toCs 
 dBcKoOvras, iv. 62. Kriig. quotes also np,apLg. p.eTeK6eiv toOtovs, ^schin. i. 12, 
 35. irapdYecrSai — led aside from the right path by trickery. 
 
 Ik toO £i64o$. These words seem to be opposed to dirdTy, so as to signify 
 'whether they clohe their object under any false pretence, or whether they prefer 
 their request directly.' So Arnold, after Heilman and Gijller ; and Kriig. seems 
 
,54 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 to coincide. But I cannot help thinking that this is negatived by the existence 
 of re after Seo/t^yois, which surely could not be employed to introduce, as they 
 say, an idea antithetical to dTrdrj; ; for, according to every view of re, it intro- 
 duces not what is antithetical, but what is epexegetical to that which goes 
 before. I understand it to mean — and not forthwith at once {i. e. without reflee-' 
 tion) render assistamce to them for the asking. Here the last clause Seo/j.hioi.s re' 
 K. T. \. is epexegetical, as it more fully sets forth the nature and result of the' 
 i,ir6.Tri mentioned in the first. Had the antithesis, for which Popp. and others 
 contend, existed in the words, surely we should have had 8e, and not re. See 
 the notes, ch. 4 a ; 25 c ; iii. 51 d. (i^ 4iroup7eiv are, says El., to betaken' 
 
 as a single term, expressing a single idea, as oi (pv/^^i ^^^ therefore oi is not 
 required, as Poppo would insist. For this sense of iK too eiBios see Herod, 
 ii. 161 (quoted in Bl. note) i,iri<}Triaa.v iK rijs Welris, and iii. 127; ix. 37. 
 
 Chaptbk XXXV. — [a.) ras AaKeSavjiovCuv o-irovSds — i-e. the thirty years' 
 truce (cf. i. 115). Remark the objective genitive. 'Miiller {Dorians, i., p. 
 314) says that the defensive treaty with Oorcyra engaged in a war with its mother 
 country was, according to ancient Greek principles, wholly unlawful and un- 
 just.' T. K. A. Miiller says so of the war itself, not of a treaty with those 
 engaged in it, which is not precisely the same thing. His idea of the meaning 
 of the article referred to is, that, 'states not included in the alliance may join' 
 whichever side they please, by which means they come within the treaty, and 
 the alliance guarantees their safety. But if a state already at war with another 
 state, party to the treaty (Iva-jrovSos) is assisted, a war of this description is like 
 one undertaken by the confederacy of the assisting state.' irpoKti- 
 
 ^^VT|s — proffered, lit. put before you for your acceptance. Poitus tr. prceserUi. 
 ECprgrai 7dp kv crirovSats. ' For it has been laid down in the treaty, whatsoever 
 Grecian state is not in alliance anywhere may betake itself to either of the tioo 
 leading parties it chooses.' The language is somewhat elliptical. Pop. expands 
 it thus, ^^etpat i\dettf Trap' iKcivovs, irap* biror^povs tv ^Xdeiv t«v 
 
 iroXewv {jris |ir)8a|JioB |Dnnax€l — apimciyrai.. The verb ipia-Kcadai. is followed 
 dativo rei, e.g. i. 129, 3 ; ii. 68, 2, and occurs absolutely Sia rh fi^ apicrKeaOai, 
 V. 44 ; but does not take an infinitive after it. For a-irovdals sine articulo, see 
 ch. 8 a. 
 
 (6.) elplovo-i — 'exclude,' according to Lobeck's rule. {Ajax, 753), etpyw, 
 include ; dpyu, exclude. T. K. A. has a profound remark. The pupil, as an 
 artificial help, may observe that when it signifies to exclude, the breathing is 
 turned out, but turned in when it signifies to ?HC&dc. tlra. This as it 
 
 stands is either a very singular asyndeton, equal to ' quid enim, ' what then 1 shaU 
 they,' &c., which, as Engelman says, is very suitable for the expression of indig- 
 nation, or it is an error for K&ra, or we must, with Ki-iig., read €1 re. In this 
 case the re couples the clause to the previous el. ' 'Tis hard indeed if these shall 
 be permitted, ttc. , and if they shall regard it in the light of a wrong, ' .fee. rWeadal 
 Ti 'iv Tin — ' to place a thing in the category of another.' 
 
 • (c.) ovx 8ir<i)s KioXuToC. It is generally considered a sufficient account of 
 this idiom, to say that it resembles the Latin 'non mode,' for 'non modo non.' 
 But this explanation of ' non modo' has been shown by Mr. Long and others to 
 be incorrect. See Long on Cwsar. Bell. Gall. ii. 17, 'quo non modo intrari 
 
Chap ^6.] NOTES ON" THUCYDIDES, 
 
 55 
 
 sed ne perspici quidem posset.' The confusion, he says, arises from translating 
 'non mode,' 'not only,' whereas it means 'not so much as,' and he renders the 
 words — ' into which there was not so much as a possibility of entering, nay not even 
 of seeing through them.' The best way of rendering the idiom seems to me to 
 be— 'moi! to speah of the first case.' And similar is the force of oux Situs in 
 Greek: Swas is properly 'how,' i. e. it is ttws in its dependent form, the form 
 which TTws takes when it depends upon some verb, expressed or understood, and 
 therefore oix Sirm is ' / say not how,' <i;c., and we must translate such phrases 
 as the present accordingly. ' To say nothing of hindering them, you will even 
 permit, do., oix Utti^s l(pvycv, d\K ovSe Irpeffev — 'tosaynothingof running away, 
 he was not even frightened ;' and similarly without a negative in the second 
 clause, oix ^"""s '''o^^ iroXi/ilovs iTpi\pavro ol "BXXijces, dXXi Kal tt)v xiipax 
 iK&Kaaav, ' To say nothing of routing the enemy, they also ravaged their territory. ' 
 See note on the same idiom, iii. 42. itpotrKoJ^&v ircpuSil/co-Bai. Kriig, 
 
 rightly calls attention to the distinction between the infinitive and participle with 
 these verbs, cf. ii. 18. 3, vepuSeiv avTTjv rp.rjde'iffav. The first states the case as a 
 conception, the second as a fact. KuXveiv Tois (J.i.cp8o<t><5povs. The con- 
 
 jecture /j,i.<r6o<poplas is quite unnecessary, ' to put a stop to the mercenaries, ' means, 
 of course, 'to put a stop to levying them.' Kriig. quotes — olKocjiBbpov yap dvSpa 
 KaXici yvvri. Eurip. Stob. 67, 8. Ka8' 8ti dv ir€i(r9tiT6. 'Poterant 
 
 enim modice, poterant clanculum, non aperte neo magnis viribus Corcyrseis 
 opitulari.' Haack. Perhaps the words are meant to suggest the practicabiUty of 
 some clandestine aid. ■fjo-av. It is not easy to see how Popp. can 
 
 suppose the imp. capable of meaning, ' were and still continue to be. ' Some 
 consider that Ijcrav is inexplicable, and conjecture eicri.. G-oU. ratner strangely 
 understands it as a sort of short caustic sneer, * erant ? nonne etiamnum sunt V 
 a very characteristic version. Kriig., after Kampf, says the speaker refers to 
 i. 33, and renders — 'are as we have seen' — as toe have said. Or might the im- 
 perfect here resemble the Eng. ' were,' for would be, tr. ' in which case our enemies 
 were the same,' cf. infra, 0. 37 c, i^riv airois for i^rjp &v airo'is. Cf. the Lat. 
 erat. ' Tempus erat dapibus sodales. ' itCo-tis — here ' the means of 
 
 producing or assuring/ good faith,' as in Arist. {Rhet.) it is 'the means of pro- 
 ducing conviction.' xoiis jtcTao-TdvTas. The Corcyr^ans themselves, 
 as Popp. says. But this does not much help the argument, for damage done to 
 them need not afiect the Athenians : besides, in this case we should have anti- 
 cipated some word denoting to punish, rather than fi\d\j/ai. I suspect an error. 
 Engelman explains the argument thus. The capacity of the Spartans to punish 
 us for joining you, is the surest guarantee for our remaining faithful to your 
 alliance : for if we fall off we are at once at their mercy. This is ingenious and 
 may be coiTect. Kriig. I see has conjectured ras /tcT-ao-Tijo-acras — i.e. 'you if 
 you reject us.' Kal vavTLKijs k. t. X. Notice the collocation of the article, 
 equivalent to ij ^vfifiax^a. ij didorai, vavriKTi oCca — bibo^ivf} vavrtK^ is, of course, 
 ' being proffered in the shape of a naval one.' iav . . . ^X"'"' These infini- 
 tives are governed hy Sia^ipei. understood, Haack. ; by ^v/x^ipei., contained in oiix 
 6/ioia i) d\\oTptii!(ns, which is equivalent to oix of^olas ^vfiipipei. Arn. ; by Kpariardv 
 iffTi, latent in p,i\i,CTa /j.4y. Kriig. Burgess supposes Set has fallen out before el. 
 
 Chaptbe XXXVI. — (a.) yvara rh ji^v StSibs aiToO. Most annotators 
 
55 NOTES ON THTJCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 explain this passage, but tliere is no real difficulty. ' Let him understand that 
 this cautions fear of his, if backed by such strength as would accrue from our 
 alliance, is more likely to alann the enemy ; while his confidence in his security 
 as a faithful observer of the treaty, if he refuse to accept our alliance, being 
 powerless against his enemies in force is less likely to inspire them with alarm.' 
 rb 5e5i6s is exactly equivalent to our participial substantive, and is therefore 
 well rendered by A., 'his being afraid.' Cf. t6 bpyi^bixtvov, ii. 59. 2 ; t6 Bv/wi- 
 fievov, vii. 68. i. The gist of the passage lies in the fact that tpo^ija-oy is made 
 the predicate of rd SeSios, a piece of false taste into which the fondness of Thuc. 
 for antithesis betrayed him. It would have been more worthy of the Sophists, 
 as Kriig. seems to suggest. This passage has been judiciously selected by Dr. 
 Donaldson to exhibit the difference between the use of the participle as ani 
 Sm/ia and as a pri/ia. ' ^v/jL^ipovra, ireiffb/iEVOs, Ix""' 4>o^rjcrov, de^a/i^yov, 6ii, 
 hx^ovTas, and iab/j-emv, are all predicates, the two futures being equivalent to 
 infinitive moods of the same tense, while t6 deSibs and rb ffapcovp are subjects, 
 or equivalent to noun substantives.' Though Dr. Donaldson's nomenclature, 
 so far as regards the terms in which he expresses predication, is open, to some 
 question, few things will better repay the labour of the younger student than 
 a careful perusal of New Cratylus, § 300 — 306. See note, ch. 49 d. 
 aSiimpov. The active meaning of this, too, Kriig. ascribes to its antithetical 
 position. I certainly remember no similar instance, except that which he 
 quotes, dSeh S4os deSlevm, Plato, Symp. 198 a. 
 
 (6.) So-ov ov irdpovTa — 'all but present.' So in Latin, ' ta/ntum non.' Kriig. 
 quotes ii. 94. i, iv. 6^. 3, v. 59. 5, viii. 26. i. lierd iieY^crruv 
 
 Kaipuv — ' is made a friend of, or an enemy in conjwndion with the greatest op- 
 portwnities' — i.e. the greatest opportunities for good or evil are involved in your 
 decision to accept or reject us. 
 
 (c; Ti]S*lTa\£as . . . irapdirXou KeCrai. The first is the objective genitive, 
 depending upon irapdirKov. With respect to TrapdTrXov itself, cf. Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, ch. iii. note on dedrpov. ' Analysis shows that the genitive ex- 
 presses the antecedent notion from which any other notion may be conceived to 
 ■flow ; that this antecedent notion may have reference, as to several other things, 
 so to locality or position; that adverbs and adjectives conveying such a notion 
 take a genitive of that from which the notion arises — in reference to which, 
 that is to say, they do denote position or locality.' The note proceeds to ex- 
 amine Thuc. iii. 92 (which see), i. 26; Herod, vi. 116; CEdip. Tyr. v. 345; 
 Heraclidce v. 214, &c. Cf. note on ipxh^ Siamcrdoi, i. 75. N.B. We have the 
 compound, not the simple ttXoOs, as the Greeks seldom ventured upon anything 
 but coasting voyages. rb cv6^vSe, sc. vavriKbv — ' to convoy ow 
 
 mccrine in this part of the world to those regions; as irapaT^fiTuy, 'to convoy,* 
 is said of one who assists another in reaching his destination, so here it is meta- 
 phorically applied to a port which materially assists vessels in the prosecution 
 of their voyage. PpaxvTaTu. Krtig. translates — ' By the following 
 
 .very brief summa/ry which embraces the whole and every pa/rtimlar, yo%i, may learn 
 not to give us up to ow enemy/ and this seems to give the force of the coUooa- 
 tion. Tots JviMracri k. t. X. is in apposition to ^pax^TdTtfi. 
 
 (d.) Tpla, fiv Bvra. ' Kepete mente &;» juciSoire s. fi-ddere,' Pop., who sub- 
 joins ' sed ne participium obstet non discendi verum reputandi notione.' Yet even 
 
Chap. 37.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 57 
 
 then there is something extremely unnatural in the language. I have re- 
 garded it as an instance of the norainativus pendens — ' there being hut three 
 navies; then place no full stop (as Pop.) at Kopiudlav; and read To&rav ii—ifl 
 say of these, &c. Krug. supposes that the construction hecomes 'anakoluthisoh' 
 from bringing the nh and 6^ into stronger contrast — or would read KopivBlui' 
 aS TdvSe el . . . rd. Bio: as in fractions we have the article, for any given part 
 becomes definite. irXciocri vavaX rats ■fj|i6T^pais — 'with your fleet 
 
 more by ours' — i.e. ' increased in number hy the amount of vessels which we 
 bring.' I suppose Kriig. prefers this, for he explains it in his note as the dif- 
 ferential dative like iroXXij; and d\ly(ji, and quotes tois Toiotirois Kaxois irXeiw 
 KapirovTai, Plat. Rep. 579, u. In his text, however, he prints ipLeT^pais, which 
 I cannot help thinking the true reading — ' with your navy, which will then be 
 more numerous than theirs;' or reading iifieripais — 'with our united navy, 
 which; &c. 
 
 Chapter XXXVII. — (a.) iva d(r<|>aX^(rT£pov TrpoeiSTJTe — 'that you may 
 he more certainly acquainted beforehand; Am. ; rather, ' more securely; for iaipa- 
 Xicrepov refers to security against making a slip, or being tripped up, and 
 i,(ripa\elav, St. Luc. i. 4 has a cognate sense. 6£f.u>iriv, — ^XP''*"- In 
 
 •the first, the idea of the right, or worthiness of those who ask to receive their 
 request, is prominent. Hence it nearly is ' claim.' In the second, the promi- 
 nent notion is necessity, it is accordingly ' want. ' [i^ dXo-yCoTus 
 aiTMcnio-Oe — 'not reject them without having a reason to give for it.' I cannot 
 accept T. K. A.'s note, */a^ aKoyluTws are to be taken together = non incon- 
 Bulte,' cf. ch. 21 a. 
 
 (6.) (|>ao'C 8^. Kriig. reads S^. I suppose because what follows is not a 
 statement in any way contrasted vrith the preceding. 8^a<r6ai — 
 
 'as a preterite,' T. K. A. But I do not suppose Thuc. would have used the 
 same word in a future and praeterite sense within a few lines. Both have the 
 same genuine aorist sense, and refer to the general principle of receiving alliance 
 at all. See Appendix. eirl KaKovpY'i} — ' ior knavery; ' maJ^prac- 
 
 tices; Cf. i. 102. ■^ttI denoting the object, i.e. motive of an action, need not 
 have called for much elucidation. |ii|ii|i.axov — because the fewer to 
 
 share, the more booty to divide. ovS^ |i.dpTupa. 'Lege ofre,' 
 
 Dobree. ' This is, I think, a true correction, and greatly improves the sense of 
 the passage,' Am. I must venture to differ. Am. did not see that ou6^ is, 'and 
 so not, a/nd consequently not a witness either.' This at least is, I think, the mean- 
 ing, though the editors appear to overlook it. o^ire irapaKoXovVTCs 
 ai(r\vveo-6ai — not to be put to the blush by having to call others in — i.e. such as 
 would become witnesses of their knavery. It would be scarce worth while to 
 notice this, had not some (Pop.) supposed that Thuc. meant, 'to have to blush 
 for the rejection of their application/ to which Owen and T. K. A. seem to in- 
 cline. aiTdpKT) S^o-iv Kci.)ii^VT| — ' their city, lying in an independent 
 (i. e. requiring nothing from others) position, gives them the opportunity of being 
 rather judges in their own case of the damage they may have done to any one, 
 them that judges should be (as elsewhere) appointed by mutual agreement.' Or we 
 may make it irap^x^i- avoirs ylyveo'daL Si/catrrds, /iaXXov -^ Kard, ^vvd'ijKas hf iyi^ 
 vovTO, instead of having SiKoaras understood as the subject of yiyviadai. In 
 
58 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book % 
 
 this case, Kark ^vvBiiKm will mean, judges, more thorn could have heen the case 
 had they joined a league, according to the terms of such league, I had always in- 
 clined to this interpretation, and now see that Kriig. approves of it. Another 
 is adopted by Kampf, which was indeed given by G-oll. in his first ed., i. e. 
 Kara. |i/cSi}Kas ylyveadai. are taken in close connexion, makes them rather judges, 
 &c. them makes them- enter into the confederation. Sicl rb k. t. \. — 
 
 BecoMse, with less going forth tham, all other men, they more than all others re- 
 ceive the rest of the world into their harbour, jmtting in of necessity (or when conh 
 pelled to put in) from stress of weather. The force of the various participles 
 (sine articulo) is here very delicate, and may easily be wrongly given. 
 
 (c.) K&v ToiTu K. T. X. Several MSS. read Kal rovro, which also makes 
 good sense. But perhaps the other reading comes to the same thing — amd 
 herein have they put forward their specious abstinence — i. e. and herein consists 
 their specious abstinence from alliance which they put forward as their defence, 
 not 7ianiely {i. e. it is this) that they may not be compelled to join others in injus- 
 tice, but that they m>ay commit injustice all by themselves, and that wherein 
 they get the mastery they may openly employ violence, and where they escape detec- 
 tion they may secretly take advantage, and in the event of appropriating anything 
 may not be put to the blush, sc. as there would be no allies to witness the fact, of. 
 supra. I have used the words 'openly' and 'secretly,' because I beUeve thai 
 form of the expression implies them, rb cvTrpeiris d<nrovSov is like t6 ivOpuh 
 irelov KofXTTwdes, V. 68, and t6 ^vvtjdes ijavxov, vi. 34. Pop. ovx Iva k.t.X the 
 form of expression is compressed, and this clause is to be taken in close connexion 
 with dcnrovSov as its explanation — iv 0, and 06 exactly answer to each other, and 
 are another illustration of the fact that where the Greeks can alter the form of 
 the second expression, they will, cf. ch. 16 a. dXnirrfjTepoi — 'less 
 
 within the power of others,' A. But qy. 'grasp.' IJrjv — cf. supra, 
 
 «;■ 35 a. 
 
 Chapter XXXYIII. — (a.) d<j)6a-Tao-i — 'have stood aloof from all connexim 
 with us,' scarcely 'have revolted,' as D. See i. 25. 8id iravrds — 'from 
 
 first to last.' Kriig. has, ' not in this case only,' which seems the real meaning. 
 eKTre(juj)9££ii(rav. Krtig. remarks that this and similar forms occur frequently in 
 Xenophon, sometimes in the orators, never in the dramatists. 6ot)|id> 
 
 Jeo-6ai — here like the Latin ' mirari,' ' to be treated with respect.' On this and 
 similar uses of the word, see note, Sheppard's Theophrastm, p. 72. 'Amid the 
 various colonies planted from Corinth along the coast of Epirus, the greater 
 number acknowledged on her part an hegemony or supremacy. "What extent 
 of real power and interference this acknowledgment implied, in addition to the 
 honorary dignity, we are not in a condition to say.' Grote, vol. vi. p. 67. 
 
 (6.) o48' lirurTpaT6%io|j.6v iKirpcTrms k.t.X.. On this much has been written, 
 more especially as there is abundant MSS. authority for iwio-TpaTeioiiiev and 
 eiivpeirus. If the words stand, I apprehend their meaning is, nor is it unbe- 
 coming in us to attack them (as otherwise it would have been), seeing that it is in 
 no ordinary sort of way that we are being wronged. ' If our attacking them is 
 extraordinary, it is because our provocation has been extraordinary too. But 
 Thuo. has said this somewhat awkwardly. We do not assail them unbecomingly 
 (i.e., unbecoming, as we admit it under ordinary circumstances to be) ' 
 
Chap. 39.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 59 
 
 also being in the act of suffering extraordinary wrong from them. Under ordi- 
 nary circumstances, of course, a mother city fosters and protects its colony. 
 Peile, who prefers the opt. iTruTTpaTeioi/iey, does not differ much in the general 
 sense. ' The opt.,' he says, ' naturally follows oi5/c dpB' dir., and, like it, follows 
 S^Xoy Sri, and that we should not now be invading them, a thing that ought not 
 to be, were we not also, &c' Arnold's version, ' without having received, die.,' wonli 
 require 'qbiKTjfihoi.. Pop. simply has iKTrpeirus ut plerumque valet ' insigniter.' 
 Kriig. more accurately. We attach them not in so extraordinary a way without, 
 (be, explaining ' extraordinary' in so far as it was a war carried on by a mother 
 against a colony. Stephens prefers eiirpeir&s, supposing it equivalent to 
 eiTpoffilnras, 'with a good face.' k^ova-la irXoiTov is well explained 
 
 by Bl., Thepower, or licence of wealth, — i.e., which enables men to gratify their 
 appetites and passions. Tacit. Agric, ' ex patern^ fortunsl tantam licentiam 
 usurpante. ' 
 
 Chaptee XXXIX. — (a.) fjv. This is obviously a case where the relative 
 is to be resolved into a demonstrative and conjunction, — e.g., dXKa, TaiTijv. It 
 is governed by TrpoKa\oip,ivov. Arn. quotes ii. 72, 73, 74, fi TrpoKaXetrai, though 
 this is perhaps, as G. objects, not precisely the same thing as the construction 
 with a noun. Krilg. more appropriately, tAs cwovSas irpoKaXovprai, Equit. 
 V. 796. The student will do well to observe that rbv appertains to TpoKoKoi- 
 p.evov, and that the other participles * sine articulo' are, as usual, only accessories 
 as conditions to the predication, — 'the mem who from a ground of vantage 
 and security challenges you to this.' XeYeiv ti — ' to say some- 
 
 filing to the purpose,' is the exact opposite to oiSiv \4yeis, 'you talk ab- 
 surdity. ' tJ>v Is itrov . . . KaSCo-TaVTa. It is a question whether 
 ' the equality between deeds and words,' or 'the equality between the persons 
 themselves and their opponents' be meant. I incline to the former, from the 
 fact that Thuo. is so partial to this particular antithesis. Pop. considers that 
 the introduction of ofioLus is a sufficient argument against this view. But may 
 it not be the sort of pleonasm not unusual in such familiar phrases. ' Their 
 acts all the same as their words, ' because it was the acts more particularly 
 that the speaker had in his thoughts, and meant to say should correspond 
 to (op.o'ia elvai) the words. Every one laughs at the negro's saying, 'CEesar 
 and Pompey are very like, but specially Pompey,' yet there is a meaning 
 at the bottom of it. The second recalls the first to recollection more than 
 vice versd. 8i.o7<i>v£t£(r6ai. Here again it is doubted whether a 
 contest at law, or one by arms is meant. Pop. decides in favour of the latter, 
 and with reason, since it seems to be explained by oi irplv TroKiopKsiv. 
 
 (6.) Trpiv with the infinitive is usually employed in affirmations; it does, 
 however, occur in negations with the usage of a preposition, Thuc. i. 68; ii. 5 ; 
 vii. 50 ; Kriig. The difference between irplv iroXLopKeiif and irplv iiro\iopKovv 
 rb x'^P"'") concerning which usages some discussion has taken place, appears 
 to me simply the difference between a general, or generic statement, and a 
 special one respecting a fact. The first is, before besieging the place, before pro- 
 ceeding to such an act as besieging the place; the second, before they besieged the 
 place, before they did this definite act of besieging the place. This principle is, I 
 believe, correct, and of wider application, cf. irplv ic^alvHv, said of that 
 
6o NOTES ON THTJCYDIDES. [Booz I. 
 
 whioli never became a fact, ii. 67. Sia<|><5pous 8vTas is connected, 
 
 of course with (r<pas, but Kriig. considers that 01) Sia^dpovs agreeing with iifias 
 would be much more appropriate. 
 
 (c.) T(5t6 irpoo-Uvai — 'then to come for alUajnce.' It is said that refer- 
 ence is made to the revolt of Samos, but the whole may be general and 
 indefinite, diroYfivdiievoi — ' having had no part m thew delwr 
 
 quenoies.' Kriig. quotes 6,Traylyvm6aL ttjs fn-dxt^! Herod, ix. 69. 
 eYK\i)ndTci>v K. T.X.. Even Bloomf. has in his last edition given up the 
 authenticity of these words. We may suppose them to have crept in from a 
 summary of the arguments attached in the margin, or to be, as Ar. suggests, a 
 quotation from some other author appended by the copyist in the way of illus- 
 tration. Their antiquity is proved by the imitation cited from Dio Cassius, 
 xU. 30. It is difficult to make anything of fidvav. If the whole have any 
 meaning, it must run thus, — irdXai Si k. t. X. No, but not without having long 
 ago made you partners in their poioer, ought they now to make you partners in its 
 results; iohereas, if their faults (the matters laid to their charge) a/re the only 
 things in which you had no sha/re, then (ofirw) ought you not to shcure in the come- 
 queihces. On Kotviinravras, see Elms, ad Med. v. 793. ' Koivdaai et KoiviiaaaBixi 
 diversa sunt, illudrcm. aliquam cum aliis communica/re, hoc, rei alicujus particeps 
 fieri significat. ' He does not add, as he might have done, that this difference 
 flows directly from the nature of the middle voice, and may be illustrated by 
 numberless other cases. Mr. Riddle {Tertninalia ii.) interprets ii,6vav apa/rt 
 from the consequences, the offetices sim2ily, and quotes Soph. £'Z. 153, oStoi sol ixoivn, 
 r^Kvop, dxos i(pdj'7] ^pordv, and Antig. v. 308, o^x "^/^^^ AWtjs fioijfos dpK^crei.. 
 
 Chapteb XL. — {a.) ip\6\i.i6a — ' we com^' — ' we are come,' by the rhetorical 
 use of the present. T. K. A. But it seems to me there is a difference between 
 ^KOfiep and ipx^iJ^Od, and that the latter means 'you see us now coming 
 forward.' Such a scholar as Dr. Bloomfield ought not to write in so loose a 
 style as he does here. 'ipxip^eSa, 'Present for preterite,' as often in 'iJKU,' 
 since, as every one knows, it is because i)'/cm is derived from a praeterite, that it 
 contaias a praeterite notion, or the notion of a completed action, rJKu implying 
 the result of a previous ' coming.' 
 
 (6.) €l etpt|Tai, like 'si' with the indicative, assumes the hypothesis, if, at 
 m/ust be admitted, it is specified. poiXerai. is employed rather than 
 
 &v floi'KriTiii, owing to that tendency towards vivacity of narrative in the Greek 
 writers which induces them to employ the exact words of the persons or docu- 
 ment to which they refer. See 5 1 a. aXX' 8<ms |i^ . . . ovt 
 clp'^vijs iroCiicrei. The difficulties which have been felt about this passage will 
 best be understood from the remarks of Peile and Arnold which follow. The 
 first says, I agree with Baver in thinking that the former p.ij is to be taken, 
 not with i,Tvo(TTepSv, as most commentators have supposed, but with Seirai, and 
 that not merely on account of the Hans p.^ iroi'^trei that follows, but because, in 
 fact, it cannot be taken otherwise. Since in the absolute predication, or in 
 Matthiae's words, the definite denial, of not fraudulently withdrawing himself 
 from another, oiiK and not /i^j would be required. "Oims p.ii implying ' in every 
 case that a man shall not,' virtually expresses an excepted case; and it is thus 
 that I understand the passage. ' The agreement does not extend to those who go 
 
Chap. 40.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 61 
 
 to the prejudice of one of the parties, hut is to le wnderstood with this proviso 
 always, that a man is not fraudulently to separate himself from another, amd so 
 require protection, provided also that to those who receive him, he shall not, if they 
 are wise, occasion war in place of peace.' To this I should be inclined to reply 
 that SffTis fiTi aTToa-Tepwy is not a case of ' absolute predication,' or 'definite 
 denial ;' it suggests an hypothetical case, and does not describe a definite indi- 
 vidual. It means ' in the case of a mam heing found to do so,' and being in fact 
 equivalent to d tis fir/, is therefore properly followed by /iij and not oiK. Mat- 
 thiae's idea is, that where the relative refers to a definite person of whom some- 
 thing definite is denied, we have Sims ov, but when to indefinite persons conceived 
 of collectively by the mind, where it may be in fact rendered by siquis, Strrii 
 /j,^ is required, cf. ch. 118. This is equivalent to the explanation above given, 
 and therefore forms no impediment to the more obvious way of taking the 
 passage. TJie treaty is framed, not for the ienefit of those who letake themselves 
 to an alliance for the damage of others; tut for such as, without depriving others 
 - of the ienefit of their aid, are in want of security; cmd for such as will not 
 turn peace into war to those who receive them, if they behave themselves, or as- 
 suming that they act with discretion (cf. supra el dpTjTai.) sc. ol Se^dfievoi. 
 This somewhat strange sense of Avoa-repuy aiirov SXkov is amply supported by 
 Kriiger's references, vofii^wv biroaa bTrurdev Trof^ffatro ^6v7} Trdvra diroffrep'^tTUtf 
 ^ao'L\i(as, Xen. Ifell. iv. I, 41. ^uXaKTjv "Ke^^ovTjfTou rijs 7r6Xews airoGTepelv, 
 Dem. xxiii. 3. I have ventured to give a version which seems to make ei 
 aoKppovovai intelligible. Arnold, however (as I have hinted), Dale, and others, 
 cannot understand it, as it occurs. ' There is a confusion in the expression, 
 and the words el (ra<ppovov<n have really nothing to do with the sentence as it 
 is actually expressed, which is suggested, as it were parenthetically, to the 
 writer's mind, but which he did not set down in words. If written at length, 
 it would thus run ; — ' Flie ienefit of the treaty was intended for such only as should 
 not involve those, who receive them, in war, as, if yon are wise, yow will take care 
 that these men do not involve you.' A. 
 
 (c.) tt|ivv60-6ai TOVTOvs. Kriig. makes 7]p,S,s sub. the subject of the verb, 
 and Toiiroi/s object, ' punish these, not without involving you.' Popp. and others 
 make To&rovs the subject, and aniveaBai the passive infin., which is more ob- 
 vious, though the passive occurs less often than the med. voice. 
 SiKaioC •{'icrTe. See Jelf, § 677. f.iv ye. Krug. says, apparently 
 
 for p.iv ydp, as ye generally stands to attract attention to some particular which 
 illustrates or confirms what has gone before. T. K. A. quotes a good remark of 
 Buttman's on the distinction between the two phrases. ' Cum quis uno argu- 
 mento vel exemplo aliquid probat, potest hoc ut sufficiens adferre ; quod fit 
 particulS, ydp ; potest etiam signiScare plura quidem posse de'siderari, sed hoc 
 unum satis grave esse, quod fit addito ye, ' certe,' 'saltern," Midias, p. 46. 
 avaKwX'^ is the holding back of the hand, and not striking, henee it means a 
 mere temporary truce. Kriig. remarks that except in Thuo. it is rare in Attic 
 prose. For SiA 'm a state of,' See Jelf, § 627. i. 3, b. Am. thus states the 
 rationale of the matter — ' 6i(i denotes the circumstances accompanying the 
 action or situation spoken of; or, more generally, whatever is interposed between 
 the beginning or end of an action.' To me it seems that as physically SA would 
 denote the course of the diameter of any spherical body; so metaphysically it 
 
62 I^OTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 denotes what is as it were central to certain surrounding circumstances, which, 
 so to speak, envelope it. So Am.'s examples. 5i' iixXou etvai — 'to be enveloped 
 by confusion ;' 8i' i.(i-<paX€ia! — 'to be enveloped insecurity;' 5t' ix^pas yheaBai 
 — 'to get into the middle of a quarrel ;' and similarly, Sih /J-dxvs ipx^aBai., ii. 
 II. 1, and of. omnino, ch. 42 c, 5iA KLvSivuv. See note 17. a. 
 
 (d.) el yjp'i\ avTots a.^vv&'V — ^ on the question whether it be expedient to aiii 
 them.' See supra, note on /SoiiXerat, ch. 27 a, and 40 b. <j>avetTai 7clp d k.t.X. 
 
 ' There will T>e found quite as mam,y among your allies who will come over to us,' 
 Jelf, § 817, 4. aiiTov Tiva — every man for himself, cf. i. 43, and vi. 77. 
 
 tJ>v vop.ov — you will he laying down your law against yowr own selves, &c. iirl 
 in this sense, as in Dem. 52, 1, i<t>' vfuv airois iuiade rb Idas toSto KarecKeva- 
 Kdres (quoted by Kriig.) is the exact opposite to irpds, cum genitive, wpbs rao 
 ixl)'''''^" ioifie riv v6p.ov Tidrjs. Eurip. ^fc. 'It seemed estahhshed as practical 
 international law, that neither of these two great aggregate bodies should inter- 
 meddle with the other, and that each should restrain or punish its own disobe- 
 dient members.' Grote, vol. vi, p. 66. 
 
 Chapteb XLI. — (a.) Ai.Kaiio(J.aTa — 'pleas of justice.' See Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. 199, note upon ws TroXXii irapaKcKonrbTi twv StKaiojv — havimg 
 omitted mwny of the pleas which he might have urged. Kriig. quotes v. 97 ; vi 
 79, 80, and other authors. The idea expressed by the words is evidently meant 
 to be contrasted with d.^icij(nv xdptros, which might be rendered — 'a claim uptm 
 your gratitude.' irpbs {ip-ds — ' to urge in your presence.' 
 
 oio-T liTixp^o'SO''- Ths meaning of this word has been disputed. The only 
 passage with which a comparison has been made is ^v Se yvv^ Kajx-Q, al iirixpcJi- 
 fjievai frnKtara yvvalKCS ravra. rotai ^vSpdat TroLeuai, Her. iii. 99, where the word 
 refers to familiar intercourse. We may, therefore, understand it here to imply, 
 ' nor on the other hand friends, so as to ie on a very familiar footing with you, ' and 
 this seems to me established by the sense of 'mutuality,' ' interchange,' which 
 has been proved to attach to i-irl in composition. See note on iirifiaxla, ch. 44. 
 Others have seen in the iirl, the idea of ' over and above ;' consequently 
 iiTLXPV^^^^ is with them ' aiuti — to make an unfair use of you.' 
 
 (b.) V6WV 70ip K. T. X. Tor the history see Herod, vi. 89. Wp 
 
 — 'Before,' an uncommon usage. Kriig. It is ' Jet/ojid ' in reference to time, 
 taking the present as a stand-point. irpbs tJiv A17ivt]twv irdXeiiov, 
 
 See Herod, v. 85. lirtKpdTqo-tv. A Thucydidsean word. Cf. 
 
 Lobeck's Phrynichus, p. 351. That the Corinthian fleet had really no right to 
 arrogate the result to themselves, is remarked by Miiller, .^ginetica, p. 117. 
 Kriig. The American editor translates this word in a special note, ' victory,' 
 which is only worth obsei'ving, as it encourages a sort of inaccuracy to which 
 the junior student is too prone. It is of course, as may be seen from its termi; 
 nation, the means of getting the better of, &c. 
 
 (c.) direpfoiTTOv irapd rb viKav — 'rega/rdless of everything in comparison mth 
 victory,' i. e. all other things when placed beside victory seem as nought. This 
 would be perhaps unnecessary to notice, had not Am. translated it — 'for the 
 sake of conquering,^ and Bl. prm, or propter, for the sake of. Kriig. quotes toC 
 KivSdpoti Kare^pbinjae vapit, rb alaxfibv Ti iirofielvai. Plato, Apol. p. 28. 
 ^v KaV irpcSTtpov ^x^p^S ^ — ' even supposing him to be formerly an enemy,' 
 
Chap. 42..] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 6^ 
 
 Kriig. ingeniously remarks that irpircpov gives to f tlie force of a prseterite. 
 Goll. compares the German 'von jeher' — from an earlier period. 
 tA, o'lKeta K. T. X. — They dispose, or manage worse, even their own affairs owing 
 to the excitement of the moment, i. e. the excitement naturally engendered by 
 strife with an enemy. D. has, less rightly I think— '/or the sake of their 
 animosity at the moment.' See vii. 70 ; iii. 82 ; v. 32. 
 
 Chapter XLII.— (a.) &v iviv^-nUvres. This verb (Kj-iig. remarks) again 
 governs the genitive, vi. 60, i, whereas the accus. most generally follows it. 
 The latter case denotes that the action of the verb simply operates upon its 
 object, as is the case with any other transitive ; in the former it is equiva- 
 lent to tppovrl^eiv, i.e. with the accus. it is to ' consider,' with the genitive to 
 ' consider about ' a thing. viaT(p6s tis, T. K. A. explains as 
 
 equal to e? ns ia-ri vidirepoi — 'each younger man;' rather say, and in the case 
 of any one that is younger, let him deem. djioirw — attracted in 
 
 number to the nearest nominative. d(Jiw€(r6ai — ' to requite,' here 
 
 in a goodsense. Cf. iv. 63, 1. Am. and others explain the word at length, but 
 there is no peculiarity which does not directly follow from the nature of the 
 mid. voice, which the student should elaborate for himself. el iroXc- 
 
 f.i\<ra — ' in case he shall go to war;' the most simple and naked form of stating 
 the hypothesis ; ^v wo\ep,ria-ri, ' in the event of his going to war,' seems to me 
 to be used, when reference is more particularly intended to the course of action 
 then to be pursued. See the remarks on ch. 120 c. 
 
 (h.) TO T€ ■yoip ^v|j.ij>^pov Iv u K. T. X. For expediency most follows wpon 
 that course of conduct loherein a man makes fewest mistakes; or perhaps we should 
 say, 'commits the fewest errors;' for Krug. is apparently right in saying, 
 'jnoralisch, am wenigsten fehlt.' rb (ilXXov. Not, I think, here, 
 
 ' the future of the war' — i. e. the nature of its contingencies, though this might 
 be easily supported; but, the ' coming of the war' — i.e. whether it will come 
 or no. <|>av€pd!' ■IjSr) k. t. X. This is of course in strong antithesis 
 
 to h d<fiavei Ke^rai — ' which is already before your eyes, and not a matter of the 
 futwre at all.' ^^iK&v — to take a little away from — i, e. in some 
 
 degree do away with. For the history, cf. i. 103. 
 
 (c.) Kaipbv '^x"^"'''' — '^^- '^'^X"" ^X""! ''^ 56 a, 'when possessing the quality of 
 opportuneness' — i. e. when seasonably timed — coming in season. 
 TO 70IP f,i\ dSiK6iv. For to abstain from injuring one's equals is a safer source 
 of power, than to be so excited by the prospect of immediate advantage, as to grasp 
 at aggrandizement surrovmded by perils. This I believe to be the general mean- 
 ing of the words. Tto aiur^Ka <f>avep<|> — ' the advantage immediately 
 befwe your eyes' — i.e. that of adding the Corcyrean marine to your own. 
 Sici KivSilvcDV rh irX&v 8x«i.v — is the taking morre than our rights amidst da/ngers. 
 t6 ttX. ^ew is opposed to the equally abstract notion, t6 p/i) aimelv. I cannot 
 understand why T. K. A. should declare ' the article is used because a parti- 
 cular unfair advantage is meant. ' This is not true, and if it were, could the 
 article be absent had the advantage not been particular ? Neither do I see 
 why Krug. accounts for it by a contrasted t6 SKaacrov. Sib, Kivbivav, T. K. A. 
 explains by 'through,' i.e. 'with da/ngers.' But see supra, c. 40 b; it means 
 such a taking, or possession, would be ' enveloped by dangers.' 
 
64 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book J, 
 
 Chaptek XLIII.— (a.) irepnreirrwKciTes — having fallen into the ciramr. 
 stances under which we ov/rselves at Lacedccmon proclaimed the principle, thai every 
 man should have the chastimig of his own allies — oh is governed by the participle; 
 I do not tliink that Krug.'s proposition h oU is necessary. 
 
 (i.) toStov IkcIvov k. t.X. ^Keirai' is of course the predicate: 'this is thai 
 opportwiity' — i. e. the sort of opportunity which people recognise to be the one 
 in which, &c. The Aristophanic toCt' iKetfo will at once occur to the reader as 
 parallel. ToiavTtt 8^. For the corresponding fn^f, see the close of 
 
 the Coroyrean speech. 
 
 Chaptek XLIV. — (a.) Kal 8fe. ' Etiam Us advocatd convocatione,' indica- 
 ting, I suppose, something remarkable, though the same thing occun-ed iii. 36. 
 Trj |iJv irpoT^pa. It seems to be doubted whether these words agree with 
 il/j-ipq. or ^/c/cXijcrip. The former being more familiar, is perhaps more probable; 
 but it is of little importance. |i£T^7V<i)crav — used rather ' sensu 
 
 prsegnanti,' since the meaning is, * so altered their purpose a« not to make;'' or, as 
 we say, ' changed their minds not to make; equivalent, therefore, to ixeTayvivret 
 ^yvii)(rav. Cf. fLerayviovaL ra irpo8edoy/j,^va, iii. 40. 0'(f>Co'iv must 
 
 be connected with ^vfinXelv, for although Matthise supposed it to be governed 
 by iK^Xevovj all the later grammarians (Kost, &c.) contend that /ceXeuw tre iroteiv 
 is the only legitimate construction. ^vji^iax^a — liripiax'a. That 
 
 these words were not, in common parlance, very positively opposed, seems 
 plain from the use of the first in the more special meaning of the second, v. 27, 
 vi. 19; and, as Pop. observes, ^i/xfiaxos for ivUovpos, c. 53, iii. 70. It seems 
 evident that iiri/Mxta is a defensive compact, implying the obligation to aid an 
 ally if invaded : ^viJ,ixaxla therefore, when opposed to it, must stand for ' offen- 
 sive alliance.' But the truth is, that the latter became a sort of Kowhv Svo/ia, 
 and was used genencally for any alliance. Dr. Donaldson, New Craiylus, § 1 74, 
 observes that the force of lirl in composition, where it denotes ' mutuality,' 
 ' interchange,' ' the running of one thing into another,' has not been sufficiently 
 noticed by Greek scholars. In this way, tinixaxia would mean ' an alliance 
 for mutual defence.' He amply illustrates this meaning of the preposition by 
 other citations. The student should consult the section. Of. oh. 41, inxpijcBu 
 and viii. 85, iirap.(t>oTcpliovTa. &im Toirs ovTotis k. t. X. Pop. 
 
 remarks that this formula passed into Latin usage ; at least he quotes ' eosdem 
 amicos atque inimicos (alibi hostes) habere.' Livy, xxix. 23, xxxv. 50, xxxvn. 
 J. Cf. also iii. 75, iii. 10. 
 
 (6.) Kal ciis — of course for oBt-ms, 'even thus;' i.e. even though they were to 
 reject the proffered alliance. |vyKpovciv dXX'fjXoi.s — to wear each 
 
 other out hy nrntual attrition, or conflict, as we say. Krtig. quotes ' bello colli- 
 dere,' Hor. Ep. 1. ii. 7, and Pop. Isoc. Pan. c. 37; Dem. de Cor. § 19. 
 tva Ao-Bevttrr^pois o^irw—' that they might find the Corinthiams and the other 
 naval powers more weak when they went to war with them, should any such neces- 
 aity arise.' The dat. are governed by KaBiffTuvTai, and are in the predicate. 
 
 Chapteb XLV. — (a.) hUa vaBs. Probably quite enough for the purpose, 
 as Kriig. observes. It is not easy to see why Pericles should be suspected of 
 lukewaminess in. the cause, as Bloom, (ed. prior) suggests. The story told by 
 
Chap. 47.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 6^ 
 
 Plutarch (Pericl. u. 29), that he meant to show contempt for the Corinthiang 
 by the smallnesa of the number, imphes an unmeaning act of impolicy, absurd 
 in so far-seeing a statesman. ' AaK€8ai.|J.(Svios. Cimon, it seems, 
 
 had six sons, to three of whom he gave the names of the nations for whom he 
 acted as Proxenus, i.e. Aa/ceSat^iwos, *HXe?os, and G^rraXos. AkStiulos 
 
 the father, as Popp. supposes, of Strombichides, mentioned in the 8th book. 
 tSv IkcCvuv Ti )(^ii>pCii>v. Bloomf. explains h n tS>v xu/iiwi' iKelpoiv, ' to any of 
 ' their places,' and remarks that such a separation of the article from its noun by 
 the governing word, or by another, though found chiefly in Ionic writers, is not 
 unknown in Attic Greek, as i. 106, ^s toO X'^P'-"^ ISiJitov. But in this case tou 
 stands for rtms, and the instances are not parallel. With Kriig., I doubt the 
 admissibility of such a collocation in Thuc. , and with him would read x'^P^"" — 
 some place a/nwng the nnmiber of those belonging to them. It is impossible to sep 
 what T. K. A. means by declaring that Kriig. would read ^j tuc iKclvov tl 
 X'-'ptav. The Schol. says Epidamnus is hinted at. 
 
 Chaptek XL VI. — (b.) irpoo-e'iiilav — 'drew near.' ia-Ti Si 
 
 Xi|j,f|V K.T. X. A full discussion of the geographical difficulties here involved 
 would require too mucll space. The student may consult Bloomf., who has 
 incorporated Col. Leake's valuable observations. The principal points made 
 out seem to be, that 'KL^'fjv is a predicate, there is a harbour, — i.e., a port callefl 
 Cheimerium, as well as the promontory ; that it is the object of the writer to 
 point out the locality of Cheimerium, though he does it awkwardly ; that S>y 
 ^j/tJs means iroTo.iJ.wv, i.e., the rivers; that Cheimerium is Cape Varlam ; but 
 that the Port Cheimerium is not, as was once thought, to be found in the Port 
 of Parga, but in the ruins discovered by Colonel Leake on the other side of the 
 promontory. Bloomf. translation best explains the passage : — ' Now there is a 
 port, and above it, removed from the sea, is a city called Ephyra, situated in 
 the Eleseatis of Threspotia, alongside of which the Acherusian Lake diseni- 
 bogues into the gulf, a lake deriving its name from the river Acheron, which 
 after running through Threspotia, has its outlet into it. The river also ' — I 
 suppose Thyamis, though Bl. omits the word — ' runs to seaward in a parallel 
 direction, dividing Threspotia and Cestrine, between which rivers the 
 Promontory Cheimerium juts out. ' 'E<j>«pi]. This Ionic form in- 
 
 stead of 'B0iJ/)a is given in most texts, because the reading in the MSS. is 
 Ecpip-i}, and in one ''Eicjiifrq. It appears that the grammarians declare this to be 
 a word which always retained the Ionic form. But since Strabo, Steph. 
 Byzant., and others employ 'E^iipa, Popp. strongly suspects the reading. The 
 'B0ii/)i; of Homer is of course Corinth, and Thuc. would not have borrowed the 
 form from his writings to apply it to this town. '&,a<r\„ 
 
 Kriig. prints i^iqai. because of ii. 102, and iv. 103, but he admits that the best 
 MSS. have ^Jewri. fi,v«x«i — raises itself up, iv. 53, 3; vii. 34, 2, 
 
 Krijg. 
 
 Chapter XLVII. — (a.) 'Si^ora — 'The swine pastwes ;' now St. Nicolp 
 di Siyota. According to Leake, they lie five or six miles S. of the mouth of 
 the Thyamis. ■ 
 
 :. (6.) ZaKDv6C«)v. This seems at variance with what is said of the Corcy- 
 
66 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 rseans, o. 31. We nrast therefore suppose that they had made an application 
 at the same time as they sent an emhassy to Athens, and were successful. See 
 Pop. Ed. Maj. Iv T'fj ■fi'ireCpfi) — i.e., the mainlcmd close by the 
 
 Sybota. tj ^Trelpij; = rf Kari, K^pKvpav i)Teipij>, for in the time of Thucydides 
 the word was not yet a proper name, Pop. See notes on iii. £4. The 
 Chaonians are principally the barbarians meant. 
 
 Chaptbk XLVIII. — (a.) rpiffiv ^(lepwv o-irCa — ' provisions for three days.' 
 Kriig. compares ii. 23; iii. i; vi. 34; and Xen. Eell. v. 3. 2t. This suffici- 
 ently proves how little the ancient triremes were calculated for anything like a 
 long voyage. <os eirV vau|iax'a.v. We have the dative, iii. 4, 
 
 vi. 34, but this is a case where small reliance can be placed upon MSS. The 
 lis, in oases like this, seems to me to indicate adherence to a common practice, 
 drew up as ships o/re wont to do when going into action^ or, at any rate, that the 
 act described by the verb is compared with, and referred to a similar class of 
 acts; even ujs 4s Hetcrldas ^ovKdf/.evos (rTpareijeffOai, Xen. Anah. i. I, iI, means 
 'such an expedition as would be organized against the Pisidians.' T. K. A. 
 explains thus : ' ws does not perceptibly weaken the cei*tainty of their deter- 
 mination =wiiA th^ pwrpose of engaging,' from which one does not gain much 
 information. irX^oVTes. Take this with KaBopwai, while so sailing, 
 
 catch sight of. |iET6wpous, a picturesque word, as any one must 
 
 admit, who has remarked how vessels upon the horizon sometimes seem to be, 
 as it were, suspended in mid air. I do not think Bl. is right in explaining in 
 ' the high sea;' and besides, ' the high seas' is scarcely said in the same sense aa 
 ' the king's high-road.' Though a favourite with Thuc, it is not, as Kriig. 
 remarks, employed by Herod, or Xenophon. 
 
 (6.) T&c(\ — here 'divisions,' or 'squadrons,' cf. ii. 81. Of cavalry, ii. 2j. 
 Kriig. th h\ &XXo k.t.X. — 'Along all the rest of the line they 
 
 tJiemselves took place,' or 'extended,' cf. iii. 107. Pop. would rather say 'rdi- 
 quum spatium' than ' reliquam adem, ' because it appears from the next 
 ch. that the Corcyrseans also occupied portion of the right. We must not, 
 then, understand rb dWo as entirely exclusive of the right division. 
 €viivv|j.ov K^pas. Remark the absence of the article. This case comes under 
 those where the article is not applied to things sufficiently familiar and definite 
 not to need it, — as ^aa-iXeis, 'lo-ff/iis, &o. See note, ch. 8 a. So we say 
 'right,' 'left,' not always 'the right,' 'the left.' 
 
 Chapter XLIX. — (o.) toI <rt|ii,eia. The signal was a sort of flag raised 
 upon a mast or pole. The opposite term to denote the lowering of the signal 
 ■in order to put an end to the action, is KaTe<rvda-6Tj, i. 63, 2. The Mace- 
 donians used a crimson flag for the same purpose, Plut. Philop. 6. Similarly 
 among the Eomans, Aramian. xxvii. lo, 9 ; Caesar de B. 0. ii. 20; Kriig. 
 KapTcpd — the regular term for an obstinately-contested combat, not found, says 
 Kriig., in Xenophon. o4x 6|ioC«i)s, sc. Kaprtpd by a sort of 
 
 Zeugma, not so much iy the science of the parties. Bl. version approved by 
 T. K. A., 'less excdlent,' 'meritorious,' does not seem desii-able. Kriig. says, 
 'short for /Sfg 8^, Trefo/iax'?.' 
 
 (6.) irpo(rpd\oi.cv. Bekker prefers to vpo<T^i\Xoi.€v, which occurs in the 
 
Chap. 49. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 6^ 
 
 MSS. But it does not seem necessary to alter the present, ' when they happen 
 to lay alongside of one amoiher,' i.e., in the nautical sense of ' laying a ship 
 aboard of another.' The optative of course expresses ' indefinite frequency,' as 
 Tni^oiVTo infra, diTEXiiovTo — ' got clear.' KaraoTdvTts 
 
 l(i.dxovTO. Bl. is right in saying, ' the sense is maintained a. pugna stataria,' 
 rather than D. in translating, ' they set to, and fought;' it implies that they 
 formed into a regular set array, like a body of infantry. SUKirXou 
 
 This evolution, Bl. seems to think, corresponds to the modem evolution of 
 ' breaking the line ' employed so successfully by Rodney and Nelson, and the 
 original suggestion of which has been so much controverted. The object of 
 this is to destroy a portion of the enemy's fleet, which is thus out off from the 
 rest. But does not the plural here indicate a single manoeuvre often repeated, 
 which could not be the case with such breaking the line ? I should therefore be in- 
 clined to accept the original explanation, that, viz., it was a breaking through 
 the enemy's line, in order by a rapid turn backwards to smash the oars, or 
 sides, or stem of the opposing vessel, ii. 83, 89; vii. 36, 70. Compare Livy's 
 description quoted by Pop., 'Libero inter ordines discursu prstervecti in 
 puppim impetum dabant,' xxxvii. ■24. 
 
 (c. ) ScStoTEs 01 oTpaTTi'yoC. Had the construction proceeded smoothly, we 
 should have had afArrwal vijes still continued as nom. to oiic ^pxo", but ol 
 ffrpaTTj-yol is' substituted, because they were the responsible parties in the'Arr. 
 vijes, and the real causes of the delay. Kriig. places a. stop at ^pxo", thereby 
 making dedlores ol cTTpaT, a sort of nom. pendens. t^v irpfSppTicriv. 
 
 See i. 45. 
 
 (d.) rds crKT)vds lp<i|J.ODS. In this collocation, as in rg Si\pri iiraiarip, iv. 
 122, rais vava-l Koi(f>(us, vii. 37, tIiv Kriirov jxiyav, vii. ']0, we have what Dr. 
 Donaldson calls secondary predication, and the whole is equivalent to — ' they 
 set fire to the tents, and the tents were empty. ' The idiom is of course familiar to 
 every scholar ; but I have some doubt whether this mode of explaining it suffi- 
 ciently points out the fact that the adjective or participle so placed contains 
 the cause or condition of the whole predication ; as rbv duSpa yeKiaavra Srvwe 
 is not — *Ae struch the man, and the man was laughing; but, he struck the man 
 hecoMse he laughed. Here I should render, they set fire to the tents as they found 
 them, empty. D.'s ' hurnt the deserted tents,' may be defended by the ambiguity 
 of the English idiom, but should not have been given in a version intended for 
 students, as it might mislead. See more on the subject, notes on i. 36 a ; 
 iii. 57 a. Ipijixos is in Thuc. of two, arid also of three terminations. 
 
 Si^piratrav. Bl. way of accounting for the force of the prep, is probably 
 correct. They searched through (Sia) and carried off, ijpTaffay, any articles ; as 
 infra, viii. 31 and 36. 
 
 (e.) ttiri — 'from an originally smaller numier,' i.e. no, see ch. 47, which 
 even united with the ten from Athens would not equal the Corinthian fleet of 
 150. See ch. 46. dirpo<|>a(rC<rT<i)s. Said properly of an act which 
 
 required no irp^^ao'ts to excuse it ; therefore it means more * openly ' and * un- 
 hesitatingly.' Xa|JixpuS| <|>avcpws. Cf. ii. 7i ' clearly,' indisputably, 
 Kriig. cf. \aii.Trpk vIkt), vii. 55. JpVoi) slxeTO — 'sei to worh,' lit. 
 hdd himself to it, so in German, ' Griff das Werh eifrig an. ' Sie- 
 , K^KpiTo. There was no longer any distinction hetween friend amd foe. Bl. iUua- 
 
 J 2 
 
68 JSrOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 trates by St. James ii. 4, (Bl. ref. is ■wrong), oi SieKplBrjre h kavToXt, where 
 the meaning obviously is — Hare you not made invidious distinctions among 
 yourselves^ Is ToiiTO a.vd7KT]s — ^ to such a pitch of necessity,^ ' eo 
 
 necessitatis,' Kriig. explains 'to such an inevitable collision,' comparing h 
 TovTo i.va.yKTjt b X670S fjKii.. Plat. Thecet. 170, u. Compare ^s tovto ^viuj>6pm, 
 iii, 59. ^s TOVTO SviTTvx^o.h vii. 86. The usage of ^vviirfuev in this imperBonal 
 way is elsewhere, says Kriig., confined to the meaning equivalent to ^mipii 
 There seems little authority for ^vvkireirov accepted by many editors. Pop. 
 suggests that TrdvTa may be supplied to ^vviireaev from 6\ibkv. The Schol. 
 understands ri irpdy^aTa. 
 
 Chapter L. — (a. ) toi o-Kd({>i) k. t. X. ' They did not attempt to lash fast amd 
 tow after them the hulls of the vessels which they happened to sink.' The opt. 
 expresses the indefiniteness of the whole : the aorist is used because there is no 
 intention on the part of the writer to connote the exact time of the action of 
 the verb. Entertaining those views on the nature of the aorist, expressed else- 
 where, I do not attribute so much importance as others to the controversy 
 maintained between Madvig and Kriiger in their Greek Grammars, whether the 
 aor. optative in non- hypothetical relative clauses, be a prieteritum, or no. 
 Kriig. would naturally quote the present case in confiirmation of his opinion 
 that it is. A. directs attention to the fact that KaTahiffeiav only implies a 
 partial sinking, or wkterlogging of the ships. This is clear from Herod, viii. 
 go, and from the famous case of Arginusse, where some of the Athenian com- 
 manders after the action proposed ifKeXv ^irl tcls KaTadeSvKvias paus, jcai toi)s 
 
 , iir' aiiTdv dvBpiiTrous. Si(Kir\iovris is of course not used in the 
 
 technical sense of 5i'eKT\ovs in last ch., but simply — 'sailing through,' i.e. the 
 scene of action. 
 
 (5.)"EX\'r](ri K. T. \. With reference to the naval actions in the Persian 
 war — /xeyio-TTj tuiv wpb adrrj^. Cf. i. i a. 
 
 (d.) Kal 8o-ai ?[(rav Xoiirat. The Kal has been very offensive to editors. But 
 Pop. explanation seems satisfactory : the ir'Koit/j.oi are those which came sea- 
 worthy out of action ; but beside these, ten had never been in action at all, for 
 the Coroyreans had 120 triremes, see ch. 25, and of these only no were 
 employed in the battle. Engelman, thinking this 'very obscure,' proposes to 
 ender Kal 'viz.,' so that 7rXt6i/ioi and XoittoJ should mean the same ships. This 
 
 ; use of Kal I cannot but consider very dubious. He supports it by Toio&ruu Kal 
 dicovaltiv diiapT-qixaTav, Plato, Apol. p. 26 A., which he says is only used to 
 denote one class of a/iapTrnxaTa. But I am not sure that it only denotes one 
 
 , aspect of them ; and the word toioOtos, owing to its collocation in such phrases 
 as ToiavTa Kal TrapairX-tiaia, has a particular usage which renders it impossible 
 for us to quote the above phrase as any authority for such a use of koI in the 
 text. Of the other reference to iii. 26, rd re nphrepov TeTnij/iha Kal U « 
 ^/SejSXaiTTijKei Kal S(Ta h TaU irplv ia^oKah irapeX^XeiTTo, we can only say- 
 Nil agit exemplum quod litem lite resolvit.' 
 
 (e.) €ir6irauivi(rT0. 'Etsi Grseci non vaiSva sed -iraidva #5cu/ diount, tamen 
 
 .promiscufe iraiucifu et iraiavil;oi usurpant.' Stanley ad ^sch. S. C. T. v. 274. 
 The MSS. here as elsewhere exhibit both. irpvuvav, so. M 
 
 .^pip-vav iicpoiovTo, rowed sternward. The object of this evolution..sometimea, 
 
Chap. 53.J KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 69 
 
 was to gain space for returning to the charge, and sometimes, as here, to present 
 the least vulnerable part of the ship, to the enemy. Cf. Herod, viii. 84. Thuc. 
 i, 51 ; iii. 78; vii. 36. Kriig. cf. the military phrase iirl 7r65a 6,vaxoipitv. 
 Xen. ATiah. v. 3, 31. oXlyai duvveiv, ' too few to aid.' This sort 
 
 of comparative usage of the positive is not peculiar to Greek. Thus we might 
 sa,J—few for the purpose. Cf. dXtyovs elmi, rij aTparlq. ttJ MijSwj' av/ipaXieiy, 
 JHer. vi. 109, and again vii. 207. See Jelf, § 666. Matt. § 448. 
 
 Chapter LI. — (a.) [jiaXXov Ik toB acjiavoBs — ' more than to the Corinthians.' 
 iK ToS dcfeapoSs — adverbially. Pop. quotes as similar cases from Thuc, ix toO 
 <pap4pov, iv. 79, ix tov irpoipavovf, iii. 43, and others. tHai^aXov 
 
 wondered at the Corinthians hacking water, as we might say. See Jelf, § 495, 
 obs. 3. vfjes iKctvai eirnrX^ouo-iv — as often, a transition to the words 
 
 actually used, ' yonder are ships sailing up to us.' See ch. 40 b. 
 Juveo-KOTaJe — ' darkness was closing in. ' 
 
 (b.) IreXeuTa Is v^Kra. See note iii. 78, ended at night, i. e., lasted up to night 
 and then ended, ch. 58 b. 'Av8ok£8t]s. This is the well-known Ando- 
 
 cides the orator, who afterwards played so prominent a part in reference to the 
 mutilation of the Herms. a>p|x(<raVTo sc. at y^es. ' Subjectum enim 
 
 mutatum ex medio apparet,' Pop. But I am not convinced that the word can- 
 not mean, ' brought their ships to moorings, ' without any such awkward change 
 of subject. at eCkoo-i vrjes airb twv ' AB-qvav, aSrai.. In this and some 
 
 other passages of Thuoydides, as iv. g. i, vi. 96. 3, vii. 41. i, the article 
 seems used in somewhat an anomalous manner. I fully agree with Engelman 
 that to alter the passages, as Krilg. would in this case, is futile, for how can we 
 account for their existence? The correction of them, which we find in some 
 few MSS., is much more probably owing to the hand of the transcriber. It 
 only remains, therefore, to conclude that Thuoydides is somewhat peculiar in 
 his way of employing the article. Now if a writer were to say, ' The ships 
 from Athens, those, I mean, which Glaucon commanded,' no one would express 
 any surprise. But here we have ' these' instead of those. May not this, how- 
 ever, be ascribed to the same principle of composition upon which, as above, 
 we have a transition to the directa actio in vijes ^KeTvat k.t.X., the narrator 
 vividly entering into the action, and speaking from that stand-point as it were ? 
 
 Chapter LII. — (J.) ras (i^v vaSs Apavrts ... i^o-vxajov. Here is a slight 
 anacolouthon, for either we ought to have read ras /j-h xaCs ^pav, ija-ix'^^'"' S^j 
 or /liy should have been omitted. Pop. But Krug. remarks that fji,h belongs 
 rather to the general thought than to any one of the separate ideas, and may 
 be supposed to connect itself with tov 5k ot/caSe irXou in the next section, vavs 
 dpavres is not so common as vavo-lv Upavres, but Kriig. , cf. Herod, viii. 5 7t 
 i,iraLpov(Ti rhs vias dirb 2a\ap,7vos. The ships themselves were drawn up on 
 shore, therefore dyxipas need not be substituted. lirio-KCv/i — ' the 
 
 mea/ns of refitting.' Pop. says, in the same way as wepLTelx^ais is the 'means 
 of fortifying,' but surely, in this latter case, it is the termination in -an, which 
 denotes the operation: so also with dXacris, 'the means of capturing, Phil. 61. 
 Iv X'^'P^V ^P'hV'V- The junior student should note the effect of the article's 
 being absent ; it conveys the reason why there was no iiruxKev^, but scarcely. 
 
7o NOTES ON THUCYDXDES. L^oo^ I- 
 
 say with D. ' i/n so deserted a place.' tow ir\oB for T65e toC irXou 
 
 Sttt;. Cf. I. 68, Kriig. But see Jelf, § 496. 
 
 Chapter LIII. — (a.) kcX^tiov, explained by the Schol. ixtKpbv irKodpiov dTrJ 
 IJ,eTa(popS,s Tov k^Xijtos iirirov, y eis dvrip iinKaBfiTai.. As the kAi)s was the 
 riding-horse (light horseman, says T. K. A.), the small light skiif containing 
 an individual was so named metaphorically. Krug. cf. iv. 120; viii. 38; 
 Herod, viii. 94. 4v£u KTjpvKeCou. 'This was a straight stick of 
 
 wood or of metal encircled around with two serpents, having their crests oppo- 
 site to each other, so as to bear the form of the letter $. Thus it answered to 
 the caduceus of Mercury. Sometimes, however, instead of serpents, it was 
 encircled by sprigs of olive, indicative of a desire for reconciliation," Bloomf. 
 Thus it would be equivalent to our flag of truce, and the sending a message 
 without it, would be meant to imply that the Corinthians did not admit them- 
 selves to be at war with Athens. ir£(i.<(faVTes, on the principle of 
 ' qui faoit per alium, facit per se,' the legates are regarded as the mouth-pieces 
 of the principals, from whom they come, cf. SUcpBeipe, ii. 69, ad fin. 
 inrovSols XiovTcs, may be much more emphatic, sine articndo, are breakers oj 
 treaties, but, see ch. 48 b. 
 
 (i.) Xw6T€. This Bloomf. regards as a negl%ence of expression for XOe^v : to 
 me it seems a very natural anacolouthon, and quite iu the manner of Thucyd. 
 ' a/nd are hreaJcing the treaty too.' 
 
 (c.) TO \Uv. Upon any explanation which I have seen the /ih is misplaced, 
 for the <TTpar6i!-eSov is not contrasted with anything. It may be a mere 
 carelessness of expression, the writer's real intention being to contrast the 
 Corcyreans and Athenians, or, as Krug. suggests, it may have crept into the 
 text from what has gone before. avi^ryrev — ' called out to lay 
 
 hold of and hill them,' Kriig. of. Xen. Anab. i. 8. 12, Ki^pos i§6a &yeu> tJ 
 ffTpaTevp.a. 
 
 Chapter LIV. — {a.) hr' o1.kov, not iir' oIkov. Therefore, 'homewards,' 
 i.e., in the direction of =>■ point; with the accusative right up to a point, as cb. 
 30 a ; hence I imagine its common signification of ' hostility,' which in some 
 grammars and lexicons is given as the primary one. 
 
 (5.) vcKpovs dvetXovTo. See note, ch. 8 a. The absence of the article is 
 explicable upon the principle often noticed of its natural omission in the descrip- 
 tion of any familiar process, where the object ofthe verb's action is at once Intel 
 ligible without particular definition, — e.g., 'weigh anchor,' 'shoulder arms,' 'fur' 
 sails,' and the like. So 'to take up dead' describes so natural and necessarj 
 a process, that no article is required. Cf. iv. 4; iv. 54; v. \o; vii. 5; viii 
 106. (^eve)i9ivTa. The neuter, because the corpses were regardec 
 
 as without personality — mere things. Kriig., cf. ifo-a ii. 92, and Xen. Anab. 
 i. a., 8. <i)oT6 Kal vaiiii-yitt k.t.X. This would of course, as ii 
 
 the similar case on land, indicate that victory rested with them. 
 
 Chapter LV. — {a.) Iv SEpaireC(;^ clxov — 'treated them with great courtes} 
 ami attention.' Kriig. cf. iv ahlg, ix^i-v, v. 60; vii. 81. On the result, se( 
 iii. 70. irpooTToi'^o-eiav — 'might bring over to them.' On thii 
 
 somewhat peculiar word, see the note on iii, 47 a, and in Sheppard' 
 
Chap. 57.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 7 1 
 
 Theophrastus, v. i., irepl elpuvetas. All the usages of the word appear to me 
 directly deducible from the primary meaning, to bring over to; of. 7r/30ireironi- 
 caPTO, last chapter ; ' tooJc to themselves, ' i.e., claimed. 
 
 (b.) irepi-yC-yveToi. A. taking the prepos. in a, not unusual sense, cf. ch. 
 2 b, translates ' thus overlived the war,' i.e., thus came out of the contest with 
 the Corinthians undestroyed. And I am not at all sure that he is wrong. Krug., 
 however, and others, contend that it is 'got the upper hand.' Cf. ii. 65. The 
 connexion between ' superesse' and ' superare' shows how closely the ideas are 
 united. a-^Unv — because logically oi KoplvSioi is the subject of the 
 
 sentence. Iv (rirovSais. Remark the absence of the article, ' in 
 
 a time of treaty/ so. the thirty years' truce. But see chap. 54 b. 
 
 Chapter LVI. — {a.) Sidcjiopa — 'points of difference,' or points in dispute; 
 hence 'causes of quarrel.' More frequent, says Kriig., in Thuc. than else- 
 where. Cf i. 67, 68. irpao-o-dvTwv. This word, in the sense of 
 ' working,' ' scheming,' may, as A. remarks, be compared with our own expres- 
 sion 'to practise,' and 'practises.' See note on iii. 56. Kriig. remarks that 
 it is most common with 6irus and an indicative, iii. 4, 70. 
 HaXX^VTjs — formerly called Phlegra, now the Gate of Kassandhra (says Col. 
 Leake). Between the Gulf of Therma and the Strymonic Gulf, the whole 
 district called Chalcidice juts out into the sea with three promontories, of which 
 this lies most to the west. Consult Grote vi. 90, 91, who remarks that the 
 Athenian Empire was much more secure over the islands, than over the sea- 
 ports situated on the Continent, as the latter would have a much better chance 
 of receiving aid from some neighbour powerful by land. <t>dpov 
 •uiroTeXeis — i.e., paying a fixed sum annually, instead of a contingent of ships. 
 See ch. 29, and the commentators on Arist. Vesp. 669. to Is 
 IlaW'iivTiv T€t)^os. The effect of this would be to leave standing the fortifica- 
 tions towards the mainland, but also to leave the town destitute of defence on 
 the side where it was accessible from the sea, — i.e., from Athens. 
 E7riSt]|xiovp70vs. ' This term and Aap.tovpy6s was applied to the chief magis- 
 trates of the Peloponnesians, expressive of their doingv ' the service of the 
 people.' See Livy, xxxii. 22, and Arist. Pol. iv. 4, p. 140. Asclepiades con- 
 siders the prepos. superfluous. Goll. understands it to mean 'extra magis- 
 trates sent as colleagues to the ATHJuovpyol.' Arn. It is possible M may only 
 have the sense of superintendence, as in iirla-Koiros. For the nature of the 
 magistracy, cf. MiiUer, Dorians, i. s, 46, who, however, seems to interpret 
 'upper magistrates.' 'The words ra iiri QpfKr/s denote generally the towns in 
 Chalkidike, places in the direction or on the skirts of Thrace, rather than parts 
 of Thrace itself ' Grote, vi. 90. Mr. Shilleto makes it embrace Chalcidice, 
 with its three projecting tongues of land, all the Hellenic colonies stretching 
 eastward along the coast, and terminating at some unknown point to the W. of 
 the Hellespont. Its western boundary was Macedonia, and it included several 
 islands in the ^gean, among which Thasos was certainly one. Thucydides, or 
 Grote, p. 10. 
 
 Chapter LVII, — {a.) <]>avEpus Sid<)>opoi, — ' openly at varicmce.' 
 ' IlepSUKas— the line of the Kings of Macedon, from their founder, Perdiccas, 
 
73. NOTES ON THU€YDIDES. [Book 1 
 
 may be seen Herod, viii. 139. They were reputed to be descended fror 
 Temenus, that one of the Heracleidae who at the return of his family with th 
 Dorians, obtained possession of ArgoUs, and on the strength of this descen 
 they were allowed to he Greeks. Herod, v. 22. But the Macedonian peopl 
 were regarded at best as half-barbarians. Thuoyd. iv. 134,126.' Am. 
 MaKcSovwv without the article, and means certain Macedonians on the sea-coast 
 see ii. 99, r^i Kara MaKeSovlas. Perdicoaa was to have reigned jointly with hi 
 brother Philip and his cousin Derdas, but attempted to deprive them of thei 
 provinces. Besides these, says Pop., the brothers of Derdas, c. 59; Pau 
 sanias, c. 6s ; and Augustus, son of Philip, are mentioned as rivals to Per 
 diccas. lirciroX^jKOTo — 'had been made a foe of,' 
 
 lvavTiov)ievois — ' acting together in opposition to him.' The construction, thougl 
 unusual, verborum pugnandi usu defenditur. Of. Plut. Cleom, vii. 3. 
 Trpoo-eiroL€iTO. The preceding re would induce us to expect irpotTTOLoviievos, bu 
 it is quite in Thuc. manner to pass thus to the finite verb. Pop. cf. ii. 29 
 iv. 4, 72. 
 
 (i.) 8|xopa SvTa to. x<'p'«" Many MSS. omit the rd, which most editon 
 inclose in brackets. If it stand, it must mean, I presume, ' if he could get pos 
 session of the places, heing as they were, close to Potidcea.' ivtKtk— 
 
 denoting the final cause, 'for the sake of.' 
 
 (c.) Xa\KiS£v<ri.. According to Col. Leake (N. Greece, iii. 54), thesf 
 Chalcideans occupied the whole of the great peninsula, south of the Mouni 
 Khortiatzi, though Chalcidice itself was originally the name of a mucl 
 smaller district. When Xerxes was retreating from Greece, he left behind hia 
 Artabazus ; the latter subdued Olynthus and placed it in the hands of the 
 Chalcidians. Ever after, the Bottiseans are found in close alliance with them, 
 cf. ii. 79. irpoKaTaXap.pcLV£LV — properly a miUtary word, 
 
 meaning ' to anticipate the enemy in occupying some position.' See ch. 33 c. 
 
 (d.) ttiroB — sc. Perdiccas, cf. i. 59. y.er' fiXXuv 8^KO. 
 
 Eleven generals are quite an unheard of number, and, besides, many more 
 than are suitable for one thousand men, to say nothing of the five who follow, 
 c. 61. The very ingenious conjecture of Kriig., fjter' S.\Kav 6', 'with foui 
 others, ' gets over the difficulty ; and they who know most about numerals ii 
 MSS. will make least difficulty in accepting it. It is no valid defence of thi 
 old reading to say with Arn., that Pericles was employed with nine colleagues ir 
 the Samian war, 0. 116, for Thuc. there only says that Pericles was one of ths 
 ten regular o'TparTj-yol of the state, SeKdrou airov a-TparriyovvTO^, and not thai 
 all ten were on duty in the same expedition, and with the same force. The fivf 
 mentioned, c. 61, would make the number exactly ten. 
 
 Chaptbe LVIII. — (a.) Sirpao-o-ov. Most editors agree with Pop. in 
 marking this as spurious. If it be genuine, says Kriig., iMdm-es— 8^7) must he 
 considered an anacolouthon of parenthetical character ; or after i-jreiS-/}, we raaj 
 add with one MS. a Si. kx iroWov^' after a long time,' after much 
 
 negotiation. ■iiir^crxCTo. The majority of MSS. have iiriaxovTo, 
 
 which Krug. in his notes appears to accept : for neuter plurals which stand foi 
 persons, individual agents, sometimes foUow the law of all plurals. Cf. note oi 
 ch. 136 ; iii. 82 ; vii. 57. tcI t^i^— ' the authorities.' Am. has a 
 
Ghap. 6l.j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 73, 
 
 good note on the origin and various meanings of reXiui, as traced by Damn. 
 Lex. Homeric, and Wachsmuth. They seem to resolve themselves into the 
 notion of ' completing and perfecting, ' bringing to a culminating point. 
 Tore %i\ — then at last. Kara rbv Kaipbv tovtov — when they met with 
 
 this favowahle crisis. The first, says Krvig., denotes only the time, the . 
 second, the favourable conj unction of circumstances. 
 
 (6.) TavTTiv is the object, iJ,la.v viKiv laxvpii.i' the predicate, and is therefore 
 sine articulo. dvoiKCa-airSai Is "OXvvflov is not an uncommon, though 
 
 elliptical way of speaking — ' to breah ujp their establishments and settle in Olyn- 
 thus.' See nearly the same notion, Arist. Aves, 1340, cf. ch. 51b. rijs ■yrjs — 
 
 this, says Kriig., depends upon wepl tt)v \liivqv B6\^??p, wherewith one may men- 
 tally supply tI, The Lake of Bolbe seems now to be called Besicia. Henceforward 
 Olynthus became the principal Chalcidsean city. It was at a subsequent period 
 taken by Philip II., its inhabitants sold for slaves, and its waUs razed to the 
 ground. Bloomf., who considers that 6.vk implies 'up the country,' shows that 
 Olynthus was not, as represented in the maps, on the sea shore, but about five 
 miles inland, in a N. E. direction. '^Sukc vlfietrSat. — gave it to them 
 
 to inhabit, or occupy and cultivate, whether by farming or grazing, and to receive 
 the fruits thereof. Such is the fuU import of the phrase. Bloomf. 
 
 Chaptbe LIX. — (a.) rk kv\ Op^Kt)?. See Grote as quoted above, i;. 56. 
 KaraoTavTes eiroXeiJioiiv. Either, says Popp., ' qimm pervenissent,' or ' quum 
 consedissent. ' I should prefer the latter, taking the words in a military sense — 
 ' when they had established themselves there, ' i. e., secured a base for their opera- 
 tions. fivuOev — from the upper, or, inner country. 
 
 Chapter LX. — {a.) irepl tu y^pLia. Thucyd. uses both the dative and 
 gen. freely in this meaning. Dat. i. 67, 74, 119, &c. Gen. iii. 102, and with 
 <j>opei<Tdai, viii. 93. Tois irolvTas, in all, the German idiom ' im 
 
 Ganzen' corresponds. 
 
 (J.) 'ApuTTeis. 'Apiirr^as appellatur, Herod, vii. 137. 'ASeipwivToi). 
 
 Est Adeimantus, 6 'QxiTov, KopMms arpaTTiyS!, de quo Herod, viii. 5. 59, 61, 
 94. Popp. 6iriT<)Sei.os — is ' a fit and proper person for anything ;' hence 
 
 It naturally slides into our meaning of ' proper,' except in such cases as Xen. 
 Anab. i., where it is 'fit and proper to be beaten; here it denotes accordance in 
 political S3rmpathies, and is equivalent to (ji'iKo^. Cf. i. 95 ; ii. 49 ; viii. 47. 
 
 (c.) T€(ra*apaKO(rTjj — reaaapaKovra ij^ipais Hffrepov would have been more 
 usual, but we have rplrri iip.^pf iiffrepoy, viii. 24, and so in Latin ' tertio anno 
 post,' as well as 'tribus aunis post.' Popp. We may add that Anglicfe — 'forty 
 days after,' and 'the fortieth day after,' are alike used. 
 
 Chapter LXI. — (a.) lirwrapiSvTas — 'had come up besides.' Kriig. cf. 
 Xen. Anab. iii. 4, 30. lauToov — so. of Athenian citizens. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 (5.) dva7KaCav — ' compulsory,' i. e., such as circumstances compelled them 
 to make. Cf. exactly the same use of necessarius, Liv. xxii. 2., ' necessarium 
 cubile,' and of dvayKaTos, i. go ; ii. 70. 
 
 (c.) diravfo-TaVTat Ik rfjs MaKcSovCas — ' breaJc up their encampment for the 
 pwrpose of leaving Macedonia.' „ So, says Poppo, the words must be taken, as it 
 
74 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I 
 
 is impossible that Bernea was not within the limits of Macedonia. The town, i 
 will be remembered, is honourably mentioned in the Act. Apost., and is stil 
 called ' Veria.' eirwrrplxltoVTes — 'they made a turn hack' — 'ma/ri 
 
 versus,' Bays Popp., ' gegen Osten.' Knig. Both Am. andBloomf. understane 
 Thuc. to mean — 'they turned back again into the regular route from Pydna t( 
 Potidaea, from which they had deviated in their attempt to surprise Beroea. Now, 
 as the latter place lay in a westerly direction, and somewhat inland, such a tun 
 must have brought their line of march toward the east and the sea. All tlif 
 explanations, therefore, come to much the same thing. The student should, 
 if anxious for further discussion, refer to Grote's elaborate note, vol. vi. p. 95, 
 The Kai before ireipdaar/Tes, which Popp. dislikes and Bloomf. would obliterate 
 ought I think to stand. It seems to me to resemble the xal in iiirovrAs ti fcal 
 Kivhweijeiv and such phrases, yet not hefore liavvng made a/n attem'pt upon tht 
 place. Cf. irupav tSsv retx^v, vii. 12, and ttjs Niiraias ireip&v, iv. 70. 
 XupCs — ^here not in its usual sense, but ' besides,' which meaning it appears tc 
 derive from the notion of — 'without couMting this or that.' Cf. with Krug. ii. 
 13; i^- 91'- iii- 17. i. Gigouis is described by the Schol. as a promontorj 
 between Macedonia and Pallene. Leake places it near ' Apanoi-mi promontO' 
 rium.' ep8o|JL^K0VTa, made up with the forty of Callias and the 
 
 thirty of Arohestratus, c. 57. 
 
 Chaptek LXII.— (ct.) irpbs 'OXiiveov. The majority of MSS. have irpi 
 0\ivBou ; but the allies were not encamped in front of Olynthus ; nor yet, says 
 Popp. , close to Olynthus, irpbs' OXivBip, but under the walls of Potidsea, on the sidi 
 that looked towards Olynthus, and this idea can only be expressed by irpbi 
 OXfoSou. So iii. 21, Tpbs nXaraiux ; iv. 31, Trpbs toO \Lp,4vo! ; iv. 130, tJ irpbi 
 liKHjiVTis. ii,fa TTjs irdXcus — to prevent the men from straggling into 
 
 the town of Potidaea. Of. iii. 6; v. 115 ; vi. 50. 
 
 (6.) ?x<"'''''- ^''® junior student may remark a good instance of a not un- 
 common Trpbs rb cnjp.atvdfiei'ov construction, i. e., because tov 'Apiffr^ws ij yvftip-ri 
 ^v is equivalent to ^5o|e T(p 'ApuTTeT, the participle stands in the dative. In- 
 stances are numerous. Popp. gives one from Homer, Lib. xiv. 139 — 'AxOiKijm 
 6\obi> KTJp yrjBei — 5epK0p,h(p. Tw l(r6|ji.u . . . I^a Io-6|j.ov. This ap- 
 
 pears contradictory to the common usage of the article. It is to be explained, 
 I think, by supposing that in the second case Thuc. uses the expression ai 
 employed in the common parlance of the locality, where the article would be 
 omitted, just upon the same principle as it was omitted before the Isthmus ol 
 Corinth by the Southern Greeks (i. to8 ; ii. 9 ; iv. 42), and as it is omittec 
 before thoroughly familiar objects by ourselves. See note, ch. 8 a, and ch. 54 
 a. Elsewhere, in this part of the narrative, Thuc. describes it as a strangei 
 'cum articulo.' Cf. niKpovs dvelXovTO. Cf. c. 54. o-(|>ds. Aristeui 
 
 and his own troops. 
 
 (c.) Toirs MoKcSdvas tinrlas. This word appears to be used adjectively hen 
 and in u. 63, ol MaxeSbves lirTijs. So also we have oi 'BXXi;;'cs TreXroirTai 
 Xen. Anai. vi. 5, 26, and such phrases as TJ)>'"BXXoSa yXiliiraav. 
 
 Chapter LXIII. — (a.) oiroT^poxrt SiaKivSvveiiro^ X'^P'^o'c^S — in which 0, 
 the two directions he should run the risk of going. The subj. after 'fiirbpriae i 
 
Chap. 64.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 75 
 
 given by Bekker for the future, — vev<rei. It 13 remarked that x'^PV'^"-^ might 
 have been employed, or the word altogether omitted, as in vii. i ; viii. 47. 
 (is es eXAxioTov \c4piov — ' into as narrow a space as possible,' because the 
 denser the column, the more easily they would force their way through the 
 enemy. Popp. points out that x'^'P'"'' stands for 'spatium,' ii. 77, 78. The 
 transposition for h us iXdxi-crTOV is to be noticed. See Matth. Gr. Or. § 461, 
 and of. with G. iii. 46, Sn h Ppax^ririf. Puiiirao-Sai — force Ms 
 
 way into Potidcea. X'H^^'' — '^'' ' *^^ *'^'*''' "/ ** bird. ' Here the 
 
 'mole,' or 'stone- breakwater,' which, as Arn. points out, after being constructed 
 just below the sea-wall of the ancient towns, in order to strengthen them, was 
 afterwards continued so as to narrow the entrance of the harbour. It projected 
 like a talon or claw, and hence its name. Aristeus could not enter the regular gates 
 of the town, as the Athenians had probably cut off the retreat, and in passing 
 along the mole he was exposed to missiles from the ships. 8itt is 
 
 undoubtedly ' through the sea,' as is easily intelligible from the position of the 
 mole. Others have rendered it prceter vel propter mare, which meaning 
 Popp. says only exists in the poets, Herod., and the ancient writers. But 
 see xl. c. 
 
 (6.) KaTaij>av^s. We may either, says Pop. , understand x'^/jioc or t(. But 
 the neuter form of the predicate need not be tied down to any particular word. 
 We may translate — ' in sight,' which would imply that the places were recipro- 
 cally visible, which sense seems to be required here. Pop. refers to iirL(j>avis, 
 said of Decelea, vii. 19, which is apparently taken in an active sense, 'latus 
 late prospectans, ' Tac. Hist. iii. 60. Kriig. has ' ein iibersichtlicher Eaum ;' 
 and cf. irffKSiSes, vi. loi. iylyvero . . . ijp6r). The tenses vary, 
 
 as the sense requires — ass soon as the hattle began (of a continuous action), ami 
 the standards were uplifted (of an act done once for all). Of. KaTeairdady) infra. 
 Vide Append, on Aorist. Sid. toxovs. Cf. xl. c. 
 
 (c.) iriroo-irdvSovs — ■' linder a truce,' the technicai term. This was the re- 
 gular admission of defeat upon the part of those who requested the permission. 
 Cf. e. 54. dir«9avov. The exceedingly interesting inscription upon 
 
 the Athenians who fell in this battle may still be seen in the British Museum, 
 where it was placed by Lord Elgin. It is engraved upon a small stone found 
 in the plain of the Academy, and is much mutilated. See Bockh's Restorations, 
 Corpus Inscript. i. p. 300, and Arnold's note. It forms part of the subject of 
 an interesting lecture by the Professor of Anc. History, Oxford. 
 
 Chapter LXIV. — {a.) to Ik toB I(r6|io0 retxos. Compare K\4apxos "al oi 
 ^f iKelvov, Xen. Anab. i. ii. 15. The preposition here is equivalent to a, or 06, 
 a parte, as in ' Pastor ab Amphryso,' and the whole means ' the wall on the 
 side of the Isthmus' — i. e. the wall on the outer or northern side towards Olyn- 
 thus; as towards the close of the chapter, rb iK ttjs naWrjvrjs is the wall on the 
 side of Pallene — i. e. the south or inner wall. The same wall had been called 
 t6 is llaXX'^iiitv, but the diflference arises from the different point of view- — ek 
 implying the wall, which the spectator sees when looking from Pallene {iK 
 IlaXKriVTis) ; is, the wall which itself looks towards Pallene. It is clear, says 
 Arn., from Herod, viii. 129, that Potidsea occupied the whole space across the 
 neck of land from sea to sea, and that, consequently, the Athenians on one side 
 
76 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I 
 
 could not communicate with those on the other. diroTeixCeravTes 
 
 This is the technical term for a wall built for the purpose of cutting off commu 
 nioation from a place, and this is the sense conveyed by the preposition, of. viii 
 26, vii. 6. The imperfect i<ppovpovv implies that they regularly garrisoned anc 
 continued to guard it. ^fx"', an adverbial predicate — m two differen 
 
 directions — apart, Kriig., of. vi. 100. dTeCxi-''"''<'V must be consi- 
 
 dered as equivalent to oiK drordxi-o-TOi'. 
 
 (b.) ' A<j)ijTi.os. Kriig. remarks that this is an Ionic genitive like Tocifios, 
 iv. 107, and KvlStos, v. 51. So even in Xenophon, Ag. ii. 18, we have K/jeiS- 
 crtos. The town was situated on the shore towards the B., near the preseni 
 village of Athyto, Leake iii. 156. 6p(i.iip.evos — lit. starting from, 
 
 i. e. making that his starting place, or head-quarters — the regular military term, 
 as in Xenophon, passim. Cf. iii. 31, iv. 52 ; so also icpopixiiv is the usual term 
 for a naval blockade. Cf. i. 1 16-142. afJ.(}>0Te'pu9«v refers to the 
 
 two walls on land, specified at the beginning of the chapter. vindv— 
 
 ' to he victors' Engelman well remarks that this transmutation of a transi 
 tive into an intransitive verb, is common to all languages. Cf. i\ev6epoOj', He 
 he liberators,' i. 69. dSiKov/j.ei', we are guilty, iii. So 'amare' is 'to he in love,' 
 a,nd Trinleenm German, as 'to drinlc' in English, means 'to he a drunkard,' and 
 ivlKa is said of the Olympic victor. 
 
 Chaptbk LXV. — (a.) airoTeixurBeCo-iis — Kal — 'iyiosv. Remark the con- 
 nexion of a genitive absolute with a nominative by Kal: the same takes place 
 with re Kal also. Popp. quotes similar examples, u. 67, iv. 29, 100, 124, v. 116, 
 
 vi. 93. fiWo K.T.X or if anything else, contrary to expectation, turn 
 
 up. Kriig. says, we should have anticipated fiXXo^ei', but, as in the version 
 given, &XKo is more indefinite. Kriig. himself quotes v. 80, Kat 6Troaa dXXijXwp 
 7roX^/A(^ t) eif re dXKo etxov. There is a question between the readings irapit 
 \byov and ira.p6.\oyov. Bl. argues, that as Thuc. uses the substantive irapi- 
 X070S, it is unlikely that he would also employ the same word as an adjective 
 masculine. tcI lirl. tovtois — ' that which was to follow next upon 
 
 these things' — i.e. the next steps to be taken. tcI ?|u9ev — 'what 
 
 was to be expected from cibroad.' Poppo says the expression equals tA ffu, but 
 this seems inaccurate, as the above translation is meant to show. 
 
 (6.) TO, dXXa. This construction may be regarded as a sort of extension of 
 the cognate accusative: so Kriig., who considers it equivalent to ■wHkep.ov toXe- 
 IJ,etv, Tr. 'he both took part in the other operations of the war.' 
 Sep|iu\Ccov. This gen. has been consideredas' dependent both upon x6Xei and 
 TToXXoiJs. Perhaps the last is more probable, as the Athenians have not lately 
 been named. At v. 18, we find them in subjection to Athens. The place was 
 situated in Sithonia, Herod, vii. 12,2, and is now called Xra 'OjOiudXio, accord- 
 ing to Leake, iii. 153. Is t^v nEXoirovvqcrov firpao-crei. — a commoD 
 form of condensation, cf. c. 51, on ^TeXeira is viKra. Popp. also compares 
 KeXeieiv is rijv AaKeSalfiova, iv. 108, cTparLav iTayyikXeiv is Tois aviip.ix"^^! 
 vii. 117. 8ir[| — ^for this, Sttois has been conjectured, because the 
 latter is universally the word employed by Thuc. after Trpdaauv. But there ii 
 no reason in grammar, nor in the nature of things, why we should not alse 
 employ Stxi. And Kriig. observes thai; we have &Tif Tpbirif, iv. 128, anc 
 
, Chap. 67.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 77 
 
 Totetv Sttij, vi. 93. 'Bottice, or Bottioa, denotes the new country of the Bot- 
 tioeans, to the east of Potidtea and the Gulf of Thenna, where they had settled 
 after they had been driven out of their old country hy the Macedonians [Thuc. 
 ii. 99]. But Bottisea denotes their old country, situated much more to the west- 
 ward, between the rivers Axius and Lydias, of which Herod, speaks, vii. 123, 
 127. In the Thracian invasion, Sitalces overran Bottica, but never penetrated 
 as far as Bottisea, ii. 99, 100, lor.' Arnold. 
 
 Chapter LXVI. — (a.) |vvepp(47ei. The form ^ii/j/5u'<rw for |i;;i/5i7<ru occurs, 
 says Bl., also in Dio Cassius, 186, 62. 1247, 53. 6 TriXe/ios ivvefipiiyei. In all 
 probability it is a direct imitation of this. Kriig. cf. 6 ir6\e/j.o^ Kare^pdyij, 
 Arist. Bq. 644. dvaK<i>X''i — a graphic term, ' a holding hack;' some- 
 
 times also employed of a temporary suspension of hostilities. ISCcj, — 
 
 ^ on their own account,' i. e. as Popp. explains, per se, ' non consultis sociis.' 
 
 Chaptbe LXVII. — (a.) evdvTccv — SeSiotcs. Cf. c. 55 a. ircpl 
 
 Tu X'^P^H' — ^^ '^'^' ' ^^™ff alarmed about the place.' See with the dative, i. 6, 
 and ii. 5. o-irovSas- See c. 53 a. 3 
 
 Q>.) IvfjYOV —egged on, or urged on the war, Kpv(j>a Kriig. 
 
 connects with 7rpeo-/3eu6jUecoi, whereas Hermann, ad Elect, v. 1059, and most 
 others, attach it to hriyov. His words are ' Particulae ij.h — ik interdum ad ea 
 tantum ipsa, quae opposita inter se sunt, referuntur, manente constructione 
 participii.' Kriig. 's method avoids this difficulty, but is less obvious. Arnold 
 believes that rds crirovbds must refer to the thirty years' truce, and indeed, when 
 the word occurs thus with the article, this peace is commonly meant. It has 
 been objected by Miiller, ^ginetica, p. 180, and GoUer, that this cannot be so, 
 as .^gina had been reduced by Athens before the commencement of the thirty 
 years' peace (cf. i. ic8), and he thinks that reference is made to the general 
 compact, entered into by the Greeks after Plataea. Cf. ii. 72, iii. 68. Kriig. 
 adheres to the former opinion, conjecturing that in some way or other provision 
 had been made in the thirty years' peace by the Lacedsemonians for the airo- 
 vofiia of .^gina. See similar provisions for the Olynthians and others in the 
 peace of Nicias, v. 18; and of the same opinion is Arnold. Grote, vol. vi. 
 p. 104, is undecided. ' MUUer's opinion, ' he says, 'might seem to be counte- 
 . nanced by the allusion to ^gina in the speech of the Thebans, iii. 64; but on 
 the other hand, if we consult i. 115, it will appear possible that the wording of 
 the thirty years' truce may have been general, as airobovvai bk 'Adrjvaious cftra 
 ^Xouo-i UeXoirovvrjffiuv ; at any rate, the JEginetans may have pretended that 
 by the same rule as Athens gave up Nisea, Pegse, &c., she ought also to re- 
 nounce j3i!gina. However, we must recollect that the one plea does not exclude 
 the other ; the .^ginetans may have taken advantage of both in enforcing their 
 prayer for interference. This seems to have been the idea of the Schol.' 
 
 (c.) Kal «i tCs Ti &KKo — ' and any of the allies that had any other wrong to 
 complain of, ' Jelf, §45,3. tIs dWos, the proposed alteration, is inferior to the 
 original reading, for any other injury is the prominent part of the idea. 
 Tov eifoBoTa. The ordinary assembly, consisting of all Spartan citizens who 
 -had attained to the age of thirty years, Am. Popp. points out that it is called 
 ■^ iKKXriaria tuiv AaKeSai/j.ovim', u. 87, and t6 ttX^Aos airSiv, c. 72. It is so 
 called, probably, to distinguish it from •^ iuKpa''EKK\i](ria, which was composed 
 
78 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book] 
 
 only of the Spartiate Peers, or oixoioi., to the exclusion of the LacedEemoniane 
 See on the subject of these assemblies, Miiller's Z'or. vol. ii. oh. 5, and the remark 
 of Grote, vol. vi. p. 105. Remark the usage of ivoUa in Troiijtrai'Tes, so like tha 
 of our own verb to maie. Of. i. 139, iv. 118. Xip,^vcov cipYco-Qai 
 
 This celebrated decree, which inflicted so much distress upon the Athenians, i 
 much harped upon by Aristophanes. The student should refer to the Achwr 
 vv. 477, 729, 752, 758. The Schol. on Ranee, v. ■273, preserves the terms 
 the decree, Mcyap^as fi'/jT dyopas, /U^re BaKdaatjS, fi.'fiT i/irelpov fier^x^iv. Sei 
 also Plut. Vit. Peric. c. 29. 
 
 Chattee LXVIII. — (a.) rb irwrriiv. Tlie reliability, if there were such i 
 word, in default of which render good faith, loyaute, it means the trustworthi 
 ness of their conduct in all the relations of internal policy and private life. 
 Of. t6 ti(Tt6v TTJs aXridclas, Soph. Track, v. 398, of. Jelf, § 436, 7. 
 airio-ToWpous — less inclined to suspicion, or, ' less ready to believe us when wt 
 •say, aetivo sensu, less ready to believe,' of. iv. 17, viii. 66. es 
 
 Tovs dWoiis. This is generally connected with diricrTOTipovs — 'less suspieioiu 
 towards all the rest of the world, in the event of our saying anything agaim 
 them. Others give a difierent force to is roiis dXXoiJs — more incredulom 
 towards the rest of us, if we have anything to say. Both are possible. 
 To the first it has been objected that the Corinthians were going to accuse 
 the Athenians alone. But this is surely futile, for the general form in which 
 the expression is couched is precisely what we should have anticipated in a 
 rhetorical statement. Nor is Poppo's assertion that roils aWois (in the second 
 method of taking the words) cannot include the Oorinthians, because ij/t«s is 
 subsequently distinguished from rois ^v/ifidxovs Toiirde, anything more than a 
 hypercriticism ; for of course it is possible for them sometimes to identify 
 themselves with the rest, and sometimes not. His own way of taking the 
 words is to connect them with Xeydip^i' — 'if we have a/nything to say against the 
 rest.' But here the first given objection would apply, and Popp. seems sensible 
 of it, for he conjectures toi>s 'ABTjualovs — and surely in this case we should have 
 had aXkovs sine articulo. The ijv rt Xiycofiev is a sort of euphemistic expres- 
 sion with which Krug. well compares Ar. Ach. v. 579, ^vyyviiip.-i)v Ix^, il 
 irTu)x<>^ '*'' "Tii'' '■' K(j,(rTupiv\d/M]v. ir<i>(|>poo-vvT]V ' moderatim,' 
 
 See an explanation of what is meant by the word, 0.^4, § 2. 
 a|ia6(a, cf. Sheppard's Theophrast. ch. ix. p. 115. 
 
 (6.) T^v |i.ii6r|ariv iirouvn, is said to be identical with i/iavBdvere, but there 
 is, I think, always some shade of difference between the simple verb, and the 
 cognate noun with iroUa. The latter seems to dwell more upon the action 
 expressed by the verb : tr. tooh the trovMe to inform yourselves. 
 Tuv Xe^ovTwy k.t.X. Arn. has a very long note, following Pop. ed. Maj. 
 wherein he says that the gen. \ey6vTiav depends upon the latter part of the sen- 
 tence, and that is \4yov(ri is exactly equivalent to t4 Xiyeiv, the gen. expressmg 
 that connexion of the subject spoken of with the verb which is expressed 
 in English by the prep. ' in.' But it has always seemed to me much more 
 simple to make the gen. governed by iirevosm, and lis Xiyovai one of those 
 recurrences to the directa oratio so common — ' Ton suspected the speakers amd 
 (declared) that they are speaking for their private interest.' SiiUiopa 
 
Chap. 69. j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 79 
 
 slightly dififers from its use in the last ch., where it was 'points of difference / 
 here it is, 'points which make a difference.' See note on ldt(f ti airif Si.a(pipei, 
 iii- 42 • Iv TO ipya — actually involved m the evil ; this is the pri- 
 
 mary force of the preposition, as may be seen in such phrases as iii^aniew ira- 
 Tpldos, Sophocles, cf. iii. Pop. renders it apvAi, coram,. 
 
 (c.) a4>avcis — ' if they were committing this wrong in a corner.' 
 ovK cl8(So-i. Dat. commodi, ' as to persons ignorant of the fact, ' cf. ii. 36 ; iv. 
 59. iroX6|iif)(roVTai for TroXe/xriSriffovTai, Poppo. This is one of the 
 
 cases which will illustrate the way in which a middle sense passes into some- 
 thing like a passive one. See the observations, iii. 40, and Jelf, § 364, and 
 transl. bring war iipon themselves, viii. 43, and SiairoXeiL^a-eirBai, vii. 14. 
 
 (d.) 06 ■yAp &v — 'for otherwise they would not,' supply with Poppo, d yA) 
 irpoirapidKevaaiiivoi ^aav is irbXep.ov. iT!o\a^6v'res. This is ex- 
 
 plained by the Scholiast Se^d/ievoi, and by Thom, Mag. TpoXa^6vTes, but I have 
 little doubt but that Stephanus was right in thinking that i/To contained the 
 sense, clam, et per insidias, an opinion which has been repeated by several 
 editors. Cf with Kriig. i. 121, 143. diroxpiio-eoi. A. interprets 
 
 this, ' to give you the full benefit of your dominion in Thrace, ' and it is certain 
 that such a use of i,i!-h may be supported. But this does not seem to me called 
 for by the sense. It is better to take the old interpretation, ' to avail yowrself 
 of,' 'to reap the benefit of.' GoU. compares &Tro'(;fiv, i. i, and Krug. vi. 17; 
 vii. 42. So, says Popp., the Latins use abuti, liberi uti. 
 rh )Uv, which might have been f; /i^c, referring to KepKvpa, is attracted to 
 Xiipi-of. 
 
 Chaptbb LXIX. — (a.) Kparvvai. A somewhat poetic and rhetorical 
 word, cf. iii. 18, 82. On the subject compare c. 90 and 107. Kriig. 
 diro<rT€povvT£s — active voice upon the principle of ' Qui facit per alium faoit 
 per se,' as is explained in the next section. 
 
 (J.) (iirep K.T.X. Am. quotes with approval Hermann's dictum, 'elirep Sok« 
 aoi, dicimus ei de quo non certo scimus quid ei placeat, aut de quo id uescire 
 simulamus, ' and renders, 'if he mMhes a pretenticm of being the deliverer of 
 Greece, we cannot say whether he does make it, but if he does.' This I believe 
 to be wrong, eivep, as its form imports (cf. Savep, ch. 8 b, and Donaldson, 
 N. Crat. § 178), will be found upon a careful induction, more especially in the 
 philosophers, always to assume the hypothesis which it makes ; sometimes, it is 
 true, only temporarily and for the sake of argument, but still always to assume 
 it, especially if they carry off the honour of being the liberators of Greece, as I 
 suppose you think you do. I was induced to examine the question, owing to 
 an assertion in a note by the learned editor of the Agamemnon (Peile), ad v. 29. 
 ' eiirep is used when the proposition is doubtful.' But after the largest induc- 
 tion which I have been enabled to make, I find that elirep always assumes the 
 hypothesis either from its intrinsic truth, or simply for the sake of argument ; 
 and it is from cases of the last sort that the notion of its doubtfulness arises. 
 Numerous instances of this will present themselves to the reader throughout 
 Thucydides. But it is still more important to trace the usage in strictly argu- 
 mentative writers like Aristotle. It will be found that he is perpetually stating 
 his principles in a delicate way by elirep, while his mere 56|at are introduced 
 
8o NOTES OST THUCYDIDES. [Book], 
 
 Tjy el. The real state of a disputed fact, he, for the pui'pose of avoiding dogmar 
 tism, continually introduces by iXX elvep — e. g. Men do not wish for the good 
 -of an inanimate object, except so far forth as may be desirable for themselves, 
 ^ekolov Ttp olvi^ ^o6\ea6ai riiyada^ aXX eiirep aiJj^eadai ^ouXerat auTdv, 'iva adrh^ 
 Ixv- Here elTrep obviously and necessarily assumes the supposition contained in 
 /SoiiXerai. See again Mh. Nidi. lib. vii. c. 7, x. 3. To go through the instances 
 which I have selected would be tedious; but even in the very case quoted by 
 Peile, ad loc, direp ti y iarl rijs 6X7}Belas aBivos, CE. T. v. 369, the 'vis 
 ■veritatis' is assumed as a foundation for what follows. A long note will per- 
 haps be pardoned, as the matter is of great importance from the use of the 
 word in arguments, and Mr. Stanley, I perceive, in his truly valuable work on 
 the Corinthians, has again reproduced the assertion about its being a particle 
 of uncertainty. The error arises from contrasting it mldy with d ye, which 
 assumes the same hypothesis in a more emphatic, and, so to speak, deictic and 
 lively way. Peile himself has elsewhere said, ' If the original notion of vepl he 
 connected with that of its derivative, -jrepto-ads excess, we shall be led, consider- 
 ing Trep as a kindred particle, to the same interpretation, t6<tov irep — thus much, 
 and more; full as much.' Agam. v. 141. d^Cuo-is — nearly as &^lwiw,. 
 
 Krilg. cf i. 138, ii. 2, iii. 37. <|>^peTai, I believe to be a metaphor 
 
 from the games; as we say, 'belir off the prize; (others tr. 'ostentatiously set 
 fo7'th/ cf. pra3 se ferunt.) If a^Lwats be taken activo sensu, then we must 
 tr. 'si virtutem palam sihi vindicat,' as Popp.; but this is not so good: for, as 
 Kriig. indicates, cf. ii. 11, with ii. 60, and iii. 53. oi ■yap SpwvTes. 
 
 The doers, the active party, or it may be possible to supply SSu-a to the parti- 
 ciple from &8iKovp.eda, and tr. 'the wrong-doers.* Either is preferable to dis- 
 connecting ol and Spwvres, and making the first here a demonstrative pronoun, 
 as it sometimes is before Se. Tr. therefore, for the wrong-doers are coming against 
 persons who hare not yet made up their mind, with their own measures already 
 taken, and not merely threcutening ; rather than, for they already acting, are 
 coming against, djc. |ie'XXT|o-is denotes a menacing attitude; as A. 
 
 explains, holding up the stick, but never striking. Cf. iv. 126. 
 
 (c.) Ka£ — 'a not unfrequent use of Kal, by which it is nearly equivalent to 
 SiKXa, immo, the literal sense being 'and now,' as in Arist. Pac. 402, km 
 ffm cppdcru Ti irpay/xa deivbv Kal p.iya, ' Bl. Kar oXC-yov — step by step, 
 
 creeping on. Kriig. well compares kot' dXlyov rb -wpuTov iinrlirrovcra.. Plat 
 Timceus, 85, d. to avaLa-^tyrov — 'your insensibility,* 'your want 
 
 of perception of what is going on about you,.' Kriig. remarks that the word is 
 not used by Thucyd. in so contemptuous a sense as by Demosthenes. Cf. i. 82, 
 vi. 86. This seems true of the later writers. See an examination of the 
 Character, Sheppard's Theophrastus, oh. x. (leXXTJo-ei. Cf supra, a. 
 
 {d.) do-(J>aX£ts — ' safe men;' lit. ' such as cannot be tripped up in wrestling.' 
 Cf (ppoveXv yap ol raxeis oiK AcnpaXei!, CEdip. Tyr.()i']. cSv refers of course 
 
 to ii/ieis, and must be resolved into its constituents — ' though, as it now seems, 
 what was said of you transcended the reality.' In Thuc. the perpetual antithesis 
 between X670S and Ipyop must be rendered sometimes in one way, and some- 
 times in another : Hv has been taken for the neuter — the common report abotit 
 which things; but I cannot believe this to be right. irpoairovTrjo-oi 
 
 — ' before the preparations made by you suitably encountered,' or rather 'anticjr 
 
Chap. 70.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 8 1 
 
 pated liim on the way.' The infinitive, says Popp. , stands after Tporepbv ij, as 
 commonly after irptj', Cf. note, oh. 39 b., and vi. 58, and Jelf. So after 
 iicTepan fj, vi. 4. Kol «s Tilxas — Karao-Tijvai. Popp. tr. Fortv/nm 
 
 casus mhire. The meaning of the whole is, undoubtedly, to expose yourselves to 
 the imfiuence of accident iy struggling against yov/r enemies when they have become 
 more powerful, and not before — i. e. by delaying the struggle until they are so. Cf. 
 iirl Tots djpcuveis iXtrlSas KaSleravai, v. 103. aithv irepl avTu <r<|>aX^VTa — 
 
 metaphor from shipwreck, that he was the rock upon which he himself made ship- 
 wreck — i. e. his own errors were for the most part the cause of his failure. Com- 
 pare vi. 33, irepl (rtpliriv airoli rb, irXela irraloKTiv, and Herod, ix. loi, p/i) irepl 
 MapdovUiJ wTaiari ij "E\Xas. 
 
 (e.) ai {>)i.4T€pai. JXirCSss. The pronoun stands, as often, for the objective 
 genitive — the. hopes of which- you are the object; cf. oh. 33; Jelf, § 6j2, 6. 
 Tivcts. Eeference is made, perhaps, to the Thasians (i. ioi)j the Euboeans 
 (i. 114), certainly to the Potidseatans (i. 58), Pbpp. ■ alT(i;t — is 
 
 ' cAori/e' in general, here, a ' friendly remonstrance.' KaTr\yopCa, 
 
 has a more special and forensic sense — an accusation at law. 
 
 Chaptek LXX. — (a.) S£,iQi — it is owr desert — we mMy claim. twv 
 
 8ia<|>6poVTci>v. Cf. note, c. 68 b. j tr. as St(Kp6puv — 'the interests which are at 
 stake being .great :' the biatpipovras which follows is,' ' differing in character.' ' ' 
 otovs 4|iiv must be taken in close connexion with 6 ir/bv lo-rai. Cf. infra. 
 
 (6.) 6|ets luivofjirai is ' guich at devising novelties ;' the ^iri in composition 
 denotes something over and above what has been before : from the dfeis is de- 
 rived by Zeugma another adjective, which governs aili^uv. 'The meaning of 
 i^eis, ' sharp,' when applied to the latter half of the sentence, is in the nature " 
 of a sarcasm,' Grote, vol. vi. p. no. GoUer's idea of understanding UavoHa- 
 stead of d^eis, is, I think, quite unnecessary. kiriyv&vai has reference to 
 
 iira>o9\<Tai,,: and the preposition has the same force, to devise fresh measures. 
 i^lKorBai. — 'to follow out.' ' A meaning,' says Kriig., ' and construction which 
 I am unable elsewhere to find.' irapo .8xivo(iiv to\|M]toC— rfarimji 
 
 beyond their power. The words which follow I understand to mean, •' iientv/re- 
 some beyond, what iheir sober, judgment sanctions,' and are explained' by the anti- 
 thetical clause, r?iS yydip.r]S /iTiSi toJs ^ejSafots iruTTtmai., to have no conidence 
 even im such schemes as their judgm^ent sanctions, cf. Jelf, 442 a. Many other 
 translations have been suggested ; but I have little doubt as to the correctness 
 of the above. i - rb Si if,(ripov~^it is your way, or yov^ cha/racteristic, 
 
 to perform what falls short of yowe power — i.e. not to effect all you are able to 
 effect. Livy, seems to refer to this (as Bl. observes). 'Atheniensium populum 
 fama est celerem et supra vires audacem esse ad conandum ; Lacedsemoniorum 
 cunctatorem, et vix in ea quibus fidit ingredientem,' xlv. -23. 
 
 (c.) n«X\T)Tds: oiro8T)(ir)Ta£: «vSi)|ioTd.TOT)S. All these words are of pecu- 
 liar significance; on the first, see sup. c. 69 b.; the second means, ' roamers 
 abroad;' the third, ' stay .at homes.' d.ir.oS7jp.£Lv .und ivdtjp.eip were used at 
 Athens to express our ideas ' at home' and ' abroad.' ■ e^^pxcvrai — 
 
 'follow out their advantages to the utmost,' Popp. tr. longissime progrediuntu/r. 
 Si verba explicauda essent longissime victoriam persequimtur, ex tribus pessimis 
 membranis scribendum esset iwe^ipxovrai. The translation I have given is not 
 
 a 
 
82 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^sooK I 
 
 to be restricted to actual pursuit of an enemy. avwirlirrovtriv. Ibii 
 
 verb deiiotes the action of a man who throws himself back from his task in phy- 
 sical exhaustion or despondency. Arn. says it is a strange mistake of Athenagug 
 to suppose that its primary meaning is mental discouragement, for in all lan- 
 guages terms expressive of mental operations are bon'owed from those of the body. 
 This is quite true; but it seems a no less strange mistake of his own to derive 
 the notion ' dispirited' from ' the movement of a rower who throws himself back 
 to give force to his stroke.' Neither does Athenseus Zoc. cj*. say so much, but 
 iirl ^i/x^s iaTLv oXov aBiijieiv. ir\ h\ rots <r(S(i.ao-iv K. t.X. This 
 
 antithesis here expressed is, though somewhat difficult to translate, easy 
 enough to understand. ' They are as reckless of their persons as if they did 
 not belong to them, when fighting for their country, but they are most thorough 
 masters of their intellect, and employ all its powers in her service' — i. e. hus- 
 banding all its resources, and allowing none other the advantage of them. The 
 orators seemed to have admired the sentiment, for it has been imitated by Iso- 
 crates, Panegyric, p. 58, and Lysias, Orat. funeb. p. 87. See Am. and Kriig, 
 Some have regarded olKeioTdrri as if it belonged to Tr6\ei — 'm,ost entirely the 
 property of their country; but if the antithetical word dWoTpioTdroLs has refer- 
 ence to the subject of the verb, this must also. 
 
 (d.) l|4X6M<riv. This is Poppo's and Bekker's reading from most MSS. 
 He quotes Soph. Track, v. 506, i^^\$ov S.e8X' drYiivwv. Krug. has itre^ 
 iXOanv. 6\lya . . . irpd£avTc$. The construction seems to be, 
 
 ij-yoOvTaL rvxeiv Trpd^avTes dXlya irpii! Td fi^Wovra. They thinJc they have 
 chanced to effect imt little as compared with what they will hereafter effect. ' Ac- 
 cording to Matthiee, the participle Trpd^avres stands for the infin. irpd^ai, as 
 dependent upon TyyoOvrai.' Bl., who tr., whatever they so pursue as to gain, they 
 esteem trifling compared with what they may chance in future to attain to. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 683. Peile believes ' the correct version of this difficult passage' to be, 
 ' And whatever indeed having projected, they shall not have followed out, they 
 reckon (their own to lose, i.e.) a» actual loss of their own property; hii 
 whatever having followed up they shall have acquired, (they reckon) a trifle whm, 
 comjpared with what they were to have succeeded in effecting, as if in the last 
 clause it had been ir/)4s & (fieWov rvxeiv Tpd^avres, cf. iii. 20. Kal Ip.eWov, ol 
 p,h Tives d/iapr-ricretrdai, ol Si irXetovs rei^etrBai toC dXTiSoCs Xoyiff/iioC, iii. 22, 
 Kal IfieKKov Siiaeiv K.T.X. cirXiripcixrav Tf|v xp^'av. Tbe true aorist, 
 
 denoting an act not restricted to any special time, past, present, or future, 
 which we somewhat clumsily express by a present. They supply the deficiency, 
 i.e., are wont to supply. iirixc'p'no'iv K.T.X, — because they imme- 
 
 diately set themselves about attempting whatever they have made up their minds 
 about, — i.e., make their attempt a» immediate one. Kriig, cf. iirixeipricis tuv 
 'EiriiroXui', vii. 43. 'The attempt upon Epipolje.' 
 
 (e.) |jiox6o€(riv, as our word toil, is somewhat poetic, and as Kriig. remarks, 
 scarcely used in plain Attic prose ; but it seems to have a peculiar appropri- 
 ateness here with alumos, cf Horn. Od. M. 202, cf. ii. 39. In speeches 
 Xenophon frequently employs it. KTcio-Sai. Note the present, 
 
 ' being always in the act of acquiring.' foprl\v-— Think nothing else 
 
 n- holiday, than the doing what the occasion requires. There seems some tacit re- 
 ierence to the practice of the Lacedaemonians, who, as on the occasion of 
 
Chap. 71.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 83 
 
 Marathon, woulJ not go forth upon even the most necessary expedition during 
 the time of a festival. On this account, I think Eeisko'e interpretation of the 
 word, delicias, voluptatem, is incorrect ; and Dio Cassias probably overlooked 
 the allusion when he substituted eiidaifiovlav in the imitated passage, xxxviii. 
 37. Cf. Miiller's Dor., book ii. •ir6(|)VK4vai. • Cf. Xeu. Mem. ii. 1, 9. 
 
 Pov\ofi,iyovs TToXAci irpdyfiara Ix^iv airois re Kal fiXXois irapix^i-v. 
 
 Chapteb LXXI. — {a.) raiJTqs (levroi k. t. \. This and the following sen- 
 tence are confessedly difficult. I will first mention what I myself imagine to 
 be the meaning, and which I now find to be nearly that given by Bloomf. : 
 'And yet when such a State as this stands, as it were, in battle array against 
 you, Lacedcemonians, ye continue (5io) to procrastinate ; and think not that 
 peace endures longest for those men, who go not indeed beyond what is just in the 
 matter of armament, yet plainly show that their resolution is, if they be wronged, 
 not to permit it ; but ye hold fair dealing to consist in doing no violence to others, 
 while ye prevent injury to yowrselves by repelling it when attempted,' The second 
 clause of the sentence would naturally have commenced with otecrOe Si, and con- 
 tained some other opinion concerning the nature of a durable peace, ascribed to 
 the Lacedaemonians. But with that love of variety which we have so often 
 remarked, (cf. ch. 38 c,) as characteristic of Greek composition, the antithetical 
 clause is cast into a new form, rij 7ra/)atr/ceti7; I have translated * armament,' 
 for want of a single word which better expresses its meaning ; but it must be 
 understood to include all acts and measures which might awaken the jealousy 
 of a neighbouring government. Bl. says, ' I must stiU adhere to my opinion 
 that TTJ irapaaKetiri means in vitas institutione.' t6 'iaov fi/iere — lit. 'ye allot, 
 OT deal out the equitable, — i.e., equity.' The translation given to it is therefore 
 quite as tenable as Arn.'s, to deal justly, or Donaldson's, 'ye lead a life of 
 easy indifference,' or Poppo's ' cequitatem colitis.' df^wSfievoi can scarce mean 
 'suffering harm, by attempting to defend yourselves/ for by no code is self- 
 defence considered as inconsistent with justice ; and again, it is going much too 
 farto say that the Lacedemonians would not defend themselves, which in this case 
 the orator would imply. pXairreo-Bai., says Donaldson (N 0. § 454), is a 
 
 certain degree of harm or mischance, a hindrance or accidental harm ; (this I 
 have pointed out with examples in a note upon 7?5sch. Ag. v. 119. Terminalia 
 
 ii.) never an injury of that kind which can cause resentment. The present 
 
 passage has, he thinks, been misinterpreted by all commentators. His own 
 version is, — ' Jt is not your opinion that those persons enjoy peace the longest, who 
 while they act justly, show they have made up their minds not to submit to injury, 
 but you observe the rule of non-interference, — i.e., you are strictly neutral or im- 
 partial, on the principle of not hurting others, and of avoiding the inconveniences 
 to which reprisals would subject you.' 
 
 (6.) ttpxaidTpoiro, exactly corresponding to ' old fashioned.' 
 •irpbs airois — when compared with them. A very natural ellipse for Tpis to 
 ^TTiTijSeii/iaTa avTuv. In a similar manner, rix^-qs stands for Ihawep rix^Tis 
 i,e'i rk iin,yt.yvbp.eva Kparet Bl. is scarce right in saying with respect to the 
 government of t^x""!' ' supply 8i4 or Tepi.' The ' additions' here of course are 
 the improvements made from time to time. Illustrations will occur to every 
 one. Cf. Xen. 1. 6, 38. liriTsxv^o-ews. The iwi has the same 
 
 G 2 
 
84 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^ooe; I. 
 
 force as in eTiyviSmi, ch. 70 b,, which see; but as the word rex"'^ has been 
 used, eiriTsxy^o'eus, says Popp., 'exquisite positum est.' The verb occurS) 
 Herod, ii. 2, 119. Grote gives the sense correctly, but somewhat too magnilo- 
 quently for a Spartan, 'multiplicity of active obligations requires midtipUdty 
 and novelty of contrivance.' 
 
 (c.) [itxpl ToCSe. Let yov/r procrastination be limited by this; go thus far, 
 and no farther. The words /j-exp^ and dxpl I believe sometimes signify, not 
 simply up to a certain point in time or spiace, but coincident or co-extensive with 
 a certain amount of time or space. eripav riva |i)[<.|iaxCov rflif'n'ri. 
 
 This probably refers to the Argives, who were ever ready to take advantage- of 
 any opportunity to establish a counter influence to Sparta in the Peninsula. 
 
 (d. ) Geoiv Twv ookCwv. * The Gods who were called upon to witness the oaths,* 
 Expre.'ised by Livy — Foederum arbitros ac testes. Liv. xxi. 10. Poppo. 
 T»v ttl<r9avo|x^Vwv, i. e., alVSrjffi^ ix^"''''^": <t>povif.av. This makes the expres- 
 sion the exact antithesis to avaurdTfTuv, and we may render it, men of feelmg 
 and intelligence. Popp. refers to v. 26, and Xen. Mem. iv. i, i. Otherwise — 
 ' of these men who witness the act,' under whose cognizance it comes, as the oaths 
 came under the cognizance of the gods. lpT))i.Cav — deserted, and 
 
 fkereiove defenceless position. Kriig. cf. iii. 67. 8<ria — 'holy in the 
 
 sight of gods' — from which we may infer the strength of the religious feeling 
 connected with the idea of race. I^i]76i<r6ai. The notion is, 'Do 
 
 not let the power and glory of Peloponnesus degenerate under your Headship.' 
 Popp. explains the construction Acttrffw, = to (tjffre i^da^ca elvat. ; others fiay 
 that the double accusative is occasioned by the elliptical way of speaking, tt/k 
 HeXoirdvvTiaov iXdaadJ Karaarrjaai ^^-ryyovfj.^vovs. To me it seems explicable by 
 Prolepsis. On the verb i^iu^o/iai, in this sense, cf. i. 76, 95 ; vi. 85, and L; 
 and S. Lexicon. On the Spartan riyeixovia, see Grote, p. 396, note, and i. 
 38, and vii. 55. 
 
 Chaptek LXXII. — (a.) tmv ' AB-qvaCuv. This genitive must be referred to 
 •jrpea^eia, but the whole sentence is, as Arn. remarks, an instance of irregular coiip 
 struotion, known to most Greek authors, and particularly to Thucydides. 
 When the subject of the discourse is suddenly altered, \he new subject is 
 brought forward into the most prominent place in the new sentence without 
 much regard to the necessities of the construction, which often is changed by 
 an anacolouthon, and the subject left independent of any government. This is 
 most common where, as in Herodotus, the reason of the preedication is introduced 
 by ydp, before the writer gives us the prsedicate itself. See Jelf, § 786, 61 
 The introduction of Kal before us ya-Bovro renders this passage more confused 
 than usual, and I confess it seems to me very like the work of a copyist, who 
 did not perceive that irpeapda could form the subject- -by repetition— of 
 ■fjffSoi'TO. In this suspicion I perceive that Kriig. concurs. Arn. cites, by way of 
 illustration, i. 115; vii. 48 ; viii. 30, which the Student will do well to consult; 
 So also Herod, iv. 149, 6 S^ Trais, 01) yap (^ oi avp-TrXeiaeadaL, roiyapHv f^ 
 airrii' KaraXelfeiv obv if XiiKoicri, iv. 100. twv di wdv yap fjv rb TrX^Sof nemhun, 
 oiiK ibiKOVTO Tois \6yovs, ix. 109. Tj; -6^ /cafciSj yip ISee iravoLKl'ji yiveattUj 
 e?7re rip Sip^V' A7roXo7t]o-o(i.^voDS. This accusative must be con- 
 
 sidered to depend upon the verbal adjective wapiTTiTia. On the construction 
 
Chap. 73. j l^OTES ON THUCYDIDES. 85 
 
 see Jelf, § 318. Matthim, § 447. Goll. accounts for the fact that tliese verbals 
 govern accusatives, on the principle that they tacitly contain the notion XP'^I) or 
 Sei, and cites Matthise, § 447, 4. Cf. oirk ii.iado<l>opriTe6v drj SXKovi -i) rois 
 (XT(>aTevoiJ.ivovs. irepl irdvTos — 'concerning the general question / the 
 
 construction is varied by the infinitive SiqXSffai, which is admissible after verbs 
 of motion. Popp. iv irXiloVi, so. XP^^V opposed to rax^ws, 
 
 cf. i. 121. Kriig. 
 
 (6.) «K T&v Xo7av — iK from its proper notion, which is that of the material 
 cause — in the metaphysical sense of the vi^ord — passes into a cognate one of 
 after, or arising from, regarding the antecedent events as in some degree the 
 cause of those which follow. We may therefore translate — 'In consequence of 
 i/ihat had been said. ' tois Al»Ke8ai(iov£ois as distinguished from 
 
 t4 ttXtjBos- atiTuv probably refers to the Ephors. ' el ti \i,i\, a trans- 
 
 position for el iiT] n. So el /lij Kal, for el Kal ijlt] ii. it; vi. 60. Popp. 
 EirUvai — adire, accedere, irapiXBetv, ad dicendwm pvodire. But, as Popp. ob- 
 serves, the distinction is not always kept up, cf. i. 119. 
 
 Chapter LXXIII. — (a.) irp^o-peuo-is. This word is censured by Dion. Hal. 
 as too poetical, but the truth is that Tpeapeia is ' embassy,' just as we might 
 say the 'English embassy' at Paris; and irpia^evais is 'the laiit of coming 
 upon an embassy.' •• KaTa^o^v receives the same censure from the 
 
 critic, but it is very graphic and suitable to the speaker. ' The outcry against 
 US,' cf. viii. 85, 87. SiKao-rals «|Jiiv — 'you as our judges.' 
 
 paS(<i>s — 'easily;' and, therefore, lightly, cf. i. 80; vi. 9. 
 
 (h.) Tcl iravi iroXaid. The old mythical legends about Theseus, the 
 Amazons, &g., which were a stock topic. Kriig. refers to Isocrates, v. 42, 
 Pem. xxii. 15, Xenophon, TrepI 7r/)0s. iv. 16. iSv. This gen. depends 
 
 upon p-dprvpes. Popp. explains axoal \6yoiv as equivalent to dxovcrB^vTes 
 \6yoi — the hearsay of tradition. > S<|/is is, ' the personal observation 
 
 of those who are to hear us speak. ' ti Kal . . . irpoPaXXopiEVois — 
 
 'Although it be somewhat irksome to its to he for ever bringing this subject for- 
 ward.' . Thus Arn. after Haaek and Popp. I think correctly; but Krtig. 
 adopts the other explanation, even though it be somewhat disagreeable to you to 
 have this ever put before you. On the force of the prepos. in 5t 6xXov, cf. 
 17 a. , £Kiv8vvEvcTo, Either ra MTjSiKa is the subject, or it is 
 
 impersonal. ■^S tov ^p^ov — so. t^s dcpeXlas may, I think, be 
 
 rendered ' the practical benefit,' in contradistinction to toO \byov ; but Popp. and 
 Goll. understand, ' of the actual doing of the good, ' which makes the antithesis 
 less effective ; t^s ui(pe\ias, ' the ben^t of the reputation, if any there be.' 
 el tI a>({>^\ei. . . . irapatT'iio-Eus is explained by the Schol. 'iveKo, toO ahtTv 
 (rvyyvibp,Tjv, for the sake of deprecation, to which, namely, they would not con- 
 descend. ' 
 
 (c.) MapaBiovi. The word had become so familiar, that its use is almost 
 adverbial, — i.e., without 4v before it. Cf. with Krug. Dem. xviii. 208, Plato, 
 Menexenus, 240. Yet Thucyd. sometimes employs the preposition, as i. 18, 
 ii. 34, cf. AA0O15, ch. I43. Aristoph. always omits it. ■irpoKivSii- 
 
 »evo-ai — ' to have borne the brrnit of the danger. ' The same expression occurs in 
 the far-famed oath of Demosthenes. Oi)k iariv Situs r;p,dpTeTe oi p.h rotis iv 
 
86 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 MapaBuvi. TrpoKivSvp€i<ravTas. ^<OC' — Jiindered, prevented. The use 
 
 of the simple verb in this sense is not so common, yet Kriig. gives abundant 
 instances. Xen. Anab. iii. 5, 11, 6 dir/cis S?ei Svb dvSpa^ toO p/t] /caroSCrai, 
 and Herod, iii. 79, vi^ ivekSoiiaa Scrx^, &c. Add Ibid. v. foi. 
 ttSuvdrcDV dv ifvTuv. This is a very clear case of the usage of av with a par- 
 ticiple. Cf. Matth. 597, 6, and Jelf, 429, 4. It may be resolved into Sirep 
 el iyhero, dSuvaroi &v 9jaav ol HeXoTrovvrjaLOL. oftoCas — 'equal to 
 
 what it was before.' Cf. ii. 80, 6 TrepiwXovs (<tolto &p,oios. This seems to me 
 correct, nor can I understand why Bl. should consider this sense so very 
 feeble, that it should be necessary to give the unusual force of ' an unequal 
 match for the Greeks,' to the words. This is inconsistent with ofe (ti,, and we 
 should have had avrmaXov. He did not consider before this that he was 
 equally matched with the Greeks, he imagined that he was immensely 
 superior to them. He now saw that this superiority no longer existed, and 
 therefore abandoned the enterprise. 
 
 Chaptek LXXIV. — (fl.) Iv Tats vaSo-i — in their ships, — i.e., depended 
 upon them. Cf. Jelf upon iv, § 622. 8t|XwWvtos — ' when it h/id 
 
 beeii clearly shown.' So d.yyeK6ivTo! and similar phrases are used occasionally. 
 Jelf, § 696. Is ovTo — ' to it,' in general reference to the circum- 
 
 stances described by the introductory words. It is important to notice this 
 use of the pronoun in reference to the discussion concerning the genuineness of 
 iii. 84, where see the long note, and cf. 22 a. Is ras Terpo- 
 
 Koo-Cas — 'to make up the fowr hundred.' Speaking in round numbers, for as 
 we learn from Herodotus, the exact amount was 378. Great difSculties have 
 been made about this, because Demosthenes, de Cm: , 2 38 §, the poet .^schylus, 
 and Nepos, who copied from them, call the fleet 300 only. But it is plain that 
 poets and actors, when engaged in proclaiming the glories of Athens before 
 Athenians, would diminish the number of the fleet as much as possible — 'the 
 fewer ships, the greater share of honour.' Therefore, they took the hundreds 
 below instead of above the odd numbers. Here, however, the estimate is 
 naturally more exact, though still the speakers make an exaggeration in their 
 own favour, for Herod, makes the Athen. quota 180 (viii. 44), but see also 
 viii. 61 ; and Died. Sic. (Ixv. 58) gives it as 200. It is to be observed that 
 Isocrates, Pan. c. 31, more accurately describes the Athenian contingent as 
 *more than double' that of the others, rpiiipeis dnrXaffias fi^v 7} (T^p.Trav7€i ol 
 dWoi. But this cannot surely justify Didot's interpretation, tuv Siio p.mpSiv, 
 the half. Popp. seems to incline to it, but it is quite contrary to the practice 
 of Thuoyd. in giving numbers, and to the general idiom of the language. 
 ttlTiiraTos — 'the principal cause of fighting in the street.' GoU. points out 
 that this constmotion of otVios with the infinitive without the article toC, is the 
 ordinary one. See i. 25, 33, 75, 133, Xenoph. Hellenic, vii. 5, § 17. Kriig. 
 adds other instances, of. Matt. 542. lTt|ji^o-aT6. See an account 
 
 of these honours, Herod, viii. 124, and Plutarch, Vita Them. 17. Popp. and 
 Goll. read airol from some good MSS. for aMv, ' You yowselves spon- 
 taneously.' 
 
 (J.) 8taij>9t£pttVT6s. It has been said that we might rather have expected 
 the mid. voice, since the Schol. interprets Sia^ffeipat idiravTes. But the active 
 
Chap. 75.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 87 
 
 represents the sacrifice as more personal, as it were, ' with <mr own hands 
 
 (c.) TouTOD — i.e., ToO ii0eXeio-9ai. Tfjs o^k o<!cn]s — ^ which was 
 
 now no more.* So in ii. 44, rdv oi)k 6vT(aVf ^ those who are no more,* — i.e., 
 'the dead.' Similarly Herod., irepl oide/xliis warplSos, viii. 57. What, there- 
 fore, is meant by rrjs {ir6\eus) iv §paxdi} iXirldi oUcnfi ? The ' TriXts, ' saj'^ 
 Popp., must be either the fleet, or the citizens embarked in it; or reference 
 may be made to its futnre restitution. This I prefer, and interpret with Kriig. 
 'for the restitution of which there was hut a very slight grownd of hope. ' 
 TO jJL^pos, when thus specified, means ' aliquantum, ' ' took our full share.' Cf. 
 i. 117, ii. 67, and Jelf, § 579, 6, cf. ch. 23 c. ri /iipos is more usual, and Bl. 
 would substitute it; but ti> is here for the personal pronoun, of. 22 c. 
 
 Chaptek LXXV. — (a.) fip' &|i.oi eir|iicv. I subscribe to the remark of 
 Kriig., that S,pa in itself neither implies affirmation nor negation, and 
 may perhaps be permitted to refer the reader to a disquisition of my 
 own on the word in the Class. Musceum. The context, and the speaker's 
 intonation, make the difference in the meaning. Here with Popp. 
 render 'nonne digni sumus,' and consider the subsequent /x^ to form 
 part of the verb SMKcurBai., so that, so far as this passage is concerned, no 
 question need be made on the distinction between &pa p,^ and S/ja oiK, 
 'do we not deserve not to be under quite so much odium in the eyes of the 
 Greeks ?' yvif.t\i |«v4o-«<i)s. There is some difficulty about the 
 
 two genitives. Each has been rejected by editors, but the latter is probably 
 added in reference to ^uveTdyraroi/ in the last ch., and as Am. remarks, we 
 have yvdipiijs aiidpitip-a, ii. 65. Why, then, not say 'the perspicacity of our 
 judgment,' as well as ' an error of judgment ?' ^PX^^ — sc. ivexev 
 
 Matth. § 368, Jelf, § 499 ; or with Bl. understand that SiaKeXirBai k.t.X. 
 is equivalent to (pdoveiadai, and takes its syntax. Or StaKetaOat may itself 
 take a genitive, in accordance with the general notion implied by this case 
 respectively to verbs indicating position. See note 36 c. 
 rd {tTToXotira to-u piippdpov — ' what yei remained to be done against the Persian.' 
 So iii. 10, rd {nrdXonra rCov ^pywv. 
 
 (6.) irpoa'YclY«iv. As vi. 18 and i. 44, Popp. and rois "EXXijcas ^s roiraiTijv 
 eiiroplav Trpoiiyayev, Isocrat. iv. 37. Kriig. tr. we were compelled hy the very 
 nature of tlie case to advance it to this, its present pitch of greatness. 
 £4ous K. T. X. If these motives be meant to be taken in the order of time, this 
 will signify ' fear of Persia.' But p^dXtara pkv points to the order of intensity ; 
 it therefore signifies, fear of the revolted allies, cf. infra. dirooT<ivTuv 
 
 KaT£(rTpa|Ji|i^vuv — ' and when now some revolters had been reduced to subjection. ' 
 Kemark the two participles taken together. Kriig. cf. ii. 5, tuv ^divrav 
 ^XO/i^i'M;', and iv. 38, vii. 75. iro<ri 8^ k. t.X. ' Now no odium is 
 
 entertained against any man, for making the best disposition he can of his inte- 
 rests, in respect of matters involving the greatest risks.' Kriig. would erase 
 KivSivav, but from what goes before, we see that the perils of the Athenian 
 Empire were the prominent argument in the speaker's mind (pAXi-ara p,h xnrb 
 S4ous), and this allusion to them in summing up is natural. Popp. compares 
 the Homeric phrase, 0^ yep,eo-rjT6p. Thucyd. repeats the word, vi. 83, irdaiv 
 
88 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 dpewl^Bomv. Bl. adds vii. 77, viii. 50. Soph. Track. 1035, of. for e3 Ti0e<T$ai, ■ 
 iv. 59, Til, tSia eS 8i(T0ai,. 
 
 Chapter LXXVI. — (a.) c|r)Y»(r6e. Cf. ch. 19 and ch. 71, ad fiBem. 
 Slot itoMTOs-^-tlvrough the whole, war, up to thetime of the final operations. 
 e^Kparms — mgoroualy, ' with a tight rem.' Cf. Soph. Antig., v. 715, and Theo- 
 critus, XXV. 266, where the original physical sense is found from which the 
 present .metaphor oomea. 
 
 (5.) airji Tofl dvSpioiTECou — :renu>ved from, away from, and so contra/ry to the 
 common practice of mankind. The Athenians maintain and improve upon, the 
 same doctrine to the Melians, v, 105. 8i.8o(«vi]V. It should always 
 
 be rememhered that the present participle stands also for the imperfect. Tr. 
 'proffered.' to€ Toioirov — such a practice, or such conduct as this, 
 
 i. e.y the acceptance of power, and its maintenance by all practicable means, 
 {fljitv SoKovvT«s. Seech. 95. , T(^ SiKa^tii Xo'yu — the argwnent ahout 
 
 justice, or the plea of justice. 
 
 (c.) irapaTDX'Sv. On the neuter, nom. part, absolute, cf. JeH, 700, ^ a. The 
 same word is used again, v. 60. With others, saj's Kriig., trapbn is more usual. 
 xg avSpuireCq, ^tru. Kriig. transl. the inclination of men. I. should rather 
 render 0?i(ris--the natural character, or disposition of humanity — 'human na- 
 ture,' as we say. Bl. quotes, for similar usages of xPVafi.ei'ot, i. 130, dpy^ 
 Xpijtrj; vii. 30, wdBei. xP- ; vi. 15, ^irifliz/iJais, XP- SiKOuiTcpoi i\ Karo 
 
 Tf|v 4irapxoii<rav SvvajJiiv. Literally, more just than accorded with the scale of 
 our existing power — i. e., more just than we had any necessity to he, if we looked 
 at our power. On this sense of xard, according to the grade of, see Jelf, § 629. 
 irepUoTT] — ' has come round to he.' ■• Am. adds, This' word generally denotes a 
 new and unexpected result, as in ch, 33, 120, and vi. 24. But sometimes 
 simply what has happened, or befallen, as vii. 70. Cf. ch. 28 b. 
 
 Chaptee LXXVII. — (a.) k\aa-a-oi[iivoi-^f taking up an inferior position,' 
 i. c, not taking such high ground with their dependents as they might have 
 done. They need not have had the trials at all, but might have decided the 
 points in dispute by their sovereign power. Arnold cites Thucyd. iv. 64, d|iw 
 ia-ov cUbs riuaacBai; and Demosth. cont. Dionys-iod.- p. 1287, ed. Reiske, iJM"' 
 jxh raOra avvexuipovfiev, oij/t dyvoovvres t6 iK t7)s (vyypa(pTJs dlKatoii, dXX' ij-yoij- 
 ixevoi ieiv iXaTTomSat. ri Kal croyxoipeiv, fio-re /i^ SoKeiv ipiKdSiKoi. dvaL. The posi- 
 tion of Kal — yap^Kal is somewhat unusual, jtai ydp, says Kriig., is oftener 
 connected with Kal following, than Kal simply^ but not then with a word inter- 
 vening. Bat GoU. remarks, that Kal yap are not, as generally, in this case to 
 be combined into a single expression ; the xal is to be refeiTed to the-irai follow- 
 ing in the sense of ' both, ' ' and; the one clause contains the cause of the other, 
 and is well explained by Goll;, ' etsi enim apud nos judicia constituimus, tamen 
 litigiosi esse videmur.' Kriig. supposes that the fcai here can mea,v. also,^eren, 
 and quotes Arist. JEcclez. v. 603, K4.KTij<raTo ydp Si^ touto, for this was even the 
 reason, the very reason, that, (Ssc. Of. also Sance, v. 735. cbiXoSoKctv. 
 
 Of the litigiousness of the Athenians the Vespce of Arist. forms the best 
 illustration. Cf Aves, v. 40. |up.poXaCais. These suits, called 
 
 SlKai, iiri ^viJ.§b\uv, were grounded upon contracts existing between persona 
 
Chap. 78.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 89 
 
 who belonged to the several states comprised under the Athenian dominion, and 
 the necessity of trying them at Athens, owing to the expense and deilay thereby 
 incurred, was otte Of the greatest grievances to which her allies were subjected. 
 The orator here tries to gloss it over, by making' allusion only to such as Athe-. 
 nian citizens were themselves engaged in. Of. Sheppard's Thedphrastus, note 
 on Tois f^Kous, p. 73 ; GbUer in hoc loco: Schoman de Oomitiis. 
 
 (J.) 01 hi— ' while they;' ac. our dependent allies.' -naph, rh ^■i\ 
 
 oWSai xp^vai — ' contrary to what they think they ought. ' The negative must be 
 taken in close connexion with the verb, as in the case of (pijiu, Kriig. , who also 
 proposes to read iry for /j.'q. Cf. Matth. § 534. ■YVw|iT|, says Bl., is 
 
 any dedsiilh at law; and so, too, Kriig. ; but they do not cite any instance. I 
 do not, therefore, think it improbable that it here has the more ordinary sense 
 of a public resolution, vote, decree, or proposal. Cf. Herod, iii. 80, and 9e/At- 
 ffTOKK^ovs-yvdifjCTj, ch. 90. ■ 
 
 (c.) dirb rov iarov. Is this the masculine or neuter gender? GiJll., Poppo, 
 and others seem to have decided that it is the former, ' a man's equal.' But 
 the whole ususloquendi, in Thuc. at any rate, seems to point the other way. 
 See ovK dirb rod i(TQv, i. 143, airb tQv bfioiojv ^Xaaaoifievos, viii. 89, aivb toO taov 
 6fjn.\ovvT€if iii.' II, dirb toO iVou S^ ^iridvTeSf iii. 84. Other passages might be 
 citet^ from- other writers, as Eurip. Phosn. v. 541. I should therefore translate, 
 ' men are more angry at being wronged by law thanby open violence; for. the 07ie 
 looks like being- over- readied on a footing of equality, the other like compulsion by 
 a superior force.' This Bl. calls an aKpi^o\<r/ia, or over minute distinction : to 
 Me it appears plain and forcible enough. Cf. for the sentiment, iv. 86. ' 
 
 (rf.) Ka9eXdvT6s — ' after having overthrown us.' Cf. i. 4. &p|ai.TE — 
 
 'were to assume dominion.' Kriig. compares (rirevdbvTe^ ws Zeis jj-rjiroT' Ap^aev 
 Bewj", .<51sch. Prom. v. 203. TbT|(i,^T6pov 8«os — 'the fear of which we are 
 
 the objects.' Objective gen. expressed by pronoun. Cf. note on ch. 69 e. 
 rfirep K. T. \. — ' if your policy is going to be such <is you evinced symptoms of its 
 being, whin ye headed for a short time the confederacy against the Persian. ' 
 fi,(i.iKTa^sc. vbiujia, i.e., 'institutions which do not amalgamate toith those of the 
 rest of Greece.' On this meaning of d/uKza, Bloomf. aptly quotes .Ssoh. Ag. 
 313, bl/Jiai §o^v &/UKTOV iv irSXeL irpiireiv — Sfos t' &\ei,rjsa t iyx^as rairtf Kirei., 
 SixoffTaTOuvr' &v, oi ipiKtjj irpoffevviTroLS ; and Kriig. 0i\ots t &pu.KTOs iffTc Kal 
 iraa-^ irbXet, Eurip. Stobceus, 10, 17. See, for the well-known fact, i. 144, i'24, 
 ii. 39. In what follows, ■ allusion is perhaps made to Pausanias, The same ob- 
 servation was made by Aristotle and Isocrates, Panath. ch. 83. ots. 
 This is one of the passages quoted to^prove that vopil^ev governs a, dative. Cf. 
 ii. 38, iii. 82. See note upon this last passage. I am not satisfied that the 
 present ong proves anything, for we may easily supply XPV"^'^^'-! and that 
 i'o/i(fei»' is constructed with an infinitive is, as Kriig. says, plain even from 
 Sv\a"ovpojj,Lt^or/nv"^eiv,'-'H.etodiyu: 85, and of. Thuc. ii. 15. If anyone 
 prefers the former construction, vofiiiei. must be rendered ' attaches a value to. ' 
 
 Chapter LXXVIII. — {a.) oi — supply ;8ouXeuiS/icroi. irpdo-BTio-Se. 
 
 Bring upon yowrselves. " So i. 144, Kiiibivous wpotxTWeaBaL. Kriig. quotes oiSeh 
 irbXiMTiff' tdia, irpoaB^a-eaL KaKd, Eurip. Ser. 147. tov irapdX.070v. 
 
 Used by Thuc. only as a substantive, but see ii. 61, 85, iii. 16, vii. 38, Kriig, 
 
90 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Booz I. 
 
 (h.) ircpitoToo-Bai. See note upon Tepiia-TT), eh. 76, ad finem — 'when pro- 
 longed, is wont to bring things rovmd to the influence of accidents— to the award 
 of chance,' Kriig. ; of. i. 69. (mtxo^v—from which one of us is no 
 
 fwrther removed — i. e., further exempt — than the other. oirorepus 
 
 ^OTai — in which of the two ways it will turn out. Of. with Popp. ch. 82, KaSlrri 
 Xup'no-ei. Iv aSiiiXu Kiv&uveileTai, means ' the danger is run while it 
 
 is as yet uncertain.' On the impersonal use of the verb, of. ch. 73. 
 ■ifir\ is to be taken in connexion with KaKOTaBovvres, when now they have got 
 into difficulty they address themselves to deliberation — or rather to discussion, sc. 
 diplomatic. Cf. Tr\e1crTov cL^I/d/ievos \byav, Alcestis, v. 967. 
 
 (c.) opcovTes — sc. ^v Tilde ajiaprii^ 6vra^. av0a£p€Tos — * 0/ owr 
 
 own free choice,' i. e., before we have been compelled to modify it by the course 
 of events. o-irov8tts — sine artioulo, not to break treaty; cf. ch. 67. 
 
 8£k'[). For in the thirty years' treaty (i. 115) this provision had been made. 
 Cf. i. 140 ; XviaOai., the midd. voice, to have our differences arranged. Cf. 1. 145. 
 €l Si |i^. This is the reading of twelve good MSS. and Popp. Bekker and 
 the other editors take the common reading, ij, which has precisely the same 
 meaning in some passages. Kriig. quotes Soph. Phil. 1341; Lysias, xxv. 14; 
 Dem. ii. 8; and Stalbaum, Plat. Sep. v. 463 d. 4<|>T)-yTi(r6e — idem 
 
 est quod irpoiiyqcde, GoU. Arn. says they do not express the same part of the 
 same idea: the first expresses precedence; the second, the nearness 01 the 
 leader. Kriig. refers to the Lexicon Plat. There is an ellipsis of bibv. 
 
 Chaptek LXXIX. — (a.) Kara (r(|>as airoils. What is sometimes ex- 
 pressed by Ka.6' iavroOs, as iv. 38, vi. 13. All strangers were ordered to with- 
 draw; i. e., the allies who had come to the conference. The great assembly of 
 the Spartans, we thus see, decided upon questions of peace and war. 
 
 (b. ) eirl TO airh 'iJfiipov — ' tended to the same point.' Kriig. rightly exemplifies 
 this by use of the verb in S5os rjiipei. There is a similar use oifero. 'In nova 
 fert animus.' Ovid. Metam. v. 1. Bl. quotes Herod, viii. 100, irKiov iipepe 
 ■r) yvii>p,ri KaTepydaaada,!. ttiv ' BXXaSo. ' ApxCSafios, i. e., the Second. 
 
 He succeeded his grandfather Leotychides, as his father Zeuxidamus had pre- 
 viously died. 
 
 Chaptek LXXX. — (a.)Toirs ev t() avT^ T|\iKCf opu. The simplest expla- 
 nation is to supply ip,irelpovs Svras. Others not so coiTectly have interpreted — 
 and I see among you those of the same time of life as myself. Tiva 
 
 takes in any of this class indefinitely — ' a man.' Remark the studied variety 
 produced by the transition from iiretptq, to vojilcavra. See oh. 38 c. 
 o-(i>(f)pdv(i>s — without extravagance, or exaggeration. kKkoyl.t,ovro — 
 
 compute it to the full, i. e., with ail its chances, &o. 
 
 (6.) irapi$|i.oi.o5 — 'of the same description,' i.e., military rather than naval. 
 Compare Aristotle, Ehet. i. 4, 4, ava.yKa.iov clS^vai rds Suvap.ei,s irbrepov 
 Sjioiai. ij 6,vbp,oiai. Arn. The Kal which stands before a(rTvydrovas does not, as 
 sometimes happens, so much introduce a new idea, as a part of the original one. 
 Popp. compares v. 112, 2, diri tuv avSpiiiruv Kal AaKedai,p.ovlav, vi. 20, 3 ; 
 vii. 68, I. 4(|>' ^KaoTa. The neuter is employed because the idea is 
 
 general, including their towns, &c. kuI Virirois Kal iJirXois Kttl 6)(\<f. The 
 
Chap. 82.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 91 
 
 Equites, the heavy armed infantry, and the remaining population which served 
 as rowers or light-armed infantry. There is no necessity to say that Sx^V is 
 'put for light-armed troops,' an assertion which Bl. combats, cf. vi. 17, 
 ifx^ots ^vfiidKTOi^, mixed populations. IvC yt. Jelf, 735, 5. 
 
 Bockh. computes the whole at about 500,000 whereof 180,000 belonged to the 
 town and harbour. Niebuhr, Vortrdg. iiber alte Lander-u.-Volkerk., p. 108, 
 expresses an opinion that the general estimate among the ancient writers of 
 Athenian population, especially of the number of slaves, was much too high. 
 
 (c.) |i.£Xt)T^o-o|iev. Kriig. supplies t6 vavTmbv from tois vavcv, comparing 
 i. 121. But the word may stand independently, like our own verb 'to practise;' 
 thus we have toi>s ro^iras ixeKeTwvras, ' the archers practising. ' Xen. Hell. iii. 
 4, 16. So also, though less certainly, ii. 86, lieKeTuvres koI irape<rKeva.<Tii,ivoi. 
 T7]v vaviiaxlav, i. 64 b. XP°vos Iv^irrai. — 'Time will intervene,' i.e., 
 
 'that will take time,' as we say. t^ koCv(>i — ' The public treasury.' 
 
 The phrase is not unusual. Herod, vii. 144, ire ' A6rivaioi(n yevofj-hav 
 XprjudTuv fieydXioi/ iv rifi Kolvifi. Gf Arist. Pol. ii. 7, 6. <t>^po|XEV, 
 
 for the more usual compound iaipipoixev. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXI. — (a.) T<p ttX^Bci — population. l'iri<)>oiTuvTes. 
 
 The verb (poirdu is a frequentative, hence (jionav is said of 'attending school,' 
 and also of 'courting,' as the suitor regularly visits his mistress. We may 
 therefore translate, ' by making frequent, or regular incursions. ' 
 cird^ovTai. * They will bring in from abroad.' Pop, quotes atros iiraKrds, vi. 20. 
 Kriig. irAvra iiraKTd, vii. 28. I would add. Soph. Trach. 258. (Ed. Col. 1522. 
 Ajax, 1275. There is therefore no necessity forPopp. to remark, 'usitatius hS,c 
 vi icrdyea-Oai.' On the fact compare ii. 38. 
 
 (b.) p\a^6[ii9a. Passive, says Krug., as vi. 64. It is rather one of those 
 cases already (oh. 68 c, Jelf, 562, 3) noticed where the reflexive force of the 
 middle runs into a passive sense. ' We shall do ourselves more damage than we 
 shall do to them.' See note i. 68 c ; i. 81 b, and ii. 87. to. irXeCu — ' in the ma- 
 jority of matters.' ev TovTu. D. has translated, ' and in such a time,' and 
 T. K.A. quotes Bothe's — 'interea.' But why should it not be, ' in this case,' 
 or, contingency, i. e., that expressed by the previous words ? irttv6ifjo-€Tai. 
 'This form without the cr is found also ii. 77 ; v. 91, 100 ; vi. 59.' Popp. 
 <|>pov^|jiaTi. I regard this as a causal dative. T. S.. A. renders, the Athenians 
 with their usual magnanimity. I should prefer to say — owing to their high 
 spirit, such I think being the real force of the word. Theologically the 
 ^p6vrifia a-dpKos is the spirit of pride naturally inhering in man's heart. On 
 /i-qre omitted, cf. Jelf, § 775, 3, and on (ppov. lb. 603, 2. 
 SovXeCo-ai — 'be the slaves of their land,' i. e., be so servilely attached to their 
 property as not to sacrifice it to the common good. We may also connect 
 SovXeuaac (ppov^/xari — 'slaves in spirit.' KaTaTrXTj-y^vai. — lit. 'to be 
 struck down,' i.e., to be dismayed, and paralysed by the war. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXII. — (a.) oi |i.f|V o48«. These particles are often thus 
 employed in qualifying a previous statement, The oi generally denies, the 
 oidi particularises as Hoogeven says, ' not that either I mean to recommend.' 
 avaurSViTiDS has doubtless reference to the t6 di/ala-drjTov, charged against them 
 
92 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 by the Coriutliians. The word denotes dulness of the natural perception 8, 
 ' waiit of feeling,' and is metaphorically applied to indifference to the wrongs of 
 the allies. See the analysis of characters connected with this element, viii-xv. 
 Sheppard's Theoph/rastus. (ir)8' us liriTp^<|/op.£v. G611. interpreta- 
 
 tion is, ' nor to let them ■ see that we do not mean to notice their conduct. ' But 
 it is the direct antithetical expression to irdXcfj.oi', thus constructed upon the 
 principle of variety, cf. 38 c. The meaning therefore is, 'neither too plainly 
 indicating that we shall go to war,' nor do the opposite thing, i. e., permit them 
 to go on as they are doing, ^c ASi.kShtu' oiK iinrpi\//ov(ny. Xen. ffist. ii. 4, 11. 
 Cf. Jelf, §804, 4. ' - ' 
 
 ' (b.) |v|ji.|xdx<i>v TrpocroYtSYi] — to this is opposed subsequently Tct. avrdv 
 iKiropL^difieda ; with respect ' to the latter word, it may be doubted what force 
 should be attached, to the prep. ^k. It may either imply ' full, complete prepa- 
 ration,' or, as KrUg. says,, it may have reference to the difBculties out of which 
 they had to extricate -themselves. He compares i. 125; vi. 83. We may add 
 the similar use of the Latin 'expedio.' 'Expediunt per acuta belli,', Horace. 
 aiiTuv, Jelf, § 504. oci>€irX(|>6ovov of coarse implies after it a word 
 
 which stands as antecedent to the relative 6(rot. There is nothing invidious in 
 the enU-sting of fmreign allies hy ail -such as, &c., cf., Jelf, § 817, 7. 
 
 (c.) Kttl Sub Kal Tpiwr. Two, or it may be three year^. On this adversative 
 Kat, cf. 80 b. 'i^v SoK^I — ''in ihe event of its appearing- desirable,' 
 
 cf. 42 a, 120 e. ■Connect this with tf/.eviTr' aiqoTjs. ir€(|>pcL7|JL£V0i. 
 
 'Better fenced andsecured,' the. metaphor seems to be taken from a fortified 
 camp. — iiiro(rr)(i.a£vovTas. Note the force of the preposition, ^rmnjr 
 
 indications of. So Aristotle,- Eth.'vi. 2, KaddwepToilj>ofi.a tnro:rr]/j,alveL. 
 
 (d.) [ii\ 70.9 K, T. X. ' Loolc not upon their land as anything else than a 
 hostage or pledge for you to hold.' Blooraf. well compares a similar declaration 
 of policy, Livy, v. 42, 'Non omnia concremari teota ut pignus ad-flectendoa 
 hostium animos haberent.*' oir^ '^<r<rov — 'all the tnore i/n proportion 
 
 as.' cwrovotav — 'the casting away of all hope, recklessness, 
 
 despair, ' a better reading than aTro^volav. _ Archidamus thi-oughout urges the 
 principle that we ought to build a bridge for a flying enemy, 
 dXr)irTOT^pous 'i\av—have them more impracticable to deal with. 
 
 (e.) Tots kyK\i\y,a,a-\.v liraxfl&Tes. -Pop. expressesa doubt as to the genuine- 
 ness of these words. T. E. A. is particular in pointing out that roi's ^icX^/iiio-i 
 must not be taken with iir^ixSivTei. Yet it seems to me much the simplest 
 way to do so^' having been egged on, excited to premature action, hy the charges 
 which ow allies have brought.' Where is the impropriety in sense or construc- 
 tion? irpd^onw. Arnold. Krug. irp6.^ap.ev. Vulgo. Popp. 
 Bekker. This of course involves tlie well-known question whether the Canon 
 of Uawes be correct, which asserts that iiiras p.^ cannot be joined with ,,the sub* 
 junotive aorist except in the passive voice. No intelligible reason, can be given 
 for the dogma. All that can be said is, tliat the future is the more lively and 
 graphic form, as approaching more nearly to the directa oratio, and is therefore 
 almost universally used by the Attic writers. . I should therefore retain it, where 
 there was any MSS. authority in its favour.' The later copyists, in their frigid 
 attempts at correctness, even invented subjunctives in cases where they had 
 no real existence, e.g., Xijdwcn, Sdiaaai., &c. Therefore, as Arn. remarks, 
 the mere number of the MSS. which give Tpd^u}p,ev ought not to force it upon us. 
 
Chap, b^-j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 93 
 
 alirxiov Kal diropurepov. The comparison is not I think with the Athenians, 
 but with their own previous condition. tuv ISCuv — for, as the 
 
 schol. remarks, the private interests of Corinth were not necessarily shared by 
 all Peloponnesus. fiirphra^ 6^<r6ai — to settle in such a way that both 
 
 parties may- have specious reasons for concluding it, i.e.., as a salve to their 
 vanity, cf. oh. 21 a, and iii. 65 b, X'^P'^''"'^' '^^^ simple verb, says 
 
 KrUg., does not occur in the future indicative active save in this place. The 
 middle future, x'^pM^l'-o.i; is always found. Yet in the compounds, as he 
 shows by abundant instances, the active form, x'^P^'^'^t i^ more common. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIII. — (a.) \fi\^a.Tti, <|>^povTes. This is well rendered 
 ' iique tributa ferentes,' for the orator evidently means to contrast them with 
 their own allies, who paid no such contribution. Ovx SirXtov k. t. X. 
 
 — ' depends not so much upon arms as upon money,' i.e., its result would not be 
 determined so much by the first, as by the second. 81' i[v. It may 
 
 be right to say with Kriig. that 5t^ with the genitive denotes the instrument or 
 meaiis, with the accusative the occasion [Veranlassung] of an act, but obviously 
 the two frequently run into each other. ' How oft the sight of means to do ill 
 deeds. Makes deeds ill done!' and but little distinction can be made in our 
 version of them. Kriig. cf. dvOpioiros aii^dveraL Bt^ rb ^(X&LeLV Kalirlveiv. Plat. 
 Phced. 96 c. It may be here, 'it is only throuyh the opportunity afforded by which 
 that arms do any good.' &XXus t€ koC here stands simply with a 
 
 noun. Krug. quotes iroXXa &!> tIs Ixoi fiXXws re Kal fi'/jrap eiireiv, Plat. Crit. 
 50 b. 
 
 (6.) T&v diropaivo'vTwv ttjs alrJas. Remark the present participle, and, 
 for explanation, see ch. 24 d. alrla is employed in an intermediate sense — 
 * the responsibility of the conseqicences.' kir* dp.4)0T€pa — 'for either 
 
 result,' i.e., good or bad, cf. ii. 11 ; iv. 17. oiroi. rather unusual 
 
 in the first person — ' we who stand in this position.' 
 
 Chaptek LXXXIV. — (a.) rh PpaSv koI rh \i.(KKov — ' Of the slowness and pro- 
 crastination, which is the principal thing they bring ■ against us, be not ashamed.' 
 If the t6 be omitted before fi^XKov, it is a case of Granville Sharp's Canoil. See 
 note 18 a. According to Kriig. the gen. tj/iQv is governed by 8, ' the quality 
 of ours which they most find fault with.' He quotes, in illustration, Plato, 
 Legg. 685 a, tI /le/Kpd/J.ems avrdv \iyei.s ; But cf. Jelf, on /i^/Kpovrai, § 495. 
 Kal &(i.a. Kriig. remarks that the second reason here introduced by Kal, is 
 really to be gathered by inference from the statement, and is not found in the 
 statement itself. The wisdom of their usual cautious policy may be inferred 
 from the greatness and glory to which, under it, their city had attained. 
 
 (6.) fivvarai to€to (tvai. We must understand toCto as a repetition of 
 tA iSpaSi) K.T.\. Sivarai, is here, as in some other places, amiounts to, is equiva- 
 lent to, a wise moderation. tuv . . . kiT0Tpvv6vrav. The genitive 
 depends upon'^Soi'i; — the pleasure we receive from those who urge us on i/nto 
 dangers contrary to our own convictions. dvoireCo-6T|(jiev — ' are we 
 ever brought over to their views,' remark the true indefinite predication of the 
 aorist. The force of the prep, is the same as in a.vaSi.Sd.(TKei.v. 
 
 (c.) t!) n^v Sti k.t.X. The argument is a sort of Sorites. 'Good discipline (tA 
 eiKoaiiov), produces a sense of shame foiScis] ; a sense of shame produces a manly 
 
94 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 spirit {eiil/vxla), and a manly spirit produces martial excellence (ri ■ir6\efUK6v).' 
 We see that atSujs is employed as the equivalent of alax^^V- T^^^ expression 
 irXelffTov fj^erix^^ is repeated, iii. 83, t6 eStjdeif oS rd yevvalov TXeTffTov ^1^74%^, 
 either, very largely partalceth, or, forms a very large ingredient., See note there. 
 The speaker proceeds to show that rb €ilKO(r/j.ov produces practical wisdom also — 
 inasmuch as we are hrmu/ht up with too little pretence to learning to despise the 
 laws of our coimtry (on 'A/j,a8ia as an intellectual habit, cf. Sheppard's Theo- 
 phrastus, p. iig, and note on iii. 37), cmd with too much severe self-control amd 
 modesty to disobey them. After ivaiSevbiievoi. Popp. supplies (oBrois Siairep) /li) iwe- 
 popav. Kriig. prefers to understand oTol re. Most readers will call to mind t6 twp 
 vdfiwif aofptjlyrepov ^ijTelif ehatj tout' ^(ttiv 6 ^v toTs iTraivovfi^yois vbfioLS iirayo- 
 peierat., Ar. Ehet. i. 15. ?p"V<i> eireJCevai. Poppo doubts whether 
 
 vapa(rKe\jd5 is to be understood after the verb, which will then be taken in the 
 sense of ' exequi, ' or whether, with Gbll., we are to supply riv XA^op, i.e., t4 
 Xex&^vra e/s p.4p.^iv twv irapaaKe'Oojv tup irdkep.lojv ; in which case he says we 
 must render iirc^ievai by persequi. Both, though intelligible, seem to me 
 somewhat obscure explanations. Possibly the whole may mean, after criti- 
 cising speciously the preparations of the enemy, not to prosecute the war agaimt 
 them in any corresponding scale: iTe^kvai airoin, to assail them; dpo/jiolas, not 
 on a scale corresponding to our affected superiority. Cf. Ipyif eirc^ipxerai, i. 
 120; iv. 5. vo(i.Ct«iv irttpttirXrio-Covs. Our view of this passage 
 
 depends upon the method in which ■jrapairXTjo'iovs is to be constructed. If with 
 Am., Goll., Bl., we connect it with Kal, as similis atque, the words mean, We 
 are taught to hold the plans of our neighbours to be very like the ordinary acci- 
 dents of war, that is to say, quite wndefinable by any process of reason. For my 
 own part, I believe that Thuc. would have admitted the policy of our enemies 
 to be quite a fair subject for rational conjecture, inasmuch as it is sure to be 
 founded upon certain common and unvarying principles of human nature. See 
 his sentiments upon the point, iii. 82, and infra, ttoXi; re Siatfiipuv 06 Set vo/il^eui 
 dydpojirov dvdpdnrov, a sentiment introduced by re as if contained by the pre- 
 ceding, not by Se, as if contrasted with it. I, therefore, prefer the other inter- 
 pretation (Pop.), We are taught to believe that the schemes and policy of our 
 neighbours are very like owr own, and that the accidents of war are matters quite 
 tmdefinable by reason. There can be no objection founded upon the fact that 
 irapair\7]alovi is not followed by a dative, for we have such phrases as roiaCra 
 Kal irapaitX-fitna. To the other objection, that in this case we should have /it) 
 and not ov, I should reply by translating as above, making, in fact, oi — \liy(f — 
 Siaiperds one logical term, equivalent to dSiaipirai. Mr. Grote's version — We 
 think the capacity of neighbouring states is much on a par, does not appear to me 
 to cast much additional light upon the passage. d«t Bi. We always 
 
 practically make preparation against our opponents on the assumption that their 
 schemes are good. We do not calculate on eiTors, and false moves on their 
 part. ii fKilvav — dependent om them. iv tois ovo^y- 
 
 KaiordTois. Gbll. renders ' in usu rerum, et omnino in agendo magis quam in 
 eloquentid.' Grote, 'in the severest trials,' and so Kriig., quoting 6 /«<) 5a/)eis 
 dvOpuTos oi TraiSeiieroi. Am. in what is most needful, wherein he is followed 
 by Dale. But has the word ever this meaning ? It is possible also that some 
 allusion is intended to the strictness of the Spartan discipline, where the soldier 
 
Chap. 8 7. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 95 
 
 was obliged to put up with ike merest necessaries of life, the minimum with 
 which they could do, of. oh. 90 c. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXV.— (ffl.) \i.ekha.s—i/nstit'u,Hons, T. K. A. Rather 'habits,' 
 or more literally, '^cac^jcfts.' Of. 80 c. u<|>6XoiJ|uvoi. — ' to our benefit.' 
 
 'i\o]i.iv—' maintain.' hipuv. Strictly speaking, we should have 
 
 have had ij eripots. Kriig. quotes ii. 15, vi. I. Bid, Icrxiv. The 
 
 Scholiast explains Si' ijy ^xoy^f iVxi'J'. Of. 83 a. Iv Ppaxet fioplio 
 
 T)|i.^pas — 'in the brief space of a day;' i. e., the brief space of time which a day 
 comprises. Of. ' Horae momento, ' Hor. Sat. i. 1,4. 
 
 (c.) SCkus SoBvai. As in c. 28 — to submit the matter to arbitration. 
 SfSovTa. The present, or imperfect participle is of course, 'the man who 
 proffers arbitration.' 
 
 (d.) il% Twv l(|>dpiov. On the Ephors, see the excellent information amassed 
 by 0. F. Herman. Pol. Antiquities, § 44, English transl., and Grote. 
 
 Chaptek LXXXVI. — (a.) oi ■yivtoo-Kw — '/ do not understand,' Dale. 
 But it is not cognovi, so much as cognosce — / cannot make out; I shall not enter 
 upon the consideration of: he means he is^not going to give himself the trouble 
 of studying it. On the contrary, T. K. A., after Bloomf., makes yiviiiaKoi mean 
 much more than 'understand;' according to their view it contains the addi- 
 tional notion of ' approve. ' 
 
 (b.) KoX t6t6 (^(lev) Kal vOv «<r(ji£V. An ellipse common enough in all 
 languages. 01 S^. Here we must consider Si, as it not unfrequently 
 
 is, a causal particle — 'for their suffering wrong is no longer a matter of the 
 future.' On this pronominal ol Si, cf. Jelf, § 768, 3. ovi\ Sta- 
 
 KpLTca. Tr. nor must loe decide matters by law-suits and debate, seeing that it 
 is not in word that we are wronged. Popp. remarks that the accusative airobs 
 ^XaiTTOfiivovs is not governed by SiaKptria, ' nee ob addita Kal avroiis per axyjf^a. 
 Sta [xiaov explicari possit;' but that it is to be constructed like airo\oy'f)(70{j,ivovs, 
 ch. 72. It agrees, therefore, with ■^/u.Ss, understood. But cf. Jelf on irapa- 
 SoTia, § 383. 
 
 (c.) KttTairpo8C8<i)|j.€V. The preposition exerts a force which must not be 
 overlooked. Tr. ' betray to utter ruin;' this meaning it of course acquires from 
 the notion of down from the top — ' ruit alto a culmine Troja.' ivia]>.ev 
 
 irpbs Totis dSwRoiiVTas- Some doubt has been expressed about the right con- 
 struction of these words. Popp. hesitates about the preposition; Ki-iig. asserts 
 that iiTiivat is rarely constructed with a. simple accusative. But the text is 
 confirmed by iv. 93, Trpbs roiis p,T] dp.vvofi.ii'ovs iiriovTcs, and ii. 65. Otherwise 
 a dative is more usual. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVII. — (a.) liriil/T)<}>C^(o — 'to put to the vote,' should be 
 noticed by the junior student, and distinguished from jpt](pi^op.ai, 'to vote.' Its 
 usual construction is with an accusative of the person, or a dative ; here (Krtig. 
 conjectures) Thuc. wrote is iKKK-qciav, to avoid a double accusative, for Toiavra 
 also depends upon the same verb. 6p|jif)(rai. In this place transi- 
 
 tive, as i. 127, ii. 20. The act of Sthenelaidas was probably grounded upon 
 the assumption, that many even of those who had raised their voice for peace, 
 
96 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 would not dare to vote for it openly. \j/7J(pov iTayciv is presently employed in 
 a similar sense. 6t<ij (i.'fl 8okoSo"iv. On fiTj with indie, cf. Jelf, 
 
 § 743, I- 
 
 (6.) AvaoT^Tw es — \apiov—' £et him rise iip, mid go to that place.' This 
 is what is called the 'usus prsegnans,' which is not uncommon with verbs which 
 imply motion of some kind or other. Krtig. quotes vii. 49, viii. 45. See note, 
 65 b. The idiom is less common in Latin, but Popp. has produced 'exsurgere 
 foras,' from Plautus, Mil. Glor. ii. r, 3. It seeBis from this that the members 
 of the Lacedsemonian assembly were seated. Haack supposes that this was an 
 imitation of the Homeric practice, where the heroes seated themselves upon the 
 ground like the American Indians. 
 
 (c.) Totrs |u|i(jittXovs — so. the legates from their allies, who had previously 
 been ordered to withdraw. iroioovTai — pres. ' commence operations:' 
 
 (d.) \pi]\iarl<ravrK — 'Jiaving transacted the business. This, it appears, 
 was especially a diplomatic word. Kriig. refers to v. 5, 61, and vi. 62. Bloomf. 
 has remarked its frequent use among all the regular imitators of Thucyd. Hero- 
 dotus (he says) would have used the middle voice ; and the writers of the middle 
 Attic, irpayiiaTeieaBai. Sia'yv<6|Jir), for Si.dyvw(n$, is peculiar to 
 
 Thuo. Schol., ' division of opinion.' Iv t^ 'ini k. t.X. This, says 
 
 Kriig., is for ^s rb 'iros TrpoKexoipriKviHv Kal iv rip Irei Svrav. The irpoKSX^inj- 
 Kviwv seems added as a sort of after thought — those many years having already 
 elapsed. This would be Olymp. Ixxxvii. i, or B.C. 432. For the to, EifloMj 
 see oh. 114. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIII. — (os.) iro\£)i.t|T^a — ' that they must go to war.' The pi. 
 in such cases as I have said seems to me a shade more general and indefinite than 
 the singular — that it was a case for tear, a casus belli. It might be worth while 
 to examine in this view the instances quoted by Kriig., ■wo'Kep.rp-ia, vi. ^0; in- 
 Xeipriria., i. 118; irkevaria, vi. 25; &v6eKTia, i. 98; irapiTTyria, i. 72; irapaSmia, 
 and ciaKpiTia., i. 86. Svv^Suo-iv. I quote T. K. A., 'of the commence- 
 
 ment- of a state attained to = should arrive at greater power.' Thus every pos- 
 sible shade of meaning is at one time or another assigned to the aorist. How 
 much more simple is it to adhere to the plain interpretation of the tense. There 
 could be no reason why the Spartans should fear the commencement, any more 
 than the progress and consummation, of the Athenian power, even were there 
 anything in the notion of an aorist to convey such an intimation. What they 
 feared was the fact itself, no matter when it happened, or was likely to happen. 
 Consequently the aorist was the right tense, from its nature. Vide Appendixt, 
 
 Chaptek LXXXIX. — (a.) f{K9ov lirl toI irpaYiJiaTa k.t.X. This is inter: 
 preted (i. ) were brought to the circumstances under which they prospered; and 
 (ii.) were induced to adopt that means of administering their affairs under which 
 they prospered. From the Thuoydidaean usage of irpiaadi and its cognate words, 
 the latter seems preferable. Kriig. cites fijiop ii/evp,r)e^pai oiip irplmtf Ipxavrai 
 iwl TO wpdy/iara, Antiph. vi. 20. im\&if Mi)SoC. It appeai-s that 
 
 this digression (89-T17), containing the history of nearly fifteen years, from the 
 siege of Sestos to the beginning of this war, was called by the old grammarians 
 irevrriKovTla. Kriig. refers to an historical tract of his own, discussing more 
 
Chap. 90.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 97 
 
 especially the chronology of this period, but I have not had an opportunity of 
 reading it. Arnold points out that the historical student, after finishing 
 Herod., should proceed to the perusal of the present episode, and then take up 
 ch. 24-88, subsequently carrying on the narrative from ch. 118. The digression 
 about Pausanias and- Themistocles, 1-28-138, synchronizes with 95-98 of the 
 general sketch. A€caTV)^C8'qs. This king was the grandfather of 
 
 Arohidamus the Second. After the campaign of Myoale be was sent to reduce 
 the Persian party in Thessaly and Northern Greece, but having been suspected 
 of receiving bribes from the Aleuads, he was recalled to Sparta, condemned, 
 and banished. He died at Tegea, B.O. 469. tuv iv MvKdXri — 
 
 those who fought at Mycale. Kriig. quotes toi)s iv MapaOdvi., ii. 34, iii. 113, 
 and Arist. Eq. v. 355, KaaaKfiduu Toiis iv niXip ffrpaTijyois, and more pecu- 
 liarly still, MiXTidSriv, rbv Mapad&vi., to which Arist. Thesm. 806, is similar. 
 
 (5.) ■I'iSt]. Even before Mycale. See Herod, ix. 114. M<)8<ov 
 
 ixivriav — so. air'^v, while still in the occupation of the Persians. Krug. sup- 
 plies many similar phrases. 
 
 (c.) rf) Koivdv . . . airois. This sort of dative is simply accounted for by 
 the common principle of the dative, which makes it the case expressing the 
 more remote object in reference to which the action of the verb takes place. 
 This conception of the dative seems to have been but imperfectly reahzed by 
 the compilers of our common grammars, if we may judge by the mass of rules 
 collected with respect to the usage of this case. ' Quid mihi Celsus agit,' in 
 principle does not differ from Do tibi librum. 86ev virelt'OevTo. The 
 
 Sdiv must in strictness be taken with the preceding SieKOfil^ovTo. The use of 
 Sirou here, says Krtig., would be ambiguous. &6ev for iKeWev Sirou may be ac- 
 counted for by considering that SSev does in effect hold a place among relatives. 
 See Matth. § 473 ; we may also of. Jelf, § 822, 6. Trcezen and Salarais are the 
 places meant, and also Mgma,. See Her. v. 5. iraiSas Kal -yuvaiKas 
 
 — wives and children. Kemark the absence of the article, and cf. ch. 8 a, 48 b. 
 oXf-yai. According to Herod, ix. 1 3, says Kxiig., Mardonius had left nothing 
 at all standing behind him. But this is a way of speaking suitable to the semi- 
 poetic character of Herod, style and narrative. 
 
 Chapter XC. — '(a.) to |i«XXov — 'what was going to happen.' 
 ^X9ov irpeo-pcio. — for 5ia Trpetrpelas upon the principle of ' Qui facit per alium 
 faoit per se.' Popp. quotes ^sch. C07it. Ctesiph., § 95. ' A^tiKveirai yap wpbi 
 i/iSs ote^Ti 81' a,yyi\ai', dX\' our6s. The dative -Kpeapdq. is not as Bl. says for 
 ^s TTpe<T§dav, but denotes the modus, ov manner, of their coming, as is the proper 
 usage of the dative. rd |i^v answered immediately by rb 6e nfKiov. 
 
 Y,i[ri. Kriig., considering that according to grammatical principles we should 
 have had p^e, explains the deviation from the rule by the fact that the notion 
 of 'prevention' is implied. ■ T6X|jiav ■^evoy.(y<\v — 'the valour that 
 
 was exhibited.' Such phrases point out the true force of ylyvofiai, denoting, 
 existence as the result of »■ process as distinct from eifu, cf. avipSiv ayddav-. 
 Ipyui yem/iiviov, ii. 3S, and the long note on this matter, Sheppard's Theo-- 
 , p. 102.. 
 
 (6.) ^veioT^Kei — 'Md ^c^Aer,' and consequently were standing. Supply 
 TO Tdxn from Teixif"*". Others with the Schol. understand ?re/)i/3oXos. 
 
 H 
 
98 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 rh povXd[i.Evov Kal liiroTTov. Both, say the oommentatore, belong to t^j 
 yviifiTls. This is true, but it seems to me that in accordance with the principle 
 of Granville Sharp's Canon, both are to be combined into a single idea. The 
 suspicious purport, or bearing of their policy, cf. 1 8 a. For the neuter parti- 
 ciple followed by a genitive, cf. ii. 59 ; iii. 10 ; viii. 68. oiK fi,v 
 SX.0VT0S, as above, &y dpQvTes, may easily be resolved into the equivalent form 
 with the finite verb = oiK &v ?x<"- See Jelf, § 429, 4, and § 697. 
 dvax<SpT)(ri.v re Kal a<f>op)i.^v. ' Distingue avaxilipTjaiv, locum, prsesidium quo 
 reciperent sese, dtfiop/j.'/ji' unde erumperent.' Both conditions might be fulfilled 
 by one place. T. K. A. well explains d^opfn.-Zii' by the modem military term, 
 ' base of operations.' With regard to the general construction of the sentence, 
 Krilg. is right in connecting dis 5^, as well as SrjXovvres with ij^iovv — in that they 
 alleged the Persian world would not hy this mecms have, &c. 
 
 (c.) fi^xP'' Too-ovTov 8ci)S — 'up to SO long a time as,' lit. wntil. These words, 
 says Krtlg., would not easily elsewhere be found in combination. He however 
 quotes Plato, i?ep., 471 c, P-^XP^ totjtov p^xp^ ou. &p(ti(riv. This 
 
 is Bekker's conjecture. The MSS. have aipoinai, which is ' dum erigerent ' 
 during the time they were raising ; but perhaps P^XP'- Toaoirov, as A. says, in this 
 case would not have been so proper as vavra xp^"")". I have some doubt 
 whether p^xP'- toctovtov may not be the exact equivalent of this very phrase, 
 if pixpi: may mean, as I believe it sometimes does, not up to a certain point, 
 but coincident in extent or duration with something that follows. In this case 
 we must render 'just during so much time as they were raising,' cf. ch. 71 c. 
 The other expression, ?ws &v dpacnv, is of course donee erexissent — 'vm,til they 
 should have raised.' aa-ri . . . vi|/ous — So as to fight from the least 
 
 possible elevation which would be sufficient, i. e., they raised the wall to the 
 minimum height necessary for defence, and soon as ever they reached this, 
 delayed no longer. Concerning dvajKaiordTov, cf. ch. 84, ad finem, (and cf. 
 Livy's 'necessariura cubile.') 8i])iio(r(ov. ' We are not to under- 
 
 stand that temples are here included, for that the religious spirit of the Greeks 
 would forbid. [Acts xvii. 22.] Among the public buildings we may include 
 the Mausolea and other tombs. So ,^sch., p. 87, 31. and Diodorus.' Bloomf. 
 eo-Toi — certainly, as T. K. A. says, a recurrence to the directa oratio, but not 
 therefore to be translated as be translates, from whence there might be, which 
 does not indicate the transition. rSiXKa — TciKet. Kriig. considers 
 
 this a case of the ' doubled article,' and refers to his own grammar, 59, 9, -i, 
 where it is laid down, that after 6 dXKos, when another notion occurs which is 
 regarded in the light of a substantive, it always takes the article. To me it 
 seems more simple to take one phrase as the epexegesis of the other — the other 
 matters, i.e., what was to be done there, cf. note 23 c, and 108 b. ThisT. K.A, 
 denies, but he seems to contradict himself — if there be not a misprint. 
 
 (d.) Ttts dpxis. 'The authorities,' i.e., the rd. iv tA« fcra. 
 SiTJ-ye, so., rbv xjP^vov. This is the explanation given by Stephanus in the 
 Thesaurus. irpoucjiairfJeTo — continued to make excuses. 
 
 o Ti ovK. htipxeriu.. There is some diflFerence of opinion concerning the view 
 to be taken of if rt in collocations of this sort. S ti says Am. is ' quod ;' and 
 would best be translated into English. ' When any one asked him about his 
 not coming, lit. as to that he came not, before the government.' This nearly 
 
Chap. 9 I.J NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 99 
 
 agrees with Madvig's view, who classes the idiom with those where Sn denotes 
 a circumstance or relation which takes place, and of which something is said^ 
 e.g., ri fi^v fiXXa dpBus iJKovffai, Stc Si KoX ifii otei elireiv tovto, irafyqicovaas. 
 Plato Protag., where he translates Htl, lut as to the dnumsta/nce that. Com- 
 pare some very similar remarks of his concerning quod, Zatin Gramimar, 
 § 398, b. E. 2. We might illustrate by Hor. Ep. i. vii. 94, Quod te per 
 Genium, dextramque, Deosque Penates Obsecro et obtestor, where Orelli observes, 
 ' Est relativum infinitum Sl6tl propter quod.' Kiihner [Jelf, § 849, 3] says, 
 ' The relative Sn, quod, refers to a demonstrative in the principal clause, ex- 
 pressed or supplied, as To&rif, Sih. tovto, iK ToiTov, &c.' Other Grammarians 
 consider So-rts to resemble &irov, Situs, &c. ; that is to say, the adverbial and 
 pronominal forms of questions used in the indirecta oratio, are framed from 
 those of the direota oratio by the relative prefix 6, which is indeed the symbol 
 of their connexion with what goes before. Thus wSs is answered by Stuis, and 
 on the same principle tIs by Scrns. So on this principle tI ovk iir^pxeTai, be- 
 comes in the indirecta oratio, ^jpero avriv, S ri oiic iirepxoiTo, or iwipx^TaL, 
 
 Chapter XCI. — (a.) twv SXXuv d.(|>iKVovfi4vii)v. Poppo would read twwc, 
 and he, with others, greatly disapproves of t£>i> dXKwv. To me the difficulty 
 does not seem insuperable. I had always supposed the words tuv dWoiv to be 
 simply exclusive of Themistocles — ' When every one else came and told them, i. e., 
 ■when every one else who came, told them/ Mr. Dale has I see hit upon nearly 
 the same words in his version, and I believe we are right. For certainly I have 
 observed other cases where &XK05 occurs even 'cum articulo,' and not less 
 strangely than here, e.g., rffix voXlroiv Kal tCjv SXkuv %ivuv, Plat. Qorgias, 
 473 c, and again avroD Kal rdv HWiav olKeiojv, d 840; of. also Eurip. Herac. v. 
 644. Ar. Equites, v. 905. Kriig. says that ol fiXXot often occurs where we 
 should have expected to find &\\oi, because the article only implies — the others 
 mho have any connexion with the matter in hand — ' the only other persons to ie 
 considered.' Xa|i.pdvei, i.e. t4 relxos, understood from reix^^^rau 
 
 (5.) KaV T^KOV — had even arrived, i.e., in reference to the long-existing ex- 
 pectation of their coming. 'APpiovixos — 'commanded the ship 
 stationed at Thermopylae, to communicate between Leonidas and the fleet 
 stationed at Artemis.' T. K. A. See Herod, viii. 21. 8iroT6 
 OKOuo-ciav. I cannot understand the doctrine that (as T. K. A. has it) this 
 phraseology represents the aor. subjunot. of direct narration with dv, and is to 
 be translated — 'when they should have heard.' Why should not the simple 
 optative retain its ordinary indefinite meaning — ' when the Lacedamonians came 
 to hear of it, whenever that might be;' cf. tuv veav &s Karadia-eiav, ch. 50. See 
 Jelf, § 844 a. 
 
 (c.) 4vTav6a S-!\. Popp. note is ' post partic. ut ii. 58, est 'turn vero.' Sail. 
 Jug. 0. 71, turn demum, ibi vero; similia apud Liv. cf. Sanp. ad Xen. Mem. iii. 
 5, 8.' The truth is that, in this common phrase, Sri exerts its usual force, i.e., 
 it adds intensity to the meaning of the word to which it forms an adjunct — ■ 
 hereupon then, or if derived from iiSrt denotes that the mind has at last reached 
 a point on which to pause wpon this at last. Cf. 5if in connexion with relatives, 
 superlatives, &c. See note ch. i b. cos irpis k. t. X. Popp. says, 
 
 ' Consecutio verborum hsec est rd ■ \oi.Trhv that is irpbs SiayiyviiffKovTas, k.t.\,' 
 
 H 2 
 
lOO NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. iBooK t 
 
 Trans. — 'to come to them for the future as to men capalle of discriminating.'- 
 Eemark the variation between the singular and plural numbers, as though 
 Themistocles sometimes spoke in his own person, and sometimes in that of his 
 colleagues. 
 
 (d.) (1^ owrb dvTiirdXoT) irapao-Keiiris. I think the obvious sense of these 
 words is — ' where the means of military defence are not equal among the 
 parties, it is impossible that fair and equal councils can be contributed to the 
 common interest.' Themistocles purposely, I should imagine, couched the 
 maxim in general terms, and left it to the Spartans to make what particular appli- 
 cation of it they pleased. It is not therefore needful to convey this particular 
 application in the words of our translation, nor indeed do I hold that it would 
 be correct. The Schol. and Poppo suppose that Themistocles insinuates — 
 in case of invasion, if Athens is without a wall, she might be more inclined to 
 counsel submission to an enemy than the better defended members of the con- 
 federacy. Kriig. explains, that they could not enforce their opinions with the 
 same authority as more strongly protected states. This is true, but as this 
 would be a contingency by no means displeasing to Sparta, we must be careful 
 not to regard it as an argument addressed to her, but as a general assertion. 
 With respect to the phrase ^s t4 Koii/bv pov\(ie<TffM, Poppo well cf. ' in com- 
 mune consulere.' Terent. And. iii. i6. 
 
 Chapter XCII. — (a.) 6u8^ ydp, here equivalent to Kal yap ov. 
 K<oXi(j.T) — 'a Thuoydidaean word, cf. iv. 27, 63, and imitated by Herodian 
 viii. I, 6.' Krug. 'yvujji'qs irapaiv^o-ei — 'a recommendatimi of policy.' The- 
 particles SiJ and Sridev are, as is well known, frequently employed when the 
 writer is giving what is the sentiment or statement of another, and not his own. 
 See Jelf, § 762, 2 a. The idiom seems to me to have arisen from an ironical 
 emphasis. It is generally employed in cases where the writer himself distrusts 
 the statement to which it is affixed, and is evidently meant to mark out this 
 statement with, as I have said, somewhat of irony. But from this usage it may 
 pass into the simple index of language for which the author does not hold him- 
 self responsible. t^ koivu. No editor has determined whether 
 this is to be taken, as the Schol. says, for iiirep tov koivoO, or whether it is 
 governed by the verbal notion contained in irapawiaeL — 'a recommendation 
 addressed to the State.' d)j.apTdvovT£s. This use of the present 
 participle seems to me akin to those noticed, ch. 24 d, and 83 b, where see 
 what has been said. Kriig. says that this verb, and dSi/cS also, virtually have 
 a past signification, cf. i. 38. He quotes aiiaprdvav tvt^ioie-ria-eTaL, Xen. Mem. 
 iii- 9i "• dv6iriK\'/iT<os. Sch. oi)8^c ^7/i:X7;e^>.7-es, and L. and S. ' mm- 
 blamed.' There seems no gi-ound for making it active as T. K. A. 
 
 Chapter XCIII.— (a.) S-fiKt] Iotiv 8ti— forthe more usual construction with 
 a participle. But perhaps a shght difference of meaning is implied. Shews in 
 its very appearance; carries in its appearance, a proof that it was. But 
 see Jelf, § 677, 804, 2. im6Kavrai. Apparently a technical 
 
 term, for Bl. quotes Xen. Sipp. i. 2, /j.^ iiroKei.p.ivav olW Sei t&v eep,e\lav-^ 
 tr. ' the foundations are laid of stones of all sorts and sizes. ' 
 |vv«ip7ao-|j,^v»v— 'so hewn as to fit into each other.' Krug. cf. ^vvi^KoSop,rip.iyoi,- 
 
Chap. 93.] -NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lOI 
 
 i. 93- I'YKaTaX^Yu is translated by L. and S. (from the Scholiast's 
 
 ' iyKarijiKoSofuidTiffai') — 'to build in.' But it seems to me that the idea of syste- 
 matic huilding is precisely the one which Thuo. meant to reject. KaToKiyu is 
 simply to collect, and the whole word implies, I think — 'were picked up and 
 hastily put in.' The fact is confirmed by Col. Leake, who saw whole courses of 
 masonry formed of broken portions of Doric columns, and composite blocks of 
 Doric entablature. Topogr. of Athens, vol. i. p. 312. The elpyaa/xivoi. \ldoi were 
 from these very entablatures, sculptured in relievo. This seems to have been 
 overlooked by the English Trans, who has merely — 'wrought stones.' 
 KivovvT£s. This looks almost like a reference to the proverb iravra \Wov 
 KLveiv — 'to leave no stotie unturned.' 
 
 (5.) iirijpKTo airov. 'A commencement had heen made of it,' Erug., of; 
 tri-Kavrai., i. 6. ertl, cum genitive, ' in the time of.' The construcr 
 
 tion apxi]" ' AByivatMs Hp^ai is, says Pop., equivalent to S,pxovTa Trap' ' AStivalois 
 eXvai. There is more difficulty about Kar' iviavrbv, which, according to analogy, 
 should mean, year hy year, yearly. Poppo's notion is, I think, most probable, 
 that, viz., it is so connected with apxn^ ^s as to be almost equivalent to apxh 
 Kar' ^viavrhv o5(ra.. I should therefore translate, hel^d the annual office of 
 Archon, i.e., Archon Eponymus. What this year was is disputed. Bockh, 
 •who has published a learned dissertation, de Archontibus pseudeponymis, fixes 
 upon Olymp. Ixxi. 4, i.e., B.C. 493. 'Kriig., in his Studia JBistor. et Philol., 
 maintains, on the contrary, that the year was 01. Ixxiv. 3, i.e., B.C. 482. 
 Clinton argues for e.g. 481, with whom Dr. Thirlwall coincides, having aban- 
 doned Kriig.'s view. See Appendix v. vol. ii., Hist. Greece, all of which should 
 indeed be read as bearing upon this subject. Mr. Grote has a notion of his 
 own, that Thuc. meant, ' during the year when Themistocles was Strategus 
 (vol. V. p. 338, note), but I cannot see how he supports it. Xi.|ji^vas 
 
 Tprts. Pop. refers to Pausanias, and the Sohol. Arist. Pax, 144, from whom 
 we learn that the two were called rbv KavSdpov Xi/x^ya and rb ' AcppoSiaiov. 
 Hesychius supplies Zea as the name of the third. Kapp, de re navali Athen. 
 interprets the above mentioned Schol. so as to substitute Tleipaia Kar i^o^fiv 
 ior rd'A^poSLffcov. airo^vii%, lit. of spcmtaneous growth, natural. 
 
 (ieya irpoc|>epciv. The infinitive may have for its subject, aiyrois vavn.Ko{is 
 ■yeyev-qfiivovi, in which case tr. the fact of their having become a naval peojile 
 would greatly contribute to the acquisition of power : or its subject may be rb 
 Xdipio!/, in which case tr. that the place would greatly aid them, when they liad 
 once become a naval people, in the acquisition of power. Kriig. aptly cites Eurip. 
 Med. 1090, Kal tf>-qp.i ^porCjv otrives elfflv irdp.Trai' direipot p.r)d' i(p6Teuaai' iraidas 
 fi4ya irpo(t>ipea> eis eirvx^O'V tuv yeiva,p.huv. «i6vs, as explained by 
 
 the Schol. lit/xa ri^ avp,^ov\p.vaai. Goll.'s idea that it means ' statim postquam 
 Archon factus est, ' is negatived by what follows, cf . note upon ireKicrBT]. 
 Tf|v a.px.ifjv, generally considered to mean ' their dominion,' but Kriig. would 
 rather refer it to vtttjpkto. "^pi^v — 'the commencement of the building.' 
 
 He, with his colleagues, erected a Hermea with this inscription — 'Ap^diievoc 
 -rrpuTOi reix'ff"' '''i" S' aviBriKav. Knig. Hist. Phil. Stud. p. 23. 
 
 (c.) Kal uKoS6|iiT|a-av. This description has caused some difficulty. The ex- 
 position of Mr. Grote seems to convey the general opinion. ' Two carts, meet- 
 ing one another, brought stones, which were laid together right and left on the 
 
IC2 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 other side of each, and thus formed two primary parallel -walls, between which tie 
 interior space (of course at least as broad as the joint breadth of tte two carts) 
 was filled up, not with rubble in the usual manner of the Greeks, but con- 
 structed throughout the whole thickness of squared stones, cramped together 
 with metal. The result was a solid wall, probably not less than fourteen or 
 fifteen feet thick, since it was intended to carry so very unusual a height/ 
 vol. V. p. 339. And so Thirl wall. ' The wall was of a breadth which allowed 
 two wagons to pass each other, and this space was entirely filled with hewn 
 stones, exactly fitted together within, and consolidated upon the outside with 
 iron clamps and molten lead.' [Vol. ii. p. 406.] T. K. A. wonders why 
 Thuo. should tell us that they kept bringing the stones to the wall in different 
 directions, and suggests that some of the stones were imported (!), and therefore 
 came up from the port. I do not see that Thuc. does teU us anything of the 
 sort. I suppose a cart, after having discharged its load, would not unnaturally 
 return for another, and might meet a laden cart by the way. We need make 
 no dif&culty about iwrryov, for this does not imply that the cai-ts went on the 
 top of the wall, but that they brought their load up to the place where it was 
 to be deposited : as may be seen from iva.'yuv ri, iTiTrjdeia, vii. 60. The 
 Schol. explanation ipavriai., <rvve^evyiJ.^vai ; and Bothe's conjecture, iydprm, 
 lashed side by side, are not to be thought of ; this is clear even from Aiistoph, 
 Aves, V. 1124, a passage evidently referring to this very building. 
 
 CliaT^ &v havrloj 5t)* Hpfiare 
 
 tinritiv ijTr6vTuiv, fi^yedos 6(rov 6 Soiiptos, 
 
 ij7r6 Tou irXdrous clv TrapeXaaalTTjv. [v. 1048, ed. Bothe.] 
 
 Sirep vSv Sti. We may remark that the doubt expressed by recent editors 
 concerning the razing of the walls by Lysander, which has originated in these 
 words, is without foundation ; for they can only refer to the period at which 
 they were written, and this may have been at any time before the conclusion of 
 the war. Of, cip^dfievos eidi/s KadiffTafikvov, i. i. For the more usual h toji^, 
 Kriig. reads with one MS. ivrbiM-ri. The first I should render, ' made angular in 
 the hewing,' i.e., cat in an angular form, so that the meaning would but slightly 
 differ from KrUg.'s instrumental dative, which, however, would make iyyJivi.oi.= 
 to TSTpdyavoi. For this he produces the authority of Josephus, p. 108,21. 
 But Josephus may have been imitating this passage under a misapprehension. 
 Am, of. ii. 76, divh t^s to^^s — ^ from tlie point where the stmies had been cut. 
 Giill. has 'locis quibus indsi sunt.' X^^S — 'fragments made in 
 
 quarrying and squaring stone, which were used by the ancients to fill up the 
 interior of thick walls. Pliny, xxxvi. 22. Vitruv. ii. 8. Comment, on Hor. 
 Od. iii. I, 35. ^n. iv. 711. In this case xo^'l was mixed with plenty of 
 clay — for this is meant by TTijXis, or clay-mortar.' Bl. to Si ii<|(os. 
 
 The height of the wail was finished to as near as may be, half what he intended, 
 i. e., iiffre ^luav etvai. oH Siemeiro. So too I see Mr. Grote. This I cannot but 
 believe to be correct, though Thirlwall explains — ' had intended before this com- 
 pletion of his plan.' [Vol. ii. p. 406.] d<|>i.a-Tdvai 4iri,pov\4s — 
 A rather unusual use of the verb, which the Schol. explains by iTorpow^v 
 noietv. Several MSS. have iwi^oXas, i. e., iiriSisiK, which looks more natural. 
 
k;HAP. 95 .J NOTES OK THUUYDIDES. I03 
 
 Tuv dxpCLordrtov, i. c, t(ov irpeff^vrdTiov Kal twv peurdnov. See ii. 6. Kriig. 
 adds iii. 78. Xen. Anai., v. 2, 4. 
 
 (d.) xpoo-^KCiTO. Sch. riv vovv irpoauxe — he laid most stress upon the ships, 
 ieiTig far-sighted enough to perceive. lT€txCo-8i](rav — * were provided 
 
 leith a wall.' For understanding the full force of Karecr/cei/iifoi'To, refer to cli. jo, 
 /caratT/cei^i;, 
 
 Chattee XCIV. — (a.) Ilavo-avCas 84. This 5^ refers the narrative back to 
 ch. 87. For KXei/ijSpoToj, cf. Herod, vii. 71. e£Eir4|jL<f>6i]. In the 
 
 spring of the year, 478, B. 0., i. e., one year after the battle of Plataea. Diodorus, 
 says Grote, makes the Peloponnesian ships fifty ; but his statement is not to 
 be accepted in opposition to Thucydides. Iv TrjSe t{j tjyc|iovCc).. 
 
 Stephens, GoU. and Kriig. connect these words with the following chapter, 
 Arnold retains them in this, because he believes that Thucyd. means to express 
 that Byzantium was taken during the term of Pausanias' command, though 
 certainly towards the close of it. This would place the recall of Pausanias in 
 B. c. 378 ; and as Dorcis, his successor, never succeeded in securing the alle- 
 giance of the allied Greeks, Mr. Fynes Clinton assumes the year, B.C. 377 to 
 have been the true commencement of the Athenian dominion. According to 
 this view, the building of the walls, the capture of Byzantium, and the recall of 
 Pausanias all occurred B. 0. 378. Mr. Grote generally assenting to Clinton's 
 view, adds, ' Pansanias' command, however, need not be restricted to one year, 
 as Mr. Clinton maintains, for the words of Thucyd., iv rfSe rrj Tiyc/xoi'tg,, imply 
 nothing as to annual duration, and designate merely the ' hegemony which pre- 
 ceded that of Athens." See note, vol. v. p. 415. 
 
 Chapter XGV. — (a.) Kardl rb ^iyyiVK. Because the lonians, who had 
 been expelled from Peloponnesus, took refuge in Attica previous to their mi- 
 gration to the Asiatic coast. See on the Ionic migration Arnold's note upon 
 this passage, and a very full account, Hermann's Pol. Ant. of Greece, sections 
 77, 78. Grote, vol. iii. ch. 13. Thirlwall, i. p. 295. ovtois. 
 
 Of the Athenians, as is obvious from the context, though (T<pt(nv might rather 
 have been anticipated. Krug. compares v. 32 ; vi. 35 ; vii. 17 ; viii. 46. 
 aSiKCa KOTTiYopetTO airov — 'mmch wrong doing was laid to his cha/rge' Krug. 
 is unacquainted with the phrase Kur-qyopoviiat. d.SiKiai'. ^ a^pa'n]yla — 
 
 'than a military commamd.' To read ^ arparriyla with Poppo in order to 
 obtain a subject, appears to me to destroy the force of the language. Kriig. 
 aptly cites dpnTTOKparla, fiaWov ^ ^atriKeia vo^Lfr&TiaeTac. Herodian, v. 1,4. 
 
 (b.) avTu, for the more strictly correct airdv — 'it happened to him to ie 
 summoned.' T. K. A. says, ' as both events have reference to Pausanias, 
 airbs is placed under the government of (vvi^T].' H.eTaTd|a<r8ai. 
 
 The prep, denotes as usual 'change,' and the whole is correctly given by Dale — 
 went over atid ranged themselves v/pon the side of the Athenians. 
 evSvvSt). The Schol. explains eidivas SiSwKe Kal KaTeSi.Kd<r6Ti : lit. he suffered 
 judicial condemnation. The ciffivrj was the examination (at Athens) into the 
 way in which a magistrate had discharged his office in order to see whether he 
 had acted correctly [eiOiis]. The meaning here therefore is clear. On t&v 
 eidivdri, cf. Jelf, § 501. Eemark how the Aorist merely denotes the fact. 
 
104 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 while hia partial and incomplete acquittal is expressed by a transition to the 
 present AiroXieTai. : the /mtj before adiKetv is in accordance with the usual Greek 
 idiom, which affixes the negation to the part of the notion negatived in the 
 speaker's mind ; Poppo has produced a somewhat uncommon imitation from 
 the Latin language, 'Liberatur Milo non eo consilio profectus esse ut insi> 
 diaretur.' Oic. pro. Mil. i8. 47. 
 
 (c.) xcCpous •yC'YVMVTai. Not simply as Bl. would have it, comparative for 
 positive, but 'should deteriorate.' That such was the fact with the Spartans, 
 owing to a reaction against their severe domestic discipline, is notorious. See 
 Plut. Arist. c. 23. Aristotle notices the fact, and gives the same reason for 
 it. Sirep IvctSov — which they saw to be the case in Pamstmias, 
 
 Mtiller [Doriams, i. p. 204] considers that the unwillingness of the Spartans to 
 ■send more commanders to Asia, lay deeper than any annoyance at the defection 
 of the Ionian Greeks. They deemed it inexpedient to aim at the mastery of 
 the sea, or run the hazard of breaking up the Spartan institutions by attempts 
 at foreign conquest. tKavovs. See what the Athenians themselves 
 
 say, i. 76 ; and for a Lacedaemonian witness, Xen. Hell. vi. 6, 34. Kriig. 
 
 Chapter XCVI. — (a.) HaixravCov |ito-os. Objective genitive. 
 EWT^vora^Cat.. So called because they received, and then disbursed the con- 
 tributions of aU the Hellenic confederacy. These contributions were originally 
 deposited at Delos, and then removed to Athens. Boeckh [Public. Earn. Ath. 
 ii. p. ^36], from some inscriptions, concludes that they were ten in number, and 
 that, like the treasurers of the gods, they were chosen by lot, out of the Penta- 
 cosiomedimni, and that they did not enter upon their office at the beginning of 
 the year, but after the Panathensea. They [^S^x<»''"o] received, but did not 
 collect the tribute. The word 0i5pos became so odious, that at Olymp. u. 
 a-Ovra^Ls was substituted for it. Delos was selected for these ^ivoSoL, or 
 'councils.' Subsequently they were called SiiceSpoi. Bekker. Anec. p. 302, 
 Isocrates, viii. 29. For fuller information see Henn. Pol. Antiquities, § 56. 
 Boeckh, Public Econ. Athens, p. 336. Bng. Trans. The Hellenotamiai were 
 not (says A.) reappointed after the establishment of the Democracy by 
 Thrasybulus. 
 
 Chapter XCVIL (a.) airb koivmv. This ivh has, as Kriig. remarks, the 
 force of the German Von. It indicates in a less intimate way than h the 
 source from which any action proceeds. For examples cf. L. and S. and Jelf's 
 Grammar, voc. &vb. ivf^iov, prosecuted, or eaetyated. 
 
 irpoo-TVYX.'^vovTas is explained by the Scholiast ^^ToSifocras ; perhaps it is 
 rather more general — who in each particular case came into contact or collisioi), 
 with them. Kriig. quotes Xen. Cyr. vi. 3. 2, ol irpoiTTvyxdvovTes twv apxl'^rian 
 iiTiiiAXovTO, and Dem. 25, 96, 6 irpoarvxii'v dei TLjuapdaBa. 
 
 (6.) 2-ypa\|/a. . . . hro\,T\a-a.f.r\v . As perfects, says T. K. A. Why not as 
 Aorists I am unable to determine. The fact that Thucyd. had so written is 
 all that he wishes to convey. The time of writing is of no importance. 
 Ik|3o\^, a digression, called in later Greek writers 7rop^/c;8ai7is. 
 IkXiit^s, omitted, left out, only imitated by Arrian. XupCov seems tb 
 
 be here used as a sort of diminutive for the ordinary riiros. i. e, . locun to-oii; 
 
■Chap. 98.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 105 
 
 KttV Jjil/ttTo, thia Kal is one of those which, as Am. observes, may best be 
 rendered by an emphasis upon the auxiliary verb — ' did touch upon.' In seems 
 in this and similar cases to imply, ' for all that,' ' notwithstanding what I have 
 said,' of. ch. 20 a. rots xpovois — 'The chronology,' and in later 
 
 writers. The reference is to the Athis, or History of Attica, which Hellanicus 
 composed in four books at least. He was a native of Mytilene (see i. 21.) — 
 Aulus Gell. makes him come from Miletus — a contemporary of Herodotus — 
 i. c, twelve years older, and sixty- five years of age when the Peloponnesian 
 war began. See MiiWeT a History of Greek Literature, ch. xvili. 7. 
 2X€i here, as elsewhere, nearly irap^x^^' See Goll. on i. 9. Its subject is either t6 
 Xojpioy, or as Pop. and Kriig. suggest, raOra from what precedes, cf. Jelf, § 898, 
 3, tr., it involves, orgives opportunity for the seiting forth, Herod, i. i. Mr. Grote, 
 after observing that the period from B. 0. 477 to B. c. 405 is sometimes incor- 
 rectly described as the Athenian Empire, and that no one word will express the 
 ■ character of their ascendency during these years, proceeds to direct attention 
 to this portion of the work of Thuoyd. as indicating the imperceptible transition 
 from an riyefiovia to an Apx^. ' The transition from the Athenian Hegemony 
 to the Athenian Empire was doubtless gradual, so that no one could determine 
 precisely where the former ends and the latter begins ; but it had been consum- 
 mated before the thirty years' truce, which was concluded fourteen years before 
 the Peloponnesian war, and it was in fact the substantial cause of that war.' 
 Grote, vol. V. pp. 395, 6, where see also the long note on the ip/eixovla, as con- 
 tra,sted with dpxii. ev oW Tpdirio. The prep, conveys somewhat 
 
 more meaning than the simple dative. Bremi, to whom Poppo refers, says 
 upon Lys., p. 6^, Ile/Jt S77/C. ^v roOrc^ rip rpbiTtp ^crda dv/j^ rerL/Mop7}^^vos, est cum 
 prepositione quod nos diceremus, qvA rations innixi, fidentes, tr. , under what 
 circumstances it became established, c£ i. 8, ad fin. 
 
 Chapter XCVIII. — (a.) 'HCova. 'On the site of this city, subsequently 
 the port of Amphipolis, cf. iv. 103. The words 17 ItI XTpvp.6vi. are added to 
 distinguish it from a Mendsean Colony, and perhaps from a third Eion 
 mentioned by Eustathius.' Popp. M-ijSiov lxiivT<ov. Herod, vii. 107. 
 
 The event occurred, Olymp. Ixxv., 4, and Olymp. Ixxvi. Kriig. The capture 
 of Scyros occurred in the latter year. Grote has, I think, successfully shown, 
 that these three events could have formed but a small portion of the operations 
 carried on against the Persians, from B.C. 477 to B.C. 466. See Herod, vii. 
 106, 107. Nothing but years of active training could have enabled the 
 Athenians to acquire their remarkable ascendency in nautical skill, and their 
 various other advantages, and to the same prolonged and continuous labours 
 must be ascribed the disgust of the Ionian confederates, vol. v. p. 403. 
 
 (5.) irpbs 8^ ICapvcTTCovs. Nothing is known of this. liroX^- 
 
 Htjo-av. ' That this happened during the time of Themistocles' flight into Asia, 
 we learn from oh. 137, and before the battle of Eurymedon, ch. 100. But as 
 the date of this battle is itself undetermined, Clinton and Wachsmuth place the 
 siege of Naxos B.C. 466, but Kriig. in the year B.C. 473,' Popp. 
 irop€OTiio-oVTo — lit. ' made them come amd stand beside them,' is not express as 
 -to the means employed to compel a surrender. That the place was carried by 
 assault seems (as Bl. has seen) implied by the words of Aristophanes, icis ffavrby 
 
iOO NOTES Crt ««IUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 (fori ToC reixovs Sre Sij y fj N<£|os edXa, Vesp. 355. «Sov\iS6i), 
 
 From what precedes, we see that this word is not so strong as avSpaToSlte<r6at; 
 indeed, Kriig. says it is simply opposed to aMvo/Mos, as is the case in Xen, 
 Hellenic, iv. 8, § i, 2. 
 
 Chapter XCIX. — (a.) ^KS^iai — 'arrears.' This is evidently so to be 
 translated, as the passages adduced by Popp. prove. Zon. et Suidas, hSela, ij 
 Kefcpeuff/i^vrj XoiTrds. oi twj' (j>6piov l/cSeiai sunt Polybio rd, irpo(TO<pu\bii,eva. tUv 
 o/ji.oKoyrje^i'Tui/ XPW'''''"'- Livio, reliquum pecuniae ex eo quod pepigerant, 
 xviii. 37. The term in the Latin Jurists is Reliquatio. XenrooTpaTwv 
 
 ■ — refusal, or omission of military service. The word had a technical applica- 
 tion in the Athenian law, as indicating a particular civil offence. In the case 
 of a ■ypa<p-fi XemoaTparlov, actual desertion seems to have been implied. The 
 penalty upon conviction was a fine, and complete disfranchisement of the 
 offender and his descendants. 8irpoo-a-ov, as the compound verb, 
 
 i<TTpdiT(Tu — were very strict amd exacting. TaXai.ir<i)p6tv. This and 
 
 the cognate substantive raXaiwoipla denote regular and prolonged devotion to 
 labour. Wachsmuth, vol. ii. § 53, is justified in saying, 'The lonians and their 
 Greek neighbours were too much debased by sensual pleasures to prefer freedom, 
 at the price of toil and privation, to servitude which insured them the enjoy- 
 ment of luxury.' See their conduct as described by Herod, vi. 12. 
 Tots dvoYKas — ' the compulsory measures which they did employ,' said in the 
 first instance of tortures applied to extort confession. I cannot agree with 
 Popp. that there is any allusion to military engines and besieged towns, cf. iv. 
 87, and Dem. ii. 29; Isocrates, iv. 81. 
 
 (6.) iv if|8ovf| &PX.OVTCS. This may be considered equivalent to ijBeis ivr^ 
 dpxv — agreeable in their government ; but such a use of ^Soyf must be admitted 
 to be unusual. Kriig. therefore proposes to make dpxovres ^(rav equivalent to 
 ^PX""! * predicate modified by the phrase iv i)5ov§, ' no longer ruled to the satis- 
 faction of tlieir allies. ' This use of the participle with cliii. for the finite verb, 
 is, I think, common in the Greek Test., and may be found elsewhere. 
 6p.oCus — lis iv dpxv P'tTO, rhv Hava-arlav, Sohol. paSCov t\v. This 
 
 perhaps may mean, they made light of it, just as Juvenal uses ' facihs, ' — Queis 
 facile est sedem conduoere, &c. iii. 3 1 . 
 
 (c.) oir(5Kvi](riv, we might almost render 'shirking' — 'trying to get off.' 
 iTa^avTo — 'th^y xnade the a/rramgement for themselves,' voce medift. The accu- 
 sative t6 lKvoip,evov avdXuiM, not as Bl., 'what the expense comes to,' but the 
 expense coming to, or devolving on them, may be regarded as placed in explana- 
 tory apposition to rd xpii/tara. Popp. suggests another way of taking the 
 words, sc. x/'^/iC'ra ird^avro (SffTe) ^ipeiv rb Ikv. dva\. ; but this does not seem 
 necessary. This sense of lKvioit.ai is found in Herod, vi. 6^, 84, 86, ix. 26 ; and 
 Kriig. also cites Ar. Pol. iv. i, i, idv tls fi,^ Trjs Uvov/iivTis iin.eip.y p.ri$' l^em 
 K.T.X. Aircipoi. The common reading Is diropoi, but many of the 
 
 best MSS. read direipoi, which is adopted by Bekker, Poppo, and GoU. I think 
 they are right, for diropoi is rather tautological, and at any rate much more 
 likely to have been substituted for dirupoi than vice versS. dveipoi implies that 
 they were destitute of that experience which the practical service which they 
 had declined alone could give. 
 
Chap. lOI.J NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. 107 
 
 Chapter C. — (a.) toLs irdo-as 4s [toIs] Siokoo-Cos. There is much variation 
 in MSS. and among editors concerning the article before the numeral. The read- 
 ing appears to me to depend upon the historical fact whether the Persian fleet 
 at Eurymedou consisted of more than 200 ships or not. Later writers state 
 the number as much higher, but they vary so among themselves, and exhibit 
 so much tendency to exaggeration, that their authority is not worth much. 
 Besides, what became of the remaining vessels not destroyed by Cimon ? From 
 the necessity of the case, and indeed conformably to the usual practice, the 
 Persians, we may be sure, ran all their ships on shore, so that their whole force 
 might be concentrated to repel the inevitable attack of their enemy ; and how, 
 in this case, could any of the vessels have escaped the victors ! I should there- 
 fore tr. the whole of them, up to their full count of 200 — i.e., the whole 200 of 
 them. Other ways of accounting for the article seem to me futile. Mr. Grote 
 has, I see, taken a view similar to the above, vol. v. p. 419, note. 
 XpiSvu lioTspov. B.C. 465, or, according to Krtlg., B.C. 467. toB 
 
 lierdWov. According to Herod, the gold mine brought in 80 talents yearly to 
 the Thasians. See vi. 46-48, vii. 18 ; and read Bockh, Public E. of A. book iii. 
 ch. 20. Thucyd. had an interest in it, through his wife, and resided at Scaptfe- 
 Hyle during his banishment. For an historic parallel, see Crete's note, ibid. 
 
 (6.) 'Evv^a 68o«s. ' On the Strymon, about three miles higher up than Eion, 
 near the spot where the river narrows itself again out of a broad expanse of the 
 nature of a lake, was situated the Edonian town or settlement called Nine 
 Ways, a little above the bridge which here served as an important communica- 
 tion for all the people of the interior,' Grote, v. p. 421. On the Edonians, cf. 
 Herod. V. 124, vii. no, 114, ix. 75, and 'H3w?is aXa .^sch. Persw, 487. 
 |u(jnrdvT<DV. Their destruction is ascribed to the Edonians alone by other 
 writers. KrUg. would therefore accept Valla's conjecture, ^li/nravTes, i. e., the 
 colonists; or, with Heilman, read ^vaTdvTav. Arn. considers it natural that 
 all the Thracian tribes should combine to destroy a colony attempting to settle 
 itself in such an advantageous situation as Amphipolis, especially as they had 
 already defeated a similar attempt by Arisfcagoras of Miletus, Herod, v. 126. 
 Histiaius, he might have added, had been similarly unsuccessful, Grote vi. 
 p. 16.) Apd^TiffKos, according to Leake, is the modern ' Drama.' This occurred 
 B.C. 467-464. 
 
 Chapteb CI. — (a.) (idxais. Commentators are puzzled, as only one battle 
 is mentioned. I regard it as the indefinite use of the plural, ' hostilities.' iSee 
 note on iii. 65. inr^o^ovTo Kpv<|>a. Upon this, Grote takes occa- 
 
 sion to remark, ' The first intent of unprovoked and even treacherous hostility 
 — the germ of the future Peloponnesian war- — is conceived and reduced to an 
 engagement by Sparta,' V. p. 423. EtXures IXEpCoLKOi. The student 
 
 must consult upon these, Arn.'s excellent note on this chapter; Miiller's Do- 
 rians, book iii. ch. 2, 3; Hermann's Fol. Antiq. Greece, § 19, 24, 28, 48: and 
 Grote. ToO (rei.(r|j.oi). The article, because it was the worst ever 
 
 known in Greece, Olymp. oi. It laid the whole of Sparta in ruins, save five 
 houses, and it is said, broke off a peak from Mount Taygetu.s, which rolled into 
 the river Eurotas. The Spartans regarded it as a judgment sent by Neptune 
 for the murder of some revolted Helots who had taken sanctuary in his temple 
 
I08 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book L 
 
 atTfflnarum. See Grote, t. p. 428. ks'19<S>f.-t\v a.iri<rTT\a-av. Re- 
 
 mark the contracted form of the expression, as in 65 b, 87 b. Kriig. quotes 
 dirSiTTas eh Mi5(7ous, Xen. Anab. i. 6, 7. The remarkable expression of Ari- 
 stotle {Pol. ii. 6, 2) concerning the Helots is quoted by Kriig., &(rT£p yap i<p£- 
 SpeOovres Toh arvx^P'O.ffi biaTeXovdiv, 
 
 (b.) ToT€ — here, as often, ' the well-known time.' ©do-ioi 84. Here 
 
 the narrative is resumed. Tetx^os and vavs — ^without the article, as 
 
 in the quotation of legal formulae, items in an account, and such familiar matters. 
 See note, ch. 8 a ; cf. inter alia ch. 108, iii. 117. KafleXovres. In 
 
 this case, as generally, the participle sine articulo expresses the conditioning of 
 the predication. This is clearly shown by the present example, since it stands 
 for i<j> (f— (So-re. Cf. i. 108, iii. 115, 117. Ta|d(i.evoi. Cf. iTa^avro, 
 
 ch. 99. 8o-a 88ei, Kriig. supposes to mean aiTears, and the pay- 
 
 ment of the expenses of the war. 
 
 Chapter CII. — (a.) l(j.T)Ktlv€TO. Two battles are mentioned by Herod, ix. 
 35. aXXovs. 'The iEginetans, ii. '27; Plataeans, iii. 54; Manti- 
 
 n^ans, Xen. Hell. v. 1, 3,' Popp. ■f)X9ov. Olymp. Ixxix. i, or B.C. 
 
 464. ovK oXC7<j>. "With 4000 Hoplites, Arist., Lysist., Kriig. 
 
 T€ixo|j.ax«iv. So in the case of Platsea, Herod, ix. 70. Cf. Thuc. ii. 75, vii. 
 79. Toirov. We must supply tov Tuxop-t-x^ai. Popp. refers to 
 
 r^s Svvd/JLeiiis ifded, ch. 77. ''BpSeS i<j>aLveT0 quasi to irpA,yp.aTa Tdv'AdijvaiMV 
 est dicendi genus impersonale,' Popp. ' When there was shown to be a defidency 
 in this respect. ' iroXiopicfas, without the article, as it turned out a 
 
 long siege. Kriig. quotes Polyb. i. 17, 9, iroXiopKlas XP^^^^ wpotpaLPop.^Trjs. 
 pCa yd,p &,v etXov — otherwise, had not this deficiency existed, they would have 
 captured the place by storm. 
 
 (b.) (|>aVEpd, opposed to dS^Xws fJxSovTo, ch. 92, Popp. /«) ti connects itself 
 with 8ei(ravT€s, though the cognate notion /cat d\Ko(p6\ovs dp.a Tyyrjo'd/J.ei'ot inter- 
 venes. Kriig. refers to Pffugk on Eurip. Herac. ■227, and Lobeck, j4Jou;, p. 268. 
 tJ) iroXiiTjpbv KaV Tf|v v«(OT. — ' the enterprising and rerohttionary spirit.' Cf. ii. 
 87. dXXo<|>iiXoDs. The never extinguished animosity between the 
 
 Dorian and Ionian race is justly considered as one of the real causes of the 
 Peloponnesian war. Clinton {Fasti Hell. ann. 464-461 B.C.), following Plu- 
 tarch, has recognised two Lacedaemonian requests to Athens, and two expedi- 
 tions to Sparta, both under Cimon, one B.C. 464, just after the earthquake, a 
 second B.C. 461. Mr. Grote's arguments for a single expedition {vol. v. pp. 
 430, 431, note) appear to me conclusive. The earthquake took place at the 
 time of the siege of Thasos, for it was the earthquake which prevented the 
 Lacedaemonians from acceding to the request of the Thasians for an invasion of 
 Attica ; but Cimon commanded at Thasos, and consequently could not have 
 led an auxiliary force at that time into Laconia. Next, Thucydides must have 
 mentioned two expeditions had he heard of them ; nor is it probable that 
 Sparta, the first military power in Greece, should have been all at once reduced 
 to such helplessness as to owe her safety to foreign intervention. The groBB 
 exaggerations of the comic poet, Lysistrat. v. 11 38, deceived Plutarch. 
 
 (c.) ovK kit\ T^ PcXtCovi. — 'not for the best of motives,' as we should say. 
 Cf. Tpo<rirol7)(ns M x^ipov, Theoph. Ilepl 'Elpavdas, or, in this place perhaps, 
 
Chap. 104.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 109 
 
 not for the more honouraile reason of the two — i.e., Sri oiSh wpotrSiovnu airCiv 
 Iti. 'Ap'yetas. On the Argives and their policy, consult Thirlwall, 
 
 ii. p. 424, and Grote, v. 429. ' Argos, neutral during the Persian invasion, 
 had now recovered the eflfects of that destructive defeat suffered about thirty 
 years before from the Spartan King Gleomenes.' Iirl to M'^S<j>. The 
 
 dative is unusual, but quite legitimate, for it denotes the ' object' against which 
 the treaty was directed. 
 
 Chaptee cm. — (a.) SEK(i.T(j>. Kriig. would read 5', i. e., T^rdpTif. Dio- 
 dorus also, however, says 10. I<j>' & I^Ca<riv — ' on condition, that 
 
 they shall emigrate.' See Jelf. 
 
 (6.) kot" 8x6os T|8i^ TO AaKE8ai|j.avC(ov — ' the animosity which they had by 
 this time begun to entertain towards the LacedcemoniaTis.' The objective genitive, 
 as ch. 96, luiros, and to' A.6t)valuv Ix^o^i "■ H- Of. iv. I, vii. 57. 
 KaT(^Kia*av Is — settled into, or, as we should say, in — an elliptical way of speak- 
 ing that has often been noticed, cf. supra 100 a, and with iv for is, v. 35. The 
 same words occur vi. 7. NaiiraicTov. The modern Lepanto, a 
 
 town which commanded the Sinus Corinthiacus. Subsequent events showed 
 the perspicacity of the Athenians in selecting this spot in which to locate an 
 enemy to Lacedsmon. Cf. ii. 90. Kriig. 's date for this event is B.C. 462. 
 
 (c. ) Trpo(r£XupT)<rav. On this brief notice of a most important event, see 
 Grote, vol. T. p. 435. 'This was an acquisition of signal value to the Athe- 
 nians, since it both opened to them the whole range of territory across the outer 
 Isthmus of Corinth to the interior of the CrissEean Gulf, on which the Megarian 
 port of Pegaa was situated, and placed them in possession of the passes of Mount 
 Geraneia, so that they could arrest the march of a Peloponnesian army over 
 the Isthmus, and protect Attica from invasion. It was, moreover, of great 
 importance in its effects upon Grecian politics ; it was counted as a wrong by 
 Lacedaemon, gave deadly offence to the Corinthians, and lighted up the flames 
 of war between them and Athens ; their allies, the Epidaurians and iEginetans, 
 taking their part.' Hence the exceeding indignation which, as we know from 
 poets and historians, was felt at Athens when Megara once more reverted to 
 the Peloponnesian alliance. See infra, ch. 114; Arist. Ach. v. 460, 648. The 
 date is very uncertain : Miill. says B.C. 458; Wachsmuth, B.C. 457; Manso, 
 B.C. 464; Grote, B.C. 461 or 460. Nio-a£av was eighteen stadia 
 
 from. Megara, and even in Strabo's time (9, p. 391) connected with it by long 
 walls. ' These ' long walls, ' though afterwards copied in other places and upon 
 a larger scale, were at that juncture an ingenious invention for the purpose of 
 extending the maritime arm of Athens to an inland city,' Grote, v. p. 437. 
 They doubtless gave the idea, and formed the encouragement for undertaking 
 the more gigantic scheme of connecting Athens with its ports of Piraeus and 
 Phalerum. owrb ToBSe — it was mainly from this that the excessive 
 
 animosity of the Corinthians against the Athenians originated. As roOde, accord- 
 ing to the general rule, would not refer to what precedes, Kriig. understands 
 dirb ToOSe XP^"""- ^^^ ^^^ above rule is not without exceptions. 
 
 Chaptee CIV. — (a.) direo-Tt](rev. Kriig. assigns all the events mentioned 
 in this chapter to the year B. 0. 460. Ik MapeCas. This place stood, 
 
 according to Kiepert's map, on the inland shore, to the S. W. of the great lake 
 
I lO NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 of Mareotis. Inarus thus commencing his insurrection on the western extremity 
 of the Delta of the Nile, gradually advanced towards the east. Diodorua 
 says the insurrection began E. 0. 361, which agi'ees with Kriig.'s chronology. 
 4><ipov. This small island lay off the mouth of the harbour of Alexandria, and 
 from the lighthouse there erected, all similar beacons have received the name, 
 'ApTol^plou. This form of spelling is most consonant with the analogy of 
 'Bipii)s, and the Hebrew form of the name. See Donaldson, New Oratylus, 
 p. 195, yet Bekker, following some few MSS., reaAs' Apra^6p^ov. 
 
 (5.) An inscription preserved in the Louvre contains the names of those 
 Athenian citizens who in one single year perished for their country in Cyprus, 
 in Egypt, in Phoenicia, among the JEaliensians, at Egina, and in Megara. 
 Nothing could more forcibly indicate the extent of the Athenian empire, and 
 their military activity. Boeckh, in his great work {Corp. Inacrip.), assumes 
 that the year intended is not the natural, but the civil year ; i. e: Olymp. Ixxx, 
 3, or from summer, B.C. 459 to summer B.C. 458. This he infers from the 
 fact that the battles mentioned by Thuc. as having been fought in the Megarid, 
 would not otherwise be included in the given year. But Am. remarks that 
 preliminary skirmishes must have taken place, and that the men may have been 
 slain in some of these. ' The funeral ceremonies,' he adds, ' in honour of those 
 who had fallen in the first year of the Peloponnesian war were performed in the 
 winter, i. e. at the close of the natural, and in the middle of the civil, year.' 
 vavcrl SiaKoo-Cais. According to Isocrates 200 triremes were lost in Egypt, 
 viii. 86. Diodorus says 300, xiii. 25. More than 200 vessels, Thuc, ch. no. 
 Kriig. dvairXtiio-aVTes. Remark the force of the preposition, as in 
 
 Avd^affis. KpaTovvTcs k. t. X. Kriig. refers to Ctesias, Persic, c. 32, and 
 
 Diodorus, ii. 74> who speak of a great battle, in which the viceroy Achsemenes, 
 brother of Artaxerxes, fell by the hand of Inarus (cf. Her. vii. 7.) According 
 to Herod, (iii. 12) 100,000 men perished. Acdkov reixos. Am. 
 
 says — ' The white castle of Memphis was the head quarters of the Persian force 
 in Egypt, amounting, native and tributary, to r20,ooo men, ii. 30, iii. 91, 
 Herod.' According to the Scholiast it received this name because built of stone,, 
 whereas the other two fortified places were brick. On tSiv Sijo fiepQv, cf. ch. 10. 
 and 74. Ilepo-Sv Kal Mifiav. So described, thouyh they had 
 
 some time before coalesced into one single state. It is remarkable that the 
 ancient appellation, ol M^Soi, was generally retained, though the Persians were 
 the dominant race. Of. Mi;Sik6s II6Xe|Uos, fi,-qU^ea>, fiTjSifffiSs, &c. and iird 
 arparbv &\ecre M-rtSav, ch. 132, as well as the well-known epitaph upon the 
 brother of .(3llschylua. 
 
 Chaptbb CV.^(a.) 'AXias. The name 'AXieis belonged both to the place 
 and people. They were probably a race of poor fishei-men, perioeoi to the Dorian 
 Argives, who had forced them down to the extremity of the Argolic peninsula. 
 Probably, as Grote conjectures, it was upon this occasion that the Athenians 
 made themselves masters of Troezen, which we subsequently find in their posses- 
 sion without knowing how it came to be so. The war, though it is not distinctly 
 so said by Thucyd., doubtless arose from the jealousy felt by Corinth at the 
 accession of Megara to the Athenian alliance. KcKpv<{>aXeIa. 
 
 According to Leake, the modern Kyr&, one of the small islands which lie 
 
 • 
 
Chap. Io6.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. Ill 
 
 between Epidaurus and JEgina. This action was not decisive, but ' in the great 
 naval battle which ensued oif the island of jEgina, the superiority of the new 
 nautical tactics acquired by twenty years' practice of the Athenians since the 
 Persian war over the old Hellenic ships and seamen, was demonstrated by a 
 
 victory most complete and decisive The maritime power of Mgma. was 
 
 irrevocably ruined.' Grote, vol. v. p. 438. 
 
 {b.) AeoKp&rovi. Colleague of Aristides in the battle ofPlatsea. Plutarch. 
 Arist. u. 20. Popp. Wachsmuth, Sell. Alt. 1, 582 § (German edition) speaks 
 highly of these men. ' Between the political parties of this age, far from being 
 anything like demagogues, and yet not decidedly opposed to Pericles and the 
 Demus, for the most part inspired only with the thought to rival each other in 
 great exploits, there stand forth from the darkness which shrouds the frag- 
 mentary historical traditions of the time, the great outlines of those stout war- 
 riors Myronides, Tolmides, and Leocrates.' Myronides, he goes on to say, won 
 the admiration of his contemporaries and posterity (dviip itr' dperfj Baviia^bi^evos, 
 Diod. xi. 89) by his expeditions, undertaken to advance the popular cause, into 
 B(Botia, Phoois, and Thessaly. Leocrates was colleague to Aristides at Platsea, 
 and commanded in the war with ^gina, B.C. 457. Tolmides was more distin- 
 guished for daring than prudence. During the banishment of Cimon he con- 
 ducted successively several expeditions for Pericles. After Cimon's death he 
 led the Athenian army into Boeotia and fell at Coroneia. vptiTepov belongs 
 to iiTLKoipom {ivras), Kriig. Tol &Kpa tt\i TepaveCas. Krilg. 
 
 reads Tepavias. The high ridge of land stretching across the Isthmus 
 from Corinth to Megara, so called from its resemblance to a crane's neck. On 
 its importance as a military position, cf. supra. See Wachsmuth, Eng. transl,, 
 vol. i.. Appendix iii. 
 
 (c.) Twv 6K Tijs irdXews ■iiroXoCiruv. T. K. A. tr., 'those who were left 
 tehind in the city,' a version not strictly accurate ; it is — of those who could he 
 furnished from the city, i. e. such as were left there. ot irpeo-piiTOToi, 
 
 i. e. those above the age of compulsory military service, which reached from 
 puberty up to sixty. 01 veiiraToi.. Does this refer to those not yet 
 
 old enough to be ireplwoXoi., a sort of mobilized militia, in which all young Athe- 
 nians from eighteen to twenty were obliged to serve ? Poppo thinks not. 
 airoi cKaTcpoi. Kriig. quotes v. 41. vii. 34, either side thought themselves not 
 to have had the worst of it. Compare ci)s adroi/s eKar^povs d^tovv viKaVj vii. 34, 
 and Herod, ix. 26, iSiKaUov airol eKdrepoi ^Xew ri 'irepov K^pas Spias — 'though 
 both sides claimed the victory. ' KaKi.^|j.€voi. ' This indignation 
 
 of their own old men is highly characteristic of Grecian manners, ' Grote. 
 |v|i,paXoVT£s. The conflict is said by Diodorus to have taken place iv rg Xe7o- 
 p.iv[i Ki/twXi?. 
 
 Chaptee CVI.' — (a.) irpoo-piacrG^v. Kriig. conjectures irpopiaaBiv, 'forced 
 forward,' because he considers it difficult to understand t6 x(hpi.ov after the par- 
 ticiple, and ir/)os demands something of the sort. Pop. fills up ir/jis rh i(Te\6e!v 
 4s K. r, X., and compares vpoaavayKd^iv, iv. 87, vii. 18. X'^P^"" — 
 
 here what we call a ' close,' though, as in the New Testament, it often means 
 *a farm,' and may mean so here. ktriirvriv — it must be remembered 
 
 is quite a common military term, used to denote a body of men throwing them- 
 
113 BOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I, 
 
 selves into a position. , Quite similar to the present case is ii. 4, iaivlirToixnv Is 
 oiKr!iJ.a. iTEpuipYOV — i. e. saye Poppo, (^ irvx^v 6v Spvy/ia Treptetpyov . 
 
 airS, but, as Krug. remarks, if we connect Irvxe Tepieipyov, the 6 would be 
 unnecessary. tlpyov — if we retain the old distinction between these 
 
 words, elpyov, incluserwnt, ' would perhaps , be more proper. Kaxa 
 
 ■irpdo-uirov refers to the front entrance of the ' close,' by which the fugitives had 
 gone in. KorAeuo-av — most probably by the use of slings. 
 
 avTots — such a dative as is often found, and niay be perhaps included under the 
 general head of Dativus Commodi. Cf. ch. 8g, § 3. 
 
 Chapter CVII. — (a.) <jp5avTo oIkoSo|jieiv. We have an infinitive after 
 &pxe(7dai, when the notion is in intention^ not in act ; the participle, oIkoSo- 
 /j-ovvTes, when it is actually begun. See Jelf, § 688, obs. to [xaKpa 
 
 Tetxi K- T. X. The difficulties concerning these walls will be noticed in their 
 proper place, ii. 13. In the present passage Thucyd. speaks of the Phaleric 
 wall, and that to the Piraeus, as rh fiaKpii Telx'n : the intermediate wall, ri 61A 
 p,i(rov, is included by implication. Kriig. assigns the ■^p^a.vTo to B.C. 459. 
 Aupids, Tf|V MiiTpriiroXiv. It is certainly common enough to use the name of 
 a people for their country, as '^quos,' 'Sequanos, ' Livy, and 'the Milanese,' 
 by modem historians, cf. ch. iii. Here it is rather more remarkable, as the 
 singular stands in direct apposition. So Aw/Ji^s, ^ fi7\Tp6iro\is tCov AaKeSaifiovibip, 
 iii. 92. Doris is here a TpiiroXcs, not as usually described a reTpdiroXis, i.e. 
 Pindus is omitted. But there seems to have been some uncertainty about the 
 point, for Pliny (iv. 13) makes it a irevraTroKis, and the Schol. on Pind. Pyih. 1. 
 v. 12 r, an e^diroKi-s, PaciX^ois of course belongs to nXettrrotfcaKTOJ, 
 
 so also i. 114, Kriig. Pausanias, properly speaking, was never king of Lacedse- 
 mon, but guardiajj to Pleistarchus, cf. ch. 132. Nioomedes was his younger 
 brother, and also 'guardian' to Pleistoanax. On the objects of this expedition, 
 see Grote, vol. v. p. 443. 'It was soon seen that this was only a part of the 
 objects of Sparta, and that her main purpose, under instigation of the Coritt- 
 
 thians, was to arrest the aggrandisement of Athens To strengthen 
 
 Thebes, and to render her ascendency effective over the Boeotian cities, was the 
 best way of providing a neighbour at once powerful and hostile to the Athe- 
 nians.' Miiller fixes the expedition at B.C. 457, Kriig. in the spring B.C. 458, 
 
 (6.) 8|ji6XXov. A good instance of the usage of this verb, were ready to pre- 
 vent them, were sure to prevent them. The editors hesitate about the future, 
 and most of them print KtSKi[a']ew, and ^/ieXXoc 6.pa \d\pctv, Soph. Phil 
 V. 1084-5. Kriig. thinks that the infinitive future with pi.4\\a is used 
 of intentions, implied probabilities, tkc. I would compare ^fieWov dpa iraiffeai 
 trod' ij[Mas rod Kod^, v. 261, Ranee, */ thought I would stop your Koa^' 
 aa l<|>povp6tTo, i.e., since the events described in the latter part of ch. 
 105. TO 8e Ti, and in som^ degree too, Krug. cf. i. 118; vii. 
 
 48. For iirriyov, which means ' were for bringing them in,' Bl. would read 
 ^^'^701', ' were egging them, on,' needlessly, I should imagine, for Thucyd. means 
 to describe the schemes of a traitorous party at Athens who were for bringing 
 the Spartans in, and arresting the progress of the Long Walls, and iirdye<r6ai. 
 bears this meaning passim. See, with Poppo, the active, also ii. 85 (^Tr^e) ; 
 viii. 46 ; iv. 79 {^vveirdyeiv). Upon the circumstance, see Plutarch, 7it. 
 
Chap. IOo.j iNUXJiS ON THUCYDIDES. II3 
 
 Cimon, 0. 17, and Periolea, 10, Grote, vol. v. p. 44T. oIkoSojioiI- 
 
 |j,€va, admits of literal rendering in the English idiom — 'hinder, or rather stop 
 the long walls being built.' 
 
 {c. ) lpo^6T|(rav — ' came up to the rescue against them. ' Poppo has a long 
 note upon the usage of this word. All the perplexity attending it will be 
 removed if we remember that ^otjS^ui is leallj §07j8bs iu, i.e., eifu. See the 
 question fully discussed in Sheppard's Tlieophrastus, p. 58, and add to the 
 instances there given a very clear one, us ttS;' reXovvn (not TeXouyra) irpo^ivei. 
 Be my Proxenus. On the same principle I have always maintained Beuip-qaaaa. 
 ToSfuov 6iJ,fi.a, CEdip. Col. v. 1083, (which Linwood says, 'vixintelligi potest,') 
 to mean, having witnessed with Tiiy own eyes ; because deijOfyqaaaa — deoipbs odaa. 
 TravS'qpieC, i.e., all capable of bearing arms. Pop, refers to Clinton, Fast. 
 Hell., p. 417. The number of Hoplites when the war began was 29,000. See 
 ii. 13. 8irti SUX6(D<riv. This is said to be the ' conjunctivus deli- 
 
 berativus,' which occurs even after past tenses, cf. ii. 52; iii. 112; v. 65. 
 The explanation seems to me to rest upon the same ground as the perpetual 
 recurrence from the directa to the indirecta oratio. The mood, i.e., mode of 
 thought, is employed under which the question presented itself to the party 
 for the time being, and by this means greater vividness is given to the narra- 
 tion, 'to be at a loss to know by what means they must pass through.' 
 Kara 5v(j.|jia\iK(iv — 'in accordance with the terms of the alliance.' Kriig. cf. ii. 
 22 ; iii. 3 ; iv. 3 ; V. 6. |i€T6o-Tr]o-av, cf. i. 130 ; ii. 67, Krtig., who 
 
 refers concerning the faithlessness of the Thessalians to Bomel, Prolegg. ad 
 Dem. , p. 89, a work which I have not seen. 
 
 Chapter CVIII. — (a.) TavaYpo. rris BoicoTias. This collocation is of fre- 
 quent occurrence. See ii. 2, nXorafa^ t^s Boiwrias, ii. 25. M.ediivijv ttjs Aaxw- 
 viKTjs, and more particularly Arn.'s note on iii. 105. The town was built upon 
 a rugged eminence upon the north bank of the Asopus, near its junction vrith 
 the Thermodon. Plato, Menexenus, p. 242, speaks of it as only a drawn 
 battle, but this is only a rhetorical flourish, and cannot invalidate the honest 
 testimony of Thucydides. It was, however, so little decisive that the Peloi 
 ponnesians obtained no advantage beyond the opportunity of an undisturbed 
 retreat over the ridge of Geraneia [Grote, v. p. 441]. Most chrouologers, 
 includiag Clinton, place the battle in e.g. 457. Kriig. makes it, as Diodorus 
 has it, one year earlier. The latter speaks of two battles, but there is no 
 ground for supposing him to be correct. S€vSpoTO|ji^o-avTEs, a rare 
 
 word. Cutting down the fruit and timber-trees implied ravages of other 
 kinds. The Scliol. therefore explains t^v yrjv Tefidvres. Poppo quotes Livy, 
 V. 24. 'Io-8|j.oii, sine artioulo, cf. ch. 62. dirfjXOov, 
 
 after having made a truce for four months, says Diodorus, xi. 80. 
 SeuT^pc^ Kai lltiKoo-TTJ, B.C. 456, Clinton, p. 255. The extreme precision of the 
 date marks, says Grote, the strong impression it made upon the Atheniaii 
 mind. , 
 
 (b.) OlvQ<|)«Tois. Schleiermacher, on the passage in the Menexenus, sup- 
 poses this name to denote some spot famous for its vines — ' The vineyards. ' 
 So, too, Bl. But localities often derive their names from such attributes : the 
 descriptive term becomes appellative, cf. roils 'Peiroils, ii. ig: and fronl th& 
 
 I 
 
114 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. IBoox : 
 
 absence of the article Krug. believes this to be the case in the present instance 
 T'EpiElXov — lit. 'stripped the wall from aroundit.' Ci.rou dWov irepiripirifji^mv, ii: 
 II. Bl. I know not on what ground interprets, ' dismantled by removing the bat 
 tlements of the wall, and lowering it to a height practicable to be scaled by ai 
 invading force.' cKarbv AvSpas — ' Preeerant Locris nobiles e: 
 
 centum familiis, quorum nobilitas ex majoribus muliebribus deducebatur, ci 
 Polyb. xii. 5,' Goll. One individual, therefore, was probably selected fron 
 each of these. ri reCxi ~'''^ kavrSiv — to, |j.aKpd. See 90 c. Whei 
 
 the writer dwells upon an idea, reproducing it under various forms, for thi 
 pui-pose of more clearly identifying it, the defining article is naturally repeate( 
 in each definition. See Nuhes, v. 764, rijv \Wov rairtip — T-^jy KaM]v — ttiv Sia 
 <j>a.vri. Jelf, § 459, 5, thus explains the idiom: 'When two or more attri 
 butives are joined with a substantive, each of which has a peculiar force, thf 
 article is used with each. This is more rare where the attributives foUovi 
 the substantive.' u|j.o\<57i)crav, after a siege of nine months 
 
 ' The reduction of this once powerful maritime city marked Athens as mistresi 
 of the sea, on the Peloponnesian coast, not less than on the .^gean, ' Grrote. 
 Krilg. dates B.C. 458, Miiller B.C. 457. 
 
 (c.) irepi«XoVT£s K. T. X. I agree with Kriig., against some other com- 
 mentators, that these participles cannot, in this place, denote the condition under 
 which the surrender was made. They denote circumstance rather than condi- 
 tion ; when they had pulled down their walls, t&c, cf. diroSdyres Niirafap. . . 
 (TTTO^Scts ^TTOL-qtravTO, ch. 115. ir€pUirXcv(rav — with fifty triremes 
 
 and 4000 Hoplites [Diod. xi. 84]. ^sch. ii. 75, p. 38, names only 1000, 
 as the remainder were volunteers ; but perhaps there is some confusion with 
 ch. 113. Kriig. tJ> veiopiov. Gythium. XoXkISo. 
 
 A city of .^tolia, at the foot of mount Chalcis, and near the mouth of the 
 Evenus, it is now called Bapda-oppa. The Corinthians were at this time 
 occupying the city, just as they had Molycrium for a colony in Locris [iii. 102], 
 and SoUium in Aoaniania [ii. 30]. Diodorus informs us that Naupactus was 
 captuT'ed at the same time by the Athenians. Poppo. Iv diropdir» 
 
 TT)s ■vns. A sort of objective genitive, 'in a disembarhaiion in their cmmti-y,' 
 Jelf, § 464. 
 
 Chaptek OIX. — (a.) The narration is resumed from ch. 104. 
 tS^aL. On this word, to which Plato has given such a world-wide celebrity, 
 EjTig. remarks, ' Excepting Plato, the Attic writers seldom use this word ; it 
 is indeed almost unknown to their prose, yet Thucyd. employs it thirteen 
 times : in the sense of Gestalt, form or shape, only once, vi. 4, 6 ; elsewhere it 
 stands for Weise, way, manner or mode.' To this I can scarcely subscribe; as 
 form, i. e. , mental form, form conceived by the mind, is its original meaniog, so 
 I believe it may in most places be translated, e.g. here — 'many forms of 
 wa/ifare; ii. 19, iraa-av ISiav Trsipdaavres — having tried every conceivable form of 
 attach; iii. 81, racra ISia Bavdrov, death in every form, 'Plurima mortis 
 imago.' Virgil ; oh. 83, iraa-a IS^a KaxorpoTlas, vice in every shape; and so iii. 
 98, 112. In iv. 55 we have irapd t^k ivdpxovaav lUav t^s vapaaKeirii, cm- 
 trary to the form which their warlike preparations usually took — or am, imumal 
 type of warfa/re; vi. 4, SpcTavoeiSis riiv ISiai/ rb x^P^"", The place was scythe- 
 
Chap. IX O.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. II5 
 
 like in form, or shape ; vii. 29, precisely as iii. 81. Similarly in the Attic poets, 
 Mpav iijivuv Idiav, Ar. Ban. v. 382, another type of poetry ; and Aves, v. 
 993, tIs idia ^ovMiixaTot, what is the form of your plam ? what shape is it going 
 to take ? By keeping this, its true meaning in view, we shall, I think, be 
 better enabled to understand why Plato selected the word to express the 
 eternal type or form, of which all perishable things were the antitypes. The 
 interest of the word, the authority of Krug., and the explanations given in some 
 instances by L. and S. Lexicon, e.g., 'manner,' must excuse this long notice. 
 
 (6.) TTpovxt&pai — sc. TO. Trpdy/j.ara, cf. ch. 74) ^^i finem. 
 &X\(iis — otherwise, i.e., another way than the right one, uselessly, in vain, 
 cf. ii. 18 ; iv. 36 ; vii. 42. McYdpa^os may be the individual 
 
 mentioned, Herod, vii. 97, as holding a command in the fleet. Me7d/3ufos was 
 one of the generals of Xerxes ; he also commanded at Eurymedon, and must 
 therefore have been a person of some experience, see Herod, vii. 82, and 143. 
 Z(ainjpos was the man through whose self-mutilation Darius obtained possession 
 of Babylon, Herod, iii. 1 60. &vSpa Iliptnyv, ' So the Normans, 
 
 after the conquest, to their Christian name, added 'Norman' as a surname,' Bl. 
 A distinction from 'Mede' might be intended if we accept the parallelism ; 
 but the addition of dvSpa to the national appellative is common with all Greek 
 wi'iters. |i€Ta o-Tparias iroXXfis. Diodorus, ii. 77, says with 300 
 
 ships and 300,000 men. Ctesias, Persic. 33, makes the number 200,000, but 
 adds the troops, amounting to 300,000, which remained in Egypt. 
 \i,&\r[ eKpaTT^o-ev. We may estimate the rhetorical exaggeration and inac- 
 curacy of the later Attic writers, from the fact that Diodorus denies this 
 victory. npoo-wirCriSa. An island formed by two bi-anches of the 
 
 Nile, or, as Bl. thinks, by the Nile, and a deep canal, Herod, ii. 41. 
 
 (c.) 8J(ifivas — other MSS. juiyvas ?f. Krtig. eirl to€ l^jpov liroCT|o-e. 'II 
 
 les mit a sec. 'He left them high and dry.' Popp. of. ttoicix tikci ^aia, ^|u 
 ^e\av, cf. also Xen. Anah. i. 10, 9; v. i. ir. {juEipov, predicate 
 
 with iTrol7j(re, 'dry land.' Bl. says, I know no other example of iirolTjiTe 
 for IB-rjKe, but cf. iiro'fqaev ' jft.6ir]valov ii. 29, 'made am Athenian,' and ^705 
 KpivavTos, ch. 135. Siapds taken with Trij^'y; unnecessary, says 
 
 KiTig., cf. ir^fij X'^'-P'^po-'^^"-'-! i^- 24. 
 
 Chaptek ox. — {a.) iroX6|i'<i<roVT<v — ^by a sort of hypallage agrees with 
 irpciy/iOTa instead of ' k6T)valo>v. The exact six years are much disputed. 
 Clinton makes them commence, B. c. 455, cf. ch. 104. l(r<66T](rav. 
 
 Here again Diodorus betrays his exaggeration, by saying that the Persians 
 allowed the Athenians to return home unmolested, from admiration of their 
 valour. But why in that case, as Bl. remarks, should they have adopted the 
 dangerous and diificult route to Cyrene ? For i<7iS>6riaav is, cf. sup. loi a, 65 b. 
 'A|ivpTtttos. Not the Amyrtaeus who B.C. 414, i.e., forty years after this time, 
 revolted from Darius Nothus, and was succeeded by four successive kings, till 
 the Persians regained their ascendency under Ochus, sixty years afterwards. 
 The man here mentioned was reduced to submission, according to Herod., 
 though his son Pausiris was permitted to reign over the fen district, Herod, ii. 
 40; iii. 15 — ™s 'i\en, Herod, ii. 137, 140. They were situated between the 
 Canopic and Tanitio mouths of the Nile, and formed most of what was called 
 
 I 2 
 
Il6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 the Delta. Compare the stand, made in the marshes of Ely by the Saxone 
 after the Norman invasion. Cf. jEsoh. Persce, 39, 'E^elo(3aTol, va&v iphai, Aeivoi, 
 7rX^^6s T avapiS^oi. 
 
 (h.) Ik Toov'A6t|va£wv. Bekker conjectures 'ASijcfflj', but cf. with Knig. iv. 
 97. The reading of the text seems to me better than the conjecture, for it only 
 specifies — from the proportion contributed by the Athenians. |u|iHax(8os. 
 
 The allied force, a substantive as ii. 80 ; v. 36. Poppo. 'itryfiv — made the 
 
 shore, came to land, cf. iirh vixra Si axtiVTei. iii. 91. la-xo", Kdrecrxov, irpbaeaxop 
 are, as Duk. remarks, all properly nautical words, and the simple form taxit^, 
 axijcw, iaxov is generally found with a dative or the preposition h, cf ii. 25 ; 
 iii. 39, 33, 34; vii. 1. 'Insolentia sunt verba,' vii. 35. Poppo. 
 Kara rb M6v8irjo-i.ov Kepa;. The fifth mouth of the Nile, reckoning from tlie 
 most westerly one. It entered the sea near the town of Mendes, Herod, ii. 
 1 7, cf. Pindar, Frag. 89, iaxaroii NelXov K^pas. Engelman supposes that the 
 use of K^pas may be a reho of the ancient symbolism which represented rivers 
 under the type of a buU, cf. 'Tauriformis AufiduSj' Hor., and the remarks of 
 Arnold upon the broken horn of the Achelous, which was converted into a 
 Oomu Copi«. oxiK elSoTes, i.e., the crews, understood from 
 
 rpiripeis, ii. 83, 91 ; vi. 52 ; viii. loi. Poppo. 
 
 Chaptek CXI. — (a.) Bao-£\eios. Certainly not King of all Thessaly, as is 
 plain from iv. 78. Popp. therefore suggests that he was Tagus. But there 
 were several of these dominant families in Thessaly, the Aleuads for instance 
 who are styled kings by Herod, vii. 6, and appear to have ruled at Larissa. 
 But, as might be expected, history oasts but little light upon these early 
 Thessalian rulers. Orestes was, according to Wachsmuth, uncle of Antiochus 
 and member of a dynasty connected with the Aleuadae and Scopadee, which 
 had its seat at Pharsalus. The date of the expedition is very variously given. 
 Am. B. 0. 454. Uiodorus, mixing it up with those against the Phocians and 
 Locrians, after (Enophyta3, B.C. 457. Krug. agrees with Am., adding, 'in the 
 spring.' Clinton B.C. 455. irapaXapdvTES — after taking iip the 
 
 Boeotian and Phocian contingents. Kriig. who cf. the same word infra and 
 vii. 20. 8o-a |iT^ irpoiiSvTes. Popp. rightly fills up the ellipse, 
 
 So-a Kpare'iv iSivavro ij,t] irpoiSi'Tes — 'all they could made themselves masters of 
 without stirring far from camp,' cf. iv. 16, cjiuKdaaew r^v vriaov Saa p.^ dirofial- 
 povras. Krilg. adds da-ov fi^ XV'' Kaivuiv, (Ed. Tyr. v. 346. 
 girXwv — the place where their arms were piled, and consequently equivalent to 
 e castris (Popp.), but see the note on iii. 1. SirpoKTos— 'mrtoiiJ 
 
 effecting amything.' In Thuc, says Krug., always active. 
 
 (6.) (itrA 8J TaBra— i. e., in all probability, the following year, B.C. 453. 
 Krug. says in the same year. ras XlTiYas. See ch. 103. 
 
 vaOs— 6°, according to Diodorus, xi. 85; loo, according to Plutarch, Perides, 
 19, Kriig. Tois irpoo-|iC|avTas. Those who came into conflict with 
 
 them. The less veracious Diodorus declares that the Sicyonians came out Trac- 
 Sriiiel. SiairXeio-aVTCs ir^pav, to be taken together— *«»% aaiki 
 
 across, probably to Naupaotus. OtvidSas, a name from the wme 
 
 made in the district. In S. Acarnania, on the right bank of the Achelous. 
 Leako supposes that it is identical with Trikardho, or Trlkardhocastro, a larg? 
 
Chap. 113.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. II7 
 
 modern city. This, says Poppo, is one of those states which is always indi- 
 cated by the name of its inhabitants. Cf. ii. 102, iii. 94, iv. 77. Such, too, is 
 the case with Leontini. From these we must distinguish such names as Veii 
 and Gabii, which always stand for cities. Cf. note on ch. 107 a. 
 
 Chapter CXII. — (a.) SiaXiirovrtov Irmv rpimv. The five years' truce, 
 therefore, according to the general computation, commenced B.C. 450; accord- 
 ing to Krilg., summer B.C. 451. Grote points out that the truce was probably 
 concluded by the influence of Cimon, who was anxious to carry out the opera- 
 tions against Persia; while, on the other hand, Pericles would not be soriy to 
 see his rival removed from Athens (vol. v. p. 453). iroXejiov 'iayjov. 
 
 Elmsley refers to this passage in his note on Eurip. Heracldd. v. 924, ' iax^v 
 5' (i^pis. In his locis ax^'^^ idem fere valet ac ircujaaudaL^ quo sensu ssspe adhi- 
 bentur iax^ et ir^^^s . . . Noster locus fateor, ab his paulo diversus est. Quamvis 
 euim ben^ Grseca sit locutio ^irx^ '''"" ^oXi/iou cessavit a bello, non ideo tamen 
 constat Greeoos dixisse laxe" 6 irHKeixos, cessavit bellum. ' Bl. says, for direaxo", 
 there being an ellipse of eairov^, Matth. § 353. 3. Cf. Jelf, § 517. 
 *A}iupTaCou. Seech, no. We see from this that in the former chapter Thuc. 
 was anticipating the regular course of his narrative. peTairep-irovTos. 
 
 ' lUCTOTr^/iireij' = accersere, usually the middle /ieTairifiireadai,' T. K. A. The 
 difference I believe to be that medi^ voce the word signifies to send for as 
 something of our own, ' to send for as a right,' or ' a command/ in the active, 
 simply 'to send for as a request.' KitCov, in the south-east of 
 
 Cyprus, the birth-place of Zeno and ApoUodorus. K()J.<i>vos. It is 
 
 not clear whether of disease or from a wound. See Grote, vol. v. p. 455. 
 
 (6.) xnre'p — ' off Salamis,' according to our nautical nomenclature. Lit. hoMg- 
 ing over, because vessels seen from the land are neriapoi, or apparently sus- 
 pended upon the line of the horizon, Milton, Par. Lost, ii. v. 636. Cf i. 137, 
 viii. 95. &(j.a. Not to be considered, says Grote, as implying that 
 
 the battle, like that of Eurymedon, was a double one on the same day. 
 irdXiv. There is some awkwardness about the position of the word. I believe, 
 however, that it is only a slightly irregular usage for al ttclKiv eXdovaaL, — as we 
 might say the ships from Egypt back again. Popp. says, ' supple aTrexdpricrav 
 ut dicitur dvax^peiv irdXiv, ii. 5, and aiTTfkdov irakiv, iv. 72 ;' Gbll. al ^v A.ly6irTt^ 
 y-^Es i^ A-lyiwrov iXSoOffai, which I cannot think correct. ■n6\nu>v 
 
 k(rTp6.riv<j-av. A cognate accusative after a neuter verb, as if it had been 
 arparelav iffrpdrevcav. Popp. cf. ' BeUuiu militabitur,' Hor. Epod. I, 23, and 
 such phrases as irdcxre^s ipcarav, i. 5, avrapK-q d^aiv Ketcrdai, i. 37, Jelf, § 564. 
 irap^Scxrav A^X<t>°''S' Because, as Am. remarks, the noble Delphian families 
 were of Doric origin. a£6is — in their turn, denoting some action 
 
 strongly contrasted with, or opposed to, that which has been last mentioned. 
 The Phocians, according to Muller {Dorians, i. p. 262), had no real claim to 
 the management of the Delphian Oracle. ' There was a native nobility whose 
 influence over the oracle was very considerable (Eurip. Ion, v, 418), — so great 
 that they may have been considered to be the actual managers of it.' Bockh 
 (Public CEcon. p. 601, note) writes, ' The temple of Delphi was, according to 
 the agreement of the Greeks, an independent sacred possession, the chief manage- 
 ment of which was exclusively vested in the council of Amphictyons, and the 
 
Il8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 sacred assembly at Delphi ; but the Phooians were always putting in claims for 
 the direction of this temple, which they affirmed to belong to them, and that 
 they had even once been in possession of it (Died. xvi. 23), an assertion which 
 they also strengthened with the authority of Homer (/i. B. 518); and these 
 claims, according to Diodorus (xvi. 29), were brought forward in Olymp. ovi. 
 1, and assisted by the countenance of Sparta.' See also Grote (iv. p. 85). 
 T. K. A., following the American editor, has confused the references in this 
 place. Refer to ch. 118, iii. 121, and v. 18. 
 
 Chapteb CXIII.— (a.) The operations of Athens against the Persians are 
 here concluded. "With this is connected the famous controversy concerning 
 the peace of Callias or Cimon, supposed to have been made at this time with the 
 great king. Its conditions are represented to have been so unfavourable to 
 Persia, that the whole story is not unjustly suspected of having originated in 
 the rhetorical extravagance of the later Athenian Panegyrists. The Persians 
 were to abandon the military occupation of Asia iVTinor within three days' 
 journey on foot, or one on horseback, of the coast; or, according to another 
 account, they were not to pass the Halys to the west, or the mouth of the Bos- 
 phorus, and the Chelidonian islands. All Asiatic Greeks were to be left undis- 
 turbed and untaxed. Dahlman (in bis Forschungen) has devoted a separate 
 essay to the subject, in which the above view is maintained. He is followed 
 by Thii-lwall (vol. ii. p. 473, 4), who argues that the entire silence of Thucy- 
 dides — the vague and contradictory statements of later writers — the obvious 
 unconsciousness of the Persian court that it bad ever resigned its dominion 
 over the Asiatic Greeks — and the absence of all reference to any such treatj in 
 subsequent negotiations between the same parties, — abundantly prove that no 
 peace of the sort was ever made. On the other hand, Mr. Grote is less inclmed to 
 regard it as a fable ; he considers that some foundation for the story must have 
 existed in the circumstances of the time. It is impossible to give all his argu- 
 ments (see vol. v. p. 456-462). The point upon which he dwells most is, that 
 such a convention would only have been a recognition of the state of things 
 which really existed after Gimon's death. As such, it might easily have been 
 omitted by Thucydides, who lived in the actual fulness of Athenian empire, 
 because it would seem to him simply a matter of course, and because he was 
 striving to condense his narrative. But Isocrates and later rhetoricians, in 
 their anxiety to amplify the past glories of Athens, indulged in absurd exagge- 
 rations upon the matter, and have thus naturally thrown discredit upon it. 
 Demosthenes speaks in very positive terms of the existence of such a peace, e5 
 old' 6tl rhv \6yov toutov AKriKoarGj KaXXfap rbv 'liriroviKou Ta^TTjvT'^i' inrb wavTiiiv 
 6pvKoviJ,iv'r}v dpi)VTiv Trpea-peiacLvra k.t.X. De falsd Leg. % 311. 
 4'YY^vop.^vov. iyyiyvecrBaL is ^ intercedere,' as iv. iii, viii. 9, Herod, v, 92, 
 Kriig. He also connects fi^rk raSra with iyyepo/iimv, when an interval of time 
 after this had expired. It is possible also, of course, to take it with icTpaTeviray, 
 which is perhaps simpler, and is preferred by Popp., who compares ch. 114 
 and 118. Twv i|>o)Y<ivTO)v. The party of the exiles — i. e. , those who 
 
 had been expelled after CEnophyta. l(rTpaTru<rav. B.C. 447, Kriig. 
 
 B.C. 446. «s sKdoTois. Supply iffrpdrei/aav — with the contingent 
 
 as each severally had to furnish them. 
 
Chap. I14.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 19 
 
 (p.) iv KopuvECcj.. The name is variously given: h 'AXiaprlq., says Pausa- 
 nias, I. 27, 6; in Ae^aSelf, Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 4. Isoorates, irepl ^eijyovs, agrees 
 with Thucyd., as do Plato {Alcibiades) and Diodorus, Popp. The truth is, that 
 all the localities were very close together, and the battle may have extended 
 over them, as in the case of Mont St. Jean and Waterloo, the Tchernaya and 
 Traktir Bridge. Upon this, the first great blow to the Athenian ascendency,, 
 followed by so many disasters, see Grote, vol. v. p. 466. AoKpoC. 
 
 The Opuntian Locrians, says the Schol. As they had been subjugated with 
 the Boeotians, cf. 108, they doubtless rebelled with them. Tiis aiTijs 
 
 ■yviiiiiis — of the same way of thinking ; i. e., the same purpose to revolt. Cf. for 
 the construction, Jelf, § 518, i. Totis yhi 8Utj)66ipav. Amongst 
 
 them, Tolmides himself. 
 
 (c.) oi dXXoi irdvTes. Both Arn. and Popp. interpret this to mean the 
 Loorian and Phocian exiles, with perhaps those from Euboea. But Kriig. con- 
 siders that oi (SXXot can only be Boiwtoi, jcaT-eXW^res does not, he says, belong 
 to oi BXKoL, and the sense is — The Bceotiam exiles upon their return home^ and oil 
 the other Boeotians became independent again, i. e., with all the other Boeotians. 
 Cf. iii. 62 ; iv. 92. Heilman, the German translator, took this view, so, too, 
 Dale, and the last German translator [Engelman] ' Die Verbannten der Booter 
 .... als auch die iibrigen alle,' &c. Grote's remark is just, that probably, as 
 was the case with the Laoedsemonians at Pylos, the captured Athenians be- 
 longed to the best families in the state ; otherwise they would not have con- 
 sented to such unfavourable terms to recover them. 
 
 Chaptek CXIV. — (a.) Eifpoia aireo-ri]. B. c. 445. Kriig. B. 0. 446. 
 SiapEpijKoTos a,iT<^. The construction is thus varied, for the purpose of more 
 clearly marking the time. After Pericles had already got across, news was 
 brought to him. NioraCav. See above, ch. 103. Miiller, Dorians, 
 
 ii., p. 171, gives a short account of Megarian politics. After the democratic 
 revolution which had united the place to Athens, the nobles returned, con- 
 quered the people in battle, restored an oligarchy, and filled all public offices 
 with persons who had fought against the people. This return probably caused 
 the revolt. See note on ch. 103. 
 
 (&.) 0ptd>^€. Sch. is ri Opidffiov iriSi.oi'. Cf. ii. ch. 19. A well-known 
 battle ground, as appears from Herod, ix. 7. Leake fixes the locality on the 
 Sandiforo, or Eleusinian Cephisus about three miles above Eleusis. On Pleis- 
 toanax, cf. supra, ch. 107. rh irXtov — as ^s rb ttXcTov, ii. 21. 
 
 aTri)(iiipr\(rav. Because it was thought that Pleist. x/j^/iacri Treiffd^pai t^v 
 &vaxil>pii)<Ti.v, ii. 21. It was Pericles, says Plutarch, who bribed him. Grote 
 supposes they were too weak in force to venture further. Kare- 
 
 (TTp^^avTo ircto-av. Therefore it was hitherto in part unsubdued, Kriig. See 
 Aristoph. Nubes, v. 213. KareorT^o-avTo — settled by convention. 
 
 The Latins said both ^pactione constituerunt' and composuerunf, Pop. Cf. iii. 
 35. 'Eo-Tiatas. The Athenian settlers subsequently received this 
 
 name, and were also called 'Qpelrat., as the place, says the Scholiast, was after- 
 wards called 'ilpios. Plutarch, Pericles, a. 23, ascribes this treatment to the 
 fact that the Hestiseans had put to death the crew of an Athenian trireme. The 
 
130 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Athenians would gladly avail themselves of any such pretext to establish a mili- 
 tary post in the island upon which they could rely. 
 
 Chapter CXV. — [a.) o-irovSas. The famous thirty years' truce. In the 
 spring, B.C. 445. See Grote. 'Axatav. A question is raised 
 
 which it is by no means easy to determine positively, whether the province of 
 that name be meant, or some town in the occupation of the Lacedaemonians. 
 Authorities are pretty equally divided. Manso, GoUer, Poppo, and Kiniger 
 decide against the province, principally because no mention has been made by 
 Thucyd. of the acquisition of it by Athens ; because 'Axafav is coupled both 
 here and in iv. 11 with other towns ; and in the last passage the demand of 
 Cleon from the Lacedaemonians, a-woiovvai 'Axi'^olv, seems very inappropriate 
 language as applied to a country not regularly in their possession. On the other 
 hand, Mr. Grote (vol. v. p. 475) has no doubt that the province is meant, for in 
 ch. Ill we find that ' the Athenians had acquired Achaia as an independent 
 ally.' Arnold, from the political circumstances of Achaia, shews that it must 
 have been alienated from Lacedsemon, and therefore believes it to be meant in 
 this place. Bloomfield also entirely coincides, quoting Aristides, i. p. 157, irSv 
 rb 'Axo,'tKOv. Thirlwall raises no doubt, but assumes that Thucyd. speaks of the 
 country. Engelman, the last German editor, follows on the same side, and 
 explains a-rroSovvat (iv. 21) as a sort of zeugma applied to- both the province and 
 the towns in the same sentence. I cannot pretend to decide between such dis- 
 putants, but would remark that when Mr. Grote speaks of ' acquiring Achaia 
 as an independent ally,' he builds a large superstructure upon the words vapa- 
 Xa^dvTes' Axaiovs (ch, ill) which can only mean having taken with them certain 
 Achceans. It seems strange too that Thucydides should have omitted to give 
 an account of this acquisition by Athens, for we must remember it would have 
 been directly connected with his main subject, and he is elsewhere veiy particu- 
 lar in specifying alliances. To speak of such an important territory precisely 
 in the same rapid way as of some small Spartan garrisons, TaCro yap e'xov 
 JLeKoTrovP7j(rl(av, is not explained to my mind by saying that the Spartans con- 
 sidered all within Peloponnese as their property — certainly they could not con- 
 sider it so in the same way ; and on similar grounds I should doubt whether in 
 grave proposals for a peace, dTroSoPpat would be applied to an allied country, 
 because it had been used of a garrisoned town. No argument can be grounded 
 upon iirobovvai., to restore, because it is said of all claims. See the long note, 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. xviii. p. 1 76. It is, perhaps, right to add that 
 Mtiller who, in the first edition of his Dorians, expressed a belief that some small 
 town of the Megaridwasintended, appears in the second to have changed his mind. 
 Kriig. conjectures that 'AXfaSa (ii. 56) may have been originally in the text. 
 
 (6.) ?KT(j) 8t€i. In the beginning of spring, B.C. 440, Knig. Pop. says 
 B.C. 441, as he places in B.C. 440 the expedition of Pericles mentioned inthe 
 next oh. Karcpduv — made an outcry against the SamioMS — the word 
 
 implies accusation, of. i. 73, v. 45. Tf|v iroXiTcCav. At that time 
 
 m aristocratioal one, Krtig. 
 
 (c.) rS>v S^ Sa|i£uv — ijo-av -yap Tives. On the construction of. Jelf, 
 5 78'5' 6' Sd|iov. This island appears to have been the most power- 
 
 ful of all the allies of Athens, paying, like Chios and Leebos, no tribute-money, 
 
■Chap. 1 1 6.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 121 
 
 but fumisliing ships and men. That Pericles undertook the war at the inter- 
 cession of Aspasia, who was a native of Miletus, is a mere scandal, Grote, vi. 
 PP- 34» 35' Twy 2a[Ji£tov depends upon rives. See i. 'ji. i, Kriig. 
 
 Kefer to note, rocs Swaroirdrois — the most powerful members of the aristo- 
 cratical party. The term ^v/xfiaxi-av only applies to Pissuthnes, Kriig. 
 eiriKovpous — probably * mercenaries, ' as the word generally implies. 
 eTTav^o-TTjcrav. -Kriig. contrasts 6.irbaraffLS with ^iravdarao'is. The first is 
 simply revolt, the second is insurreclion, implying, I imagine, an armed assault 
 upon the opposite party. twv irXeCo-rmv. Kriig. observes that 
 
 Valla has not translated these words, but that if genuine we must suppose that 
 some of the democratical party made themselves masters of a stronghold, and 
 maintained themselves there. Tois fip^oVTas. Not military only, but the 
 
 civil officers left behind by Pericles, as iirlaKoiroi or (piXaxes. See Bockh, Public 
 (Econ, of Athens, Krug. See Xen. de Rep, Athen. i. u. 14, 18, and Grote, vi. 
 4, 8. <nj)£<riv, i. e. rols "Zai^lois, so (t^Ss in a relative clause, iii. 3, Kriig. 
 
 BuJdvTioi. See oh. 96. Byzantium came under Athenian dominion when the 
 conduct of Pausanias at that place induced the Lacedsemonians to resign the 
 command of the confederacy against Persia. But as it still retained its Doric 
 institutions and character,it seems to have taken the earUest opportunity of free- 
 ing itself from Ionian domination. It was, however, compelled to submit again 
 at the fall of Samos, cf. 117. 
 
 Chapter CXVI. — (a.)raX% cKKaCStKa. The 16 which remained, after sub- 
 ■tracting the 44 mentioned from 60. Cf. al etKoa-t, infra. Wljen any definite 
 part of a fixed number is specified the article is used. irepia'y- 
 
 YEXXoSo-ai PonBeiv — carrying round in all directions the message to come u]i to 
 aid. The infinitive stands here as in the passages quoted by Kriig. ii. to, ii. 
 80, iv. 8, V. 54, and, as in the above version, agrees with the English idiom. 
 ScKaTov airoS. Of these nine others the poet Sophocles was one. 
 o-TpaTnoTiSes. ' Transports.' They were heavy and not fit for maniBuvres, con- 
 sequently they were rarely, if ever, employed in action, arparciliras Siyovcrai. rds 
 liiWovras rre^oixax^c", says the Schol. See vi. 43, and Xen. Ilellen. i. i, 36. 
 Kriig. remarks that the combination of two datives, as in this place, is not 
 ■unusual, i. 81, ii. 92, iv. 11 ; even three are found, iv. 129. 
 
 (J.) Tpi<rl TcCxeo-i. Mr. Grote says ' a triple wall.' A twofold wall, one to 
 -keep in the besieged, and another to keep off a relieving force, is conceivable. 
 But three walls of circumvallation seem absurd ; neither can I call to mind any 
 similar case. Kriig. is induced to suppose that three walls, one on each side of 
 the town, except the sea-side, are indicated. - I scarcely think that Thucyd. 
 would have called such a Trepireix'"'" ' three walls. ' As reixos is sometimes ' a 
 fort,' might not the rplai. reix^ai refer to three detached forts, built in com- 
 manding positions, and so connected by lines as to serve the purpose of a 
 blockade ? I see Bloomf., in his last edition, suggests the same thing, and adds, 
 what certainly is some confirmation, that the Schol. explanation is ruxi- 
 
 (c.) dirb Twv e<f>op|xoii<ruv — ' as a detachment from the Jilochading squadron.' 
 I do not see why the use of the preposition should have been thought so singu- 
 lar. Iirl Kavvou .Kal KapCas. To Caunus, as the spot where he 
 
133 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Boot I. 
 
 expected to meet the enemy, but also towards Caria generally, because he did 
 not kaow where he might fall in with them. Am. Kriig. quotes ottJ toO 
 BovSSpov Kal TTis SoKaiuvos, iii. 51. Kal is not here disjunctive, and Pop. well 
 remarks — non opus fuit scribi Kal ttjs fiXXijs 'Kapla.s. See 'Chrysippus et Stoioi.' 
 Cic. Tusc. iv. 5, g, where Davis has selected several examples, II. t', 63. "Bk- 
 Topi Kal Tpiii<rl, iii. 33, iv. 36, vii. 65. eo-a-y-yeXfl^VTcov. This appears 
 
 to agree with the genitive of the following noun, instead of standing in the gen. 
 sing, absolute — when theij were reported, not when it was reported thai they'. 
 Jelf, § 696. 3, quotes this passage, apparently classifying it under those, where 
 Trpdyfiara, or some indefinite word is understood. He illustrates by the Latin 
 'cognito,' for postquam cognitum erat. See SrjXwd^vTos, i. 74- 
 "^ofvicrtrai vffes — a Phoenician fleet. Mr. Grote, assuming the truth of the con- 
 vention of Callias (see last ch.) supposes that Pissuthnes had never any inten- 
 tion of violating it by really bringing up these ships (ri. 37). iir' 
 avToiJs — * to their assistance,' i. e. the Samians ; had the Athenians been meant, 
 iii-l ir0Ss ' against themselves, ' would have been used. As Kriig. remarks, we 
 should rather have anticipated irap' ai)roi)s, or irpbs auroiJj, but eirl surely may 
 be supported. Kriig. says nothing hinders us from connecting airoM with the 
 Athenians, as ^(ra77eX9^i'ru;' represents the tense of the finite verb; and it is 
 possible that he may be right. Iirl ras $. to fetch the Phcenicians. 
 Stesagoras was a Samian. 
 
 Chapter CXVII. — {a.) iv tovtcj — during the absence of Pericles. 
 a<|>pdKTij>. When a fleet was for any length of time drawn up on shore, it was, 
 as may be seen from many instances, protected bj^ a palisade or craiipujcta. Cf. 
 vi. 66, vii. 25. This precaution appears in the present instance to have been 
 neglected, the Athenians thinking it enough to keep some 'look-out ships' {7a! 
 irpoipuXaKiSa^) moored at a little distance seaward. When these were captured, 
 by the sudden onset of the enemy, the Athenians were compelled to launch the 
 ships on shore in detachments as they best could, and were thus easily beaten in 
 detail. It was in a somewhat similar manner that they lost the great battle of 
 -i^gos-potami. Remark the present participle dvTavayop.4vas — as they were 
 launched to meet them. 
 
 (5.) 0ovKvSfSov. I think we must understand Thucydides, son of Melesiaa, . 
 the successor of Cimon at the head of the oligarchical party, and the rival of 
 Pericles, even though his return from ostracism has not been mentioned. 
 Grote, vi. 38, says there is no evidence on either side, by which we may deter- 
 mine whether it were he or no, and favours the idea that a third Thucyd. is 
 meant. The negative evidence that nothing is said to mai-k his distinction 
 from the leading man of Athens, though he bore the same name, is, I think, 
 evidence enough to prevent us from imagining a third Thucydides. For a 
 very good account of him, see Grote, vol. vi. p. 20. 
 
 (c.) Ppaxcfav — ' insignificant,' "Krug. , probably so, but the notion ie derived 
 from the fact that they were only able to maintain it for a short time. 
 6)10X07(0., on terms, i. e., they did not surrender at discretion. 
 Ka9^XovT6s — SdvTts — irapaSdvTes. These participles, as generally ' sine arti- 
 culo,' conditionate the finite verb with which they are connected, i.e., these are 
 the conditions upon which they ' vpoanx'^P'V"'-''' fot avoXw66'Ta. 
 
Chap. I] 8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 133 
 
 ' The expeiises of the siege.' These have been variously estimated : 1000 
 talents, according to Isocrates [15, in], 1200 says Corn. Nepoa. [Timoth.^ 
 But these writers were sure to exaggerate. On the other hand, the 200 men- 
 tioned by Diodorus [13, 28], is evidently under the truth. Diodorus, as Kriig. 
 says, most probably wrote 3000. Kara xpi^vovs, the distributive 
 
 use of Kai-d — at stated times. Cf. Kara TriXeis, ch. 119, and the like, KaraKti/jias, 
 II, Jelf, § 355. I, and 629. From the narrative here given, Mr. Grote draws 
 several inferences in favour of the Athenian administration of their empire. 
 None of the dependent allies except Byzantium joined in the revolt. Therefore 
 they could not have been much oppressed. It is more than doubtful whether 
 the Athenians renewed the democracy. Therefore they did not force this 
 forni of government in cases where the natural tendency of the parties ran the 
 other way. The conduct of Athens to other dependencies, e.g., Melos, might, 
 perhaps, induce us to suppose that there was something in the great power of 
 Samos, and the particular position of affairs, which rendered a mild policy in 
 this case preferable. The student must remember that when in this war 
 Samos applied to Sparta for aid, the Corinthians prevented the latter from 
 stirring, by maintaining the principle that every state had a right to punish its 
 own recusant dependencies. Hence the extreme exasperation felt by the 
 Corinthians against the Athenians, for violating this same principle in the affair 
 of Oorcyra and Epidamuus. See the Corinthian Speech, ch. 40. 
 
 Chapter CXVIII. — (a.) ov irqXXots Sreo-iv. The history now proceeds 
 from ch. 88. The Corcyrean quarrel began B.C. 436, and the thirty years' 
 truce was concluded B.C. 445. Therefore the KepKvpa'iKd took place about four 
 years after the reduction of Samos. Seech. 34-1; 5. On the affair of Potidaea, 
 see oh. 56-65. Iv ?T€a-i ir€VTif|KOVTa |id\icrTa. At the utmost, 
 
 says Dobree, from the departure of Xerxes, Olymp. Ixxv. i, in the autumn, to 
 the Lacedemonian invasion, Ixxxvii. 2, not more than forty-nine years can be 
 computed. From the night attack on Platsea, the first overt act of the war, 
 there are only forty-eight. Popp. rejoins, that the war is dated from the irrup- 
 tion of the Thebans into Plataea, see ii. i, and that the qualifying expression 
 /idXuTTa is used. This I consider quite sufficient justification of the language 
 of Thucydides, more especially as Cicero [quoted by Kriig.] translates fidXiaTo, 
 h J fere. Ad Attic, vii. 11. 3. The present instance seems to me fatal to the 
 theory elaborately maintained by Peile, that ixoKutto, always means to the full. 
 Refer to note upon the word, ch. 13 c. lYKparecrT^pov, as h/KparCis, 
 
 is used in ch. 76. «irl |j.^-ya Swdfieus. As ^Tri ii,iya Icrxios, 11. 97. 
 
 See Jelf, § 443 b. The idiom rather belongs to the Epic and Ionic forms of 
 speech. 
 
 (6.) Iirl Ppaxv, to a slight extent. I do not think that Dale is right in fol- 
 lowing Bloomf., who interprets /or ffl sAort <ime. Neither do I consider T. K.A.'s 
 m a slight degree, an accurate rendering of the preposition. Kriig. 's quotation 
 bears me out, ttjs dpnjplas iirl ^po.x^ KLvrjddaTjs. Dion. Trepi Ijvpd., 14. p. 
 163. rh irX^ov Tov \p(5vov. Popp. remai'ks that Tdv trX^ova, or 
 
 ttX^oj toO xp^^ov is 'magis Thucydideum.' Nostrum tamen non falsum. This 
 is corroborated by Kriig. from rb ttX^oi" toO x'^P^o", iv. 4. (i^ Tttx«is. 
 
 On this unusual /lij Poppo remarks, ' Adnotandum ju^ quod apud partidpium 
 
1 24 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 causale, rarius legitur in soriptis Atticorum, velut Demosth. c. Bmot. de nam', 
 § 3Si saepiiis apud communis dialecti scriptores.' KrUg. agrees so far as to 
 say that oi5k is positively required by Sfres, except tliat in this case the influ- 
 ence of the infinitive justifies /iij — an explanation which itself requires to be 
 explained. The broad distinction between the two negatives is, that oi simply 
 and directly denies a fact, or proposition ; while /itj denies in reference to some 
 conception formed by the mind of facts or propositions : it is entirely subjec- 
 tive, and expresses negation in the conceptions of the mind, not non -existence 
 in nature. If 01) raxeis be, ' not quicJc,' i. e., slow as an absolute reality, /lij 
 raxeh is, ' not conceived of under the category of ' quicle, ' ' those with whom the 
 notion of ' quick' was never connected. For practical purposes in collocations 
 like this, the difference of meaning is trivial, and not easdy expressed. ' See 
 note on /iij ^tt' Ayddif, ii. 17, and 22 d. oiKeCois. The Helot war. 
 
 See ch. 101. Miiller (Dor.) thinks that a war with the Arcadians is meant. 
 But considering the antagonism between the two nations, I do not believe 
 oiKclois would in such a case be used, whatever might be the claims of Sparta 
 to an Hegemonia in Peloponnese. Tijs |v)i|j,ax'as. Abstractum 
 
 pro concrete. (ra<|>£s TJpETO — ' tvas manifestly on the rise.' This very 
 
 candid and positive statement of Thuoydides should be borne in mind by the 
 historical student, for the perusal of Mr. Grote's great work has a natural ten- 
 dency to obscure or obliterate the fact which it asserts. The ingenious plead- 
 ing of Mr. Grote would almost persuade us that Athens could never have been 
 culpable in her relations with Lacedssmon.* 
 
 (c.) oiKETi a,vaa■)^lrov liroioOvTO — ' considered it to ie a thing no longer to h 
 put up with.' So ii. 31. liri\€ipT)T4a — 'a thing to be attempted.' 
 
 See note, ch. 88. el iroXe|iov(ri.v . . . Scrrai. See Jelf, § 691. The 
 
 question is transferred to the direct form, as addressed to the god ; so in the 
 next chapter, el xph iroXefieiv. In the answer of the god, Bloomf. conceives 
 that the usual oracular ambiguity is latent in TroXe/toCirt, which is universal, and 
 might be applied to either party. It may be so ; yet, as Kriig. remarks, there 
 is no real ground for supposing that the oracle had a double meaning. It cer- 
 tainly was universally believed to favour the Lacedsemonians. Cf. rov Uov 
 XP'rio'avTOs Kal a{jrou inrotrxofJ-^you ^uK\ii\peadaL, i. 123, and similarly, ii. 54; and 
 Kriig. adds Plut. de Or. Pyth. 19. Grote, from the (is \iyerai., considers that 
 Tliucyd. was sceptical as to the fact of its ever having been given. 
 fi().€i.vov. A sort of cant phrase with oracles, cf. rh HeKaayLKOv dpyov dixemv, 
 Bloomf. refers to the common t!)s /cai d/xetvov, and Hesiod, 0pp. ii. 368, /i?)3' 
 dKWjjToiffi Kadi^iiv, oi yap Hixuvov. &kXi]TOs. Popp. quotes Her, 
 
 Od. ii. 18, ad finem, 'Hie . . . vocatus atque non vocatus a,ud.it.' The Lacedse- 
 monians considered the plague at Athens as exhibiting the fulfilment of the 
 god's promise. See ii. 54. 
 
 CflAPTEB OXIX. — {a.) aS9is refers back to tlie conferences mentioned ch. 
 87. 86t)0^VT€s <i)(rTe <|n)ij>£<ra<r8ai. Similar instances are cited by 
 
 Kriig., oiK iirelBovTO Sxttc Sx^aBai, and viii. 45, iUda<rKeii da-re Siyra ireUiu, 
 Matthias, Gr. Gr. § 629 c. expresses himself unable to satisfy his own mind 
 whether any, and what difference, subsists between Siare with an infinitive and 
 indicative. The former appears to me to be employed when the result might, 
 
Chap. 120.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 25 
 
 upon general principles, be anticipated as likely, and when, supposing that it 
 did follow, it might be accounted for a priori. With the indicative, on the con- 
 trary, &a-Te denotes, as a positive truth, that the result did follow ; it points to 
 a matter of fact, and is quite independent of all a priori considerations. In ii. 
 4, both occur in close connexion, SKrre die(p6elpovTo ttoAXoi, so that many actually 
 perished, a positive fact; and again, ^/fXet(Te ras xt5Xas wcrre fij] ^odov elvai, 
 'shut the gates, so as to allow of no egress,' a general result following naturally 
 from the previous act. So I had been accustomed to teach, long before I had 
 the advantage of seeing Mr. Shilleto's able paper upon this idiom, where a 
 similar doctrine appears to be laid down, but with very different precision and 
 accuracy. I shall consult the advantage of the student by referring him to 
 Mr. Shilleto's edition of Demosth. de falsd Legaiione, Appendix B. 
 Kal ToTC Kal TfiXcvTaioL, coming forward last upon this occasion as well as upon 
 the previous one (see i. 67, ad finem), in order to sum up, and urge with greater 
 force all the complaints against Athens. 
 
 Chapter CXX. — (a.) oiK &v 'in. As they had done before. See ch. 68. 
 (OS ov — as though they had not, implying that now they have. No difficulty 
 need be made about this, for the yap in xpv y^Pt immediately following, does 
 not give the reason for the foregoing statement, but, as often happens, for an- 
 other implied by or involved in it. Translate, ' [ We say blame] for those who 
 are leaders ought, while administering their own affairs fairly {i. e., without a 
 grasping spirit towards their neighbours), to be before others in attending to the 
 general interests, just as they are among others selected out of all to receive the 
 highest honours. This is what I have always thought the right interpretation, 
 though iv &XkoLS is generally interpreted according to the exposition of the 
 Scholiast in other things — i. e., iv irpoedplg. Kal roh TocoOrois. Krug. agrees 
 with the versioh I have given ; for ^| t<Tov he compares the conduct attributed 
 to the Athenians, iv. 6r, 4, irKeoveKTelv ; but the idea of 'fair dealing to 
 others' is the essential one contained in rh ttrov. 
 
 (b.) lvT]\XdYT]<rav — have had dealings with. The word contains the notion 
 of barter and exchange. See L. and S. Lexicon. ev irdpai — in the highway of 
 
 intercourse. The Schol. explains Trdpov KoXei rii iixvbpia. Corinth, from its situa- 
 tion between two seas, was eminently such an kinrbpiov, and is doubtless hinted 
 at here. So several cities are said to be iv irbpif, vi. 48. KaraKO- 
 
 |j,iS<iv — a conveyance of goods for exportation down to the coast, as is evident 
 
 from the elements of which the word is composed. dvTC\T]\(/i,s 
 
 the receiving of others in exchcunge. KaKovs KpiTots — bad judges, 
 
 because careless and uninterested. Bloomf. cf. irovripQ x/'Tjcerai Kpir-^, Eurip.. 
 Elect., 379. TTpdoiVTo. So read Kriig. and Poppo. Bekker prints 
 
 from some MSS. Trpoelvro, and Arn. follows him from deference to his judg- 
 ment. It is certain that the forms in -oivto are pronounced by the gramma- 
 rians to be peculiarly Attic, but, for this very reason, Bekker believes them to 
 have been frequently substituted for others by copyists. Such he imagines to 
 have been the case here. On such a point, without great special experience, it 
 is impossible to pronounce. 
 
 (c. ) el I'.'Jl dSiKoivTo. For ■fiv /iii dSiKw</rai say both Popp. and Krtig., not, 
 however, I presume, without a distinction of meaning. This distinction 
 
136 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 between ijv fiij cum Subjunctivo, and el /*?} cum optativo, is frequently misun- 
 derstood. It is not, for instance, quite correct to say, that the fonaer contem- 
 plates the realization of the hypothesis positively and certainly, the latter 
 vaguely and dubiously. The event expi'essed by the verb which follows ^v 
 may be less probable, than that expressed by the Optative after el, but the 
 former puts an alternative which experience will soon decide, or is likely soon 
 to decide, or perhaps has decided, one way or other : the later expresses a 
 less positive opinion as to the arrival of such an opportunity for decision, of. 
 ii. S, fl Ti.va Xd^oiev — ^c &pa riixwc' Twej i^aypi]iJ.4mi. The first case was quite 
 uncertain — if they should have the luck to catch any : the second supposition 
 must have been tested in the course of the night as the &pa shows — if, as they 
 had reason to a/nticipate, any had been captwred. Here T. K. A. asserts that 
 the mixture of the obliqua and direota Oratio is quite enough to account for the 
 change ! The Optative, therefore, is often employed by a sort of euphemism 
 for the setting forth of disagreeable or unwelcome alternatives, and the state- 
 ment of questions which are not in themselves pleasant to entertain, cf. el 
 dvTiffxotev, next ch. Again, as here, upon the same principle, generahzed 
 statements about undefined persons require el with the Optative : but, where 
 the statement is about definite, known persons, and an alternative to which it 
 is thought they will be subjected, ijv with the subjunctive is employed. See 
 CEd. Col., 1442, for an instance, iiv 11^ aSiKUvrai, in the event of their not 
 being injv/red. el fail iSUoii'To, supposing it should come to pass they are not 
 injured. (K \i.iv. The preposition denotes here, as often, out of, 
 
 i.e., after a state of peace, &c. irapao-xdv, as irapix^i, is sometimes 
 
 used impersonally, the neuter participle, like those .of other impersonals, stands 
 in the nom. absolute — 'when good opportunity offers.' Krug. quotes kutoi 
 KaXSis je (roi(j>poveiv irapeix^ croi, Eurip. Elect. 1080, cf. v. 14, 60, 63. 
 T)8d|J.€V0V. We might expect the plural after dvSpfaf (TOj^pdvuv — dyaduv. But 
 it comes to the same thing, for the singular Tiddfievov is as indefinite as the ante- 
 cedent plural ; so in English, it is the part of good men, and it is a good mam's 
 part. For the change from dyd6uv to dSiKovfiivovs, cf. Jelf, 675 a. dSiKEt 
 
 o-Oai — 'to he the subject of wrong,' or ddiKLa, just as I Cor. vi. 7, diarloix^ 
 /xaWov dSt/cetff^e, Popp. cf. TroXLopKeluBai, iii. 52. 
 
 (d.) A TjOTJxaJoi. Note the force of the present, ' if he continues in a stak 
 of apathy.' tvTv\l<^ irXcovd^wv — in the present case very much the 
 
 same as irXeoveKT&v, except that the termination in -dfoi modifies the way in 
 which the notion is predicated — is induced by success to exhibit too high preten- 
 sions. See Dem. 117, 5. iireiS-^ TrXeopd^eLv iirexeipovv Kai irepd tov fierpiov rh 
 KaffeffTriKbra iKivouv. airC<rT(^ — vihich is not deserving of trust. 
 
 KaKus vvwo-B^VTa — badly judged measures. Tu\6vTav — because thm 
 
 opponents chanced to be still worse advised. So we must tr., if with Bekker, 
 Poppo, and G oiler, we read the genitive Tvxovrav. This will, then, form one 
 of the rare instances where Tvyx'^"'^ occuj-s without a participle. See i. 32 c. 
 No one very clear case is found ; hut cf. Soph. Ajax, v. 9. Mov yb.p aviip 
 dpri Tvyxivei., which may be explained away by the occurrence of a participle 
 in the next line. Cf. also Electra, v. 46, 113. Some MSS. read riixovTa, which 
 GoU. prefers to retain. ?ti irKia. Omissum est verbum subetan- 
 
 tivum. Popp. irffUa^—have come roimd tohe. See note on 
 
Chap. lai.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 127 
 
 vepiiarqKeii, oh. 32. 6|iOLa rfj irCcrrei. This is the common 
 
 reading, retained by Bekker, though both Popp. and Krug. adopt Eeiske's 
 emendation oixolq.. I should tr., For no man in actual performance carries out 
 things upon the same scale, as that on which he speculates upon them in his 
 sanguine hopes [lit. conjidence], for we indulge ourfamcies in security, but in the 
 midst of apprehensions we fail in the execution, — i.e., so long as we are in a 
 state of security, we may frame what visionary schemes we please, but the 
 dangers which attend their realization disable our powers by the apprehensions 
 which they excite. The other (purely conjectural) reading, 6/j,oiq,, would be, 
 no man lays his schemes, and proceeds practically to execute them with equal con- 
 fidence, — lit. ' his confidence equal.' The meaning does not seem to me suffi- 
 ciently improved to warrant the alteration. The objection urged by Dale, that 
 TJJ TTicTTCi ought to be answered by tiJ ^pyif, is, I think, obviated by con- 
 sidering the nature of the latter noun and its use in Thucyd., where it is 
 so familiar as almost to assume an adverbial character. Indeed, we ourselves 
 say ' in practice,' instead of 'in his practice.' Cf. Jelf, 752, 2. Of. iv Kaipif, 
 at the proper time, next chapter. 
 
 Chapter CXXI. — (a.) a8iKov|x£voi. Sine articulo; therefore expresses 
 cause or condition, because we are suffering wrong. iftlpo^v — 
 
 ' Wahe up the war.' Eather poetical ; but it is not unnatural that an orator 
 should employ strong and Homeric language upon this point. Cf. lyetpe Si 
 tpiXoTTiv aiv/jv. II. X 213. Xenophon and Polybius imitated Thucj'd., as may 
 be seen in the citations of Bl. and Kriig. tcI 'irapa'YY<^o|''Cva. 
 
 This is the technical military term for passing the word of command along 
 (iraph) the ranks. See inter alia Xeu. Anab. Most commentators, &c., trans- 
 late as though it were tA irapayyeKd^vTa, losing the force of the present, which 
 is worth notice. For they do not boast of mere subordination, but of that 
 aptitude and training which enables soldiers in action to catch the word of 
 command as it is given, and act accordingly. 
 
 (l.) Iv A^<|>ois. Delphi must therefore have passed away from the 
 Phocians (cf. ch. 112), and have fallen again under Lacedsemonian in- 
 fluence. Sdveio-fia iroiTio-ciiievoi — ' having effected a loan.' The 
 temples were the banks and capitalists of antiquity. AH the provisions for 
 securing repayment of one of these loans from a temple, were almost as elaborate 
 as those of modern times. Cf. ii. 13. iiroXoPeiv. In Wi is con- 
 tained the idea, secretly 'or furtively withdraw. i>\n\ti\. Kriig. 
 doubts whether this is to be interpreted ' gekauft,' i.e. , purchased, mercena/ry, 
 or Kduflich? i.e., purchaseahle. Probably the orator meant that the ambi- 
 guity of the word should suggest the connexion between the two ideas. 
 
 (c.) oXto-KOVTai — cf. ch. 32. The perfect usage of the present. Metaphor 
 from capturing a besieged town. If it were not that the phrase has degene- 
 rated into slang, we might translate, they are sacked. At any rate, it means, 
 it is all over with them. el aVT^o^oiev. See note on d fir] ddUotifTo, 
 
 last ch. 8<j iroD — / suppose one may assume; I presume. The 
 
 «peaker enunciates a particle of absolute certainty, SiJ, and then qualifies it by 
 one of uncertainty, wov, as if he had said. With the utmost certainty, — at least, I 
 mppose we may say so. KaBaiper^ov — must be put down (lit. pulled 
 
138 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 down) iy our practice. I cannot see why D. should translate may he attained 
 hy us. The Attic usage is surely all the other way. Cf. XP^""^ icaOalpei. irivTa. 
 ^5Esch. Eum. 286, and ixotpa rbv (piaavra KaBeVKe, Ajax, v. 517. See also in a 
 sense plainly derivative from this, tA Meyapiai' tp7}<f>iafia KaBaipeiv, infra oh. 
 140. And Engelman has rightly, ' durch Uehwng lewaltigen,' and Zevort, 'nom 
 enleverons par le travail.* 
 
 {d.) xp^iiara. In refutation of the words of Archidamus, c. 80. Popp. 
 4s aird — without any immediate word to which it refers. Important, as I 
 have more than once observed, cf. 12 a, in reference to iii. 84. ovk 
 
 dircpoBo-iv — shall not faint or fail. The notion is that a fainting person 
 ceases to speak. In this sense aTniirov is njore common. It will be observed 
 that in this sentence oi twice follows el, whereas, according to the usual rules 
 of the language, p.^ would be required. The phrase 5eLvhv el is, however, a. 
 peculiar one, and really amounts to a positive affirmation — no doubt is at any 
 rate implied, and therefore el loses in a great measure its grammatical force. 
 'It would be hard that while their allies wont be found wanting (not 'if they 
 wont,' implying doubt), ' we shall not,' &c., the reasons which excuse the first 
 oi, are of course valid in respect of the second. Indeed after the sentence 
 had once assumed the direct form, p.^ would have been improper. Kriig., I 
 think, if I understand him aright, agrees with this view. ' el,' says he, 'is ex- 
 tinguished, because, as dpa shows, an independent question expressive of indig- 
 nation is introduced — 7;p,eh oi 5aTravir}(rop.ev. He quotes Lysias, xii. 36, 
 oijKovf SeLvbv el Toiis p^v arpar'^yovs davdrcj} e^Tip^iitKrare, to6tovs 5^ St; ... . oi)/c 
 &pa XPV foXdfetr^ai ; where also we might render — Is it not hard that ym 
 should have punished, ikc. Buttmann, in speaking of the passage (quoted by 
 T. K. A.), says the first oi is used because a positive and notorious fact is as- 
 sumed ; in the second clause the construction passes into the form of a question 
 implying surprise, and conveying reproof. ovk &pa 8airaWi<ro|iev— 
 
 'shall not, as it seems to he inferred, contribute our money.' avra, 
 
 sc. xp-iipara, cf. note supra. avxois TovTotg — hy this very rmmey of 
 
 our own, which, like the eagle's pinion in the Ai^vimKbs X670S, would be used 
 against us for our own destruction. Arnold surely is wrong in tr., in that vmj 
 part in which we are most sensitive ; viz., imr property. 
 
 Chapter CXXII. — (a.) oSol ToX^fiov, ' ways and means for carrying on ih 
 war.' So Tacitus — belli viae, An. ii. 5. dirrfcrroo-is — much con- 
 
 troversy has been wasted, whether or no this word can have an active sense, 
 e.g., withdrawal. I believe it cannot, but it surely comes to the same thing. 
 The speakers say, 'revolt of allies,' in general terms, not thinking it necessary 
 to specify how such revolt was to be brought about. It might be by their 
 intrigues, or by the inclination of the parties concerned. At any rate war 
 would give an opportunity for it, and it would, in either case, be equally dis- 
 astrous to Athens. 4iriT«ix">"|J.<is. The construction of fortified 
 positions either in, or close to, an enemy's territory, which may be used as a 
 ' point d'appui,' or basis for predatory and other operations against them. It 
 has been observed that this is an anticipation. The Peloponnesians never 
 thought of such a thing until Alcibiades put it into their heads. Then, how; 
 ever, they carried out the suggestion by fortifying Deceleia. See also ch. 142, 
 
Chap. 132.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 139 
 
 note. lirV pT]Tois, specified, and therefore definite, fixed rules, of. 
 
 ^Tri pTfiToh yipaffi, oh. 1 3. airbs d<j>' airov — forms its schemes 
 
 itself from itself to suit the emergencies as they arise. to irapaTv^- 
 
 Xaviiv. — pro re natd, the occasion as it presents itself. Iv & — sc. 
 
 TToX^iUifj — 6«op7TJT<i)s, without losing his temper. If we read airbv with Arn. 
 and Kriig., it ia perhaps best to connect it with dpyurdeis, 30 that the two 
 expressions exactly balance : Se who deals with it in good temper, and ffe who 
 puts himself in a passion about it. irraCei — stumbles, meets with an over- 
 
 throw. Bekker has accepted Dobree's conjecture, irepl airbv, stumbles over 
 himself, is the cause of his own failure. But in vi. 33, we have wepl i7(pi(Ti.v 
 aiiTOis TTTaicaffLV, and i. 6g, irepl aiirQ (T^dKivra, where Arn. quotes /i-J; irepl 
 MapSovlifi irralirri i] "BXXas, Herod, ix. loi. We should, therefore, expect the 
 dative here. 
 
 (b.) Kurd irdXiv. State by state separately, or rather against each state 
 sepcirately. d \i'f\ — If we do not all collectively and severally. 
 
 Every member of the confederacy raust individually exhibit its zeal : it will 
 not do to have some active, and some lukewarm. fivTiKpus So«- 
 
 Xc(av. We have t) dvriKpvs i\ev8epla, viii. 64, downright freedom ; but, per- 
 haps, T. K. A. is right in remarking that the absence of the article should 
 make a difference in our rendering, tr. slavery out-right, slavery staring us in the 
 face. evSoiairSfiTai. According to the etymology the word must 
 
 signify to be im a state of halting, or wavering between two opinions — Tr. it is 
 disgracefvZ to Peloponnesus that two opinions should ever be expressed about it. 
 I do not like Arn. 'a version, ' that the very name of slavery should be pronounced 
 as within possibility applicable to it,' nor D.'s, to be even mentioned as contin- 
 gent, cf. i. 36; vi. gi. Krilg. remarks that the word ia not uaed by Attic 
 writers. T^ipovvov irdXiv — Suffer a despot city or a usurping city to 
 
 be set up in, Greece. Upon the suppression of 'Tyrants' in Greece by the 
 Lacedsemoniana, see ch. 18, and the note there. 
 
 (c.) o«K iirfuv. We hnow not how such conduct gets rid of three of the most 
 calamitous things that cam befall a mam, or, clears itself from labouring under 
 one of the three greatest evils which can befall, want of sense, want of spirit, or 
 want of care. ov •yap Si\ — for surely ye do not escape these charges 
 
 by talcing refuge in that which has da/maged far more persons than anything 
 else, contempt of your enemy, we mean, which from the ruin it has inflicted upon 
 tmmbers, has come to be called by a name expressing the very opposite, contemp- 
 tible wcmt of sense. (laXaKCa, is generally translated ' cowardice, ' but 
 surely this is strong language applied to Spartans, it is rather "want of energy 
 and exertion." It is impossible in our language to express properly the play upon 
 the words KaTaipp6vri(ns and a<j>poaivq. Dr. Donaldson [New Cratyhts, p. 184], 
 has observed that the present passage proves the simple o as well as ava to 
 be a direct opposition to Kard. I have translated the passage as I have always 
 understood it. But it ought to be mentioned that another view of it is accepted 
 by T. K. A. and Dale. ' For you assuredly had not escaped these when you 
 ietooJc yourself to that contempt which has injured so very mamy,' i&c. This, I 
 consider, contains too direct a charge against the Lacedaemonians, whom they 
 wished to conciliate ; and, secondly, the Lacedsemonians had not so much 
 
 K 
 
130 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I, ■ 
 
 despised the growing power of Athens, as overlooked it from AmffTla and 
 d/iadla. See oh. 68, and on itppoaivri, Jelf. § 475 a. 
 
 Chapter CXXIII. — (a.) rots iropo4<ri poT)8ovvTas — coming to the aid of 
 is they are; making the test of. Of. Livy. Quae fortuna coegisset ita 
 fieri, eandem cogere tueri factum, Livy, xxiii. 35. The itrl in the following 
 verb implies the bestowal of additional pains and trouble. Krug. considers /leX- 
 MvTuv with lireira suspicious. It is not necessary for the sense, but helps the 
 antithesis of sound ; and he quotes himself, t4 Iffrai oi toO Ijreira toO /i4\\optos, 
 Plato, Farm. 141 e. tos aperds. Both Popp. and Kriig. give the 
 
 same meaning as to aperii, ch. 33, i.e., 'eccistimatio virtutis,' yowr character for 
 valovr. Cf. the Latin use of Iwus, Icmdes, for honores, e.g., pro laude merentis, 
 Hor. Ep. i. vii., and so, indeed, 'honowrs,' in English. 
 
 cl &pa — if peradventure. Ikt^Bt). Though /CT(£o/iat be deponent 
 
 this aorist is passive : so is ^cpdrfv from iirrofiai. Tr. 'Tis not right to lose m 
 the day of abundance, what has been won in the time of difficulty. kot4 
 
 TToXXd — on mamy scores. &i|>£\Ca, a sort of instrumental dative 
 
 'from the benefit thereby accruing to them.' The weakening of the Athenian 
 power, would free them from oppres.sion, and in many cases from tribute. 
 irapapepdLa-Sai — to have been tramsgnssed. Kriig. points out that the perf, 
 pass, from ^i^a/MU occurs in other compounds, fu^j3e/3d(rfci, viii. 98, and iva- 
 ^e^dfievos, Xen. ffipparch. i. 4. The aor. ^vp,padiivai, iv. 30, and dxajSa^^rai, 
 Xen. irepl lirir. iii. 4. Elsewhere the form is not found in Attic writers. 
 
 Ohaptek CXXIV. — (a.) viropxov. D. tr. since on every 1 
 good reason for going to war. But I am surprised that he has not seen how 
 {nrapxov has direct reference to iirdpxovffi, c. 122. Since you have excellent re- 
 sources coming in on all sides for war. Cf. iii. 62. virapxov ye ip.'iv, at least 
 when you had the resource. ti-ntp — if, as we must assume, cf. supra 
 
 69 b. It is natural to conjecture Tainh for raOra, as I had myself done without 
 seeing that Reiske and Goll. had done the same, but the latter now allows and 
 I beheve with truth, that raSra is right. Am. well explains — 'We advise this 
 war for the interest of the whole confederacy, and it is for their interest if it 
 be admitted as most certain, that this measure is alike for the benefit of states, 
 and of the individuals who reside in them. ' Both raCra and rdSe refer to jroXe- 
 (aew. So says Popp. c. 143, ' raSra et rdSe de eMem re dicuntur.' 
 o? irpoTtpov. The opposite of which was formerly the case. oi5 refers to the whole 
 clause. See, for the fact, v. 9, vi. 77. vii. 5. viii. 25, Popp. (lereXeeiv 
 
 T^v eXeuBepJav — to ensue the freedom of the rest, asiatheE.V. of the New Test., 
 ' seeh peace, and ensue it.' The Germans similarly say, 'Nachgelien der Freiheit.' 
 (6.) 0VK6T1. IvS^x.''"''*'" ^f ^ "" longer admissible ; it is no longer apossibk 
 case. Cf. ch. 140. 142. a(|>txSai — impersonal, that things have come to a strait. 
 Cf. is otav reXevT^v d0iKTo, vii. 75. 810I irXeCovos, sc. ■xpt''ov—lastmg 
 
 a longer time. kK iroX^|jiov . . . . d<})' ■f|ijfux£tts. The diflferent use of 
 
 the prepositions is well seen here, (k arising out of, and therefore following 
 from; irbfrom a regard to. iK is ever the material cause ; in d?ri the causal 
 notion comes from the primary local one — that which comes away from an object, 
 Ti\v Ka9i<rTHK.viav—the usurping, or de^ot city that has been set up in Greece. 
 
Chap. ia6.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 131 
 
 iiri — to the detriment of, 8iavoeio-6ai, so. &pxei-P — on this 
 
 use of &(7Te, denoting the natural consequence of what precedes, cf. supra 
 76 c. 
 
 Chapter CXXV. — (a.) a^ dirAvrcov. Kriig. remarks that such a use of 
 the preposition is rare with 6,Koiuv though not with /lavBdvciv — heard from the 
 lips of all. There is nothing strange in the omission of the article before 
 ■yviiifi.'qv, it belongs to the class of cases already noticed, cf. 8 a, and may be 
 illustrated by such expressions as ' shew cause,' &c., in our own language. 
 TO irXfjOos. ' The majority;' for, as A. remarks, it is said, v. 30, Kipiov dvai 
 6tl hv t6 ttXtjBos twv ^vfifidxi^J' ^'t}<pi(7'qTa.t. SeSoYii^vov — used abso- 
 
 lutely as the more familiar cases of ib^av, vapiirxov, &o. This would be scarce 
 worth noticing had not some copyists introduced SeSoyfiivov into the MSS. Cf. 
 with Kriig. dptfiUvov, i. 140, and elsewhere, yeypafifUvov, v. s6, irpocTeTayp.di'ov, 
 in Plato, and Jelf, 700. 2 a. i\ua% 8i k. t. \. This, I believe, refers 
 
 to /ir) etcai /liWriffiv, i. e. notwithstanding the resolution to make no dday in the 
 settlement of the necessa/ry preliminaries, not indeed a whole yea/r (one cannot say 
 a year), hut something less was conswmed. This was my own impression of the 
 meaning, but the editions with which I was familiar, A. and Popp., gave the 
 sense as the Eng. trans. D., does. A year, however, did not pass while they 
 were settling all that was necessary; but I cannot think that Thuo. would speak 
 of a year as a short time for the purpose. Kriig. seems to adopt the first inter- 
 pretation, and so does the last German trans. (Engelman), ' zwar hein Jahr, 
 aher doch nicht viel weniger.' 
 
 Chapteb CXXVI. — {a.) i^v (i.f| ti EO-aKovaio-i. Cf. 120 c. 
 TO fi.70s Ti]S 9iov. The abomination of the goddess, i.e. as it might mean in our 
 own language — the thing which the goddess abominated. cXavV€iv is 
 
 the regular technical term for the expulsion of persons {hayejs) so situated. 
 See QSdvp. Tyr. v. 98. KvXmv k. t. X. The simple and lucid way 
 
 in which Thucyd. has given this narrative, and its difference from his usual 
 sterner style (t6 ipo^epbv koKKos) struck the grammarians so much that they said 
 of it Moiv ^7^\a(re, see Grote (vol. iii. 108). The date of the victory of Cyloii 
 in the Diaulus, according to Corsini, diss. ag. p. 171 (Kriig.) was Olymp. 
 XXXV. dvetXev. The regular word for the answer of the oracle. 
 
 lirfjXBev. Several, and I believe the better, MSS. have kTrifKBov. This involves 
 the question concerning the real nature of the principle upon which the Greeks 
 combine a neuter plural with a verb singular., I believe it to be this. Neuters, 
 whatever may be their plurality in mere number, do not contain the notion of 
 separate individuality and agency. They are embraced by the mind 'en masse, ' 
 as a single whole. As they thus exhibit but a single operation, or action, the 
 verb denoting this action is put in the singular number. This accords with the 
 view taken by Coleridge, Tab. Talk, vol. ii. p. 61, that viz., neuters may possess 
 m/ulteity but not plwrality. From this he deduces the conclusion that neuters 
 pluralbeingmerelyo5;ec<s, have no proper smJ/ect-/onJior nominative. Dr. Donald- 
 son supports the same theory, regarding all such neuters as properly accusative 
 cases, and the verb with which they are connected as impersonal in usage. 
 " Apud GrsecoB neutra pluralia (i.e. accusativi, nam genus neutrum nominativo 
 
 K 2 
 
133 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 caret) verbo singulari apponuntur, ut to ffia rpix^i, i.e. curritur quod animalia." 
 Upon the same principle it is plain, as is here laid down, that there is no neuter 
 nominative singular. It may be true, as Coleridge says, that neuters have 
 ' objectivity' alone, yet I can scarcely admit that, because neuters do not pos- 
 sess a conscious metaphysical subjectivity, they cannot be made the subjects of 
 a grammatical proposition. The same mental tendency which, in all languages^ 
 ascribes masculine and feminine ' nomina' to things without life, and to S,iji\rj(a, 
 l/iij/vxa \4yei, 5ii t^s ij,eTa^opas [At. Rhet. iii. II. 3], might well be supposed to 
 sanction the subject- form, or nominative, as applied to a neuter noun. But neuter 
 plurals are sometimes followed by verbs plural, when the idea which they express, 
 and which forms the subject of the verb, may easily be divided in thought into 
 separate individualities and agencies, a case by no means so universal as Am. 
 imagines. Thus tIl fcDa rpix^i — living creatures rim, regarding them as 0, 
 single logical class : but we might have ri. fCa Tpixovaif, ' The creatwres an 
 rvMniing,' if the writer meant to describe several separate animals as doing so. 
 Here reference may be intended to the various &.yCiv£i of which the Olympia 
 cimsisted. At any rate this principle appears to me to explain the only 
 passages in which, so far as I remember, Thucyd. in this way couples a neuter 
 plural to a plural verb : e.g., ii. 8, xoXXd X67ia iXiyovro : here the diversity of 
 meaning or expression in the Xiyia, or, at any rate, their entire independence 
 upon one another is conveyed by the plural : v. 26, 6,ix<j>mipois a/i.apr'^ii.aTa 
 iyivovTo, the separate and distinct errors ascribed to either party would 
 naturally not fall under a single conception expressed by a singular verb. At v. 
 75, Kayjyeia iriyxayov ivra is a case which exactly, resembles the present one. 
 In vi. 62, iyhovro etKoai Kal ^Kardv rdXavTa^ the plural indicates the 
 several sums which together made up {iyivovro, amourUed to), the total. See 
 also, Jelf, § 385. KaT^a^E, according to Herodotus [v. 71], he 
 
 made the attempt without succeeding. <os eirl TupavvCSi. As they 
 
 would do who were striving to establish a tyranny, cf. Jelf, § 634, 3 a. 
 tI irpoo-^KEiv — had some peotdiar reference to hiinself, or approjyriateTiess to himr 
 self as am Olympic victor. In, KaTevoT)(r£ — any fii/rther, i. e., his 
 
 comprehension of the oracle's meaning went no further. Krug. says, however, 
 Kar^voTjae is, ' considered,^ hut ci. KaTevi-rja-ej ch. 138 b. On'O^ij/iTria veviKij- 
 KiTi, cf. Jelf, § 459. 5, Monk on Alcest. v., and on cis ivl, § 626. i, on^iri 
 TvpavpiSi § 634. 3, and eirl ^efivuv Qedv § 633. 3 a. 
 
 (6.) Aido-ia. ' Jovis MeiXtx'ow crebra apud veteres mentio,' Duker. Nor 
 was his worship confined to Athens alone, nor indeed the name to Zeus. As 
 it was celebrated iravirtiid, and without the walls, there would naturally be an 
 excellent opportunity for the execution of Cylon's plan. iroXXoC— 
 
 ma/ny of them not victims, hut sacrificial offerings, such as were cormtion in the 
 cowntry. These, as he goes on to explain, were cakes made in the shape of 
 animals, and offered by persons too poor to possess or purchase the animals 
 
 ■ themselves, Trip-ixaTa els fiiwv jxapiphs reTvirdiieva, Schol. Cf. Herod, on the 
 Egyptians, ii. 47. 
 
 (c.) liri.7i7VO|ji^vov — 'accruing,' 'leimg added to what went hefore.' 
 airoKpar. — with full powers. Arn. refers to Herm. Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 103, 
 who says that it is impossible to ascertain the manner in which, at this period, 
 
 -the ruling houses {yirri) exercised their privileges. The insurrection, however, 
 
Chap. 128.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. X33 
 
 witihout doubt was only a ooneeq^uenoe of their sanguinary enactments, and, 
 though they succeeded in overpowering Cylon, the perfidy with which they 
 acted precipitated their fall. Herod., it will be remembered, v. 71. 3, speaks 
 of the vpvT&veis tCov vavKpiptiip otirep he/xov -rbre Tois ' k.6-i]va,^ as the persons 
 concerned in these dealings with Cylon. They perhaps were the executive 
 power acting under the authority of the Archons. Engelmau's ed. supposes that 
 they formed a sort of college among themselves. Bahr ad locum Herod., Waoh- 
 smuth, § 436, Bookh {Public. Be. of Aih.), Schoman De Oomitiis, xii. xiii., all 
 treat of this difficult question. The younger student may refer to the Diet. 
 Antiq., Grote and Thirlwall. t<5t«. Because the power of the 
 
 Archons was limited by Solon. (|)Xailpci)S — *• e. /ca/cffis, or, as vulgarly 
 
 would be said, 'scurvily.' Poppo remarks that Thuc. elsewhere always says 
 0auXos, but never tfiaiXias. Upon such matters nothing can decide but the 
 'usus' of the time, with which truly rest the 'arbitrium, jus, et norma 
 loquendi. ' 
 
 (d.) a,viurTi\<ra.VTe%—' raised them up from their suppliant position.' As 
 Kriig. says, this is the regular word for inducing persons to quit a sanctuary or 
 asylum, cf. ch. 128, 136. eTriTeTpa|i|ievoi Tf|v <|>vXaK^v, cf. 'in- 
 
 soripti nomina regum.' \ivg. Eel. iii. 106. ' Suspensi loculos. ' Hor. &(. i. 
 6, 74. 4tro6v'/j<rKovTas — ow the point of death. 
 
 Iirl Twv (r^|j.vo>v — at the altar of the venerable goddesses. See Arist. Equit. v. 
 1311. KadTJffdai fiOL doKuJ 'ttltCov ai^vwv dewv. This temple, says the Scholiast, 
 lay between the town and the Areopagus. Join with Popp. iv tois (Soi/iois to 
 biaxpriiTda,i ; the latter word may be rendered — dealt with, dispatched, 
 aXi'Wipioi. 'roiis ci,iJ,apTdi>ovTas els roils iKiras iXiTijplovs lipatTKOv. Sch. on 
 Equites V. 445. iK rutv dXiTripictjv ai 0^^' yeyovivac rijs deoG. 
 lio-Tepov, i, e., ' when recalled by Cleisthenes.' Krug. avruv refers 
 
 to the Alcmaeonidse. 
 
 Chapter CXX VII. — {a.) trfiev — an unusual position for the word which, 
 as Kriig. remarks, always in Thucyd., follows the alleged cause. The later 
 writers however prefixed it. irpwTov — ' potissimum,' ' mainly.' 
 
 7rpocrE)(^evov oiru. This is an inversion of the way in which we should state 
 the idea, i.e., an Enghsh writer would say, attached to him,, 
 TO, airb Twv'A9T]va£ci)v — matters from the Athenians, i.e., their demands from 
 the Athenians. rh |i.ipos. The article here has caused much em- 
 
 barrassment. It is generally said to be used with a tacit reference to rb Skov. 
 It seems to me to add strength to the expression, being more emphatic than 
 liipos per se, aliquamtwm, in an appreciable degree, meaning that a definite, an 
 ascertainable amount of the responsibility rested with him. Might we not, as 
 before 23 c, read ri p^ipos, which of course would be ' aliquantum.' 
 &7a)v — 'leading,' as we say, a leading man in the state, cf. ii. 65. On the 
 alleged causes, supposed to influence Pericles in the support of the war, such as 
 the wishes of Aspasia, &c. see Grote, vol. vi. p. 131. 
 * 
 
 Chaptbb CXXVIII. — (a.) dirji Taivdpov — which came upon them from 
 Tcenarus. koX a-^Cmv avTois. The Kal belongs to the whole 
 
134 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 sentence. For which reason also they hold that the great earthquake visited 
 them. Kriig. cf. i. 130; ii. 21. With respect to the fact, of. ch. loi. 
 
 (5.) XaXKioCKOv. 'Pallas of the brazen chapel.' Probably, as Am. suggests, 
 the walls were lined with plates of brass, like our wood panelling. The editors 
 refer to Pausanias iii. 17, 3, cf. Livy xxxv. 36. '.^toli circa Chaloioecon 
 (Minervae est templum sereum) congregati oseduntur.' SirW. Gell, Argolis, 
 p. 30, speaks of the bronze nails in the treasury of Atreus which must have 
 been used to fasten the metal to the walls. y.era.vtf^itl'i—smt 
 
 a/ter, i.e., judicially summoned, B.C. 478. 'Ep|J.tov£8a. Hermione, 
 
 a city of the Lacedgemonian confederacy. irpd^iioTa irpicro-eiv — 
 
 to carry on an intrigue. The infinitive vpiiiTaeiv depends upon a<piKvdTai, 
 and in this case the English idiom approaches the Greek more nearly than the ■ 
 Latin. Kriig. aptly cf. ij.ave6.vav iJKoiiev, (Edip. Tyr. v. 12, and i. 72 ; viii. 
 29. It is perhaps needless to remark with Kjiig. that Sceu here means— 
 'without authority from, the Lacedcemonians.' He cf. ii. 72 ; iv. 78 ; viii. 5. 
 tirexeCptio-ev. Some good MSS. exhibit ^ex^lprjaev — tooTc in hand. 
 TO irpuTov — i.e., before his recall. The digression containing the reasons for 
 this recall extends to the close of ch. 1 30. kot^9«to — stored up as a deposit, 
 
 cf. i. 33. T^ irpoT^pa irapovo-Ca — ' on hie first approach thither,' 
 
 not ' praesentiS, ' Bl. But it is not easy to see why. I should tr. ' on the first 
 occasion of his heing there, ' and such is the force of the word. Soph. Meet. v. 
 540, and Eur. ffec. v. 227. Jelf classifies this as a local dative, denoting the 
 place where the action of the verb occurs. See § 605. irpo<rf\KaVTii — 
 
 Connexions of the King, ' Afines' the participle almost becoming a noun. 
 |«YVa'6ts — 'relatives by donsanguinity,' though sometimes used generically of 
 those who were not so. Cf. with Popp. Cio. pro. Sext. Rose., § 96, 'propinqui, 
 cognatique.' Csesar, Bell. Qall.i. 11, ' neceasarii et consanguinei,' Tac. 5»s(. 
 iii. 34, ' propinqui adfinesque.' oi is omitted, or enclosed in 
 
 brackets by the best editors. * FoYYiXov. Gongylus, says T. K. A., 
 
 quoting an American edition, settled in Mysia after the death of Pausanias, 
 where the king gave him several towns. Xenopbon, on his arrival in Mysia 
 with the Cyreans, found his widow still living B. c. 399. 
 
 (c.) Sopl eX(Sv — 'the captives of his spear.' A poetic, and, probably, archaic 
 phrase retained from the language of an early period. ^uii'fiv 
 
 iroioi^iai — [purpose — lam intending. Note the present tense. This change from 
 the third person to the first is not now uncommon in the epistolary effusions of 
 the uneducated. In Greek it seems to have been less vulgar, cf. Xen. HeU. v. 
 I. 3T. 'ApTa.^^p^7]s ^afflXeus vofit^ei diKaiov , . . roiJrots iyii) iroXefi'^abi. The de- 
 monstrative ToiaSe is used in reference to the time when the king would receive 
 the letter — ■ ' tJiese prisoners before you.' irk ap^o-Kcu Elsewhere, 
 
 says Popp., Thucyd. always connects a dative with this verb in the active 
 voice. He has also used the passive dpiaKeaSal tivl, ch. 129 and ii. 68. 
 Aristoph. Plut. v. 353. tovs XiSyous — ' what we shall have to say.' 
 
 Chapter CXXIX. — {a.) 'Aprdpa^cs. Most probably the same so often' 
 mentioned by Herodotus, cf. vii. 66 ; viii. 126. Tf|v « Aao-KuMnv 
 
 K. T. X. This Satrapy was so called from a small town on the river Ehyndaous ; 
 it comprehended the cities of Bithynia and Paphlagonia, from the shores of the 
 
Chap. I30.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 135 
 
 Hellespont along those of the Euxine. This was, says Am., the province of 
 which Pharnabazus was afterwards Satrap. He of. Herod, iii. 90. Xen. Hell. 
 iv. I, § 15. The particle tc, says Krug., stands here as though ivTeireTldei. 
 did not follow. Similar anacoloutha are found iii. 36, 2 ; vii. 14, 2. 
 
 (i.) dvTjireTtBei — entrusted to his care as an amswer. This verb contains 
 within it, by a sort of Zeugma, the government of Trpdcrffeiv a little further 
 on. T^v (r<J>ptt7iSa — the royal signet. The Schol. explains, •^ 
 
 (Ttppayh ToO Tlepffuv jSatrtX^ws ^^X^> 'c^'ra /xh rtvas r^v jSatrtX^ois eUdva^ Kara, 5^ 
 Tivas rrjv K6pov toO irpibrov jSaffiX^ws airiJoVf Karb, Si rtvas rov Aapeiou iiriroPj 5t 
 iv ■xfieiiarlira.vTa i^aa-lXevffev. In this case probably the seal impression on the 
 letter is meant. Popp. cf. Xen. Sist. Grcec. vii. i. 39. 
 
 (c.) T<5v dvSpuv. The objective gen. after eiepyecla. The word Kehai, as 
 well as some of its cognates, graphically denotes 'lying wp in store.' 
 dvaYpaTTos. The common word in such cases, because probably the name 
 was written up upon some pillar and exposed to public view. The passage of 
 Herod., to which all editors refer, is the best commentary. 4>iyXaKos eiepyirris 
 /SafftX^os djfeypdtptj' ol Bi eiiepy^Tat jSatrtX^os dpoadyyai KnX^ovrai JlepffttTTi. viii. 
 85. Krtlg. refers to Xenophon, Trepl wpos. iii. 11. K6Kci)X«<r6(o. 
 
 Cogita Ti Sj" i/ioi iviirxva. Popp. The perfect imperative implies something 
 different from the present. The latter would mean — do not allow any impedi- 
 ment to he offered, lit. let it not he in a state of hindrance; but the first is, do not 
 allow any impediment which has been offered to prevent it ; lit. let it not have 
 been hindered. I make this remark because erroneous explanations have been 
 given. . dpyvpov. Pausanias was said to have received 500 talents 
 
 in gold. Sircixijia, past tense in reference to the time of the receipt 
 
 of the letter. So too always the Latins ' dabam.' The younger student must 
 notice this, as we always make the time of our own writing the standard of 
 tense. Is anything indicated by this difference between the ancient and modem 
 practice ? 
 
 Chaptee OXXX. — (a.) rd Ypd)i|iaTa. As the Latin literce, 'a letter.' 
 d|C(i)|xa is a verbal substantive with passive meaning, and takes a verbal con- 
 struction being followed by iirS. Krtig. cf. vi. 15, and dpxT) ii. 65- ■ri/t^. 
 Xen. Cyrop. iii. 3, 7, and Bdvaros Plat. Eep. 620 a. KoSeimiKrfTi, 
 
 for the more usual KaSto-Tun, of. i. 98, Eur. Hel. 438, &c. Kriig. 
 o-Kcvas Mi)SiKds. Kriig. doubts whether this refers to the Caftan, kAvSvs, 
 which he imagines would have been described by cto'Mi. See his note Xen. 
 Anah, i. -t, 27. 
 
 (6.) Tpoir^Jov. Just as we say he kept an expensive table, so here the word 
 does not mean merely the thing itself, but the luxurious living. Remark the 
 mid. voice exercising its force in irapcTlSeTO. KaT^X"'" ''^^ 8iavo£av — 
 
 keep imder, i.e., conceal his intention. Ppax^o-i — trifling, as 
 
 often. yvdif.r\j is to be connected with ip.eX\e — was in pwrpose about to 
 
 do, i.e., was purposed to do. 8v(nrpd(ro8os. This adjective 
 
 graphically expresses the pride of a tyrant who would admit no one to his 
 presence — difficult of access. Kriig. cf. Xen. Agesil. ix. 2, and Sv(7Trp6(ri.Tos 
 Iph. in Aul. 345. Tfi opY^ — here evidently in the general sense. 
 
 So our word 'temper' has a general sense, and a special acceptation as 'anger,' 
 
136 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 cf. cb. 140. As might have been anticipated, the former meaning is found 
 more frequently in an earlier stage of the language, e.g., Si.eirei.pS.To airiav 
 TTji ivSpayaStris Kal ttjs dpyij!. Her. vi. 128 and i. 73, ipyT]" oix S.Kpos. Kriig. 
 quotes Simonides apud Stobseum, 73. 61. So also Kri^'/jveffac KoBoipois eteXos 
 dpyijv, Hes. Op. 302. Accordingly we have the word in the plural to denote 
 tempers, (mi/mi affectus iii. 82, and viii. 83. Elsewhere it is scarcely found 
 (among later writers at any rate) in this sense. 
 
 Chapteb CXXXI.' — (a.) rb irpwTov — 'as well the first time.' See 
 ch. 95. iKn-oXiopKTiSECs. Here the preposition denotes the com- 
 
 pletion of the act, and therefore the word is equivalent to rg TroXwpKlif 
 iK^XijBeh. Tpwds as an adjective. So'EXXas vi. 62; 'Ids iv. 61;' 
 
 Hepffis i. 1 38 ; Kriig. irpdo-miv Icrri^'y^XeTO was armownced as 
 
 intrigidng, cf. iii. 16; iv. 25. (tkutoXtjv. See L. and S. Lex., 
 
 or Dictionary of Antiquities. It has always seemed to me a rude expedient, 
 for by trying staves of different thickness, surely an enemy into whose hands 
 the dispatch had fallen might easily find out the key to the writing. Probably 
 there was some mecha.nism connected with the staff which none of the accounts 
 describe, and a secret cypher also. The Schol. sensibly remarks, — el 54 ns 
 etwot, Kal irSjs eXxev 6 ILavaavias t^v (TkvtoKtjv, \d0pa ttjs ir&Xeojs i^eXddiv; piyriav 
 6ri dirb ttjs irpdjTtjs arpaTryyias eTxe t^v aKVTdXTjv. toO K^pvKOS p*?| 
 
 XcCirea-dai. This does not, I think, mean, ' never to ie out of the herald's sight,' 
 but not to stay behind him, to accompany him to Sparta. aTroXeiirecrdai is, as 
 Kriig. remarks, more common in this sense. eonriTrrei. virb. The 
 
 neuter with a passive force has the passive construction. Jelf § 359, 3. 
 
 {b.) Tov Pao-iX^o. He was, more, properly speaking, iwiTpoiros or regent, 
 cf. next chapter, though in this capacity he acted for the king, n/i.'/iv Ipjowa. 
 Arist. calls him king, vii. 13. 13. SiatrpaldiiEvos IlijXfle — he got 
 
 out by settling the affair, compromising it with the magistrates. So I think the 
 prep. 5ii signifies; the simple irpa^dfievos would be, by scheming, or ill- 
 triguing. Ka6Co-Tr)o-iv K. t. X. — surrenders himself to take his 
 
 trial. irepl avrbv k\iY)((i-v — a somewhat unusual phrase, but, as 
 
 Popp. remarks, it is proved to be genuine by c. 135. as elSpuTKOv ix tUv wept 
 Jlavtraviav iX^yx^^P. 
 
 Chapter CXXXII.' — (o.) Jlv IriiiaipoiivTo — 'on the strength of which they 
 were to pwnish.' Peile, cf. Herod, vii. 139. tt]v dx/yeXlrji/ tuii reix^av oi SimapMi 
 iriOeaBai, tjtis hv ^v, of what use walls were, or should have been. 
 dv^>|/i.os — First-cousin. Cleombrotus, father of Pausanias, and Leonidas, father 
 of Pleistarchus, were brothers, sons of Anaxandridas by his first wife. 
 Cleomenes was also his son by his second wife. See the story Herod, v. 41 ; 
 viii. 71. ^leSeSiijTTiTO — departed in his habits of living from the 
 
 national institutions, which would, in accordance with the spirit of the Spartan 
 constitution, be regarded as a grave offence. Bl. quotes several instances where 
 later historians have adopted the word. I do not remember its use elsewhere 
 among earlier writers. Notice the double augment which Kriig. amply illus- 
 trates by other cases, chiefly from the orators. tIiv rpCiroSo. This 
 was a golden tripod supported by a triple-headed serpent in bronze. The history 
 
Chap. 133.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 137 
 
 of this tripod is curioua, and may be seen, Gibbon, Decline and Fall, vol. iii, 
 oh. 1 7. Mr. Turner, who examined it last year (1853) in Constantinople, where 
 it stands in the Hippodrome, states that it is in excellent preservation, but that 
 the drawing of it in the Dictionary of 6k. and R. Antiquities is not accurate. 
 See Herod, ix. 81. rh tKt>itiov riSe — Tliis elegiac distich. 
 
 I^EKoXailfav — erased, lit. beat out, because the erasure was probably effected by 
 hammering the surface of the brass. If we are to believe the Athenian author 
 of the oration Kard, TSealpas (§ 97), the Lacedaemonians did not do this of their 
 own free-will, but because they were cited by the Platseans before the 
 Amphictyons. According to the same authority, they were fined 1000 talents, 
 which, when we consider their position in Greece, their services in the war, and 
 the silence of Thucyd., is, as it seems to me, enough to throw discredit on the 
 whole story, Diodorus xi. 33, supplies the improved distich, — 
 
 "EXXaSos eiipvxopov <r(aTijpes tovS* dp^drfKav, 
 AovXoaijifTjs (TTvyepas pvadfievoi 7r6Xtas, 
 
 Kal TovTO — i.e., the previously- mentioned inscription. 
 
 (6.) v€(STep(Jv Ti iroiEiv — to adopt any violent measure. It may also have 
 reference to the unprecedented nature of such an act, just as the usual force of 
 the phrase contains a mixed notion of revolution and violence. 
 av^KeoTov. D. tr. am extreme measure. It is so, because the word means 
 irreparable, irremediable, like the infliction of capital punishment which 
 cannot be recalled. irio-Tf^TaTos. It is by no means necessary to 
 
 resort to the expedient of making this word passive, ' cui ille fidem maxime 
 habebat.' Whatever was the conduct of this man after the discovery of his 
 master's treachery, it may have most thoroughly desei-ved the epithet before it. 
 Upon irplv in the sense 'until.' Jelf, § 848, 3. dv^p 'Ap-y£Xios. 
 
 Argilus was in the peninsula of Chalcidice. irapairoiTjo-diievos — 
 
 having counterfeited the seal, a not unusual force of the prep, in composition, 
 the idea of falsity flowing from the general notion of, beside the true thing, 
 amiss. L. and S. Zex. well compare the force of the particle ver in German 
 compounds, — e.g., ' verschworen." See the instances collected by Blomf. on 
 the word irapAarnxov, JEsoh. Ag. 754. oirbv «'y'Y6'Ypa|i|i^vov vmlvtw — 
 
 hefownd himself written down therein, to Mil. Notwithstanding the difficulties 
 made about this passage, it appears to me no more strange than many others, 
 where an active infinitive is introduced to which a subject must be suppHed, 
 instead of a passive infinitive with the old subject, as the idiom of our own 
 language would have required, — e.g. (to take the first instance which presents 
 itself), irapkxovTei ii/i,as airois ei woLeiv, where an Englishman would have written 
 e4 TroiefcrSai. Xen. Anab. ii. 3. 12. Every now and then, the idiom seems 
 more than usually awkward, and the editors are inclined to make a change in 
 the text. Thus, in the converse case. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1488. ri S' hv BiXoiS rh 
 Tnarhv ip.(j>vvaL ippevi; it naturally occurs to every reader to substitute ^ixtftvaat. 
 Yet there is no MS. authority for the alteration, and I should hesitate to make 
 it. Cf, Bavp.do'ai, ch. 138 c. 
 
 Chapteb CXXXIII. — (a.) air^Kooi — to hear with their own ears. Such 
 positive assurance was necessary in dealing with so powerful an individual. 
 
138 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 dirb irapao-K€^s — ' ex eomposito,' from a previously concerted plan. 
 (rKiivi]ora|i.evo\) K. t. X. — having raised a temporary Aovd divided into two apa/rt- 
 ments by a thin partition. Thirlwall. To understand this, we must suppose 
 that the right of sanctuary extended to the Ti/ievos, or ' sacred precinct' sur- 
 rounding the temple. Suppliants would, either from choice or necessity, very 
 frequently take up their abode there instead of within the walls of the temple 
 itself. Tcov T€ ? I4>dp(i>v. This re has been the -subject of extended 
 
 controversy. Haack, Popp., and Goll. place it within brackets, and Hartung, 
 in his work on particles, would expunge it altogether. On the other hand, 
 Arn. and Peile retain it, explaining its usage according to their peculiar views. 
 For these refer to the note on ' Aya/ii/iyav re, i. ch. 9. In this place. Am. 
 says, re signifies no more than also, moreover, in which sense Si occurs, and re 
 again, ii. 63; vi. 17; vii. 20; and being merely a remnant of the ancient 
 verbiage of the language, may be rendered, ' in which he concealed, moreover, 
 some of the Ephori.' Peile (Appendix, Agamem. p. 383) explains, 'i-e shows that 
 hoth the clauses, tuv i<p6piiiv ivrbs nvas Ixpv^e, Kal IIav(Tavlov .... iKeretas, are 
 alike to be connected with els ijv, so that we might translate, into which he in- 
 traduced some of the Ephors, a/nd hid them within, amd Pausanias also, — i.e., 
 into which also Pausanias, having come to him and asked him the reason of 
 taking sanctuary.' As in the same appendix (p. 382) the principle is laid down 
 that 're is altogether retrospective, and herein to be distinguished from aal, 
 which is always anticipative,' I should myself have imagined that re had not 
 so much relation to the fact that Pausanias also came into the hut, which is 
 subsequently stated, as to the fact that Argilius was already there, implied in 
 the narration, and that he introduced the Ephors, as well (w himself, to hear 
 the conversation of Pausanias. Withim which he concealed some of the Ephori 
 too, or the Ephors withal. See also Jelf, § 756, obs. irapaPoXoiTO. 
 
 The Schol. explanation is irapa^dXojs KaTTjyop^aeie ij inrbirTws Sta/cowjtrete. It is 
 probably the Homeric usage, alh ijx^v ^uxi}v irapapaWo/ihos iro\ep.lieiv, and 
 KwSivif must be supplied, exposed him to risk. irpoT\.f,T\'itl\ The 
 
 word certainly appears to me to contain somewhat of irony. So too Kriig., 
 who tr., had the distinguished honow, &c., we might say, 'preferred to death.' 
 T. K. A. says it may be simply rendered, thought worthy of heing put to death, 
 and quotes iTnTijieiov, Xen. Anai. ii. 3, 11. But as that word means /*, and 
 the context there implies plainly, 'fit to be beaten,' I do not see the parallelism. 
 o4k Ioovtos. The common usage of these words, note ch. 28, and of. L. and S. 
 Zexicon. ir£<rTiv. Kriig., after Bauer, tr. Verbilrgung, bail, or 
 
 security if he would rise and quit the sanctuajry. See note d, ch. 126, on 
 Avdaraffis. On the distinction between Upbv and rifievos, which are, however, 
 often used synonymously, see Arn. Tip,evos, — i.e., Te/ivb/Jtevos, Diis separatus 
 Oiger, includes the consecrated ground, and all the land of which the usufruct 
 was devoted to the temple. Upov seems to express all the actual buildings, as 
 well the (TToai and dwellings of the priests, as the sacred edifice itself. Thus 
 the Ipbv is said to be h Tep,hei, Herod, ii. 112. Nabs is the great central shrine 
 where the deity himself was supposed to dwell, and where his statue stood. 
 There were, however, smaller vaoL, like the side chapels in Koman Catholic 
 cathedrals. ri. irpa(ro-(S|i.cva — the tramsactions then actually going 
 
 on, — i.e., with Xerxes. 
 
Chap. 135.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 139 
 
 Chapter CXXXIV. — (a.) eiroiovvTO. The true imperfect, describing an 
 action never completed — were for arresting, cf. iinrivSovTo, iii. 24, and with 
 Am., IfuffBovTo Tap oiK iKSlSovros, Herod, i. 68. Iv tt| 68^ — in 
 
 the street, a not uncommon use of the word, especially in N. T. 
 ac^avEi — secret, wnseen hy the rest. irpoKaTa<|>v'YEtv — anticipated 
 
 them in taking refuge. 
 
 (b.) o(KT)|ia. Either a chamber attached to the temple itself, or a small 
 house in the sacred precinct. SvSov SvTtt — 'when they knew that he 
 
 was housed. ' IvSov is one of those adverbs which must be regarded as formed 
 from the accusative. They denote, as I have endeavoured to express, not a 
 simply local position as the dative, but motion terminating at a place. 
 airoXapiSvTEs — having shut him up within : in this phrase, as in the following 
 one, d,Trii)KoSSiniiTai> rds Bipas (with Kriig. cf. rots bSois iiToiKodofi9j(rai, vii. 73), 
 iarricaded the doors, the preposition indicates the cutting off all communication 
 from without. Similar is its usage in dTroreixifu and its cognates. See i. 64. a. 
 
 (c.) uo-irep tl\ev. The general miport of this phrase is, forthwith, e.g., 
 iii. 30. It is not, however, improbable that here the primary notion may be 
 intended — 'just as he was,' i.e., in the piteous state into which he had fallen. 
 Bl. well supports this sense by Herod, i. 24, /5£^a( p.i.y is t^v doKacixav euvrbv, 
 &aTrep dx^, aini rij crKeu^ iraffi?, where the concluding words explain &(nrep et^e. 
 tJpv KaidSav. Strabo explains aivrikaiov n. Its etymology implies a natural 
 cleft in the earth, such as those which arise from volcanic agency. Similar 
 was the BdpaSpov of which we hear at Athens. lfi.pdW€i.v. Krug. 
 
 governs by ip,4X\Tjcrai>, supplying the word a second time to dJiBeiray. 
 v\i\<rlov iro-u — ' In the neighbourhood of the Ceadas,' as may be understood from 
 p-cTeviyKuv oSirep dwiffai'i, Kriig. This is, I think, correct, and the transac- 
 tion, notwithstanding all the difficulties made about it, seems tolerably clear. 
 The Delphian god, indignant that a Spartan monarch, and a suppliant of his 
 own, should lie in so ignominious a locaHty, desires that he should be removed, 
 and buried where he died. He is accordingly entombed, ^i' T(p irporeiiiviap,aTi, 
 which, I apprehend, must mean some edifice at the 'front part of the T^fuvos 
 — the entrance, or, in scriptural language, the going in. I believe Arn. is right 
 in comparing it to the gateway of the ' close' at Peterborough or SaUsbury ; but 
 he asserts too strongly that no burial could have taken place within the sacred 
 precincts; this Thirlwall shows from the case of Euchidas, Plat. Hist. 20. 
 Probably the JlpoTep,hi<r/M!i, was chosen as a sort of compromise between their 
 own scruples and the command of the God. That it was a building of some 
 sort, and generally a decorated one, seems clear from Clem. Alex. Pcedag. iii. 
 2 (quoted by Bl.), Karii, roiis MymTlav K6a-povs, oTs vaol kuI irpoTriXaia Trap' 
 aiiToTs Kal vpoTep,evl(rii.aTa i^iiaKtirai. The isTrjkai, probably were a double 
 column, with the appearance of the Tables on which the commandments are 
 engraved in churches, Bl. dvSpCavTas. Two images or statues of 
 
 Pausanias. They were seen by his namesake in the Chalcioecus. See iii. 17. "!• 
 Cf. Died. II. 45, Popp. The death of Pausanias occurred 01. 76I, or B.C. 
 473. Krug. 
 
 Chapter CXXXV. — (a.) fi^as vif(.va.vtoi~havingdetermmeditto he apol- 
 0. aM, The noun stands as a sort of predicate, aa in the case airrbp 
 
140 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 itrol'qffev'' Kd7}vaA.ov, cf. 109 c. ^vV£7q]Tt»VT0 — mipUcated hwi in the 
 
 charge. A very rare word says Bl., which I have only found elsewhere, Plut^ 
 Peric. oiis avveirriTi&vTo roS MriSiff/ioS. ' This digression concerning ThemistocleB 
 continues to ch. 138 inclusively,and may be justified partly byits connexion with 
 the affair of Pausanias, and partly by the important influence which Themistocles 
 exercised upon Grecian politics. Koscher, a German writer {Clio, i. p. 359), 
 thinks that these four digressions of Thucyd. on Theseus, Cylon, the Peisistra- 
 tidse, and Themistocles, are intended to represent the four principal epochs of 
 Greek history before his time. Probably he had no such artificial notion, and 
 there is no reason to suppose that he would have hesitated to say so if he had 
 meant it. IX^YX""- This is explained by Plut. Tlwm. c. 23, ^TriirToXai 
 
 Tii'es dvevpedeLaai, Kal ypafifioira irepl ro&rojv els biro^lav h^^oKov rhv Ge/x:-i 
 aroKkia.. ai(rTpaKi.o-|ji(iv. Circiter B.C. 476. Kriig. B.C. 471, Clinton and Grote. 
 
 Chapter CXXXVI. — (a.) oiruv sc. t&v "KepKvpaluv implied in Kepicipav. 
 By the figure Ilp&s rti (rt]p.a(,vop,ivov, Jelf, § 379 c. EVEpy^S. 
 
 Either, as Plutarch says, by his friendly mediation in a dispute with Corinth 
 about the Leucadian peninsula, whereby Corcyra obtained the object she con- 
 tended for ; or, as the Schol. says, by, dissuading the Greeks from proclaiming 
 as public enemies those states (including Corcyra) which had refused to co- 
 operate in repelling the Persian invasion. ^X"''' avriv <3irre oir^ 
 j{^6e(r9tti — to keep him so as to become odious to, — i.e., to keep him, atid so give 
 offence to. For the construction of SeBUvai, Kriig. quotes iSeSiiaav pacravurBrivai, 
 Lys. xiii. 27. •ri\v Ijireipov — sc. Thesprotia. 
 
 (6.) Ttpoa-Teraiifivav — those to whom the duty had been assigned. Cf v. 75 
 and viii. 23. Kar^ iTvirTi,v^according as they learnt by inquiry where 
 
 he was gone, — i.e., they regulated their pursuit by the information which they 
 received concerning his movements. Cf. iria-Teis, ch. 5, and cf. Jelf, § 802, 1, 
 and 831, 2. Kara tI &irapov. The editors generally understand, 
 
 in a great strait, supposing that ri bears the same force as in the expression tI 
 pL^pos, aiiquantum, 'a considerable portion.' This is, I think, very doubtful, 
 and no examples are given. Thiersch accordingly, and apparently Kriig., 
 would read t4 6.Tropov, — i.e., in his difficulty. But may we not suppose that, 
 like Charles Edward after CuUoden, be passed through many hair-breadth 
 'scapes, and that ri indicates this, ' in one of his perils.' Mokoavav. 
 
 Their territory was but small, since, according to Scylax, it only contained fifty 
 stades of sea-board, though broader inland. KaraXvo-ai. I do not 
 
 think that Arn. and others are right in saying that t^v 666c is to be understood. 
 The word is borrowed from Eastern, or at any rate primitive travelling, where 
 the party, always a sort of caravan, broke up for the night to lodge in a khan 
 or caravanserai; and the reference is to unsaddling and unloading the animals, 
 &c. Cf. Horn. Od. iv. 38. Karakiaonev wKkas tinroiis. The word and its 
 cognates are common. After Platsea was razed to the ground, they made there 
 a Ka.Tayiiyi.oi/ SmkoitIuv ttoSSiv iravrixv k6k\<ii olK-fip,aTa ^x"" "'• 68. The 
 analogous Latin word was ' Devertorium.' Tijs yvaiKiSs. Hut. 
 
 says her name was Pthia. tr^&v. Because, says Kriig., ywl) is 
 
 the principal subject in the writer's thought, though not grammatically so. 
 
Chap. 137.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 141 
 
 Ka6^^«(r6ai. ' So I have given, for Thuc. uses KaBl^ew, but never KaOl^fcrBai.' 
 Krug. loT-fa — because the shrine of the household gods, and the 
 
 chief seat of domestic life, it was regarded by the ancients with special venera- 
 tion. Of. Grote, v. p. 384. 8i|\ot 8s Iotiv. Here we have the 
 simple relative in a dependent clause, where, according to the genius of the 
 Greek language, we should anticipate a dependent interrogative Htms. ' Optim^ 
 Greece dicitur oT3a o-e 8s el, novi te, qui sis; minus bene vero oiK oTSa, ere, Ss et. 
 Rectius Serris et, vel etiam t(s et.' 'Ehns. Med. 1086. Kriig., however, pro- 
 duces instances of Ss after a negative. Her. ii. 121 ; Eur. Hel. 818. In ch. 
 137, we have the more regular <j>pdiu fitrris i<TTt., of. Jelf, § 877, 4. 
 oiK d^ioi, as in the parallel case of oi! 07;/ii, the negative passes on to the 
 following infinitive. Kriig. of. ii. 8g; iii. 44. d.vT€iircv. 'An 
 application to the Athenians from Admetus for help, was rejected by the advice 
 of Themistooles. Sintenis Plut. Them. 34.' Kriig. olo-SeveVtepos. 
 One MS. exhibits this as a correction for d,<r6ei>€<TTepov, and it must surely be 
 right. The intention of Them, evidently was to work upon the generosity of 
 Admetus, by representing himself, who once was stronger, as now the weaker 
 of the two, and therefore an unfit object for his enmity. The genitive — by one 
 far weaker them, he — would suggest an idea of the weakness of Admetus, which, 
 however true, was not likely to have been urged by one seeking for his protec- 
 tion against a powerful enemy. I am therefore surprised to see that T. K. A., 
 after Popp., retains &a8tve(TT'epov. airh tov tcrou — on a footing of 
 equality. Of. i. 77 ; ii. 89. elvai is governed, as Popp. points out by 
 \eyei., implied in djioi. 
 
 (c.) \p«Cas Tivds — had opposed him in the matter of a request or private 
 interest. Some editors supply a preposition, but Krtig. has shown that ivavn- 
 ovir8ai governs a genitive, from Xen. Anai. vii. 6, 5. Spa /iri Kal rj/uv ivavnii- 
 (Terai ttjs (i7ra7W7^s. See Jelf, § 53'^* He adds that rd belongs to ffdj^eadaCy 
 for the human body and its members are mentioned frequently without the 
 article. Plat. Mep. 461 a. This is upon the principle of familiarity with the 
 subject spoken of, already explained, and is, I think, preferable to the arbitrary 
 supposition of Popp. and Goller, that the phrase is for h rb t& fffi/io (rti^ecrBai 
 with the second article elided for euphony. We too say ' body and goods.' In 
 addition to the words mentioned, ch. 8 a, cf. ffTroi'SAs Xiav passim, and raipas 
 wocelffBai ii. ■/, 4. H^YioTov, — i.e., among the Molossians. All 
 
 editers quote Plut. Themist. 24. rairriv fieyinTriv Kal p:6v'qv trxeSbv dvapripfn]TOP 
 Tfyoviihav Imalav rSiv Mok6a<ruiv. ,' . 
 
 Chapteb CXXXVII. — (a.) t^iv Wpttv BoXdo-o-av. The ^gean. 
 •TT^txi — ly land. ' AXe^dvSpov. Tenth King of Macedon. 
 
 KaTa<{>^pETai — 'carried down by the force of the tempest.' Cf. iv. 120, and note, 
 Sheppard'sTAeopAr. Pref. p. 51. NdSov. Eeferto ch. 98. Tf|v 
 
 d(r<|>aX€Cav — The safety required. We should perhaps write ' the only meams 
 of safety consisted in, &c.' V-^9^ irXovs ■yeviiToi — ' till a favourable 
 
 time for sailing arise,' for such is the meaning of ttXoCs. So Xen. Anab. v. 9, 
 33. (is aSpcov, i&,v ttXoCs f (on the usage of /lexpl with a verb, cf. Jelf, § 
 841, S), dcofi/teroi, where see Kriig.'s note. airo|ii.v:fi<rc(r6ai 
 
143 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 \&pw — would remember it to him with fitting gratitude. Popp. quotes Eur. 
 Ale. V. 299. vvD TuvS' &Trl>iJ.V7j(Tai. xdpi.v. Kriig., however, conjectures that 
 Thuc. wrote i,iroiJ,e/i,v/i<r€(T6ai, for the future in the text is not Attic. 
 
 (6.) diroo-aXcvo-as. The verb seems to imply lying out from the land in the 
 open sea. Of. iii. 7. a, and /Meredipovs dTroiraKeieiv, Dem. 50. 22. Kriig. quotes 
 Dem. 1. 22 (1273, 24), AvayKoiov fjv iw iyKipas iiroaaXeieiv T'tjv viicra liiTeii- 
 povs. The translation of Nepos is, 'in solo navem tenuit in amcoris.' 
 cOepiiirEvo-c. Portus' version is liberaliter prosequi. Dale's simply 'rewarded,' 
 But in the many passages where Tbuoydides uses the word, something of con- 
 tinuous action is ever implied. {>irc|EKeiTO — cf. iire^^dci/To i. 89. It 
 was said that property of his to the amount of one hundred talents was con- 
 fiscated at Athens. vetaa^t. According to EoTig.'e computation, 
 Olymp. 76f, B.o. 473, but the date is generally given B.C. 465 or 466. He 
 also cf. vea<rTl ^ovra iii. 30. See Thiersch, Gr. § 289. 
 
 (c.) ISVjXou 1) 'Ypa4>^. The question concerning the real authorship of this 
 letter is, I imagine, the same as that respecting the speeches, which see ch. 
 22. a, though the term ^5?;Xou certainly does look as if Thuc. professed to quote 
 the very words. Kemark that fin here introduces the directa oratio. Cf. v. 10 ; 
 viii. 53 ; and Jelf, § 802, 6. 4v tm d<r<f>aXEi. . . . lirtKivSuvn). 
 
 This is the common idiom of the neuter adjective with an article standing for a 
 substantive. But it is rather varied, inasmuch as we have two adjectives with 
 one article, which, in accordance with Granville Sharp's canon (ch. j8 a), refer 
 to the same subject ; tr., in that state of things which was secure for ine, lid, 
 perUoUjS for him, Popp. remarks, ' potuit quidem scribi ^p rif i.<r(pa.\u /niii 
 iyii,' but this would have required a repetition of the article in the second 
 clause. iraXtv i\ — by a sort of inversion, say the editors, for 
 
 ■ri irdXiv. But see i. 82 ; ii. 1 8. YpiSii|(as. This stands thus, because 
 
 iSri\ov ri ypa^-fi must be considered equivalent to iw^cTeikev 6 Qe/iuirTO/cX^s. 
 Popp. Tbuoydides as frequently falls into an anacoluthon, and writes as if he 
 thought his sentence had been cast into a form different from that which he 
 really gave to it. ttjs dvax«>p^o-cus. The question is, does this 
 
 refer to the message sent lefore the battle of Salamis, informing the king of 
 the pretended intention of the Greeks to escape ; or to the message sent after 
 the battle, warning him to retreat without delay. The first message, if ever 
 sent, must surely from its disastrous issue have rendered the sender an object 
 of suspicion ; neither under such circumstances could Themistocles have de- 
 clared himself in a state of security {in rifi da-^dXet) while the king was in a 
 state of peril. The message after the battle must therefore be meant by these 
 words; yet Herod, (viii. no) clearly states that this message was sent from 
 Andros, and not from Salamis. Still, I would rather suppose with Am. that 
 Thucyd. is here guilty of slight oversight, than refer the words to the first 
 message with Popp. and Haaok. Thirlwall, vol. ii. p, 430, agrees with 
 Arnold. irpoo-tiroi^traTO — took to himself. ripi oi- 
 
 -SidXvo-iv. The negative particle so combines vrith the noun as to make one 
 negative term. See the note on oi-iiiya\a, ch. i, and cf. •^ oi-7re/)iTeIxiffis iii. 
 96. ^ oiK-i^ovffla V. 50, and Jelf, § 745, 5. o^|v <|)i,X£ov— for the 
 
 objective genitive ; cf. ch. 33, note. 
 
Chap. 150.J jnOTKS ON THUCYDIDES. I43 
 
 Chaptbe CXXXVIII. — (a.) ex^XevE. This, though the reading of the 
 best MSS. is scarcely defensible, for it is difficult to see how any sense can be 
 given to iKcXeve, which would justify such a variation of tense. This is not so 
 with the other oases where an imperfect is coupled to an aorist, — e.g., in 
 Herodotus, for there the liveliness of the narration accounts for the imperfect, the 
 subject of the verb being vividly brought forward, and represented as engaged in 
 action. But, as Arn. remarks, this would be altogether out of place in the 
 very calm and sober style of Thucydides. I should therefore prefer reading 
 iKiXevffe, but if the imperfect stands, tr., 'The hing was sv/rprised at his scheme 
 (what passed through his thoughts), and proceeded to bid him, &c.' 
 Sera ISwdro KaT€Vi5T)<r« — mjoMered as much of the larufuage as he could. Bl. 
 says this is a very unusual use of Kurayoiu. I do not myself see that it is 
 unusual to employ the word for such an exerdse of the understanding faculty 
 as that implied here ; of. ch. 126, note a. The exaggeration of the later 
 writers is well illustrated by the extravagant proficiency in the Persian tongue 
 ascribed by Nepos to Themistocles. 'AXeldvSpov. Successor of 
 
 Amyntas the first, father and predecessor of Perdiocas. 
 
 (6.) ToO EXX.Tivi.Koii. A species of attraction, says Popp., for Kal ttjj' 
 iXwida ^v iTeriOet airi^, bovkiiiuuv rh *^XK7]vlk6v. Krlig. makes SovXiijaetv 
 depend upon AiriSa, — i.e., VTerlBei airQ toO 'BXXr;ciKoC iXirlSa. SovXiitreip. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 898 b, who classes this under 'contracted sentences.' 'When an infinitive 
 or particle stands in the same sentence with some other verbum infinitum, the 
 substantive which properly depends upon the infin. or part, is frequently made 
 to depend upon the verbum finitum, so that it is in the case required 
 thereby.' [idXioTo Si n. t. \.—but especially from his wisdom 
 
 which he had established by giving proof; lit., from the by-giving-of-proof- 
 ■established reputation for wisdom. 
 
 (c.) PepaidraTO 81). The particle strengthens the superlative, cf. ch. 
 23 b ; tr., one who most indisputably exhibited strength of natural genius. 
 Sia<{>cp<SvTii>s Ti. The ti here as often 'is aliqncmtum,' in no small degree more 
 thorn any other man remarkably deserving to receive admiration. For ffavfidcrai, 
 active infin., see ch. 13c!, note b. Jelf, § 667, 3. I5 aird — with 
 
 reference to it, though ^icrews has gone before ; cf. 22 a. aire 
 
 irpojJiaOiiv K. T. X. — without having acquired anything by previous studies to con- 
 tribute to it, nor by subsequent studies to add to it ; this administration was the 
 fruit of natural genius not formed by previous or increased by subsequent 
 study. Twv T€ irapaxpfjiia k. t. X. Of what immediate expedience 
 
 reqidred, when the opportunity for council was most brief, he was of all men the 
 ablest jvdge; and of future events the best conjecturer, with the msst far-reaching 
 view of what was going to happen. This seems to me the best way of taking 
 the sentence, because it best preserves the balance of the clauses, after which 
 Thuc. was ever straining, though occasionally at the expense of a false or im- 
 perfect antithesis. Kriig. makes rdy fieWivrui' dependent upon ^tI irXuarov ; 
 but if Thup. meant ™c irapaxpTJf'Ci, to be governed by KpAridTo^ 'yvikiuav, I am 
 nearly sure that he also meant t&v /leWdiiruy to be governed by dpicrros 
 ekaffTiJs. The noun elKaar-lis is very unusual, j,nd I have therefore rendered it 
 by one which is unusual also ; but why either should be so, is not easy to 
 explain. 
 
144 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 (d.) |ji6Tol x<^P<^5 ^X*"' — Jia^ppen to have m hand, lit. between his hrnids. 
 Kvilg. of. Herod, vii. i6. iv x^P"^" ^X^' means the same thing, and is of more 
 frequent occurrence. «5T|7^(roo-9oi — to interpret, an i^riyi/iTri! was 
 
 one who went over words first, which were subsequently repeated by hig 
 hearers. The connexion with the primary meaning of 'leading the way,' and 
 the tertiary one of 'expounding' are obvious, and may be easily illustrated by 
 
 consulting L. and S. Zex. in voce. Kptvai iKavus ovk air^XXaKTo 
 
 he was not without the power to pass a competent judgment on. oix dx. , like oiiK 
 dvev,' 'non sine,' and many other such phrases, is not the less positive, though 
 purposely qualified in form ; xpinai, a common sense judgment, was always 
 says Am., distinguished by the Greeks from full theoretical or practical know- 
 ledge. It was obviously shared by a much larger mass of men, and upon this 
 principle, he adds, the people at large were competent judges of the conduct 
 of their magistrates. See ii. 40, iJTOi Kplvoixiv ye k. t. X. liEXeriis 
 
 PpoxwTi)Ti. Am. tr. 'with acquired learning m/jst scanty, ' his meaning probably 
 is correct, but the words might mislead the younger student, as the lit, tr. is 
 ivith scantiness, or brevity of practice, where /teX^ri;, I think, refers to the 
 preparation usually made by public speakers, so ' exercitatio,' Cic. de Off. i. 
 1 8. aiTo<rx«Sidt€iv rd S^ovra — to extemporise, or devise at a 
 
 moment's notice what was wanted, 
 
 (e.) vo<Wi<ras. The collocation is peculiar and emphatic, ' 'twa^ by disease 
 that he died,' because the contrary had been reported, of. Pint. Them. 31, and 
 Arist. Sq. v. 83. As early as the time of the latter the story was prevalent 
 that he died from drinking bulls' blood at a sacrifice, or perhaps a poison bo 
 called. Cic. Brutus, 0. 11, rightly ascribes the legend to a desire 'mortem 
 (ejus) tragic^ et rhetoric^ ornare.' Ma7vi)(rCav (iJv dprov. The 
 
 predicate is S.pTov as in those cases already noticed, ch. 109, 134. The practice 
 of assigning certain cities to particular persons, or rather the taxes which these 
 cities paid, is one well known, and as Bl. observes, dates from remote antiquity, 
 vestiges of it being found in Homer, where Agamemnon offers to Achilles, as 
 the price of reconciliation, seven cities, each possessing some peculiar excellence, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 98, Xen. Anab. i. 4, 9. Athen. 534 d, records the cities assigned 
 to Alcibiades, whenever he went abroad, for his tent, &c. ' The custom,' Bl. 
 writes, 'continues to the present times in the east, Athens having been 
 assigned to the Sultana for pin money, and Jemsalem to the concubines for a 
 similar use.' Mr. Grote says, ' I doubt Dr. A.'s statements about the land tax 
 rent. I do not think it was a tenth or fifth of the produce of the soil in 
 these districts which was granted to Themistocles, but the portion of regal 
 revenue or tribute levied in them. The Persian kings did not take the trouble 
 to assess and collect the tribute; they probably left that to the inhabitants 
 themselves, provided the sum total were duly paid.' Grote, vol. iv. p. 386. 
 ovToB governed dara, not oi irpoo-^KODres. ov ykp i^v explains the 
 
 reason of Kpi(j>a 'kOnvaiav. The law is mentioned by Xen. Hdl. i. vii. 23. 
 Karh Tovrov rbv v&p.ov — Ss iariv iirl rah kpoiriXois Kal TrpoSdrais. . . . /li) ra^^roi 
 ii> ry Attik^, 
 
 Chafter CXXXIX.— (a.) AaKcSai)i,(Svioi. The narrative is resumed from 
 ch. 126. ■irpoi\fyiov— warned them, 01 publicly declared to thm. 
 
Chap. 140.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 145 
 
 On the affair of Megara cf. ch. 67. _ lirtKaXoBvTcs Tf|V 4ir«p7a<rfav. 
 
 Laying to their charge the cultivation of the sacred land, and of that which was vm- 
 enclosed. The noun seems nearly equiyalent to the simple ipyaaia, though there 
 may be some latent force in the preposition ; perhaps — extending their cultivation 
 over. On the construction of. Jelf, § 568. I certainly agree with GoU.(cf ch. 18 a) 
 that the article rijs before dopiarov implies that the land described by it is distinct 
 fromr^s Upasyijs. Goll. may be wrong in supposing that the latterwas dedicated 
 to the Eleusinian goddesses, for the distance would certainly be great, but it 
 may have been dedicated in some other way. The dopiaros was probably so 
 left from a political rather than a religious object, since the conflicting claims of 
 individuals, if any were allowed to appropriate border land, wonld be very likely 
 to involve their respective states in warfare. Arn. remarks, that on similar 
 common land the Israelites fed their flocks without disturbance, but when they 
 wanted a piece of ground for a burial place (a permanent possession), a regular 
 sale on the part of the people in occupation was necessary. 
 avSpair(iS(i>v. It has been supposed that allusion is made to the slaves of 
 Aspasia, cf. Arist. Achar. v. 525. toSv d(|)io-Ta(i4v<Dv. Remark 
 
 the present participle, which implies a process going on — the slaves, as they kept 
 
 (5. ) Twv T€\e«Ta£o>v. ' Ambassadors with an ultimatum, ' as we should 
 say. Tf|v €lp^viiv tlvai — the peace to continue, or it may be, they 
 
 wish for the existence of the peace, which all desire, or, ' is the subject of nego- 
 tiation,' or something similar implied, "yvcoiJias kiroiovvro. Kriig. 
 well gives the general sense, ' to lay matters hefore a person for deliberation,' 
 and so T>. 'proposed the subject for consideration.' We may however remark 
 that the words lit. mean 'proposed to themselves judg'ments,' i.e., the formation 
 of judgments : then subsequently yiyvdfiemi. tois yi/ii/iMS is, ' coming to be in 
 their judgments.' The younger student will notice how well this illustrates the 
 distinction between yiyvop.4voi and dpres, the former denotes the process of 
 forming the opinion, the latter only states that persons are of such an 
 opinion. T. K. A. has, yiyvbiievoi, deciding; prop, 'becoming, ranging 
 themselves,' from which I do not see what is to be learnt. en* 
 ap.<j>6T£pa — 'for both views of the case, i. e., for and against.' The whole 
 phraseology is certainly very Intelligible, but Bl. remarks that he only knows 
 one other example, and that an evident imitation of the present passage, Dio 
 Cass., p. 65, iw' AiupSrepa reus yvdfiais yevbinevai. &ira^ — ' once for all,' 
 cf. liiral Bv'/io-KOv<n.. Od. xii. 22, and ' semel' in Latin. Bentl. Hor. Sat. ii. 8, 24. 
 Jude J^^. V. 3. Hebrews ix. 27. X^^eiv Kal irpiio-irsiv denotes oratorical 
 and administrative ability. Niebuhr, Yorlrag. ilber Alte. Gesch. ii. 13, remarks 
 that it was only in the time of Pericles that war and the forum had a real con- 
 nexion. The old statesmen were of necessity generals, and vice versS. But Demo- 
 sthenes saw no real service in the field ; while on the other hand Iphicrates was 
 a most ineflfeoiive speaker in the ecclesia, and Chabrias did not speak at all. 
 
 Chapter CXL. — (a.) i\o\i.a,\, — 'hold to,' from the physical image of a 
 thing or person clinging to an object ; cf. Eur. ffec. v. 402, Siroia Ki<rabs Spvds, 
 Sttws t^(t5' i^ofiai, cf. viii. 81. Jelf, § 536. Erom this notion of holding on 
 to that which is beside you comes the somewhat singular adverbial use qf 
 
 L 
 
14(5 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Ixlif-^'O") ' '"'^t ™ order,' ci. ixajihov rijs 'PoSot^s, II. 96, and Aristotle passim. 
 Of. "conditoris Seleuoi retiiiens, ' Tao. Ann. vi. 4-2. opVTJ — ' excitement of 
 
 feeling,' 'temper,' of. ch. 130 b. — ' men are not persuaded to wndertaJee a war, and 
 actually engage in it, in exactly the same temper,' i.e., do not prosecute it with 
 the same zeal and excitement which they showed when first induced to engage in 
 it. OnTrpdo-iroi'Tas, cf. Jelf, § 752, I. irpis Sc tos K. T. X. Sut that, 
 
 just as circumstances change, they change their notions also, rks ^v/j^opis — 
 quae acciderint, plainly takes in both good and evil accidents, as CEdip. Tyr. 
 v. 44, and elsewhere. 6|j.ota koI irapaTrX'fjo-ia — 'similar and 
 
 coming very near to what I advised before.' Tois ovoT6iflo|Uvoj)s — 
 
 those who allow themselves to be persuaded. toIs Koivg 8(i|«unv 
 
 PoTjSEtv — to come to the rescue of the common resolves, i.e., when there is any 
 diJBSculty in carrying them out, or when their policyis assailed — orneither, i. e.,not 
 either, should you even succeed, to claim a share m the wisdom which devised them. 
 
 (6.) svSlxerai, as in ch. 124 b. The incidents to which circwmstances give rise 
 arewont to take a course which can be as little determined{&fui6us, not to be mastered 
 by study) as the schemes of men. I do not like to translate, as all the editors 
 do — ^vii(poplis by results, for the notion of 'a fixed result' is the one most 
 entirely foreign to the word, yet it is dilficult to do without it; al ^viujiopaX tSiii 
 vpaypAroiv are ' the indeterminate incidents which may be expected to occurin a 
 course of human transactions.' The question is, what does ydp give the reason 
 for? Gbll. supposes that it contains the reason why those who rashly change 
 their mind, even should things turn out well, ought not to claim for themselves 
 the praise of prudence. But it is more consonant with the general course of 
 the argument, and the tone of thought, to say, as Poppo, that ydp gives the 
 reason why even well-planned schemes sometimes fail of meeting with a suc- 
 cessful issue. That this refers rather to what is understood than expressed, 
 will not be any difficulty to one familiar with the style of Thucydides. 
 SiiSirtp KoC — which is the reason too why we are wont to lay at Fortime's door 
 all that chances to fall out contrary to calculation, alridadat — may not 
 have the grave sense of accuse, as Bl. remarks, still I hold that it in some 
 measure partakes of such a sense; just as we are always saying 'to blame 
 Fortvme.' 
 
 (c.) SCkus SiSdvai Kal S^x^o-Bai. The usual terms to denote z, legal settle- 
 ment, though, as Popp. points out, it is clear, from ch. 28 and v. 79, that arbi- 
 tration by some friendly city, if other means failed, is included in the formula. 
 'iffi-v & ^xonev. A clear recognition in ancient diplomacy of the principle of 
 'uti possidetis,' or 'status quo ante.' See also iv. 65. koV ^iriToo-o-ovrts 
 
 — and now they come forward in the character of persons dictating, &c. Bl. 
 quotes waiT6,p,iiios iTrlraaire, give your orders when you are owr master, hut not 
 before. Theoc. Id. xv. v. 90. Sirep is, according to Popp., the ob- 
 
 ject of trpoiSxovTai — ' which they especially hold forth as a pretext,' and this ce^ 
 tainly seems most natural, the construction being that sort of attraction found 
 in such sentences as 6 i,vi)p Sv oT<T8a Sti 1fK0(v. Kriig. denies that such attrac- 
 tion is found before a particle which denotes a condition, as el here, and therefore 
 makes Svep the subject of KaBaipeBelt), [1.1)8' Iv irpiiv avrots iiroXtinio-Oe-^ 
 
 nor leave behind in your own minds a reproach; i.e., nor allow any feeling of 
 self-reproach to linger in your minds. 
 
Chap. 141.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 147 
 
 (d.) t!) Ppax^ Ti toBto. This little trifle, as they call it, involves the whole 
 conjlrmation and test of your pv/rpd6ej or carries with it the whole confirming an 
 testing of your resolution. We seem to have here a sort of iarepov irpSrepov, as 
 the grammarians call it — inasmuch as the ' confirmation' must follow the ' test- 
 ing,' and not vice vers^. This is, I think, more correct than to say, with Bl., 
 that 'pePalaciy Kal ireXpav is an hendiadys to signify ' proof or trial.' 
 lirtTa\8^o-€o-6€ — i.e., ropro iiriTax^v^^Tai v^iiv. Our own ordinary idiom coin- 
 cides — ye will he ordered some greater thing. Cf. ii. 7. On dXXo ti, Jelf, § 545; 
 3, and 548 e. diria\vpur(i(i.evoi — having met it with decided refusal. 
 
 The airb, I apprehend, exerts the same force as in dird^affis, when logically 
 opposed to KOT(i0a(ris, where, as it is well known, the prep, denotes the separa- 
 tion in thought of the subject from the predicate. We may mention, in pass- 
 ing, that, from not knowing this, some Ed. have strangely erred in their inter- 
 pretation of ('■ep-'t'olJ'ivuv &v KaTa<palTjv, (Ed. Tyr. v. 503. Compare (l!ro0ci- 
 aKovra, lb. v. 484. oirb toB to-ou k.t.X. — to treat you more upon a 
 
 ground of equality ; i.e.,. to come here as equals, and not as entitled to dictate 
 (iTiTd<T<royTes) . The Ed. vary about /carairrijtraiTe and /carao-r^o-cTc, of which 
 the former, which has also most MS. authority, is adopted by Bekker, Bl., and 
 Kriig., the latter by Goll. and Poppo. The common reading, KaTaaTTjatjTe, 
 which would be a soloecism, seems to point to /caTao-TiJo-aire, of which Bl. re- 
 marks, 'it may be rendered 'planum ipsis efEcietis,' as infra, ii. 42, t^v 
 eiXoylav ipavephv KaBicrrds.' 
 
 Chaptbb CXLI. — (a.) airiitv. J), tr. henceforth; Pop. and Kiiig., on 
 these grounds. I should rather be inclined to render, forthwith, at once, on the 
 ^ot, as more consentaneous with the etymology and common use of the word. 
 Siavo^8T|T« ' mMke up yowr minds,' usually constructed with an infinitive. But 
 that it should here be also followed by et^oyres is defensible upon the ground 
 that it follows the analogy of yiyvdia-Ka, iyBv/wv/iac k. t.\. Kriig. quotes 0poy- 
 rifu, Eur. Hec. 2^6, /ui) yLyvibsKOLT i/wt, ot roAs <pl\ovs' pXairTovTes 06 <f>povTi- 
 tere. In this case, however, I regard ^Xdirrovres as agreeing with the subject 
 of the verb in the usual way : who when you injure your friends, take no thought 
 upon the matter. Kriig. seems to forget that (ppoml^a has an intransitive force 
 
 and properly means, 'to be in a state of anxiety.' S^varai 
 
 amownts to the same enslavement. On this use of Siiva/j.ai, cf. L. and S. I/ex. 
 and iii. 46. SCKaiuo-is. A Thucyd. word, according to Dion, iii. 
 
 82, iv. 86. Kriig. translates a claim, because originally supposed to be founded 
 on justice. 6|io(<i>v. I agree with Kriig. that controversy is here 
 
 unnecessary. The word must be masculine. irpb 8£kt|s — before an 
 
 attempt at judicial arrangement. iitir. — coming in the shape of a 
 
 comma/nd. 
 
 (6.) Tol, ToB iroXI|j,ov k.t. X. With respeet to what is required for carrying 
 on the war, amd tlie resources of both parties, that we shall not find eur meams 
 the feebler, I would that you should feel assured, by hearing them in detail. A 
 very intelligible and pardonable inaccuracy of expression, for no confusion can 
 arise, though d(T6evi(TTepa is grammatically referred to tuv iKaripois xiirapxivroiv. 
 a^TOvp'yoC — living by their own labour. We must remember that at Athens all 
 manual labour and artisans' work was performed by slaves. In Sparta, agii- 
 
 L 2 
 
148 NOTES ON THTJCTDXDES. [Book I. 
 
 culture was probably the office of the Helots. Arn. has an instructive note, 
 in which he refers to Xen. (Economic, v. 4, robs fnh airovpyods Sict riov xapihv 
 yvfivd^ov<ra {i} yrf) lax^v airoU TpoarWrjai.. ' The number of slaves in Laconia,' 
 he adds, 'was a striking exception to the rest of Peloponnesus. Herod, vi. 137, 
 viii. 137; Athen. vi. 83; Juv. Sat. xiv. 168.' He also makes an apposite re- 
 ference to the ancient Roman republican heroes, who, as is well known, tilled 
 their own land. See on the subject, Ar. Pol. ii. 8, 9. ppax^us — 'for a hrief 
 time.' iin^ipav — sc. iroXi/xovs. Their poverty was the cause why they 
 
 made no wars, and the making no wars was the cause of their inexperience. 
 
 (c.) irXrjpoiJVTes — ^Wemust, with Pop. and Kriig. again supply roWdKis h- 
 7rip.T€LV Sijvavrai. OLTrb twv a^Twv — n. b. not airCiv^ but here tA avriav, 
 
 their oton property . Arnold (quoted by K.) says, that elsewhere Thuc. prefers 
 c(f}eTipuiv — which seems true, ii. 20. ireptoDo-Coi — stock laid by; i. e., 
 
 that which is over and above our daily wants. See ch. 2 b. Pericles doubtles.i 
 meant that the treasures of the Acropolis and their other surplus stores should 
 recur to the recollection of his hearers. pCaiot clirit>opaC — compulsory 
 
 contributions. Cf. ch. 121. iv^oucriv — uphold. Cf. Soph. Aj. v. 212. 
 
 (d.) (ri5|i.. i\ XP'HH- — ' in person than in purse.' rb y,\v -nirriv. 
 
 The Schol. tells us to place a comma at p,iv, and to explain t4 tu>v aijip,iTwi, 
 (which seems right,) hairing confidence about the one that it may even escape the 
 peril,, hut not feeling secwrity about the other (lit. the other secwre) that it will not 
 ere that be spent; lit. that they shall not spend it before they get out of the 
 danger. 
 
 (e.) (1.^ TTpJis 6[i.o£av. The junior student will remark that we have /I'i) here 
 instead of ofc, on account of the hypothetical nature of the clause, if it be not 
 an homogeneous one. Cf rb p.^ pi.v6u>S€s, ch. 22 d, and Jelf, § 904. 3. 
 iSrav — ' since;' but, says Kriig., the ' Zeitbegriff, ' i.e., the ' notion of time' has 
 not vanished. This is well illustrated by our own word when, which often 
 retains part of the temporal notion, even when signifying ' since.' 
 ' (i^Tc — ri,' as often ' nee — et.' The negative affects both clauses. 
 PovX£vTT)p(<o. ' Council-board, or chamber.' This is again a tacit contrast 
 with the state of things among the Athenians, who had a centralized admini- 
 stration, and were not compelled to consult their allies when occasions for 
 action arose. rh t^' iavr6v. This is the reading of the best and 
 
 most numerous MSS., and is well supported by Kriig. from Person, Ewip. 
 Orest. V. 1338, <Tili8ri6' S<rov ye Toiir' ip.4, and tA iwi (r<pas etvai, iv. 28. Tr. 
 what concerns himself personally. A few MSS. read t6 icji iavrdv, with which 
 we may of. 1 . 17, rb icfi kavrdv. But then there is no iKaaros in that passage. 
 
 (/.) <|>6Eipai. The verb here, as often, denotes an extravagant and useless 
 expenditure. XP<^vioi. JwCovtss. ' Being long in coming together.' 
 
 iv ^paffi |i.opC(p — so. xpbvov, understood from xpl"'^oi. This, the common and 
 obvious way of taking the passage) is, I think, better thanKriig.'s, who supplies 
 TTjs ^upbSoD fr. ^wloyres. The antithesis is between the length of the time spent 
 in getting the council together, and the very short time during which at best 
 they can deliberate : to this is appended another antithetical notion, i. «., the 
 greater amount of time which they spend upon their own interests. But does 
 T<f ir\iovt mean, the greater part of that time which they ham for ddiberatim; 
 or, the greater part pf their time during which they are unable to deliberate I 
 
Chap. 142.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 149 
 
 irapol Tf|v eaiiTofi djicXcCav. Arn. cleverly adduces the English vulgarism, 
 along of Ms own neglect — i.e., owing to his own neglect. The cases are probably 
 parallel, though we still require an explanation of the way in which this causal 
 force of the prep, arises. It may be that the idea of close proximity implies that of 
 dependence. Arn. quotes Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, oiibk yiip o^os irapa t7]V auroO 
 pdifiTji' TOffovTov ^7n/j)^7?rat, to which add Ep. ad Cor. i. xii. 15, 16. Cf. L. and 
 S. Lex., and note on irapd, TroXi, ch. 29 c. Cf. Jelf, § 67, iii. 3 0. 
 iirlp kavTov. It certainly seems to me that, according to the sense, flXXos be- 
 comes the principal subject, and that therefore we may tr. that others as well 
 care to look out for their own interest. If, however, it be necessary to refer 
 eavTov to the strict grammatical subject, we must, with Kriig., tr. in sno loco, 
 * in his stead. ' woTe t<^ avTu k. t. X. — owing to this saTne notion 
 
 {i.e., of personal interest) entertained individually by all. The iSig, is intro- 
 duced because, though all do it, they do it each separately for their private in- 
 terest. To ISlg, is opposed aBpbov, ' collectively ruined,' 
 
 Chapter CXLII. — (a.) (i^yiotov 8^. 'But what is of most importance.' 
 Krug. cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 7. wpwTov koX jxiyiarov ol Bedv SpKM Tjp,S,s KoKiovaiv, 
 Jelf, 580, 4. (rxoX<i — PpaSias, Schol. cegr^. Kriig. So we say, 
 
 '/should be slow to doit.' And Shakspeare, 'I'll trust by leisure him who 
 mocks me once.' KuXvo-ovTai. Krug. considers this the only instance 
 
 where the fut. med. of this verb stands for a passive. Upon the general question 
 of such futures, see 1. 68, c. Tr. they will bring difficulties upon thei/iselves, 
 ov fitverol. The opportunities of war wait for no man, in the sense of the pro- 
 verb about 'Time and tide.' Of. Arist. Ach. v. 1630, and Jelf, § 364 a. 
 /leveToi deal. ' The gods are long suffering.' The orators probably imitated this 
 usage in such passages as those quoted by Krug., e.g. Dem. iv. 37, ol t&v wpayiid- 
 rojv Katpol Ol) pAvovffLv. ovSe — ?ie quidem. Thuc. seems to refer to the 
 
 threat of the Corinthians, ^TriTeixiir^As rj x<ipg., ch. 122. It is possible that a 
 report of their proposed scheme may have reached Pericles ; or Thuc. may be 
 merely answering himself. t^v (iJv ^ap xiiXcirov k.t.X. The difficulty 
 
 here does not, I think, so much arise as Arn. supposes, from not seeing that 
 irdXtv is the ace. after irapaffKevdaaa-dat, as from failing to perceive that ifc 
 stands in apposition to, and is an epexegesis of the primary predicate ttj;' 
 iTriTelx^iTi.v. Tr. for the former (sc. iTnTelxi-(nv) 'tis hard even in peace to esta- 
 blish in the shape of a/n equally matched city, i. e. a city which shall be an equal 
 match for Athens. Kriig. sug'gests that iiriTelxto'i-!' may be the subject of irapa- 
 <rKevd(Tair6ai — in this case tr. thai any process of fortification could ever esta- 
 blish, Ac. fj irov 8^1 — surely then we may assume, <fcc. 
 dvTeiriT6T6ixio'|J.^V(i)v. Most Ed. assert that here the passive stands for the 
 middle, and that very unusually. I do not see why the participle should not 
 be a regular passive — when we on our part have been well fortified in their terri- 
 tory, i. c. in the possession of well fortified places. So our military writers 
 might say — well entrencJied in theplace. This is surely confirmed hyireix^adTia-av, 
 ch. 93 d. ' Thucyd. is here distinguishing between two sorts of iirLTelxt-ci-s , 
 the one by founding a city (iiroLKl^'eiv, vii. 27) in the neighbourhood of Athens, 
 strong enough to be a check upon her power (iii. 9) , the other by erecting forts 
 in Attica as strongholds, ' Arn. Of the former, Megara, founded by the Dorians 
 
150 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 as a check on Athens, is an instance ; as also is Heraoleia, cf. iii. 92. The 
 latter scheme was carried out by the fortification of Deceleia. i|>aPt|- 
 
 6t)voi. — 'to be afraid of.' T. K. A. says its usual meaning is to fear. As 
 0o/3^u is to terrify, a little consideration will show the cause of the varieties 
 of meaning found in the active and passive voices. 
 
 (b.) ()>poiipiov — a fortified place, as opposed to irdXcv 6,vTliraKov. 
 aiTop.o\Cais — by the facilities which it would afford for desertion. See vii. 27. 
 The slaves are principally referred to. Similar complaints are found in Aristo- 
 phanes. imT0,\lt,av is governed by the following inf. KtoXiciv — prevent us 
 from constructing an i-TnTeixt-fffia against them, cf. Jelf, § 664. irX^ov -yap 
 K. T. X. Though it is sufficiently obvious, most Ed. point out that tov Karii yriii 
 depends upon iiiireiplas, and iixircipias upon irXiov — we have more experience of 
 land service from our serving on board ship, tha/n they have experience in Tiautir 
 cal maiters from their service on land. 
 
 {c. ) ovSJ ■yelp vjiets. For neither have you, though practising it ever since the 
 period directly following the Median invanon, as yet brought it to perfec- 
 tion. la(r(S)i.€voi. Passive sensu. Cf. supra, (a.) Cf. %tit. Iph.Aul.y. 331, 
 oiyl betvd; rbv ^{xov oIkeiv oXkov o-uk idcrofiaL. For the fact, see i. 80, 121. 
 
 {d. ) Iv T<5 (I'fl jxeXetuvti. This is a good instance of the extension to the 
 participle of that idiom which makes a neuter adjective with an article equiva- 
 lent to a noun. Owing to the use of participial substantives in our language 
 we can easily translate such phrases — owing to their not practising. See iii. 48, 
 iv T(^ Toi^5e d^wvvTi, and Jelf, 436 y. rh 8^ vavTiKiSv k. t. X. For 
 
 nautical skill is as much the worJe of art as anything else, and does not admit of 
 being practised as a mere bye-work when occasion happens, nay, it rather admits 
 of nothing else beimg engaged in as a bye-work beside itself — Siairep koI SKKo is said 
 to be identical with etirep fiXXo. Perhaps it is a little less strong. 
 irdpepYOV — a work done alongside of, or contemporaneously with another. Cf. 
 iv irapipyif, vi. 69 — ylyveaBai is governed by ivSix'^"'^ subaud. 
 
 Chapter CXLIII. — (a.) A^<|>ois. The adverbial dative is not uncommon, 
 as in the case of MapadSvi, but A^X0o(s without iv is seldom found. Perhaps 
 the position oi'0'Kvfnrlacri.v occasioned andjustifies it. {iiroXaPetv — clam 
 
 subducere. Seech. 121. rdSe — as the Schol. explains for the full sentence, 
 
 t4 dvTmdXovs ^/tas airoiis fxerd tuv iictoIkuv etvai airoTs. Cf. Eur. A Ic. v. 506. 
 Kv^Epv^Tas — native Athenian citizens for steersmen, a duty of more imporl&nce 
 in ancient vessels of war even than in our own, for the success of the various 
 manoeuvres employed in action must have materially depended upon their 
 management. vin]pi(ri,a is the ' abstraotum pro concrete,' the 
 
 remainder of our crews; or, as we might say, ' the manning of our vessels.' 
 Krug. thinks the word is exclusive of the iirt^drat. In its narrowest sense it 
 would, as its etymology imports, be confined to the oarsmen. 
 
 (6.) IttI t^ KivSvvio — to their risk, as we use the preposition in such phrases 
 as — to their discredit, i. e. importing the result to which any action tends. Or 
 it may be — over and above the risk. I prefer either of these to the interpretation 
 of the Edd. 'imface of the danger,' T>., and similarly 'bei der Gefahr,' Kriig. 
 ob impendens periculum, or ut penculum adeant, Pop. ^iyiiv. 
 
 The word importing banishment is used, for most of these men would naturally 
 
Chap. 144J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. T^l 
 
 belong to the subject states of Athens, and so be subject to sentence of out- 
 lawry. |iETOt Tf)s ■fjo-crovos JXirffios — siding with the inferior 
 hope, i. c. with the party whose hope of success was inferior. o4k 
 dirb ToB to-ou — other advantages not upon an equal scale, i. e. upon a very much 
 greater scale than the enemy. See these enumerated, ii. 13. 1/\v re. 
 Of. Ar. Ranee, v. 1463, Kriig. oiKin Ik toO 6)j.oCou. It will he no 
 longer the same thing. Of. with Kriig. ii. 44, iii. 32, iv. 10. a|Jidx«. 
 So all the MSS. but one which has d/idx'. Cf. Blomf. ad P. V. Gloss, v. 216, 
 and Ellendt. Lex. Soph, voce dvarel. Kar" ■i^ireipov. This refers to 
 their possessions in Asia Minor and Thrace. 
 
 (c.) el y6,p ^|i€v. So we, 'ifwe were,' an ordinary employment of the im- 
 perfect in hypothetical propositions. tovtod — i.e., the being islanders, 
 Siavoi]6^VTas — having disposed ourselves in thought — having brought ourselves to 
 tlie state of mind. Cf. ch. 18 b. olKCas — without the article, because, says 
 Kriig., only some houses were in a position to be taken. But may it not fall under 
 the head of 'familiar mention, ' as in the phrase 'house andhomej' cf. St. Matt. xix. 
 29, Kai TTas SffTis aijirjKev okias k. t. X. , and in the next ch. Aybpij, Kal \iij,iai. xpijcSa'- 
 SBev l(r\io[UV— the source of our strength, — i.e., in men, ships, and money. 
 
 {d.) TJ<n)\d(rouo-i. They will not keep quiet; there will be a revolutionary 
 ntovement. Kriig. says, after Popp., treu, bleiben, remain true to our 
 allegiance, which is not the special aspect of the idea presented by the word. 
 £X6<t>vp(ris — mMhe our wail; properly applied to the lamentation of females, 
 and here, therefore, the word insinuates an argument against the eflfeminate 
 cowardice of such a course. oIkiuv — cf. supra last note. For the 
 
 sentiment, cf. vii. 77, 7- airois Btjoootoi. These words should be 
 
 taken together, burn with your own hands. toiItwv 76 ?v«Ka— 
 
 for the matter of these, or for the sahe of these at amy rate. 
 
 Chapter CXLIV. — (a.) i% eXirCSa — tending to a hope, that go to make up 
 a hope. Cf. h &irbiei.^w \\. 13. c6^\t|te. Popp. cf. iv. 104; ii. 
 
 94. poiXeaBai fi,^, &c. It has been supposed that the words exhibit an in- 
 version for fi^ idiXyjTe, but I prefer to tr., if you consent to forbear mahi/ng 
 fresh acquisitions of dominion while engaged in warfare. The junior student 
 will do well to notice, as in ch. 139, how strongly this passage confirms the 
 distinction between 6^\(>) and ^oiXojxat, for here eff^XTjre, so far from denoting 
 a wish, implies a constraint put upon the natural wish. The Schol. explains 
 alvlTTerai XiKeXiav Kal 'IraXiav ^s iTre6jjf/.ovv KpaTTJaac. The account of the 
 fatal expedition to Sicily (Books vi. and vii.) is the best commentary on the 
 words, and an entire confirmation of the policy of Pericles, a policy Aristo- 
 phanes has so succinctly expressed. 
 
 T7]V yTJjV Srav vo^lawffL ttiv tCov iroXefj.lcijy 
 eXvaL <r(peT^pav, rijv 5^ a^er^pav tuv iroXefiiuv 
 Trbpov 5i t4s vavs, diropiav Si rbv irbpov. 
 
 Ranee v. 1390-93. 
 
 TpoirTC6c(r8di — -bring upon your own heads additional perils. ir€if>(SpT)|iai 
 *Like S^SotKtt often has the meaning of a present. So iv. 114; vi. 34; Plat. 
 Orat. 403 b.' So T. K. A. after Kriig. But it is perhaps as well to indicate 
 
15 i NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 a shade of difference in the meaning. Ti-. what I have been imd am afraid of 
 is, die, Tas olKe£as. The possessive adjective, accompanied by a 
 
 genitive denoting possession; a. very emphatic formula. The Ed. quote rdt 
 Iblas aOraJv irpoadSovs. Dera. 
 
 (6.) iv d.\X(j) \6yio. Of. ii. 13, and 61. Msyapeas, an accusa- 
 
 tive (as below ris iriXeis), stands, because the primary notion in the speaker's 
 ijiind, even before Sti., It is, therefore, to be rendered, And as regards the 
 Megareans. |€Vir]Xa(rCas. Arnold assigns two motives for the existence 
 
 of these ^evrikdaiai. or ' alien acts' at Sparta — first, to preserve intact the Dorian 
 type of character and principles ; second, to prevent the formation, within the 
 bosom of the state, of a wealthy and mercantile alien body. The junior student 
 should consult Miiller, Dor. i r, p. 4, note. He I'emarks that ^ivqKaaia was only 
 practised against tribes of different usages, particularly lonians and Athenians. 
 Philosophers, such as Anacharsis, the Scythian, were willingly admitted; other 
 persons were excluded ; there were fixed regulations concerning the time and 
 manner of admitting foreigners, and hence the earlier writers, Thuoydides and 
 Xenophon, speak of ^^vqXdaLai in the plural number. See for further informa- 
 tion the authorities collected by C. F. Hermann. Pol. Antiq. Or. § 28, i. 
 KcoXvci, Hermann understands Ti as the subject of this verb, making ^kcivq 
 and TbSe accusatives after it. But it is simpler with the majority of Ed. to 
 suppose that KuXiet is here impersonal ; tr., for there is nothing in the treaty to 
 ^prevent either one or the other; and Kriig. supports this view by quoting Ar. 
 Aves, V. 463. &v Sia/idrTeiv ■ oi KuXiici. ^X""^** — i.e., in the 
 
 capacity of allies. lo-ir€i.(rd|i£8a refers to the thirty years' 
 
 truce. airoSuo-i k. t. X. Tr., when they also grant to their allies 
 
 not to be independent after a fashion which suits themselves, the Lacedcemonians ; 
 implying that the boasted independence of the allies of Sparta was nominal 
 rather than real, for that as a matter of fact they were compelled to accommodate 
 their institutions to the Spartan taste. See i. 19. kot' dXiyapx^av Si aflai 
 aiiTots ^TTtTijSeiujs 6ir(t)s To'XlTevua-if and cf. i. 76; v. 81, 82. avTots 
 
 iKdo-Tois sc. diroSuHTi, permit each of them severally. Kriig. would read oi!™s 
 eKaarovs, but I think unnecessarily. £6iXo)i,cv — cf. supr. this ch. 
 
 note a. &p|o|j.ev . . . apxo|i^voDs. Why are the voices varied? 
 
 Perhaps the first may mean, we will not commence the war; the second, if they 
 take upon themselves to make war, if they allow themselves to be led into a war. 
 T. K. A. writes, ' KrUg. makes ipx^irSai ttoX. be, to commence hostilities witk 
 the intention of prosecuting them vigorously.' I cannot see the rationale of 
 this, nor do I think Kriig. says so, for his expression is, ' Wenn sie sich in 
 den Krieg einlassen,' an expression which is the proper German equivalent 
 for the middle voice, and much more nearly agrees with what I had given as 
 the meaning, quite independently of what others have written. 
 
 (c.) 8«x<'K'«6<i — so. TToXe/teo'. i^o-o-ov lYK«(ro)i.6'Ovs — we shall 
 
 Und the enem^ likely to be less vigorous, or urgent in their assault upon us. 
 "irtpi'yC'YVovTai — come round as results. Cf. supra, ch. 32 c. Kriig. cf ii. 39, and 
 Dem. 3. 12, Toirov fi^bvov irepiylyveffSai /iiWofTos. The lit. meaning of the 
 word, has reference to what remains over and above, after any action. Cf. 
 ■jrepcoua-iav, oh. 2 b. and 141. c. The infinitive el54i>ai must be again supplied 
 ^fter mviivuv. 
 
Chap. 146.] -NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. J53 
 
 {d.) 01 70VV iraT^pes. Our sires at any rate. On the illustrative and infer- 
 ential force of the compound 7e-o5;', cf. supra oh. 2 e. 6p|i.<6|j.EVoi 
 — not starting from such great resources. T. K. A. quotes with approbation 
 from an American ed. this remark, ' dpfji.d>fi,emi happily expresses the eagerness 
 and ardour with which Pericles represents their Grecian ancestors as rushing 
 to battle. ' But, in the first place, opfidfiemi here applies primarily to them- 
 selves, and not to their ancestors ; and, secondly, the word in such collocations 
 comes to be quite a technical one, of. Xen. Anab. passim, and is used in cases 
 where no such eagerness, &c., can be con-noted by it. yv<l>}i,^ k. t. X. — • 
 ' by policy more tha/n byluck, and with greater courac/e than power,' the datives are 
 instrumental, Jelf, § 603. «s T&Si — up to the present pitch, Popp. cf. vi. 
 18, h Td5e ^pav aird. We must explain aird gi'ampiatically by rh iirdpxovra. 
 XeCireo-flai — left behind, i.e., in the race of glory. Cf. \uirop,ivrii> tQv vdv, 
 i. 10. 
 
 Chapter CXLV. — (a.) oiSiv KeXevdjievoi irof/jo-civ — that they would do 
 nothing upon compulsion, or dictation. Bl. quotes imitations from Dion. Mai. 
 Iirl Ktrr\ Kal 6)j.oCa. See note upon ^ivi r^ tcrj koX op^oig., supra, eh. 27 a, 
 ovKiri lirpeo-pcilovTO. For, as Popp. reminds us, Melesippus, mentioned ii. 
 12, was only a herald. 
 
 Chapteb CXLVI. — -{a.) alrCai — ' crimina,' cha/rges which they brought 
 against eaxh other, cf. ahlai, ch. 2 3, ad fin. 8i.a<|>opaC — differences, 
 
 causes of quarrel. aKijpvKTiiis fh> — without, indeed, as yet employ- 
 
 ing heralds (whose services were required in all transactions after an open 
 declaration of war), but not without feelings of distrust. Bl. quotes ' Bellum 
 indictum, tacitse inducise quietum animum tenuere," Liv. ii. 18. 
 Jil'yX^''"''Si properly a confounding, hence, a breaking up, a rupture. Kriig. 
 appositely quotes Plat. JRep. 379 e., ttji' tCiv SpKav Kal vtovSCiv ciyxvciv ^v 
 ndvSapos (rvi/^x^ev, where the word aptly denotes the confusion caused by the 
 treachery of Pandarus. It occurs again v. 26. 
 
154 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 BOOK II. 
 
 Chapter I. — dpxcrai. The war began, strictly speaking, according to 
 Thuoydides' view, with the attack on Platsea, in the month Munychion, B.C. 
 431, the thirty years' truce having been made in the same month, B.C. 445. 
 The revolt of Potidsea took place about Midsummer, B.C. 43'2. Clinton, 
 ft. 6 ir(!\e)jLos Iv9^v8« ■ijSt) seems to have passed into a proverbial expression. 
 Cf. Lucian Psewdomant. §8, Tom. ii. p. 215, ed. Hemsterh. Anl. Gellius, 
 Noct. Att. xvii., xxi. 16, says, 'oceptum est circa annum ferfepost conditam 
 Komam, treoentesimum vicesimum tertium.' dKT|p«KT€£. Cf. lib. 
 
 i. 1 46, where he uses the form dicr)piiKTas' For the termination Tei or t/, see 
 Kriiger, ad loc, and Jelf, § 324 /3. Kriiger reads rei with Hudson and 
 Duker, and saya only one bad MS. has tI. GoUer has t£, and Jelf says, ' when 
 the T does not belong to the root, as in the case of verbal adjectives, e. g. 
 A,K\avTl, and dKXava-rl, aKixyp-l, &c., the ending of the modal adverb is in i. 
 Bauer thinks the termination in as is the more forcible, as Implying an im- 
 placable and internecine war — irdXe/ios dKTjpvKTos. In time of actual war those 
 who passed the borders took a herald with them. This was not necessary now, 
 but their intercourse was restricted and mistrustful. Grote, vi. p. 151. 
 KaTao-ToVTES — ' when once engaged intheivar.' Cf. c. 9, 13, 65, 75, 78, notad. 
 i. I, iii. 6q, and Jelf, 530, 2. K. compares I. 49, 2, KaTaarivres i/idxoi'ro. 
 Kard O^pos Kal x^>'H'''Va. Grote (Vol. vi. p. 153) considers that the bisection 
 of the Thucydidfflan year into depbs and xe'/">»' is marked by the equinoxes ; 
 and that consequently his summer and winter are each half a year, comparing 
 V. 20, tipi]irei i^ ri/Lia-cias eKaripov roS ^;'iouTou rrfv Siva/uv Ixovros k.t.\. 
 But H. Stephens had already remarked that this did not necessarily imply an 
 equal division, ' sed ut tota sestas sit una dimidia pars, tota hyems sit altera ;' 
 0epbs therefore will be ' the season for military operations.' It is plain from 
 Caesar, B. G, ii. •/, that sestas had the same modified signification in Latin. 
 Poppo and Kriiger consider that the winter began with the month MEemaoterion, 
 and ended with Elaphebolion, leaving eight months for active warfare. 
 
 Chapter II. — -ydp refers to ipxerai in chap. i. K. and P. t^ 81 ir4|iirT(|i 
 
 Kol ScKdTu. Cf. Xen. Hdlen. ii. 3. 10, where he gives the names of all the 
 Ephori Eponymi of Sparta for the first twenty-eight years of the war. 
 at TpiaKovToireis (TirovSaC. Cf. ad. i. 115. Xpiia-CSos. Cf. iv. 133. 
 
 This was the Priestess through whose carelessness the Herseum was acciden- 
 tally burnt, in the ninth year of the war. These priestesses of the Argive 
 Juno were called ijpeaiSes — Icpuiilvris k. t. X., in the forty-eighth year of her 
 consecration. Sri Sic )i.f|va$ dp\aVTos — 'having still two months 
 
 to be Archon.' It appears from Ideler and others that the Athenian Archons 
 entered on their office in the commencement of the month Hecatomhseon. If 
 so, and the reading be correct (and we ought not rather to read 5 ' for ou4, i. e. 
 four months instead of two), the attack on Platsa was made towards the close 
 of March, B. c. 431, i. e. in the month Munychion. Kriiger would carry it back 
 
Chap. 2.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 155 
 
 to January. Tpoo-n'oiljcrai — ' adjwngere,' P. 'to make over,' i. e. 
 
 ' restore to the Boeotian league.' Cf. i. 55, rijv K4pKvpav wpo(TTonfi<Tei.ar. 
 d.|ia fjpi apxo|j.^v(p. Cf. Jelf, 699, 2. Boia)Tap\oOvTes. Cf. iv. 
 
 92, V. 37. The Boeotarcha appear to have been thirteen in number, two of 
 whom were chosen from Thebes. They were the military heads of the Boeotian 
 confederacy, chosen by the different states. When engaged in militai-y service 
 tliey formed a council of war, the president being one of the two Theban 
 Bceotarchs, who commanded alternately. Cf. Smith, Diet, of Ant. a. v. 
 irtpl irpuTov virvov. Cf. for this measurement of time. Soph. Aj. v. 278. 
 8i £ivpv|j.dxov ToO AcovTidSov. Herodotus vii. 233, mentions Leontiades as 
 commanding the Boeotians at Thermopylae, He was the ' arch traitor' who 
 went over to Xerxes, and received the royal brand. Sti 8<roiTO o 
 
 ^<$\e|xo$. For the optative in the oratio obliqua, see Jelf, 885, 3. 
 ?Ti Iv elpTJvu, and moreover during the time of a religious festival. Cf. iii. 
 56, in the apology of the Flatseans, iv airovSaU nal Trpoain kpo/j-rivlf. Cf. 
 Duker, ad. loc. where however iepop.rii'ta cannot be equivalent to vovfi-qvla, as 
 we hear c. 4 that this happened reXet/rwi'Tos tov fi7jv6s. irpoKaO- 
 
 c<m]KuCas — ' set to defend the eity. ' So ■irpo(pv\dff(ret.v, c. 93, and pro castris 
 aciem instruere. Caes. B. G. 1. 6c|t£voi es Tf|v d7opov toL SirXa. 
 
 Cf. Grote vi. 153, who clearly shows that Dr. Arnold has mistaken the sense 
 of these words. It is quite evident that no soldiers under the circumstances of 
 the Thebans, making a hostile attack in the night-time upon a garrisoned town, 
 would think of ' piling their arms' any more than Proxenus (in the well-known 
 passage Xen. Andb. i. 5. 13) would have thought of giving such an order to 
 his men in their critical position between the troops of Clearchus and Menon, 
 or Hippocrates to his, when the enemy were actually in sight before the battle 
 of Deliura (Thuc. iv. 93, cf. vii. 3. Xen. Anai. iv. 3. 17). In the passage 
 viii. 93, B^ixevoi rh iirXa i^eKK\Tiala<Tav, it MIGHT bear Dr. Arnold's meaning. 
 But Hudson's intei-pretation is far better, ' armis instnicti et ordine collocati, 
 concionem habuerunt, imminebat enim hostis.' The latter gives the four 
 meanings very clearly. 
 
 a. pro TCLTTeLV et rdTTeaOai. 
 
 /3. pro (rTparoirededeo'daL. 
 
 3. pro castra munire. 
 
 4. pro ToXiopKeiv. Cf. viii, 25. 
 
 In most cases it may be explained by 'Annatl oonsistere,' to maintain 
 rank, resting the spear and shield upon the ground ; and in this case means 
 little more than our 'ground arms.' Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 12, where the 
 soldiers of Thrasybulus rest their shields, but retain the rest of their arms, 
 so 16, § 5, 6, where compare the story of David and Saul, i Sam. xxvi. 12. 
 ^pyou ^Eo-Bai — ' set about their work at once.' dvtiircv. 
 
 The technical word ; therefore found without the substantive, Cf. Arist. 
 Ach. II. 6 5* dyeiirev eftray' ih Qioyvt, rbv xopov. KaroL tol 
 
 irdrpia tmv irdvTwv Boudtuv. After the death of the mythic Xanthus 
 in his single combat with Melan thus (Cf. Grote, ii. p, 22), the monarchical 
 form of government was exchanged for a republican constitution, founded on a 
 mixture of aristocratic and democratic principles (b.o. 1126, Heeren) ; the 
 former shown in the appointment of eleven annual magistrates called 
 
1^6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Bneotarohs, who presided over the military as well as civil departments ; the 
 latter in the establishment of four councils (Boi/XaQ, which were possessed in 
 fact of the sovereign authority, all measures of importance being submitted to 
 them (as Thuc. says alirep dirap rb Kvpos ^x""'"'')' Tradesmen and artisans were 
 allowed no share in public affairs, unless they had abstained for ten years from 
 carrying on their employments. Heeren thinks these BovXal were held in the 
 four districts into which Boeotia was divided (p. 147). The general assembly 
 was held in the temple of Itonian Minerva, near Coroneia (Pans. ix. 34). It 
 was in fact a political confederacy under the presidency of Thebes. The 
 greater cities which had smaller towns dependent upon them, seem to have been 
 originally fourteen, the names of which are variously given. The religious 
 festival of the whole league was called Pamboeotia. Of. Smith's Geog, Diet, 
 art. Boeotia. Cramer, Vol. ii. pp. 191. 238. Heeren's Manual, pp. 146 sq. 
 Por the constitution of the several BovXal, see Smith's Diet, wet. Bceotarcha. 
 eil Tis PovXerai k. t.\, Cf. iii. 62. 66, iv. 118. 
 
 Platcea, or Platcece [Homer uses the singular form [II. B. 504], Ss hiKm 
 etwev 6 TOi.r;T-fjs- Strab. ix. 2, p. 266., as does Thucydides generally: though 
 sometimes the plural as u. 7 a, 10. Herodotus, the plural usually, as 
 does Diodorus and Demosthenes] was situated on a spur of Mt. Citliffiron, 
 from which the Asopus takes its rise, which river separated its territory 
 from that of Thebes ; at the distance of about seventy stadia from Thebes 
 (c. 6. a), the same from Thespis, about a hundred from the border town 
 of CEnoe, and 250 from Athens. The PlatEeans had early separated them- 
 selves from the Boeotian league, considering that their own interests were 
 at variance with this political union, and had put themselves under the pro- 
 tection of Athens, about 93 years before the date of their surrender (lib. iii. c. 
 68), i, e. B.C. 519 (Clinton in an.). They had at first offered themselves to the 
 Lacedaemonians and Cleomenes, but were advised by them to ally themselves 
 with Athens, iii. 55. Herod, vi. io8. In return for the good service done 
 for them by the Athenians- the Platseans furnished 1000 soldiers for Marathon, 
 and manned some of the Athenian vessels which fought at Artemisium. They 
 fought most bravely at the battle of Plataea, and were publicly thanked by 
 Pausanias and the confederate Greeks for their gallant conduct. But they 
 afterwards incurred the hatred of the Lacedsmonians, and especially of their 
 kings, by causing the boastful inscription of Pausanias on the tripod offered at 
 Delphi to be altered (Herod, ix. 81, Demosth. m Newr, 1378). Plataea was 
 burnt by the army of Xerxes, but restored by the assistance of the Athenians. 
 After their suiTender to the Lacedgemonians in the fifth year of the war, B.C. 
 42 7, the town was razed to the ground, with the exception of one building con- 
 structed from the ruins which they used for the reception of travellers (rara- 
 ■ydiyiov iii. 68). After the peace of Antalcidas, the town was rebuilt, and the 
 inhabitants restored, in consequence of the measures of Agesilaus with the 
 Thebans, B.C. 386. Paus. Bmot. i. Xen. Hell. v. i. 33. But in the Archontate 
 of Asteius, B.C. 373, the Thebans suspecting that the Platseans had been, 
 privy to the seizure of the Cadmeia by the Lacedsemonians under Phoebidas 
 nine years before, got possession of the town by stratagem, and once more de- 
 molished it. v. Paus. Bmot, i. After the destruction of Thebes by Alexander, 
 B. 0. 335, the confederates decided on rebuilding Platsea ; but this design doea 
 
Chap. 4.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 157 
 
 not seem to have been earned into efifect till the time of Cassander (Pans. 
 Bceot. iii.), who also rebuilt Thebes. DicEearohns, who died i;. B.C. 385, 
 mentions the town as existing in his time. Traces of the walls, consisting of 
 very considerable masses, evenly hewn and well-built, may be seen near the 
 village of Kockla. (The N.W. angle seemingly was the portion restored.) 
 They are on the steep and rugged slopes which fall from the heights of Cithseron 
 into the valley on the north. Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 182. 
 rliariai irap' airous tcI. 8irXa, Cf. iv. 68, rbv ^ov\biJ.evov lii/ai Meyapiuv 
 liera 'A07jva.loiv 6ri(r6iJievov Th SirXa. 
 
 Chapter III. o4 pov\o)i.^va) ^v. The dative expressing reference to. 
 Cf. Jelf, § 599. 3. Cf. Sail. Jug, 4, uti militibus sequatus cum imperatore 
 labos volentibus esset, and c. 84, Tacit. Agric. 1 8. Quibus helium volentibus 
 erit. Cf. Matth. p. 62I. Itipiov — ' they could not see.' 
 
 paSiios Kpariio-ai. Usually with &,v, as c. 70, but of. our own idiom. ' They 
 thought to get the better of them.' Ivecor^pi^ov — ' offered no violence.' 
 
 Cf. i6. /, liifSkv veiSirepov Toieiv. I. 133. b. For the usual meaning, of. c. 73. 
 Cf. iii. 66. K. eiri-xcipTiT^a. For the plural/orm of the verbal adjective, 
 
 cf ad. i. 88. 8iopiiir(rovT«s. See Grote, vi. p. 155, and the letter of 
 
 M. Marrast. &vtI Tcixovs if, Anaooluthon. Cf. Matth. p. 519. diop. v. 
 Arnold, ad loc, hence the Toi^Mpi^x"'' Arist. San. 773. Plut. 204 (cf. 165). 
 Xen. Mem. i. 2. 62. Plat. Zeg. viii. p. 353. <|>iiXa|dvTas — 
 
 ' having watched their opportvmity while it was yet night, or harely the hreak 
 of day.' (|>opEp(aT€poi. Qy. transitive or intransitive ? 
 
 Arnold takes the former view. The Etym. M. the latter, as also Suidas, 
 Photius, Poppo, Kriiger, Goller. Cf. Soph. (E. T. 153, Eur. Ijyh. A. 620. 
 Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 19. The same double meaning attaches to our English 
 adj. ' fearful,' and the Latin formidolosus. Cf. Tao. Amn. i. 62, and Sail. 
 Cat. § 7. Either sense would be admissible, the suhject being clearly 
 changed. E^iircipCas. The causal genitive, Jelf, § 481. 
 
 e^jiirsCpovs, as always in this collocation, the predicate; 'having for their 
 pursuers, or, to pursue them, persons well acquainted with the bye-ways, so 
 that,' &o. 
 
 Chapteh rV. — |vv€o-Tp^(|)ovTO — 'formed into close order.' Cf. Herod, ix. 
 18. Iv (r(j)£<riv airois. Cf. Jelf, § 623. The local meaning of iy. 
 
 The notion of being in a number or crowd. Kepd|i({>. Plural idea 
 
 conveyed by the singular noun, as c. Ka\d/iip for KaXt£,aois, so w'hlvBo^, &//,ireXos, 
 K. Kdx^v^ iv. 26, Bq,!, fcapiris, P. Cf. Judges, ix. 53. The death of 
 Abimelech and Paus. I. xiii. 7, the death of Pyrrhus, K. of Epirus. 
 ■ueToB. Cf. c. 5. Siol VDKTds — 'the whole night through.' Cf. 
 
 Xen. Anai. iv. vi. 22. TcXeoiTOVTOs tov |ji.r)vos. Cf Grote, vi. 153. 
 
 Toii (J.'fi lK<|>£^'yEi.v. Infin. with article used to express the result viewed as 
 the cause. Jelf, § 492. 3. Cf. Matth. § 540. Cf c. 22, iKKK-ria-tav oi5k iiroUi 
 
 ToO /nil 6py^ ..... i^a/iaprely, and c. 32, iraxM-q too p,T] Xjcrris 
 
 CKirXioi'Tas KaKovpyelv. ficrre Si£<(>9e£poVTO. The action or fact 
 
 primarily represented by the indicative, its other character of a result not being 
 lost sight of. Jelf, § 863. 0. <rTupaK£a> — 'the iron point at the 
 
 bottom of the spear by which it was stuck into the ground.' The dimin. of uTvpa^. 
 
158 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Cf. Xen. Hell. iv. ii. 19. Cf. o-TopBi^. L. and S. Smith's Diet, of Ant. v. 
 Hasta. Called also aavpiin-qp, Horn. II. x. 153. Herod, vii. 41. Cf. i Sam. 
 xxvi. 12, the story of David removing Saul's spear. This point of the javelin 
 was used in place of the peg by which the bar of the gate was usually held 
 fast. The peg was termed /SaXacos, the instrument by which it wa« removed 
 ^aXavdypa. Cf. Arist. Vesp. 200, cum Schol. Thesm. 423. Art. Pessulus. Rich's 
 Dictionary. ^dXavos = ixdyyapov, Schol. (cf. Schol. ad Arist. Ve^. 155) v. ndf- 
 SaXos i^aXavdypa, cf. Xen. ffell. v. 2, 29). P. compares the Homeric dp^efe 
 II. xii. 121, Odyss. xxi. 47). On the subject of bolts, see Bekker's Gallns, 
 p. 282. ol irXefovs, i.e. of those who threw themselves from 
 
 the wall ; for 180 out of 300 were taken prisoners. XaSdvTEs koI 
 
 8LaK<$i]/avT€S. Hendiadys. to 8^ -rrXeicrTov loTrCirroviriv. The 
 
 idea of several subjects included in the word of number. Cf. Matth. § 302. 
 fivTiKpvs. Cf. i. 122, viii. 64, .iEsch. Choeph. 190, Plat. Eutkyd.^. 215. For 
 the difference of meaning and quantity between dvriKpi and dvnKpis cf. 
 Euhnken, ad Tim. Lex. Plat, in v. fi.VTi,Kpus. There seeraa to 
 
 be in this passage clearly the meaning of ' straight ikrough,' as well as of 'right 
 onward,' as T. K. A., who appears from his note to have been unaware of the 
 distinction between the two adverbs drawn by ancient as well as by modem 
 grammarians. An KaTaKavo-ovcriv. The indicative representing 
 
 the fact as actually existing or happening, and as something independent of the 
 thought and conception of the speaker, 'utrum eos concremarent an aliud quid 
 illis facerent,' Matth. § 507. i, but many MSS. have the subj. ; Bekker retains 
 the ind. XP'^i"''^'''^'*'' °- P- ^^- i^- ^9> ^i- 85. Xen. Edl. ii. 4. 37. h. 
 
 Chapteb V. '&&, — ' who should have arrived according to previous arrange- 
 ment. ' Tiis vuktJis. The temporal genitive. The moment of time in 
 which an action takes place being conceived of as a necessary condition of the 
 action and therefore antecedent to it. Jelf, § 523. i. &|jia- 
 reeeived tidings withal.' et ti &pa — ' If, as was not an 
 contingency.' Cf. c. 12. 87. 'Ao-uiris. The Asopus, formed by 
 the confluence of several small streams (one of which rises near the town of 
 Platsea itself, and another near Thespise), flows in an easterly direction through 
 Bceotia ; in part of its course forming the boundary between the Platsean and 
 Theban districts (of. Herod, vi. 108), passing through a plain called Parasopia, 
 then through a rocky ravine into the plain of Tanagra, and falling into the 
 EuripuB, in the territory of Attica, near Oropus. In the upper part of its 
 course it is called Vuriemi, in the lower Vuriendi. It was on its banks that 
 the battle of Plataea was fought, v. Herod, ix. 51. Cf. Leake's Northern 
 Greece, ii. pp. 326, 424 sq. ^I^piil- Cf. Demosth. u. Necer. p. 1379, 
 who uses the very words. (On the discrepancy in the statements of Demosth. 
 and Thucydides, v. Grote, vi. p. 158.) The river is still subject to these floods 
 or freshes. Mr. Hawkins, in a letter to Dr. Clarke (ii. § 3), says that the 
 Asopus is in winter a muddy torrent, and for eight months of the yeai- wholly 
 dry. Karao-KrfT) Cf. not. ad. i. 10. 6, ii. 14. 16. 17. 65. 97. 
 iii. 68. The word here evidently implies all the farm buildings, stock, &c., as 
 in 0. 14, where perhaps it may be limited to their moveable property, v. Grote, 
 vi. p. 173. Por the general idea, cf. Herod, i. 17, on the invasion of Miletus 
 
Chap. 6.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1_59 
 
 by Alyattes. iirdpxEi'V oIvtI twv ?vSov — 'should serve as hostages 
 
 for those withim the city,' or, ' as something which they might exchange for such as 
 were prisoners' el Xdpouv . . . . Ifv apa t^xcoo-i. For the oratio 
 
 obliqua followed by the oratio recta, v. Matthis, § 524. 6, Jelf, § 854. i. 
 «l S^ ]ii\ — 'otherwise.' So 71, CTparevaai ii,i)iiva iror^ aStKUS iir' airois, el Sk /I'fi, 
 dliiveiy rois irapivras. The negative sentence is often followed by d Sk ix^f; for 
 el U, this form being commonly used to express the contrary of the former con- 
 ditional sentence. Of. Herod, vi. 56. Xen. Cyr, III. i. 35. Plat. Eip. M. 
 p. 285. Jelf, § 860. 5. Cf. ad i. 28. Iirofioo-ai — ' confirmed ithy an 
 
 oath.' eK 8'o5v tt)s 7<is — 'at all events' The attack upon Platsea 
 
 was considered unjust even by the Spartans themselves [cf. vii. 18, and Grote, 
 vi. p. 149 sq.], but the murder of the Theban prisoners by the Platseans was 
 still more atrocious. In spite of the impartial statement of Thucydides few 
 persons can doubt that the oath was given or at least implied, and with this 
 belief the Thebans retired. Cf. iii. 66. But the act was highly impolitic as 
 well as grossly unjust. It was ' a hlvmder as well as a crime,' v. Grote, p. 160. 
 Evpv|iaxos. Herodotus (vii. 233) mentions this fact when speaking of his 
 father's treachery. (iBjis. Cf. c. 67. 4. irpoSCSovi'cs. 
 
 N.B. part, pres., because the attempt was not successful = oi iirayayS/jiepoi. 
 
 Chapter VI. — vewTcpov. Cf. c. 3. ivearlpitflv. v.c. iii. irplv &v. 
 
 V. Jelf, § 848. The difference between Tplv and wplv &v seems to be that the 
 latter marks that the action of the temporal clause is viewed as something 
 which will probably take place = ihv ni] : irplv alone leaves it uncertain. 
 TcOvTiKoTcs etev. Optative in oratione obliquS. v Matth. § 529. 2. 
 dxpeioTarovs. Cf. Poppo, ad i. 93. So c. 78. h. 1. t4 dxp"!"" rSiv d,vBpdnro>v. 
 ' The old men and sick with the women and children, ' Grote. 
 
 Chaptek vii. — {a.) \a|i.irpus ' in a glaring manner.' Cf. i. 49. P. 
 (OS iroX«(ii'^covT£s. V. Jelf, § 6go, z. Matth., p. 991. irpeo-peCas 
 
 irapd pacriX^o — i. e. both parties, Athenians and Lacedaemonians, P. and K. 
 The Lacedemonians depended on Pharnaces to convey theirs to the King, 
 cf. c. 67. 'A remarkable evidence,' Grote observes, 'of melancholy revolu- 
 tion in Grecian affairs, when that potentate whom the common arm of Greece 
 had so hardly repulsed a few years before was now invoked to bring the 
 Phcenician fleet again into the JE^eaa for the purpose of crushing Athens ' 
 Vol. vi. p. 167. For the fate of these ambassadors,' descendants of Sperthias 
 and Buhs, see c. 67. Herod, vii. 137. ^)i|i,axCSas '7roio^|ievoi, 
 
 N.B. pres, and imperfect part. ' endeavom^g to win over.' 
 
 (ft.) irpbs Tats aiiToO iPirapxov<rois — 'in addition to the ships already in the 
 Pelopormesus,' saye Kriiger; ' to those in Italy and Sicily, ' says Hermann ; ' in 
 addition to their allied cities in Greece, ' T. K. A. , and this seems to be Thirlwall's 
 view. ' Her allies in this quarter (Italy and Sicily) engaged to furnish her with 
 money and ships, which it was calculated would amount to no less than 500,' Vol. 
 iii. p. 120. Grote apparently inclines to Kruger's view. — ' The Lacedaemonians 
 resolved to make up the naval force already existing among themselves and 
 their allies to an aggregate of 500 triremes, chiefly by the aid of the friendly 
 Dorian cities on the Italian and Sicilian coasts,' vi. p. 167. Diodorus (xii. 41) 
 says the Italians and Sicilians were to send 200 ships, but it does not seem to 
 
l6o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 11. 
 
 have been actually done. eX.o|i.^vois. v- Jelf, § 589, 3. K. cf. ifi. 63. 
 
 P. explains '^Xeadai, as equivalent to ippovetv rd nvos. We say, to take fart, to 
 take up a side. hi(T6.-jiii\(ra.v . Here is another difficulty; what is 
 
 the nominative to ^tt. ? If we had vfjes the construction would be simple and 
 regular. (Cf. Caes. B. G. Naves lis imperatas sunt.) But Lobeck and all the 
 commentators agree that coOs is always accusative and never nominative. 
 Poppa therefore would read iTrerdxSVi (which in fact must be supplied before 
 iToindieiv,) from the Vienna MS.' Cf n. ad i. 141. d. Jelf, § 8g8, 2, considers it 
 as a sort of attraction, the subject of the dependent being transferred to the prin- 
 cipal clause, in which it stands as the object. But, after all is it so certain that 
 caCs coMnot in Attic Greek stand as a nominative ? If it cannot, probably some 
 transcriber, not knowing the fact, substituted it for vrjei, imagining that 
 he was removing an lonicism from the text. dpYvpiov prjTiSi' — 
 
 'a specified swm,' cf. u. 70, and iv. 69. 'The highest amount which each state 
 would be called on to supply was fixed once for all. The supplies in money 
 and stores were also regularly appointed, so that an army with all its equipments 
 could be collected by a single summons.' MUU. Dor. i. p. 198. Thirlwall 
 says, ' If Sparta determined the amount of the contributions required by ex- 
 traordinary occasions, she was obliged carefully to adjust it to the ability of 
 each community,' Vol. iii. p. 119. Cf Wachsmuth, Vol. ii. p. 144. 
 |j>i$vi]C. A greater number would imply a hostile intention. Cf. iii. 71, vi. 52. 
 (c.) k{,i\Ta.X,ov = i&oKliiaiov. Schol. Cf. vi. 97. lidXXov— 
 
 diligentius P. Ke'pKvpav. P. ad. i. 44. Ke0aX. Cf. u. 9, 68. 
 
 Tidnvvdov i. 47, ii. 9. The Zacynthians were allies of Corcyra before. 
 d et-q. v. Jelf, § 885. i, Matth. p. 907. T^pi| Cf vi. 90. 
 
 KaTttiroXep.^io-oVTes. Jelf, § 68 1 . 6, participle used for the infinitive, referring 
 to the present conviction with regard to something future. Karatr. cf. iv. i = 
 debellare ; bello infestare, P. 
 
 Chaptee VIII.- — (a) oX£70v eirevoow oiS^v. P. compares Liv. xxix. i, 
 * Nihil parvum agitabat animo.' ^ppo>VTo — ' ad helium cupid^fere- 
 
 lantur,' GoU. [Cf. Horn. II. \ $0; Odys. u. 68; Callim. H. Del. 175; 
 Appian, B.C. ii. 30], so vii. 7, is rdWa iroM iir^^pafTo. Hence ?/i^ajiro=the 
 Lat. Vale, Acts xxiii. 30. P. translates it 'totis viribus incumbebant.' 
 dpxd|Ji£vot.. A general reflection, which the S^ in the apod, applies to the 
 special case. dvTi\a|i.pdvovTai. So avT^xovrai vii. 66. Cf Plat. 
 
 Protag. pp. 275, 314, Bekker, and c. 62, 'set vigorously to work.' 
 veoTiis = vcoL. So ijKiKla. Abstract for concrete. Cf . 20, 21, 
 diTEipCas. The Schol. quotes the proverb, yXvKis airelpif wSXefios. 
 |iET^upos — ' woimd up to the full pitch of warlike excitement, ' Grote. C£ c. 1 1, 
 17 yap 'EXXois TrScra iTrjpTai. Poppo compares the Latin phrases, arrectum, 
 erectum, expectatione suspensum esse. |vviovo-uv — 'coming imto 
 
 conflict;' so ^wIo-ttj/j.i, Herod, i. 202, al yvufiai ^vviaraaav. 'The opinions 
 clashed.' 
 
 {b.) Xd'yio. The difference between X67ia and x/"?<r/io/ seems to be this — 
 Xp-qixjilis (Th. xpda, xpSffSai) is an answer returned to one who cormiXta an 
 oracle ; XSyiov any ominous saying, whether given by a God unconsulted, or a 
 soothsayer. Weissagungen, K. Cf. lib. viii. i ; for the -xp-riaitoKlrioi, see 
 
Chap. 9-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, l6l 
 
 Aristoph. A v. 960 sq. h. 1. C; xxi. AfjXos iKiv^flr) k. t. X. Cf. i. 
 
 ^3, Ariat. Acharn. t2. Sohol. Call. H. Del. 11, Sohol. Virg. Jin. iii. 77, 
 with Heyne's Excursus. There is a difficulty here, as Herodotus, vi. 98, men- 
 tions an earthquake in Deles, B.C. 490. Wass thinks this is the one to which 
 Thucydides refers, 6\Lyif irpi Totiruv being taken in a loose sense (just as nupei*^ 
 in Latin has the same vague meaning). Pliny {Sist. N. iv. 12) and Seneca 
 (N. Q. vi. 26) speak of only two earthquakes at Delos. See Thirlwall, Vol. 
 iii. p. 124. n, who quotes Toss, Mythol. Forsch. Some suppose that Herodotus 
 merely quoted a report of the Delians, lis iXeyov oi A^Xioi ; and that his earth- 
 quake never did take place. Miiller (Dor. i. 312, Germ, ed.) supposes 
 Thucydides had never seen the passage in Herodotus. Cf. ad i. 20 ; Cramer's 
 Anc. Ch-eece, s.v. Delos. ovetriTetTo. The prep, exerts its force of 
 
 hade, hence ' altius indagabantur,' di'afijTciirSai = duaSev ^■qTelaBai.. So avaaKo- 
 TeiVf avarifxav, avadrjpdVj avaKpli/eiVj Abresch. ap. Gottleb. 
 
 (c.) T| efivoitt irapd iroXii iiroUi. Cf. Dion. xlv. p. 427, Iv. p. 851, who copies 
 this passage. So Appian £. C. i. 82, ■^ eiivoia rdv dvSpuv is rois iirdrovs irapa, 
 TToKi iwolei, which seems to confine the reading iirolei, which K. and Bavec 
 prefer to cLTfiei. Cf. irpoo'iroLTJaat, u. 3, TOLoOfievoi, u, 7? * adjungebat homines* 
 won over, B. For the feeling entertained by the subject- allies towards Athens 
 see Grote, vi. p. 44, and Wachsmuth's Sist. Antiq. ii. p. 98. For irapd ttoXu 
 see Jelf, § 637, iii. 3. f. See note, i. 29. c. irpoeiirdvTwv — ■' set forth 
 
 as their plea, irp6(j>aa-is, for going to war.' For the grammatical construction, see 
 Jelf, § 710 b, the gen. ahs. implying the notion of coMse, instead of agreeing with 
 the subject of the verb, or some object thereof. Cf. Theoph. Ch. t. /uKpo(fii\oT. 
 IXevSepovcnv. Cf. c. -72. a. 'As chief of the Peloponnesian confederacy, 
 Sparta presented the majestic and winning aspect of the champion of liberty 
 against Athenian tyranny and ambition,' Thirlw. Vol. iii. p. 120. 'ippaTo, 
 
 was fully set — had all its energies strung up. lSiaTT|s. Cf. c. 67, where 
 
 we find Pollis, an Argive, fitting out a privateer. , JuveiriXaftpdveiv. 
 
 The middle is the more common form, K. ^ Iatj tis aires 
 
 irap^iTTai. Thuc. repeats the idea, iv. 14, KeKoiKvaOai iS6Kci iKaa-ros (^ /i-q nvi 
 Kal avris Ipyiji irapriv. The perfect ksk. denotes the certainty of the result, K. 
 op'YTi S,\ov. Cf. c. 65, rbv IlepiKkia iv dpyS etxov, and 18, iv roiairri dpyij 6 
 (TTparhs rbv 'ApxiSap.ov e^x^^f ^^^ form with the prep, being more common. So 
 Si' dpyijs exeic, Sii M<iX'?'> c. I [ ; Sid (Tirovd'^s, Sid ipiXtas, Tncrriois, ffoX^/401;, Sid 
 SLktis, Soph. Ant. 742, K. Cf. Plat. Ale. 18. 
 
 Chapter IX. — (a.) AaK. |ii|ji|jiaxoi.. 'Within the isthmus her allies in- 
 cluded all the states of Peloponnesus, except Achaia and Argos : hence the 
 great contest now beginning was not improperly called the Peloponnesian war.' 
 Thirlw. iii. p. 119. 'Apyilav. Cf. Died. xii. 42. Wachsmuth's 
 
 JI. A. ii. p. 106, seq. 
 
 (6.) *<i)Ki)s. Cf. i. 112. u. Had the Phocians passed over to the Lace- 
 daemonian interest since this event, or must we with P. suspect some error 1 
 Probably the former ; as we find them afterwards decidedly joining the 
 Lacedaemonians. Cf. iv. 89. 118, v, 64. AoKpoC. i.e. Opuntii. 
 
 ' AjiirpaKiMTai. Cf. c. 68. iirir^as 8^ Boiarol. Cf. c. 12. e. 
 
 (c.) 'A9i]va£wv St. Aristophanes {Vesp. 707) says the Athenian empire 
 
1 63 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 comprehended looo cities, but some allowance must doubtless Tdc made for 
 poetic exaggeration. Her subjects were more opulent than the allies of Spai-ta, 
 and she disposed of their revenues at pleasure. Xioi, A^o-pioi. At 
 
 that time the only free islands. NatiirdKrw. Of. i. 103. 
 
 ' AKapvdvuv. All but (EniadEe, c. 102, ael vbre TroXenlovs Svras iwv6vs 'A/c. 
 KapCa. Of u. 69. to IttI @pi^Ki]s. Cf. ad i. 56, and c. 29. Xen. 
 
 ffell. II. ii. 5. Grote, vi. p. 90. The Thraceward allies included Potidsea, 
 Chalcidice, Bottiseaand probably Thaaos. The neighbouring inland territory was 
 held by Perdikkas. For the early connexion between Athens and Thrace, v. 
 Herod, vi. 39. Hegesipyle, wife of Miltiades, was daughter of a Thracian king. 
 Cf AVachsmuth, ii. p. 39. and 94. ' Some of the possessions of Thasos on the 
 Thracian coast had fallen into the power of the Persians, and required to be de- 
 livered from the Persian governors by whom they were occupied. We may infer 
 from the expeditions to Eion and Daton that this was chiefly effected by the 
 Athenians, who, upon pretext of compensating themselves for their exertions, 
 retained possession of these places.' [See Mr. Shilleto's pamphlet, Tkucydides 
 or Grote, i. p. to, note.] M'ijXou Kal @^pas. Colonies of the 
 
 Minyje, from Lacedsemon. P. Cf. Thirlwall, i. p. 277. 
 
 Chapter X. — (ct.) rais iroXecriv — i.e. Karb, 7r6X«s, as ^Kaaroi, below. 
 to-poXovVTes. Cf vii. 28, v. 14. They were 40 days absent from home. 
 Cf. 0. 51. ?TOi(i.a ■yC'yvoi.To — 'as they severally got things 
 
 ready.' v. Matth. p. 899. The iterative optative being referred to the several 
 States, each in its turn. tol 8«o \Upi\. Cf. K. ad. i. 74. a. ' Two-thirds 
 
 of all the population capable of bearing arms.' ii. c. 12. u. rb tTtJKTepbv 
 fi^pos. c. 47. ol ^6f/,fiaxot- T. S. p.. HjCTirep Kal rh irpwrov. iii. 15. Cees. B. C. 
 i. 82. Grote, vi. p. 168, explains it as: 'Two-thirds of a certain assumed 
 rating, for which the city was held liable in the books of the confederacy. So 
 that the Boeotians and others who furnished cavalry were not constrained to send 
 two-thirds of their entire force of Hoplites.' 
 
 (6.) 'ApxC8a|i.os. [i. 79. dvrip ^werbs Kal a-ii^pav.'j the second of his 
 name, and 1 8th king of the Proclide branch, succeeded on the deposition of his 
 grandfather Leotychides ; Zeuxidamus having died before his father. Cf. 
 Herod, vi. 71. Pans. iii. 7. 8. He married Lampito, daughter of Leotychides 
 by a second marriage. He led the first three expeditions into Attica, in the 
 years B.C. 431, 430, 428, and died about B.o. 427, as in the following year his 
 son Agis invaded Attica. Plutarch (Cimon, a. xvi) mentions the fourth year of 
 his reign as coincident with the earthquake at Sparta. Clinton fixes his ac- 
 cession therefore at B.C. 469. Paus. I.e. briefly mentions the chief transactions of 
 his reign. His presence of mind saved Sparta at the time of the earthquake, 
 and his whole life justifies the character tliat Thucydides gives him for intelli- 
 gence and temperance. His death was as great a loss to Sparta, as that of 
 Pericles to Athens. He left a daughter, Cynisca, the first woman who ever 
 carried off an Olympic victory. The first 10 years of the war are said to have 
 been called from him ' A/)X'S(iA"os irSXe/ios. v. Harpocration, s. v. and Ac/ceXei/cis 
 TTiiXf^os. Tois Iv Tika = eii apxv, P. Cf. ad. i. to. e, 58. a, iii. 
 
 36, vi. 88. Xen. Anab. ii. Herod, ix. 106. o^ioXoYcoTdTODs irapeivoi. 
 
 — 'most of consideration so that they should be pretent,' i. e, ' those who had the 
 
Chap. 13.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 16^ 
 
 greatest right to be present,' K. saya ^vyKoKiaas vapetvai., 'having summoned to 
 be present,' would be without example, he would therefore read Tapaiviiv. 
 Eeisk. suggests irapuliv, 
 
 CflAPTBR XI.— (ffl.) fimipoi. Cf. K. ad. i. 80. a,. 
 
 (6.) lirf)pTai — iswp at the sound of, up in arms, as c. 8, /leriapos ^v. Cf. 
 liiv. ii. 54, xxi. ■20. irpoo-^X'i t^v 7vc6|iiiv — ' attendit quo tandem res 
 
 sit evasura,' 0. cOvoiav ?x<""'''<- C)f. ad. c. 8, ' having a strong 
 
 feeling in ow favour, which induces them to hope we shall succeed in our enter- 
 prise, and therefore is amxiously watching the result.' This is surely better than 
 the other interpretation, 'that we are doing what we purpose, through hatred of 
 the Athenians.' Kriiger compares Plat. Rep. 608. A, eSvoi. ia-6fi.e8a 4)avTJv<u 
 aiiTT]v i!)s ^i\ri.(rTa. Thuo. iii. 83, v. 40. eTrivoovjiev. So ^irivo^ffai 
 
 i|eis, i. 70. irX^Oet. So ' multitudo ' in Ceesar. ' With superiority 
 
 of force. Cf. oh. 89 a., i. 125. a. Plutarch (PeWcfes, c. xxxiii) says 60,000 men. 
 The Scholiast on Soph. CEd. Col. 694, says 100,000. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 117. 
 oio-i|>dX6ia H'fl &v IX8«v. Cf. iii. 39, irapiaxev Skvov /ht] iXdeiv is rd, Setyd. 
 
 (c.) TO TOV iroX^iitov — 'bellorum eventus, res lellicce,' P. So c. 80. q. v. ri. 
 Trjs dpyijs = ipyi/i. Soph. CE. T. 977. ra t^s tvxtjs. I| oXf'yoD. Cf. c. 
 
 89. In its usual sense in Thucyd., ' on a sudden,' ' at short notice.' K. 
 >jvi>y.'i\ = <t>porfiii.aTi, i. 8i. 'Geist und Muth,' K., but Bl. translates it by 
 ' consiliis.' ? Seech, i. 130. b, from which it appears that it refers to the 
 state of the will or purpose — with resolute will, but cautious action. 
 
 {d.) oiiro). Connect with dStii'dToi', ^. ' Not so toeaJi as their enemies would 
 wish us to believe,' Arnold. Cf. the Latin phrases — ' haud ita magnus,' Jicmd 
 ita pridem. 
 
 (e.) j!|i.p.ao-i. Cf. i. 82. Horn. II. n. 99, 6avna t6S' 6<j>6a\ixo'iai.v dp&p.ai. 
 iv Tif irapavrCKO — ' all are angry to see themselves with their own eyes, and at 
 the present moment suffering some whusual injury.' Poppo. T.K. A. considers 
 bpav a loosely appended explanatory infinitive. &i]6es. Grote, 
 
 vi. p. 169. 'All men exposed to any unusual indignity become incensed, cmd act 
 more under passion than under calculation, when it is actually brought under 
 their eyes.' t^v laDTwv supply Sriovfihriv. Jelf, § 895. c. 
 
 (/.) 8(i|av — ' glory or shame as the result may be.' Euhm oder Schande. K. 
 iir' &p,(t>6Tepa. . Jelf, 635. 3. b, ' both ways,' i.e., whether the issue be glorious 
 or disastrous. Beisk. explains it, ' whether they come out to fight or not.' 
 Birg fi.v Tii 'fJYf|Tai.. Jelf, § 838. -ji. Kd<r|Jiov = eiKoap-ta, eira^la. 
 
 P. Cf. Herod, vii. 104. o^^cds Sex°|'''voi. Combining the 
 
 meaning of each word, ' quicJe to hear and prompt to obey your orders.' A tech- 
 nical expression, K. says. vi. 34. d, d^ius ireWecBai,. 
 
 Chapter XII. — {a.) SiaX-uo-as — 'having dissolved.' We have the middle 
 form below. iweiS^ {p.eKKe Bialiiaiadai. ' When he was about to part from his 
 conductors,' = d(l>l(rTa(r6ai., Schol. eirl to Koivdv — ra r^Xi;. rds d/ij^as. 
 
 To the authorities, i.e., 'to a public hearing.' Cf. K. ad. i. 90, who explains 
 it by ' die Eegierung.' 
 
 (J.) vevtKTiKvta. Simply implies that PericleS' proposition was carried, not 
 that any contrary vote was proposed, i^earpareviiivav, ' now that the Lace- 
 
 M 2 
 
164 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 dcenionians had taken the field.' irpVv aKovo-ai. The aorist in- 
 
 finitive. ' Without a hearing.' The phrase is obaervable in connexion with 
 S. Matth. i. V. 2$, Sas oC Itckc. 
 
 (c.) Sti <j8e T| '^|x^pa k. t. X. The Sti simply introduces the saying of 
 Melesippus, as in Hei-odotus, passim. Hudson compares Virg. ^n. iv. 169, 
 
 Ille dies primus lethi primusque malorum 
 Causa fuit. 
 
 Aristophanes had this passage also in view in the Pax, v. 435, according to the 
 Scholiast, 
 
 ffTrivdovTES eiixti/xeff^a ttjv vvv i)fiipa.v 
 
 "'EWTjaiv dp^ai Traai iroWCiv K&yaB&v, 
 
 Gott. compares Hom. v. 63. Xen. Hell. ii. ii. 23. "Valckenar ad. Herod, v. 
 97. Sail. /mjt. cos 8J a<|>iKeTO k. t. X. Observe the change of 
 
 subject. Tois iinreds. Cf. ad. c. 9. b. 'The whole of their 
 
 cavalry.' 
 
 Chapter XIII. — (a.) fyyKe^oy.ivmi «s t. I. The preposition referring to 
 a verb of motion, connected with a verb of rest, when previous motion is implied. 
 So in Latin, 'Abdo me in Italiam.' So dBpoit^eiv, ^wayeipeiv, aXll^eiv, is. 
 See notes, i. 51. b, 65. b. o-TpttTi]7bs — 'minister of war,' Niebuhr 
 
 compares the re-election of Pericles year after year to that of Lorenzo the 
 Magnificent at Plorence year after year to the post of Gonfaloniere. Cf. c. 65. 
 S^KaTos a«T(5s. Cf. Hom. II. n. 495, 
 
 rbv TpLffKaiSiKaTov p^eXtrjS^a dvfibv a.T7j6pa. 
 
 H'f| iroXXttKis — ' ne forte,' properly, ' as often happens.' It has this force after 
 el, icLv, p,^, ha. p'^. irapaXCirg Kal (J.'f| SutScnj — 'pass by without 
 
 injwring.' Justin (iii. j) says it was actually done. Cf. Tac. Hist. v. 23. 
 ' Sicut Cerialis agros villasque Civilis intactos, notd arte ducum sinebat.' So 
 Coriolanua. Fabius's lands were spared by Hannibal, v. Liv. ii. 39, xxii. 
 23. 0. r6, &,yi\ 9i.aivav. Cf. i. 127 <)v 4pa (li^ 
 
 Si\JMrain.v — d(j)Cir)cri,v — ' in the possible event of their iwt ravaging.' S.pa implies 
 that there existed some ground for such an inference. See also Jelf, § 88 7. i. 
 Matth. § 529. oIkCus. Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 
 
 Sid. x'lpos ^X"'"- -^ metaphor from driving, ' to have well in hand.' Matth. 
 §580. 
 
 (6.) TO 8J iroXXd tov iroX4|iiov 7^5(11) K. t. X. ' That superiority in war as a 
 general rule is the result of skill and superabundance of resources.' 
 
 (c. ) irpoo-i.iSvTMV c^aKoo-Uv TaXAvTwv k. t. X. — ' since the average {iirl t6 iroXiS) 
 yearly revenue amoimted to, ' &c. The original amount levied was 460 talents, B.C. 
 477, Thuc. i. 96. The money was paid to the Hellenotamise at Delos, which 
 was then the treasury, rap-ietov. The treasure was removed from Delos to Athens 
 during the lifetime, and with the concurrence of, Aristides, who had adjusted 
 the original levy (0. Nep. in vit. 3). Wachsmuth supposes this to have been 
 done B.C. 461, 01. 79. 4. Pericles was appointed the superintendent (v. Diod. 
 xii. 38), as at his instigation, or that of the Samians, the treasury was removed ; 
 a:nd by a despotic decree passed apparently at his suggestion, the amount was 
 
Chai'. i^.j ]SOTES ON THUCYDIDES. iS^ 
 
 laiaed to 600 talents. Towards the close of tlie reign of Philip it was raised to 
 1200 talents ; and the management of it was entrusted to the orator Lycurgus, 
 who, like Pericles, defrayed out of it the expenses of restoring and improving 
 the public buildings. Grote considers these 600 talents to be equal to about 
 138,000^. (cf. Diod. xii. 40). 
 
 6.vev TTjs &XXif|s 7rpo(rd8ou — i. e. (/yopolj t^Xtj, irevrrjKoffTTi, rtjttoj/iara, the 
 fierolKtoVj or 'tax on resident aliens,' the revenues from the mines at Laureium 
 (for which see Boeckh's dissertation at the end of his Pul. Econ., Grote v. p. 
 71 sq.). Cf. Xen. Aniai). vii. 1. 27. 
 
 Tcl 70IP irXeio-Ta . . . jjivpia I'y^veTo. The buildings erected or restored by 
 Cimon and Pericles might easily have cost this sum. Cimon built the temple 
 of Theseus, the Dionysiac theatre, the stose and gymnasium, and embellished 
 the academy, the agora, and other parts of the city, though this Plutarch says 
 he did at his own expense. Pericles completed the fortifications left unfinished 
 by Cimon, rebuilt many temples and buildings which the Persians had de- 
 stroyed, and erected the temple of Eleusis, the Parthenon, and the Propylsa: 
 The last building was one of the noblest in Greece ; it was five years in erecting, 
 and cost 2012 talents = 460, oooi. (v. Harpocrat. in voc). The whole was of 
 Pentelic marble, and the size of the blocks was enormous, v. Paus. i. 22. 4. 
 Aristoph; Equit. 1326. It was commenced in the Archonship of Eutbymenes — 
 the architect was Mnesicles. (v. Smith's Geog. Diet. art. Athense ; Miiller's 
 Anc. Art. § 109. 3 ; Wordsworth's Greece, p. 136.) Is IIoTCSaiav 
 
 From c. Ixx. b, we learn they had then spent 2000 talents on the siege, and from 
 iii. 17, that 3000 Hoplites were engaged in the blockade, each of whom received 
 two drachmae a day. ap^vpCoD lirio-fj(j.0D — ' argentwm signatum.' 
 
 Coined money, as opposed to bullion, dpyvplov S.a7)nov (vi. 8), aurum infectum, 
 and aurum factum in (rK£iiri, avaBifixaTa, ayoKfiara, &c. The first stamper of 
 Grecian coins is said to have been Phido the Argive, c. B.C. 894, who coined 
 some silver money in jEgina. The oldest Greek coins to which a date can be 
 unliesitatingly assigned, are the silver medals of Alexander the First of Macedon, 
 minted about the year of the Battle of Marathon, v. Cardwell, on Coins, 
 Lect. V. p. no ; Wordsworth's Greece, p. 127. 
 
 (d.) Upa o-Ktili) — ' sacred utensils used inpuhlic processions and games.' Of 
 these spectacles Pericles was very fond, as one great engine of political power. 
 V. Plut. in Vit. xi., del fJ.h riva Biav wavqy\ipi.KTjV 9i iarlaaai fj irofiirijv etvai /j-tj. 
 Xaviinems iv dcrrei. These sacred vessels (Tro/xTreta) were kept in the Pom- 
 peium, a building near the Pira'ic gate, and probably chosen for this purpose as 
 the most suitable place near the road to the Piraeus. [Cf. Paus. Att. i. 2 ; 
 Harpocrat. in v. iro/nreTa, Demosth. c. Androt. p. 615.] Pausanias says some 
 of these processions were annual, others at longer intervals. Leake and MiiUer 
 suppose the Panathensea are alluded to ; Forchhammer, the Eleusinian festival. 
 The orator Lycurgus is said to have furnished vases and other ornaments and 
 dresses for the Panathenaic processions. Cf. Paus. Att. i. 29; Plut. mt. 
 Zyewrg. 0-KvX.a Mi^SiKd. The scholiast mentions the silver-footed 
 
 throne of Xerxes, and the golden aoinaces of Mardonius, which appears to 
 have been worth 3000 Darics. (Dem. adv. Timoc. p. 741.) Cf Herod, viii. 
 90, ^sch. Pers. 466. For the grammatical constraction of TaXdvTwv, see Jelf, 
 j8o_ jj_ T«v dXXwv tepiov. The commentators differ as to 
 
1 65 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 whether these words refer to sacred 'vessels' or 'to temples' Arnold main- 
 tains that they can only mean the latter. Bloomf. and Poppo extend the sense, 
 and Kriiger clearly shows from Xenophon (Hell. i. 7. 23), Appian (ii. p. 613), 
 and Isocrates (viii. 126), that the sense need not be restricted. 
 l^€CpY<i)VTai — ' if they should he absolutely excluded/ from all revenue arising 
 from these things, tribute, offerings, &c. oiTfis Tfjs 6eoO. 
 
 This was the famous chryselephantine statue of Athena, executed by the hand 
 of Phidias himself. It was twenty-six cubits, or nearly forty feet high. Schol. 
 ad Arist. Pac. 588. Philochorus reckons the moveable drapery at four talents 
 more than Thucydides, and by some the weight is placed even at fifty. (Diod. 
 xii. 40, where "Wesseling considers Philochorus' statement to be the most pro- 
 bable, the others using round numbers.) For a full account of the statue, see 
 Mailer's Ancient Art, § 113; Smith's Geog. Diet. art. Athense, and Diet, of 
 Biogr. s.v. Phidias, Vol.iii. p. 250; Cramer, v. 2, p. 330, Plin. E. N. xxxvi. 
 § 5. 18, Sillig. The statue was finished and dedicated B.C. 438. 
 OTafl|J.ov. V. Jelf, § 578. 
 
 (e.) )(pu<r£o« dir^(|>8ov — ' aurum coctum, refined gold.' Cf. Theog. 449, 
 Herod, i. 50 ; opposed to white gold, XevKos XfO'^h i- «. alloyed with silver ; 
 fr. ^i/'w coquo ; cf Butt. Irr. u. p. 114. Cramer calculates the value of this 
 gold at more than 150,000?. sterling of our money, ii. p. 297. Poppo considers 
 it = ten times the value of silver. Cf. Bockh, P. CEc. i. p. 479 and 23, Grote 
 vi. p. 163. Lachares appropriated the gold. v. Paus. i. xxv. 5. 
 ir£piai.pET(Sv may refer either to the statue or the gold, ' capahle of having the 
 gold detached,' or ' capable of being detached.' Bl. and T. K. A. prefer the 
 latter, Poppo and Kriiger the former sense. XP^fiaci. The 
 
 causal dative. twv irap' ?iraXJiv — 'the men imho manned the ram- 
 
 parts,' sing, for plu., ' the line of battlements,' or rather the teimination implies 
 he plural, just as we might say the ' coping' for the line of ' coping-stones,' cf. 
 ^i\a<nv, ch. 14. a. Horn. II. xii. 381 ; Blomf. ad. .^sch. S. Theb. 30, Ag. 
 372, Arist. Ach. 72, irapa tt]V liraX^iv ii> ipopvT$ KaraKel/ievos. Herod, ix. 7; 
 Thuc. iv. 115, vii. 28. i^OXaao-ov — ' were on ga/rri^on duty.' 
 
 (/.) |jietoCk(i>v. Only the richest resident aliens, probably the l<rore\ei5 
 served as oTrXiTat. They mostly served on board ship. (See Poppo, who quotes 
 Bockh's Inscrip. i. p. 306.) Cf. c. 31. h. 1. i. 143, iii. 16. These iaoreXeis 
 ranked after the irpS^evot, needed no irpoffTdrtjs, and paid no /xeroiKtov. S. and 
 L. Cf. Clinton, F. H., Vol. ii. p. 389. Toii $aXT)piKov reCxous. 
 
 The Phalerio or Southern wall (as the Peiraic was sometimes called the 
 Northern wall. Plat. Rep. iv. p. 440), formed one of the legs {<!Ki\ti, Dio(J. 
 Sic. xiv. So Me7apu<a tr/cA);, Arist. Lysist. 11 70), or as the Latin writers call 
 thera, the arms (brachia, Liv. xxxi. 26) of the Pirseeus. It ran nearly due 
 south to Phalerum, consequently not parallel to the other two. By airou rod 
 kvkXoO, Thuc. means the circuit of the walls of the Astu itself. The part 
 guarded was forty-three stadia ; the space between the long wall and the 
 Phalerio was left undefended. Col. , Leake says the outer or Piraic wall alone 
 needed guarding, that being the only direction by which an enemy could ad- 
 vance, To the S. and E. of Athens there was no passage but by a circuitous 
 and difficult pass between the city and Mount Hymettus. The two long walls 
 ran in a S. W. direction to Peirseeus, parallel to, and at a distance of 550 feet 
 
Chap. 15. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 1 67 
 
 from, each other. The whole subject of these names is exceedingly compli- 
 cated ; perhaps from a misconception of n, passage in Harpooration (s. v. SiA, 
 pAiTov Telxovs). It seems, after a careful examination of the different passages, 
 that the following statement may reconcile the conflicting opinions. The two 
 original walls were the Piraic and Phaleric, called respectively ri ^opeiov and 
 t6 viriov Tilxos. These were commenced during the exile of Cimon, B.C. 457, 
 and completed the following year. Having thus far succeeded in carrying his 
 plans, Pericles, some time between this date and the commencement of the 
 Peloponnesian war, urged the Athe^iians to build the intervening wall. 
 Socrates we know (Plat. Gorg. p. 455) was present at the assembly when he 
 pressed his scheme. The object was to render the communication between the 
 city and Pirseeus quite secure. This intervening wall was called rb dia iiiaov 
 Tcixo'i *"<! i" reference to this the Piraic wall was called t6 l^uiBev. But very 
 frequently in later times the term of vbriov reixoi originally applied to the 
 Phaleric, was given indiscriminately to this intermediate wall from its relative 
 position to the Piraic. After the erection of this intermediate wall, the Phaleric 
 was suflered to fall into decay, as we hear of the destruction of two long walla 
 by the Lacedaemonians (Xen. Hell. ii. 2), and Conon after the battle of Cnidus 
 probably restored but two. Their foundations may still be traced in many 
 parts. Cf. Cramer, Vol. ii. pp. git, 12. 347; Smith's Geog. Diet., art. 
 Athenae ; Leake's Tapogr. p. 351, and Forchhammer's essay, quoted by Smith; 
 Clinton, F. H. ii. p. 394. toB ircpUo-eo-Sai — ' that they would out- 
 
 last the war, ' Hobbes. 
 
 Chapteb XIV.-— (ffi.) Karao-Kcvfj. Cf. ad i. 10, ii. 5 ; Isoor. Areop. c. 20, 
 KaOaipovvTcs t^v ^iXo)a*iv — * taking down and carrying into the city (for itreKO' 
 lil^ovTO refers to this also), the wooden frameworle and weather-boarding of their 
 houses.' Part of the ravaging an enemy's land consisted in the destruction of 
 these buildings. Cf. Herod, i. 17, who speaking of Alyattes' invasion of the 
 Milesian territory, says, olK'quaTa rb, iirl r&v iypSiv oire Kari^aXKev, oOre 
 ivewtjj.irp'ri, oOre dipas diriffira. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 2. 16, tcl dirA rCiv oIklQv 
 |i)\a. and vii. 4. t. Eti|3oiav. Cf. i. 23. 114. toLs 
 
 vi]irov% tAs liri,K€i|t^vos. e. g. Atalanta (which they afterwards fortified as a 
 garrison, 0. xxxii. a), the Petaliae, .^gina, Maoris, &c. avao~ro(ris 
 
 (what precedes), iieramaracns, u. xvi. , 'a breaking up of their establishments mid 
 removing elsewhere,' so vii. 75; an unusual sense, copied by Dio Cass, and 
 Appian. B. Its usual application in Herodotus is to the removal of the inhabi- 
 tants of a conquered city, to the country of their victors, and their replacement 
 by settlers sent from their own country, as in the case of .(Egina by the Athenians, 
 Samaria by Shalmanezer, &c. Cf. Herod, i. 177, vii. 1 18, ix. 106, &c. 
 
 Chapteb XV. — (a.) Ir^puv naWov. For ^ iripots. v. K. ad. i. 85. b. 
 i^ecTTi 8* iip.?v /laWov eripav. Kara irdXeis. Strabo, ix. 609, enumerates 12. 
 
 irpvravcta — ' toion halls. ' The irp. was the mark of a distinct state or indepen- 
 dent civil community. The common altar- fire was here, (hence derived by some 
 from Tvpbs ranelov,) and stood in the same relation to the national, as the iffrta 
 to the domestic home. v. Liv. xli. 20, penetrale Urbis. Cf. Thirlwall's 
 Greece, iii. p. 122. 
 
1 68 -NOTES ON THUCYDID35S. [Book II. 
 
 (6.) — ^'EXevo-ivCoi. Of. Platon. Menex. p. 339. Pint. vit. Thes. p. 49. 
 ipacrfXevcre — 'came to the throne,' lit. 'became hmg.' Cf. Herod, ii. 1. 
 (leTol Tov Idvctov. v. Poppo. ' Who to •political sagacity added great power.' 
 Of. Dion. Hal. Ant. p. 82. p.eTh, tov SpaffTTjpiov kcll ^vvcrbs. ra 
 
 PovXfuT^pLa. The centres of municipal government, town cotmcils, so to speak, 
 though of course the analogy is imperfect. ve|io|j,^vovs. v. ad. i. 
 
 ■58. Cf. i;. 27. ' Continuing to possess and occupy, and reap the fruits.' rois 
 Kapirois <l>ipeai. The union effected by Theseus had no relation to residence, 
 but merely incorporation into one political body, Athens being made the 
 supreme seat of government. Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 99. 
 JwTeXoxlvTtDV. Explained by Dr. Arnold as — ' contrihuting to it I' It surely 
 refers to ' forming one portion of a political union or state by paying joint 
 taxes to it.' So Kruger. ' Staatlichen Genossenschaft.' Cf. iv. 76. 
 IwoCKLa. Hudson considers this festival to be equivalent to the 
 /xerolKia, celebrated on the loth day of Hecatombaeon. [Or perhaps we may 
 say more correctly that what in Thucydides' time was called ^vvoixla was 
 called in Plutarch's days /ierolKia. Plut. in vit. Thes. xxiv. i.] It was origi- 
 nally distinct from, but afterwards identical with, the Panathenaea. 
 
 (c.) — ST](iioTeX^. K. Cf. Bockh. i. p. 228. SrnioreXTJ, that for which the 
 •n-6Xis furnishes the victims. b-qp.onKb, for which the Srjp,o! (or S%of). 
 *OXu|jnr£ov. The Olympeium was one of the most ancient buildings in Athens, 
 and was said to have been founded by Deucalion, v. Paus. Attic. I. xviii. 8. 
 Peisistratus raised a magnificent structure on the site of the old building, but 
 did not live to finish it. After the expulsion of Hippias it remained untouched 
 for 400 years ; the prejudices against the Peisistratidae, as Mure observes, 
 probabl}' operating against its completion. Antiochus Epiphanes contemplated 
 its completion, but it was eventually finished by Hadrian, who was present at 
 its dedication (Spartian, in vit. Hadr.) . It contained a chryselephantine statue 
 of Jupiter. Its site is still indicated by 16 gigantic Corinthian columns of white 
 marble, to the S.E. of the Acropolis, near the right bank of the Ilissus. They 
 are the largest columns now standing in Europe. [See the authorities in Cramer, 
 ii. p. 324, and Smith, art. Athenos, p. 289.] Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 159. 
 IlvfiCov. Cf. vi. 54, stood near the Olympeium. Cf. Cramer, ii. p. 326. 
 rTJs. Sumamed Kovporpdipos. Hudson. Iv ACfivais. Limnse was 
 
 a district S. of the Acropolis. Cramer considers this temple identical with the 
 Leneum (ii. p. 326). Cf. Harpocrat. in v. Arist. Ban. 218. The Dionysiao 
 theatre stood close to it ; v. Leake, Topogr. p. 54. Poppo quotes Schneider De 
 SeScemcd,'p. 44. 'Av8ecrTT)ptuvi. This festival, (distinct from the 
 
 Lenaea and rural Dionysia, Bockh and Wachsmuth) was celebrated on the nth, 
 13th, and r3th of Anthesterion. The 12th (0! x^") was the principal day. v. 
 Wachsra. ii. p. 254 sq. and 286. Cf. Demosth. v. Necer. p. 1371, and Schneider, 
 U.S. Cf. Clinton, ii. p. 332. Donaldson's Gk. Theat. p. 132. 
 
 (d.) — Kpi\vy\—^wiaLKpoiva. Hudson considers that the epithet Ivi/eax. 
 is not to be taken literally, but as equivalent to Tro\vKpoivtp (as Cratinus ap. 
 Tzetz. Chil. viii. 184, calls it) as Tirgil says of Timavus, which has but 7 
 mouths ; 'undo per ora novem,' JEn. i. 245. So Sohol. ad. Arist. Equit. 523. 
 SuSeKaKpoivov arSfia. Harpocrat. s. v. imeax. and \ovTpo(p6pos, where see 
 Valesius' note. Paus. i. xiv. i. Plin. ff. N. iv. 7, and Bekker's Chariclei ii. 
 
Chap. 1 7. J NOTES ON THUGYDIDES. 1 69 
 
 460 . Thia fountain of Callirhoe was the only spring water used for drinking by the 
 Athenians, all the rest being too salt and brackish for that purpose. A fountain 
 near this spot still retains the name of Kalliroi, and Col. Leake says it is still 
 resorted to as the only spot in the neighbourhood furnishing sweet water, 
 Topog. p. 47. The natural sources were covered by some kind of building, and 
 fitted with 9 pipes by the Peisistratidse. Enneaorunos was therefore its 
 architectwal name, the spring being called Callirhoe. Cf. Stat. Theb. xii. 629, 
 ' Callirhoe novies errantibus undis.' It flows from a ridge of rocks crossing 
 the bed of the Ilissus, from which it was distinct ; 7 of these orificesare still visible, 
 [v. Smith, Athence. p. 292. Cramer, ii. p. 338.] IkcivoC — 'the 
 
 men of that day.' wdXis. K. Cf. v. 18. 10. Arist. Lys. 245. 
 
 487. 
 
 Chapter XVI. — oSv. Epanalepsis, from c. xiv. o'lK^irei. — 
 
 In the then prevailing Tna/nner of living, in their own toivnships in the country^ 
 the Athenians participated. The unusual construction of a dative after 
 fieTe^xov instead of a genitive, ia variously explained by commentators ; but a 
 dative after the nncompounded fiera in the sense of local union or community 
 is common enough, v. Jelf, § 636. ii. b, and § 642. b. Poppo produces two 
 instances of a dat. after Koivoiveiv from Demosthenes, and the Scholiast simply ex- 
 plains it as an antiptosis, which is most natural. Baver would supply the prepo- 
 sition h, 'had a share in.' Abresoh. says it is an independent dative = ' quod 
 attinetad.' Kriiger supposes an omission. Ttj lirl iroXii must be taken 
 
 adjectively — ' the long protracted residence.' iravoiKr)<rC(j, — ' most of 
 
 them having been born or bred in the country, or having settled amd lived there, 
 they amd all their fam,ilies.' Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 122. ov paSCcos. 
 
 A litotes — 'with great reluctance.' |i£Tovo<rTcto-6is. An idea 
 
 exactly conveyed by the French ' demSnager.' av6iXi]<{«dT€s — 
 
 ' wieder-hergestellt,' K., implies that they had 're-collected round them all their 
 ancient comforts of villas, farm and out-buildings, household furniture and 
 decorations, farm stock,' &o. Cf. Isocr. Areop. 20. lepd, as 
 
 Thirlwall remarks (u. s.), ' though the incorporation of the Attic townships had 
 for ages extinguished their political independence, it had not interrupted their 
 religious traditions, or effaced the peculiar features of their local worship.' Bl. 
 compares Aristoph. Pax, 574. Slairav implies ' changing their home, as well 
 as their way of life. ' 
 
 Chapter XVII. — (a.) oIk^o-eis — 'had dwellings of their own to. go to.' 
 The whole number of houses in Athens has been reckoned at about ten thousand. 
 Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. 3. 24. Mem. iii. 6. 14. CEcon. viii. 22. Most of these 
 were small and incommodious (see Bekker's Charicles, quoted above), none 
 above one story high, constructed either of a framework of wood {^i\a<ns) or of 
 unburnt bricks. Even those of Themigtooles, Aristides, and Cimon, were very 
 ordinary buildings, (v. Demosth. u. Aristocr. p. 689. Olynth, iii. p. 3Si 6.) 
 Their insignificance ia shown by the small prices they fetched, i. e. from three or 
 five minae to 120 ; 50 minse was a considerable price. v. Bookh, P. E. p. 66. 
 Tlie influx of a rural population (Acharnse alone furnishing probably a popula- 
 tion of 12,000, not including slaves) into a city already containing 120,000 
 
IJO KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 persons according to Clinton, or 192,000 according to Leake, must have been 
 most distressing. Of. Clinton, F. H. ii. 387, Leake, p. 6t8, and Bockh. p. 30, 
 who fixes the population of the city and harbours at 180,000. v. Smith, art. 
 Athens, p. 622. T^lpf)|i.a — ^places void of building.' 'E\€v<rivCoD. 
 
 The temple of Ceres and Proserpine, where the lesser Eleusinian mysteries 
 were celebrated. Paus. Att. xiv. It stood probably in an island of the 
 Ilissus, a retired spot, where foundations are still discernible, v. Leake p. 115. 
 Cramer, ii. p. 339. rb IjEXao-yiKiSv. A spot originally inhabited 
 
 by the Pelasgians who fortified the Acropolis, and from which they were 
 expelled because they plotted against the Athenians. It was applied not only 
 to a portion of the walls, but a space of ground below. It is placed by Leake 
 and most authorities at the N.W. angle of the Acropolis, the S. side being 
 called Cimonium. ^smSXh, A thence, p. 266. Cramer, ii. 332, and cf. Schol. 
 Arist. Av. 833. Herod, v. 64, ii. 51, vi. 137. Paus. i. 28. 3. Tbuc. iv, 
 109. Hesych. v. Te\a(rytK6v, and Smith, art. Pelasgi. ipyiv-^ 
 
 'unoccupied.' Grote, vi. p. 173; ' wntrodden,' Thirlw. iii. p. 123. 
 l|a>K^6ir| — ' was blocked up with buildings.' ' Impletum fuit habitaturis,' Bav. 
 Cf. Soph. (Ed. 0. 27. Reissig. 
 
 (6.) — 7^vccr6ai. Sc. SoKoOaiv. K. Kaxeo-Kevdo-aVTO — 'richteten 
 
 sich haiislich ein,' K. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 37, and see Arnold's note. 
 Tcov Tayjav. Gi. Arist. Eq^. 789. oIkovvt* iv tcus tpiSdKvaKn Kal yvTaplois Kal 
 TTupytSlois. 
 
 (c.) — i\d>pr\<re — 'fasste,' K. Properly applied to the measure of content 
 
 of a vessel. Herod, i. 51. 6 ii,h xp^"'^"! Kpi]T-f]p x^P^"" &f"pop4as 
 
 i^aKofftovs, Xen. Ancd>. i. v. 6. vcmpov BV) — ' at a time considerably 
 
 subsequent.' KaTavEi|iol)ievoi — ' having portioned out among themselves.' 
 
 $v|i|jidxovs — e.g. Thessalians, &c. v. c. xxii. Iv rowrif 
 
 irapoo-Ktviis. V. Jelf, § 442. 6, and see Arnold's notes on viii. 5. i. 
 
 Chaptek XVIII. — (a.) Olvo^v. When the name of a place is defined as 
 belonging to such a country, governed by a preposition, the country usually has 
 the article, the place not. So i. u. in. itFTpArevaav ttjs 6cff<raX/7;s iirl 
 ^dpcroKov. K. This was not the Demus near Marathon, but a town near 
 Eleutherffi, and on one of the roads from Attica into Bceotia. It belonged to 
 the tribe Hippothoontis. (Herod, v. 74. Harpocrat. in v, Sophocles ap. 
 Strab. viii. p. 37S.) Its exact site is not agreed upon by topographers. SirW. 
 Gell identifies it with Gypto Castro. Grote (vi. p. 170, n.) supposes Arohi- 
 damus marched over Geraneia, and fell into this road in order to receive the 
 Boeotian contingent. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 28. Cf. Plat. Protag. § i. 
 Wesseling ad. Diod. Sic. iv. 60. <{ipovpC<i> — ' a garrisoned fort.' 
 
 Archidamus probably thought it unsafe to have so strong a fortress on his rear 
 or flank. 0. oirijTe KttTaXdpoi. The optative of indefinite fre- 
 
 quency, KaTa\Aix§avuv is used without the accusative in the sense of ief ailing, 
 
 (b.) — &XX(i)s. Either simply 'in other ways,' or better still, 'fruitlessly, to 
 no purpose,' 'im a way other than the right.' See Buttman, Lexilogus, and L. 
 and S. J/ex. on the Homeric use of the word. ^vvaYu'yTj is variously 
 
 explained by the commentators: 1. 'In bringing the war about,' Poppo. 
 2. ' While the wa/r was a-gathering,' Dale. 3. ' In the congress held to deliberate on 
 
Chap. 19. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 171 
 
 the war,' B. The first seems the best interpretation ; it may include 'the getting 
 together everything necessary or serviceable for the prosecution of the war,' 
 such as troops, ships, stores, &c., and the words of Thucydides just below seem 
 to confirm this, ^TreiSi) re fuveX^ero b arparbsi eirifiov^. The 
 
 variety of words used to express the inaction and dilatoriness of Archidamus is 
 noticeable, im/iov/j, crxoXai.tiT'ijs, ^■irLax^<ns, /tAXrjo-is, KaBiSpa. See the note in 
 Mr. Shilleto's ' Thucydides or Grote,' p. 20, on this ' restless love of change in 
 the use of words and constructions,' and i. 38. c. 
 
 (c.)— 8ia TOxous. V. Jelf, § 627. i. 3. av&\tv—'held aloof, 
 
 Cf. vii. 48. c, viii. 94. b. Xen. Hell. i. 6. 14. 
 
 Chapter XIX. — (a.) irao-av IS^ov — 'having tried every conceivable form of 
 attack.' Cf. ad i. T09. tov S^povs aK|i.iitovTos — ' when the summer 
 
 was al its height and the corn ripe,' T.K.A., i.e. the end of Ma/y according to 
 Kriiger ; the end of June, Arnold ; the middle of June, Grote and Niebuhr. 
 Col. Leake says the harvest begins about June 10, and does not end before July 
 20, or the beginning of August. 
 
 (6.) — -'EXoxriva. Eleusis, though x, place of considerable importance, was 
 classed among the Attic Demi (Paus. .4W. 38. Schol. ad. Soph. ffi. C J050), and 
 belonged to the tribe Hippotboontis. The Eponymus Hero had a chapel in 
 its vicinity. It had a citadel of some strength, comprised within the precincts 
 of the temple of Ceres (Liv. xxxi. 25). It is now an inconsiderable village, 
 retaining its name of Lesina. The temple which had been burnt by the Per- 
 sians was rebuilt by Ictinus, the architect of the Parthenon, under the adminis- 
 tration of Pericles. The bust of the colossal statue of Ceres is now in the 
 British Museum, having been brought to England in 1802. (Cramer, ii. 360, 
 sq., and the authorities there quoted. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 8r.) 
 0pido-iov ireSCov took its name from the Demus Thria or Thrio, ii. 21 (v. ad 
 i. 114). Cf. Herod, viii. 7. 65. Athen. vi. 66. Strab. ix. p. 395. It was 
 about three miles N. E. of Eleusis. 'PeCrovs. These were two salt 
 
 lakes near the shore, on the right bank of which ran the sax;red road, the ancient 
 road from Eleusis to Athens. They were supposed to come from the Euripus of 
 Chalcis, and being sacred to Ceres and Proserpine, none but priests were allo*ed 
 to fish in them, Paus. Att. 38 (Gell ap. Cramer, ii. 356). Grote, vi. p. 175, 
 'The straight road from Thria led directly to Athens, across the ridge of Mount 
 iEgaleoB ; but Archidamus turned off to the westward, leaving that mountain 
 on his right until he came to Kropeia, where he crossed a portion of the line of 
 .ffigaleos over to Achamae. He was here about seven miles from Athens.' 
 Al^dXcuv, now Scaramanga, a continuation of Coiydallus, rises above the coast, 
 stretching northwards into the interior of Attica. Trom its summit Xerxes 
 watched the battle of Salamis. Herod, viii. 90. Demost. c. Timocr. p. 466. 
 Kpuiretas. For the old reading KeKpoirtas, of. Schol. ad. Arist. Equit. 80. 
 Axapvds. Aoharnae, the chief of the Attic Demi, with a population of 
 I2,ooo, furnished 3000 Hoplites to the Athenian army. It was about sixty 
 stadia from Athens, which agrees with the situation of Menida, where extensive 
 ruins are still visible. It gave its name to one of the gates of Athens, the Pylae 
 Acharnicae. It was flourishing as well by its com, vines and olives (the ivy, 
 too, was said to have been first discovered here, Paus. Att. 32), as by its pecu- 
 
172 JfOTES ON THUCl'DIDES. [Book 11. 
 
 liar abundance of charcoal-burning from the forests of ilex on the neighbouring 
 hills. The Aoharnians were celebrated for their sturdy valour even in the time 
 of Pindar, 'Axdpvai eidvopes, Pind. Nem. ii. ■24. Cf. Aristoph. Acharn. pass, 
 who describes them as 
 
 vpecr^vTal nves 
 Axapi i-Kolj (TTiirTol y^povres irplvtvot 
 &TepdiJ,oyes, M.apadoivop.dx'H- e<f>evd&p.vi,voi.. 
 
 179 «?• 
 (with Elmsley's note). Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 85. sj. 
 Ka6«^d)iiEvoi es. Cf. ad. c. xiii. a. 
 
 Chapter XX. — (o.) rv<6|JiT| — ' design, or object.' lo-poXfj. The 
 
 usual meaning of this word in Herodotus and Thucyd. is a 'mountain pass.' 
 (v. Herod, tii. 172. 5 ; Xen. Anab. i. 2. 21 ; Hell. v. 4. 48 ; Thuo. iii. 112, 
 iv. 83. 127.) In a doubtful passage, viii. 31, it means apparently 'an attack.' 
 Does it mean here ' in this invasion of Attica ?' If so, it is, Poppo observes, an 
 unusual instance of the dative of time, like the Latin adventu, discessu, &c. 
 irEpiiSetv T(Jiir]Btivai. Jelf, § 687. i, where the notion is not of permitting some- 
 thing already existing, but something which may exist. vei5TT|Ti. 
 Abstract for concrete, as 0. 8 and 21. 
 
 (J.) OTn^vTr)o-av airu. The more usual construction of this verb is with ^s 
 and iirl, with an accusative, as iv. 77. 89, vii. i. 22. 35. It occurs again 
 with the dative iv. 78. c, Kai Tore ■jropevop.4p(^ aini^ diravT-^fravTes, P. 
 «iriTit)86ios Ivo-TpaToireSevo-ai. Cf. Jelf, § 677, 2. obs. i. The object of the in- 
 finitive made into the subject of the verb. So Herod, ix. 7, iiriTriSeiliTdTbv ianv 
 ip,lx,axiaa(7dai,TbQpi.d(yiovireilov. SoBurip.i'A(CTi.739; Hippol.^6g; Herod. vi. 102. 
 
 (c.) o-rdo-is — 'a division of feeling or coimsels.' Cf. iii. 2. c, ISiq. &vSpcs 
 Karh dTdffiv, and vii. 50. So Kara lutrrdcrets in the following chap. In 0. xxii. 
 it has a somewhat different meaning, q. v. Cf .^sch. P. Y. 200, 
 
 Chapter XXI. — (a.) IIXdo-ToavdKTa. Cf. ad i. 107 and 114. 
 Qpuilf. Cf. ad c. xix. and i. 1 14. |i.ep.vii|i^voi, 8tc. Jelf, 804. 8. 
 
 After the verbs piifii'Tjp.ai, otSa, aKoioi et similia, instead of a substantival clause 
 introduced by Sti or cis, there not unfrequently follows an adverbial clause with 
 Sre (Poet. ^/J.os, riiika). This appears to arise from some ellipse, as toS xp/)"'^' 
 which the very notion of memory implies. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 8 ; Plat. Menex. 
 p. 79 D ; Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 1133. So sometimes in Latin, memini quum darem ; 
 vidi quum prodiret ; audivi eum quum diceret. The use of d after such verbs 
 as Sou/itifai, &c., is similar. oTpdroi. Jelf, § 604. i. With verbs 
 
 of coming and going, that whereby the person comes or is accompanied is in 
 the dative ; generally collective nouns, as trrpaTip, o-TdXcp, itXtJAci, or their com- 
 plements as tTTpandrais. Cf. Thuc. i. 102 ; Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 17. 
 'n-cio-efjvai T*|v oLvax<4p'n<n.v. See Jelf, 545. 3. Cf Thuo. i. 126, iiriTerpap.- 
 p.ivoi. TTjc (pvXaK'^v. 
 
 (b.) |ucrT(io-€is. Lat. circuli, oonciliabula, ' forming twmultuotis asseniblages.' 
 See several similar passages collected by Bloomf. by later imitators, and 
 c. Ixjtxviii., al(r0ip.evos Src (carA (7(pS,s airois ^vvi<rTdp,emi i<po^ouvTo. Grote cf. 
 Eurip. Heracl., 416, Androm. 1077. 
 
 (c.) XPI'^H'O'^OVO"- Cf. viii. i. il'pT^TO. The reading of the 
 
Chap. 22.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 173 
 
 test MSS. for &pu.i}To. So unusual a word could not have been admitted by 
 mistake, and the use of dpyfi in the sense of 'a passionate impulse,' and 
 eiopyfjTas, without any passionate impulse, i. iii, are quite Thucydidean, 
 T. K. A. Dr. Arnold says these words are added because different persons 
 ran to listen to different prophecies, each choosing those which encouraged his 
 own opinions, or accorded with hia own feelings, dpjdu occurs, though rarely, 
 in the active, K. &v dKpoacrBai. We must supply iiKpoQi'To 
 
 from iKpoacrBai. The verb being placed in the dependent, and not the principal 
 clause, must be supplied fto the principal clause in the number and person re- 
 quired by its subject. Jelf, § 895. 3. ovk k\a\C<m\v jiotpav. v. 
 sup., note on Acharnse. dm^p^Bio-To. So /ter^wpos, chap. viii. 
 kK&KilfiV. A mixed idea of blame and reproach, B, ' They wngrily reproached 
 him ;' perhaps better, ' reviled him as a coward ;' i. e. Cleon and his fellows, 
 Grote, vi. p. 177. Iiregd-yoi. Jelf, §885, oba. 2. The oratio 
 obliqua used to mark that a statement is made, not as by the writer himself as 
 a fact, but as passing in his own or another person's mind, ' quod exercitum 
 non educeret (e mente Acharnensium) .' Soph. Trach. 903, Kpi^a^' ip,avT'i]V 
 Ivda /li] Tis elffldoi, .^sch. P. V. 203. 
 
 Chapter XXII. — (a.) oi to, Hpurra. a Meiflsis for KaKw (pp. 
 eKKXijo-CttV T€ OVK. iiroU\, ov8^ gvWoYOV. This, as Minister of War, Pericles 
 had the power of doing, of. c. lix. ^T^Woyov iroL'qaas, ^tl d' iffrpar-^ei, and Plut, 
 Pericl. xxxiii. This power of convoking the eoolesia was shared with the 
 strategi by the prytaneis. Of. iv. ii8, v. Schoman de Oomitiis, c. iv. p. 62; 
 But besides this power of calling a meeting, the strategos had also the power 
 of preventing or postponing those regular meetings which commonly took place 
 at fixed times, i.e. four times in each Prytaneia. IvXXoyos is the 
 
 generic term, i. e. any public meeting invested with an authorised character. 
 iKKXTjo-Ca is the specific assembly. Of. Grote, vi. p. 178 and 226. K. quotes 
 Plat. Gorg. p. 456, iv iKKk-qaiq. ^ hi iSXXj/ rivl ^v\\6y(j>. toO |i^. 
 
 V. Jelf, § 749. /. 
 
 (i.) Ppa\aa,= <TpiiKpd. Ci. not. ad i. n.c. ' a slight affair of cavalry.' So 
 S. John vi. 7, iva ^KaffTos ainCiv ^pa-xi " Xd/Sj;. ^pv^tois. The 
 
 site of this spot is unknown (Cramer ii. p. 4r>;). T. K. A. supposes x'^p'^"- to 
 be understood - ' the dry plains or tracts.' (ppiyios = ^rjpds, Hesych. 
 T^os. The regular tAos was 2048 men. T. K. Arnold says : but ? 
 ©eircroXots. On the ancient connexion between'^Athens and Thessaly, v. 
 Wordsworth's Greece, p. 99, Thuc. i. 102, 107. Pausanias saw the graves of 
 these Thessalians, near Athens, on the side of the Academy. I. xxix. 5. 
 Grote, vi. p. 179. dvcCXovTO, ' carried off their dead.' This fact 
 
 shows the equality of the conflict. 
 
 (c.) Aapio-aioi. The older Attics prefer the single o- in the spelling of this 
 and similar words. IXapdo-ioi — Ilvpdo-ioi. These two names are 
 
 probably identical, or perhaps one ought to be expunged. The Magnesian 
 tribe mentioned by Steph. Byz. as quoted by Bl., having no connexion with 
 them, Poppo says. Gott. would read irapaXtoi, but these were a Melian race. 
 Strabo (ix. 5, 14) mentions Pyrasus, a sea-port of the Thessalian Thebse. Cf. 
 P. K. and Bl. It is mentioned by Homer, II. ii. 6g5, and Col. Leake thinks 
 
174 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 its ruins are uow to be seen near Kokkina. (Smith's Diet, of Geog. v. 
 Pyrasus). (rTdirecos, ' each from, i. e. delegated by, his own partieulwr 
 
 politieal pa/rty.' That the oligarchs should have sent one is, as Kriiger says, 
 surprising, and therefore Thucydides mentions it. M^cov. Poppo 
 
 says this is not the Menon mentioned by Xenophon and Plato. See his note 
 on Xen. Anab. i. 2. 6, though there is no chronological argument against it. 
 
 Chapter XXIII. — (a.) Apavrcs. Appliedto the movement from their quar- 
 ters of both land and sea troops, usually of the latter (where an ellipsis of ri 
 iiTTia. used to be supplied) ; as applied to the former, of. h. 1. c. 98, iii. 96, 
 iv. II. rav Sifj|Jicov rCvas &XXovs. For the names of the Demi in 
 
 this district see Smith, art. Attica, p. 329. ndpvi)6os. The 
 
 loftiest mountain range in Attica, branching off in an easterly direction from 
 Cithaeron. These two high and in many places inaccessible mountain ranges 
 formed the impassable barrier of Attica. Parnes terminates on the sea-coast 
 above the promontory Bhamnus. Its modern name is Nozia. It is from 
 Parnes that Aristophanes evokes his clouds. (Nub. 323). 
 BpiX'/jo-o-CD. This mountain chain is identified by Col. Leake, Dodwell, and 
 other topographers, with Mount Pentelicus (Paus. i. 32. i), which was perhaps 
 its later name. It is still called Penteli or Mendeli, from the ancient Demus 
 IlevTiXri (Steph. Byz. a. v.). Its magnificent marble quarries are well known. 
 The whole range is known by the modem name of Turko Vonni. (Gell's Itin. 
 p. 68). This plain, ravaged by the Lacedsemonians, is probably the celebrated 
 Diacrian table-land ; and was important, not only from its own fertility, but 
 also as being the route by which the corn from Euboea was imported into Attica. 
 [v. Smith, Attica, p. 322 ; Cramer ii. p. 400 sq.] ras Ikotov 
 
 vaOs. Cf . c. xvii. u. In c. Ixvi. of this book we find the same relative numbers : 
 1000 hoplites to 100 ships. €^|j.eCvavTC$. The invasion lasted 
 
 thirty or forty days ; and the statement of Thucydides that they stayed as long 
 as their provisions lasted, contradicts Diodorus' account that the coasting ex- 
 pedition round Peloponnesus recalled the Lacedaemonians. Diod. xii. 42. 
 go-oD — 'for such time as they had.' Cf. Livy, xxiv. 11, cum triginta dieruni 
 coctis cibariis. o^X ^"'^P eo-ePoXov. In order to commit the 
 
 greater depredation, Schol. 'Opuirdv. Oropus was a town near 
 
 the sea-coast in the vale of the Asopus, and in the debateable land which was so 
 long an object of dispute between the Athenians and Boeotians. Though pro- 
 perly in Bceotia, as the Diacrian range of hills was the natural boundary of 
 Attica, Oropus from very early times was in the hands of the Athenians. It 
 was a place of great importance to them, as keeping open their communication 
 with Euboea, which otherwise could only have been effected by doubling Cape 
 Sunium. In B.C. 412, the Boeotians became masters of it (Thuc. viii. 60), and 
 ten years after removed the site of it seven stadia from the sea. Of this latter 
 town the ruins are visible at Oropo ; of the ancient seaport at Scala. In my- 
 thological times it was celebrated as the spot near which Amphiaraus was 
 swallowed up with his chariot and horses. IlEipaiK'^v. Grote 
 
 prefers the reading VpaiK^v (vi. p. 189), and Poppo admits it into the text. 
 Cramer seems also inclined to it (ii. p. 273). See thewhole question discussed 
 in the Philol. Mus. i. p. 193 ; in connexion with the passage, Thud. iii. 91. 
 
Chap. 2,5. j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 75 
 
 But all the best MSS. have IlapoV/nji', without variation ; and Steph. Byzant., 
 the chief authority for the change, has oleariy misquoted the passage ; and the 
 state of the MSS., especially of that part of St. Byz., is excessively corrupt. 
 
 Chap. XXIV. (a.) (jniXaKds. Not ' guards' (piXaKas, (as Arnold renders 
 it), but ' established garrisons on the coasts, and stationed blockading or guard- 
 ships off the shore.' ' The Athenians made arrangements for placing Attica in 
 a permanent state of defence both by sea and land,' Grote, vi. p. 185, 
 \(\ia TdXoVTO . . . e^aCpETa. 'They set apart 1000 talents out of the 
 treasure in the Acropolis as an inviolable reserve not to be touched except on 
 the single contingency of a hostile naval force about to assail the city, with no 
 other means at hand to defend it,' Grote, vi. p. 185. The sentence of capital 
 punishment was repealed, and the money appropriated to meet the imminent 
 peril of the state in the twentieth year of the war, after the terrible news of 
 the revolt of Chios. Cf. viii. 15. It is amusing to see the contradictory con- 
 clusions as to the barbarism of democratical governments drawn by Mitford 
 and Grote from this statement of Thucydides. (v. Grote I, c.) 
 
 (6.) «iri.\|;i]<|''<rr|. Cf. ad i. 87. Any one might move the question (eHirf)), 
 but only one of the ten Proedroi, i. e. the president for the day, could put the 
 question to the vote, Bl. Kivctv. Cf. ad i. 143, viii. 15, with 
 
 Arnold's note. vq'tTii = vauTiKu. So iv. 85. d. 
 
 BavttTov 5i]|i£av. In this connexion Kriiger observes Bavaros stands without 
 the article. Jelf, § 580. i. TpiT]pdpxo«s. ^eve ' men to command 
 
 as well as to equip the triremes.' In later times it was not so ; see Smith's 
 Diet. Antiq. s.v. 
 
 Chapter XXV. (a.) lK«t!|D|i|idx<ov — e. g. Aoarnanians, Zacjrnthiang, and 
 their countrymen from Naupactus. &X\a t6 cKdKovv — 'devastated 
 
 other places in the course of their ci/rcumnavigation.' Diod. specifies the 
 Argolic Acte (xii. 43. Cf. Cramer iii. p. 34). Me6<4vT]v Tfjs 
 
 AaKMviKTJs. This is added to distinguish it from the Argolic Methone, between 
 Epidaurus and Trcezen, which was occupied by the Athenians in the seventh 
 year of the war (iv. 45) . (There were besides three other towns of the same 
 name in Macedon, Thessaly, and Euboea). It was, strictly speaking, in 
 Messenia, a little to the south of the harbour of Pylos. (So Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 
 19, speaks of the Sphagian islands as being off the Laconian, i. e, the Messenian 
 coast. Pausanias says it took its name from the rock Mothon, which fonned 
 the breakwater of its harbour (ilfesscm. xxxv.). The Lacedaemonians established 
 a colony of Nauplians in Methone, who had been expelled from their native 
 city by the Argives (Paus. a. s.). There is a modern Greek town called Modon, 
 with a fortress built by the Venetians, near which Sir W. Gell saw vestiges of 
 a city, with a citadel and some marbles, at a place called Palaio Mothone. 
 (Gell's Itin. p. 54 ; Cramer, iii. p. 138 ; Smith's Diet. Geog. s.v.). 
 dvSpiiiruv ovK IvovTuv — i.e. 'no regular garrison,' P. 'No portion of the 
 one-third of the available military force of Sparta left at home for the defence 
 of the country,' T.K. A. In joining in this attack on Methone, the Corcyi-aeans, 
 as Poppo observes, violated the principles of their purely defensive alliance 
 
176 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IT. 
 
 (iiriixaxl"; i. 44). This was probably tlie result of the embassy to Corcyra 
 alluded to in cap. vii. of this book ; the invasion of Attica by the Spartans 
 justifying a naval irruption of the allies of Athens into Peloponnesus. 
 
 (6.) BpacrCSas 6 Te'XXiSos. We are here introduced for the first time to 
 the man most eminent not only among his own countrymen, but among all 
 whose names are mentioned as connected with this war. We may justly bestow on 
 him the praise of having ' had the head to devise, the tongue to persuade, and the 
 hand to execute' (not ajny mischief, as was said of Cromwell), but every scheme 
 evincing daring enterprise, brilliant execution, and the soundest patriotism. 
 From this time until his untimely death there is no single gallant achievement 
 that was not either planned or conducted by him. He was (a rare qualification 
 with his countrj'men) oiK aSivaros elireCv (iv. 84), /lirpios, irpavs (iv. 108), 
 SpaaT'^pios ds ret irdvTa, Kark Trdvra &,ya6b^' TrXelarov d^tos AaKedaifioplois 
 yev6iJ,eiios, and these noble qualities were of this essential service to his country- 
 men, that they inspired a ground of confidence among those whom they wished 
 to win over that he was a fair sample of what might be expected in every 
 Spartan commander : ^XTriSa. iyKariXLTre ^ipaiov lis Kal ol dXKoi toiovtoI eltnv 
 (8r). Such are the scattered expressions in which Thucydides, an historian 
 above all others chary of praise, sums up the character of this noble man. The 
 words of Diodorus are simple but expressive — v4os p.iv S>v dXfcf 5^ koX dpdpelf 
 dmipipoiv, xii. 43. SiaSpa|j.iav. He forced his way through the 
 
 Athenian line while their attention was fully engaged with the fort in front of 
 them, and threw himself into {kvirCtnei €s) the town, and saved it (xepieiroCtjcre), 
 iairlirreLv seems to be the technical military term ; in Latin, intromittere of 
 Liv. xxiv. 13. [No doubt the primitive notion of TeTpa/i/Umv is having 'their 
 faces iwrned towa/rds ' — the natural position of all persons intently occupied on 
 anything, but to translate it so literally, as Bl. does, seems childish]. Kriiger, 
 cf. iii. 102, irepieTTolriaav rb xwpfo!'. €irr|v46t). B. quotes Westermann, 
 
 Qucest. Dem, ii. 26 (who describes these public honours as 'civitatis gratiarum 
 actio erga civem qui munere aliquo in commodum reipublicae bene functus erat,') 
 and a decree preserved in Plut. Vit. x. Shet. p. 851, SeSixSai. ti^ S'/jp.ip iiraivicyai 
 AvKOvpyov — dpeTTJs 'iv(Ka Kal Smaioaivi]^. In addition to these public honours 
 he was probably made Ephor Eponymus the next September. Cf. Xen. Hell. 
 ii. 2. 10. 
 
 (c.) o^dvTts TTJs 'HX€£os ts $eidv. So above, h Meddpriv rrjs AajcwpiK^r, 
 andThuc. passim. On the omission of the article here, the regular construction, 
 [cf 0. 1 8. h. 1.] Bl. founds a surely unnecessary theory that $eia and 17 $eia are dis- 
 tinct places ; the former a peninsula, the latter a city. A look at any good map 
 (e. g. Cramer's) will show this to be incorrect. The Athenians, be it observed, 
 were sailing northtJDard, purposing to attack Pheia (as ^s ^elav shows). From the 
 position of the town, just at the neck of the peninsula, on whichever side of the 
 peninsula Ichthys they had landed, Thuo. words would be correct. But they de- 
 barked their troops on the south side, in what is now called the Bay of Kat^colo, 
 which may be described as a x'^plov d\lp,evov. When overtaken by the storm, to 
 avoid being caught in this open roadstead, they sailed round the peninsula to the 
 true port of Pheia, which was on the A', side. vii. 31. This is the creek of 
 Pontikocastro, or Pundikocestro, where some vestiges of the Hellenic walls 
 of Pheia are still found. The ^/•omowiorj/ Pheia of Strabo (viii. 343) lies stiU 
 
(JHAP. 30.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 177 
 
 further again to the N. and is identified with the modern headland of Skaphidi. 
 Near this is a mountain torrent which flows into the sea, and is probably the 
 lardanus (on which Homer places Pheise. II. vii. 135), and the modern 
 Cardamo. Cf. Xen. Hell. vi. ii. 19., Hom. Od. xv. 297. (Cramer, iii. p. 87. 
 Leake's Morea, ap. Smith, Geog. Diet, s.v.) KolX'qs "HXiSos 
 
 ■• Hollow Elis' was the name originally given to the plain of the Peneus to dis- 
 tinguish it from the mountainous district of the Aororeia ; but as this was the 
 larger and more fertile part, the name was given to the whole N. territory, to 
 distinguish it from the dependent districts of Pisatis and Triphylia. No doubt 
 the name of Elis, FAXis, is connected with the Latin Vallis. (Smith, Diet. s.v.). 
 dv^fiov KarCoVTOS. K. cf. u. 84. t6 irj'eC/iO Karrjei, vi. 18, the regular term for a 
 squall coming sweeping down ; so S. Luke viii. 23, Karip-q \aiXaf dv4/j.ov els 
 771V Xliivrfv. So Acts xxvii. 14, f/3aXe kot' airris five/ios TvipuiviKds. 
 \ei.fi.at6fi.ivoi — 'making had weather of it,' as our sailors say. So Acts xxvii. 
 18, (r0o5pus 5^ X^tp-aioiJ.ivoiii ■iiiJ.Civ, inpUirXiov. 'Strong winds 
 
 on a harbourless coast induced the captains to sail with most of the troops round 
 Cape Ichthys, in order to reach the harbour of Pheia on the northern side of it, 
 while the Messenian hoplites, marching by land across the promontory, attacked 
 Pheia, and carried it by assault, 'Grote, vi. p. 181. These were the Messenians 
 of Naupaotus. 
 
 (d.) avaXa|i.pdvovo-i — 'pidc up.' ifj iroXX^ ffii] o-rparCa. By 
 
 this time the main body of the Eleians had come to the reinforcement of the 
 men of Pisatis. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI.— irepl. For the force of irepl see not. ad i. 14. b. 
 ' To coast round the shores of the Locri Opuntii and Epicnemidii, and keep 
 guard over Euboea, whence they derived their corn, and where they had de- 
 posited their cattle.' diropdo-cis — 'descents.' tt)s re irapa9a\a(r<rCoD 
 Kal @poviav. The grammatical oonsti-uction is borne out exactly by the geo- 
 graphical position of Thronium, which lies inland at some distance from the 
 coast, on the banks of the Boagrius (Hom. II. ii. 533), twenty stadia from 
 Cape Cnemis, which gives its name to the Epicnemidii (Strab. ix. 426). The 
 town was afterwards enslaved by the Phocian general, Onomarchus. Sir W. 
 Gell identifies its site with a ruin near Longachi, where an inscription containing 
 the name was also discovered. (Cramer, ii. p. 114.) 'AXottt] — 
 lies a few miles to the east of Cnemis, on the coast, in the territory of the 
 Locri Opuntii. Gell discovered its ruins on an insulated hill near the shore. 
 The Locri Ozolse had also a town of the same name. oji'/jpovs. 
 Cf. i. 108, iii. loi. 
 
 Chaptbb. xxvii. — (a.) dv^o-Ttjorov. Cf. n. ad c. 14. The word implies 
 not only the expulsion of the ^ginetans, but the occupying their island with 
 settlers of their own. (kXijpoCxoi, iii. 50.) These men are of course Sttoikoi with 
 reference to the country they leave — i. e. emigrants, and Sttolkoi to that in which 
 they settle as immigrants. For the Dorian origin of .^gina, see Strabo, viii. 
 375 ; Pans. Corinth. 29. We learn from i. 105. 108, that the Athenians had 
 taken seventy of the jEginetans' ships, forced them to surrender the rest, de- 
 molish their fortifications, and submit to taxation. They now eject the whole 
 
 If 
 
178 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 population ; but not content with this, in the eighth year of the war, they made 
 a descent upon Thyrea, burnt down the city in which the ^ginetans had taken 
 refuge, sacked the whole place, and carrying the survivors in chains to Athens, 
 put the whole number to death in cold blood : Sii, t^v irporipav del tots §x^/""'> 
 as Thucydides quaintly adds, iv. 57. Of. Xen. Sell. ii. 2. 5. 
 
 (6.) @vp^av is interesting as the place where the battle took place between 
 the 300 Spartans and 300 Argives, described by Herodotus, 1. 82, who, we 
 may observe, uses the plural form of the word, Qvpeal. Of. Ov. Fast. ii. 663. 
 The modern Astro probably represents the ancient town, i. e. the one com- 
 menced by the ^ginetans, which the arrival of the Athenians suspended. But 
 the whole subject is of great dif&culty. (See Smith, Diet. s.v. Cynuria.) This 
 district of Thyreatis was one of the most fertile plains in Peloponnesus, ex- 
 tending about six miles in length along the coast, but never more than three 
 miles broad, being shut in by Mount Parnon. This plain, which belonged 
 to Argolis, was seized by the Lacedsemonians as early as the reign of Eches- 
 tratus, son of Agis, 0. B.C. 1000, but they were expelled by the Argives, who 
 retained doubtful possession of it till B.C. 547, when the battle before alluded 
 to was fought. When the .^ginetans were settled there, the two towns of 
 Thyrea and Anthene were given to them. It was afterwards ceded by treaty 
 to the Argives, v. 41, and Philip confirmed them in the possession of it. 
 Pausanias, vii. 12, says the border quarrels continued even down to his day. 
 +b A6t)VoC(i)V 8td<|)opov. Objective genitive ; ' their quarrel ynth the Athenians.' 
 <r6i(r|i(5v. Of. ad i. loi. |i.e6op(a. These compound adjectives 
 
 K. says are of three terminations. Of. iv. 56, where Thucydides repeats almost 
 word for word, the statement here. 01 8' c(nrdpi]crav. These 
 
 scattered remnants were probably those whom Lysander collected and reinstated 
 in their ancient home after the battle of jS)gos Potamoi. Xen. Hell. ii. i. 5. 
 
 Chapter XXVIII. — vov|jit|vC^ kotcL creX'fjvTjv. The physical new moon 
 not coinciding with the civil one. Sokci is the received opinion. 
 
 o fjXios ll^Xiirc. Modem astronomical calculations refer this echpse to the 
 3rd of August. Had it happened three months earlier, as Mr. Grote observes, 
 it might have been looked upon as an unfavourable omen, and stopped the in- 
 vasion of Attica (vi. p. 184). Eclipses were still reckoned among fortuitous 
 natural phaenomena, along with earthquakes, famines, &c. Of. i. 23, and 
 Herod, i. 74, where, though the historian implies the previous calculation of 
 the eclipse by Thales (oSpov vpoSitievoi) he uses the curious phrase, t^v iip.ipriv 
 i^airlvTis viKra yevindai : and the still more curious passage in Xen. Anah. iii. 
 4. 8, where the inhabitants of Larissa take advantage of an eclipse to escape 
 from the invading army. Of. Hist. v. 3. 10 ; Herod, vii. 37, ix. 10 ; Quintil. 
 Inst. Or. i. 10. 47, ed. Gesner. airr^puv. Heiss states that these 
 
 were Tenus and Mars. 
 
 Ohaptbb XXIX, — (a.) Nv|X(|>(!8(i>pov tJ>v Tliiva dvSpa 'Ap8r|pCTT|v. 
 
 Herodotus (vii. 137) uses these words in exactly the same order, when speaking 
 of Nymphodorus as having betrayed Nicolas and Auariatus, sons of Bulis, and 
 Sperthias to the Athenians. Of. h. 1. c. 67. (JUBeu, the Ionic genitive of Iluff^s 
 as the Sohol. observes.) Abdera was on the south coast of Thrace, some little 
 distance east of the river Ne^tus. /carck "A§Sr)pa . . . irorap.bv ^iarov pedpra. 
 
CHiP. 29.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. ' 1 79 
 
 Herod, vii. 109 (perhaps in 0. 126 we may explain di 'A^S'/jpav ^iav Tora/tJi 
 N^o-Tos, 'flowing through the ten-itory of the Abderites'). Hercules was its 
 mythological, Timesias of Clazomense its historical, founder, Herod, i. 168. 
 When Harpagua was left by Cyrus to complete the subjugation of Ionia, the 
 Teians, following the example of the Phooseans, left their country and sailed in 
 a body to Abdera. Fifty years after, the Abderites had the expensive honour 
 of feeding the Persian king on his march to Greece (Herod, vii. 120). It was 
 reduced under the power of Athens by Thrasybulus B.C. 408. Though prover- 
 bial for the stupidity of its inhabitants, it produced the philosophers Democritus 
 and Anaxarchus and the sophist Protagoras. Of. Juv. x. 50. 
 
 ' oujus prudentia monstrat 
 Summos posse vires et magna exempla daturos, 
 Vervecum in patri^ crassoque sub aere nasci.' 
 Mart. X. 25. 4. 
 
 I!iTdXKi)s. Son of Teres, succeeded his father as king of Thrace, or more cor- 
 rectly of the powerful tribe of the OdrysEe, probably some years before the break- 
 ing out of the Peloponnesian war ; as he had so far increased the already extensive 
 kingdom of his father, that it reached from Abdera to the mouths of the 
 Danube, and inland to the sources of the Strymon, thirteen days' journey ac- 
 cording to Diodorus, xii. 50 (Diod. is probably mistaken as to the date of his 
 accession). As he was on hostile terms with Perdiccas, king of Macedon, 
 (having espoused the cause of his brother Philip,) the Athenians, who were 
 also exasperated against Perdiccas for supporting the Potidseans in their revolt, 
 cultivated the friendship of Sitaloes by repeated embassies, and as we see 
 below, conferred the rights of citizenship on hie son Sadocus. At the close of 
 this book we have the account of the gigantic but unsuccessful expedition 
 which he undertook against Macedon (c. 95 — loi). He afterwards fell 
 in a battle against the Triballi, B.C. 424, and was succeeded by his 
 nephew Seuthes, son of Sparadocus, who was a partisan of Perdiccas, iv. 
 loi. Cf. not. ad i. 57. 59. 61. 63; Diod. xii. 34. Aristophanes alludes to 
 these embassies in his Acha/rnians, 140, 150, where the scholiast says that 
 Sadocus was also known by the names Teres and Sitalces. This enrolment ap- 
 pears to have taken place at the festival of Apaturia : hence the allusion in 
 line 146. irpdlevov. Poppo cf. Wachsmuth, Or. Ant. i. r, p. 122 ; 
 
 Thuc. ii. 85 ; iii. 2. 70. 92 ; iv. 78; v. 76, &c. 
 
 (6.) '08p\)(rais. Herod, (iv. 92) mentions the Odrysse as settled on the banks 
 of the Artiscus, a tributary of the Hebrus. But their territory was afterwards 
 much enlarged. Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian, Paus. iv. 33, 
 and Orpheus was their king. Iirl ttXeiov Tfjs dWi]s ©p^Kls. — K. 
 
 compares I. ix. c. koI vavriKif &iJ.a iirl irKiov tuv &XKav /(7Xi5(ras. Dale 
 translates 'he founded the great Jemgdom of the Odrysce on a larger scale than the 
 other states of Thrace.' avT(5vo|j,ov. Cf. c. 96 (b.) where he 
 
 specifies the Dii ; the Kal implies for all that, notwithstanding. 
 vpo<rf\Ka ovhiv ' has no connexion with. ' So oi Tpoiri^Koi'Tes and a! irpoc'iqKoiaai, 
 c. xxxiv. 6. TTjs awTTis 0p4.Kins. ' Tkey did not come from the same 
 
 pa/rt of Thrace.' K., who compares ir6Xeiis rims ehai. Xen. Anab. vii. iii. 19. 
 T\a,t. Apol. xxix. 0. Prot. 316. AavXCf. The more ancient name 
 
 N 2 
 
l8o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^ook H. 
 
 was Daulis. Strab., ix. 4'23. (signifying a thick forest, q' from Sa 6X1;) which 
 was afterwards changed to Daulia, which it retains to the present day. (Of. 
 Horn. 11. B. 520. Liv. xxxii. i8.) There was, we may obserye, another 
 Daulia in lUyria. Homer speaks of it as a PAoaamtown. Cf. Pane. x. 4, 5. 
 l^or the occupation of this district by Thraoians, see Miiller's Dorians, I. p. 9, 
 Wachsmuth's Ant. Or., Introduction, Paus. I. xli., Strabo, ix. From using 
 the words at 'YwatKes we may infer that Thucydides was aware of the variation 
 of the legends in the story of Itys. Homer, in the well-known passage in the 
 Odyssey [v. i. ] makes Aedon wife of Zethus, and daughter of Pandareus. The 
 words SavXids Spvis do not occur in any extant Greek author of a date prior to 
 Thucydides ; v. Poppo, though the allusions in later writers are very common. 
 As Grote observes, i. p. 265, 'Neither the archsology of Attica, nor that of its 
 various component fractions, was much dwelt upon by the ancient epic poets 
 of Greece.' Grote quotes the passage referred to above. Hom. Odys., T. 523; 
 Apollod., iii. 148; .iEsch. Supp., 61; Soph. Ulect., 107; Ovid, Metam., vi. 
 425, sq. ; Hygin. Fah., xlv. There is probably an allusion to the Myth in 
 Hesiod, Op. et Di. 566. Gaisf. iravbiovh (bpro xeXtScii/. To these we may 
 add Paus., i. xli, who speaks of Daulis as rrjs iirip Xaipuvelas, and adds irdXai. 
 yap TTJs vvv Kakovp.ev'qs''EiW6,Sos ^dp^apoL rh iroKKa, ^Kijaav. Soph. Elect. ^ 148, 
 with the Schol. Sophocles and Philocles both wrote a ' Tereus. ' .^sch. Agam., 
 ITS'!, Arist. Av., soo, 209, 676, with Schol., CatuU. Ixv. 14. Daulias ab- 
 sumpti fata gemens Ityli, Ov. Heroid., xv. 154. Concinit Ismarium Daulias 
 ales Ityn. Metam., v. 276. Daulia Threicio Phocaeaque milite rura cesserat. 
 Virg. Ciris, 200. Dauliades Puellas. Eclog. vi. 78, Georg. iv. 15, Albinovan. 
 i. 105. Deflet Threicium Daulias ales Ityn. Senec. Agamem., 671, Thyest. 
 275. 8id Too-ovTov. ' At so sAoT'i a distance' from his own country. 
 
 P. cf. ii. 89. SC 6\i-yov. iii. 21, 51. 5i' iXdaaovos. 94. Sia iroXXoC. iv. 
 115. Si& irkdaTov. vi. ii., &c. eir' u(|>€XC(j,.. — 'with a view to 
 
 mittual assistance;' as i. 3. |j.aX\ov f\ 8, it. ■fj — 'rather than, 
 
 amongst the Odi'ysce, whose country lay at a distance of many days' journey.' 
 
 (d.) ^X"" • • • eV^VETo. Either ^v must he supplied from the other clause 
 of the sentence, as impHed in iyhero, or by the change in the construction the 
 participle is put for the finite verb. P. Kparos = Sivafuv. ' Pri- 
 
 musque potens rex Odrysarum fuit.' P. IvvcgeXetv — 'unaexpug- 
 
 nare ; in expugnando adjuvare. ' B. SaSoKov. v. s. 
 
 trtKratrTav. The Thracian Peltastae were renowned. Cf. iv. 129, 6. (So ii. 
 79; iv. 28, 32; iii. 123; V. 6, 10.) Arist. Achai-n., 160. KaTairikTdaovrai. tt]v 
 'Souiyndv SK-qv. irt/,?. 563. TiXTrjV a-eluy Siairep Irjpetis. Xea. Man., iii. g, 2, 
 Elmsley ad Arist. Acharn., I. c. 
 
 (e.) IvvepCpaa-E — 'reconciled.' i.e., from the notion of bringing the parties 
 together. 0^P|j.t1V. Cf. i. 61. 
 
 Chapteb XXX.— (a.) irepl IleXoirdvvrio-ov. Prom Pheia the Athenian fleet 
 coasted northwards. The coast of Aoarnania being probably included in 
 their mission. Naupaotus would be their main station to the north, of course. 
 SiSXiov, or SiiXXiov — as Colonel Leake and Poppo read, on the authority of the 
 best MSS. is placed by Cramer on the Acarnanian coast, N. of Astaous, and a 
 little S. of Palserus, over against Leucas. He identifies it with the modem 
 
Chap. 33.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. l8x 
 
 Selavena : Zavedei representing the ancient Palsrus. It was at SoUium that 
 Demosthenes convened the Acarnanians, prior to his attack on JEtolia,. iii. 95/ 
 And we find the Corinthians claiming it, on the cessation of hostilities, v. 30. 
 IlaXaipeiicriv. Strabo mentions this town along with Alyzia. i., p. 459. 
 "AcTTaKov, said to have been a colony of Cephallenia, lies on the bay now 
 called Dragamasti, one side of which is formed by the promontory Crithote. 
 Its ruins are to be seen near the monastery of St. Elias. v. Leake, North. 
 Oreece, iv, 4; Cramer, ii. p. 19. Kard Kparos — ' by assault.' 
 
 (i.) K.i^aKKr\vla. Called by Homer Same, or Samos. Odys. i. 246 ; II. ii. 
 .634 ; had the Taphians for its earliest inhabitants. The name of the island 
 first occurs in Herodotus, ix. 28. The four-fold division of the island was 
 probably very ancient, since an early legend derived their names from the four 
 sons of Cephalus, the Eponymus of Cephallenia. None of them became of any 
 importance. Same and Proni are on the E. coast ; Crania and Pale on the W. 
 Of. Strab. X. p. 455; Grote vi. p. 182. Kara'AKapv. 'gegen- 
 
 jiber.' K. v. Jelf, § 629. i. 
 
 Chapter XXXI. — (a.) ■ir€plTb<|>9iv(i'irwpov. Cf. Died, xii.43, 4. 'Towards 
 the close of September.' Grote. «s t^v McyapCSa. v. Grote, vi. 
 
 p. 184. 'A decree was proposed in the Athenian Ekklesia by Charinus, 
 though perhaps not carried, to the effect that the Strategi every year should 
 swear as «■ portion of their oath of office, that they would twice invade and 
 ravage the Megarid. ' It appears from Lib. iv. 66, that, for several years of the 
 war certainly, this was actually done. Tne^dfievoi iirb ' A^d-qvaluv ti^ irok^fKp 
 del /cttToL '^Tos ^KauTov Sis ^tr^aWbvTitiv iravaTpan^ is rr]v x^po.v. (Cf. Duk. in loc. 
 Plut. V. Pericl. p. 306.) The distress and privations endured by the Megarians, 
 remembered even down to the days of Pausauias (i. 40, 3) were extreme ; as 
 not only their corn and fruits and even their garden vegetables were destroyed, 
 but by blockading the port of Nisaaa the Athenians prevented all importation 
 of provisions into the city, which was reduced to a state of famine. See the 
 graphic description in the AcJiarnicms (685-781) and Pax, 482. They suffered 
 in a similar manner before the battle of Leuctra from being the allies of Sparta 
 and enemies of Athens, v. Demosthenes, c. Near. p. 1357. 
 
 (6.) [i^YicTTOv 8^. [Cf. iii. 17, a., where Thucyd. mentions the largest display 
 of the naval force of the Athenians preparatory to the blockade of Mytilene. ] 
 Grote, vi. 183. 'The junction of the two formed the largest Athenian force 
 that had ever yet been seen together.' avToC. For the expressive 
 
 force of the pronoun here cf. Arist. Acharn., 507. 
 
 dXV itTfiev avTol vvv 76 TrGpieirrto'fihot' 
 roiis yhp fierolKovs dxvparQv dfXTWv Xiyu. 
 
 TpwrxiXCoi. Cf. iii. 1 7. Where we learn that the pay of each hoplite on 
 service at Potidsea, was two drachmae a-day. In i. 57 we hear that 1000 were 
 sent. V. c. 64. A second reinforcement of 1600 under Phormio. Either 
 therefore their numbers were thinned by the siege, as Poppo thinks, or some 
 had returned, as Kriiger says. NCcraia edXw. In the eighth year 
 
 of the war, B. c. 424 . Cf . iv. 69. 
 
 Chapteb XXXII. — 'AtoK&vth — (not to be confounded. with the Mace- 
 
1 82 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 donian Atalanta, chap. lOO, or with the small island of the same name off the 
 coast of Attica) lies off Locris, in the Opuntian gulf. A great part of these 
 Athenian fortifications was swept away by the inundation of the sea in the 
 sixth year of the war, which did so much damage in Eubcea also. Cf. iii. o. 
 89 ; of. Died. xii. 44. 59, who even states that this irruption of the sea made 
 Atalanta, which was before a Chersonesus, an island. It is still called Talando- 
 Nisi. <|>poupiov. ' A permanent garrison was planted, and a fortified 
 
 post erected,' Grote, vi. 182. Cf. vi. 75. ^P^K'^i probably as u. xvii., 
 
 ' having only scattered inhabitants.' Some of the cattle of the Athenians were 
 probably transported here. toB (i<). c. iv. X^o-ras- Privateers. 
 
 Chapteb XXXIII. — (os.) KaTcXSetv, Kardveiv. The technical phrases for 
 the retwn and restoration of exiles. Cf. jEsch. Choeph. 3. 
 ^ffw yb,p eh yriv tI]v 6e koX KaT^p^o/Aat. 
 luiKoiipovs — ' Mercenaries^ P. 
 
 (5.) «S oiioXcytas — 'from a preconcerted planagreed nponhy the pa/rties,' i.e. 
 on pretence of surrender. dirpoo-SoK'^Tois. Here used actively, 
 
 as 93 ; iv. 72; vii. 29; passively, in ii. 5. 61 ; iii. 39. PiaioTEpov. 
 
 Cf. iv. 31, dvax'ipv'"'^ ^e^aiorripa. v. 73, ^ i.TroxdipTli7i.s oi plaios ^y. 
 
 Chapteb XXXIV. — (a.) tu irarpCi^ v6[uo. Grote (vi. p. 41), quoting 
 Westermann, says that this custom seems to have been introduced shortly after 
 the Persian war. Pericles had pronounced the funeral oration over those who 
 fell in the Samian war. Some portions of his speech seem to have been pre- 
 served to the time of Aristotle. Cf. i2Aei. i. 7. 3. 10. 3. Who the introducer of 
 this custom was is doubtful. Grote thinks that no one in particular was intended 
 by rdv irpoffffhra in the following chapter. The Scholiast says Solon was the 
 author of it; Weber, Cimon; Westermann, Aristides; while other commentators 
 fix on Themistocles. Ta<|)as liroi'^io-oVTo. The indef. plural; A 
 
 fimeral. Plato, Menex. c. i, uses the active form. Cf. Isocrates, c. viii., and 
 below § c. ; Paus. i. 29 ; iv. sq. to. ocrrd. For the whole passage, 
 
 cf. Hom. II. xxiv. 790 sq. irporCOevTai. So 'proponere,' Tac. 
 
 Aim. iii. 5. twv ctiroYevon^vrnv — 'of the departed.' Cf. u. 51, 
 
 ris iXotpipaeis tujv diroyiyvop.^vojv, and 98, direyiyvero oid^v tov arparov. 
 Herod, ii. 136, p.ribiva. tQv icjuroO diroyevhp.evov 6d^ai. irpdrpiTa. 
 
 Poppo says that this irp66e(ns took place sometimes the day before. 
 kiTi^ipa — 'brings presents or tokens of respect:' not to be understood here of 
 such offerings as the Latins expressed by ' inferice, ' P. and Weber. 
 
 (h.) XiipvaKas — 'open coffins:' Sandapilce. The Scholiast says cypress 
 wood was chosen from its property of resisting corruption ; Sick rb darjirrov 
 (Xvai. Cf. Hom. II. u. s. ; Muller's Archwology, § 301. i^S 
 
 ^Kaa-Tos fyi <j>''^S. Inverse attraction of the relative by the transposition 
 of the substantive, v. Jelf, §824; ii. 2. tuv d<|>avwv. Ex- 
 
 plained by the succeeding words, ' those whose bodies were not found 
 for burying' {dvaipi<ri.v of xxii. 6 ; Plat. Menex. xiv.) For these a ceno- 
 taph was erected. For the grammatical construction, see Jelf, § 518. b. 
 ^viK^ipti— ' joins the funeral procession.' B. says this was not allowed at 
 •private funerals. 
 
Chap. ^^.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 183 
 
 (c.) irfiiJLa — ' Grabstdtte,' hwrymg-place. tov KaWlffTov irpoaarelov, the outer 
 Oeramicu3 ; between the astu and the academia. Cf. Pans. ii. 5 ; Smith's 
 Diet. V. Athense, p. 302. ael — ' as a general rule,' i.e. ever since the first 
 
 establishment of the custom, with the exception of those who fell at Marathon 
 {iy Mapadum, where observe the omission of the article), and the case of Tellus, 
 mentioned by Herodotus, i. 30, who was buried at Eleusis ; probably in the 
 war against Megara (see Turner's note ad loc). Herodotus says also (ix. 85) 
 that those who fell at Platsea were buried on the spot. 'gpijii^vos 
 
 iirb Tijs irdXcus — hy the senate. Plato says, Menex. a. i., d,(j>iK6/niv irpbs rb 
 PovXeuT-Zipiov Tv86/Ji,ei>os Sti i) povM] /H^Wci alpeiaBai 8<rTis ipel iirl rois diro- 
 Bavovai' raijiks yhp ataSa Sti ixiWovai iroieiv. 8s 4v. Cf. Jelf, 
 
 § 829. 4. |j.r) oi{vveTOS, Cf. c. xiv., fieri, ToO ^vverov Kal Svvarbs, 
 
 and c. Ixv. d|ui(r€i. Cf. ad i. u. 69. For the difference be- 
 
 tween djiwi7is and A^liajxa, see Grote, vi. p. 233. n. Iir' avrots — 
 
 in their praise. ' zu ehren derselben, ' K. 
 
 (d.) otr6ri ^f.^a.ii\ avrots. ' So oft ihnen der Anlass dazu eintrat,' K. 
 ' Whenever circumstances occurred to call forth the necessity of the custom ; 
 as e.g. over those who fell at Sphaoteria, Delium, Amphipolis, in Sicily, the 
 Hellespont, and Arginusae,' Weber. nepiKXTJs. He had before 
 
 pronounced the oration over those who fell in the Samian war (v. Grote, vi. 
 41), on which occasion the women present crowned him with garlands, like a vic- 
 torious athlete. Kaipbs €Xap.pav€. Cf. xviii. b., owdre irdXefios Kara. 
 Xd^ot ; Dion Cass. 393, iirel re 6 Kaipiis iXd/i^ave, ' when the proper time for 
 so doing came.' o-^HaTos. Here used for the actual spot in 
 the cemetery where they were buried, not as above for the whole sepul- 
 cretum. Iirl irXeicTov to€ 6p.CXov. Cf. ad i. i. b, iirl irXeiarov 
 dvdpihiruiVj K. 
 
 Chaptek XXXV. — (a.) The principles already laid down concerning the 
 speeches in Thuoydides, cf. i. 22. a, are doubtless applicable to the present 
 one ; but this is probably more exactly reported than most of the others, for it 
 is likely that Thuc. heard it delivered, and the matter as well as the character 
 of the speaker would impress it deeply upon his mind. It is one of the most 
 beautiful and remarkable fragments of antiquity, and with its commentaries and 
 its translations forms quite a little literature of itself. The English reader may 
 consult the /"roiepromeKO to Poppo's larger work; Thirlwall, vol. iii. ; Grote, vi.; 
 Miiller, Hist. Or. Lit. xxxiv. § 8. Lysias, as is well known, has also an 
 iiriTa^ios \670j among his extant orations, but it is of an inferior order of merit. 
 That called ' Meuexenus, ' which passes under the name of Plato, is altogether 
 unworthy of him. The Funeral Oration of Demosthenes is generally acknow- 
 ledged to be spurious. tov TrpocrO^VTa tw vd|Ki> — him who attached to 
 the law, i.e., made the delivery of a speech one of the provisions which the law 
 enjoins. Solon is supposed to have originated the law. It is not clear who 
 made this particular addition ; Kriig. and others refer it to the era of the 
 Persian war. The form of expression seems to be borrowed from Herod, ii. 
 136. irpoarediivai. Sk iri. toi5t(j) ti? vbiJ,(f rbpSe. «S KaXbv — as with 
 the idea that it is a right and proper thing; some editors suppose that Sv has 
 fallen out after the similar termination, but such omissions are easily paralleled. 
 
1 84 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book ir. 
 
 Some would destroy the dvriv, but it is obviously necessary for the euphony of 
 the sentence. «(i.ol Si &v IS(5k6i — to me personally (the position is 
 
 emphatic) it woulcL have seemed enough. I prefer taking &v thus to &v eXvai. with 
 Goll,, for several reasons, and especially because Thuc. did not write Sojcci. 
 Ip'Yw Kal. ' We might,' says Krtig., ' have anticipated Kal ipy(f, but /col belongs 
 to the whole clause.' This would greatly have weakened the rhetorical effect. 
 Ashy deeds they have shewn themselves good men and true, iy deeds too should 
 their honours he set forth. KaV ii'?]. ' Supply Kd\6v from apKovp, 
 
 Krilg., but in English we should also say elliptically, and not t&c. The sense of 
 the following words is clear, whatever conclusion we come to as regards the 
 regimen of irLa-Tevdrjvai.. The Schol. makes it depend upon KivbvveieaBai., i.e., 
 rwn a rish of being helieved, implying also the contrary idea, a risk of being 
 disbelieved. Others, connecting it with eS re Kai xetpo" k. t. X. , suppose the 
 whole phrase a sort of epexegesis to Kivhweieudai., i.e., are put in peril, that is 
 to say, of having the belief attached to them dependent upon the fact of whether a 
 man speak well or ill. There is a third method, i.e., to repeat Kiv5vy€{ie(r6ai 
 twice in the sentence as Gdll. does. The Kai between eS and xc'po" might if 
 necessary be considered the adversative and not the connective one, as in several 
 passages in Thuoyd., and with re also in one quoted by Krilg. from Dion, Br, 
 an. d. Pomp. i. 7. Xjoutris iripif XP"'^'? Ta/joreSeis KpeiTTav re kclI xef/Jw eipuTKerai. 
 The prep, h in the sense of perilled upon seems necessary, though some MSS. 
 omit it. Cf. with Krtig. h ri^ Ka/>i Kivdvve^ffofiev ; Eur. Cycl. v. 654, and iv 
 aXKoTpiats ^vxaTs KtvSvve^<rop.€y, Isoc. iv. 86, and rd. Tjfi^repa h evl dvdpi KLvSvvei- 
 erat, Lucian. Jup. Frag. 4. 
 
 (6. ) |Ji€TpC(i)s — observing the due mean. ev cS sc. iv rtp p^erpiois 
 
 elwetv, says Poppo. He therefore would render wherein, or the which, if a man 
 does, he finds it difficult even to establish a conviction that he speaks the truth, 
 thus making S6Krj<ns t^s dXtjdeias, existimatio, or opinio veritatis, as iv. 18, 5.1;, 
 87. Yet it is somewhat doubtful whether Tbuc. would have used language 
 which makes the dif&culty of obtaining credence look like a result of observing 
 moderation in statements. The words iv <J may be taken differently. It is no 
 easy thing to speak suitably (without any sort of exaggeration), in a matter where 
 even one's character for veracity is established with difficulty, i.e., this preliminary 
 difiioulty makes exact propriety of speech more hard to attain. The thought 
 seems to be ; 'one can hardly get believed at all ; much more then is it difficult 
 to get a fit and proper estimate of the matter believed.' Am. quotes iii. 43. 
 T^s 01) jSe^a/ou SoK'/jaeus tQv Kepdwv. Your ill-grounded impression that we are 
 bribed. Cf, also ii. 84, iii. 45, &o. The word is of frequent use in the Tragic 
 Poets. irpbs & PoiXcTtti — when compared with what his wishes are 
 
 (refers to eilvovs) and what he knows to be the case (refers to fupeiScis). 
 Kol irXeovd^efBai has reference to nerplus, so far from being moderately ex- 
 pressed are even exaggerated. Sid, <|>9(!vov — through an envious 
 feeling, stands somewhat independently, as we might ourselves place it. 
 iirJp T^v lovToii ^iiriv — that transcends his own natural powers. 
 
 (c.) TM {iTTcpPdWovTi oixSv. If, with the Schol., we consider airSv to 
 refer to iiralvav, we must translate — to such of them as are extravagamt — i.e., 
 of the praises. But it is also quite possible to refer airav to the general con- 
 ception implied in Siv iJKovq-ev — to the surpassing among them — i.e., the exploits; 
 
Chap. 36.] ITOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 185 
 
 or generalizing the antecedent notion still more, we may explain, with Popp., 
 S fie feaiTTos oii^Tai Uaviis elvai, Spav, tr. that which goes ieyond what each man 
 fancies himself able to do. But that iirep^dWeiv should be intransitive, is no 
 objection to the other methods. Cf. vii. 67,11.45, and Isoo.xii. 36. rah uTrep^dX^ 
 Xoi/o"! T&p ipyav i^iff&aai. Tois X670US. Something of the same kind happens with 
 our verbs 'to pass,' and 'to surpass.' In old Enghsh, 'Well that passes.' 
 <jSt). This word denotes that the mind pauses, and goes no further. Tr. there^ 
 fore straightway — at once, because they envy, without further examination, dis- 
 believe. For the sentiment, cf. Sallust, Oatil. u. 3, and Eochefoucault, Max. 
 376. Les esprits mediocres condamnent d' ordinaire tout oe qui passe leur 
 portfe. ISoKi.|j.d(r6T], a strong word, being that employed to denote that 
 
 after scrutiny a person has been found fit for a public office, and youths for the 
 rights of manhood. See Dem. 814, 20, tr. tested amd approved. See Hermann, 
 Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 123, 12. XP^ >^°-^ ^K'^ •*■ ■"■•' ^- It'becomes necessary 
 
 that I, as well as others, in pursuamce of the law, should endeavour to meet, as 
 far as possible, your several wishes and opinions. The 8d|i) meant is that of the 
 JweiScbs d/c/)oaT?5s, as the PoijXi](ri,s is that of the eiiyovs. 
 
 Chaptee XXXVI. — (a.) ap|o(i,ai . . . TrpuroV. The first thing I shall do 
 will be to commence from, &c. This Kriig. admits may be the meaning, though he 
 observes that even if taken otherwise there is no pleonasm, for a commencement 
 may embrace several topics. Cf. 11, 53 (a), and vpHrov HpxecSai ii. 68, and 
 Monk on Hippolytus, v. 991. Kal irpc'irov 8^ fijia — and suitable 
 
 withal. Such is generally the force of 5^ following Kal. . . . t^v tijj.'^v sc. of 
 first and distinguished mention. del 01 airol. See note on i. 2. b. 
 
 8ia8oxti ™v lir. This may be the instrumental dative denoting the means of 
 transmission, by means of a perpetual succession, or simply the dative after 
 irapiSoaav, to an uninterrupted succession. GoU. remarks that the words are 
 intended to explain oi airol, virtually the same, that is to say in the sense of a 
 successive body, but this seems to me hypercritical ; who would ever have sup- 
 posed that they were actually the same ? 
 
 (5.) irpbs ots IS^IaVTo — in addition to what they had received from their 
 ancestors. CJp to the Persian war only Attica. Krug. o4k dtrdvus. 
 
 The editors doubt whether this is to be connected with Krricrdfji.ei'oi, or 
 xpo(TKa.Ti\nrov. Probably the author, in such cases, had no very determinate 
 purpose himself, and Poppo's remark may be correct. ' Fortasse datS. oper^ in 
 pedio coUocata sunt, ut ad ambo verba spectent.' I would only say that Kriig. 's 
 objection to connect it with irpoa. because inappropriate, seems to me unreason- 
 able — and at the cost of no slight labour have bequeathed it to us as well, is surely 
 very intelligible. to. irXetto oirris. This certainly appears a con- 
 
 tradiction to what precedes. Melhorn, as quoted by Popp., explains that no 
 territorial extension is intended, but the gradual consolidation of power by policy, 
 and the increase of internal resources. It may be so; yet Popp.'s conjecture, 
 air^v is worthy of consideration, in which case we should take tA irXeloi adver- 
 bially, as in Karci, yrpi to. tfKda ^ Kwrh, BaKdaaav, i. 13. 
 kv T^ KaSeoTTiKvCa '^XikC^ . The set time of life, i. e., physically speaking, when 
 the muscles are set, and the human frame will henceforth receive no additional 
 growth, yet has not begun to decay. The use of /.idXurro here is surely incon- 
 
l86 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 siatent with the notion that it means to the full, exactly as has been intimated 
 before. Cf. i. 13. c. 18. a., for Kafle(m;Kui{i. Of. withPopp. ' composite setate.' 
 Tac. Ann. vi. 46, and ' Constanti setate, quae media dicitur' Cio. de Senect. t. 20. 
 avTopK6<rTdTi]v, used proleptically, fitrre etvai aiTapKedTirriv. 
 
 (c.) ^v. Either simply ' Adrfvaiitjv, or more probably iifidv rSivSe, Kal twv 
 Taripom. Poppo remarlis, that not only does the orator avoid the old mythical 
 commonplaces about the Amazons, the Heracleidae, &c., but does not even 
 speak of the Persians in the usual rhetorical style. iroXenov iirlovra, 
 
 an invading war, or war of invasion, or more strictly still perhaps, war, bar- 
 iarioM, or Greek, when it came wpon them. I cannot see the desirableness of 
 reading TroKi/Mov, as Krng. suggests with others. Popp. quotes Trpoaiw 
 kIvSvvos. Lys. p. 99, and ' appropinquans terror,' Livy, xliv. 6. The use of 
 pdpPapos for ^apPapiKds is not very remarkable. "EXXt]V for 'EX\);w(ci! 
 is more so, and is only found in the Poets. Cf. Eur. Iph. T. v. 334. But when 
 such phrases as "EX\a8a yXtia-aav, 'SiKiB-qs ol/ws, P. V. v. i, are found, we 
 need not suspect anything wrong. |iaKpT)7opctv Iv el8(S<riv — ' to 
 
 enlarge upon the subject a/mongst you, who are wdl acquainted with it.' ' It is not 
 exactly that i/uv is omitted.' T. K. A. If it is not at all that viuv is omitted, 
 the idea of tijuv must be excluded, for as Knig. remarks, the words are quite 
 a stereotyped formula, to enlarge upon topics before persons who know them as 
 well as ourselves. Cf. i. 68 ; ii. 43 ; iv. 59. Krilg. thinks Pericles could not 
 have mentioned the matter so briefly, but Thucyd. was compelled to do so 
 because he had already treated of it, 1. 73. 
 
 (d.) liriTT]Srf(r60)s. T. K. A. interprets iTrir'fiSevffis — ' the source; thepar- 
 tioular ^vriTijSeii/iOTa.' It is not easy to see what he means, but the termina- 
 tion ought to have pointed out to him that the word denotes the actual process 
 which results in 4TnTT)Seijfw,Ta — from what sort of training. Cf. vii. 86. This 
 is also the Platonic use of the word. Cf. Legg. 853. B. {jXSov lir' 
 
 aird. This is the reading of the best MSS., to which supply oi Taripes ■fip.Cii'. 
 It must be acknowledged that Bekker's ijXdop.ev supported by some MSS. seems 
 more plausible, for surely Pericles meant to include himself and his contempo. 
 raries. But Popp. retains ^XBov upon the principle in MS. criticism, that 
 the easier reading is not altered into the more difficult, but vice versfi.. The 
 aird, refers to the general notion of irpdyp.ara implied in the foregoing words, 
 and serves itself as an antecedent notion to fiiyaXa. elui — ^irl, 
 
 I will proceed to. Cf. iirl rbv S.Wov Xtr/ov livai, i. 37. Let the junior student 
 notice how iirl cum accusativo only indicates primarily up to a certain point, 
 without connoting hostile intention. Cf. i. 30. a. 54. a. 
 
 Chapter XXXVII. — (a.) o4 ^ijXovcrg — not emulating. Pericles here ad- 
 vances the claim of originality, tacitly contrasting the Athenian polity with the 
 Spartan, which had borrowed so much from Crete, and perhaps other Dorian 
 sources, irapaSet-yjia — 6vt€s. On the principle of variety so fre- 
 
 quently mentioned (of. i. 38, c), for TrapaSdyp,aTi oSa-n ; the indefinite tis is 
 used as often, when the hearer can readily supply the persons whom the 
 speaker, from motives of discretion, will not mention. 4s irXeCovas 
 
 o'lKEiv. These words have occasioned a very elaborate controversy. Some 
 early copyists, unaware that oi/cei may mean ' is administered,' altered the word 
 
Chap. 37-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 187 
 
 in the MSS. (see Bloomf.) into •fJKei ; and this alteration, though not accepted 
 by the later editors, has had some influence in inducing them to attach the 
 same sense to olxelv. I cannot but think Am. is right, who interprets, ' hy reason 
 of the government heing administered for the benefit, not of the few, hut of the 
 many.' Popp. objects that i% cannot be for ' the henefit of.' I reply that ^s 
 denotes the object to which a man looks in doing anything, and if in his ad- 
 ministration he looks to the many, it may be truly said to be conducted for 
 their benefit. The same meaning wiU hold good in the passages which he 
 quotes, es 6\lyovs fiSXKov Tcis Apx^t iroLri<rofiev. viii. 53. h 6\iyov^ KaT^ffTTjtrav 
 ri Twv 2wc. V. 81. With a view to the interests of the few, and there is no other 
 objection to Arn. 's interpretation of which I am aware. Popp. himself, with 
 GoU., ed. Ida., makes the meaning nearly equivalent, as I have said, to what 
 would arise from fj/cei — im/perinm non ad paucos redactum esse, the government 
 devolves not wpon the few, hut the ma/ny. For the passive sense of oUet, see 
 Xen. Cyrop. viii. i, 2. Hellen. vii. i, 3 ; and t] iriXis oIku ko/c£s. Plat. Rep. 
 462, D. SrnioKparCa. The Scholiast's comment is, ^ireiSr) ipavKov 
 
 SoKei i] SrniOKparla xal o/ip Tois AaKOivas tre/MvvvSfievovs iirl rg ^ptnTOKpaTlq.. I 
 think any one acquainted with the Greek notions about ' aristocracy' will be- 
 lieve that the Schol. is right. Pericles meant to excuse the name, and to show 
 that the government really was quite as much an ApiCTOKparta as that upon 
 which the Spartans prided themselves. Plato, or the author of the Menexenus, 
 plainly says, ij ykp ai)r^ 7roXtre£a koX tovto ^v Kal vvv dptffTOKparia. KaXei d^ 
 fiiv airiiv SrinoKparlav, 6 Si &X\o <p &!> X'^^PV- Isoorates, in a similar spirit, 
 speaks of 'an aristocratioal democracy,' 12, 131, 153; and Kriig. cf. Xen. 
 Mem. iv. 6, 12. The words drh dpeTrjs irpori.p.S.Tai explain the nature of the 
 aristocratical element, as Pericles considered it ought to exist. to 
 
 181a 8id(|>opa. This is explained in the most general terms by GoU., quce 
 hominihws privatis agenda sunt, and he is probably right. We might, tr. aU 
 causes of dispute arising among private individuals. Th 'itrov, what 
 
 is called l<Tovop,lav in the Meriexenus, and 'juris sequabUitas,' by Cicero, 
 equality in the eyes of the law. kotA, 8^ t^v 4|£ci)(riv k. t. X. But 
 
 with respect to our estimate of men, as each one choMces to have a reputation in 
 any particular, he is preferred to an honourahle place in the public service, not 
 hecausehe belongs to a class or caste, but from merit; the words dri p,ipovs refer 
 to the distinctions of birth, such as that assigned to the old Dorian, or Heracleid 
 blood at Sparta, to which belonged the 'Op.o'ioi or Peers. Arnold denies this, 
 because the /ieroiKot at Athens were no more eligible to office than the 
 irepioi/coi at Sparta. But surely the first must be regarded as external to the 
 Athenian polity : whereas the latter belonged to the Lacedaemonian, though in 
 an inferior position. It is to my mind a much greater difficulty to make, as he 
 does, 6.TTb fiipovt mean ' distinctions of fortune or party ;' for in what state have 
 not members of diflferent parties succeeded to the administration of affairs ? 
 Cf. the English phrase ' class-legislation.' On the usage of rb ir'Kiov, see i. 83. 
 (b.) 'ix<av 81. ' if he nevertheless have it m his power, does he find himself 
 hindered,' &c. The construction changes upon the principle of variety (cf. ch. 
 37. a), and proceeds as if /caret ireylav had been Tr4vT)s p,iv &v. dJi.ii|j.ttTos. 
 
 This means ' the value at which a man is rated ;' hence we may tr. has he been, 
 or is he ever hindered by the obsowrity of his rank, or social position t 
 
1 88 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 11. 
 
 eXevO^pcos Si K, t. X. ' We not only conduct public affairs in a liberal spirit, 
 but we carry the same spirit into private life, and do not exhibit those absurd 
 jealousies and irksome restrictions which characterise the Dorian states.' I 
 had always translated, and in the matter of that jealousy which is sometimes felt 
 about the daily habits of life between man and man, we regard not our neigh- 
 bour with anger, if we find him pleasing himself, nor do we fix upon owr faces 
 looks of ill-humour, which are annoying enough, though they inflict no actual 
 penalty. Of. G-rote. Somewhat similar is the general view ; but I perceive Kriig. 
 understands by ix^vSivas, ' spiteful and vexatious penalties,' such as those 
 mentioned by Xen. Hell. iii. i, g, iaraBT) ttjj" Aavlba 'ix'^" ^ SokcI KijXis etyaL tois 
 crirovdaiois rdv AaKeSai.i/.ovioii>. Plato also suggests something of the kind, 1j 
 Ttvas dfi6p(povs ^dpas ^ arciffeLs, ^ TrapacrrdcreLS els lepcL iwl rh rrjs x^P^^ ^(Txara. 
 Plat. Zegg. p. 885. In this case Xvinjpas tj 8^ei must mean acerbos visu, and 
 TrpotrTid^/ievM dx^ijSiyas inflicting penalties. I prefer, however, the other inter- 
 pretation, and would with Popp. compare iii. 37, rb KaS" ijiiipav ASeis Kal 
 dp€irt^oO\evTOV Trpbs aXk-^\ovs. 
 
 (c.) dv€^ax6ras. In a mnnner that is not burdensome, i. e., vexatious. 
 8ia 84os — through a principle of fear, a wholesomemoral restraint. This is best 
 illustrated by Sophocles, Ajax, v. 1053. i,Kpba,(jei ' obedientia, cujus signifi- 
 cationis alteram exemplum non novimus. ' Popp. But surely the cognate 
 words all bear the meaning of ' listening,' in the sense of ' attending to,' which 
 is all that is required here. airoiiv oo-oi — and of them especially such 
 
 as. KcivTai the regular term, are enacted. A^pa^ioi 
 
 3vTes. The reader will of course consult Arist. Rhet., i. 10, Koiiibf Xiyu vd/Mop 
 Sera &yparj>a irapi, ivaffiv op-oKoyeiaBai, Soke'l. See Dem. vcpl 2re0. § 317. 
 Plato Legg. 841 b.. Soph. Antig, v. 450, Cio. pro Milone, § to, de Invent, ii. 
 22; iv. 2. o.iayyvii]V ()>epovo"iv — bring with their violation confessed 
 
 disgrace. The words ' with their violation' must be considered as implied in 
 the whole sentence. But as (j>ipovaiv ahxipv is not reverentiam efficere in its 
 ordinary usage, Meyer would here interpret \t pudorem,.i.e., infamies timorem, 
 which is perhaps as unusual, for alcxifV f^^ii scarce mean more than a ' sense 
 of shame,' 
 
 Chapter XXXVIII. — avairavXas — somewhat archaic for dvawaiceis, re- 
 freshments, or recreations. Cf. c. 75, Kar' dvairaiXas, in relief parties. 
 Kriig. adds that the word is also used for ' a place of recreation ;' and 
 quotes Plato, Legg. 653 d. We may add Arist. Ranee, v. 113. t^ 
 
 ■yv<4(i.i]. The Schol. explains t^ fvx'S ^ rg fuc^o-ei. In the first case it is 
 the ordinary dative — to the mind: in the second it is the instrumental dative, 
 by our wisdom. aYuo-i ^iv yt. This form of expression seems 
 
 covertly to refer to the reproaches cast by the severer Dorians upon this part of 
 the social life of Athens. Ay J even by those games of which they talk. 
 8i6TT](r£ois — lasting throughout the year. This may well have been the case if 
 the Scholiast does not grossly exaggerate, for he says there were sacrifices on 
 every day of the year except one. Another grammarian, however, has ex- 
 plained, dvrl rov h' hovi olov KaS' iKaarov (tos. Qovk. Kal ' Apurroipdviis ; and 
 Popp. says that the word has this force in Dion. Hal. But merely ' anniversary 
 festivals' were common everywhere, and would not be distinctive of Athens, so. 
 
Chap. 39.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 189 
 
 that the former interpretation is preferable. If the latter were correct we 
 should at least have had, as Kriig. says, iroXKcus. vo(i,£Jovt€s. See 
 
 notes on i. 77; iii. 82. Am, originally interpreted the word making our custom 
 consist in, and so connected it with a dative. But this he subsequently, I think, 
 •with justice questioned. I do not place any faith iu the construction with a 
 dative, i. 77 ^^^ been explained; in this passage I would make Bvclais the 
 instrumental dative iu combination with iTropia6,iJ,iBa, and after vo/Ml^onres I 
 would supply Bvuias dierriffiovs, we have provided recreation for our spirits, ay, 
 even hy games and religious festivals, in the regular observance of them. Of. Soph. 
 Elect. V. 47. ft77cXXe 5' Sp/ty TrpoaTideh, awnounce with an oath, adding one. 
 For iii. 82, of. ad locum. In Herod, iv. 117, (pilivri mfil^ovcri. 2kv8(.ktj, the 
 XpfjaBai which has preceded must be repeated. See also note on iii. 59. 
 <j>daaa8a.i olKTif'aiSKppovi XajSicras. vo/j.l^ovres must be explained as equivalent 
 to ds vo/il^ofiev. Of. (Ed. Col. 1322. Homer II., ii. 774. Cat. Carm., 39, v. 
 3S5. 'Pater Divum templo in fulgente revisens, ' so. 'quam revisere solebat.' 
 On the matter itself, see Xen. de Rep. Athen. iii. 2, 8. Kara- 
 
 CTKCvais. See note on i. 10, b. Here the words splendour of private establish- 
 ments would seem to imply what we should ourselves include under the term. 
 i{ T€pij/is. ' Connect this with KaB ' ijfj.ipav. ' Kriig. But see note supra, 
 c. 36, b. TO \vin\p6v. I think refers to the painful character of 
 
 the social life of Sparta ; or it may mean the annoyances which in general 
 render life gloomy and disagreeable. iiraa-ip^erai — ' are imported. ' 
 
 T. K. A. without acknowledgment from Bloomf., who adds ' neut. for pass.' It 
 was hardly worth appropriating, for who does not see that such a version 
 "destroys the rhetorical beauty of the passage, which, by a verb of active 
 meaning depicts in a lively manner, ' all the commodities of the world coming in 
 up to the very doors of the citizens day by day.' Of. iii. 53. iireuTeveyK6,p.evot.. 
 And see Xen. de Rep., ii. ii, and Isocrat. p. 63. Plato, Legg., 949. 
 |i,T]S^v olKeioT^po. K. T. \. It is rather interesting to remark how in the ancient 
 authors we find statements put in the converse way to that naturally adopted 
 by ourselves. We should say ov/r enjoyment of foreign productions is not a whit 
 less familiar and intimate than that of our own. Pericles says, our enjoyment 
 of owr own is not more familiar than of that which comes from abroad. See 
 infra. Why T. K. A. should explain am enjoyment that is no less faMiiliar,''hy 
 no less peculiar, I cannot understand: peculiarity is, I apprehend, never hinted 
 at. The meaning of olKeioripq, may be illustrated by the breakfast-table of the 
 Englishman, where the products of the extreme east and west (tea and sugar) 
 are as familiar as the products of his own fields (milk and bread). 
 
 Chaptsr XXXIX. — (as.) t&v iroXeiiiKflv. The editors notice that ri 
 ■iro\ip,i.a is more common in Thuc. Here I think the former word is required 
 — our practice in matters relating to war. rwn irdKe/ilav as has been said might 
 be supposed to come from oJ ToXi/uoi. In what follows the tacit reference to 
 the Lacedaemonian government is obvious. 8 [i'fi Kpv<|>6^v dv k. t. \, 
 
 The editors here notice what I think holds good in many places where it is over- 
 looked, that the dv exerts a, sort of double influence ; it in strictness refers to 
 (ji(f>e\riBelii, but is not without a modifying effect upon xpv^Bh — which were he 
 to see without concealment, he might derive benefit. This generally holds true of 
 
190 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IT. 
 
 cases where the participle ia to be resolved by a conditional clause, as here, fn^ 
 Kpv4>6ii' is equivalent to et /j,^ Kpv^Belri : the relative S is of course dependent upon 
 iSuv, On the |evT|Xa<rCa, see i. 144, and Vfith respect to the t6 KpvTriv of the 
 Lacedsemonian policy, v. 68, and MuUer's Dorians, vol. ii. p. 134. 
 
 (&.) [leT^pxovToi. Go after, maJee the object of thdr pursuit. Cf. i. 124. 
 dvEi|j.4v(i>s. Cf i. ch. 6, a., and Eurip. Alcest. v. 198. Tois lo-oiraXets. 
 
 The general way of taking this is, none the less on that account go to meet equal 
 dangers, i. c, equal to any confronted by our adversaries ; and this I cannot 
 but think correct. Kriig. , however, prefers the version of G-ottleber. Dangers 
 of a sort in which we a/re a match for ow enemies. His argument ia, that the 
 former rendering gives no account of the iraKeis. But surely this is to attach 
 too much importance to a mere termination. Compounds not unfrequently 
 loose in general uaage the distinct notion attached to one of their component 
 parts. The word occurs again, iv. 94, and in Herod, and Plato. Mr. Grote 
 translates perils within the measure of owr strength, making the word contain a 
 comparison within itself, for which use of it I know no authority. 
 AaKE8ai.p.dvioi. To the Athenian mind the 'Lacedaemonians, 'naturally enough, 
 represented the whole band of adversaries with whom they were engaged. 
 They impersonated the opposite cause, and therefore the orator speaks of them 
 as a whole, the several parts of which are denoted by Ka6' eKdirrovs. This 
 is also Ani.'s view, and I think renders unnecessary the substitution of 
 neXo7rowi}irioi for AaKeSai/i6i'ioi, or eavTois for eKacTovs, one of which finds 
 favour with most editors. oijtoI — we by ourselves; i. e., unaided by 
 
 auxiliaries from other states as the Spartans were. irepl tov 
 
 oiKilav a|jivvo|Ji^vovs — recalls the Homeric &iiiveff0aL wepl irdrpTis. The verb 
 everts its true middle force ; to ward off a person for one's own interest, and so 
 becomes nearly equivalent in construction to jjAxeaBai. 
 
 (c. ) eirl TToXXd — to ma/ny objects or enterprises. KaCroi. The 
 
 speaker sums up all the particulars before given at length, and draws his con- 
 clusion. pa6v)i.(a corresponds exactly to our phrase ' talcing it easily,' 
 though so to tr. would not suit the dignity of the orator's style, tr. without 
 painful efforts ; it refers to dvetfi^vus ^itxLTtijfievoi. v6u,iav is to be con- 
 nected with avSpeCas ; bravery which is the result of institutions, i. e., such as 
 the Spartans laboriously produced by their educational training, and the laws 
 concerning military service. l6iXo|jiev. The best MSS. read ^SAoi/iei', 
 which would state the same thing hypothetically, and more modestly. But I 
 apprehend the orator means to speak with the utmost positiveness and confi- 
 dence, assuming as a fact, that they were ready to encounter danger. Bl. well 
 suggests that iBi\oiii.ev arose from the ignorance of some copyists (which Goll. 
 seems to share), who took fiaBvp-lf in a bad sense, and therefore would not 
 believe that Pericles asserted it directly of himself and his countrymen. 
 irepiyt-yveTai. See i. 144. and tr. ; t!iere results over and above — there is this 
 balance in our favour. irpoKd.|JivEiv ; distress ourselves before the time 
 at coming aimoyances. The dative is connected with the verb in a sort of in- 
 strumental construction. See JSsch. Ewm., v. 74. Kal fi,^ irp6(ca/ipe, and 
 compare JgroniCTWiow, V. 343. cicl |i.ox6ovvtes. The Lacedemonians, 
 whose city has been compared to a camp, might well have been described aa 
 &el /jioxSovvres. 
 
Chap. 40.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 191 
 
 Chaptbb XL. — (a.) (|>iXoKaXov|uv y6.p k. t. X. Mr. Grote has, I think, 
 well given the general sense of these words. We combine elegance of taste with 
 gimpUcity of life, and we pv/rsue lenowledge without being enervated. The 
 eireXda here spoken of must have had reference to private life, for, as Kriig. 
 remarks, their public life and public monuments exhibited much lavish magni- 
 ficence. But how does this correspond with the ISlais KaraffKeiais eiirp^Treiriv, 
 ch. 38 ? I apprehend the orator refers to their actual household expenses, 
 which were on a simple scale, cf. c.xvii. a., not comparable to the luxury of 
 Asia, or perhaps Corinth. See what is said about Pausanias, and contrast it 
 with the words of Demosth., IStg, Sk oifTu <Tii<fipoves ^irav — &(TTe t^v ' Apu^reidov, 
 Kol tV MiXtioSou, Kal tuv Xa/jiTpuiv oUlav el ris &pa olSev i^wv birola ttot iarlv, 
 6p^ TTJs ToO yelrovo^ oiSh aefivoripav ofiaav, quoted by Arn. Olynth., iii. 
 p. 35. See, however. Mull. ITist, Gr. Lit., p. 285. ^i\o(TO(f>ovfiev must 
 be understood to comprise all sorts of intellectual pursuits. That these are 
 accompanied by effeminacy is a notion common to all rude and military 
 societies like that of Sparta. lipyov KaCpu. These words are the 
 
 predicate of irXo&nji, and iv, which is found in some MSS., is plainly an inter- 
 polation. Oiw wealth we use as am opportune means, or aid to action : then 
 follows the invariable antithesis, cmd not a^ a subject for ostentatious talking. 
 The form of expression is not more harsh than is often found in Thuc: cf. Kal 
 X670U Kal Ipyov Kalpcp, ch. 43. b. The next sentence commences with rb 
 ir^VEirSai, because that is the main and prominent thought, antithetical to 
 v\oiT(ji. \i.i\ Si.a<|>£ti'Y»v — not to do our best to avoid it ; for n. b. 
 
 /iT) is used, not oi. Does the preposition denote a continuous and persevering 
 struggle to avoid poverty ? Cf. 60. a. Ivl tois aiTots k. t. X. 
 
 ' Those of us who discharge public offices do not neglect domestic duties, and 
 even that portion of our citizens whose business does not permit them to engage 
 in the administration of the state are not without a fair knowledge of politics.' 
 This seems to be the meaning of the whole. Cf. Am. 'a somewhat diffuse para- 
 phrase. Popp. describes the latter class as ' Bijres et his similes. ' They were 
 generally employed as hired labourers, and were excluded from all political 
 offices. But it is not clear that Pericles did not mean to distinguish between 
 those engaged in the administration, and the general body of the citizens ; so 
 at least I infer from rdv fiTjSh ruJvSe iier^ovra. irpbs ^pya. 
 
 The word means business or employment. Cf. CEdip. Tyrcm,, v. 1124, ^,0701' 
 IMepi/xvav TTolov, ^ ^lov rlva; hence its well known philosophical usage in the 
 Nichom. Ethics of Arist. The Spartans proper were not permitted to engage 
 in any mechanical labour, merchandize, or agriculture. 
 
 (6.) o4k airpayfidva. Referring, says Kriig., to the stock charge of 
 troXvirpaynocrirq brought against the Athenians. Grote tr. not as harmless but 
 as useless. Perhaps it approaches more nearly to the spirit of the words to say, 
 910* as a man who only minds his own business, but as one good for no business, 
 or nothing at all. In the same spirit was conceived the famous ordinance of 
 Solon. o4to£. Some copyists, from want of understanding this, 
 
 introduced 0! airol. The speaker gracefully identifies himself with the mass 
 of his fellow-citizens. Kriig. narrows the meaning too much when he refers 
 merely to the orators who ia-Ke/M/iivoi. 9jKov, Dem. i. i. KpCvofi^v yt. 
 
 The particle 7e being apparently derived from the root of ylvop,at, the verb de- 
 
1 93 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 noting existence, is naturally emphatic, and by connexion with any word or 
 clause, attracts attention to the existence of that which it expresses. Here, 
 therefore it insists emphatically upon the truth of Kplvo/^ev, whatever be thought, 
 of ivBviJi.oifi.eda, can judge of at any rate, or criticise ; if we cannot form the origi- 
 nal conception. Of. for this usage of ■yi, Ariat. Eth. Nich., i. 8, h> yi n, 9j 
 jrXeiffTO KaropSoSv. I do not think there is any doubt about ifOvfioi/ieSa, and 
 would compare 6 yap yvois ical /mt] caip&s 5iSd|as ^i' ioif koI d p.Ti ifeffu/i-^dTj. 
 Cf. also viii. 68, We should say, 'if we cannot originate, we judge of,' but with 
 respect to the inverse way in which the statement is made, see supra, ch. 39. a. 
 Tois Xd-yous. A defence against the often repeated accusation that the 
 Athenians were <j>i.\6\oyoi.. [See on the accent L. and S. Lex.'\ Not thinking 
 discussion any damiage to action, but rather that the damage consists in not 
 having heen previously enlightened by discussion, before proceeding to follow out 
 in action those matters to which we Trmst of necessity address ourselves, 
 
 (c.) ToX(iav. Cf. the use of the word i. 70, Kriig, iKXo'yC^co'Bai 
 
 may be simply to ' ea:-cogitate,' or, as usual, ' to compute in full,' o. This 
 
 was formerly explained by whereas, and the accusative of the relative accounted 
 for by understanding the prep. Kard, a, theory which received some support 
 from the Latin quod, Cf. Livy, xxx. 61, quod si possim, Ter. Phor., i. 33, 
 But now the editors incline to the principle of anacolouthon for explanation. 
 The whole clause I should suppose would have been arranged /cai rSSe roh 
 dWois {&fj.a6la.s dpdtros (pepoOaTjs) 6kvov (pipei.. But Kai ride becomes 6, and the 
 writer lets it stand, as preparatory to 'Xoyurp.ds, which he introduces to make 
 the antithesis more plain and ' piquant.' This is the opinion of Kriig. and 
 Poppo, and I suppose Arn. meant the same thing, for he says, ' the verb which 
 should have followed 8 is omitted, and another construction substituted in its 
 place, which is irreconcileable with the former construction.' To understand 
 ToivdvTiov ylyverai after S, seems to me singularly futile, for if that, why not 
 anything anywhere ? I am not sure whether after all I should not tr. in respect 
 of which matter {i. e, the effect of previous deliberation upon courage), mth the 
 rest of men, 'tis ignorance that produces boldness, while reflection brings along 
 ■with it hesitation ; H then would stand like rd TriveaSat supra, and many, other 
 accusatives at the commencement of a sentence to receive further elucidation 
 in its course. 01 . . . 7i7v<oirKovT6s Kal n^ diroTp£ird|XEVoi. The 
 
 same persons ; though rd. is used in the same sentence of two different (incom- 
 patible) things. See Granville Sharp's Canon note, i. 18. a. tr. turn not aside 
 from (lit. out of) the damger. ifiia — are the sweets of peace, as Seivo 
 
 are the terrors of war, and dSca is quite a needless conjecture. 
 
 (d.) aperifir. The popular explanation of dpcri), as given by Arist. Shet., i. 
 9. 2, forms the best explanation of this. 'Aperri di ia-ri fiev Sii/apus, (is So/cet 
 TTopuTTiKri dyaBQp Kal (pvKaKTiK't), Kal bivaim eiepyeriK'^ iroXKui/ Kal fieydXuv Kai 
 irdvTiiiv irepl irdvra. So 'goodness' and 'bontd' have a special meaning wherein 
 they are nearly equivalent to kindness and liberality. Cf. German giltig. We 
 find of course a more scientific definition of dper^, Eth. Nich. ii. See the same 
 usage ii. 51. c, where the Schol. explains dper^s, tpCKavBpdnrlas. 
 •flvavrKojiteo. This says T. K. A. =we are opposed to ; but does not this lose 
 sight of the fact that a process is denoted by the termination of the verb ? tr, 
 we have been made to entertain very opposite views, so, by education, and the 
 principles of conduct generally accepted among us. The editors need not have 
 
Chap. 41.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 193 
 
 yemarked on the perfect, for it is the pQ)per tense. PePatonpos 8J 
 
 K.T.X. tr. Now the doer of the favour (n. b. the indefinite participle) is the 
 more abiding friend for the sake of keeping it still owing, in the shape of a debt, 
 iy continued kindness to the recipient, and so nearly Pop. Kriig., elivoid rivos is 
 most properly as this version represents it, ' benevolenfia in aliquem / and 
 this meaning is also most suited to the argument, for the orator wants to convey 
 the impression that efooia most truly and permanently attaches to his country- 
 men, and this he proves by showing that it is to them a necessary means of re- 
 taining the benefit to be derived from their own liberality. The whole is well 
 illustrated and explained by Arist. Nich. Eth, viii. 7, ol 5^ eiepy^rat roi/s 
 fiepyeTTlS^VTas SoKovcri fiaWov tpiKeiv ij ol ei5 TraddvTcs toOs Spdaavras : then 
 comparing the parties to debtors and creditors, he adds, oSra Kal roils eiepyeT-q' 
 ffavTas §o^\e(T6aL elvai toi)s irddovras, ojs Kop^iofx^vov^ ras ;;taptTas, tols 5^ ovk 
 fXvai. iinp-ekh ri duTairoSoSvai. See Tacitus, Agric. oh. 42. Peile prefers in 
 order to keep it owing to him in the shape of good will on the part of him to whom 
 ■]ie hath given — considering that St' eivoias explains dfpeLKo/x^vijv. But both for 
 the sense and the Greek I prefer the former. Goll. seems to understand to 
 keep alive the obligation arising from his good will in the mind of him whom 
 he has obliged, which would, I fancy, as Peile has suggested, require Si 
 eivoi.av, or rather Sict tt)v eiivoiav. Engelman's ed. also, I observe, agrees with 
 the version which I have given, ' um durch Wohlwollen gegen den welchem er 
 sie verliehen hat, sich den schuldigen Dank zu sichern.' The French version 
 has the usual vagueness, 'il la garde a son oblige comme une detie 
 de bienveillance.' d|JipXvTcpos — duller in his feeling. «s X'^P'''' — 
 
 by way of a free gift. airoSibcuv is only applicable on the principle 
 of Zeugma, for it contains the notion of paying a debt. Cf. Sheppard's 
 Theoph. p. 176. TTJs eXeuSepCos tu •nla-Ti^. We might tr. inallthe con- 
 
 jidence of liberality, i. e. with that confidence which a truly liberal man feels ; 
 but most edd. prefer to tr. in the confident spirit of freedom, i.e. the confidence 
 which freedom bestows upon those who possess it, thus introducing a political 
 allusion. Of. i. 68. a. dScmsis, without fear of the consequences, and will 
 
 suit either interpretation, for we may suppose it to mean, vrithout that fear of 
 future ingratitude and forgetfulness which characterize the recipients of favours, 
 and so deter many from being liberal ; or again it may refer to political injury 
 resulting from measures undertaken in behalf of others. The proposed altera- 
 tion into iiSeiis (mentioned by T. K. A.) seems to me singularly stupid. 
 
 Chaptek XLI. — (a.) ^vvS^av, Lit. taking all together ; hence summing up 
 in a word. So it is used i. 70, ad fin. iroiBeucriv. Grote con- 
 
 siders that the abstract word for iraidevrpiav softens the affirmation. It is 
 doubtful whether there was any such intention. We should say ' The School 
 of Greece,' and so Zevort, 'I'foolede la Grfeoe.' Ka9' ^Kao-rov. 
 
 The masculine gender, as respects our citizens regarded as individuals. Re- 
 mark how the writer varies his style, p-era, xa/airui', eirpairiXc^s and aUrapKes, 
 where another would have used three adverbs. The position of iLy which 
 properly belongs to irapi'keffdai, is not without its influence upon 
 SoK€tv. Trap* ^|i«v — going forth from among us. See note on the use of 
 
 irapal. 29.0. Kriig. certainly explains, 'owing to our training and education, 'but 
 
194 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 he does not say, as T. K. A. makes him. that there is causal reference involved. 
 The use oi irapi, 'cum genitive' denotes 'motion from alongside of an object,' 
 and though more may be implied, a causal notion is not necessary to the sense. 
 eirl irXetoTa (iSr\. The expression is rather general. elSos says Popp. is often 
 connected with rpbirov, and therefore he is probably right in explaining affendi 
 ratio. Kal unites iirl irXetcrr' etdr; to pji\i.<TTa eiiTpairiXus, though in translating 
 it is as well for our idiom omitted. The same man going forth from among us, 
 could, without requiring aid from others, address himself to the most varied vicis- 
 situdes of action, with the most graceful versatility. The use of o-ufia may in- 
 dicate that only bodily accomplishments are intended ; and Kriig. seems to 
 assert as much — ' awfia kann hier nicht fiiglich Pcraora sondern nur Korper 
 heissen.' Cf. ii. 51.2.' The idea seems to be that the Athenian is 'in se totus 
 teres, atque rotundus,' and unless intellectual versatility be elsewhere implied, 
 it would hardly be omitted here. cvrpair^Xus. Like our simple, 
 
 and other words in perhaps all languages, passes from a good into an evil accep- 
 tation. Thus, though originally, as here, and in Aristotle, it denotes a sportive 
 demeanour, it came to signify ' scurrilous.' 
 
 (6.) aKofjs KpeCcririDV — superior to repute, i.e., its reputation. I cannot 
 agree with Kriig. in this instance, who tr. superior to any of which tradition 
 tells, a meaning which, he says, the absence of the article plainly indicates. 
 But does not aKoi), 'Fa^me,' 'Parlance,' belong to that class of words which, 
 under special circumstances, are used without an article. See the note, i. 8. a. 
 And as ireipav is anarthrous, it is not surprising that d/coi} should be so also. 
 Cf. vii. 21. d'yaviiKTT)o-iv i\ii — contains in itself cause of indignation; the 
 
 accusative has an objective signification. Cf. r'i^v iwavvfdav (rxeii/, i. 9, a. Popp. 
 also adduces KaTi,iJ,eii,\j/iv ixeiv ; and ii. 61, alirB-qa-iv, ii. 87, iv. 126; and a 
 similar objective usage of habeo, 'Nam causam justi semper amoris habent.' 
 Tibullus, i. 4, 10. 44>' otwv — with respect to the sort of persons ly 
 
 whom. Cf. with Kriig. vii. 75. KaTd|j.e)i,<|/iv. T. K. A. explains 
 
 a sense of degradation, but this is not Greek. We must tr. occasion for depre- 
 ciation, i.e., not of themselves, but of us; and hence, matter for self reproach. 
 They are forced to acknowledge us a great nation, and such as it is no disgrace 
 to be governed by. <rT)|i6C<i)V — accompanied iy palpable proofs, i.e., the 
 
 facts of History, and the visible monuments of power ; then we might have 
 anticipated oiK dvev fiapripuv, but the principle of variety (i. 38, c. ) comes in, 
 and the construction changes. See several instances in this ch., and especially 
 TcSc Si ^pyav, where 5^ unites a, direct to a relative statement. The combina- 
 tion of S'^ To£ is as strong as possible, as they are the two chief particles for 
 denoting affirmation, ye exerts its proper force, as explained supra. The 
 general notion is that they have inscribed their glory too palpably upon Greece 
 and her history to fear oblivion by posterity. koI ovS^v. This Kal couples 
 
 Trpo<rSe6p.evoi, to irapaaxbiievoi.. The plur. Sireo-i denotes poetry. Cf Aavdovj 
 4v Tols Ireri., i. 3. Jttos is 'word' in prose only in particular combinations; 
 Krug. fb airCxa — for the immediate moment. Cf. iv. 107, vi. 57. 
 
 0)ii'f|pou liroiv^Tov. Sine articulo. A Homer for a Panegyrist, or, to sing their 
 praises. "rfflv S^ ip-yuv — whereas the truth will damage the conception 
 
 formed of the facts. The exaggerated estimate of a thing, when con-ected by 
 tlie test of experience, is apt to depreciate its value in our notions. I look 
 upon all attempts to make out from the rhetorical usage of iwbvoia, that it is in this 
 
Chap. 42. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. T95 
 
 place employed for a 'magnificent conception,' as founded upon a wrong view of 
 the requirements of the argument. kukuv t« K&,ya9av— for good or for ill. 
 
 I do not see why Pericles might not have thus spolien, even if he had not meant 
 to confine the /ca/cci to evils wrought upon their enemies, as most Ed. explain. 
 Of. 45. b. Kriig. considers the expression so 'naive' that he conjectures the usual 
 ioTmula, KaK&vTe KayaOSiv. |D7KaToi.Kt<rovTes. The metaphor seems to be 
 
 taken from colonization, or perhaps the consolidation of a state. Grote, there- 
 fore, well renders having planted imperishable monuments. SiKatoivTEs 
 [j.'fl d<))aipe6rivai a,M\v — asserting their right not to be robbed of it. It certainly 
 is an illustration of the principle, ^ikei diras to iavroi) ^pyov, that Mr. G-rote, 
 after having been told the right one, should retain his own strange translation 
 of these words, vindicating her just title to unimpaired rights. He naively 
 remarks that neither Popp., GoU., nor Arnold, notice the difficulty. They do not 
 do so, because there can be none to anyone who remembers that the verbs which 
 take a double accusative in the sing, have this construction in the passive. Cf. 
 infra, 44. b. 'kaitof.ivav, n. b. the present part. ' whom they are leaving 
 behind them.' 
 
 Chapter XLII. — [a. ) ir€pl to-ou — for an equal stahe. Kriig. cf. Dem. viii. 
 60. oix iirip tuv Itrav i/xip re Kal rots iSXXois iird' 6 kLvSvvos. 
 y.i\%\v {pirdpxei. We have ixTjhh rather than oiSh, because the clause is de- 
 pendant upon |U^) elcai. e<|>' ots. TJndei'stand the antecedent Toiruv. The 
 preposition ^Trt indicates the local position of the speaker ; hence, iir -aivos, be- 
 cause spoken over the bodies of the dead, eulogy. Of. 24. u. v|ivr)ira. Though 
 originally employed for poetic praises, the word naturally passes into a rhetorical 
 usage, as Bl. has shown by examples. lo-i5^pO'iros— lit. equal in the 
 scales; hence, ' the just equivalent of their deeds.' 
 
 (6.) SaK€t 8e (Jioi 8t)XoOv k. •■. \. There is some little difficulty here. 
 &v5phs dperr/v, as Popp. observes, cannot be alicujus horum defwnctorum virtu- 
 tern; the genitive must therefore have an adjectival force, and the whole is 
 fortitudo virilis. So in the passage quoted by Bl. from Isoc. ix. 8, xaXex6i< 
 idTiv AvSphs Aperifv Sih \l>yoiv iyKcofudt^eiv. We must, as Meyer has pointed out, 
 recognise a reference to two classes of persons ; those whose previous life had 
 as yet given no indications of worth, and those who had long been distinguished 
 as valuable citizens, tr. Now what a man's worth is, this, the closing scene of 
 these men's life, appears to me to show, whether now for the first time announcing 
 it, or coming as its final confirmation (lit. being the first to announce it). So 
 Peile tr., both in the case where it is the first indication, and where it is the final 
 confirmation. Kriig. remarks upon the Euphemism contained in KaraarpotpTi, 
 which was, he says, imitated by the later writers. irporCBeo-Bai. 
 
 Popp. explains this fortitudinem prce se ferre , profiteri, exhibere, or, in magnd 
 laude poni. I am, however, inclined to think that the notion of holding before 
 as a screen is implied, meaning that their subsequent merit should exclude their 
 previous deficiencies from view ; or more simply still, ' to put forward in the 
 f/rst place,' so that their other conduct becomes a secondary matter. Here, 
 then, the word is used in a favourable sense ; the unfavc arable sense is more 
 common, as iii. 64, iirl nf iKtlvuiv /caKip cLvSpayafflav irpoHCeade. Cf. Tac. Hist. 
 V. 25, ilium domesticis malis exoidium gentis opposuisse. ■ 
 
 o 2 
 
ig6 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Boos 
 
 (c.) irXo^Tu, the reading of the best MSS., taken instrumentally viMi 
 .ilxaXaKlirBT). T^v eri airdXaucriv — the further enjoyment of it. 
 
 irevCas IXirCSi. Here we have the true genetic or genitive case, of. i, 23. d. — 
 hope engendered hy poverty, i, e., vphioh poverty causes to spring up in the mind, 
 or, as some say, ' the poor man's hope. ' See, however, Jelf, § 898. 3. 
 TrXoi)TT|(r€i6. I don't believe T. K. A. is right in tr. this to iecome rich, to grow 
 rich, though, as usual, blindly following Kriig., who has reich werden. The 
 word, I believe, implies 'being,' compounded as it is with ^oj ; so we say 
 in English, ' he hopes to be a rich man some day or other.' And similarly in 
 the passages quoted by Krtig., e. g. Plat. Rep, p. 421, d. irXovrriaas x"'''?^^^ is 
 the ■potter when a rich man. See 1.107.0. dvaPoX^v — a putting off from 
 
 ■one's self, or shirking, if the word be not too inelegant. Cf. with Krtig. 
 dva^oXas iTroietro. Dem. 48, 20. avTuv, so. ttjs dTo\ai<reus Kal 
 
 T^s iXTrlSos. XapivTes, here in reference to the mental grasp, or 
 
 conception. Cf. rh K'^puy/xa — SUatov elvai. i\dfi^avov, iv. 106, and note iii. 259. 
 Cf. ib. 38. d., 56. u. [ler' aiTOv, sc. too mvbivov. Toliv Si I<j>il(r6ai. 
 
 These words are also to be taken in close connection with /act airrov, which is 
 the condition upon which the infinitives are predicated, not without this peril ; 
 so Kriig. ' nur mit Bestehung der Gefahr.' This was the only condition upon 
 which they would consent to seek these objects. IXirCSi |iiv k. t. X. 
 
 — committing to hope the uncertainty of future success, i. e., so far as future 
 success, a thing never certain, was concerned, they were content to hope for 
 the best. ^PVH* Si — ^^^ when once engaged pn action thinking it right to 
 
 trust none other than themselves concerning what had met them face to face — lit. 
 before their eyes, i. e., the dangers of the combat, ipytf stands as an adverbial 
 dative ; tov ■ijd'r] bptafx^vov is antithetical to Tb dfpav^s toO KaropStoffeLV, and d^LoOvres 
 a(ji. air. Treir. to iXiriSi iirir. Meyer, on the other hand, to whom Popp. assents, 
 makes ^pytp 5^ follow ir^iroid^vai, and ix<l>i(nv aiiroh follow dpafj-^vou. Trust to 
 action in what was before their own eyes. This has the advantage of more 
 exactly balancing the antithesis, but the sense seems to me inferior ; (Tipiinv 
 airoh, too, is weak in this way of taking it ; and should we not have had toO 
 ffipiaLV a^ToTs opufiivov ? Iv avTw — therein. rh a.^vvE0-6ai Kal iraOetv. 
 
 Said of the same act. Cf. Granville Sharp's canon, i. 18. a. — to fall in repelling 
 the enemy, contrasted with rb IvSovres o-<6^«o-9ai — to secure safety hy submission. 
 See Jelf, § 678. The question then arises, what are we to make of |i,£lXXov ^Yt)- 
 <rd)Jievoi ? An Englishman might be tempted to tr. having thought more of, i.e., 
 preferred, or, having more fancied ; T)yovp,ai would then be used with pmXKov, 
 as lioKKov d^iovv, and p.aKKov ^oiXeaBai.. This agrees with Popp., who s.iys, 
 ' cum Tjyuada^ interdum sequente infinitive notionem ceqimm censendi habeat 
 (ut j'Oyiiifeii' iv. 86), videtur sonare posse, praiferre, malic' This Arn. calls the 
 'sensus prffignans' of ijyr](Tdp,evoL, and places it among the instances cited by 
 Lobeck ad. Phrynich. c. vi. p. 753, where ijyetffdai, ofecrffai, and vop.l^uv, are 
 used in the sense of thi/nking right. To this it is objected that they are always 
 followed by an infinitive sine artioulo. Arn. replies by quoting ii. 53, t6 Trpoara- 
 'Kamoipeiv oiSeh irpdSvpios fjn. But is this exactly parallel — with respect to the. 
 taking rrmch trouble, no one was zealous. However, Matthise, § 543, has 
 collected numerous instances of the infin. with article, some of which are 
 more appropriate, though many are otherwise explicable. Perhaps It might 
 lessen the diflioulty to say for yiiaX. i]y. iftstead of thought more of, more thought 
 
Chap. 43.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 97 
 
 of, i. c, gave move thought to, though even this is scarce consistent with the 
 common use of rjyoviiaL. Aitbther method of explanation is to consider that 
 the words stand eniptioally, for elvai ixaWov tovto, that this more consisted in, 
 &c., where by 'this' is meant t6 atpluiv airoU TreTrotS^rai. Kriig. tr. theif 
 therein more recognised (i.e., understood and accepted the necessity of), defence, 
 though accompanied loith death, than self-preservation purchased by submissimi. 
 I do not exactly understand either T. K. A.'s explanation or his translation of 
 Kriig. Peile prefers the old reading rip to rb, which he considers confirmed 
 by c. 43, kv Ty dfiijvecrdai, and tr. and accounting that to consist in actually 
 defending themselves and suffering (i. e., at every cost, come what may), rather 
 than in seeTcing to save themselves hy giving in. rh (liv altrxpbv k. t. X. 
 
 — Disgrace, indeed, to their reputation (lit. what would be said of them) they 
 fled from, hut the brunt of battle with thevr bodies they bore, and at the very 
 briefest crisis of their fate (when the least thing might have turned the scale of 
 victory), they departed in the height of their glory rather thorn of their fears. 
 The aK/irj' seems to me to be applied by a sort of Zeugma to rod 6iovs, for 
 had the latter stood alone the orator would probably have used another word*. 
 81' IXaxCo-TOD Kaipov tuxus, seems equivalent to the ' horce momento cita mors 
 venit ' of Horace. Meyer and Popp. doubt this, and tr. 'dum fortuna brevissi- 
 mam nacta erat opportunitatem, ' meaning, I suppose, ' when fortune had for- 
 a moment obtained an opportunity,' i.e., they had a chance for a moment of 
 distinguishing themselves, and did not let it slip. dirT)\XaYT)crav — 
 
 were set free from, an euphemism as in Heracleidce, v. 965. Kelvov S' diraWa.- 
 xSimos. So the Latin decesserunt, our departed, and the German Sie schieden. 
 
 Chaptek XLIII. — {a.) irpo<rT|KdvTws. D- welltr., 'as became the character 
 of their country. ' d(r<j>aXeo-T^pav. Certainly there is force in K. '3 
 
 objection, that a<r(p. diavoiav cannot signify a securer life. He therefore reads 
 neut. plur. i,iT(j>a'KicTTepa. But I am sure Thuc. would have sacrificed some- 
 thingfor the antithesis which makes both adjectives predicates to Siavolav ; and, 
 after all, we say a safer policy, asaferlineof action, meaning that which conduces 
 to safety. Cf. the well-known passages Soph. Ajax, v. 550, and Virg. xii. 435. 
 o-KOTToSvTas p'fl \6y<f |jiova>. — considering not in words alone ; or merely theoreti- 
 cally : it is meant that they must show a practical sense of the fact by their actions. 
 Kriig. cf. CEd. Col. v. 369. \&yi^ tr/coTroptrt ttiv irdXai yivovs (pdopdv. ^p*Y*i> 
 
 6£(o|jicvovs. The opposite notion to \6yij) aKoirodvTas : this latter, as Am. says, 
 means regarding athing merely from the account given of it, therefore the former 
 will be, viewing a thing in its reality, not trusting to report, but seeing it as in 
 fact it is. The antithesis makes this preferable to the tr. of Peile and others — 
 what she, (i. c, the state) c^ocs. elSdras' Cf. supra, ch. 3,6. tr., 'if a man 
 
 were to enlarge on, it would be to persons as well acquainted with it as himself.' 
 Ipairrds YiTvoii^vous, becoming its lovers: make Athens your Mistress. A strong 
 personification, referring doubtless to certain personal relations fashionable at 
 the time and place. toX|ji,o5vt«s Popp. says. i. e., To\inipol, and Kriig. 
 
 renders ' Mlhne,' as to\/j,S.v often stands absolutely ; and of course T. K. A. 
 ^'oUows. But these translations do not show that ToX/ium-es sine articulo is the 
 conditionalizing participle, expressing with the others the cause of iKTijaavro — 
 by daring won, Cf. i. 9. a. YiYVwo-kovtcs rd Seovra, is, I think> 
 
 talcing the trouble to acquaint themselves with their duty. See what is said i. 86. a. 
 
198 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, [Book II. 
 
 alir\vvo|JiEVoi — with a Jceen sense of shame, or sense of honour : as Kriig., who 
 quotes alSofi^vuv d.v8pCif irX^oves ffbo^ijk x^^avTaifJl. v. 531* 
 BiroTt (r(|>aXEi.^<rav. Optative, because indefinite frequency. Cf. i. 70, d. 
 ipavov — a joint contribution ; the regular technical term, and of course quite 
 familiar to his auditors. For information see Diet, of Antiquities, Hermann. 
 Pol. Ant. of Greece, § 146-9, and Bceckh's P. E. of Athens, p. 245. E. T. 
 The society itself, and the money subscribers were each called fyavos ; the 
 members ''Epaviffrai, and their president an Eranarch. Demosthenes Cant. Mid. 
 § 27, &o., makes much use of the same metaphor, representing the state as a 
 sort of great benefit society, to which every citizen owes a contribution. 
 
 (b.) KOiv^ — in commom with those who had not fallen. Kriig. Iv ^ 
 
 Some understand T(i<p<f, but Kriig. says it is the neuter, im the spot where. 
 frapa t*^ €Vtdx<5vti. k. t. X. On every occasion, either for word or deed, which 
 from time to time may happen to present itself : referring to spoken panegyric, 
 and commemoration by festivals, &c. Kriig. will not allow that ivruxdnTi can 
 agree with xalpt^, which trapa, with a dative would not allow, he therefore tr. 
 in his case who happens at any time to fall into the subject. I do not know 
 what his objection is, unless it be that Traph cum dativo indicates rest at a point, 
 or with a person. But upon the hypothesis that the occasion does occur, may 
 we not say that their glory certainly abides with it, is always to be found with 
 it? irdira 7fj might be translated ' every land;' but it may also be 
 
 the whole ea/rth. So Lysias, ii. 15, fiiraca neXo7r6w7;(ros. Kriig. 
 TT]s ■yvwjj.Tis juiXXov ^ tov ^p'yov. ' an unwritten meitiiorial of the heart, rather 
 than of a [aj their ?] material mormment.' So D., and this is the usual translation. 
 Kriig. however argues that Trap ' eKdcrif in itself implies a memorial of the mind, 
 and ToD ^pyov is not a proper expression for a material thing. He would 
 therefore tr. the memory of their patriotic sentiment, rather than of the fight iu 
 which they fell. But surely the two would be indissolubly blended together, 
 and the names of the great Athenian battles were ever in their orators' mouth. 
 I believe rod ipyov is used much in the same way as it is a few lines previously, 
 i. e., what was actually done in the way of commemoration. The orator does 
 not intend to exclude such commemoration, but implies that even where this was 
 absent, their recollection would still dwell in the minds of their countrymen. 
 In justice to Kriig. 's argument, it should be noticed that the combats in which 
 these men fell were somewhat insignificant. Engelman's tr. agrees with Kriig. 
 — mehr ihrer Gesvnnung als des Kampfes selbst. Cf. .t^sch. cont. Ctes., 50 c, 
 01) yap ipovro delv iv Tois ypdfipuffi TLfido'daL, dXX ' if t^ p-y^P-V "rwi* e5 TreTovOdnav. 
 
 (c.) TO £<!Sai|iiov, and rb e<i<|nixov are predicates, for the predicate takes the 
 article where it is represented to be coextensive with the subject. Happiness 
 is freedom, and freedom courage ; — is meaning consists in. irepiopacOE. 
 
 voce mediS, neglect to yowr own damage. Kriig. cf. i. 24, 4, vi. 93, i. 
 KaKoirpa^ovvTes in reference to the iirlirovoi AffKijCis of the Lacedsemoniaus, 
 ch. 39, 2. Kriig. those who fare hard. This is probably, as Bl. says, antici- 
 pative of an objection likely to be urged by the rich, who might say, like the 
 soldier of Lucullus, that they ought not to risk their lives in the same way as 
 those who had nothing to lose. The argument is certainly a paradox, contra- 
 dicted by experience, however ingenious on the part of the speaker, 
 i) IvovT^a |jLeraPaX'f|. Tlie change to the opposite is still a risk, or there is still a 
 
Chap. 44. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 99 
 
 rish of a change to the opposite. <f>povT||ta — high spirit. See i. 81, 
 
 and cf. ii. 62. <| (ictA toB (laXaKurBiivai KdKCiKris. Am. says 
 
 KaKuns is misery, wretchedness. This is scarcely exact enough; it is really 
 ' worsening,' were there sucb a word, i. e. that deterioration of character, or de- 
 gradation which follows upon (lit. accompanies) the having shown cowardice. 
 Before ine-rA toO in some MSS. stand iv rip, which is, I think, plainly a gloss 
 introduced from the margin. Kriig., however, retains the words, from the 
 notion that tA fiera toC fiaXaKMBrivai. may be one logical term capable of 
 declension like a substantive, and he assigns to it the meaning the state that 
 follows upon proved cowa/rdice. But of such a phrase ' desiderantur exempla.' 
 piipiir| — vigour, and so valour, which is from vaieo. Koivf) — hope 
 
 common to ail, i. e. , of coming safely out of battle ; but hope for the common 
 good gives, as Kriig. says, a loftier thought, and is not contradictory to the 
 idiom of the language. But may not the meaning be affected by its combination 
 with pii/iris ? avaC<rOi]Tos ' describes the speediness of the pang of death 
 
 when it comes in the heat of battle without the protracted suffering of disease. ' 
 Ai'u. If the meaning assigned by Kriig. to koipti be correct, the hope of 
 benefiting their country is another element in rendering death unfelt, or pain- 
 less. Am. quotes similar usages of the word from Dem. Aris. JRhet., c. 6, § 4, 
 Plutarch, Bemetrims, c. 29. 
 
 Chapter XLIV. — [a.) 6\o(|>vpoii.ai.. The fut. 6\o(pvpoviJ.ai. has been con- 
 jectured, but the present is more proper, because it relates to the actual state 
 of feeling which the orator was then expressing — / am not as you see lament- 
 ing, hut shall rather, &o. to 8' eixux^S ol dv tf^s eiirpeireo-TaTTis 
 K. T. \. Peile tr. Happiness belongs to those who shall have obtained the most 
 glorious — death, as these men have now obtained, or affliction, as you. This 
 is, I think, correct, except that rb einx^^ is — goodhap, not happiness, 
 eidatfiovia ; and we should perhaps say. They shall be accounted to have had the 
 most fortunate lot. The whole, I fancy, means, ' your affliction, as their death, 
 is the best of the sort that can befall a man.' But Peile and others explain, 
 ' Death and affliction are the lot of all men. Human happiness is therefore 
 altogether comparative. Hence, they may be said to be happy, whose lot it is 
 to have the most glorious, as in the present instance these men have, death ; whilst 
 you have affliction.' Kal ots . . . 5vv£(JiCTpif|6ii. This passage is of ac- 
 knowledged difficulty. ' In duabus rebus,' says Popp., 'hie hsereas.' One is 
 the change of construction from o'i hv Xcixw^i, to ols ^vvefierp-iiBij : but this is 
 amply accounted for on the principle of variety so often mentioned of, i. 38, 
 c. ; the second is the force of the preposition iv, when it is not stated what 
 are the things in which they were happy. It seems to have escaped Popp., 
 that these verbs belong to a class compounded with iv, which in English are 
 expressed by putting the prep, after the verb, and which stand almost inde- 
 pendently. H. g. Aristoph. Aves, v. 38. Kal wacn kooit^v ivairoTlaai x/"7/^'"'''> 
 open to all to spend their money in. Herod, ix. 65. otfrc iaeXSav is rb Tiii,evos 
 o6re ivairoSaviliv. Arist. Pax, v. 1156. ipairoTraTciv yci,p iar' iiriTTiSeios irdm, 
 Eurip. Bacchce, 508. ivSvaToxnaai. I should therefore interpret, whose life has 
 been dealt out to them to be happy in, equally as to die in ; or, inverting, to die in, 
 equally as to be happy in, i, c. their death has been correspondent to the hap- 
 
aoo NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book Ti; 
 
 piness of their life. If you look at the happiness they enjoyed in life, and at' 
 the close to which their life was brought, you will find them 6/xot(os ^v/iiierpri- 
 Bivra — dealt out in corresponding ratio. I subjoin other explanations which- 
 the reader may perhaps prefer. Meyer has, ' quorum vitce tenor ita conc/ruit,' 
 ut eddem re et felices essent, et obirent, i. e. quS in re vitse terminum, in eft', 
 etiam felioitatem invenerunt.' The close of their life was made to them hap- 
 piness. This I cannot think accordant with the usage of the verbs in Greek-. 
 Hermann — ' quihus sic est tradwcta vita, Ut in ed pari et felicitate et exitu utc 
 rentur.' To this it is objected that eS does not occur before ivreXevTrjaai. This 
 objection I think remedied by the version which I have ventured to give. , 
 Peile — who have had their life equally dealt out, so as for them to be happy in 
 it to the same extent, and to die in it, i. e. die simultaneously with their earthly 
 enjoyment. Cf. Eurip. Hipp. 1069. -2 Cor. vii. 3. Kriig., their good fortune 
 has been equally balanced (abgeschlossen) for them, so as in and with it to meet 
 their end. T. K. A., the accurate measurement of life (= space of life) 
 allows space enough for these two things, a happy existence, and death, but no 
 more. 
 
 (b.) irMav sc. raCTCt. Kriig. ingeniously suggests iraBeiv. Siv is 
 
 the masculine, having reference to an antecedent implied in what has gone be- 
 fore. With respect to persons of whom you will so often have things to put you in 
 mind. For the sentiments here expressed, Popp. cf. Isoc. Plai. § 19. Xen. 
 Gyrop. vii. 5.82. ir€i.pao-a|>.€vos — deprived of before he has had an op- 
 
 portunity of experiencing. Krilg. quotes Valla's version quibus nunquam 
 potituri privamtur with approbation, adding that ireipafrdf/.evo^ the reading of 
 some MSS. is inadmissible, because ' a man cannot be deprived of what he 
 has never had.' I suppose one might retort with reference to the future, it is 
 no great deprivation to lose what you are never going to have. In fact I be- 
 lieve the aor. part, to be very suitable, as conveying the idea without any limi- 
 tation of time — i. e. simply without experience of them. d4>aipE6fj. 
 Cf. supra, 41. b. Here some accus. pronoun is understood as object to the verb. 
 X^0T], oblivion, for the ground, or cause of oblivion. Popp. refers to iirtaKev^, 
 i. 52 ; and dXacriv 'IXlov. Phil. v. 61. though this is scarcely the same thing. 
 8i\60€v — beneficial in two ways. T. K. A., or more accurately, benefit will 
 accrue from two sources. |vvo(<rci, has for its subject riKvacnv iroiaaBai, 
 according to Popp. and Bl. ElrUg. says it has no subject at all, or at most 
 irpayixa is to be supplied, which actually is so, Arist. Nubes, v. 594. So he also 
 explains Xen. Anab. vii. 8, 4 ; Andocid. i. 77 ; and Dem. 43, 66. iwepaiTf — 
 6,Tt &v dpuifftv ^Adrivaiois elfai iirl rb S,^€ivov &ird tov ajifxeiov. 
 
 (c.) poiiXeilecrBoi., contribute counsel to the state in any fair and equal way. 
 irapaPaX\iS|iEvoi., bringing fonoard, and exposing equally to risk. Cf. iii. 14. 
 On iK TOV A/ioioO. Cf. i. 143. c. irapt)PifJKaTc. iraph is here trans, 
 
 have got beyond the prime of life, and are therefore not likely T4Ki'a<nv n-oieiffBai, 
 KcpSos Ti'yclo-Ge — consider as so much clear gain — ' lucro apponite.^ That this is 
 a legitimate construction of ijyoOimi. may be readily shown. Cf. inter alia,' 
 Th BrriTh S' oi vSv irpSiTov ijyoSiiai CKlav. Eur. Med. 1224, and ■with Kriig. 
 Dem. viii. 66. iriXeus tKovtov ?YU7e i)yoDpi,ai cru/i/idxous, irlariv, eivoiav. 
 T(Sv8e sc. ^lov, has its proper use, this which is to follow. t!>' 
 
 i|>iX(!ti.|j,ov, ' synonymous ■with efcXeia, honour.' Kriig. and of course following 
 
Chap. 45, J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 201 
 
 him T. K. A. 'Batis it notrskther the love of honour contrasted with the love of gain, 
 both being re'garded as passions of the human mind which are thought never to 
 become extinct ? Then we have rb KepSalneiv opposed to ri ri/icurdai, the getting 
 vtoney, and the getting honour. tu ctxp*'" refers to incapacity for 
 
 active service, as may be seen from i. 93. tuv dxpeiOTdTUf ipKiauv ttjv <i>\j\a.Kriv. 
 
 ( Chapter XLV. — (a.) rbv a7ui>a — the struggle you will have to undergo in 
 attempting to rival their renown. rhv ^ap oSk SvTtt k. t. X. Kriig. 
 
 quotes from Mimnemius apud Stob. 125. 12. deipol yhp Avdpl iravrei e<Tp.iv 
 fteXeei, fwcri (pdovriaai., KarSavSpra S' alvinai.. The Horatian sentiment will 
 recur to the thoughts of every one. ' Virtuteni incolumem {while it dwells with 
 us) odimus, Sublatam ex oculis quserimus invidi.' Ka9' vir6ppoX'f|v 
 
 &,pETf|S — in or iy an excess of merit ; even supposing that you reached traw 
 scendent merits would you be judged, I say not on a par with, hut even a little in- 
 ferior to them. ({>6avos 7ap k. t. X. Is this not to be expressed in 
 English by saying, the living have Envy to contend against as a rival t For 
 7rp6y rh dprliraXov is not, I think, rightly rendered by Meyer — propter 
 emulationem, i. e. the living are envied on account of rivalry ; nor by Popp. ab 
 <Brmdis, making it equivalent to 7rp6s rojv &vrnraKwv, by their rivals ; nor by 
 GoU. erga amnios, i. e. the living have u, feeling of envy towards their rivals ; 
 nor as Dale, the living are exposed to envy in their rivalry. Kriig. merely 
 says, 'among the living envy dominates, whether enviers or envied." It will 
 be seen that I make irph^ rb dvTlira\ov, 'for opposition* i. e. to discharge the 
 function of an opponent : which sense it is I think capable of sustaining. Then 
 Tb p,^ ep>Trod(i}v — those who are in no one's way= ol ovk 6vres (the neuter being a 
 general form of statement) are opposed to oi i^wvres ; and they are said to find 
 no such obstacle against (irpds) which it is necessary for them to struggle ; but 
 they are honoured with a good will which has no one to oppose it. 
 
 (6.) dpcTf)5. — 'If I must say anything on the subject of woman's excellence. 
 D. The schoUast, says Kriig., is ungallant enough to deny all virtues to the 
 sex, except that of fftatppoffiv-q. oi yap dvdpela, ij SiKaioaOvTj ij ^p6vt}ats. Meyer 
 and Bl. refer this to ' chastity ;' Arnold to 'modesty and aflfectionateness.' But 
 as there is no article, D. is right in referring it to nothing special (see i. -i. d.); 
 it simply means the sort of merit which is to be looked for from women on such an 
 Occasion. That this, according to the Greek conception, was of a very negative 
 and passive character, is clear enough, even from what follows. 8<rai, of 
 
 course, has for its antecedent juvaiKes contained in yvvaiKeias. Cf. Jelf, 819. i. 
 435. a. f fjs iiirapx- 4'^o'eus (i^ X'^P""''' "V^veo-Bai. An eloquent passage 
 
 occurs in one of the Oxford Prize Essays [ ' Domestic Virtues of the Greeks 
 and Romans,'] condemning the oold-heartedness of the orator wlio, on such an 
 occasion, could tell wives and motheis not to be worse than they were by 
 nature ! But this is surely seeing in words the meaning most suitable for our 
 argument. When the Greeks were exhorted, as they often were, Tdi/ iraripav 
 /ur/ x^'ioous ^avfivai, ii. 62. d., cf. i. 122. 3 ; vi. 92. b., nothing unworthy was 
 implied of their ancestors ; on the contrary, the words were an exhortation not to 
 fall short of their valour. So here the orator means, ' Do not deteriorate from 
 that character which Nature has given you ; we know you to be weaker than 
 the other sex, but do not extravagantly indulge in this weakness.' ij 8d|a 
 
203 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II, 
 
 — the praise, i.e., which will result from such conduct. Kal ■fis, sc. /ieydXii 
 
 i) 56|a, great, too, will he her praise, of whom among the other sex there is least talk 
 either for good or evil. Cf . Jelf, 8 1 9. b. The word kX^os is a ' nomen ii,i(Tov, ut non 
 raro apud poetaa.' Popp., whocf. 56|o, freiSos (viii. 27), ^Xttis and ATrifeu", i. i, 
 We might also cf. 'facinus,' 'faraosus,' 'venenum,' and many other words. Forthe 
 sentimentcf. jEsoh. Agam. v. 611. 'The two properly opposed notions would be 
 (1) merit, demerit; {2) praise, censure. But Thuc. gives us one of each pair, 
 inerit and censure = conduct that is censured.' T. K. A, 
 
 Chapteb XLVI. — (a.) Kal l|i.ol — 'iyme, as has been done hy my predeces- 
 sors' Xciyij) — ^p'Yi>. The usual antithesis, as has often been pointed 
 out — the first is, so far as words a/re concerned; the second in respect of tlie 
 actual commemoration by deeds, i.e., regarding the subsequent support of the 
 children as part of the practical recognition of the father's merits. 
 \Mxp'\, ^Pt)$. To the age of eighteen says the Scholiast. From sixteen to 
 eighteen the young Athenian was educated in the Gymnasia. At eighteen the 
 youth was enrolled among the Ephebi, entered into the registry of his Demus, 
 and after taking the oath of a citizen, was armed in the presence of the public 
 assembly. From that time he was, in the eye of the law, of age, might marry, 
 appear before courts of law, and so forth ; but he had yet to do frontier duty 
 as ireplTToXos, before, on attaining his twentieth year, he entered upon the full 
 exercise of his civic rights, by participating in the general assemblies of the 
 people, from which fact we may understand why some have asserted that he 
 was not registered till then. Hermann, Pol. Antiq. of Greece, § 123. See 
 with Kriig., Plat. Menex. 23, Lysias ii. 75, ^schin. 3, 154, Arist. Pol. 2, 5, 4. 
 <rT4<|)avov — therein proposing a prize, sc. which consists in this mainte- 
 nance of children. tois S^ — to these I say, di in apodosi. See the 
 grammars, Hermann ad Soph. Phil. 87, and infra c. 65 c, and cf. Livy, iv. 35. 
 * Nihil non aggressuros homines, si magnis conatibus magna prsemia propo- 
 nantur.' a'rroXoc|>vpdp.Evoi. — having brought your la-mentations to a 
 close, such being sometimes the force of airb in composition. Cf. dTraXYijiraj'Tos, 
 ijifra ch. 61, and Herod. Lx. 31, ds aireK-qBevaav, cum lugere desiera/iU, where see 
 Valckn. note ; and also ii. 40, iirehv airoTij\f/avTai, when they have finished beat- 
 ing their own breasts. 6v irpoo-^KCi SKa<rTos so. (i\o0i)pa(r9at. On 
 this mode of supplying the simple from the compound verb, Bj-ug. refers to his 
 own grammar, § 62, 4, i. 
 
 Chapter XLVII. — (a) irpuTov ?tos. For the little that had been achieved 
 during this year towards the final object of the war, v. Grote vol. vi. p. 206. 
 Even the relief of Potidaea had been no way advanced ; and while the expecta- 
 tions of the Corinthians and other instigators of the war were disappointed, the 
 anticipations of Pericles and Archidamus were fully justified ; i. 140, a. 
 irfkiira — ' was drawing to a close.' The imperf is used because ' ad rei effectum 
 qui permanebat respicitiu-.' P. tA 8«o |i^pT], cf. ad c. x. Died. 
 
 xii. 45. For the gramm. construction see Jelf, § 467, obs. i, 478, a. 
 ApxCSafios, cf. ad c. x. 
 
 (b.) ■i\ V(S(ros. The description of this famous pestilence .occupies eight 
 chapters, from XLYII. to LIV., which we may divide into three portions. 
 
Chap. 47.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 203 
 
 The first (c. xlvii. viii.) describes its origin and causes. The second (xlix. 1.) 
 its character, symptoms, and physical effects. The third (li. sq.) its effects on 
 the moral character and social life of the Athenians. 
 
 It may not be uninteresting to mention briefly the (Ecumenical Plagues, 
 whose ravages have been recorded. 
 
 I. The first is that of Athens, here described by Thuoydides, who has been 
 closely copied by Lucretius in the end of his sixth book. A similar one is 
 mentioned by Galen as occurring in the year A.D. 167 — ^170, which he calls the 
 long plague (v. inf. and Clinton in an.). 
 
 II. The second is that which broke out in the reign of Vibius Callus, and 
 Volusianus, A.D. 252, and is described in the letter of Dionysius quoted in 
 Eusebius, lib. vii. u. 22 (cf. Cyprian, de Mortal.), commented upon by Calvi- 
 sius, Justus Lipsius (de Constantid ii.), and our own countrymen, Brightman 
 and Mead, who interpret it to be the opening of the Fourth Seal of the Book 
 of Revelations (vi. 8). It is said to have lasted fifteen years, and five thousand 
 persons are reported to have died daily. 
 
 III. The third broke out in the reign of Justinian, A.D. 540, and is fully 
 described by Procopius in his Perdca (lib. ii. 22, sq.). He is a close imitator 
 of Thuoydides, as will be shown in many passages quoted from him. It is 
 also mentioned by Evagrius, Agathias, Gregory of Tours, and Paulus Diaconus, 
 who tells us it carried off Pope Pelagius, a.d. 580. It lasted fifty-two years ; 
 and in 583 appears to have extended its ravages to Britain. In Constantinople 
 it carried off 1000 persons daily. It is curious that the origin of aU these 
 three plagues is traced to Egypt or ^Ethiopia, which, as Gibbon says (chap, 
 xliii.), have been stigmatized in every age as the original source and seminary 
 of the plague. 
 
 IV. The fourth commenced in the N.E. of Asia, in A.D. 1347, and in six 
 years overran the world with such violence, that Calvisiua says two-thirds of 
 the population of Europe were swept away. Camden, in his Britannia, 
 describes its ravages in England in the following year, during which 50,000 
 persons are said to have been buried in the churchyard of the Charterhouse in 
 London. Hume, vol. ii. p. 448. It lasted for six years, and is known by the 
 name of the 'black death.' This is the pestilence which made its appearance 
 in Florence in 1 348, and is so graphically described by Boccacio in his Decame- 
 ron, and in the historical narrative of the brothers Matteo and Giovanni Villani. 
 Siamondi (Bintoire des Franfais) relates its effects in France, and its horrors in 
 England are beautifully told in the novel of Rothelan. 
 
 The next famous pestilence is that of Milan in the year 1630, of which we 
 have a vivid picture in the Promessi Sposi of Manzoni, in the Storia delta 
 Colonna Infame, and in the history of the Plague by Eipamonte. The most 
 striking events connected with it are the exertions of Cardinal Borromeo, and 
 the horrid practices of the Monatti and Untori. 140,000 persons are reported 
 to have died between April and September. The last and greatest plague made 
 its appearance in London in the year 1664, and is well known to English readers 
 from the journal of Pepys and the narrative of Defoe, who, though not himself 
 an eye-witness of it, writes with all the force and truthfuhiess of one. The 
 total number of deaths is given as 68,000. It is, as Mr. Grote observes, vi. p. 
 209, 'not one of the least of the merits of Thucyd. that his notice of the symp- 
 
204 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book IL 
 
 toms of this epidemic, given at so early a stage of medical science and otser- 
 vation, is such as to instruct the medical reader of the present age, and enable 
 the malady to be understood and identified.' It has consequently been the 
 subject of frequent disquisition at home and abroad. The following treatises, 
 among others, have appeared in Germany: by Eyerel, in 1810; Schoenck, 
 1821; Grimm, 1829; Krauss, 1831; Meurs, 1843; and Brandeis, 1845; to 
 which we ipay add the general treatise by Haser, 1839; Littr^'s introduction- 
 to Hippocrates ; and Dr. Mead's book, Be Peste. Littrf! remarks that it is to 
 be regretted that Hippocrates, though, an eye-witness, does not describe this, 
 plague, as neither does Galen that which he witnessed in the time of M". 
 Aurelius (the Pestia Antoniniana), and which was probably a renewal of this 
 plague of Athens. Diodorus also defers the description of it till its reappear- 
 ance in the fifth year of the war. xii. c. 58. Grote speaks of it as 'an 
 eruptive typhoid fever, distinct from, yet analogous to, the small pox.' Niebuhr 
 thinks it was neither the Oriental plague nor the yellow fever, but something 
 between the two, vomiting of bile being rare in Oriental plague but common 
 in yellow fever : ulcers, which are general in Oriental plague, being extremely 
 rare in yellow fever. Schoenck considers it to have been a camp fever, and 
 Meister holds the same opinion. Krauss maintains the opposite, and says that 
 the inguinal pestilence of Justinian was merely a degenerate form of the same.- 
 It was distinct from the inguinal plague described by Procopius and Kipamonte, 
 and is believed (Littr^ says) to be now extinct. For three years it desolated 
 Athens, continuously during the entire second and third years of the war, after 
 which there was a marked abatement for a year and a half. It then revived, 
 and lasted for another year (the fifth) with the same fury as at first. It carried 
 off, Thucyd. tells us (iii. 87), 300 of the 1200 Hippeis, the chief men of the 
 State, 4400 hoplites, and of the poorer population a namber too great for com- 
 putation, dve^evperos apidfids. Diodorus says they lost 4000 irefo/, 400 linreh, 
 and of others, freemen and slaves, xo,ooo (xii. 58), but this number is, as 
 Grote sayS) much below the mark. 
 
 XcY(S|j.cvov. There is perhaps a confusion in Thucydides' mind as to v6<roi, 
 and vScTTifia, both which are used indiscriminately. In the following chapter he 
 uses the neuter throughout, as though v6<rr]fia had really preceded ; and so 
 Sophocles uses aSTT/ after vbariiia, as though vbaoi had preceded. [(rx^Ma irpbi 
 
 detvbv ye Toinri(rayfia toO potnJ/Aaros' 
 
 ijicei y&,p oBtt] 610 xplt'O". 
 
 Soph. PhU. yss, 8. 
 Of. Hom. Od. xii. 75, where v€ij>i\-r) and vi(pos are similarly confounded. Or 
 it may be taken absolutely ; = though it was said ; neuter part, like Se6y k. t. X. 
 lYKarao-Kfjil/ai. Propei'ly used of the descent of lightning, storms, &c., 
 therefore implying violence and rapidity. Of c. xlix. e. A divine visitation. 
 It is here intransitive, as in xlix. the simpler form ; when transitively used it is 
 followed by a dative, or the aocus. with els. v. Elmsley ad Eurip. Med. 93; 
 Eurip. Hipp. 1416; Herod, vii. 134, viii. 65; jffisch. Eumen. 83; Procop. 
 Pers. ii. 22. tois i^ oipavov iiriffK'fiTrTovffW = MTeae ch. xlviii. 
 A<)(i.vov. Grote remarks that about sixteen years before there had been a 
 similar calamity in Eome, and in various parts of Italy. o4 (i6toi 
 
Chap. 48'.] NOTES ON THTJCYDIDES. 205 
 
 Observe the transition to the oratio recta. K. compares Xen. Anal, ivi 1, 15. 
 .Ibare daviiaarbv yiveadai, iracn koI i-irdjTTTevov. <|)6opa oiirus. ' To 
 
 ^uch u. degree.' K. cf. Xen. Anai, vii. 4, 3. 9jv 5^ x'-'^" ToAX-i) /cat xj/vxoi 
 ■ovTois SiffTe K. T. X., and Eurip. Hipp. 999. 
 
 (c.) larpoC. P. quotes Cantacuzen, iv. 8. oUre larpCivli^TjpKci. rixv) 
 joiSe/iia. Cf. Ov. Met. vii. 5 ■26. ' Pugnatum est arte medendi. Bxitium 
 Buperabat opem.' Ov. Met. vii. 561. ' Inque ipsos sffiva medentes iri'umpit 
 clades.' Liv. vii. ■2. 'Quum vis morbi nee humanis consiliis, neo ope 
 divinS levaretur.' 4jpKovv. v. Buttmann's Lexilogus, pp. 162, 
 
 543. (Eng. Ed.) B. quotes Eurip. /cp», 952. 'A-irdWuv oidiv ijpKeire. Here. 
 JFur. 500. Soph. Phil. -281, 339. v. Defoe, p. 40. 'Not that it is any 
 derogation from the labour or application of the physicians to say they fell in 
 the common calamity : it rather is to their praise that they ventured their lives 
 so far as even to lose them in the service of mankind.' So-io Kal 
 
 )ul\i<rTa. V. Matth. § 462. ' Two superlatives in two different propositions 
 are compared with each other by the words Toaoiri^ and fis'f, to show that a 
 quality exists in the highest degree in one subject, in the same measure as 
 it is possessed by another in the highest degree.' v. Thuc. viii. 84. i<j(f 
 fiaXiara Kal iXeiffepoi. . . . Toaoirif Kal BpaairaTa. So i. 68. diVifj Kal fxiycara 
 ijK'kiijj.aTa Ix"!^^''- Herod, v. 29. Soph. Track. 312; CEd. Col. 53, with 
 Wiinder's note. Jelf, § 870, obs. i. irpbs tepots iKcVeuo-av 
 
 For this use of irpbs at a point at rest, cf. Soph. Track. 371. irpds i^iari 
 ^paxtvluv 6,'yop^. (Ed. G. T2. irphs &'Ka'€<Tiv dewv. Thuc. iii. 81, e. ; viii. 
 .98. Compare the Supplicationes of the Romans, (Liv. iii. 7, x. 23, xxxi. 9, 
 xxvii. 23, xxxvii. 3.) the Eogazioni of the Italians and the Middle Ages, 
 and the procession of the relics of Cardinal Borromeo, during the plague at 
 Milan, described by Eipamonte, lib. i. Boccacio says, ' Nor was there more 
 profit from the humble supplications made to God by devout persons, not once, 
 but often, both in formal processions and in other manners.' 
 ^avTcCois. The MSS. vary between ^apreiots and fiavrelais. 
 TcXeuTwvTes. Frequently used for lastly, or at last. c. li. u. Cf. Soph. Ant. 
 ?6o. KciJf iyiyvETO irK'qyr] TekevTwtr'. Xen. Cyr. i. 6, 19; Plat. Rep. iv. p. 
 425. We may tr. ' tkey ended hy leaving off.' So d/j^iS/ieyos is put for 'at 
 first.' Matth. G. G., § 557, 4- Jelf, § 696, obs. i. b. 
 
 Chaptek XLVIII. — (a.) 4| Al6ioirCas. Nubia and Sennaar. See Gibbon 
 u. 0. Al^viTTov. Lucr. vi. 1139. 
 
 ' Nam penitus veniens jEgypti e finibus. ' 
 
 Gottl. quotes Am. Marcell. xix. 4. ' Clades ilia abusque ferventi >?Ethiopise 
 plagS paulatim proserpens Atticam occupavit.' Schonck, p. 14, sq. 
 ivitri<n = iyKaTi(rKr!^e. So Lucr. vi. I14I. 'Incubuit tandem populo Pan- 
 dionis.' Ov. Met., vii. 522. 'Dira lues ir& populis Junonis iniquse Incidit.' 
 Liv. xxvii. 23. Plut. v. Pericl., p. 66. t) \oifj,di5Tis hiirece cjiBopd. 
 Iv Tu TleipaiEl. Niebuhr notices this fact to show the difference between this 
 epidemic and the yellow fever, vfhioh generally follows the course of rivers. It 
 began of course here first, being brought by sea. ' The place of its first out- 
 breaking in Attica indicates that the contagion came from abroad. It may 
 
206 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 nevertheless have been connected, as Niebuhr believed (Vol. ii. p. 273), in some 
 mysterious way, with the volcanic convulsions which were unusually frequent 
 and violent about the same time, though Attica was but slightly affected by them, 
 for the earthquakes felt at Athens are not said to have damaged any part of the 
 city ; and other regions of Greece which suffered much more from them do not 
 appear to have been visited by the pestilence.' Thirl, iii. p. 135. Cf. Procop. 
 Bell. Pers. ii. 22, c. dpfa/i^yj; 5^ iel ^k tijs irapoXCos ■h vixros rjSe ouVw Si) is 
 rijv jxeabrfiuav dvi^Mve x'^pO'". 'fi<|/aTO Tuv AvOpcairwv. Bl, says the 
 
 dvSp. is not emphatic, as though animals had been previously attacked. But 
 it was clearly the opinion of the ancients that in pestilences animals were first 
 attacked. Cf. Horn. II. i. 150 ; Ov. Met. vii. 536. The sheep and cattle had 
 been conveyed to Euboea, and the adjacent islands, (c. xiv.) Cf. Grote, vi. p. 
 203. There may therefore be some force in the word; had the cattle been 
 attacked it would have been an aggravation of the calamity. Cf. Liv. iii. 66 ; 
 Dion. Hal. A. R., :i. 53. (|>d.p|iaKa ectPePX^jkoiev Is rot <f>p^aTa. 
 
 The Jews were accused of having poisoned the wells in the plague of 1348. 
 Thirlw. iii. p. 135, and comp. the account of the XJntori in Eipamonte, lib. i. ; 
 Aretseus, p. 11, § 6. Ed. Kiihn. bOcv o^5' dTreotKis h tQ XotjCt^ tQ h ^Ad-rjiniu-i 
 fi€T€^€T4povt SoK4eiv h t6. <l>p4ara i/j.^€p\^adfu ^dpfiOrKa. Ov. Met. vii. 532. 
 ' Constat et in fontes vitium venisse laousque.' So when the plague broke out 
 at Naples in 1656, the Spaniards were said to have suborned persons to 
 scatter poisoned dust in the streets. Even the holy water was supposed to 
 have been poisoned at Milan. Knight, p. 77. A similar notion existed at 
 Paris upon the outbreak of the cholera for the first time in that city. The cre- 
 dulity of the lower orders may be excused when we find that even learned men 
 believed in the possibility of exciting pestilence by means half medical, half 
 magical. <j)pioTo are 'cisterns, tanks, or reservoirs.' 
 
 airiSOir— «. e., in Pirseus. The Kpif/pii of Callirrhoe, mentioned above, was in the 
 Astu. 
 
 (6.) X6y{t<i> TTEpl avToO. Either supply mcr/iiiaTos ; or tr. simply ' about 
 the matter.' Procop. Bell. Pers. ii. 22 B. Xeyira /liv oSv &s ttt; IxaffTos Tepl 
 airdv ycvitjfTKet., ko.1 ao<f}t(rT7]S Kal p.€Tefap6\oyos' iyo) bk 66ev re i^p^aro i] vdiros ijSe, 
 Kal Tpbwif 6r) Stij) toi>s avBpdnrovs Si4<p6eip€v ipav lpxop,ai. yiyvua-Kei, 
 
 ' The opinion he forms — the judgment he arrives at.' ' Urtheilt.' K. 
 l8iiSTt)s. In Aristotle's sense. Eth. Nic. iii. 8. 8. ' The lay person (K.), the 
 non- professional man,' as opposed to the professed physician. Bl. compares 
 Plat. Pol. 433. Plut. Ser. Vind. Num. v. 4. Cf Plat. Leg. 933 d. Soph. 
 221 0. Phcedr. 258 D. Protag, 327 e. Proc. B. P. ii. 22. otfre yap larpi^ 
 otre ISuiri] ^vvi^rj. )i.ETaPoX'f)s. ' Kespecting the causes which he 
 
 deems sufficiently powerful to have produced so great a revolution.' Grote, vi. 
 ■210. P. distinguishes properly between /teTO|8oX'!; and luerrio-raffis ; and shows 
 that there is no idle repetition here. /Mera^oXii is the ' act of change,' con- 
 versio. p,eTd<rTa<ns ' the altered state of circumstances,' conversus status. The 
 passagequotedfromlib.vi. 20, quite bears out this view, TTiiXeis . . . otfre Seo/t^ras 
 p.eTapo\ijs, i? dv Tis is j>q,u iiiTAaTaaiv x^poii. The neriarams is explained by 
 the first sentence of the following chapter. ' The change from an unusually 
 healthful to a pestilential state.' Demosth. Olynth. ii. 6. iroXXJ)v tV p.eTa(rTd- 
 aw SeiKriov. Cf. c. 43. c. |id\wrr' fl,v ixoi ti irpoeiSibs [J.'Jl ayvoilv. 'Such 
 
Chap. 49.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 207 
 
 matters as will furnish any man who lays them to heart, with knowledge and 
 the means of calculation beforehand.' Lit. 'from having acquired some previous 
 knowledge, not to he in a state of ignorance about the matter.' To record past 
 facts as a basis for rational provision in regard to the future ; the same senti- 
 ment which Thuoyd. mentions (i. ■22) as having animated him to the composi- 
 tion of his history, was at that time a duty so little understood, that we have 
 reason to admire not less the manner in which he performs it in practice, than 
 the distinctness with which he conceives it in theory,' Grote. For the gram- 
 matical construction, see Jelf, § 832. The optative with dy expressing a sup- 
 position or assumption depending on certain conditions ; hence a still more 
 indefinite possibility. 
 
 Chapter XLIX.— (a.) pidXurTa 8^ ewtvo. Cf. ad i. 13. 18. 118. 
 fivoo-ov. Hippocrates (Epidem. i. 8) says that the same was the case during 
 the epidemic at Thasos. dircKpfST]. so c. li. h toDto ireXeiha, ' deter- 
 
 mined in this.' P. compares Cantacuz. iv. 8. Travra ds iKeim KaTi\riye ri 
 v6<rTiiJ.a ; and Krauss, p. 15. irpo(f>do-e(i)s, ' ostensible cause, ' a word 
 
 frequently used by Hippocrates in this sense. Aretse. p. 43. So Procop. 
 £. P. ii. !!2, Airpo^aa-io-Tut. Boccacio says of the plague at Florence, that 
 ' there was no fever or any incidental symptom.' 6ep|iai., an unusual 
 
 word (the later Attic form is dipfxa. Arrian, An. ii. 4. 8. Menand. ap. 
 Phavorinum). Lucian, Dial. Marin, xi. — Bipiirf b nperds. Tim. Lex. u. v. 
 Buhnken. So TibuU. iv. ir. -i, calor. Lucret. vi. 1143. 
 ' Principio caput incensum fervore gerebant, 
 
 Et duplices oculos sufFusS, luce rubenteis 
 
 Sudabant etiam fauces intrinsecus atro 
 
 Sanguine, et ulceribus vocis via septa coibat 
 
 Atque animi interpres manabat lingua cruore. ' 
 
 IpuB^fiara. Observe the plur. Lucret. u. s. Virg. Georg. iii. 505, of the 
 disease of horses : — 
 
 ' Turn vero ardentes oculi. ' 
 
 irv«v(i.a ftToirov Kal Suo-foSes ■f|<|>C6i' 'emitted an unnatural and foetid breath. ' 
 P. translates Utovov by ' tetrum,' as Lucr. v. 1152. ' Spiritus ore foras 
 tetrum volvebat odorem.' Kriiger says, Thucydides meant that besides being 
 ' noisome' (B, ) the breath was imnatural from the extreme difficulty of respira- 
 tion. So Virgil u. s. ' attractus ab alto Spiritus interdum gemitu gravis.' Cf. 
 u. li. a. TToXXA Kal SXKa droirCas. ^4>Cei" and d(plei are used indis- 
 
 criminately by Thuc. K. 
 
 (6.) irrapixbs' ' sneezing.' Plat. Sym/p. p. 185. Ppd7x°S- 
 
 'hoarseness.' ' Humoris in fauces influxio, quam raucitatem vocat.' Cjel. 
 Aur. vii. 2. Ppaxeiv. Hesych. iixnaai.. ^j/o<pij<raf Foes. (Ec. p. 79. 
 PlX"* ii^xvpoi) — ' a hard cough.' This meaning Fcesius gives to ^^| simply. 
 KapSfav — 'the cardiac extremity of the stomach.' L. and S. ' Os ventri- 
 culi.' Fees. Lucr. vi. 1149, 
 
 ' Inde ubi per fauces pectus complerat et ipsum 
 Morbida vis in Oor raoestum oonfluxerat segris.' 
 (TTqpClai — intrans. P. diroKoBdpcrcis xo^S — ' purgings of bile.' 
 
208 KOTES ON THUCYDXDES. .[Book IL 
 
 Grote observes (p. 2ri), tliat 'in Thucyd.'s day speculation was active re- 
 specting the causes of this plague, according to the vague and fanciful physics 
 and scanty stock of ascertained facts which was all that could then he con- 
 sulted.' These very words dir. x- ^•■'"•'^. seem to indicate that Thuo. was 
 familiar with the medical terminology, and was no stranger to the habits and 
 training of his contemporary Hippocrates, and the other Asclepiads of Cos. 
 See M, Littr^'s note quoted by Grote. But, as has been well observed, many 
 words which have now become technical in medical science, were of ordinary 
 use in Greek conversation. Freind, Sist. of Med. pp. 416 — 20, ed. Lend. 
 irdo-ai — differing in colour, smell, and taste. Krauss. TaXaiircopCas 
 
 refers rather to mental depression and abandonment of all hope, such as Defoe 
 describes, than to ^Aysi'cfflZ distress ( = dSu/tia, c. li.)the ' anxius angor adsidue 
 comes.' Cf. Lucret. vi. 1156. (So Krauss, p. 17.) X^Vl k«v^ — 'an 
 
 ineffectnal retching.' So Lucr. vi. 1158, ' Singultusque frequens ;' and Virg. 
 Georg. iii. 506, ' Imaque longo ilia singultu tendunt. ' Cf. Aretseus, p. 50, ed. 
 Kiihn. Nicand. Tlier. 434 — \vyiJ,o'i(n ^apvvo/ihoi Oaixeiacnv. ^^YS 
 
 generally means ' hiccough,' and in the term used for the hiccough of Aristo- 
 phanes in the well known passage of Plato's Symposium, p. 185. It is here 
 'an ineffectual retching.' ' Qui nihil vomitione refunderet, nuUumque humorem 
 ejiceret.' Fees. ' Motus veutriculi irritus.' Krauss, p. 20. 
 
 (c.) airT0|j.4v<j) — 'to the outward touch.' So Lucret. vi. 1163 — ' tepidum 
 manibus proponere tactum.' Defoe mentions the same fact. For the con- 
 struction, see Matth. § 388, 6, and note ad i. 10. f. to /i,icov (tkottovvti. So 
 u. li. (a) TrapaXiTT^prt. ovk B.ya.v 6€p|i6v not over-wcurm. Krauss, 
 
 p. '/2, says this was a bad symptom. Procop. B. P. ii. 22. Kal rh iikv trSfjia 
 oOre TL SfqWaatre rijs irporepas xpotas, oOre depfibv ijv, &t€ irvperov iTnireffSvTos. 
 o4iT« xXiopdv — 'nor pale; iut reddish, livid, ireaJcing out with small pustules 
 and ulcers.' The ' exanthema typhosum' of medicine. P. Tees, explains 
 ircXiSvdv {irfXiTydv) by ' color ad nigrum tendons ex rubro ; qualis sanguinis 
 sub cute, ex ictu aut plag^ collecti,' ' Livid or leaden colour' — rb fier^ov dixpd- 
 T7IT0S Kal fieKavias. Sch. Tcl cvrbs ovtus eRftCcTO. Lucr. vi. 1 166, 
 
 ' Intima pars hominum vero flagrabat ad ossa ; 
 Flagrabat stomacbo flamma ut fomacibus intus.' 
 Twv irdvii XeiTTwv lixarCuv. So Lucr. vi. 11 68. 
 
 ' Nil adeo posset ouiquam leve tenueque membris 
 Vertere in utUitatem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. S58 :— 
 
 ' Nou stratum, non ulla pati velamina possunt.' 
 ^l.■f^r' SXKo Ti <j 7v|ivoC. Jelf, § 895. 4. Brachylogy— ' a verb of a general 
 meaning is supplied from a following verb of special meaning ; as every par- 
 ticular verb implies the general verbal notion of action or state.' Pop. reads 
 ■yufivdv sub. (TW/xa. Cf S. Marc. xiv. 51, ■jrepi^epXijp.h'Os aipSSva iirl yvp.vov' 
 the art. omitted. K. says 'yiifi.vol is correct, though the reading of inferior 
 MSS. <18iirTa re ttv Is liSwp >|/Dxp6v k. t. X. For the grammatical 
 
 construction of the infinitive with S,p instead of the historic tenses, see Jelf, 
 § 866. 2. P. says el ■^jueXoCcTo must be supplied. Procop. B. P. ii. 22 eis 
 vioip re oh Taparixoi, ijiitsixeiv ^6e\ov, 
 
Chap. 50.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 309 
 
 Lucr. vi, 1 1 70: — 
 
 ' In fluvios partim gelidoa, ardentia morbo 
 Membra dabant, nudum jaclentes corpus in undas.' 
 Ov. Met. vii. 568 :— 
 
 ' Fontibus et fluviis puteisque capacibus hserent 
 Neo prius est extincta sitis quam vita bibendo.' 
 
 Diod, xii. 58 : — ol TrKeiffTot tCiv voaoivTiav ^^pLirrov iaurods els rh (ppedra Kal rets 
 Kpi\vai iwiSu/iovvTss iavTwv Kara^ii^ai to, aii/iara. Defoe (p. 105) says, ' Some 
 broke out into tbe streets, perhaps naked, and would run directly down to the 
 river, and plunge themselves into water.' Kal '^Spao-av — ' actually 
 
 did so.' The common use of koV in Thuc. For the ellipse after tovto, see 
 Jelf, § 895. 4. airaia-Tif rfj 8Ci|f^. Observe that the adj. by stand- 
 
 ing before the article becomes the predicate. Larrey mentions the same fact 
 in the French invasion of Syria. |vv€x,<Sli.Evoi. Of. S. Matt. iv. 24. 
 
 ToiKiKais vixroi-s Ktd ^aadvois ^vvexoiiivovs. S. Luc. iv. 38 — <Tvvex°t^^''V Tuperi^ 
 IJ,eyd\(ji. eL7pDirv£tt. Lucr. vi. 11 79 — ' lumina vorsarent expertia 
 
 Bomno.' dK|Jid^oi — the regular use of the optative. Jelf, 
 
 § 843- I. 
 
 {d.) Ivaratoi. Lucr. vi. 1195 : — • 
 
 ' Octavoque fere candenti lumine soils 
 Aut etiam nonS. reddebant lampade vitam.' 
 
 P. quotes Wolmar. p. 39, and Liv. xli. 2r. Sia^poCas dKpdrov — 
 
 either violent diarrhoea, as Port. Steph. T/ies. and Poppo, or = (ijut/crot OypoTTiros 
 iSaribSovs, as Galen. Lucr. vi. 1198, ' nigram proluviem alvi.' 
 (e.) KaT^o-KTiTTTS ^dp K. T. \. Luor. vi. 1204 : — 
 
 ' tamen in nervos huic morbus et artus 
 Ibat et in partes genitaleis corporis ipsas : 
 Et graviter partim metuentes limina leti 
 Vivebant : ferro privatei parte virili 
 Et manibus sine non nuUei, pedibusque manebant. 
 In vitS. tamen, et perdebant lumina partim. ' 
 
 Cf. Eyerel and Grimm ap. Pop. of the pestilence at Venice in 1576. Galen, 
 Schonck, and Krauss also speak of the disease attacking the hands and feet. 
 Is alSoia, parts of the body are frequently put without the article; (K.) on the 
 principleof familiarusage,i.8,a. 12. b, i6.a. &c. \i\9i\. Lucr. 1211: — ■ 
 
 ' Atque etiam quosdam cepere oblivia rerum 
 Ounctarum, neque se possent oognoscere ut ipsei.' 
 
 Schonck confirms this statement, and Defoe also mentions it. The forgetful- 
 ness was only temporary. 
 
 Chapter L. — Kpeto-o-ov Xd^ov. ' hafiimg all description.' K. cf. Xen. 
 Mem. iii. 11. 1. Kpei(rcrot> 9jv \6yov t6 KciXXos ttjs yvvaiKbi. So Herod, ii. 35, 
 ipya X67OU iiiiw. and ii. 148. Soph. (Ed. T. 1374. Kpclaaov' dyx^)"!^- v. 
 Jelf, § 783, b. The whole thought contracted intoasingle substantival notion, 
 put in the genitive after the comparative. Matth., § 451. 
 
a 10 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 \a\etraT(pia^ f\ k. t. a. (|). 'hefliger alsdie menschliche Nat/u/r ertragm Tcann.' 
 More grievously than human nature can endure. K. a, common usage of 
 Karb, — according to the proportion of. iH^uKri. v. Jelf, § 373, i. 
 
 The subject being indefinite, is not expressed, as it may be easily supplied from 
 theoontext. Matt., § 549. |uvTp<i<j)av = ray eiwSirup. K. That 
 
 which is familiar to man. Cf. Soph. Phil. 171. to •yap &pvia. 
 
 So Luoret., yi. 1215: — 
 
 ' Multaque humi quom inhumata jacerent corpora supra 
 Corporibus, tamen alituum genus atque ferarum 
 Aut procul absiliebat, ut acrem exiret odorem 
 Aut ubi gustarat languebat morte propinqu3.' 
 
 Cf. Ov. Met., rii. 545, — 52 ; Stat. Theb. i. 624, xii. 565. ' Eminus ipese Pabula 
 dira ferae campumque odere voluores. Liv. xli. 2 t . Nee Vulturium usquam 
 visum. Krauss., p. 26. Boccacio states that two pigs who turned up with 
 their snouts the rags of a man who had died of the plague, in a short time 
 after reeled about as if from the effects of poison and shortly died. During the 
 black death in England it was also observed that neither beast nor bird of prey 
 would touch the carcases. Knight, p. 64. TEKfi^piov S^ without 
 
 the yap following, is unusual. K. cf. Xen. Andb. i. 9, 29; Plat. Legg. p. 
 821. E. Cf. Matt., § 630. lir£X6n|/is implies, as E. says, not 
 
 only that birds died from eating the corpses, but that they were observed to 
 keep aloof, v. Lucr. u. s. AXXus. oUt 6.\Kas. Kot = alibi, as Arnold ex- 
 
 plains it, but = neque omnino. P.-jrepl tolovtov oiiZh, i. c, Treplrd dra^a trdifiaTa, 
 Jacobs. Or we might say, neither otherwise employed, nor engaged about the 
 dead. 01 hk kvvcs. Lucr., vi. 1220. 
 
 ' cum primis fida canUm viS 
 Strata viis animam ponebat in omnibus aegre.' 
 
 Cf. Horn. II. i. 50; Sil. Ital., xiv. 594 ; Virg. Georg. iii. 496. 
 ToB airoPaCvovTos — 'gave evidence of what the result would be.' P. But is it 
 not rather — of the thing resulting ; gave opportunity of observing the effect pro- 
 duced, i. e., Tb rerpdToda yevadfieva diatpBeipetTdai. Xen. Anai. iv. 6, 13 ; 
 Hell. vi. 8. tfTTws p.T] fpavepbs cI't; ^175' ataB'qaiv wap^xoi-. 
 
 Chapter LI. — (a.) TrapaXiirovTi. As airToij.4v(fi. c. xlix. e. v. Jelf, § 599, 
 I. The dative expressing ' reference to, ' as ffweX(5i/ri. tTVPTc/ibuTt dreiv. So 
 Thuc, i. xxiv. a. ^i* Se?I{t i<nr\4ovTi.. Herod., i. 14, 51, iii. go, vi. 33. 
 aroirCas. ' peculiar character.' Seltsamkeit. jK'. So we say, 'out of the way 
 character.' Sia(|>ep(SvT(i>s er. tt. e. y. irpds ^repov 
 
 belongs to 8ia(|>ep6vT(i)s ; Wpu is only used to give force to the antithesis. 
 IS^av. V. ad i. 109. (a.) For the accusative as a means of defining the 
 verbal notion, see Jelf, § 579, 2. Krauss, p. 26, translates it by 'extemam. 
 apeciem.' iraptKiva. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 29. K. The 
 
 preposition here retains its proper primitive force, of something accompanying 
 'alongside,' as it were. IreXeiTo. Cf. xlix. a. Flat. Protag. -p. 
 
 35. 4, a. Thuc. iii. 104. c. So Lat., ' desinere in aliqaid.' Kal 
 
 irAvD 9«pa'ir6»)6iJi,£voi. 'with every attention, that could be paid them,' as below, 
 
Chap. 51.] .NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 211 
 
 ■jrda-rj Sialrri Sepa-n-evSfieva,. iv oiS^v KaTeVrr) laiia. ' there 
 
 wasno established specific' 'Keineinziges Arzneymittel.' SoLucret. vi. 1224. 
 
 ' Neo ratio remedl oommuuis oerta dabatur. 
 
 Nam quod ali dederat yitalea aeris auras 
 
 Hocce aliis erat exitio letumque parabat.' 
 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 22. Kal t6 ^ijxirav elireh oiBefita jJ^-qx^f^ 6,vBpiiTif h tt)v 
 (rusTTfipiav i^iiprjTo. Compare the powerful language of Defoe. ' The contagion 
 despised all medicine, death raged in every corner : men everywhere began to 
 despair — every heart failed them for fear ; people were made desperate through 
 the anguish of their souls, and the terrors of death sat in the very faces of 
 the people.' p. 180. 
 
 (6.) a-iirapKes. K. compares Herod, i. 32. avSpiiirov a-Q/ia h oiSh 
 ailrapKh ia-Ti,. luvrjpei.. ' swept off.' Eieb alles auf. Gottl. 
 
 Corripiebat. 'Et velocitatem et vim morbi notat.' Bav. Cantaouz., p. 50, 
 uses Kaffripei. ■([ Tt d6v|j.(a. So Lueret., vi. 1228, 
 
 ' Illud in his miserandum et magnopere unum 
 .^rumnabile erat, quod ubi se quisque videhat 
 Implicitum morbo, morbo damnatus ut esset, 
 Deficiens animo moesto cum corde jacebat 
 Funera respectans, animam et mittebat ibidem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 565 — 
 
 ' salutis 
 Spes abiit, finemque vident in funere morbi 
 Indulgent animis, et nulla quid utile cura est.' 
 
 tJ) dvA-irio-TCV T'jj yvd>[ii\. Cf. lix. b. iravTaxMiv ry •yvdiix-Q S,TTopoL. 
 irpdUvTO. ' gam themselves up,' abandoned themselves to despair. 
 dvTcixov. K. explains by ' that moral resistence of the will that assists 
 recovery.' Moralischen Widerstande. SEpaireCas avairiiiirXdnevoi. 
 
 ' catching the infection from attendance upon others.' ' Contagione infecti. ' 
 Kuhnken. Plat. Phced. p. 67 A. K. compares Plut. Per. xxxiv. &a-n-ep 
 ^0(rK-/ip.aTa dya.Trlp,ir\aff6ai ipBopas air' aKkijkav. So Liv., iii. 6. ' Miuisteria in 
 vicem ac contagio ipsa vulgabant morbos,' and xxv. 26, vi morbi repletos. Cf. 
 Euhnken's Timmus, a. v. dcdTrXetjs, who gives many passages where dvairlpi- 
 jrXairffai and KaTairlixTrKatrBai convey, besides filling, the collateral notion of 
 defiling; hence of infecting by contact. Cf. Arist. Nub. 1023. The Latin 
 impim has the same sense, v. Liv., iv. 30, ' vulgatique contactu in homines 
 morbi, et primo in agrestes ingruerant servitiaque. Urbs delude impletur.' 
 BO-irtp TO. irpdpaTa. Lucret., vi. 1234 
 
 ' avidi contagia morbi 
 Lanigeras tanquam pecudes et buoera secla. 
 
 Juv. ii. 78. 
 
 ' dedit hanc contagio labem 
 
 Et dabit in plures : sicut grex totus in agris 
 
 Unius soabie perit, et porrigine poroi.' 
 
 ricm. Od. A. 408; Virg. Oeorg. iii. 556. 
 
 (c.) <b6<Spov = ^So/3(£. xlvii. b. 'mortality,' usually applied to beasts of 
 
3U NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 burden. Arrian, vi. xxv. i ; Procop. B. P. ii. 22. oLirwWvvTO 
 
 Ipfjiioi. liiv. xxv. 26. ' Curatio ipsa et contactus aegrorum vulgabat morbos, 
 ut aut neglecti desertique qui incidissent morerentur, aut assideutes curan- 
 tesque eSdem vi morbi repletos secuin traherent.' apcTfjs ti 
 
 |iiETairoioi|j.EVoi = ^iXavBponrlas. Sohol. ' suah as made any pretensions to good- 
 ness.' For this use of dperri see the Aristotehan classification of virtues, 
 Ehet. i. 9, 2, and note 40, d. Arrian copies the expression. An. ii. xxvii. 6. 
 K. 'Qui humanitatem quandam prsB se ferebant.' Gott. Of. Dion. Halic. 
 Antiq. vi, 91. Procop. B. G. i. 8. Kal liaKurra ols 6i) dper^s ti fieraToieladai 
 ^vvi^aive. Lucret. vi. 1241, sq, 
 
 ' Quei fuerant autem prsesto contagibus ibant 
 Atque labore pudor quem turn cogebat obire, 
 Optimus hoc leti genus ergo quisque subibat.' 
 
 Tuv airoYiTVOiilvuv Of. xxxiv. a. TeXeuTuvres. 'at last.' Of. 
 
 xlvii. c. Xen. ^» .iv. V. i6. £|^ko|iov. ' grewweary of lamenting the 
 
 dead.' Xen. 5^eH. vii. 5, 19. irdmr' firiSiva iiroKd/xveiv. Plut. jSoZ. viii.; Lucr. 
 vi. 1246. 'Laorymislassiluctuqueredibant.' Cf. Liv. xxv. 26. ^or d\o<pipireis 
 the accusative of equivalent notion, see Jelf, § 549 c. &im Kal 
 
 KTilvav. 'so as to ie fatal.' The fact is confirmed by modem medical 
 ■writers. P. 
 
 (d.) Iirl irXfov. Cf. ad i. 9. 0. ' In Jwherm grade, K.' lireXdp- 
 
 PaVEV — 'attacked.' So Herod, viii. 115, eTriXajSiic \oL/ibs rhv {rrpdrov. Thuc. 
 iv. 27, TTJv <l>u\aKT]v 6 x^^l^^v iir^Xa^e. tw 7rapaxpf)p,a irEpi^^^apei — 
 
 ' throttgh their excessive joy at the moment,' ^tt' dXXov vocrrJiiaTos — 
 
 i.e. not that they should never die; but not be cut off by disease, but die of old 
 age. So Dio Cass, xlvii. 44, Koi(prjs. Is this very slight, or vain, fond 
 hope ? 
 
 Chaptbk LII. (a.) — lirUo-e. So Lucr. vi. 1257. 
 
 ' Nee miuimam partem ex agiis mceroris in urbem, 
 Confluxit, languens quem contulit agrioolaruin 
 Copia : conveniens ex omni morbida parte 
 Omnia condebant loca tectaque.' 
 Plut. Per. c. 34. 
 
 i\ lvyK0]i.\.Si\. Cf. Liv. iii. 6, 'Auxere vim morbi, terrore populationis peooribus 
 agrestibusque in urbem acceptis ; ea conluvio mixtorum omnis generis .... 
 urbanos et agrestem confertum in arcta tecta . . . augebat,' &c. 
 o4x ijo-orov Tois lireXBovras. A /i,eLa(ns for /laWoy. Cf. i. 82. d.. The de- 
 jection of mind consequent on the total loss of their property would render 
 them more obnoxious to the eflfects of contagion. Defoe mentions among the 
 aggravations of the plague of London, the great conflux of persons into the 
 metropolis in consequence of the recent restoration of the monarchy, to the ex^ 
 tent of more than 100,000 persons, either for the purposes of business or in 
 hopes of rewards for past services iu the royal cause, p. 20. 
 oIkimv ovx virapxovo-wv. Cf. ad c. xvii. for the number of houses of Athens. 
 The number there given corresponds with the number of heads of families ob- 
 tained from the calculation of the divisions of tribes for political and social 
 
Chap. 52.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 315 
 
 purposes. If each tribe contained three phratrias, each phratria thirty gentes, 
 and each gens thirty heads <5f families, we obtain 1 1 phratria, 360 gentes, and 
 10,800 heads of families. The coincidence is observable. i kv 
 
 KaXiipais irviyripats. (Some MSS. read irviyepats,) 'in stifiing cabins.' 
 V. Thirlwall, iii. p. 137. 'The stifling closeness of the temporary cabins, and 
 the apartments in the towers, was more generally pernicious.' Of. Arist. Eqw. 
 789, quoted c. xvii. upa Stows. Gottl. shows to be applied pecu- 
 
 liarly to the summer season. Cf. Plut. Peric. x. ; Arr. Anab. i. xvii. 6. 
 ovSevI Koo-jjKf). Proc. B. P. ii. 22, uses the same words. Jacobs translates 
 'ita ut nulla haberetur ratio ordinis et discipline publiose.' Cf. lib. iii. 108. u. 
 vii. 23. c. ; Polyb. iv. 71 ; Arr. An. i. 8. 8, veKpol iir' dXXiJXois dTroSciJcr/coyres 
 Ikclvto. Cf. iv. 48, ^opiJ,TiS6v iirl afid^as iinpa\6vTes. Procop. B. P. ii. 23, 
 rods veKpods (Tupii^hv ^^eKKov 6ir7j iraparOxoi Kop-i^eadai. ' The dying and the 
 dead lay mingled in masses,' K. Boccacio says, 'There they were stowed, 
 layer upon layer, like the merchandize in a ship ; each layer covered with a 
 little earth.' Virg. Mn. xi. 207. 
 
 ' Csetera, confusseque ingentem csedis acervum 
 Nee numero nee honore cremant. ' 
 
 Cf. Horn. 11. vii. 336. &KpiTos Ti/i^os. Kal Iv rais 6801s. Lucr. vi. 1261. 
 
 ' Multa siti prostrata viam per, proque voluta 
 Corpora silanos ad aquarum strata jacebant 
 Interolusa animS nimia ab dulcedine aquarum 
 Multaque per populi passim loca prompta viasque, &o. 
 
 tA Tt Up&. Lucr. vi. 1270. 
 
 'Omnia denique sancta Detlm delubra replerat 
 Corporibus Mors exanimis, onerataque passim 
 Cuncta cadaveribus coelestum templa manebant 
 Hospitibus loca quae complerant aedituentes.' 
 
 (6.) o,Ti yivavTai — 'what is to become of them.' v. Jelf, § 427. 3 ; Matt. 
 § 488. Cf. iEsch. S. Theb. 297. es oXiYtopCav It. k. t. k. o. B. 
 
 says iepbs relates to the gods, oVios to the republic. Cf. Lucr. vi. 1274. 
 'Nee jam relligio divom neque numina magni 
 Pendebantur : enim prsesens dolor exsuperabat.' 
 P. translates it by 'Sacra et Eeligiosa:' ilia enim sunt diis oonsecrata, hseo 
 legibus et consuetudinibus augusta,' Schom. de Com. ii. 10. Boccacio says, 
 ' In this affliction and wretchedness of the city, the respected authority of laws 
 both divine and humcm was almost entirely fallen to decay and dissolved.' 
 
 (c.) v6|j.oi T6 ircivTCs (TvvETopiixfllo-av. Cf. Procop. B. P. ii. 23, iravra re 
 i/irepdj^dTj rbre rb, irepl rds ratpas v6fiL/j.a. Lucr. vi. 1276. 
 ' Nee mos ille sepulturse remanebat in urbe 
 Quo plus hie populus semper consuerat humari.' 
 By the universal law of the Greeks, the burial of the body by the relations of 
 the dead was considered a religious duty. Even a stranger who found a dead 
 body was bound by law to throw earth upon it. Hor. r Od. xxviii. 36 ; 
 Quintil. Decl 5. 6 ; c. .ffilian, V. H. v. 14. And children who were released 
 
214 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 from all other obligations to unworthy parents, were nevertheless bound to 
 bury them by Solon's law, jfEsch. c. Timarch. p. 40. The neglect of this duty 
 is mentioned as a grave charge against the moral character of a man. Smith's 
 Diet. Ant. s.v. Funus. Of. Cic. de Leg. ii. 26, with Tumebe's notes, and 
 Kirohmann de Fimeribus, i. cap. i. Xen. Anab.'iw. i, 23. The Athenians 
 always buried their dead with the feet to the west; v. ^lian. F. H. v. 14, and 
 the appeal to this custom by Solon, ib. vii. 19 ; Plut. Sol. 8. 9; Paus. i. 40. 5 ; 
 Strab. ix. p. 394. dvaio^vvrous O^Kas. Reiske conj. Ta(f>6.Sj which 
 
 K. adopts ; 'modes of burial.' BrtKas would imply the ^Zacc of deposit of the 
 dead. Poppo shows that Arnold's translation of S^/cas ' modes of burial,' is 
 quite inadmissible. Of. Soph. El. 895. Why may it not mean, they put them 
 into places which, under other circumstances, decency would have forbidden ? 
 T. K. A. explains Avaicrx' properly as ' the want of shame, evinced in the 
 violation of all the usual modes prescribed by custom, founded on right feeling." 
 Defoe, p. 66 — ' The matter was not much to them, or the indecency to any one 
 else, seeing they were all dead, and to be huddled together in the common grave 
 of mankind. There was no other way of burials, for coffins were not to be had 
 for the prodigious numbers that fell.' o-Trdvei twv eiriTTiSeCuv. Lucr, 
 
 vi. 128P. 
 
 ' Multaque vi subitH paupertas hdrrida suavit,' 
 
 ' through lack of all things fit and proper for the burial,' P. ; 'i.e. wool, gar- 
 ments, honey, ointments, perfumes,' Bl. Of. Soph. M. 894. 
 
 veo^pOrovs 
 TTtjycis yd\aKTOS, Kal irepiaTefpTj K^KXqj, 
 irdvriov 6cr' iffTiv dv64cov. 
 
 Dion. 10. 53; Herodian, viii. 5. 18, K. Iirl irupds oXXorpCas. Cf. 
 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 22, Kal is dWorplas SriKas epplirTovv ^ \a.vddvovTes fi /3tof6- 
 ixivoi. Lucr. vi. 1281. 
 
 'Namque sues consanguineos aliena rogorum 
 
 Insuper instructa ingenti clamore locabant, 
 
 Subdebautque faces. ' 
 
 So Bocoacio — 'The priests, with the assistance of the gravediggers, without 
 troubling themselves about any over long or solemn offices, laid the corpse as 
 quick as possible in the first burial place which they found unoccupied.' 
 ■fovs vfjo-avTas. The technical tenn for piling the wood for the pyre. Proc. 
 B. P. ii. 23, iuvvqiravTK ; Horn. Od. 0. 321 ; Herod, i. 50. 86, ii. 107 ; Arist. 
 Lys. 269 , Lucian, de Mori. Pereg. p. 560. tov ea-urmv v€Kpdv. 
 
 The distributive singular. P. who compares the analogous use of &W-fiKav, 
 V. Ixx. 
 
 Chaptek LIII. — (a.) irpmrov 8J {jple k. t. X. — ' was the first commencement 
 of.' d,vo|J.Cas depends upon ^/d|e, not upon iirl irTyebv. It has, 
 
 therefore, the force of dpxv V", as in cap. 12. b. i. 93. b, inrijpKTo airou, and 
 i. 6, iriiratiTai. Aristophanes and Plato furnish abundant evidence that about 
 this time a great change did take place in the manners and morals of the 
 Athenians. This subject, which is one of great interest, is treated at consider- 
 able length in the preliminary discourse to Mitchell's Aristophanes. We are 
 
Chap. 53.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 215 
 
 not to suppose that this total demoralisation was brought about, in the short 
 space of a few months, by the influence of terror and recklessness. This was 
 but the crisis of the change. The pestilence determined the tictory of an evil 
 influence which had long been spreading. The open practice of the new doc- 
 trines of the Sophists had been repressed by laws, and by the received opinion 
 of good and evil, but now that the insecurity of life and property banished 
 thought of the future, by alike extinguishing both hope and fear, and the 
 general disorder and distress removed all check of public opinion, the doctrines 
 of the Sophists sprung at once to maturity, and bore abundant fruit after their 
 kind.' — C. Knight. It6\(i.o tis- The indefinite used collectively ; 
 
 hence, in the succeeding clause, we have the plural participle, dpuvres ; cf. 
 Pflugk ad Eurip. Here. F. 79. direKpvirTeTO (i.'f| Ka9' Ti8ovif|v iroutv, 
 
 Cf. xxxvii. I. Ov. Met. vii. 564. o-yx£o-Tpo(|)ov T'fiv (icrapoX^iv — 
 
 ' the sudden change.' ayx- properly applies to that which is sudden or quick 
 in turning ; here perhaps, transposition, change of places. Procop. B. P. ii. 
 23. aiJ,<j>LaT poijiov TT]v ixeTa^oKijV. So j3!)lian, Y. H. v. 13, r't)V ovtus d7x'c'"/3<'0o'' 
 liera^oXiiv ToS. Tp&irov el iTraiveti' XPV' Herod, vii. 13.. Tax^'as tcIs 
 
 liravp^crcis. diroXaijaets Kal TjSuTraOda?. Sch. iiraijpeaLS has the general sense, 
 'use, employment, usw/ruct,' 'genuss, ' therefore jr/iis rb Tepirvdp becomes neces- 
 sary to qualify the meaning. Herod, vii. 158. e<|><i(Ji«pa. Cf. Msch, 
 P. v. 83. 
 
 (6.) TO "irpooTaXanrupetv, v. Jelf, § 670, i. Even when the preceding verb 
 is construed with a substantive or genitive, the nom. neuter of the article is 
 used, especially in tragedy, in emphatical or antithetical sentences, when the 
 infinitive is conceived as standing to the preceding verb in the relation of the 
 accusative, i. e., effect, operation, or intention, as the verbal notion may require. 
 For the use of the dative rip Sd^avri /caXip, see Jelf, § 596, i. The datims corn- 
 modi. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 137 n. 'The only exceptions to the general all- 
 engrossing selfishness were some persons of extraordinary generosity, who, 
 from a sense of lionour, ventured their lives to attend upon their sick friends. 
 A striking contrast to the sublime charity which has made the plagues of Milan 
 and Marseilles bright spots in the history of religion and humanity.' 
 Ties oiTo — thereunto profitable. KaTta-ri] — 'was laid dovm to ie, 
 
 as T. K. A. says, that was the place it was henceforth to occupy. 
 
 (c.) Bcmv Si (ficSpos i\ ttvBpcSirwv vo|Ji.os, v. Luc. vi. 1274, quoted above ad 
 Iii. a. N.B. the absence of the article. ' Pear of God, or law of man, there 
 pas none which restrained,' &c. So infra, 62. u. to (lev KpCvoVTCs, v. Jelf, 
 
 § 708, 1. The nominative participle used absolutely, where we should expect the 
 gen. abs. Cf. Thuc. iv. 23, v. 70. Soph. Ant, 259, <pi\a^ i\iyx'^^ ^vXaKn. 
 Matt. 6. O. § 562. Compare the phrase c. xlix e, iv rif 6p.ol<p (caSeia-r^/cei. 
 Twv Sk ap.apT'qiJLdTuV) ' no one expecting that he had a chance of living until 
 judicial proceedings might be instituted, by which he might be called upon to 
 pay the penalty of his crimes.' The fiv qualifies both the participle and infini- 
 tive. TToXii 8i (leCJm t^v t| k. Observe that /aeifw from its position 
 becomes the predicate, and that the aorist lTriKpe(ia(r8Tjvai implies the punish- 
 ment was suspended, ready to fall in due time. ' The sentence which was 
 already pronounced against them, ready at any moment to be put into exeou- 
 iion, was far greater than any that a human tribunal could award : and before 
 
2] 6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 it fell it was but fair, upon aU human principles, that they should snatch some 
 brief enjoyment of life.' ifiiria-(lv = iyKaTa<rKii\pai.. So Hor. iii. 
 
 Od. i. 17, 'Distriotus ensis cui super impia oervice pendet.' 'In no age or 
 place,' says Mr. Knight, ' in which the Christian religion has been professed, 
 however corrupted in principle or depraved in practice (if we, perhaps, except 
 the account of the plague of Florence by Boccacio), do we find that that general 
 depravity which Thucydides describes has ensued in consequence of a similar 
 calamity. This difference can only be ascribed to the powerful effects produced 
 by the received belief of a future existence upon the minds even of those who, 
 under common circumstances, seemed regardless of such considerations. Among 
 the Athenians practically no such belief existed ; it was the creed of their poets, 
 it was inculcated at their mysteries, but it was devoid of all authority to serve 
 as a rule of conduct. ' Cf. Thirlwall, u. o. 
 
 Chapter LIV. — (a.) irepiirco-iJvTES" So c. Ixv. 2, irepireaSvres ia-^dXrjirav, 
 used here rather in the sense of the cognate vepiiriTcia than as in I. u. xliii. 
 irepiireTTTijiKbTes' u. v. not, ^iri^^oVTO, as c. Iii. iirU<re 5^ . . . ^ ^vyKO/iid^ 
 
 — were sore pressed. 
 
 (b.) iyiviTo fiv ^pis . . . ji'/). P. says the passage is important as bearing 
 on the pronunciation of the Greek language. BI. says, 'not only are the sounds 
 similar but the ideas cognate,' Xi/ibs being always followed by Xoi/i6s. Cf. Schol. 
 ad Arist. Equ. 727. <|)4(rKovT£s 01 Trparpirtpoi, a sort of nomina- 
 
 tivus pendens, as lib. i. 49, SeSlores ol aTparriyol. Abresch. explains it as an 
 Hypallage for dvafiv-tjad^vres . . . ^<pa,ffKov, Cf. supra Kpivovres. 
 eirX ToB irapovros. Jelf, § 633, u. The genitive expresses that whence the 
 action springs, and €irl represents the action as resting on the object. 
 AwpiaKiis. It was literally, as £1. remarks, a war of races, Dorians against 
 lonians. KaTaXd^i), cf . ad xviii. 1 , 
 
 (c.) liv^pLif . . . Tois A66(riv = dvifivTiffis. dvctXc, the technical 
 
 term for the oracular answer. Cf, i. 118, where Thuc. gives the oracle. Cf. 
 Plut. de Pyth. Orac. p. 586. Xen. Anah. iii. i, 6. Hudson quotes Fab. 
 Paulinus, who arranges the answer in iambic trimeters. The connexion of the 
 pestilence with Apollo is of course familiar to every one from the first book of 
 the Iliad. 
 
 {d.) Sti d|iov Kal eliretv, at all events to an extent worth speaking o^ for 
 Pans. viii. 41, testifies that it did penetrate into the Peloponnese. Cf. sup, 
 fiffre Kal Kretvciv. cir(vet|xaTO — ' it ravaged ' = iTrrj\8e. Hesych., 
 
 properly of the ravages of wild beasts, conflagrations, and similar calamities. 
 It denotes passing into a neighbour's ground, trespassing. See that remarkable 
 passage, jffisch. Agam. v. 466, 6 ffijXvs Spos iTiri/ierai. rA, iroXw- 
 
 avSpcDTTiSTaTa, v. Grote, vi. p. 2 1 9. Perhaps Chios ; hardly Lesbos, or the 
 fact would have been noticed when the revolt of that island occurs. 
 
 Chapter LV. — Srejiov. For this use of the aorists, see Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. ■263, Appendix r. Is Ti\v IldpiiXov yf[V — ' The 
 
 sea coast district' of Attica. A triangular piece of land of which the apex was 
 Sunium, and the two points the base of Brauron and the promontory Zoster. 
 It was hilly and barren, but contained the rich mines of Laurium. It derives 
 
Chap. 57.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 21 7 
 
 its importance from the political division to which it gave rise. Cf. Herod, i. 
 59 ; Plut. V. Solon, xiii. So the ol -ireSinKol, At. Pol. v. 5. 9. from the Tredlov 
 above, i.e. the plain immediately about Athens. AavpCou. Cf. 
 
 vi. c. 91 ; Pans. Att. i. i ; Cramer ii. p. 375. The miners, Thirlwall says 
 (v.jl.iii. p. i34),would probably take refuge with their property in Anaphlystus. 
 Cf Xen. Vectig. iv. 43. 5. opa. — spectat, or prospectat, looks towards. 
 
 P. says that /SX^ttej is the more usual phrase, while K. says Thuc. never uses 
 ^Xhreiv in this sense, but quotes four passages where opdv occurs. 
 &v Kal t6t6. The Kal rbre, as the Schol. remarks, may refer either to the former 
 or the latter part of the clause. 
 
 Chapter LYI. — (a.) Iv vodct-Iv iiriravwYots irpwTov k.t.X. i.e. the old 
 galleys were now for the first time applied to the purpose of horse-transports. 
 Cf. Thirlw. iii. p. 103. In this counter-invasion, the object of Pericles may 
 partly have been to diminish the crowd accumulated in the city ; and perhaps 
 those who went aboard might consider it as a chance of escape to quit an in- 
 fected home, Grote, vi. p. 219. Cf Diod. xii. 45. 
 
 (6.) 'En-CSavpov. Bpidauras, now Epidauro, the famous seat of the worship 
 of jEsculapius (v. Smith's Diet. Biog. s.v. jffiscul.), lay on the eastern shore of 
 Argolis, nearlj' opposite jEgina and the harbours of Athens, from which it was 
 pnly distant six hours' sail. It lies on a small peninsula, protected on the land 
 side by mountains. It was at an early period a Dorian settlement (though 
 perhaps originally Ionian), and one of the most flourishing commercial cities of 
 the Peloponnese. Herod, i. 146 ; v. 83 ; vii. 99. Besides Cos, Calydnus, and 
 Nisyrus, it colonized JEgina, which soon surpassed its mother city in commer- 
 cial importance. In the thirteenth year of the war, we also find them suc- 
 cessfully resisting an attack of the Argives, lib. v. 53 sq. Cf. Strabo, viii. p. 
 374; Cramer, iii. p. 270; Smith's Geog. Diet. s.v. Miill. JEgin. i. 
 xpo£^(apT]cr£. Either supply f; Trpoir/SoXr) or ^ ireipa, or more probably consider 
 the verb used impersonally. Cf Iviii. b. 
 
 (e.) T^v 'AXidSa, v. not. ad i. 105 a. In the seventh year [iv. 45.] they 
 made a similar descent on this district. Cf. Herod, vii. 137; Cramer, iii. 
 p. 258. Ilpao-ids. (Both the singular and plural forms of the 
 
 iiame occur, as ofPlataea.) It lay on the sea-coast, near the foot of Mount 
 Thornax, and was the farthest place of the Eleuthero-Lacones on this part of 
 the coast. The name is said to have been derived from the noise of the waves 
 {§p6,^eiv). It was again ravaged by the Athenians in the seventeenth year of 
 the war by the Athenians and Argives (vi. 105), and by the Athenians alone 
 in the eighteenth year (vii. 18). Hence Aristophanes says, 'Ii Upacaai rpls 
 deXtai, Pax, 242. Leake places it at S. Andrew, in the Thyreatis, but it 
 more probably stood at Tyro. Cf. Smith, Geog. Diet, s.v.; Cramer, iii. p. 202. 
 
 Chapter LVII. — OdirTOVTas fio-SdvovTO. edTTovras, as Arnold observes, 
 is used for any form of performing funeral rites, whether by burning or other- 
 wise. Cf Herod, v. 8, edvTOvcri. KaraKniaavre^, fi SXKas yv Kpi\pavTes. v. 
 Bahr ad loc. Oudendorp, ad Suet. Dom. xv. ; Tac. Ann. ii. 73 ; MVl-au, 
 N. A.x. 22 ; Bl. ad ^sch. S. c. Th. 1023. It may therefore either imply 
 here, perceived the smoke of the funeral pyres, or saw them burying in the ex- 
 
3l8 NOTES ON THUG YDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 tei'ior Ceramicus. irXeto-rov — ' a longer time iham, in amy other invasion. 
 
 Of. K. ad c.xiii. c. )idXio-Ta. So c.lviii. 6. v. not. ad lib. i. 13, 
 
 Chapter LVIII. — (a.) "Ayvuiv. Cf. lib. vi. 31, where he alludes to the 
 greatness of this expedition, when comparing it with the aimament equipped 
 for Sicily. in iro\iopKou().^vriv. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 (5.) Toiis Tvporipovi. The 3000 under Callias. v. i. 61. 
 vocriierai airi> — ' fell sick, having taken the infection from. 
 
 Chapter LIX. — (a.) •f|XXonoVTo. Grote translates by ' distracted, ' vi. p. 
 220. Bl. by 'changed their sentiments,' and compares Dio. Cass. p. 344. 22. 
 So L. and S. It might also imply their being ' deranged in mind,' as Polyb. viii. 
 xxix. 5 ; their being ' estranged in sentiment towards Pericles,' or being changed 
 for the worse, as Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 9, ' having lost their former high courage and 
 determination.' The Sch. explains it by (Uere^X^^T^frap. K. compares iv. 106, 
 iWoiSripoi, iyhovTO ras yvii/ias. P. says the pluperfect implies, ' that their 
 sentiments had become changed, and had continued so for some time.' 
 cv alrttt il\ov. So dc dpyris ^X^'"- ^^' ^^ ii- ^- ir€pLTr€TrT(«)K6T€S. 
 
 Cf. liv. a. ^vyx^P^v — 'to give in, to submit.' iv5i56vai. Sch. 
 
 ' Nachgehen ;' K. to come to terms by making concessions. Cf. c.lxvi. 
 irp4<rp€is. Cf. Diod. xii. 45. 
 
 (6.) TravTaxoBcv — 'from the pressure ofmiloward circumstances on all sides. ' 
 <^Xirtj€v — 'expected,' as i. i. a. For the /art, see i. 140. a. 
 IvXXo-yov — ' a™ extraordinary assembly, ' which his position as crTpaTTiybs 
 enabled him to summon. Cf. ad c.xxii. c. 'in SI ka-rpaTiyya — 
 
 i.e. as Seidler says, bad not yet been deprived of his generalship. Both 
 Plutarch and Diodorus mention his removal from this office, Thucydides only 
 the fine. Grote therefore is inclined to doubt the reality of the former event. 
 He imagines that the sti'ategi were re-elected in Hecatombaeon ; that the 
 Peloponnesian army entered Attica about the end of March or beginning of 
 April, and remained forty days, i.e. till the first week in May. During the 
 interval that elapsed between this event and the time of his re-election, Pericles 
 convoked this assembly. When the period for his renewal of office arrived, 
 his enennes prevented his re-election ; which might in loose language be called, 
 ' taking away the office of general,' Vol. vi. p. 226. n. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p, 
 1 42. oiraYa-yibv. K. explains by 'ablenken,' 'to divert.' Bl. 
 
 translates ' to divert the irritation of their feelings, and bring them to a calmer 
 and less dispirited state of mind.' ■f|iricoTepov refers to their feelings 
 
 towards himself. dSe^o-npov. The disheartened condition of their 
 
 own minds. 
 
 Chapteb LX. — {».) Kal irpo(r8cxo|i^v(o. One might be tempted to tr. 
 it is even as I expected ; but I think the editors are right in connecting koI with 
 the Kal before ixKhriulav. The dat. irpo(r8e)(0|j.^V(j> stands as the dative in such 
 idioms as jSouXo/i^vois isTi.. Cf. TipTrXijSei oii §ovkoiJ,h<f fjv, ch. 3. b. 
 Tol TTJs op-yfls. Rather more general than li/jyij, perhaps indications of anger. 
 |j.^p.\|/a)(j.at. As this is the reading of a large majority of MSS., it is quite 
 useless to read liifi^j/opMi with Bekker, who indeed gives the subjunctive in a 
 similar collocation, viii. 109. 
 
Chap. 6o.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 21 9 
 
 (5.) dp6ov|i^viiv. As the antithetical word is arjiaXKoiih-riv — tripped up, 
 overthrown, the metaphor here is not from a vessel proceeding in a straight 
 course, but from a person retaining an upright position. Cf. ii. Tim. ii. 15, 
 cum Comment. dpSoroiioOvTa. If Ka9' ?Ka(rrov eiirpovovo-av — thanwhen 
 
 prosperous in the case of individual citizens. Livy has a well-known imitation, 
 xxvi. 36. ' Respublica incolumis et privatas res facile salvas prsebet ; pubhoa 
 prodendotua nequidquam serves.' Ka\us <|>cp6|j.evos — when it goes well 
 
 with him. T. K. A. rather, when he is going on prosperously, like a vessel with a 
 favouring breeze. Cf. v. 15 and 16, and Xen. CEcon. v. 17, eB (pepoiiiv-qs Tijs 
 -/wpyla.s^^poivTa.L Kalal iiXXai t^x"""- oTacrai, quoted by Krttg. Siao-mjerat — 
 
 is enabled to carry out his own preservation. Cf. sup. ch. 40. a., Sia.^eiyeu'. 
 
 (e.) oiroTC. Used as we ourselves use when for since. See Kriig. on Xen. 
 Anab. iii. 2. 2. ras ISCos. If we do not, as Kriig. suggests, read 
 
 lSi<f, tr. private calamities, i.e. calamities of its private citizens. We have 
 TO, ISta Sid^opa, sup. ch. 37 ; but see i. 68, rdv lSi(} Siacpdpay. 
 a^iivav, n. b. the active voice ward off evil from her, come to her aid. The 
 junior student must carefully distinguish from &iJ.ive(Tdai., 'from ourselves.' 
 Kal |J.^ K.T.X. — and not do what you are doing now, letting go your hold of, <6c. ' 
 d(j)Ce(r96 must not be altered as in some MSS. to a<ple(Tdai ; for it is epexegetical 
 to Spare. Popp. refers to Hennann. ad Vig. p. 759; Xen. Oyrop. i. 6. 19; 
 Pflugk, ad Eurip. Hec. v. 178. Iwevvuxe. So used vii. 73, united 
 
 with me in determining. Cf. l,vvdi.4yvoiTe infr. c. 64. a. ; 5i' airtas ^ere, cf. i. 
 18. a. 40. c. ; and Sl dpyyjs ^X^'-^r ^- ^9' 
 
 (d.) Yvuvai Tcl Sedvra — to know what the interests of the state require. 
 Popp. has collected a large number of passages where a similar statement of 
 qualifications is found. The best illustration of the whole is supplied by Arist. 
 Rhet. ii. 1.3. cjiiXciiroXis — patriotic. ' Some grammarians have 
 
 objected to this word, as not Attic. Duk. ad vi. 92, has shown that it is. 
 Popp. For some most interesting remarks on the nature of ancient Patriotism, 
 see Comte Franz de Champagny's Les Cisars, vol ii. p. 391. Xpi)|ittT<ov 
 
 KpeCo-crciiv, a somewhat elliptical form of speaking. Superior to the influence of 
 bribes. The converse xRV'^'^'r'^'' ^iriraij' occurs Arist. Plut. v. 362. 
 «v ilo-cji IcttIv Kal ().•?) el — perinde ac si non, is in just the sameposition as if he had 
 never had the conception : on IvcOvp-VjOT], cf. supra 40. b. dp.<f)6T€pa — 
 
 both qualifications. ovK&v6p.oC<i>s. Sc. Sicrirep el <pi.\67ro\i.s el-ri. oiKcius 
 
 — convenienter, e re civitatis, Popp. and others. I think the use of the word is 
 to be explained by what is said i. 70, rj ydi/iri olKelordrri is rb irpdcrcreiv n iirip 
 aiTTJs {rijs xiXews) xP^'rai ; and here, therefore, oi/ceius will mean ' as if they 
 belonged to it, and took its interests to heart ; loyally, dutifully.' 
 Tov Be — i.e. rod eiivov t§ irbXei, which is also the subject of vLKiiifi,ivov, at 
 least I do not see the use of introducing an airou with some editors. Similarly 
 ■wakoiTo is passive ; all would he ba/rtered for this one thing, sc. xprn^^rav. The 
 genitive is that of price, which is coixeotly explained, as in Latin, by the ellipse 
 of 'pretio.' toB ^ye d8iK£tv = <o have injured, T. K. A. Why 
 
 .80? This sort of comment seems to me to introduce unnecessary confusion 
 and uncertainty into the student's mind. It means to be a wrovg-doer, to 
 stand to you in the position of a wrong-doer. See note supra on TrXovrfiaeie. 
 42. 0. 
 
220 NOTES ON THircyDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Chaptee LXI. — (a.) Kal -ydp. 'The connexion is, I am innocent, for 
 ciroumstanoea forced us into war,' Krttg. atpeo-is 7€Y^vtiTai — 'when 
 
 the choice between peace and war has been offered to them.' €l 8^ 
 
 dva^Kafov f[v puts the case hypothetically, with an assumption of its occurrence. 
 £ut say that it was necessary either to give way at once, and submit to one's neigh- 
 bours, or at the expense of peril to come successfully out of the contest — the par- 
 ticiples without the article as usual indicate the condition under which the fol- 
 lowing verb is predicated. 6 itju^yiiv — why then in that case the man who 
 ha^ shrunk from the danger, is more censurable than the one who has stood to 
 face it. 
 
 (5.) 6 oirbs «l|Jii. — tJie same in opinion, sc. rf yviifi,Tj, as iii. 38, where 
 the words are found. oix e5£o-TO(i.ai — / do not withdraw from it. 
 
 (leTapdWcTc, sc. t^v yvoifi'^v, lit. transfer your opinion to the other side ; you 
 (emphatic) it is who change. Kriig. cites as another instance of /jiera^dWa 
 without an expressed object, Isoc. iv. 125, Toa-ovTov iieTajSe^'K'^Kaaiv &<TTe 
 Tats TToXireiais iroXeixovcn. Cf. Plat. Rep. 564. a. aKcpaCois. Some- 
 
 what poetical — scatheless. tQ {)iJ,eTiptf, Kriig., from Lobeckad Sophoc. Ajax, 
 p. 74, remarks that i/i^repos generally is rendered conformable in construction 
 to the governing word : tr. your infirmity of purpose. ^X*^ pain is in 
 
 possession of each man's feeling, D. I should prefer understanding ?X6i as it 
 has been previously explained, i.e. nearly equivalent to Trap^ei. Cf. ch. 41. b, 
 and tr. the annoyance makes itself felt in each Tnan's case. tJ) 
 
 Xditovv is not ' pain' in the abstract, but that which is now paining you, 
 fj.eraPoX'iis — a great reverse of fortune, and that too all of a sudden. 
 Tairetv<). See note on dXiyai d/iiveLV, i. 50. e., and tr. not bold enough to persist 
 in; but h/Kaprepeiv also implies the notion of endurance — endure to the end. 
 We should have rather expected ofs than &, as the figure called Attic attraction 
 generally has place in such collocations. But Popp. quotes Svirfiaovrai & hi 
 yvthfyiv ^yKapr^peiv. 
 
 (c.) Tci irXE((rTu> irapaXoYO) fy^^aXvov— that which occurs with the greatest con- 
 tradiction to our calculations J the greatest unlikelihood. So we have too To\^p.ov 
 rbv Trapakoyov,!. 78. infra, 85. a. I see no occasion for Kriig. 's conjecture, TrXeiffry 
 Tip. irpbs Tots &XX01S. This refers to the devastation of their lands, 
 
 and their crowded condition in the city. 4>p6vt)|iLa. Cf. 
 
 supra, and ch. 62, enslaves a high spirit. dvTiirdXois — ■ 
 
 that 'are a fine match ; here, of correspondent character. 
 d^Cioo-iv. As in i. 69, ii. 37, and cf. i^iiifiaros a^aveig,, oh. 37, sup. ch. 
 iirapxoicrris 8d5i]s. This gen. depends upon iXKelwei.. See note on iirap- 
 Xoi<rris (p6(reas, ch. 45, that reputation which is properly his, i.e. which at- 
 taches to him as a property, and which we look for naturally in him. So rijs 
 fi^ irpofftjKoi^a'rjs is that to which he has no claim, diraX-y^iravTas. 
 
 See note on dToXo^vpa/iemi., u. 46 ad fin., and tr. having done with gnef about 
 your private affairs. dvTiXa|j.pdvE(r6ai. Sc. xpeiiv — lay hold of 
 
 instead ; i.e. address yourself instead to. The word is used in the LXX. for 
 taking the feeble by the hand. See also duriXa/ipdvovTai, supr. ch. 8. 
 
 Chapter LXII. — (1.) tJiv irdvov. This would formerly have been de^ 
 scribed as an accus. absolute ; and indeed even now in tr. we are compelled to 
 
Chap. 6a.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 22,1 
 
 say that with regard to your labow in the war; yet it is best to consider with 
 Popp. and Kriig. that the words are in grammatical combination with AiriSei^a 
 iTOTTTCud/ievov, as if no such parenthetical statement as dpKeiru iv oh had inter- 
 vened. We should say 6 ttAkos inroirreieTai /t^j y4vTjTai xoXi/s, as well as 
 iTTOirreiJeTai fir/ 6 irbvos yiv-qTai 7ro\i)r, and therefore (l7r^Sci|a rhv 7r6Xe/tO!' oiiK 
 
 6pBS>s ivoTTTexiiiiEvov is a legitimate way of speaking. Kal ckeivo ■ 
 
 even that to go no further. Cf. with this way of speaking, Tirg. Eel. iii. 50, 
 
 Audiat hsEO tantum, — vel qui venit ipse Palsemon. 
 
 8r)X<&irii> 8J Kal ToSe k.t.X. — I will also put before you this fact, that you possess 
 a circumstance, &c., T. K. A. As it is not very clear to me what 'rtc fact of 
 possessing a circumstance' may be ; I should prefer to make the construction 
 6T)X<iirw rdSe iwdpxov. I will show that this advantage attaches to you. The 
 next words, /iey46ovs irepl, follow rather awkwardly, but I take them quite 
 parenthetically (on the score of extent), i.e. pointing out what is implied in the 
 T68e, and standing as a sort of epexegesis to it : then h i.pxn" is for dominion 
 or for empire, i.e. for maintaining it. Others, as T. K. A., interpret /ieyidovs 
 Tepl, connected with the extent of your empire. oir kyi>. Popp. 
 
 supplies iveSvi^-fidTiv, but surely Pericles did not mean to say that, great states- 
 man as he was, he had never considered so plain and patent a fact before. 
 Besides the adj unct, iv toIs irplv \6yois points to something else. We must 
 therefore understand ixpv'af.rjv, or some notion contained in it, have in no 
 former speech availed myself of it as a means of persuading you. And why ? 
 Because the pretension which it involves is soTnewhat of a boastful character. 
 Surely these words are sufficient to show that he had had the conception in his. 
 mind. See note on iveSvii^Sri, ch. 40. b. 
 
 (6.) (lepuv. Those parts of the world open to man's use. So viii. 46. He 
 speaks of t6 rijs 6a\d<T(rris ii4pos. There is no necessity to conjecture Krijaiv. 
 The expression is quite general, and probably one of common parlance. 
 v^|Ji.c<r9c. Cf. i. 2, a. 1 
 
 [c.) poirtXevs, and S6vos stand in contrast, and are more emphatic sine 
 articulo. There is no one, be it king or be it nation. See supra, 53, c. fiXXo is 
 used as it very commonly is, in the sense of besides. Kara, \pilav — in 
 
 respect of the use of ; tr. this power is not to be found in your having the use of 
 your houses or your la/nd, which you think great things to have been deprived of 
 - — or /cari may denote comparison, is not a thing you should compare with. 
 
 {d.) airuv. for the sake of them. Matth., § 368, and Jelf, § 488, 3. 
 'Most of these genitives of the cause or aim of the action, were formerly 
 explained by an ellipse of heKa or x^pi-"-' (toXXov Vf o4. A good 
 
 instance of the idiom called redundant negative. See i. 95. . Popp. quotes 
 Hermann, ad.jVig. p. 799; Hartung. de Part. ii. p. 170; Matth. § 455, 3, 
 to which we may add Jelf, § 749, 3. But perhaps the best discussion upon the 
 subject is to be found in Buttmann'a able appendix to his edition of the 
 Meidias, Excursus xi. p. T49. His principle is, — ' Itatio hujus usus commode 
 in plerisque videatur explicari ita, ut respectu verbi negantis infinitivus iste (or, 
 as here, it need not be an infinitive) cum negatione non sit instar objecti, sed 
 adjectus tantura ad exprimendum effectum:' i. c, when the result is negative, 
 a negative is associated with itj even where a negation belongs to it from the 
 
232 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 previous part of the sentence. So in the .French idioma cited by Jelf, § 749, 
 — ' il n'^crit pas mieux cette ann^e-ci qu'il ne faisait I'ann^e pass^e. 
 KiiirCov. It has been supposed that this refers to a particular way of dressing 
 the hair. The French tr. of Zevort has 'la parure et V orntment.' The more 
 usual interpretation is a garden, or pleasure ground. The German tr. ein 
 Zustgartchen. Popp. says 'noti Atheuis recentioribus temporibus amceni 
 Epicuri hortuli, et alii.' This is true, but only of ' recentiora tempora.' On 
 the want of taste for the picturesque, and its imitation by horticulture, &c., 
 among the Athenians, see note on ktjttos, Sheppard's Theophrastms, p. 164 ; 
 Bekker's Charicles ; Kitto's Palestine, p. 26 ; Card. Wiseman's Lecture on the 
 subject. e^KaXXMirio-iia is, says Bl., a very rare word, which I have not 
 
 observed except in the later historians (Procopius, &c.) . Probably their adoption 
 of it arises from an imitation of the present passage. Bl. tr. gay embellishments 
 irpos. Of. Jelf, § 638. irpocrK€KTT)|i^va. So the majority of MSS. 
 
 Others, however, read 7r/>o/ce/fT7;/A^pa. In fact MSS. vary so continually between 
 these two prepositions when found in composition, that I should generally have 
 little scruple in adopting that which gave the best sense. The latter would here 
 mean what lie has been possessed of before his reduction to slavery, and this Knig. 
 and Engelman's edition give. Popp. and Bl. retain the former, and explain 
 whatever we are possessed of in addition to freedom; but I believe the expression 
 may imply no more than acquisitions. Bekk. edits irpoceKTrifiha, from an old 
 Ionic perf. SKTtjfiai, on the ground I suppose, that copyists would not have in- 
 vented such a form ; but in a case where so many variations are known to 
 occur, this looks like hypercriticism. )i.f| x^'povs. Of supra, ch. 45.b. 
 
 KttT a|i.(j>(ST€pa, i. e., as explained afterwards, Ka.rd.T6 KaTa<Tx^^J^ nal diaaiiaavres 
 Tj-apaiMvat. That xdreaxov means retained their hold upon — maintained, 
 seems clear from the elements of which the word is composed, and from the 
 passages quoted by Popp. 
 
 (e.) KT(o|i.^vous. Note the distinction from KeKTrifi,hovs, and tr. fail in the 
 attempt to acquire. <t>povTip.aTi — KaTa(|>pov%aTi. Of coui-se the 
 
 play upon the words is obvious, but I have seen no very successful attempt to 
 keep it up in translation. Not only with spirit, but also Uiith a spirit of con- 
 tempt. D. Non seulement avec confiance, mais avec dedain. Zevort. Nicht 
 Wiir mil Selbstachtung, sondern auch mit Verachtung. Engelman. Disdain is, 
 I think, the nearest English word to xara^pdi'riij.a, as here used. Dionys. 
 Hal. reprehends the verbal jingle. Certainly it scarcely suits the dignity of 
 historical composition, but these words were supposed to be addressed to an 
 audience of very mixed character, and carry a genuine air with them. 
 afixiH'"" ^^^g- well has ' prahlerische Kechheit.' It is not easy to render into 
 English, but the word contains the idea of a braggart, or boastful confidence. Of. 
 vii. 66, 'Vvionxi irio-Ttit). has a confidence grovmded upon judgment. 
 
 KOTtt(|)pdvr)<ris. It certainly is possible to supply iKdvif with the SchoHast as 
 the antecedent to Ss ; but it is more, I think, in accordance with the style of 
 Thuc. to tr. as Kriig., but it is contempt, when a man, &c. Of. Jelf, § S29, 2. 
 dirb Tfis o|io£as tux'IS — where fortune is the same o« one side as the other j 'a 
 fair stage and no favour.' FordTrAseei. 91, 6, and compare ^k toC o/to/ou, i v. ro, 
 with ^K ToO irip^poms, which I suppose means proceeding out of a spirit which 
 disdains the foe ; having its origin in a disdainful spirit, according to the true 
 
.Chap. 63.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 223 
 
 meaning of the preposition. D. has with a high spirit. IXvpwTe'pav 
 
 irop^X''''''"' ' ffitarantees boldness (as in such cases) more secure.' eXirCSi 
 
 re k.tA. See this translated i. 9. a,. oirj) t&v vvap^ovTav. Tr. proceeding 
 
 from, i.e., grounded upon existing resources. Popp. writes, 'to. {nrapxdvra esae 
 prjesentem rerum copiam, opes prcesentes, pluribus docet Gail.' I would not 
 therefore, with D., render present realities. irpovoia. forecast. 
 
 Chapter LXIII. — (a.) T&'rifiMfi,iva Tf[% m\aas. thehonour received by the 
 state. Cf. note on rip iit) /leXsTuvTi, i. 14, 2, and Jelf, § 436. 7. 
 ^iTEp &iravT£s. One good MS. has <f virep diravras, which Krtig. does not dis- 
 approve, and which the German translator has adopted. (j.T]8i vofiia-ai iv. t. X. 
 nor consider the struggle to he about one matter simply, whether you are to have 
 slavery instead of freedom, but that it also respects the loss (lit. deprivation of) 
 of empire, and peril on account of the animosities which you have incurred in its 
 exercise, i. c, with most nations it might be a simple struggle whether they 
 were to be freemen by victory or slaves on defeat ; but to the latter you would 
 have two aggravations: (i) the loss of a dominant position; (2) the peril 
 which arises from the animosity engendered by it. tSv is cei'tainly neuter. 
 Upon this usage of dTexSdvo/iai see a good note by Wunder, (Ed. R. v. 259 ; 
 Jelf, § 483, 4. 
 
 (J.) ToSe. Since this must refer to ri ^kcttivo-i ttjs apxTJs, it cannot be 
 governed by SeSiilis, I should therefore take SeSiilis independently and connect 
 t65e with d^BpayaSll^eTai, if in his present alarm, anyone is for playing the good 
 quiet man, in this way. The passages quoted by Popp. do not at all prove that 
 AvSpajl^eirBai cannot take an accusative; I interpret Kara rbSe in respect of 
 this point, nor does it seem to me necessary to read T(}Se. Cf. iii. 40. 
 
 (c.) «s TupavvtSo. Because Cleon, iii. 37, repeats the sentiment without 
 us, Dobree would strike the word out here. But, as the Editors observe, 
 Pericles would probably put forward the notion less coarsely than Cleon. 
 01 TOioiToi K. T. X. The sentence is somewhat elliptical, TriXw i,Tro\i(reLav 
 belonging to both clauses. ' People of this sort (sc. ol dvSpayadi.^6iJ,(poi. rdde), 
 either when living where they could influence others (i. e., when members of a 
 community like Athens), or when independent and left to their own devices 
 (as in a colony), would most speedily play mischief with the fortunes of a 
 state.' t!> 7dp SirpaYiiov K. t. X. For quiet is not maintained except when it 
 
 has the power of action for an auxiliary, (met. from the disposition of miUtary 
 forces) nor is it in a dominant city that it is of any use, but in a subject one to 
 inswre security in one's submission, or unmolested submission. This I believe to 
 be the force of this somewhat difficult passage : t6 S,irpayp,ov is the subject of 
 ^v/i^pei, for we cannot, as might seem natural, make the subject to be da<pa\i!>s 
 dovXeieiv without very much constraining the meaning of these words. What 
 would be (i(r0a\(Ss SovXeieiv in an S,pxovaa ttiSXis? Gottleber quotes from 
 Dem. oiK ijSvv^BTj TrilnrOTe ttjv irbXiv oiibels iK Tavrhs rou xp^^^^ ireT(Tat toIs 
 IffX^ovtn fi^v, p^^ dUata S^ irpdrrovo'i, wpocBepi^vTjv d<r(pa\oJs SovXeijetv. p. i8, 203. 
 
 Chaptek LXIV. — (a.) irap&yta-Sf. The preposition, as often, may exert 
 the same force as the Latin se, away from, i. e. what is right : hence tr. seduced. 
 Or it may mean be not brought over to their way of thinking. Cf. i. 29. c. 
 
324 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 |wSU'YV<i)T€. Cf. II. 60. A KaC — if, as has turned out to he the case, true 
 
 though it he that, &c. Popp. considers that these words continue to exert tbeif 
 force on iTnyeyinrjTal re. I am inclined, however, to think that the latter is 
 quite an independent clause ; had it not been so, Kriig. contends Thuc. would 
 have written Kal, not re. IXirCScs. Cf. i. i. On the whole 
 
 Bloomf. well compares Tacit. Agric. 27. ' Iniquissima haec bellorum conditio 
 est : prospera onines sibi vindicant, ad versa uni imputantur.' 
 
 (6.) (Ji^pos Ti. Cf. i. 74. Jelf, § 579. 4. (loLXXov, so. still more 
 
 than had you only been exasperated by the loss of your land. 
 dva7Ka£o)s^as a necessity, as a thing that cannot he Jtelped. On this particular 
 usage of the adverb, seeuoteoniii. 40; and on the sentiment, Soph./'AJi.v. 1316. 
 ?v S9ei Vfv — was the way of this state ; was hahilual to it. Kriig. cites iv 
 Toirif tQ Tp6iriji ivres, i. 8 ; and now let it not find any impediment in you, 
 i. e. let not the continuance of the good custom meet with an obstacle in you. 
 Nothing is gained that I can see by the conjectures koXouSj or KaraXvB^. 
 
 (c.) Is aCSiov. This occurs again, iv. 63, but is, as Kriig. remarks, rare. 
 It belongs to the somewhat poetic tone into which an orator naturally falls 
 when excited. viiv iroTe — ' nunc tamdem aliqua/ndo,' Popp. 
 
 {tirev8u|jLev. The Schol. explains ijiroxaXdawfiGv, give way a little. 
 Kal «\tt(ro-o€o-Bai, i. e. as well as to experience the opposite. ' All human 
 things wane as well as wax.' KaToXEXcCij/ETai. On these 
 
 so called Paulo-p. Futures, seeMatth. § 498. Eost, § 1 16. 9, and Jelf, § 407. i. 
 'EW^vcov. The construction passes from the participle to Sn, as sometimes, 
 from the infinitive, and Vice versS from Sti to the infinitive. See Popp. here, 
 and on i. 87: or with-Kriig., we may consider that the clause follows /iKiJ/ii;, 
 as explanatory of what is implied in it, i. e. the memory that we as Greeks over 
 Greeks haveheld the largest sway. On the Athenian Empire, see i. 80. Bloomf. 
 from want of appreciating the true aoristic force of ijp^a/j.ev would refer these 
 words to a period twenty-seven years before the war. But Pericles did not 
 mean to speak of the power and glories of Athens as in any way past, and, as 
 has been remarked, even if ■fjp^aixev were strictly here a, past tense, it might 
 have been used in reference to the future KaraXeXei^Eroj. irpds re 
 
 I^IJLiravTas Kal KaS* ckcIotovs. Agaifist all collectively or severally; an in- 
 stance of the disjunctive t^ Kal, as c. 64, sr^pous re ireKTdvres, Kal k. t. X. Two 
 cases are supposed, and these happen to differ. It is hyperbolical to say that 
 they had ever fought the Greeks collectively, though such language might vcell 
 be used by an orator respecting the Peloponnesian league. Buttmann quotes 
 this passage in his lexicographical notice of Kara (Dem. Midias, p. 185) as an 
 instance of the fact that such phrases as Kad' ixda-Tovs become almost substan- 
 tival in their nature, and therefore stand in clauses as nouns, and with the 
 government of nouns ; e. g. hie, kuB' iKda-rovs pendet a prjepositione irpbs ; 
 nam si sine ilia jungas verbo. hoc dicas ' singulatim ipsi restitimus.' See the 
 other cases there quoted, and cf. (ariv oh, and similar phrases. T. K. A. in 
 this passage misquotes Poppo's Greek, and referring to Buttmann without ex' 
 amination, informs the reader that the latter considers the words to stand for 
 Kal Tois Kaff' hdffrovs ! tiiropar6iTr\v — most thoroughly fwmished wilh 
 
 all things. jji67C<miv. Popp. observes has reference not merely to extent 
 
 and number of houses, but also to population. It is well known that in Xen. 
 
Chap. S^.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 225 
 
 Mem. iii. 6. 14, the houses of Athena are estimated at 10,000. This, counting 
 the inmates of each house, inclusive of slaves, aa n, gives 120,000 inha- 
 bitants. The average number of free citizens in classical times was 20,000. 
 SeeBceckh, P. E. of Athens, i. p. 46; and Clinton, Fasti HelUnici, p. 387; 
 Wachsmuth, ii. i. 2, § 32. 
 
 (d.) KaCTOi. If we are to retain the usual force of this word we roust, with 
 Hartung and Krug. (not as T. K. A. says, 'with Popp.,' who argues on the 
 other side), suppose that it refers to the contrasted notion contained in 6 S^ 
 Spav K. T. X. ; and yet while the easy going man finds fault with all this, he, on 
 the contrary (5e) who is anxious to be up and doing ; or, anxious to effect some- 
 thing, will of himself i. e. without being urged by me — emulate it. It must, I 
 think, be from want of duly considering this that Popp. insists upon attaching 
 the unusual meaning atqui, but now, to the word in this place. See Jelf, § 
 772- t- tJi (iio-eto-Bai. Cf. vi. 16. grepoi is added, as 
 
 Krug. seems to hint, for the purpose of indicating that the dominant race pre- 
 serve their distinct nationality, and are not to be confounded with the van- 
 quished, eirl n^Yio-Tois, for the most exalted objects : Caesar's 
 favourite sentiment, referred to by Am., will recur to most minds ; etirep yap 
 ddiKeiv XPV TvpavviSos ir^pi KdWiffTOv ddiKeip. Eurip. Phaen. v. 524. 
 •fj Xa(i.irpoTT]s .... Si5|tt. See note on Granville Sharp's canon. The occur- 
 rence of re after the first noun makes it perhaps uncertain whether this pas- 
 sage comes under the rule. One MS. omits the re, in which case certainly the 
 meaning will be, our present splendor which will form our future glory ; or 
 even if the re be retained I am not sure that we may not tr. that which is at 
 once both our splendor at the present, and our glory for the future. 
 
 (e.) irpo'yvdvTes. This is parallel to the expression ri irpovola airou ij is rbv 
 irHKeiiov, c. 65, and is well rendered by Ani. providing in your decision for 
 your future glory ; then is ri airtxa /iri al<rxpl"' is a sort of litotes, what cer- 
 tainly is not disgraceful for the present. He would insinuate, that though the 
 immediate result of such conduct may appear less brilliant, owing to the suffer- 
 ing it entails, yet brilliant it will be, as securing certain glory for the future. 
 This seems to me better than to say with all the editors — ' ri /ieXXoi' KaXdv ad 
 Tr)» lireira S6^av ; et rJ airUa /it) alaxpb" ad rijv jrapavrlKa XaiiirpbrriTa 
 respicit.' What sort of a Xafiirplrnqs would that be which was only om 
 alffyfii ? 
 
 Chapter LXV. — {a.) airhv. We might have anticipated airhv, but practi- 
 cally the Athenians may be considered the subject, and we have therefore airhv 
 in reference to them. irapaXveiv Tf|s op^fjs. The ace. is more 
 
 common ; Krtig. Bl. says the gen. is only imitated by Dio Cassius. May it 
 not be a sort of partitive gen. remit somewhat of their anger f Cf inf 0. 75. d. 
 Or may it not have airbv understood, so that the construction will be like wapa- 
 . "Kieiv ffTpaTijtrjs, Herod, vii. 38, to remit from military service, and oi irapi\va-av 
 TTJs dpxv^,1!hucy<i.vii. J 6, did not excuse from his command? Cf. the same phrase, 
 viii. 54. 6p|iu(JLevos — having less to start from. Cf. our phrase, a start 
 
 in life, and see note on i. 144, a. olKoSo|Ji.'ais, i. e., oUlais. Popp. 
 
 But does it not imply all the buildings upon the premises, just as we speak of 
 ' farm buildings ?' The Edd. connect these datives with KaX&. On KaroffXiiais, cf. 
 
 Q 
 
226 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II, 
 
 i. 10 b, and li. i6. Jelf, § 604. Am. remarks that though they might have 
 removed much of their furniture, &c., they would practically have lost the use 
 of it, and that indeed the term would include the colonnades round their houses 
 which were of course destroyed by the enemy. 
 
 (6.) o4 [tivToi ye. A second statement opposed to dveirelffovro, the first 
 being Idi^ 5^ ekvirovvro. Popp. lETjuCcocrav xp'^fiacriv — mulcted him 
 
 in a sum of money. The dative is instrumental. Cf. ^vyfj i^7jfj.tcaaav, iv. 65., and 
 ' pecuniS mulotatos/ Livy, xxi, 61. According to Plutarch those who give the 
 lowest estimate say 15, those who give the highest say 50 talents. It is not 
 very likely that they were exacted. Diodorus speaks of 80 talents, and says 
 that he was dismissed from his office ; this is, however, quite in the tone of the 
 later exaggerations. Thucyd. would certainly have mentioned the fact if it 
 bad been true. Birep <|>tX6t ttokiv. Thucyd. repeats the sentiment, 
 
 V. 28 c, and viii. I. lir^Tpcil/av — turned all their a fairs over into 
 
 his hands. They made him supreme over the nine other ^rparTjyot. Like 
 first Lord of the A dmiralty, says Arn. Kriig. cf. ijye/iCiiii airoKpdTwp- Xen. 
 JJellen. i. 4, 20, said of Alcibiades. <Sv — i. e., toOtwv &. ' The 
 
 gen. governed by d^/SXi^repoi, less sensitive, like ttjs yv(ifj,7]S ap^XTjveaBat, ii. 87, 
 ■2,' Popp. ; but, says Kriig., the two places are something different, and he 
 accordingly conjectures Tr^pL post casum, supplying /card ravra before the second 
 S>v. Popp. also suggests that &!> may depend upon ij\yci, a view of the case 
 adopted by L. and S. Lex. in voce, but this construction spems to be confined 
 to poetry. tji elp-^VT), generally understood of the thirty years' truce 
 
 which followed the revolt of Euboea. 
 
 (c.) (lerpCas e^'HYEiTO. Popp. quotes Aristid. ii. p. iiG, toOto ia-rlv havriov 
 ToC jiiaitijs Kal TrXeoce/cTiKus. This must not, I think, be understood merely of 
 personal violence and avarice. Thucyd. rather refers to the moderation of his 
 national policy, in not seeking territorial aggrandisement, &c, 
 ao'(j>a\ccs — safe froTn trips and,overthrows. Cf. i. 69, ad finem, and i. 84, iv. 
 18. eir' tKeivov — under him, i. c, his administration. Cf. Herod, 
 
 iv. 114, oh^wp-ev iir' ijp^ojv aiiTwv, and the passages quoted by Jelf, § 633 ; or 
 it may be in his time, as iTl Aapelov iy^vero TrX^to KaKkr^ "EXXaSt, Herod, vi. 
 98. Cf. Jelf, ibid. KaT^o-TT|. Cf. Ka,di.(TTap,hov i i. a. 6 SJ. Cf. 
 
 iii. 58 a. This is Sk in apodosi — He, then I say. But, says Krtig., this form of 
 speech is more Ionic than Attic. It was, however, again taken up by the later 
 writers, as, for instance, Arrian ; it resembles the tois Si, to these I say, sup. 
 c. 46. irpo-yvois t^v 8iiva|j.iv — having taken a far-sighted view of 
 
 its power, i. c, discerned beforehand what its true nature consisted in. 
 ktti^i^ — he over-lived it. See the same expression, v. 26. 
 
 (d.) BepaireiiovTas. Bl. remarks that this use of the word is unusual. But 
 it is, as Krtig. says, very graphic, being equivalent to the German phrase 
 ' hegen und pflegen ' — to cherish and make much of. Indeed, it might be well 
 employed of the feeling of Englislimen toward their own navy. Cf. also, the 
 use of the word, i. 9, TedepairevKdres rb irXijOos, and ibid. c. 137, and iv. 67, 3. 
 Kttl oipx^v K. T. X. —making no attempts to acquire additional dominion while 
 they still had the war upon their hands, nor perilling their country upon a cast. 
 Iv Tu iroX^luo is equivalent to SLp.a. woXefiovvres i. 144, a.; and wSXei. is the 
 instrumental dativ6 denoting the staki with which they played. Cf. viii. 45, 4. 
 
Chap. 65.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 227 
 
 d?ioO(7i Kal Tols a-iifiacn Kal toTs xpij^acric dWovs iirkp ttjs iKelvuv iXevdepias 
 KtvSui'eiku', and again, tois eTol/JMS KivSweieiy, vi. 9. Latin^, periclitari aliquS 
 re. Of. Liv. , xxxviii. 25. i^a tow vo\4)t.ov. This seems a sort of 
 
 technical phraseology, if one might so express it, i. e., belonging to such 
 phrases a,s ^|w rou irpdyfMTos in the Rhetoric, iii. § 14, and frequently in 
 Demosthenes and the Orators, which seemed to have nothing to do with the war. 
 Thuoydides alludes, as Arn. says, to ii. 85, the mission of the squadron to 
 Crete which ought to have reinforced Phormion, the preliminary expeditions to 
 Sicily, the attaoii upon Melos, and perhaps to the expedition against Boeotia 
 which terminated in the defeat at Delium. KaroL ras i8£as i|>''^0Ti,|x£as 
 
 . — ' in prosecution of their private ambitious views.' liroXtrevjo-av ■ 
 
 they conducted their polity, or as Arn. tr., adopted unwise measures. 
 Ka9£<rTaTo pXdpr] — constituted itself a damage, i. e., were a positive damage. 
 
 (c.) aSupsTaros. Kriig. remarks that for dSapos, ddapoSdKrjTos is more 
 frequent in Attic Greek, Jelf, § 629. .i. eXevB^pics — indepen- 
 
 dently, i. e. uninfluenced by the popular clamour, Kriig. ; others, as Bl. and 
 Popp., compare 37, and tr. in such a way as comported with individual 
 liberty. i^YCTo — ^yi. Cf. 'Aith Kriig., Plat., Phcedrus, 94. E, 
 
 Slot TO (I'fi KT>i|jiEvos — while he made no attempt to acquire, such is the force of 
 "thepres. part. ; cf. ch. 62. o. ; this would be unnecessary perhaps to notice had 
 not Bl. tr. because he had not acquired. irpbs tjSovtIv — irpbs 
 
 op'yriv. These two stand correlatively, and mjisi,,be rendered alike — the first 
 is to please them, the second, to make them angry. For the first cf Trpbs riSovijv 
 \iyuv, Sophoc. i'feci. 93 1 . SX"" — having it in his power, by standing 
 
 upon the reputation in which he was held, even in some respects to contradict 
 them in a way to make them angry, i. e. he could afford to brave their anger, 
 because he knew they would relent or give in ; cf. the commencement of the 
 ch. I cannot persuade myself, with Bl., GoU., Kiiig., and T. K. A.'s editor, 
 to translate ' cum ird 'with heat.' "Why shCiuld Pericles have made it any 
 object to contradict them with heat and asperity? Is such conduct consistent 
 with what we know of the calmness of his character ? The above is I see nearly 
 Arn. 's view ; it maybe some slight corroboration that I had quite indepen- 
 dently arrived at the conclusion before consulting any commentator. 
 
 (/). KaTc'irXiio-o-ev eirl to t|>oPeto-6ai — beat down their confidence so far as to 
 create alarm. ' Quare Athene ejus terrorem timuisse dicuntur,' Cic. Brut. 0. 
 II. § 44, Popp. iytyviTO — it amounted to during his time, n. b. 
 
 imperfect. iirb follows a verbal noun, as it would a passive 
 
 verb. Cf. i. 130. a. auTol |j.aXXav k. t, X. — being more on a par 
 
 themselves with one another ; instead of airoi wpis eavrois — on apar among them- 
 selves. iTpttirovTO K. T. X. — betook themselves to permitting even 
 public affairs to go just as suited the whims of the multitude, Kriig. cf. for 
 trphi T]Sovriv, Soph. El. 1503 ; Prom. V. 261. to. irpaYnaTa — 
 public measures. The word is preceded by Kal because Thuc. implies that they 
 moulded these, as well as their speeches, in conformity with the curi'ent humour 
 of the people ; for hbihbvai, cf. h^i^lyvai t7)v Trl>\iv, iv. 66. c, and aiiroh rd 
 m-pdyp-aTa, v. 62. Bl. less rightly, I think, tr. they took to gratifying the people, 
 so as to give up to them the administration, &c. 
 
 (g.) TToXXa T|[j.apTitiflT| — many blunders were made, and more especially the 
 
3 28 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book ]I. 
 
 blunder of the Sicilian expedition. There is no valid objeotion to this way of 
 spealiing, as may be seen fr. Popp. quotations, a/iaprdfieva Ipya, iii. 67 ; r/ 
 e^afiapTOfiivT] irpd^i';, Plat. Protag. p. 357. e. ; why not then ttXovs Tjp.apjiid'q ? 
 ou toctoOtov k t. X. — not so tnuch an error of judgment in respect of the persons 
 against whom they went, as that those who sent them forth did not follow the 
 matter up by decreeing what was requisite for the departed armament. An 
 English writer would have balar.ced the sentence by some noun answering 
 afjidprrifia, but this unsymmetrical construction is introduced upon the principle 
 of variety so frequently noticed. Of. i. 38. With tois olxopiivois, cf. rHy 
 olxoii^iiav, said of the Persians who had gone upon the expedition to Greece, 
 JEsch. Per. v. i. Some difficulty has been felt about eiriYi.'yvcto-KoVTes, but I 
 believe the above to be the true meaning here from i. 132, p,^ iiriyv^ ; i. 70, rk 
 inrdpxovra (Tih^eiv koX iircypivvai /iTiSiv. The force of the prep, is less obvious in 
 other cases, iii. 57. Sia^oXiis — cabals, such as are recorded by 
 
 Andocides. Perhaps Thuo. particularly refers to tl;e intrigues which terminated 
 in the recall of Alcibiades. to, irepl ■ri\v irdXiv. K.rug. considers 
 
 that allusion is made to the factions which in Olymp. xcii. 1 broke out in the 
 army itself irpmrov. Not I think certainly for the first time since 
 
 the Pisistratidw, but Jirst began the internal troubles which subsequently reached 
 such a height. Cf. vi. 53. . 
 
 (h.) <r(|>aX^VTes irapao-KEvr). Cf. vi. 10, acfioKivTav i^ibxpeip Svudpiei, 
 Popp. TpCa 'iTr\. It is not clear what three years are intended. 
 
 Arn. understands the three years which elapsed from the arrival of Cyrus in 
 Asia Minor to the surrender of Athens to Lysander, B c. 407 — 4. Of this 
 Popp. says 'prorsus ferri non potest.' Kriig., in his chronological work, esti- 
 mates the time as included between the commencement of the seditions in the 
 city till the arrival of Cyrus at Sardis, i e. from the early part of B.o. 41 1 to 
 the spring of B.o. 408. To this Popp. objects that if rpia p.kv Irri drreTxov 
 were meant to be opposed to Kip(fi re HuTepov, these words would have been 
 written liarepov re or Si. He does not himself give any other explanation, but 
 seems to regard with favour Haack's conjecture, A^/ca for rpia, which is, he 
 thinks, slightly confirmed by Isocrat. Panath. § 57. BaciX^a's 
 
 iraiSC, Son of Darius Nothus, the son of Artaxerxes. irpo(ry€Vop.^vcp — 
 
 coming upon them in addition to all their other enemies. 
 
 (J.) £V <r<|)C(ri. Popp. well cf. iv tois SiKUffraU o6k i/iol toS' i<r<l>d\r!, Soph. 
 Ajax, V. 1 137 ; but as irepnivTeiv should be followed by an objective dative, 
 of. i. 43 d., ii. 54. 59, he supplies airaU from Siai^opds, which Kriig. considers 
 mehr als hart. Kriig. also directs attention to aiphiv without airGiv, reflected 
 back to the nearest subject, which is an Ionic usage, and refers to ii. 76. a. ; 
 iv. 8. a. 103. c. ; V. 14. a. lircpCo-o-cvirc. This verb denotes the 
 
 existence of a superfluity, and indicates that the spirit which the Athenians 
 showed in their difficulties, and their protracted resistance, was so much over 
 and above what Pericles had calculated upon, and consequently a proof that 
 liis calculation was a sound one, and would have been verified had they not run 
 counter to his policy. d(j>' c5v ovrbs irpo^'yvw — from the resources 
 
 ef which from his own perspicacity he had foreknowledge. Arn. explains 
 airbs by his own mere ability, before experience proved it to the world. On 
 IIcpiKXct, cf. Jelf, § 597. 
 
Chap. 67. J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 229 
 
 Chapter LXVI. — ZaKuvBov. The name of the island was derived, ac- 
 cording to Pausanias (viii. 24. 2), from Zaoynthus, son of Dardanus, an 
 Arcadian chief. According to a very ancient tradition, the Zacynthians, in 
 conjunction with the Eutuli of Ardea, founded Saguntum, in Spain. [Liv. 
 xxi. 7.] It wag here that Deniaratus tooli refuge from the persecution of his 
 eueniieg. Herod, vi. 70. Not long before the Peloponnesian war it was reduced 
 by Tdluiides, the Athenian general, and from this time became dependent on 
 Athens. (Diod. Sic. xi. 84.) Cf Thuc. vii. 57. Its modern name is Zante. 
 vaiittp)(os. This office at Sparta lasted for one year. (Cf. ad u. Ixxx., where 
 we find it continued to him for another year.) Xen. Hell. ii. i, 7. 01) vb)i,os 
 auro'S Sis Tbv airov vavapxeiv. (Manso. Sparta, ii. p. 382. P.) 
 |DV6X<6pow. Cf. ad lix. (b.) 
 
 Chapter LXVII. — (a.) 'Apia-Tii^. Cf ad i. 60. 'Av^jpio-Tos Kal 
 
 NiKoXaos. Aneristus, son of Sperthias, and Nicolaus, son of Bulis, the 
 Spartans who volunteered to go to Susa to atone for the murder of the Persian 
 heralds. Herod, vii. 134 — 8. Thirlwall, iii. p. 163, n. ' The romantic and 
 tragical coincidence' of these persons being the sons of the envoys whose lives 
 were spared by Xerxes ceases, Mr. Grole says, when we remember that the 
 functions of herald at Spai-ta were the privilege of »■ particular gens: every 
 herald was ex officio the son of a herald. Tliese two, therefore, being the sons 
 of men who had been to Susa Ijefore, had probably talked a great deal about 
 it, and had derived great glory from the unaccepted offer of their lives in 
 atoaement, would be the men whom the Spartans would most naturally fix 
 upon, in preference to any others, to fulfil this dangerous mission : Grote, vi. 
 p. 245, note, who also thinks that Aneristus had distinguished himself in the 
 capture of the fishermen on the coast of Peloponnesus by the Lacedaemonians. 
 'ApYEtos ISC^ IIoXXis. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 163. ' PoUis had no commission 
 from his own city, but probably represented the wishes of a> party :' Argos, as 
 a state, being favourably disposed towards Athens, v. Schol. Kor the pri- 
 vateering of the Lacedaemonians, cf. Thuc. v. 115. Xen. Hell. v. i. 29. 
 MS Pao-iXea. Darius Nothus, Gottleber says : but Darius Nothus did not 
 come to the throne till n. c. 424. It was Artaxerxes Longimanus, whose 
 death Thuc. records in the Archontate of Stratocles, iv. 50. Cf. Wess. ad 
 Diod. Sic. xii. 64. Si.TdXKt|V. Cf. ad c. xxix. 
 
 t'i irms iTiC<raa,v. Cf. i. 58, if possible persuade, hence el ras, with the opta- 
 tive, means to ' try to do something,' like the epic ei; kc, o&e. Jelf, § 877, 
 obs. 5. 81 sKtCvov iropeiiBfjvai' i.e., they applied to him for a 
 
 safe escort to the banks of the Hellespont. Their main object (■^Trep IhpixrivTo) 
 being to get to Persia. Of. 0. vii. a. Pharnaoes was satrap of Dascylitis. Cf. 
 i. 129, a. 
 
 (ft.) iropttTuxiSvTes — ' iioTio happened to he resident at the court of Sitalces.' 
 •ri[V Ike^vou irdXiv rb |x^pos. Sadocus, having been admitted to the rights of 
 Athenian citizenship, would be supposed to participate in any injury done to 
 the state of which he now formed an integral part ; upon the principle that if 
 one member sufifer, all the members suffer with it. By the exaggeration of 
 his ridicule Aristophanes testifies to the fact of an Athenomania, as Thirlwall 
 calls it (iii. p. 161, n.), on the part of Sitalces and his son Sadocus, the new- 
 
330 NOTES ON THUCYOIDES. [Book II. 
 
 made citizen, v. Acharn. J41, sq. This seizure, tlierefore, of Aristeus and 
 his companions was, as Grote observes, ' a testimony of zeal in his new cha- 
 racter of Athenian citizen ;' and this interpretation is fully home out by Aris- 
 tophanes' words, KoX rbv warep iivTLpb'Kei p<yr}Siw ttj irdrpa, Ach. 147. It has 
 been made a question whether t6 iiipos means 'so far as in them lay,' or 
 whether it refers to irbXi-v, and implies a partial participation^ by Sadocus in 
 Athenian citizenship. Popp. seems to prefer the latter, and tr. earn nrbem 
 quce ipsius pro raid parte esset. So too GoU. urbem quce ipsins ex parte sit, 
 Haack, Avn. and Kriig. adopt the former view, and certainly the ordinary 
 usage of jxipos appears to be in their favour. Arn. e. g. quotes i. 74 and 127. 
 We may add Soph. (Ed. Tyr. TrdvTuv ^/j^/tous, ttXtji' iicroi' rd abv fiipos, v. 1509; 
 CEd. Col. ovK &v Jjv, rb aov pt-ipos, v. 1368, and similiter Antig. v. 1049, 
 Nor is the idiom confined to poetry. Plato has, oi jraJSes rb abv fi^pos, H ti 
 &y Ti^xwi", toOto Trpd^ovcn. Criton, § 45. It certainly does not seem that the 
 other interpretation is so well supported by usage ; or indeed by the sense, for 
 why qualify his citizenship at a moment when he was most strenuously 
 asserting it ? 
 
 (c. ) iTEpauoo-civ — sc. cavTois used here intransitively, = Tepautffeadai. L. and 
 S. Thomas M. remarks it as a peculiarity of Thucydides. K. from Duker. Cf. 
 'trajicere.' |vX\a)i.pdvEi, at Bisanthe. on the Hellespont. Herod, vii. 737. 
 
 {d.) 4»dpa77as. P. says that the use of the plural shows that the specific 
 papadpop (Wachsra. Ant. ii. i. p. ■254) is not intended. Cf. Arist. Nub. i4iio; 
 Plat. Gorg. 516 E. ; Sch. Arist. PI. 431 ; Thuc. i. 134: Paus. Mess. iv. xviii. 
 3. The pdpadpov at Sparta was called Kaiddas or KedSas. v. Paus. I. c. for 
 the story of Aristomenes. Cf. Buttm. Lex. s. v. KTiTioecraa. Harpocration 
 s. V. pdpadpoii, and &pvyixa. Arist. Plut. 431 ; Fischer's note. Hence the 
 Athenian executioner was called 6 ^Trt ri^ dpi!iypLaTi. rots avTots 
 
 d|i.vvEo-6ai — ' as a reprisal for the captured seamen slain by the Lacedsemo- 
 nians.' Grote, vi. p. 245. Cf. ad i. 42 (a.) Soph. Ant. 643: — 
 
 cos Kal rhv ^x^P^^ dvTap.6i'U}VTat KaKOis. 
 
 In lib. i. 30, and iii. 32, we filnd similar instances of the killing prisoners of 
 war. irdvTas S^ — all without exception. Cf. i. i, b. 
 
 (c.) Tois p.T|Si |ic6' ET^piov, lit. those neither with one nor the other; 'the 
 neutrals,' c. Ixii. i, Ixii. 2 ; VI. xliv. d. Grote (vi. 243) says, ' these persons 
 ■were probably slain as the best way of getting rid of them and thus suppressivg 
 evidence — since to dismiss them, or sell them as slaves, would have given pub- 
 licity to a piratical capture, and provoked the neutral towns.' 
 
 Chapter LXVIII. — (a.) 'AjjiTrpaKitirai. Ambracia was an important city 
 on the north of the Ambraciot gulf, or lagoon, which took its name from the 
 city. Its legendary founder was Ambrax, whom the tradition represented as 
 son of Thesprotus ; but it was made a Greek city by a colony of Corinthians 
 who settled herein the time of Cypselus; c. B.C. 635 : Gorgus, a son or brother of 
 Cypselus being the Kriirr^s. It soon became a flourishing city, and the chief 
 of the Corinthian colonies in these parts, furnishing seven ships in the war 
 against Xerxes [Herod, viii. 45], and twenty-seven to Corinth in their war with 
 Corcyra, B.C. 432, Thuc. i. 46. Its territory, watered by the Araothus, on 
 
Chap. 68.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 23] 
 
 the east bank of which the city stood, extended along the coast for 120 stadia. 
 The valley of the Aracthus was extremely fertile, producing excellent corn 
 in abundance. As a Corinthian colony, it sided of course with the Lacedemo- 
 nians. It became in after times the capital of Pyrrhus, king of Epirus. v. 
 Smith, 6eog. Diet. s. v. It is now called Arta. Pappdpoiv. The 
 
 earliest inhabitants of this province, according to Hecataaus of Miletus, and 
 Aristotle (as quoted by Strabo, vii. p. 321), were the barbarous Leleges, 
 Curetes, and Teleboee, who occupied several other parts of Greece before the 
 Pelasgi, avao-Trjo-avTes — ' quum excivissent, ad expeditionem 
 
 evooassent.' Cf. iii. 7, iv. 77, 80. P. ' aufbieten zum feldzuge.' K. The 
 ' solicitare' of Caes. B. G. pass. "Ap^os rh ' A(i(|>iXoxi.Kov. The 
 
 accounts differ as to the founder of this city, Thuoyd. representing it to have 
 been founded by Amphilochus, son of Amphiaraus, on his return from Troy, in 
 consequence of the discontent he felt at the state of affairs in Argos, owing, 
 says the Scholiast (ad o. cii.), to the murder of his mother Eriphyle, by Alc- 
 mieon, son of Amphiaraus. By others Amphilochus is called the son of 
 Alcniaeon, and therefore grandson of Amphiaraus. Ephorus, quoted by 
 Strabo (vii. p. 326 ; of Apollod. iii. 7 ; Soymn. Cb. 454), , says it was founded 
 by Alcmffion, who called it after the name of his brother, whom the legend, 
 quoted by Thucyd. ii. 102, represented as having colonized the Echinades, islands 
 at the mouth of the Achelous. (v. Cramer, ii. p. 10.) The city lay on the 
 river Inachus, now Ariadha, which tradition represented to be identical with 
 the river of the same name, near Argos, in Peloponnese. [See the fragment of 
 the Inachas of Sophocles, quoted in the Oxford Strabo, vol. i. p. 391.] It 
 was twenty-two miles from .-imbracia (Livy, xxxviii. 10, or 180 stadia; Polyb. 
 xxii. 13). The ruins of an ancient city, the walls of which were about a mile in 
 circumference, are still visible at the modern village of Neokbori. v. Leake's 
 N. Greece, quoted in Smith's Diet. Geog. s. v., and Thuc. iii. 105. The expedi- 
 tion of Phormio here alluded to, probably took place B.C. 432. ' Phormio 
 was sent to Chalcidice about October or November of that year (i. 64), 
 and the expedition against Argos probably occurred between that event and 
 the naval conflict of Corcyrffians and Athenians against the Corinthians, with 
 their allies, Ambraciots included, which conflict had happened in the preceding 
 spring.' Grote, vi. p. 162. KaTao-Tao-ci — the existing state of 
 
 tliinijs — the constitution. 4jp|oT0 irpwrov. Cf. xxxvi. (a.) Hp^oixaL 
 
 6^ irpuiTOV iv. 87. dp^al irpujTOLj Xen. Cyr. i. 5. 6. 
 
 (6.) ovK apEo-Ka|J.£V05. Cf. ad i. 35, a. ' dissaiis/ed,' followed by the dative, 
 and lib. viii. 84, d. 
 
 (c.) r)XX.t]v£o-8t]<rav. Lobeck's correction for eW^qvlaBriaav without the 
 augment, p. 380. The language they used before was a more Pelasgio 
 dialect : the original dialect as spoken in Argos and Southern Greece after the 
 Trojan war (to. TpaiKti ; so tIl M.tjdiKd, cf. i. 3). But see the note on i. 3 (d.) 
 yXunrirav. The accusative ' of equivalent notion.' Jelf, § 548, c. 579. '• 
 
 (d.) irpoo-KaX4(ravT€s SJ- ivapraTiSoTov. P. Kal K. says couples diSdacni' 
 and alpoSffL. But of iii. 55, vi. 64. ouf'i'Kap.^voi) Si. Then I say upon the 
 
 arrival of Phormion, 5e in apodosi. (lerol SJ toOto, and it was In 
 
 consequence of this, 
 
 (e.) ^xSpov Is. Cf. Herod, v. 81. ri ix^p-q 4s ' A.drjmlovs, Cf. vi. 65. 
 
232 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Booz II. 
 
 Chapter LXIX. — op|i,ii)jiEvos — 'taking v/p hii station — making Ma head 
 quarters.'' Cf. ad i. 64 b; Diod. xii. 47. ^KirXeiv. c. xciii. d. 
 
 Kpio-aCoD KcSXirOD. Properly the inner sea from the promontories of Bhium 
 and Antirrhiuia to the Isthmus of Corinth, but see chap. Ixxxvi. 
 ap-yupoXo-ywo-t. Cf. iii. 19; iv. 50, 'to collect the tribute, or raise money* 
 These sliius were called vavs dpyupSKoyoi. So Saff/ioyioyetv, Isocr. iv. 132. 
 rb Xt)o-tiki5v. Grote vi. p. 243. 'Though the Peloponnesians were too in- 
 ferior in maritime force to undertake formal war at sea against Athens, their 
 single privateers, especially the Megarian privateers from the harbour of Nissea, 
 were active in iujuring her commerce.' Cf. Thuc. v. 115 ; Xen. Bell, v. i. 29. 
 $a(HjXi8os. A maritime town of Lycia, on the Pamphylian Gulf. (Strabo 
 xiv. p. 667.) It was a Dorian colony (Herod, ii. 178), situated on a headland, 
 and conspicuous to those sailing from Cilicia to Rhodes. It possessed three 
 harbours, and was an independent state. [Cf. Thuo. viii. 88. 9 : Polyb. xxx. 
 9 ] Becoming in later times a haunt of pirates, it was attacked and taken by 
 Servilius Isauricus. Cf. Liv. xxxvii. 23. The light sailing vessels called 
 * phaseli' were said to have been invented here ; hence the coins of the town 
 bear an image of such a boat. It is now called Tekrova. v. Smith's Geog. 
 Diet. s.v. Tijs 6K6i96V 'fjircCpov — i.e. .^gypt, especially. Cf. viii. 
 
 35. P- 
 
 Chaptee LXX. — (a.) oiSkv iioLXXov airavCo-rao-av — 'failed in their object 
 of making the Athenians raise the siege.' Herod, vi. 133; ix. 86. The death 
 of Aristeas also deprived them of their last hope. avTo6i — (opposed 
 
 to the former part of the sentence, which refers to what was done in Pelopon- 
 nese), ' in Potidsea.' ffit\ implies as usual that 'matters had come 
 
 to such a pitch.' Ppuircus irepl. avaYKoCas — 'with regard to the 
 
 distrcs for food,' i.e. what their extremity had forced them to eat; 'in Bezug 
 auf Diuge welche die Noth zu geniessen zwang,' K. cf. i. 6), b. 84, c. Bl. ex- 
 plains it ' the supply of necessary food ;' but then ^pdi/iara would he used, not 
 ^pdai^. Compare avajKotpayia, ' the compulsory diet of the Athletes,' Arisfc. 
 Pol. viii. 4. 9, and the comic word dcaYrfffiTos, ' the Parasite who eats anything 
 he can get.' Cf. toO di/ajKaioTdTov i)\fiovs, i . 90, and see note there. 
 dXXifiXuv — i.e. the dead bodies of their comrades (reciprocals and reflexives are 
 constantly interchanged). Cf. Herod, iii. 25, AWriXocpayiii. [Arist. Zf . 4 . viii. 
 3. 17.] Bl, forgetting the siege of Samaria, says that this is the first instance 
 on record of the eating of human flesh, viz., the expedition of Cambyses into 
 iEthiiipia. IveuovTO. v. Jelf, § 537, followed by the partitive genitive. 
 o^Tu Sr^. Cf. i. 131. Xd'yovs 'n-poo-cf)^pouo'L. Cf. iii. J09. vpoc^^pei 
 
 \iiyov irepl airovBC^v Kal ivax^^P'^ffeus Atifioad^vet, i. 57. 
 
 (6.) \ci|j.(pivu — 'bleak, cold, inclement.' Cf. Grote's note, vi. p. 257. The 
 sufferings of the Athenians may be understood from the preparations made by 
 the Laoddsemonians for their blockade of Platsea, c. 78. 8i.<rx'Xia 
 
 TjiXavro. Isocr. irepl 'Avrid. xv. 113, says the siege cost 2400 talents. 
 Diolorus says (xii. 46) that before the departure of Agnon (v. ». Iviii.) more 
 than 1000 talents had been expended. Thucyd., iii. 17, says each hoplite 
 recivjJ two drachmse a day ; one for himself and one for his servant. The 
 
Chap. 7 I.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. Q,^^ 
 
 assailant force had never been less than 3000 hoplites during the entire two 
 years of the siege ; and for a portion of the time considerably greater. 
 Is iroXiopKCav. The absence of the article makes it equivalent to x/'W'"'* 
 iroKiopKTiTLKd, without specifying the locality, P. t,vv evl IjiaTCu. 
 
 Cuiu singulis vestimentis. (Liv. iv. 10, of the siege of Ardea.) For similar 
 instances see Paus. ix. 1 . g ; App. i. 400 ; Polyssn. vii. 48. As the women 
 always wore two garments (Herod, ii. 36), it was equivalent to allowing them 
 one suit apiece, B. 
 
 (c.) lirgTitto-avTO. ' Were displeased at the indulgence shown, since a little 
 additional patience would have constrained the city to surrender at discretion 
 (■§ i^oi\ovTo) : in which case the expense would have been partly made good by 
 selling the prisoners as slaves, and Athenian vengeance probably gratified by 
 putting the warriors to death.' We find, however, that Xenophon was ap- 
 pointed to command in Chalcidice the next year, iii. 17. v. Grote, vi. p. ■247. 
 IitoCkoiis. Diod. xii. 46, eh x'Xioi's oU'fiTopas i^^ire/j.^pav Kal ttjc re irbXiv Kal 
 t}]v xf^pf^f KaTCKkripo'uxyiffa.v. It was to convey these settlers that the expe- 
 dition related c. 79 was fitted out. th StvTepov ?tos. In these 
 phrases Thuc. generally omits the article. 
 
 Chapteb LXXI.- — (a.) oiK itri^aXov. For fear of the plague, and from 
 the strong desire of the Thebans to be revenged on Platsea. Ka6Co-as. 
 
 Cf. vi. 66, and iv. 93, vii. 82 ; Eur. Heracl. 664. It is also used transitively 
 in Homer, Plato, and Aristophanes. The penultima is common. Of. ixpura, 
 Buttm. Cat., s. v. 
 
 (6 ) ' Apx.'Sa|j.£. See Grote, vi. p. •248, for an excellent translation of the 
 speeches in this and the following chap. IXsvBepMo-as aird. v. 
 
 Jelf, § 631. obs. 3. |iivdpao-6ai. rbv kCvSuvov. This verb is 
 
 generally construed with the genitive. Cf. iv. 10, v. 28 ; Eurip. Orest. 757 ; 
 jEsch. Pr. V. 652. ^X6vB€p£(j). Diod. xi. 29, mentions an 071!;;' 
 
 iXevdipios to be instituted at Plataea. (Cf. Paus. ix. -i. 5.) These solemnities 
 were to be celebrated every fifth year, the victors being rewarded with chaplets. 
 [ayiiv yvjxvLKbs STe<j>avlT7ji, Strab. ix. p. 266.] Delegates [wpd^ovXoi Kal 
 Beapot] were to assemble from all the Greek States at Plataea every year to cele- 
 brate the Eleutheria. Cf. Thirlwall, ii. p. 253, &o. ; Paus. ix. 2. 4. This 
 annual solemnity continued to be observed till the time of Plutarch {v. Arist. 
 xxi. ; cf. Thuoyd. iii. 58), and the image of Zeus Eleutherius was still standing 
 in the time of Pausanias. Cf. Harpocration, p. 143. oireSfBou. 
 
 Inasmuch as the city had been held by the Persians, and the land around in 
 the occupation of the confederate army. Note the imperfect — he was for 
 granting, he proposed to grant — as contrasted with ^Soffai', ibiKaiaaev. 
 OTpoTeSo-tti supply ira^e, or some similar verb, P. Plut. Arist. xxi. ; 
 XWaraeis atriXous Kal iepois cupetaSai Tijj 8e(}. Ifl SovXeia. Sed 
 
 tanturo iirl d/xiiyg xal Ti/iw/)i?, P. A 8^ y.i\. Cf n. ad c. v. 
 
 (c.) dpsTfjs Kal irpo9u|j,Cas. Cf. Herod, viii. 1, virb Si dpeTTJs re Kal irpo- 
 8vp.lai nXaroi^es iireipoi. rrjs vavTLKrjs iovres avvewX-fipovv To'iai. ' Ad-nvaioiffi rhi 
 „ias. Tois opKtous. Diod. xi. 29, gives the formula of the bath 
 
 taken by the confederate troops at the Isthmus before marching northwards 
 
^34 NOTES OSr THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Cf. Lycurgr. c. Leocrat. p. 149; Plut. Milt. Cf. ad i. 71. (d.) 
 
 'WP'o^s — i, e. Juno reXda. Minerva 'Apeta, P., from Paus. ix. 2. 5 ; iv. 
 
 I [so Dii Patrii Indigetes.] Soph. Ant. 185. Bothe. 
 
 Chapter LXXII. — (a.) inroXoP<iv — 'having cut them short in their speech, 
 when they wished to add much more,' Ducaa. Gottl. quotes many passages, 
 
 (5.) |iii8i |ic8' mpav. Cf. Ixxii. e. Grote eonsiders that the Lacedsemo- 
 nians had previously sent a summons to the Flatseans to remain neutral. (Cf. 
 lib. iii. 68.) Vol. vi. p. 250. t4 Trpirepov, but when this took place, Thucydides 
 has not informed us. Iirl iroX4p.cp. As irl SovXeLij, in c. Ixxi. 
 
 ToLSe T|jj.iv ctp^o-KfiL — ' with this we will he satisfied.' So Staph, and Huds. and 
 Duk., but GoUer P. and K. prefer apuiaei,. 
 
 (c.) er(|>CcrLV oiK lirtTpeVwo-iv — 'would not permit them to carry out their 
 neutrality.' SvopKoi Svtcs k. t.X. ivopKoi = h<TTovioi., P. The 
 
 expression is rather involved. IpopKoi. ought to agree with oi Gvi/Saioi, whereas 
 it is the Platceans who, by an oath of neutrality, would be bound to admit the 
 Thebans who might then make a fresh attempt to seize on their city. 
 dpC8)J.a> — by tale. 8us fl.v 6 iriXeiios ^. Cf. .^sch. Ag. J43.1:, fus 
 
 d.v aWrj TTvp iir' i(Txapas ip^ijs Atyt<r6os. ^ws is used with the conjunctive when 
 a present action is conceived as possibly continuing during another action, over 
 an indefinite space of time. In this construction it always takes &v. 'As 
 long as the war lasts, however long that may ie,' Jelf, § 847. 3. 
 
 (d.) irttpaKaTafl^KTiv. 'In the interim we will hold it in trust, keep it in 
 cultivation, and pay you such an allowance as shall suffice for your wants,' 
 Grote. Even Mr. Grote admits that the offer of the Spartans was fair and 
 tempting; and the Athenians, had they been perfectly generous allies, might 
 well have granted their consent to the Platsans' accepting it, for the forces of 
 PlatiEa counted for little as a portion of the aggregate strength of Athens, 
 nor could the Athenians possibly protect it against the superior land 
 force of their enemies. In fact, they never even tried throughout the whole 
 course of the long subsequent blockade, Grote, vi. p. 251. 
 
 Chaptek LXXIII. — (b.) Iv als sIkos ^v KO|j.iir6Tjvai. Allowing them a 
 fair and reasonable time for going to Athens and returning. 
 
 (c.) (V Tw TrpoToii. During ninety-three years, which the alliance had 
 lasted. Cf. iii. 68. irpiis tmv opKuv — ' They adjure you, by the 
 
 baths whivh your fathers swore.' liri(rKT|irTovo'i. Cf. iii. 69. d. — 
 
 ' obtestantur.' 
 
 Chapter LXXIV.— (a.) el Sst. ' Tj so it must he.' The present is used 
 because the Plataeahs well knew what musthi the immediate consequence of 
 their rejection of the offer of Arcliidamua, not the opt., which would imply 
 ' if need should be.' tuv l-yxupfuV. Cf Ixxi. d. iiri/iaprvpta, 
 
 obtestation, ' a solemn appeal to the Gods,' an unusual word. Cf. Dio. Cass. 
 914, 61, Bl. SwCo'Top^s lo-Te. Either indicative or imperative. 
 
 ' Ye are, or be ye my witnesses.' Cf. Soph. Philoct. 1292; Ant. f,^i ; Eurip, 
 Supp. 1 1 74. K. prefers the indie, sense. to |uvup.oTov — 'the 
 
 oath of confederacy' = 71 ^vv(,ipi,oaia. P. ' Beschwomer bund,' K. 
 
Chap, 75.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2,^^ 
 
 tv|i£VT) kvayavl<ra.<r9ai—' a favourable field to fight in.' Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 
 6, 12 ; Herod, yi. 102. In the sense of ' gluckbringend,' as K. translates it, 
 Of. Eurip. Pkcen, 938, of. note on ivairodvfinKuv, iii. 104, b. 
 |\)-VVvw|ioves S^ £oT6. From the primary meaning of this word ' fellow feeling,' 
 and hence ' pardon,' the transition is simple to ' indulgence or favour.' It is 
 here equivalent to ' favourably hear our prayers, and grant that ..." This 
 seems to be more in accordance with the usual meaning of the word than Mr. 
 Grote's translation, ' be consenting parties ;' or Dr. Arnold's explanation, 
 ' assent to the aggressors being punished.' K. explains it by gewahrt, ' vouch- 
 safe.' The infinitive follows as the object of the verb, marking also more clearly 
 the notion of the effect, v. Je'f, § 664, 3. aSiKCas. Verbs of requital, 
 
 revenge, &c., take a genitive of that whence the desire of requital or revenge 
 arises. Jelf, § 500. For the attraction in the dative iwdpxoua^i, in conse- 
 quence of the ^ii> in ^uyyvdifi.oi/es, where we should expect inrdpxovTas, see 
 Jelf, § 674. 'TrpoT^poi.s — the praedicate, who were the aggressors. K. 
 
 Tots eiri(j)^povo-i vo[J.C)>.us. ' Those who are aiming to inflict penalty righte- 
 ously.' Grote. ' Qui ultionem petant, utfasest. ' P. 
 
 Chapter LXXV. — (a.) Too-aOTa eiriBeidcras. 'Having made this 
 solemn appeal to the Gods,' i. c. having concluded the iiri/iapTvpla of the pre- 
 ceding chapter. Cf. viii. u. 5.S, b., where, in the case of the return of Alci- 
 biades, Thucydides speaks of the Eumolpidss and Ceryces as ii.apTvpoiJ.it/uv 
 Kal liriBeiatovTwv ■ and vii. 75, in the disastrous retreat from Sicily; ovk dveu 
 iirideLaffixCiv d.iroXetTrdp.evoi. Cf. Blomf. jEsch. Cho. 843 ; Buttm. Lex. s. v. 
 daddfTuV — iirided^eiv is the more usual form in this sense. Ka6i(rTTj 
 
 Is irdXciiov. Cf. ad c. i., '. a. irepieo-Tavpuo-ev — ' invested the city 
 
 with a palisade.' Tliirlw. iii. p. 145. The forming regular lines of circum- 
 vaUatiou is expressed by ■n-epireix^^ii.v u. inf. c. 78. toIs Se'vSpeo-iv — 
 
 i. e. the fruit trees cut down in laying waste the land. (Cf. Grote, vi. p. 2^^.) 
 |v\a is the heavy timber obtained from the forests of Cithseron. Cf. iv. 69, 
 for the same distinction. Sivdpos it may be observed is the Ionic and poetic 
 form. 'dKoi|/ov' N.B. change of subject from the general to his soldiers. K. 
 Xufia Sx.""""' *-'^- Herod, i. 162, of Harpagus in Asia Minor, x'^l^ara xfi^ 
 TTpbs TO, Tclx^a iiripdee.. Arrian, JS. A. i. xviii. Cf. Jerem. vi. 6. 'Hew ye 
 down trees and cast a mount against Jerusalem.' So Joab 2. Sam. xx. 
 15, and Sennacherib, 2 Kings, xix. 32 ; for the construction, see >Telf, § 571. 
 T«|iVovT«s £K. Like the analogous phrases Kadi^eiv is, &c., ' felling the wood 
 on the mountain, and fetching it thence.' 
 
 (6.) ToB KiSaipuvos. The summit of Cithaeron is still crowned with 
 forests of fir ; hence its modern name of Blatea. Eurip. Phcen. 809, 
 S ^a.di(i)y irerdXcov iroXud-qpiira.TOV vdiros . . . 'K.idaLpthv, 
 (|>op)j,i]Sav — ' like basket or wattled work.' (Cf. iv. 48, of the bodies of the 
 Corcyrsans, where the lower tier was placed lengthways, and the others 
 piled across them.) Thirlwall says, ' It was piled up with earth and rubbish, 
 wood and stones, and was guarded on either side by a strong lattice-work 
 of forest timber, the growth of Cithasron.' (iii. p. 145.) ' Cross palings 
 of wood were carried on each side of it, in parallel lines at right angles 
 to the town wall, for the pQrpds^ of kijepitig the loose mass of materials be- 
 
236 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [^00= II- 
 
 tween them together.' Grote, p. 253. [Cf. Herod, viii. Ji, the description of 
 the wall at the Isthmus.] 'Kreuzweis.' K. aviiTeiv — liJceli/ to 
 
 be effective. Infra, c. ;6. a. Kar* avairavXas — ' in relief parties.' Cf. iv. 
 
 II, ivaTrauovTss. The first meaning is 'rest.' T. Soph. Phil. 878; cf. Herod, i. 
 i8r. 01 ^ivayoi^ ^^vojv (TTpaTiapxot. J^en. Hell. iv. 2, 19; v. -2, 
 
 7 ; De Rep. Lac. xiii. 4. The Lacedaemonians who commanded the contingents 
 of the allies, v. Thirlwall, u. s. The generals whom the allies sent with their 
 troops were subordinate to these Spartan ^evayol ; though they attended the 
 council of war, as representatives of their respective countries, v. Smith, Diet. 
 Ant. s. V. ; and cf. Thuo. v. 54. Arnold compares the 'Prsefecti Sociorum' 
 in the Roman armies ; twelve of whom were appointed by the consuls. Lobeck 
 remarks that the Doric dialect is retained in words of a military or musical 
 character ; as, oipay6s, xopo-y^^t \oxay6s' ad Pkryn. p. 430. 
 
 (c.) IvXivov T€t)^os — ' a superstructure of brick, secured in a fi'ameworh of 
 timber, and shielded from fiery missiles by a curtain of raw hides and skins.' 
 Thirlwall, iii. p. 145. Grote supposes it to have been supported by brickwork 
 behind, p. 2.S4. |iiv8€(rnos. ' Bindemittel.' P. ' Emfassung.* K. 
 
 acted as a binding . Arrian, £'. .4 . i. ]8. S^ppcis Kal8u|>6^pas — 'hidesand 
 
 dressed shins.' Cf. Cses. £. 0. ii. 9, sq., the account of the siege of Marseilles, 
 where Cfesar describes a wall very similar in construction to the one mentioned 
 here. CiUciais the word used by Livj' (xxxviii. 7) for these skins. Csesaruses 
 Coria or Oentones, 1. c. Cf Arrian, u.s. who couies this passage very closely. 
 
 (d.) irvp(|>(!pois olo-Tots. The 'malleoli' of the Romans (v. Festus, p. 135, 
 ed. Mull. Nonius, p. 556). Cf. Liv. xlii. 64. ' Faces teedanique et malleolos 
 stuppEe inlitos pice parari jubet.' Cses. B. G. ii. 11. 'Gupas taedS et pice 
 refertas incendunt : eas de muro in musculum devolvunt.' 
 SieXtJvres tS\i reCxovs' Any verb whose operation extends only to part of the 
 objeols signified by the objective substantive, may be followed by a partitive 
 genitive, so ttjs 7^? .^refiov. Thuc. i. 30 ; and again SteXuj' reixov^, v. 3. 
 ^vyKa\^(TavTa.s ruiv oirXtTwv. Xen. An. iv. I, 26. Jelf, § 533, 3. 
 ■g irpoa-iTrnrTi to xup.a — ' where the mound abutted on the wall, they made an 
 aperture and conveyed away the earth, &c., inwards.' Cf. Liv. u. s. 
 
 Chaptbk LXXVI. — (a.) Iv rapo-ots KaXd|iov iriiXov evcCXXovrcs — ' rolling 
 stiff clay inwattled reeds,' Grote. rapaol are crates or frames of basket-work. 
 Herodotus mentions the use of these rapaol Ka\dp,av, in the building of the 
 wall of Babylon (i. 179. u. v. Bahr's note. Cf. Ar. Nub. 226.) 
 KaXd|j.ov. Sing, for plur. as Kepd/xov, c. iv. eveCXXovTts^impri- 
 
 mentes, infercientes, P. SiaxEopLcvov. The neuter of the participle 
 
 is used, K. says, to comprise the notion of rapaol and irrjKbt, or it may refer to 
 %ffl/ia understood. toOto i-niuyfiv. Cf. v. 46. 63 ; vii. 33, for 
 
 similar uses of the accusative instead of gen. after this verb. Jelf, § 642. 
 a. b. {nrdvonov — ' a mine,' Cuniculus. Cf. Liv. xxxviii. 7, 
 
 ' Cuniculum oocultum, vineis ante contecto loco, agere instituit: etaliquamdiu 
 non solum sub terra fodientes, sed egerentes etiam humum, fefellere hostem,' 
 Cses. B. G. iii. 21, ' Cuniculis ad aggerem actis ;' vii. 22, 'Aggereni cunicuha 
 subtrahebant.' $vVTeK|Jii)pd|ievoi — ' calculating both the distance 
 
 and direction, so as to bring the vtine right under the enemy's mownd.' The 
 
Chap. 76.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 237 
 
 ^vv, as K. says, implies ' the result of many calculations.' iirb to 
 
 )(^ooiia. K. refers rather to opi^avres than (vvTeKiM-qpdfiepoi. \ovs. 
 
 Humus aggeata, x'iJA'a agger., P. . i^o-o-ov dv^reiv. Their labour 
 
 did not progress as they knew it ought to have done from the quantity of 
 material heaped on the mound. Avireiv is trans, to forward the work, ' foj-dern,' 
 K. as above, d ti dWo aviire^v fi^Woi, tt°i'VOVTos — 'constantly 
 
 settling down.' 
 
 (b.) TO KaTcL TO X'^H'"' — ' directly in front of the mound, over against.' 
 ToB ppaxeos TeCxoi'S. From the low, i.e. the original wall. Cf. lib. vii. 29. 
 b. of the wall of Mycalessus, as rb jxiya Te?xos is the part they had added 
 to t4 y-iya oiKoSSfiiiiia. |xi)V0Ci,8^S. ' They built a new portion of 
 
 wall in the interior, in the shape of a crescent taking its start from the old 
 town wall on each side of the mound,' Grote, vi. p. 255. Most of the English 
 commentators, and Dr. Thii-lwall among them, infer that it follows that the 
 walls of Plataea were straight, but surely a semicircle could be described on the 
 arc of a circle. 
 
 (c.) Iv d)i<|>i.piSXu — ' he exposed to a crossfire.' Cf. iv. 32. 
 )i,d\Xov. ' More than when only one wall existed,' K. KaTo. to 
 
 ^u|i,a — ' along the mound,' i. e. up the inclined plane. eirl f.i'ia, — 
 
 ' greatly, violently. ' It is perhaps better to translate it thus simply, with G rote, 
 than couple it with toO jney. oIk. as Dr. Arnold does, who translates ' as much 
 as a great part of the raised wall.' The instances which he quotes from ii. 97, 
 and iv. 100, are not exactly parallel. We might add iirl jxeylt, 5vvd/j.eii}S, i. 48. 
 b. Tov ney. oIk. had better be simply taken as the genitive of direction. 
 clv^kXcov. B^tant explains ' sursmn attollendo convellere,' and L. and S. 'to 
 break short off,' K. thinks it cannot imply more than breaking their force. 
 Cf. vii. 25. d. ; App. Mith. 74 ; Dio. L'a^s. 66. 4. So GoU. 'avertebant non 
 frangebant.' Sokovis (le^aXas opTyjo-avTts k. t. \. ' They prepared 
 
 heavy wooden beams on the wall, each attached at both ends by long iron 
 chains to two poles projecting at right angles from the wall, by means of which 
 poles it was raised up and held aloft,' Grote, p. 255. Top,ifj is pro- 
 
 perly 'the end left after cutting ;' hence ' the stump of the tree,' as Hom. 11. 
 i. 2^^5, ^TretSrj wpwra TOfirjv iv bpeaffi XiXoLTrev, 'the place from which a lock of 
 hair has been out,' as JEsch. Oh. 230, ' the square cut ends of stones,' Thuc. 
 i. 93, therefore here 'the ends of the beam.' Cf. Soh. Kcpatai 
 
 are yard arms, 'cornua antennarum,' Virg. .ifim. iii. 549, jEsch. Emm. 556, 
 or ' the projecting beams of a crane.' Here * spars or poles resting on the wall, 
 and inclined at an angle to it,' L. and S. ' Sie hingenau zwei tiber die Mauer 
 gelegte, und iiber die Mauer hinausragende Balken,' K. Cf. Liv. xxiv. 34. 
 ToUenones super murum eminentes. 4'YKdptrios — transversus. 
 
 They raised them by means of these chains in a direction oblique to the line of 
 wall. Veget. de R. M. iv. 23, ' Laqueis captos arietes in obliquum trahunt.' 
 Liv. xxxvi. 23, 'Laqueis exceptos declinabant ictus.' Caes. B. C. vii. 22, 
 ' Laqueis faloes avertebant, quas cum destinaverant, tormentis introrsus re- 
 duoebant.' oi 8id. X'^P^s ?x°''''''s — 'letting them go with a run,' 
 
 as our sailors say. diroKavXiJetv — ' to break off by the stalk or stem,' 
 
 as the head of a plant or flower. Eurip. Supp. 717. Appian imitates the 
 ■ 751- B. 
 
338 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Chapter LXXVII. — (a.) rb dvTiTjixto-iJwt. 'And the counterwork rose 
 against them,' i.e. 'the orescent wall,' P. and K. airb to5v irapcvTuv 
 
 Seivuv. • With their present means of offence, ' Dale ; ' prsesentibus terroribus,' 
 Port.; Terriculamentis, T. K. A.; ' Schreckzwangsmittel,' P ; nnder their 
 present circumstances of difficulty is Valla's interpretation, approved by Kriig., 
 who would however much prefer to strike out SeLVwv altogether, or substitute 
 another word for it. irpbs T'f)V irepiTeCxio-iv ir. t. Prepared to 
 
 turn the siege into a blockade. oicrav ov |j.E'YdXT]V. Some of the 
 
 commentators propose to strike out the negative, as the present state of the 
 ruins seems to contradict the statement of Thucydides. But though the circuit 
 of the walls may be traced near the small village of Kokhla, to the extent of 
 about two miles and a half in circumference, these are probably the remains 
 of the city as restored by Philip after the battle of Chaeroneia, B.C. 338 ; the 
 ancient city being probably confined to the southern extremity, where Col, 
 Leake discovered the more ancient masonry, N. G. ii. p. 325. 
 Sairdvris. We find above' that the blockade of Potidaea had cost Athens 2000 
 talents. Hudson considers this an instance of Hendiadj's, 'an expensive 
 blockade.' i|)aK^\ovs. The commentators seem to be nearly equally 
 
 divided as to whether this word should be spelt with one X or two. P. Wassa 
 incline to the latter. Casaubon, Hesychius, Ammonius, Duoker, Oudendorp, 
 and Gottleber, to the former. In Herod, iv. 62. 67, the best MSS. have one 
 X, which the metre requires in Eur. Cycl. 242. They first laid these faggots 
 side by side (v. P. ad loo.) letting them down from the mound into the space 
 that intervened between it and the semicircular wall. Am. explains irapa^dWot 
 to throw beside ; hence to throiuup, to heap up ; but is not the notion of placing 
 objects beside each other, quite contrary to that of placing them upon one 
 another ? May it not mean ' they placed the faggots side by side along the 
 extent of the wall?' [Trpiirxwffty is here equal to irpoax^P'O, • in c. 102, it is 
 used for the alluvial deposit of the Achelous. Cf. iEsch. P. V. 849 ;] and 
 then threw them aa far as they could reach into other parts of the city beyond. 
 ' So viel sie irgend auch von der tibrigen Stadt (d. h. Stadtmauer) bereichen 
 konnten,' K., which seems the simplest and best interpretation. 
 Iircx'^''. Cf i. 48, and iii. 107. liXr] Tpiij>6Et<ra — hy attrition, 
 
 Cf Suid. V. 5/)U|U6s. Lucret. i. 896. 
 
 'At ssepe in magnis fit montibus, inquis ut altia 
 Arboribus vicina cacumina summa terantur 
 Inter se, validis facere id cogentibus Austris, 
 Donee fulserunt flammas fulgore coorto,' 
 
 ait' ttirov — therefrom,, sc. 6.Trb too Tpi<p$fjiiai. IXax^o-rov eS^iio-t, 
 
 TouTO is the subject. For this use of the privative genitive, see Jelf, § 529. i. 
 So Xen. Anah. i. 5. 15, ai)Tou iMyov SeiJo-ai/Tos KaTaXevcrB^tiai. 
 e'rC<|>opov. Cf. iii. 74, el dve/^os iiriyiveTO rfj ^Xo7i iirlipopos. 
 ■iiSiop e^ oipavoB. Thucyd., as Grote observes, evidently discredits this story 
 of the opportune thunderstorm. (Cf. the story of Croesus, Herod, i. 87.) 
 Xen. uses the same jihrase for rain, Anab. iv. 2. 2. So Hor. iii. Od. x. 30, 
 ' aqua coelestis,' 
 
Chap. 79.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 239 
 
 Chapter LXXVIII. — vepiirdxitov. 'There now remained no other 
 resource but to build a wall of circumvallation round Platsea, and trust to the 
 slow process of famine,' Grote, p. 256. ircpl "ApKToiipoD eiriToXds. 
 
 It is not often, Grote remarks, that Thucydides gives us any fixed marks to 
 discriminate the various periods of the year. The time mentioned here is the 
 Heliacal rising of Aroturus ; i. e. the period when Arcturus rises immediately 
 before sunrise (after the forty days during which it had been invisible, as rising 
 after the sun), sometime between the 12th and r7th of September, according 
 to Grote and Goller, or the iSth according to Ideler, i. 247. Cf. Grote u. s. 
 6811. ad loo. ; "Virg. Georg. i. 68. 204, with Forbiger's note ; Golumell. xi. 2. 
 63; Plin. ZT. i\r. ii. 47 ; xviii. 31. 74; Tlsiut. prol. Rud. 71. Hippocrates 
 also employs the appearances of certain stars to indicate time in medical cases, 
 probably, as Grote says, because the Greek months, being lunar, varied in 
 different cities from tha necessity of intercalation, and therefore aflForded no 
 one standard of time. Hudson cf. Scaliger ad Manilium. eiri- 
 
 TaXa£. Of. Lobeok, Phryn. p. 124. sq. to dxpetov. Cf. ad c. 
 
 vi., axpn-oTixTovs. o-iToiroioC. [Cf. vi. 22. 44.] Not that their 
 
 duties were confined exclusively to the preparation of food. They no doubt 
 acted as nurses, dressed the wounds, and tended the sick, and performed many 
 offices for the rest, such as carrying provisions, arms, &c., to the ramparts. 
 T. K. A. compares Eurip. Hec. 366; ycoad. 494 ; Herod, vii. 187. The 
 usual proportion was one woman to four men, but at the siege of Babylon 
 {Herod, iii. 150), we find a woman allowed to eacli man. In the Sicilian ex- 
 pedition the atToiroiol we may observe are males. At Rome the preparation of 
 food was confined to females. Even down to the year r 0. 580, there were no 
 bakers at Rome, ' Ipsi panem faeiebant Quirites, mulierumque id opus erat, ' 
 Plin. H. N. xviii. 11. Cf. PJaut. Merc. ii. 3. 62 ; Terent. Adelph. v. 3. 60; 
 Eeith, Ant. Horn. iv. 3. Kari<rKiiaa-6r\ — 'such were the permanent 
 
 arrangements made for the siege' — not simply 'preparations' [see note ad i. 10. 
 on the difference between KaraffKev-q and irapaaKev^^ Thuc. viii. 5 (a.)] ; but 
 'such means as would be taken by men anticipating a t&i\ows atiA. protracted 
 blockade.' These Thuc. describes lib. iii. 21, ' They consisted of two walls, 
 with sixteen feet of intermediate space all covered in, so as to look like one 
 very thick wall ; there were moreover two ditches out of which the bricks for 
 the walls had been taken, one on the inside towards Platsea, and the other on 
 the outside, against any relieving force. The interior covered space served as 
 permanent quarters for the troops left on guard,' Grote, p. 257. 
 
 Chaptek LXXIX. — {a.) rfj tSv nXaraiiuv eirio-TpaTcfa. The objective 
 or causative genitive. So ^r^(ptcrfia Meyap^ttjv. The decree against the 
 Megarians, Jelf, § 464 ; Matth., § 367. See i. 103, 0. 108, c. 
 IcTTpiiTcixrttv. The object of this expedition was partly to convo}' the Athenian 
 Cleruohi, who were going to settle in the land ceded by Potidaea. 
 dKp.d^ovTos Tov (tCtov. Cf. c. xix. a. ^£vo4»(ov. Cf. ad. ch. 70. 
 
 Tptros aiiTos, Thirlwall, iii., p. 159, n. The two others were Calliades and 
 Phanomachus. Plut. Nic, p. 348; Died. xii. 47. 
 
 (6.) SirdpTwXov, a Chalcidic fortress, north of Otynthus, in the direction 
 of Potidaea. It is mentioned (v. 18) as one of the cities which was to be 
 
240 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 neutral, under the conditions of the truce. [Cramer, vol. 1., p. 253.] 
 BottiEea was the name anciently given to a narrow space of country lying 
 hetween the rivers Haiiacmon and Lydiaa. From this district, however, the 
 Bottiseans were early expelled by the Macedonian princes (Thuc. ii. 99), and 
 retiring across the Axius about Therme and Olynthus, formed a new settlement 
 with the Chalcidians, another people of Thracian origin. Herod, vii. 127; 
 viii. 127; Thuc. i. 77; Polyb. v. 97; Liv. xxvi. 35. Of. Cramer v. i, p. 220. 
 irpo<rxup'fi<r€i.v virb. Of. Jelf, 359, 3 — would come over through the cooperation 
 of a party inside the city. es ['■axiv KaSCo-Tavrai. Cf. ad 1 . i. a. 
 
 So h 06^01', h (pvy/jv Karaarrivai, and supra c. 65, c. 
 
 (c.) ireXToo-Tols. ' These peltasts, a species of troops between heavy armed 
 and light armed, furnished with a pelta or light shield, and short spear or 
 javelin, appear to have taken their rise among these Chalcidic Greeks ; being 
 equipped in a manner half Greek and half Thracian : we shall 6nd them here- 
 after much improved and turned to account by some of the ablest Greek 
 generals.' Grote vi., p. 258. Cf. Xen. Anub., v. 2. 17 where the \j/i,\ol and 
 ireXraaTal are distinguished. Kpoiio-iSos. The line of coast between 
 
 Thessalonica and Olynthus seems to have borne this name. Herodotus vii. 123, 
 calls it Crossaea, Kpo<rcralri, and enumerates the cities it contained, one of which 
 was Gigonus, mentioned by Thucydides, i. 61, u. ; Steph. Byz. calls it Kpoiio-is, 
 and Dionys. Halicarn. calls the inhabitants Crussi; Kpovcaioi, i. 49; v. 
 Cramer, i., p. 242 ; Smith Diet., s. v. Grote, iv. p. 32. 
 
 {d.) 6apirfjo-ovT£s Tois ■irpo<ryi'YVo|xevois. 'Encouraged ly this addition to 
 their numbers.' N. B., the pres. part, which implies a^ they kept coming up — 
 the new comers. avaxupovo-i. oi 'ABrjvaioi. Schol. 
 
 Td|€is. Cf. iii. 87., c. iv. 4. Xen. Anai. iv. 16, iv. 4. 8. ^ SoKot. 
 
 So c. 100. e. Sirr] Sokoi. iii. t6. a. 
 
 (e.) ?Tp«>|/ov Toirs 'AfliivaCoDs. Cf. Plut. Nic, p. 348. G. 
 
 (/.) Tpoiratov 2(m]<rav. The more usual form would be iaTi)(!avro. The 
 active is said to be used of generals who erect a trophy ; the middle of an army. 
 But probably when the cases are examined they will be found to depend on the 
 distinctive uses of the active and middle voices ; the first being used where the 
 action comes directly from the agent, the second where some intermediate 
 agency, or ulterior object in reference to the subject, is implied. So the lawgiver 
 is said 6eTi>ai vd/iov ; the people who vote it are said BiaBai. Cf. u. 86. c. 
 
 Chapter LXXX. — (re.) tuv airb 9aX(io-(n]s = ™>' iraph rijv ddXajraav 
 olKoivTitiv. JE.XQ. Port. G. p^Sfcos tiv crx<5vT€s. Here h.v gives a 
 
 contingent force to the participle. Peile well compares fortS as used by Livy. 
 ' Ne penes ipsos culpa esset cladis fortS bello Gallico accepto.' v. 36. On &v 
 with a participle see Jelf, § 429, i. 90, ii. 39. a. Donaldson New Crat., p. 325. 
 Kc(t>a^^^v(as. Cf. c. 30. The Edd. seem divided as to whether this word 
 should be spelt with one X or two. Cf. Ducker, u. ad i. 27. In Homer, 
 Strabo, Polybius, Xenophon, and Pausanias, it is generally doubled. 
 jSjjioios. So c. Ixxxi. oiK &v in <r<pta-L toiJs " EXXijKas o/Jiolus Trpoaekditv. 
 IXirCSa S' etvai. A similar collocation of moods occurs, sup. 1 3 — Tporiyopevt 
 — 6n — eii} — oi ixivToi yivono — iipiri<yii' — yiyvecBai. Cf. Dem. de falsA Leg., 
 §213, where Mr. Shilleto observes; — 'In oratione obliqua perinde est lis 
 
Chap. 8o.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 241 
 
 [s. Sti] cum optat. cum mdicat, cui omiss^ particula infinit. sequatur. Cf. 
 Thuo. viii. 51.' 
 
 (6.) Vttiapxov ?Ti 8vTO. Cf. u. ad o. Ixvi. So c. lix. 'in S' iarpariiyu. 
 See Arnold's note, and Xen. Hell., i. 6, 4, where we find the Spartans com- 
 plaining that as soon as their admirals had begun to learn a little of their profes- 
 sion (S,pTi. ^vviivrav ra vavTiKo) they were removed from office, I have more 
 particularly referred to this passage, as Professor Cobet of Leyden, one of the 
 most brilliant of living scholars, in some remarks with which he has favoured 
 me, expresses an opinion that it is unintelligible, and ought to be amended. 
 But surely the present participles ^uviivTuv and yiyviocrK6vTav point to the 
 meaning which I have suggested. irepiTJ'yYeiXov. Cf. 85 b. iv. 8. 
 
 AeuKaSa. Leucas, now the island of Sta. Maura, once formed part of the 
 continent, but was afterwards separated from it by a narrow cut. Livy, xxxiii. 
 1 7, says in his time it was an island, but in the Macedonian war it had been a 
 peninsula. The cut was called Dioryctus (Plin. iv. 2 ; Polyb. v. 5). Thucydides 
 more than once describes the Peloponnesian fleet as having been convej'ed 
 across the isthmus. Cf. uoteiii, 8i,iv. 8. It was occupied by 1 000 Corinthian 
 colonists from the settlements of Ambracia and Anactorium. 
 'AvaKTopCoD. Anactorium was the first town in Acarnania, after Actium 
 (which was included in its territory, i. 29), on entering the Ambracian gulf 
 from the Ionian sea. It was founded, together with Leucas and SoUium, by a 
 Corinthian colony, in the middle of the 7th century, B.C., when the original 
 inhabitants were driven into the interior. These seem to have been the Taphii, 
 or Telebose, Leleges, and Curetes. It appears from Thuo. i. 55, that the 
 Corcyraeans shared in the colony, but the Corinthians obtained sole possession 
 of tbe settlement. It remained in their hands till B.C. 425, when they were 
 expelled by the Athenians and Acarnanians conjointly, who occupied the place. 
 Cf. iv. 49, vii. 31. Augustus transferred its inhabitants to Nicopolis, which h^ 
 founded on the opposite coast, audit ceased to be a town. Strabo x., p. 45T. Its 
 present site must be looked for on the promontory which now bears the 
 name of C. Madonna, v. Smith, Diet. Geog., a. v., Anactorium and Actium. 
 Cramer ii. p. 7. 
 
 (c.) $opii.£<ovtt. For the high estimation in which Phormio was held at 
 Athens see the compliment paid to him by Aristophanes. Eqidt. 562, with 
 the note of the Schohast. (Cf. Clinton in an.) irepl NaiiraKTov. 
 
 Cf. ad c. Ixix. kit' iTr[a-itf irpooTao-f)} Ik toC d. 7 — 'on the 
 
 ground of the annual presidency (or chieftainship) which they, as being of the 
 royal gens, enjoyed.' iirl assigns the reason why these two persons had the 
 command. On this force of ini cf. Jelf, § 634, 3. c. Steph. Byzant. would 
 read ^Trerijiriif), a word from Hom., and repeated by Dio Cassius. Krtig. 
 asserts that the naked dative would be objectionable, which Engelmann's tr., _ 
 who inclines to the reading, will not concede. It was their year of office : 
 each irpoa-Tdrris (cf iii. 75, 82) being bound at the expiration of his period of 
 office to resign in favour of another member of the royal gens. GoUer compares 
 the privileges of the Alcmseonidse at Athens, Bacchiadae at Corinth, and the 
 Aleuadse and Scopadse in Thessaly. Cf. Cramer i., p. 93. 'The Chaones 
 differed from their neighbours in being subject to an aristocraiical and not a 
 monarchical government ; their annual magistrates being always chosen from a 
 
2,4% NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II, 
 
 particular family.' The exact limits of Chaonia were not ascertainable even in 
 Strabo's time. Its seaboard line probably extended from the Acroceraunian 
 promontory to the harbour of Buthrotum, opposite Coroyra. The Chaones 
 were once the most warlike and powerful people of Epirus (cf. Strab. vii., p. 
 3'24) ; Thuc. i. 46 ; Arist. Equ., 72 ; Schol. 
 
 (d.) ©eo-irpwToC. The Thesproti extended along the coast from the Thyamis 
 to the confines of the Cassopsei, and in the interior to the boundaries of the 
 territories of Dodona, which wp.s in ancient times regarded as part of Thesprotia. 
 The Ghaones, Thesproti, and Molossi, were the three chief Epirote tribes. 
 MoXoinrovs. The Molossi, who became subsequently the rulers of Epirus, 
 originally inhabited only a small strip of country extending from the Ambracian 
 gulf, between the Cassopsei and Ambraoiotse, northwards as far as the Dodonsei. 
 'ArivTavas. The Atintanes were an lUyrian tribe bordering on the Paravaii, 
 V. inf ©dpDTTos. This Tharyps (called also Tharypas, or Arrhybas) was 
 
 the son or grandson of Admetus, the Molossian king to whom Themistocles 
 addressed himself as suppliant. [Thuc. i. 136.] He was a minor, had been 
 educated at Athens, and is said to have been the first to introduce among his 
 subjects Hellenic civilization. [Cf. Pans. i. xi. i. ; Justin xvii. 3 ; Plut. Pyrrh. 
 i.] The Molossians retained their kingly form of government, Alexander 
 the brother of Olympias, wife of Philip of Maoedon, at length extending his 
 dominion over most of the Epirot tribes. IXapavaCovs. The 
 
 Paravaei were of Thesprotian origin, and bordered on the Orestae, and Atintanes, 
 and the Macedonian district of Elymiotis. They took their name from the 
 Aous (now Voiusa), on whose banks they were situated. The Orestae lay to 
 the south of the Lyncest*. Their country was of small extent, and contained 
 but few towns. Steph. Byz. says they were a Molossian tribe. They occupied 
 the district now known as Castoria, with its lake and the rugged mountains 
 beyond. ' This large and diverse body of Epirotic invaders (a new phenomenon 
 in Grecian history, and got together doubtless by the hope of plunder,) proves 
 the extensive relations of the tribes of the interior with the city of Ambracia. ' 
 Grote vi., p. 260. ' Op^oToi. The Orestae were situated apparently 
 
 to the south-east of the Lynoestae, and, like them, were originally independent 
 of the Macedonian kings, though afterwards annexed to their dominions. 
 Steph. Byz. terms them a Molossian tribe. Their country was also of small 
 extent, and contained but few towns : it was called Orestis, or Orestias, and 
 is represented by the modem districts of Gramista, Anaselitza, and Kastoria. 
 [Leake's N. Greece, ap. Smith Diet. Q. s. v. ; Cramer i., p. 197 ; Polyb. xviii. 
 30; Strabo vii., p. 326; Liv. xxvii. 33, xxxi. 40, xxxiii. 34.] 
 Kp«()>o Tuv ' A8T]va£(ov. Sincehe was nominally at peace with them. v. c. xxix. 
 iicTTcpov — 'too late to take any part in the affair.^ 
 
 (e.) 'ApveCas— i. e., the territory of Amphilochian Argos. Palmerius from 
 
 iii. 106, would read' A7pa(os. v. Cramer ii., p. 9. Atjivafav 'a 
 
 frontier village territory' (Grote) at the south-east corner of the Ambracian 
 gulf, between Anactorium and Argos, at the foot of Mount Thyamus. Thuc. 
 mentions it again, iii. 106. Cramer places its site at Loutraki; Col. Leake, 
 with greater probability, at Kerbaser^ in the vicinity of which there is a marsh, 
 two miles in length, from which Limnaea probably derived its name. [Cf. 
 Polyb. r. 6 ; Cramer ii., p. 9, 37 ; Smith s. v.] SxpctTov— so called B. 
 
Chap. 8 1.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 243 
 
 supposes, as being 'the camp or place of muster for the armed population of 
 Aoai-nania.' Their enmity with their formidable neighbours the Ambraoiots 
 rendering an armed confederacy necessary, (v. Cramer, ii., p. 4.) It lay on 
 the right bank of the Achelous, about 200 stadia from its mouth, the river 
 being navigable as far as its walls. (Strab. jt., p. 450.) Xenophon speaks of 
 it as the capital of the province, at the time of the expedition of Agesilaus into 
 Acarnania. [Xen. Hell. iv. 6. 4.] Pouqueville says its ruins are still to be seen 
 on the site called Porta, v. Cramer ii., p. 30, sq. paSCus fl.v 
 
 ■npotrnapi\trav ■ K. admits the correctness of the use of h.v with the iu fc. inf. ; 
 so Kuhner and Hartung. Madvig says wherever it occurs it is an error 
 of the editions. P. quotes Thuo. v. 82, vi. 66, viii. 25, 71. Cf Matth. 
 § 598. 9- 
 
 Chapter LXXXI. — (a.) oflTe— tc. On the use of otfre followed by re (or 
 more rarely koL), see Jelf, § 775. obs. B. a. ; Herod, v. 49, vii. 8. i ; 
 Soph. Phil., 1 32 1. Xd^yois — ^pw. See the remarks on 
 
 this antithesis, i. 22. a. 69. d. Here it must be admitted to be somewhat 
 forced . 
 
 [b.) (i^o-ov. ' So definite in describing a j30si<io«, as not to need the article,' 
 B. of. Xen. Anab. i. 8. in several places. (So of time fiicrov iii/.ipas, Xen. 
 Anab. iv. 4. i, &o.) P. cf. i. 8. a. 12. b. 16. a. 48. a.. 52. b., see iv. 31. 96. 
 So we sometimes use 'right,' 'left.' ot |i«toI toiItcov. The 
 
 (Eniadse, says Haack from the following ch., but Bl. is most probably right in 
 saying that they only joined Cnemus after his repulse at Stratos. 'The 
 Perioeci of the Leucadian peninsula,' Arn., who adds, there was scarce in 
 Greece a town which had its Periceci. See his note. 
 
 (c.) Ttra'Yp.^voi. 'This fact shows,' Grote says, 'the great inferiority of 
 the Epirots to the Greeks, and even to the less advanced portion of the Greeks, 
 in the qualities of order, discipline, steadiness, and power of co-operation for a 
 joint purpose. Confidence of success with them is exaggerated into childish 
 rashness, so that they despise even the commonest precautions either in march 
 or attack, while the Greek divisions on their right and left are never so elate as 
 to omit either,' vi. p. 271. Sid. <(>vXaKTjs ?X'"'''''S — 'keeping con- 
 
 sta/ntly on their guard ;' lit. in a state of guard. See note i. 17. a. 40. c. 
 42. c. ^v l'iriT'i]8€C({). Even for a single night the Greeks and 
 
 Komans chose the spot for their encampment with great care and precaution. 
 See Caesar pass, for the equivalent phrase, e. g. B. C. i. 61, ' Nactus idoneum 
 locum ;' and he says of the Spaniards who had served under Sertorius, that 
 they had learnt ' consuetudine populi Komani loca capere, castra munire,' B. 
 Gall. iii. 23. a^ioup-evoi. H^lol Kpivb^evoi, Schol. ' They enjoyed 
 
 the high reputation of being esteemed the most warlike, ' &c. On the uses of 
 dJiWis and d^lafna, see i. u. 130, ii. 34. 64. 88, vi. 15. 4ir^<rxov. 
 
 There is a V. L. iiriaxoin-o 'non se retineri passi sunt, se retinuerunt,' as vii. 
 33. ol livpaKodtTioi . . . iiriaxovTo . . . rots ' A-d-qvalois ^irtx^Lpeiv, and Gottl. 
 adopts tills reading. P. tr. 'neque morati sunt (substiterunt) ut castra occu- 
 parentj'and s&ya iTrdxciyviiih the inf. means in Herod, deliberare, sibi pro- 
 ponere tanquam metam. K. explains it ' Sie hielten sich nicht ein lager 
 aufzuschlao'en.' T. K. A. 'did not turn their minds to.' ' Neither forbore so 
 
 a 2 
 
244 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Booe II. 
 
 far as to occupy, ' Holibes. "They would not halt to encamp,' Grote, vi. p. 
 ■252. Goll. takes no notice of the difficulty. Of. Soph. Phil. 349. 539. 
 KaraXap^tv is a military term. See i., here it means 'tahe up grownd for a 
 camp ; of. infra d., and I apprehend the construction is t6 KaraXa^eip as t6 
 lK(j>o^fi(Ta,L, infr. 87. a. P^K'^- ^or the old reading pii|XT|. The 
 
 two words are constantly interchanged. See c. 76, where we have piiiri, 
 meaning impetus, which suits the sense here. axTo^oil. air^ pog — 
 
 the very shout of onset. For the orthography see n. on 0. i. K. says Thuo. is 
 the only Attic writer who uses the word. He quotes Bekker, Anecd. ZI4. 
 465, airo^od, rax^cus. KaV &|ia ™ iroX€|JiiK^ dXaXa^iiu. 
 
 So Liy. i. 11, 'primo impetu et clamore ;' vi. 4, ' primo clamore atque 
 impetu.' 
 
 (d.) axiTuv TO ?p7ov Y^vecrBat — ' the achievement would he their own.' olvtuv 
 for airwv is fr. Bekker. 6|jioC<i>s — i. e. as they had intended. So Ixxx. 
 
 a., 6 T€plir\ous ovk^tl ^(xotro' Adrfvaiots ofioios. irpo'Ko^CC,ov€ri IveSpais. 
 
 Krtig. ' besetzen mit hinterhaltzposten, ' tr. occupy the environs with ambuscades. 
 'Planting ambuscades in convenient places, and suffering the Epirots to 
 approach without suspicion near to the gates ; they then suddenly sallied 
 out and attacked them, while the troops in ambuscade rose up and assailed 
 them at the same time,' Grote, vi. p. 252. Cf. iii. 112 and 119; Herod, v. 
 121. o(ji<io-6. So 'comiuus,' Lat. Cf. Horn. H. xii. 24, xiii. 
 
 337 ; Aristoph. Lys. 451 ; Xen. Anab. iii. 4. 4; Symp. ii. 13. Hence tro- 
 pically Plat. Euth. 294. D, 6fj.6<re Uvat, rols ipayr'^/xain — to grapple with L. 
 and S. 
 
 (c.) Iv^KciVTo. P. tr. ' brohe in vpon,' fiiga effusS in eos ferrentur : rare of 
 an array in flight, being the usual term to signify ' pursuit of a flying army.' 
 avcXdjiLpavov — received them into their ranhs. Arnold tr. rallied them, i. e. the 
 Chaonians ! Is airopCav Ka9. — reducing to distress. 
 
 &VIV SirXuv. A circumstance very annoying to Greek soldiers who 
 laid aside their shields and defensive armour when they halted, T. K. A. 
 For illustration of the fact, see Xen. Anab. iii. c. iii. toSto 
 
 iroi«tv — i. e. &iro6ev <r<pevSovav, harassing heavily-armed troops by this sort of 
 guerilla fighting. 
 
 Chapter LXXXII.— "Avairov. The Anapus flows into the Aehelous on 
 the right bank, a little below Metropolis. It is called in Modern maps Artos 
 [see Cramer, ii. p. 32]. OlviaSuv. Cf 0. ci. c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIII.— (a.) Kpio-oJou. The whole of the inner sea now 
 known as the Sea of Lepanto, east of the promontories of Rhium and 
 Antirrhium, was called originally the Crisstean Gulf, 6 Kpta-aios K6\voi. [See 
 the Homeric hymn to Apollo, 431, Kpla-q^ k6\tos direlpui'.] And this continued 
 to be its designation even down to the time of Strabo, who gives this specific 
 name to this portion of the Corinthian gulf (viii. p. 335). But soon after the 
 time of Thucyd., it went more generally by the name of the Gulf of Corinth. 
 Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 9, ko\w6s Kopi.pei.aK6s ; Polyb. v. 3 ; Liv. xxvi. 26, Sinus 
 Corinthiacus, xxviii. 7. 8, Sinus Corinthius. Pliny (iv. 2) confines the name 
 to the small gulf running up to Cirrha, now known as the Gulf of Salona. It 
 
Chap. 83.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 245 
 
 took its name from Crissa, which lay inland a little S.W. of Delphi, at the S. 
 end of a projecting spur of Parnassus (its ruins may still he seen near the 
 modern village of Chryso) . Cirrha was subsequently built at the head of the 
 bay, at the mouth of the Pleistus, and rose into a town from beiug the port of 
 Crissa. Between the two lay the famous Cirrhaian or Crissean plain, bounded 
 on the N. by Parnassus, on the B. by Cirphis, and on the W. by the moun- 
 tains of the Ozolian Locrians. The Homeric hymn quoted above, gives the 
 legendary histoi-y of the foundation of Crise, which was ascribed to Apollo 
 himself, and hence the city is called Kpiira l^a8e-^, Horn. II. ii. 520. In fact 
 in the earlier writers Crise is identified with Delphi, the name afterwards givei 
 to the sanctuary of Pytho. The town of Cirrha is famous for the two sacrec 
 wars carried on against it by the Amphictyons. (For the authorities, see Cramer, 
 "• P' ^55 ; Smith s.r.). 8 SSei irapa7lv€<r8ai — which ought to have 
 
 been at hand, i. e. ' which was intended to co-operate with Cnemus, and to 
 prevent,' &c. Cf. h. 1. v. a. Ixxxiv. c. xoii. d. xcv. c. &v<o — 'into 
 
 the interior of the covmtry.' ^va^KcxirBna-av. Observe change of 
 
 number [(rx^/^a irphs rb a'qixaiv6ixevov\ i. e, the Corinthians, &c., implied in t6 
 va.vTLK6v. So Ipolav i\6vTes drjiroT 'Apyclap o-r^Xos, j3llsch. Ag. 588. 
 irepl Tols arras irjii^pas Tijs (J.dxi]s. K. cf Xen. Anai. vi. 2. g ; Pol. iii. 
 45. 6, ix. 5. 7. 
 
 (b.) TTJ evpvx^upfa. 'The Peloponnesians had not yet made actual trial of 
 Athenian maritime efficiency, at the point of excellence which it had now 
 reached ; themselves retaining the old unimproved method of working ships at 
 sea, they had no practical idea of the degree to which it had been superseded 
 by Athenian training. If we revert to the battle of Salamis, we find that 
 narrowness of space was at that time accounted the best of all protections for a 
 smaller fleet against a larger. Bat such had been the complete change of 
 feeling, occasioned by the system of manoeuvring introduced since that period 
 in the Athenian navy, that amplitude of sea room is now not less coveted by 
 Phormio than dreaded by his enemies,' Grote, vi. pp. 263. 274. Cf. c. 
 Ixxxix. e. irapairX^ovras '^|<» toB KoXTrov — ' as they were coastmg 
 
 along so as to steal if possible outside the strait.' v. P. in loc. 
 ^T^pEL ^ hept watching.' o-TpaTwoTLKwrcpov. 'The triremes 
 
 were fitted out more as transports for numerous soldiers than with any view 
 to naval combat,' Grote, p. 263. ouk &v oi.6|i6voi — 'not dreaming 
 
 of the probability of the Athenians iientu/ring, &c.' The hx, which properly 
 belongs to roX/i^c/ai, is attracted to the participle : Madvig, quoted by 
 T. K. A. 
 
 (c.) irapa ytjv <r<J>mv KO|j.iJo|i.^vuv — i. e. as the Sohol. rightly explains it, 
 'while the Corinthians, <fcc., were coasting along the Peloponnesian shore.' See 
 Jelf, § 710. a., 'We sometimes find the genitive absolute where we should 
 expect the participle to agree with the subject of the verb.' Cf. Thuc. m. 13. 
 70 ; Herod, i. 178 ; Xen. Oyr. i. 4. 20, and a remarkable instance S. Luc. xiv. 
 32. Cf. also Matth. § 561. In this case, Madvig observes, the genitive absolute 
 usually in Thucyd. precedes the principal sentence, and serves to give more 
 prominence to the participial clause as a special circumstance. Like this is 
 i. 10. 4, 5ia^e/3i;K(STos HepiKKiom — riyy^Xerj airQ, for the simpler construction, 
 Sict^e^Tlnbn U. iiyyikd-q, which illustrates Madvig's remark, see T. K. A., 
 
2^6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 and chap. viii. b. SiaPaXXdvTuv. According to the general use 
 
 of the present, which is also the participle imperfect, implies 'purposing to 
 cross, i.e. making the attempt without carrying it out,' v. Poppo. Of. vi. 30. 
 XoXkCSos. a look at the map will show that the Athenians had considerably 
 outstript the Lacedemonian's with a view to intercept them. From i. 108. c. 
 we learn that the Athenians had taken Chalcis after their victory at CEnophyta, 
 when Tolmidas sailed round Peloponnesus. It was being then used by the 
 Corinthians as a naval station, as well as Molycrium and SoUium. It was one 
 of tho five jEtolian towns mentioned by Homer {II. ii. 640), and lay at the foot 
 of the mountain of the same name, whence it is also called uTroxaA/c/s. It was 
 a little to the east of the Evenus, now the Fidhari, and is probably represented 
 by the modern Ourio-Kestro,the mountain being called Varassova. Leake, 
 N. Greece, i. p. no. ap. Smith, s.v. Eu^vod. The Evenus rises 
 
 in the highest summit of Mount CEta, and runs into the sea about 120 stadia 
 from the promontory of Antirrhium. In winter it becomes a very considerable 
 river, receiving several mountain torrents, and flowing with great rapidity, and 
 bearing along great stones in its course. Hence * Eveni rapidae undffi,' Ov. 
 Met. ix. 1 04. In mythology it is famous for the death of the Centaur Nessus, 
 who is said to have been killed here by Hercules for offering violence to Dejanira 
 as he carried her across the river. Col. Leake supposes its modern name to be 
 a corruption of the Romaic from 80is, and that it retains a vestige of the 
 ancient people the Ophieis in whose territory the river rose. {N. Greece, ii. p. 
 625 ; Smith, D. Geog. s.v.). Cf. Soph. Tracli. 557. o4k SXaBov 
 
 vvKTos i£|>op(jii(rd(ji,£voi. The difficulty of completely comprehending this de- 
 scription is well known. In the first place the Scholiast explains utpop/Mta-dfievot 
 iXaBov by ol ' ABrivaioi ; but Haaok, Poppo, Arnold, GoUer, and indeed most mo- 
 dern commentators, adopt the opinion expressed by Grote, that 'the natural struc- 
 ture of the sentence as well as the probabilities of fact, point to ol Jlekoirovviiffioi as 
 the nominative case to the verb. This is however not all, for even those who 
 agree as to the persons denoted by iif)opfurrd/j,cpoi are at variance respecting the 
 operation described by that word. The most common view, based upon 
 Arnold's note, is well given in Engelman's German tr. *The Peloponnesiana 
 were sailing along the coast of Peloponnesus, out of the Corinthian Gulf, with 
 the intention of crossing over to Aoarnania as soon as they got past the town of 
 Ehium. They had brought to during the night in the harbour of Patrae, a 
 circumstance which they had in vain endeavoured to conceal from the Athenians 
 [o6k IXaOov]. When then they were attempting to cross from Patrae to the 
 other side, Phormion, who had been on the watch for this moment, came rapidly 
 down upon them from Chalcis, met them in mid-passage, and forced them to 
 come to action.' Grote objects that the Peloponnesians did not wish, and could 
 not hope to conceal from Phormio the spot where they put to for the night, and 
 make him suppose they were west of Patrse when they were really in the place, 
 which is what Dr. Arnold supposes. He urges too that the battle was fought 
 in mid-chamnel, and •eery little after daybreak, which is inconsistent with the 
 supposition that they passed the night in the harbour of Patrae. Accordingly 
 he interprets i<j)op|J.i<rd().6voi — having taken up a simulated, or imperfect night- 
 station. I have great doubt whether this exact force can belong to iirb, but 
 find that the explanation which I had myself attempted in a projected Eeview 
 
Chai?. 83.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 247 
 
 of Arnold's first volume somewhat resembles this. ' It is impossible to sup- 
 pose that there can have been time enough for the Peloponnesian fleet to have 
 regularly entered the harbour of Patrse, as Arnold suggests, and also to have 
 been in a position to fight a battle early next morning {ijrl rriv lu) half-way 
 between the two coasts. The ' dodge,' if we may use the word, attempted by 
 Maohaon was that so frequently practised by the ' chase' in the pursuit of slavers 
 and the like. As long as daylight lasted, he continued his course parallel to 
 the enemy ; when night came on he tried to lay to without their seeing him 
 [viro — clavi AiheniensesJ, in the hopes that they would sail past him. When 
 he thought Phormion far enough onward, he turned sharply at right angles to 
 his former course, steering N. instead of W. But Phormion had been too 
 much on the alert, and stopping while the enemy stopped, was down upon them 
 in the first light of morning before they had time to escape. This too explains 
 the reason why the Peloponnesians had not the same chance of keeping away 
 from their enemy as they had enjoyed all the previous day. They had 
 come into disagreeable proximity during the night. {xfiop^^^caOai may 
 originally have meant ' clam appellere ad littus,' because this was the only way 
 in which the first mariners did ' lie to.' But as navigation improved, and ships 
 were brought to, as occasion required, at sea, the term would naturally be re- 
 tained. And it is ridiculous to suppose that the Peloponnesian admiral, whose 
 object it was to reach the Acarnanian coast with all possible speed, would 
 retrace his way to the opposite shore, thereby doubling the distance to be 
 traversed, and the chance of interruption from Phonnion.' I do not know that 
 anything which I have seen has much modified the opinion here expressed. 
 We may add that the words airb Tfj? XoXkCSos do not necessarily mean, as 
 some apparently suppose, that the Athenians had just left the harbour of 
 Chalcis that very morning ; awb denotes the direction from which, as eiri the 
 direction towards which a movement takes place, of. sup. 80. a. On the aorist, 
 as applicable to an action not carried into eff'ect, see remarks in the appendix 
 on Soph. Ajax, vv. 1 1 05 — 6. 
 
 MB. Sl/caia yhp t6vS' drvx^^y KTCivavrd fie. 
 TBT. KTcivavTa, SeivSv y' eliras el fcal fTjs Sa>'i6j'. 
 
 The whole will then mean — when their attempt to lay to in the night unhwtvn to 
 the enemy did not pass undetected. Those who make iiipop. refer to the Athenians, 
 might I suppose tr. when the fact that the Athenians had brought to during the 
 night became perceptible, but this is I think very questionable. There is a V.L. 
 marg. Gam., i<pop/j.ia-d/Meiiot, and probably it is to this reading that the Schol. 
 refers when he supplies ol 'ASrjvaioi. to SXaBov. But for the same reason this is 
 not quite satisfactory ; oi Xavdavoi means ' I do not succeed in escaping detec- 
 tion when I make some attempt intended to be secret.' This might be said of 
 the Athenian fleet, but the furtive efforts of the others to escape were evidently 
 prominent in the writer's mind. oiiTco Sir). Cf. ad i. 1.3 1. 
 
 (d.) <rTpaTTi7ol. Of. i. 46. b. irapeo-KevaJovTO — 'who con- 
 
 tributed to the equipment of this fleet,' E. kiikXov. Cf. iii. 78, 
 
 and note. ji^ 8i86vt6s Si^KirXow. Cf. i. 49. c. 'The Athenian 
 
 rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in their 
 rear, turned rapidly and got the opportunity before the ship of the adversary 
 
248 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 could change its position, of striking it either in the stem, or in some weak 
 part. The success of course depended on the extreme rapidity and precision of 
 the movements of the Athenian reesel, ' Grote, vi. p. 267, see the rest of the 
 note. This manoeuvre could only he executed by ships that had the superiority 
 in speed and management. Compare the account of the battle of Arginusse, 
 Xen. Hell. i. 6, -where the balance of naval skill is on the side of the Lacede- 
 monians, and Xenophon speaking of the Athenian ships says (§ 31), ofiru 5' 
 iT(ix07j(Ta.v ifa fiij di^KirXovy StSoZei', x^'^P^^ 7^P ^wXeov (where see Schneider's 
 valuable note). to. Xjirra irXoto — ' the small craft' — i. e. the store 
 
 vessels. Cf. vii. 40. e. ; cf. Duk. ad iv. 116. b., P. 8id, Ppax^os = 
 
 Si' dXlyov. 'Exiguo ex intervallo,' P. irapoytTvoiicvoi. Obs. 
 
 change of gender — i. e. the crews. Karb, ^ivenv. Cf. i. no. d. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIV. — (a.) KaroL [iCav voiv rem-^fivox, — 'formed in line of 
 hatile a-headj as it is technically called, cf. Xen. Hell. 1. 6, 29, 31. ollidfiioi 
 d^Kd vavalv ^irl fiLcis Terayfi^voi. Poppo cf. u. xc. d. Kara fiiav iirl K^pois^ 
 which confirms this translation. Of course /caret fiiav might also mean OTie 
 deep, V. ad xc. a. |uvt)yov Is 6\lyov — ' hept forcing them to con- 
 
 tract their circle.' iv xp$ ael irapairXfovTes. AtJ /iera^opSs t^s 
 
 Kovpas TTJs &XP'- roO xp^rbs yeyvofiivov. Schol. ' strictim.' Haas cf. Herod, 
 vi. 1 1 ; Soph. Aj. 797. Procopius imitates the pas.sage, ii. B. 6. 7. Gottleb. 
 •KipiinXei KaV AaSei. Observe the change of subject. 
 
 {b. ) i^' lauTw. The affair would then be as we say in his own liands, to 
 attack when he pleased. Cf. iii. 11 ; iv. ■zg ; vii. 12. Matth. § 586. 
 ovSeva \p6vov. n. b. not fi'/jSeva ; perhaps we may give the same idiomatic force 
 by saying, ' no time,' as a sort of single tense — cf. oiSiv ar^yovaai — ' unseor 
 worthy,' ch. 94. See what is said on the use of 01) as a particula infinitans, i. t, 
 a. 5, b. 1 7, a. ; and the remark of Hermann on Viger, No. 309, ' 01) arctissim^ 
 conjungi cum verbo debet, ita ut hoc verbo conjunctum, unam notionem con- 
 stituat, cujusmodi est, oiK olda, nescio.' KaXX£(m]v. Krtig. 
 
 suggests KaWuTT cLv, but needlessly. Cf. the old English usage of handsome ; 
 a handsome beating. 
 
 (c.) KaT^ei" qJ^ more violently than usual? The prep, seems to imply this. 
 See ad 0. xxvi. u. irpoo-^irnrre. Wass cf. j3Esch. Ag. 659 : — 
 
 yaOs ya^p irpbs dW^Xi/irt Qp-ffKiai wvoal 
 ■fjpeiKov' al di Keporvwoiixevai, pi<i. 
 Xeiix&vi. A. T. X. 
 
 XoiSopCa. Wass quotes Horace, i Sat. v. 1 1. Eur. Hec. 
 
 h yap iivplip o'TpareifiaTt 
 6.K6\a(rros ^xXos, vavrtKij r dvapxia. 
 Kpelacwv Trvp6s. 
 
 KiKeva-r&v. Duk. quotes Scheffer de Mil. nav. iv. 7. These were called by 
 the Eomans ' hortatores et pausarii.' Mr. Grote has a good note on the pas- 
 sage, vi. p. 269, where he shows from the structure of the trireme how im- 
 portant the functions of these officers were, the voice of the keleustes being the 
 only thing that kept the 1 70 rowers to good time in their strokes. He refers 
 
Chap. 85.] NOTES ON THUCYDTDES. 249 
 
 to Arnold's note and Plaut. Merc. iv. 2, 5, and Ann. iii. i. 15. Of. Thuc. vii. 
 70. Ovid, Met. iii. 618 :— 
 
 ' Qui requiemque modumque 
 Voce dabat remis, aniniorum hortator.' 
 
 He carried in his hand a hammer or truncheon to keep time with, called ' por- 
 tisculua.' See Plaut. u. s. and Rich's Diet. s. v. ava<|)4p€iv — 
 
 ' could not get their oars clear of the water. ' Grote. ' die liuder bey unge- 
 stumer See aufheben. ' Gottl. ' Eemos ad se reduoere, et attoUere suspenses.' 
 P. ' referre.' K. ' recover their oars.' L. and S. Kupepv^rais. 
 
 We learn from i. 143, a. the importance of this office, and the stress laid on 
 the fact of having Athenian steersmen. 8ii<|>8ei.pov (see Poppo), 
 
 means frequently * spoilt,* i. 29, c. and here is simply disabled ; i. e. for the 
 time. &ir\ous eirm^fff. Died. Sic. xii. 48 ; so KaraSieiV i. 50, h. 1. 90, e. 
 92, b. ; vii. 41, viii. 34, cf. note ad i. 29', a. IIoLTpas. Patrse, one 
 
 of the twelve Achaean cities (Herod, i. 145), lies on the Corinthian gulf on one 
 of the spurs of Mount Panachaicus. The Achaean hero Patreus was its epony- 
 mus. After the Macedonian wars it was one of the four cities that revived the 
 federal league. After the battle of Actium, Augustus planted a considerable 
 colony there, placing the neighbouring towns under its dominion. Pausanias, 
 who visited it, gives a long description of its buildings and statues. It retains 
 its name in the modern Patras. Ai\Lr\v. Dyme, also one of 
 
 the twelve Achasan cities (v. Herod, u. s.), is said to have derived its name 
 from being the most westerly of them all {dirb Svaixuv). Its ancient name, 
 according to Strabo, was Stratus. It was one of the four cities which revived 
 the Ach^an League. Pompey colonised it with a number of Cilician pirates, 
 and Augustus placed it under the authority of Patrae. Its remains are to be 
 seen near the modern town of Karavost^si. Leake, Morea, ii. p. 160. 
 Is aX.K^v Tpdireo-Bai. K. explains by se mettre en difense, and cf. Hom. II. xv. 
 564 ; Herod, ix. 70 ; Thuc. iii. 108, a. He says dX/c'f) is not used by other 
 Attic writers in 'this sense of resistance. It is in fact vigorous fighting ; and 
 BO, to betake themselves to vigorous fighting, in such circumstances, means, to 
 malce resolute defence. 
 
 {d.) aveX($p.evoi. — ' tooh prisoners, and transferred to their own ships.' 
 vo€v ava9^VT6s. Cf. ScbefF. de Mil. nav. iv. 2 ; ffuds. Herod, viii. 121 ; 
 Procop. B. G. iv. 22, Gottl. KuX^vriv. Cyllene was the sea- ■ 
 
 port of Elis, from which it was distant about 120 stadia, and is mentioned in 
 very early times in connexion with the legendary history of the Peloponnese. The 
 Corcyraeans burnt it because it had supplied ships to the Corinthians, v. Thuc. 
 i. 30. It was the principal port on this part of the Peloponnesus. Cf. Thuc. 
 vi. 89; Diod. xix. 66, 87; Polyb. v. 3; Liv. xxvii. 32. Leake assigns its 
 position to the modern Glarentza, but there appears reason to doubt the 
 identity, v. Smith, s. v. at iKeiGev vrjes. Cf. i. 61, v;., for the 
 
 fact see c. Ixxx. u. Leuoas was the rendezvous for the fleet. 
 
 Chapter LXXXV.— (a.) |v|i.poi5Xo«s. Apparently here mentioned for 
 the first time in the Peloponnesian war. Ten were sent to Agis after his 
 failure at Argos (v. 63). Astyoohua was accompanied by eleven (viii. 39). 
 
250 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 V. Grote vi. p. ■272, ' Commissioners, to assist by their advice and exertions.' 
 P. compares Hermann, Gr. Ant. § 45, 4 ; Thuc. iv. 79, v. 63 ; and Schweigh. 
 ad App. iii. p. 305, for a similar cuetom among the Romans. 
 Ti.|j.oKpdTr|v — for his fate, see c. xcii. b. KaTtto-KcvdJeo-Doi. Cf. 
 
 0. Ixxviii. c. iv. 75 ; and Poppo's note. iir oXCyuv — ' by an in- 
 
 ferior number of ships.' So conversely, ttXij^os is used for superiority in num- 
 bers. Of. i. J06, 2, t25. irpwTOV — i. e. in this war. Schol. 
 irapdXoYos. Cf. ad i. 78, a., and ii. 61, c. ; 66, ».. ; 91, c. ; vii. 28; tr. ike 
 unreasonableness ; the contradiction to all rational calculation was great. 
 
 (6.) avTi6^VT£s. Cf. iii. 56, c. on its use with a genitive. P. Eurip. Jph. 
 Taur. 358, TTjc ^t>6dd' AUXtv i.VTi.dei<ra ttjs iKei. Ik iroXXov" for the 
 
 fact, see i. 142, g. 81 oXCyov. Cf. i. 77i f- I i^4> ^■ 
 
 (c.) Ka9' f||JLEpav «£. Cf. iv. 66, a. del Kara Itos iKacrrov. Soph. Phil. 
 780, with Wiinder's note. T(p Koy.ltflvn. ' Nicias.' 
 
 {d.) PopTiivLos. Gortyn (afterwards more usually called Gortyna, and not 
 to be confounded with Gortys in Arcadia) was, next to Cnossus, the most im- 
 portant city in Crete. It was anciently called Larissa, and was therefore in 
 all probability a Pelasgic town. [Cf. Cramer, iii. p. 384. We find also a 
 Gortyniain Macedonia, Thuc. ii. 100, probably also Pelasgic] In early times 
 it was leagued with Cnossus, and the two cities together held the rest of Crete 
 in subjection. Afterwards, dissensions having arisen between them, they were 
 engaged in continual hostilities, [v. Strabo, x. p. 478, who reckons the circuit 
 of the city at fifty stadia.] It stood on the river Lethaens, about nine miles 
 from the sea, where it had two harbours, Lebena and Metallum. Mr. Pashley 
 fixes its site at the modern Hagius Dh6ka, where the ten saints of Gortjna are 
 said to have suffered martyrdom in the persecution of Decius. See Pashley's 
 Crete, i.p. 295. irpo|evos. Cf. ad c. 29, a., and iii. 70, d., where 
 
 for the difference between Proxenus and Epiproxenus, see Arnold's note. 
 KvSuvCav. One of the most ancient and important cities of Crete. It pro- 
 bably existed very long before the time of Polycrates, and was only enlarged 
 and adorned by the Samian colonists, and not founded as Herodotus supposed, 
 iii. 44, 59. A considerable portion of its citizens were .^ginetan colonists. 
 Olymp. Ixv. ■z ; hence their especial hatred for Athens. See MuUer's jEgine- 
 tica, p. 113. It was 1000 stadia, according to the Schol., or 800 according to 
 Strabo (x. p. 479) from Gortyna, lying on the sea looking towards Laconia. 
 Mr. Pashley identifies it with the modern KhaniS. (v. i. p. 15). The quince 
 was indigenous to this district, and took its name from it. [Plin. xv. 11. ; cf. 
 Smith, Geog. Diet. s. v. ; MUll. Dor. i. p. 30.] IIo\iXv£Tais. The 
 
 territory of Polichne bordered on Cydonia. The site of the town has not been 
 ascertained, v. Smith, in v. ; and Herod, vii. 170. irirb av^|iuv. 
 
 The causal use of the prepos., see Jelf, § 639, i. 3, b. dirXoia is used for any- 
 thing that stops navigation ; either adverse winds, or the absence of wind ; but 
 as Poppo observes, it is more likely that the former meaning is the correct one, 
 as vessels propelled by oars would not be detained by a calm. See viii. 99, 
 Engelman's tr. remarks on iT& dirXoias, ' Wenn die Prapositionen acht ist, 
 kann dirXoia nur die in der Ueberaetzung ausgedrtickte Bedeutung, ' Wind- 
 stille' haben ;' but v. .(Esch. Ag. 188, where the context shows that foul winds are 
 meant, Trvoal dTrb lirpiixovoi luiKowai, ; so Eurip. 7jpA. .4. 88 ; Herod, ii. 119. 
 
Chap. 87.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 25 1 
 
 There is therefore no reason to believe with Kriig. that m dvi/Muv is a gloss : 
 the better plan is with some inferior MSS. to strike out the second iiirt), and 
 thus make ciir'Kolas a sort of epexegesis to inr' dvi/i.oii'. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVI. — (a.) irap£(rK£va(r|ievoi <os ttrV vai>|iaxCav. Not as 
 before^ c. 78, 8, arpaTLiaTLKthTtpov irapeaK, IIdvop|J.ov rhv 
 
 'A\dCK6v. [To distinguish it from Panormus in Sicily (vi. 2), and Panormus 
 in Milesia (viii. 24) ]. It lay fifteen stadia to the east of the promontory of 
 Ehium. The bay is now called Tekieh, from a Tekieh or tomb [Sijkt;] of a 
 Turkish saint which formerly stood upon it. v. Smith, s. v. irap^ir\6uo-£ 
 
 8^ Kttl 6 ^. ' coasted along from Naupactus {i. e. of course in a contrary direc- 
 tion to the Lacedaemonians) to Molycrium, so as to get outside the Strait into 
 broad water. 
 
 (6.) 'Pidv. The towns on both sides of the Strait bore this name. To dis- 
 tinguish them the south town was called ri 'AxaMv (now the castle of the 
 Morea) ; the north town 'Pioc t6 MoXvKpiKiv or'AvrifipLov (now the castle of 
 Bamili). These two promontories formed the entrance to the Corinthian gulf. 
 The distance between them is variously stated. Thucyd. makes it seven stadia 
 (ii. 86) ; Strabo, five (pp. 335, 6) ; Pliny about a Roman mile (iv. 6). But both 
 Dodwell and Leake make it a mile and a half. (v. Smith, Diet. 3. v. Achaia). 
 Dodwell, p. 171; Leake's Morea. ii. p. 148. irpo(rep£por)6TJK6i. 
 
 Cf. ad i. T34, d. P. etSov' so. bpfiiffaiiivovs. P. 
 
 (c.) irpbs IkeCvuv — 'in favour of the Lacedamonians.' wpds ot Tr-po-Ti is, 
 according to Dr. Donaldson, only a lengthened foim of irapd, containing in 
 itself the notion of onward, — adversus : oi irpos /njTpbs = a matre -versus me 
 cognati — ' motion towards that which is before the subject.' Jf. Crat. p. 302. 
 From this he deduces the various usages of Trpbs, though without special men- 
 tion of the present one. Jelf appears to classify this usage among those which 
 denote ' properties belonging to the subject from which the action is supposed 
 to arise,' § 638. Matthiae, § 590, a. places it after the case of neuters, re- 
 presented as produced by something, ^lov ^liovai irpbs dvdptlnroiv. In other 
 cases also as ehai wpos rivos, stare ab aliquo, cf. Herod, i. 124.' It is, I think, 
 most simple to explain the usage from such a phrase as 6 debt rpbs t]ij,S>v ianv 
 iv. 92 ; that which stands by our side, and acts from that position, being sup- 
 posed to make in our favour. 
 
 (d.) T^v vo«(iax'<iv iroi<i<rai. Observe the difference between the active 
 and middle voices, 'Activum de ducibus ponitur, qui auctores sunt ut pugna 
 fiat.' Cf. iv. gi, v. 59, 80, P. Compare the phrases yo/uoc delvai. and Biadai, 
 TpoTTotov CTTJaai, and aTri(Ta.a6ai (v. ad c, 79, f.) <>'''''<' ™'' 
 
 'AST|va((i>v. Cf. adi. nob. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXVII.— (a.) fipo. See note on i. 75. a,., and the article 
 referred to in the Classical Museum, and tr. if as it seems. o^X^ 
 
 SiKaCav K. T.X. — does not afford, or bring with it, any just ground of inference, 
 that it should alarm you, i.e. gives you no reason for drawing such a conclusion 
 as would alarm you. riKiiapinv, Kriig. calls the object-accusative, and t6 iK<t>o- 
 jS^o-oi the resultative accusative. His interpretation does not differ from the 
 above. Keiske's notion that rb iK<poprj<Tat is the immediate object, and 6ik. 
 
253 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 TeKii. the predicative accusative, though mentioned by the editors, is not, I 
 think, to be approved. He would tr. ' has not the fact of its having alarmed 
 you as u, just ground of inference.' Jelf, § 670, remarks that the article 
 would naturally be attached to the substantive infinitive, when especial em- 
 phasis was to be laid upon the notion which it expresses, and as this infin. 
 always stands to the preceding verb in the relation of the accusative, this article 
 is always the neuter rb. On ^x^' f°i' """P^X^'j '^- "■ 4'> ^'/"■"dxTTiffiv Ix^i, i. 9, 
 i. 47. b., iv. 126. Is vaunaxCav (idXXov. Of. Tac. Hist. ii. 40, 
 
 'Non ut ad pugnam, sed ut ad bellandum profecti,' Popp. 
 ?<r<j)T)\ev — tripped us up, or laid us ty the heels, i.e. was the cause of our 
 failure. 
 
 (5.) rrfi 'Yvi6|j.r)s to f,i] Kara KpoLros vi.KT)fllv. There is considerable variety 
 of opinion about this passage. Arn. tr. nor ought our spirits, which, so far 
 from having been fairly beaten, have that within them which still bids defiance to 
 the enemy, to lose their edge from the result of chance. This is right in the 
 main, but yvthiir] is not 6v^6s or spirit (an usage of which I*find no example), 
 it should rather be ' will,' in the sense of a resolved pwpose, cf. i. 32. Such is 
 its frequent force in the P. V., see e. g. yv^^ri (rro^icijv drep euBOvujv, v. 295. 
 The whole then will mean, that part of our resolution which has not been van- 
 quished in an overmastering way, but still retains within a defiance for the foe, 
 should not be cowed by what is the result of nothing but accident, or by the result 
 of mere accident at any rate, for such is the effect of ye, and the phrase differs 
 much from the Schol. explanation, ry dTro^dcrri ^vjxipbpq., quoted by most of the 
 editors. We have rrjs yviii/ii]s to /ii] k. t. X. instead of t] jxt) Kara Kpdros viKti- 
 Biiaa yvilifiti, because the orator would not be so unreasonable as to ascribe mo 
 moral effect to defeat ; he insinuates that while any part of the old heroic 
 resolve is still left, it ought to hold out against the caprice of fortune. 
 'i\ov Tiva avTi\o'y£av I think expresses the state of one who is not entirely 
 silenced by his adversary, but has still a word to give him in reply. Cf. i. 31. 
 d, and v. 76, yevop.^V7]s iroWijs dvTtXoyLas, viii. 53. toKK-^v dvTiXoylav Kal 
 <rxeT\i.a<T/i&y, where the word plainly implies a violent dispute between two 
 parties. It is possible that Popp. 's meaning, ' JRcchtfertigungsgrilnde,' counter 
 plea, or argument in excuse, justification, ma^y he correct. Kriig.'s interpre- 
 tation would diflfer from the above in making t6 /ir] viKriSiv Tijs yyuifois the 
 accusative coming after d/i^XiipecrBai, and following the analogy of dfi^XiveaBai, 
 TTjv yvd/iTiv, and similar phrases. In this case the rjp.ds, which is the subject of 
 dp,^\ivea8ai,, is again supplied without change before vo^t(rai. 
 Iv8^«<r9tti. See i. 124. 140, and iv. 18. e. tovs awois is made 
 
 by Am. the predicate, the brave should always be the brave, the same persons, 
 and we may quote in confirmation 6 airb^ elfii rf yvttiixjj, iii. 38, and v. 75) ^9 
 well as CEd. Tyr. v. 557, ouVos eliu tQ ^ooXei/xaTi. But it is also possible to 
 make roiis airoiis the subject, 'tis right to hold that those who remain unchanged 
 in purpose are brave men rightly so called (or as Kriig. has it gebiihrender weise 
 i.e. as is seemly they should), and not to think that they can while still retaining 
 courage (or claiming to be brave men) by putting forward inexperience as a« 
 excuse with any show of reason show the white feather in any respect. The 
 adverbs elKbrc^JS and dpdws seem to be contrasted, and are used in a somewhat 
 peculiar manner. Cf. note upon (piXlus oi TroXe/itos, iii. 65. The metaphor 
 
Chap. 88.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 353 
 
 contained in iTpoPa\\o|i^vavs is 'shielding themselves behind inexperience as a 
 pretext.' 
 
 (c.) ^vf[[ir\v here seems to be the faculty of recollection. Krug. quotes 
 /i^/ivfiirOii) &yaff6s eTvai, Xen. Andb. iii. 2. 39. fivev e«<ln)x'as. This 
 
 is a sort of fallacy not uncommon in practice, though not noticed in the rheto- 
 rical treatises, where the speaker covertly implies the incompatibility of two 
 qualities, and argues from the presence of one the absence of the other. See 
 for illustration Mr. Maoaulay's remarks upon Montagu and Harley, Vol. iv. 
 iKirX'f|cr(rei — frightens out. Cf. rb Xvirriphv ^KirK-qaGei, ii. 38, and Aristotle's 
 ^KKpoOet TT}v ivepyeiav. irpjis Ji^v rb ep-ireipdrepov k.t.X — against 
 
 their superiority in practice, place your superiority in courage. 
 TDX^v. With no expressed participle. Cf. i. 32. b. 
 
 {d.) Tepi,ylyvera,i — there results as a balance in your favour, i.e. after the 
 calculations just recommended, as the verb is used ii. 39. The meaning arises 
 from the force of Tepl, 'over and aiove,' i. 2. b. See a somewhat remarkable 
 combination of the prop, with elfu, vi. $5, iroXKifi T<fi ireplovri, and again viii. 
 46, iK irepiovTos, ex-abundanti. TrXt)flos — superior numbers. Cf. 
 
 sapra i. 106. b. ns, and infra 89. a. to, iroXXd, adverbially, as 
 
 i. 13. a. So Napoleon said, Providence generally favours the strong 
 battalions. ovtoI TaBra k. t. X. — the fact that these very mishaps 
 
 have befallen us will teach us better for the future. In accordance, as Arn. 
 says, with the pi-overb Traflij/tara p.a8i)p.aTa. 
 
 (e.) rb Ka6' lavrdv — so far as concerns himself, Kriig. rather in his own 
 particular depa/rtment, or duty. xapav. I have pointed out in a note 
 
 upon .dilsch. Agam. 11. (Terminalia ii.) that this is the technical military word 
 for 'station.' Cf. iv. 126. e., i. 28, iii. 22, vii. 49, viii. •ji.'S.e-a. Anab. iv. 8. 15. 
 >hy — PovXi^Btj. On fiv, as distinguished from el, see note i. 120. c, and on Kal, 
 to be rendered by an emphasis on the auxiliary verb, see i. 15. b. 
 TiiiTicrovTai. We have the regular passive form, riiJ,ri8rj<TovTai., vi. 80, but on 
 these middle for passive forms, see i. 68. c. 81. b. The instrumental dative 
 in this case makes it more difficult to give the middle sense — shall win honour 
 for themselves by means of the rewards, <S:c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIII.— (a ) rb irXfjeos. Cf. supra, 87. d. 
 IwurrduEvoi. Haack rightly remarks that this is equivalent to Kara ^vffrda-eis 
 yiyv6p,evoi, sup. 27. 2, forming into groups among themselves. kv 
 
 Tu irapivTi. There is doubtless, as Kriig. notices, a sort of reference to 
 Trpbrepov — under the existing circumstances. HKtye. Note the im- 
 
 perfect of continuous action ; he kept telling them, or, it was his wont to tell them. 
 Kriig. says ws may be simply attached to ^\eye, and the woi'ds irpoTrapeaKeiL/a^e 
 Tas yvibp.as considered as a Sii niaov. But it is in reality attached to both 
 verbs for the plain reason that irpoirapetxKeiia^e is a sort of epexegesis to ^eye. 
 It was by what he said to them that he prepared them to adopt the notion tr. 
 prepossessed their minds with a notion. oirots — avTois. The 
 
 repetition is awkward, but the first airdis is the dative, as in the common usage, 
 Q,md mihi Celsus agit—for them, i.e. which they might meet with. See remarks 
 on ch. 89. c. 
 
 (5.) Sy'^ov vnrcYwpciv. One of the cases where a neuter verb passes into 
 
254 NOTES OSr THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 an active one, because it expresses some action commonly described by an 
 active verb ; as it has an active sense it takes an active construction. So 
 iire^eXdSiTes toiJtous, iii. 34, and iv. 28, i^ai>exiip^'''''A. elprffiipa — was for backing 
 out of what he had said. Cf. in Latin 'egredi urbem,' and similar phrases. 
 Popp. refers to Pflugk ad Eur. Bee. v. 812. See Jelf, § 548. ob. The word 
 6x^05 is used with somewhat of contempt. Remark the absence of the article 
 with 'AB7)va'ioi and HeKoTrovvrialav, conveying, as it does, the reason of the fact 
 implied in the verb. 4ir(i(i.vT)<ri.v — roii 6apo-eiv. This is not, I 
 
 think, as Dale and some others have understood it, to put them in mind of the 
 confidence they once felt, but it is simply, as Kinig. has it, an exhortation to con- 
 fidence, as iv. 17. b., iir6p.v7]<nv roG Ka\u}S jBouXei^aatrdaL. So too /Ai/ip^tr/ceo'^at 
 is by no means always recordari, but sometimes merely mentionem facere, 
 i. 10, B.XKwv iJ.eyiBovs iripi. oiiK iiivrjnBri, i. 37, ii. 45. b., iii. 90. It is, however, 
 easy to see how one idea runs into the other. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXIX.~(a.) rh ■:z\t[6o^. Cf. ch. 87. d. That the interpre- 
 tation there given is correct seems clear from the fact, that the contrary notion 
 is here expressed by o^k atrb toO i<7ov — not on an equal scale. This, at least, I 
 believe to be the meaning of the woi ds, from such phrases as /xj; airh dpTiird'Kov 
 Tra,pa(TKevfis, i. Qi ; and diro toO tirov, i. 77, 99, 136, 1 43, where see note ; iii. 
 10, II ; dwd Tou tffou 6/xiXoOpres, and many others, as dirb tCiv bp-otiav, viii. 89. 
 Kriig., however, inclines to the interpretation, with inferior means for prepa- 
 ration. 
 
 (!i.) ?ireiTa & hAXioto, k. t. X. I should be inclined to tr. this controverted 
 passage — ' A nd then with regard to the point upon which they principally place 
 their reliance in coftiiing forward to the combat, as though it were a peculiar pre- 
 rogative of theirs to be brave men, they feel confident for no other reason than 
 on account of their general success, which they owe to their experience in land 
 service, and they fancy it will do the same for them at sea.' The relative if has 
 for its antecedent either tovto simply (Am. Kriig.), or we may assign it to the 
 class of cases mentioned by Madvig, Gr. Gr. — 'A preceding relative sentence, 
 with a relative in the neuter, occasionally assigns merely the action, opinion, or 
 utterance, upon occasion of which something is remarked in the principal sen- 
 tence, and signifies with regard to.' In this case, the clause in apposition is 
 OJS TrpoarjKov eXvai. The verbs otopraL and ddpaoOiriv are, despite what Arn. says, 
 simply connected by the conjunction. As for the subject of iroi'^acu', it seems 
 to me in vain to dispute whether it be rijp ip/ireiplav k, t.X., or the rb dvSpelov 
 implied in the tovto, which is antecedent to (fi, for both are possible, and neither 
 can be disproved. The last, as neitrer, looks more probable. t)> ik 
 
 .... irepUffTai — But this in all justice, i. e., rb airb, — that is to say, the Sfuc- 
 cess, rb KaropdoOv, implied in KaTopBovpre^, — will, as things a^'C, turn out (come 
 round) to be ours. This appears simple and unobjectionable. But other Editors, 
 as Giill. and Am., refer rb di to iruTTeiopTes TrpoaipxovTai., and make it the 
 confidence of victory; vepi^irrat — will be as balance in owr favour. Cf. irepi- 
 yi~/pcTai,, supra, oh. 87 d. Their principal argument is, that we have 4k toS 
 SiKalov, and not 4k toO eMros. But to say, that the expectation of what is pro- 
 bable is a 'just expectation,' is surely natural in all languages. Cf. ch. 87. a, 
 SiKalap rijp riKfitapcriv, Popp., on i. 5 1 b, has collected a great number of similar 
 
Chap. 89.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2,55 
 
 adverhial phrases — ix tov ^avepoO, iK toS ofiotov, &c. ; elwep — if we grant for 
 the sake of argument. kv iKtlvio — in that other case; i. e. by land. 
 
 ra Sk K.T.\. — but in what we either of ws possess superior experience, therein 
 we possess superior courage. If tI be read before iiiireipSrepoi, it may either 
 be a mere qualification, at all, or it may mean more experience in am,y matter, 
 whatever it be. 
 
 (c.) Sid Tf|V 0-<|>eT£pdv 8o|av — for their own glory's sake, i. e., upon purely 
 selfish principles, without regard to the interest of the allies — ' SiA hio valet 
 li/e/ca ut iv. 102, v. 53,' Popp. See Jelf, § 627. ovk av lire- 
 
 y^iip^trav k. t. X. i.e., if not subjected to some compulsion of the kind. 
 irapd iroXti. Cf. i. 29 c. Trio-TdTcpov — ' one for which there is 
 
 more ground.' ovk &,v fJ7o€vTai — by hyperbaton for riyouvTai 6.v 
 
 avBlarairBai. The usage is to be explained upon the same principle as the 
 double tv. When anything contingent is to be stated, the Greeks prepare the 
 hearer for it at once by bringing forward, even out of its place, or at the risk of 
 repetition, the particle used to denote such contingency. See e.g. infra c. 94. a. 
 Am. compares the German practice of placing the auxiliary verb at the com- 
 mencement, and reserving the principal verb for the close of the sentence. 
 TOii ^apol iroXii. These words might certainly stand for a noun, like t6 wapainKa, 
 iii. 4 b.; T(^ Trap' iXirtda, iv. 62. Most editors, however, supply vevLK7]K4vai from 
 the preceding ■jrpovevi.K'qK^va.L — worthy of the very signal victory iDhich you have 
 gained; and this seems confirmed by i. 29, ivlKija-av irapa iro'Ki, and ri<Tcn)divTe% 
 ira^&iroXi) just above, to which the article may refer. On wapa, see i. 29 c, 41 c. 
 
 (d.) avTCTraXoi. ' Dubitatur utrum haec vox hie significet, pares viribus 
 an adversaries pugnam committentes.' Popp. But says Krtig. d^TiiraXot 
 never signifies enemies, in Thuc. ; and surely this is true. The collocation 
 shows the word to be contrasted with e/c iroW^ iirobeeffripav, and therefore to 
 Taea.n fairly matched in point of resources, tr. now 'tis when fairly matched in 
 externals that men in the generality of cases {as the Lacedemonians now) go fmth 
 against the foe, relying msre on might than policy ; but those who on very iim- 
 equal terms, yet entirely of their own free vjill, do the same thing ; these I say, 
 ' dare to meet the foe, because the assurance in their own minds is something very 
 powerful indeed — i. e. they must have some very powerful assurance in their own 
 minds to give them courage to meet the foe. In most of the cases where you 
 find men in battle trusting to strength and courage, rather than calculation, 
 they are at least upon equal terms with the foe ; where, therefore, you find 
 them doing the same thing upon very unequal terms, you may be sure they 
 are supported by a superabundance of vigour and resolution. This is one of 
 those passages which is easily slurred over, but becomes diflScult upon exami- 
 nation. The above is, I think, the right interpretation. Of course after oi b' 
 we must supply i-n-epxbp-evoi. irtoTJVOi— the word recurs, v. 14. 
 
 Dionysius reckons it among the yKoTTiiSt) of Thuc. Krtig. remarks that it ia 
 not found elsewhere in Gr. prose, but in Arist. A"«6. v. 949. tw o4k- 
 
 eIkoti that which is contrary to all reasonable expectation, improbability. We 
 
 may tr. a/re more afraid of us owing to the very ukreasonableness of our con- 
 duct than if we had met them with the proportionate preparation ; or commensu- 
 rate preparations calculated according to reason. The article rfi is used be- 
 cause the writer means the sort of preparation commonly found in such cases. 
 
256 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II, 
 
 This is, I think, a fair answer to Kriig.'s objection founded on the need of 
 its absence. He himself tr. our calculaile force, the force which they ca/n 
 calculate, but surely of Kara \byov thus used ' desiderantur exempla.' For 
 the sentiment, of. vi. 34. 
 
 (e.) TToXXcl a KoV — amd fv/rther again — Vfir\ as frequently, ere now, cf. 77, 
 c. ; and with Kriig. ^roXXa ^6^ ffTparbire^a hib, ti)v Tota&njv d/3Tra7^i' dTrtiXcTo. 
 Plat. Sep. p. 469. iiTt(r(v. Haase, according to a style of criticism 
 
 more popular formerly than at present, altered this word to lirraurev, because 
 he did not find the verb irttrTa so used in Thucyd. But we hare rifv fieyoKtii/ 
 Zivafxiv TT]s ir6\€tas TreimaKvcav, vii. 77 j and there is no reason in the nature of 
 things, so far as I can see, why a similar metaphor should be inapplicable here. 
 Indeed, as Kriig. remarks, the connexion of the iiri with iTrTaurev would form 
 a greater difficulty. The argument is implied rather than expressed, and some- 
 what resembles that noticed above, 87, c. ' Though the Peloponnesian force is 
 greatly superior, we may still hope to defeat it, for greatly superior forces have 
 frequently succumbed to inferior ones from inexperience or want of spirit. 
 These qualities don't attach to us, but we can't presume so much for them.' 
 £Kol)V rival. This phrase, it is well known, expresses a sort of reservation upon 
 the simple e/civ — willingly if I can help it. I agree with Arn. in thinking it 
 a relic of that early stage of language, when expletive clauses were as common 
 as they now are in the conversation of the vulgar. These garnish their dis- 
 course with many such unnecessary words and phrases, if so be, to be sure, and 
 the like, without much care for their grammatical coherence. The dvai here 
 resembles the former of the above expletives in meaning, the latter in absence 
 of construction. Jelf, § 667, explains — eK^iv etvai = eKibv oOfflav, * according to 
 his real nature,' i. e. really. Madvig, § 151, says, ' The infinitive ehm stands 
 in a restrictive sense with the adjective iKiiiv in negative sentences— (0 be 
 e. at least mllimgly ; rarely in affirmative sentences, and that 
 This I consider nearer the truth. Rost's explanation, § 185, 5, does 
 not materially differ ; he classes it with such cases as the parenthetical ws elireiv, 
 ws iiJ.ol doKelv ; remarking that such infinitives are usually preceded by lis or 
 S<rov, but that they may be omitted. See also, i. 2 1, b. and Herm. Opusc. i. 2'27- 
 (/.) IjipoXfiv. The impact with the (iJ.po\or, i. e. the rosti-um or beak of 
 the ship, cf. vii. 34, 36. Krtig. quotes .ffisch. Persce, l/i/SoXais xoXKoffri/iois 
 TralovTai, v. 407. Tpo(roi|/iv Bekker reads irpobyj/w, perhaps 
 
 rightly says Kriig. cf. iv. 29, d. It has been already remarked how hopeless 
 is the confusion of these prepositions in MSS. Ik iroXXoii— /rom « 
 
 distance, i. e. the space necessary to give impetus for the charge, iv. 32, a. ; 
 100, b. iv Hovr\.— when in need, when in a position that required it, 
 
 I do not think that it is, as Popp. states, exactly equivalent to Seovrus. So in 
 the passage quoted by Kriig. from Dem. iv. 10 — roiruv oiiSivi inliTOTe iv 
 SebvTi. KiKXf>ii(r9e. On an occasion requiring it. SUkitXoi. See i. 49, b. 
 
 oivo<rTpo(|>oC — wheeling back again, i. e. when the enemy's line had been broken 
 by the Si^/cirXous. If the line was but a short distance from the shore, like the 
 French fleet at Aboukir, this would be impossible for want of room in which to 
 turn after passing through the hostile ships. I do not think Am. is right in 
 confounding avaar po<ti-l) with the &.v6,Kpov<Tii, which was backing water after 
 having struck an enemy with the ^p.po\ov, in order to repeat the blow. This 
 
Chap. 90.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 257 
 
 would be possible if the enemy were ever so near the shore, because the attack- 
 ing ship would have the same space to lach in, as it had to advance, ttji/ 
 Tpomlav — the provision, tr. 7 will make the necessary provision. 
 KaO£o*Tao-6aL — constitute itself a regular land .fight. 
 
 (jr.) irapcl rats vavo-C — ' contrary to the sense and the grammar.' Kriig. 
 It is, however, retained by Popp. The objection is, I suppose, that wapli, 
 ' cum dativo' denotes rest near a person, or personified object. See Mad pig, 
 § 75> 2, who however only says usually with persons. Jelf, § 646, e. remarks 
 that this constructio prsegnans, i. e. of motion terminating in rest, is rare with 
 Tapd, and the dative, but quotes Uvai irapi, 'Suraacjiipvei, to go and stay with 
 Tissaphernes. Xen. Anab. ii. 5,27. If irapli, stands here I would tr. go and wait 
 quietly iy your ships. After rats in five good MSS. t« is found : it is expli- 
 cable upon the principles expounded, i. 9, a. i.e. Trap, vavai nirnvres, is a sort of 
 cumulative clause, repeating the idea contained in eilraKroi. Popp. tr. ordinem 
 servantes et apud navem rernamentes. 'Trapa'Y'YE\Xd|ji€va' Is there 
 
 not a special force in the present participle — the words of command as they are 
 given ? ii,io>%, like 1. 70, d^^as iirivoTJ<rai. and iii. 82, ri i/xirXriKTas 6^i, 
 
 denoting quickness, or sharpness of apprehension. 81' 6\lyov, equivalent 
 
 to p,^ in ir6\\ou, supra (f.), and the same phrase, iii. 21, where it is, at a short 
 interval, cf. vii. 36, 71. E(j>op|j.'jja-e(i>s. The word, as Am. shows, is pro- 
 
 perly employed of a UocJcade, as iii. 33, vi. 48, &c., but this it is said impHes the 
 close observation of the blockading squadron. Phormion might weB describe 
 the watch he had been keeping over the Peloponnesian fleet in these terms, and 
 therefore the regular meaning of irjibpp.riaLs is applicable here. I do not think 
 Krug. is right in rendering with Heilmann, Anlauf, the onset ; or der Standort 
 der Pei/nde, the post from which the enemy is observing us. In fact, as Am. 
 says, the word may apply to both parties, watching each other as we are at 
 a short distance. 8 ?s t€. So Bekker, and the other editors, from a 
 
 conjecture of Stephens. The MSS. had fio-re, for which some give fis re, but 
 inappropriately here. |v|ji(f>EpEi es- ' As iv. 26, 3; with an imper- 
 
 sonal dat. i. T23, a. ^s &aov to7s v\jv ^vp.<p4pei,, which is unusual. Cf. also Xen. 
 Hell. vi. 'i, 19. iirep riKi-ara els p.dxn" ^vp.(j>^pei. The xal which some good 
 MSS. insert before ^vixipipei. is unendurable.' Kriig. 
 
 Qi) 6 d.7<Sv. The struggle, containing within itself the idea of the issue of 
 the struggle, tr. great is that for which you have now to fight, i. e. either the break- 
 img up of all the hopes which the Peloponnesians fownd upon their fleet, or the 
 bringing more home to the Athenians their fears respecting the seaj rbv (po^ov, 
 because it refers to what would then be a definite source of peril and appre- 
 hension. oA, either 'again,' with reference to what has been said, 
 § b. Popp. ; or, on the other hand, i. e. ' though you have a great struggle before 
 you.' Krug. 6|ioiai — equal to what they were before. Cf. i. 35, 
 oix 6p,oia 7] iXKoTpioia-is, and ii. 80, iii. 40, u. IS^Xoucriv — literally, 
 do not choose to be, tr. are not readily ; there is a similar Homeric usage — p.lp,vei.v 
 oiK iBiXeffKov ivivTiov. II. xxi. 366, and somewhat similarly — to. Shdpa oidiv 
 p,' iSiXei, SiSdffKeiv. Plat. Phmd. 230, D. Cf. the more common analogous use 
 of <j>CKia. 
 
 Chapteb XC. — iropcKeXevCTO. — 'cohortatus est,' Cses. Cf. Xen. Andb. 
 
 s 
 
258 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 iv. ■!, II. iir\ Teero-dptov. ■ — ' Fowr abreast.' Of course, if M 
 
 /jiids reray jiivoi means ' in single line,' as Poppo observes (or, as it is called tech- 
 nically, 'in lime of battle ahead'), iirl Tecr<r. must mean four abreast. 4tI fu.S.s 
 is equivalent to the 6p6ws X6xos of land warfare. Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. u. s., 
 and Miiller's Dor. ii. p. 246 (Eng. ed.). 'Matth. (Or. § 584) quotes this passage 
 of Thuc. to show that M reo-ir. means fow deep ; but it is to be recollected 
 that a column fow abreast, when turned into line, becomes fonr deep.' v. 
 Grote, vi. p. 277 n. ; Thirlw. iii. p. 155. IttIt^iv Iodtov fi\v. — 
 
 See this passage discussed, Appendix ii. 86|i$ K^pa t|7ov|i.^v(^ — 
 
 ' the right squadron vmder Timocratea led the va/n.' The circumstantial or modal 
 dative. Jelf, § 603-4, 699 ; cf. Matth. § 405. Iirl 8' air^ — 
 
 q' in it ; in the right wing. dpa — ' if, as they had every reason 
 
 to suppose, Phormio should suspect Naupaotus to be the object of the attack.' 
 nr\f6vTa itrhrXovv. The expression appears so strange that Krug. woidd adopt 
 Dobree's conjecture TrWoires ; others quote 'tanti belli impetus navigavit.' Cic. 
 de imp. Cm. Pomp. § 34. We must tr. im, mid course. 8|(i) toS 
 
 IttwTuv K^pwS' To illustrate this by an analogy from land-fighting, compare 
 Xenophon's account of the two lines at Cunaxa, Anab. i. 8, 13, TOffoih-yyip 
 TrX^Sei irepiijv panXeis ffiffre /Ji.4<rop t6 iavToO Ix"" '"'''' Ki^pou eiiapiip.ov l^a 9iv. 
 Observe that atpCov and eavTov refer to the same subject, as viii. 76, P. 
 
 (c.) ep'^jio) 6vTi =i dvdptijTrtav oiiK ivdvTUJv. Ch. 25 a., undefended; as the 
 Messenians were marching along shore. Kard |j.Cav iieX K^pus. The 
 
 complete phrase: Kord /ilav alone might mean one deep; of. vi. 32. Both toge- 
 ther mean in single file. Cf. Herod, vi. 12 ; Liv. xxxvii. 29, 25. 
 irpjis Tij 7'fi — close off shore. (leTwinjSov — ' adverds frantibus,' 
 
 P. ; junctis frontibus, Goll. ; t& iUtoito, irapeixav toU ivavrlots, Schol. P. cf. 
 Liv. xxxvii. 23, 'In frontem directas habebant naves, et in frontem dirigebant ;' 
 H^c conversione unum ilium gtIxov quem iirl K^pws TrX^opres efi&ciebant, muta- 
 verunt in unum ^vybv. P. cf. Mull. Eumen. The word is itself an fiTraf \€y. 
 in Thucyd. ; but we have rb la-u liiruTtov, 'the inner front of the wall,' m. 
 11. Thuc. V. 10. 
 
 (d.) MS «tx' T^xovs. — V. Jelf, § 528. lirurTpo(ti^v — 'the 
 
 sudden tacMng round,' as we should say. It is used for any rapid evolution 
 or manoeuvre in war ; see Soph. (Ed. Col. 1045. Keisig. cipv\ci>pCav, not 
 
 ' open sea,' but comparatively open, mid-channel. i^iairav, Duker says, 
 
 is the technical phrase for driving an enemy's ship on shore. Of. vii. 36, 52 ; 
 viii. 104-5. 8U<|>9eipov — disabled, cf. 1. 49-50. 
 
 i'iro(f>cv'YO<)o-as — ' o« they were endeavouring to escape. ' avaSoii)i6voi 
 
 — 'lashing them wnd towing them astern.' Cf. Xen. Hell. v. i, 21; andi. 50, 
 oix et\Kop ivaSoifiemi. a^Tots ttvSpicri. v. Matth. § 405 ; Jelf, 
 
 § 604, I, iv. 14, I. lireo-paCvoVTes. Cf. iv. 14 b, Koi iirea^al- 
 
 vovres is t^v dd\a<r(rap ^iiv roh dVXots &vdeL\KQv &vTi\afi^av6fi€V0L tuiv vewp. 
 Wading, heavy armed as they were, into the sea, and having boarded the ships, 
 they fought from the decks, and recovered the ships while in the very act (ijdri) 
 of being carried off. 
 
 Chapteb XCI. — {a.) (j>9d,voip<riv. — '^B-qvalot, sc. Observe the change of 
 subject. ((Txcuo-ai dvrCirpaipoi K. t. 'A. — forming, close in shore, 
 
Chap, g'i.j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 259 
 
 m line of iattle off the temple of Apollo, with their prows facing the enemy. 
 Cf. iv. 8, 14, vii. 34, 36, 40, viii. 53; Herod, viii. 11 ; Diod. xii. 61 ; Weaa. K. 
 &|i,vvov|j.evoi. Observe the change of gender. We have lffxov<rai. just before. 
 (Tx^M" ""P^' ■'■^ arnxaivbiievov — ^the crews implied in the ships. So below, we 
 have Ka6eT<rat followed by pov\6/iem. 
 
 (6.) Iiraiuvi^ov &|ia irXlovres — 'chanted the Pcean as they sailed along.' 
 On the V. L. ivaiibvi^ov and iirauivi^op, see note, ad i. 50, and Wessel. ad 
 Diod. xiii. p. 554. iroXv irpb — '/or ahead of the rest.' 
 
 op|jiov(ra )JiET^(i)pos — 'lying at anchor in the open roadstead.' Cf. i. 48 a., vii. 
 71, Sohol. <|>6d(ra(ra. Some MSS. have fcni irepi7rXeiJ<ra(ra (can- 
 
 celled or obelized by Bek., Popp., and GoU.), performing the evolution called 
 repiTXovs, the whole being equivalent to (pdA^aaa Surre irepiirXeSaai. 
 
 (c.) irapd X(57ov. Cf. 0,85 b. KaSeio-ai ras Ktoiras — 'de- 
 
 missis remis ;' Liv. xxx vi. 44, ' holding water,' as we say. iiriaTtiaav toO ttXoC, 
 'stopped their way.' Cf. Matth. § 353, 5 ; Jelf, § 517. d|4>|i,(|>opov — 
 
 ' rem perniciosam,' ai. i. 32; literally ' inutilem,' by /neiwiris. Blomf. quotes 
 an early instance from Hes. Op. et Dies, /j.d\' &(r6fi(l>opos iffrt tpirot-ffLv. The 
 Latins use 'inutilis' in the same manner. See Heusing. ad Cic. de Off. iii. 13, 
 quoted by P. ; and so dxpeios, Horn. 11. ii. 269 ; cf. Stallb. ad Plat. Fist. 
 334 A. d,\v<Ti.Te\iis, Polyb. lii. T16 ; Hebr. xiii. 17. irpiis Tf|v 
 
 A,VTt|(5piiT]<riv — ' propter incursionem quam hostis ex brevi spatio in ipsas erat 
 facturus,' Port. &vTe^bpii,ritri.vhs,a no connexion in signif. with i(p6piiiri(ns in c. 89, 
 which implies taking a position from which they could watch one another, from 
 ippAii). This is from opp-da. [So we have in the next sentence iTr' airov! 
 ffipjUT/ffo;'-]—' considering what a short distance the Athenians were from them, 
 BO that they could make an instantaneous charge upon them.' i^ 6\lyov, cf. c. 
 89, Si iXlyov. Xen. Anab. i. 10. 10, Kr. Pp^X^a — 'shallows,' 
 
 Airian. B. A. i. 18. 'In brevia et Syrtes urget,' Virg. JEn. i. iii ; Lucan 
 ix. 338 ; Tan. Ann. i. 70, iv. 33. <!K€iXav, here intransitive, ' ran 
 
 In iv. 26 e, it is used transitively, and so iiroKiWuv, 26. P. & K. 
 
 Chapter XCII. — (a.) dirj> wis KeXeio-iiaTos. — 'The Athenians were beyond 
 measure elated by the incident, so that a single word from Phormio sufficed to 
 put them in active forward motion.' Grote, vi. p. 283 ; cf. c. 90 c. diri 
 <irjp.dov Ms, Soph. Aj- 704, Lobeck. 
 
 (6.) 8ia<|>66CpaVTEs dv«S^<rovTo. Cf. 90 d. i\ irepl t*|v oXKdSa 
 
 KaT^Sv. An elliptical, but very intelligible expression— ' Which was sunk by 
 the manoeuvring [7re/jnr\oOs] of the Athenian ship round the merchantman.' 
 Il^ireo-ev — ' delatus est; vel proprie a mari ejectus est.' iKirlirTeiv is commonly 
 used in the sense of being cast on shore (so iK<pipej9at, of fragments of wreck, 
 i. 54), both in Thucyd. and Xenophon. Cf. vii. 74, viii. 34. P. = ^f e/3\ij«77 ; 
 
 (c.) Jcmio-av BOev. Another elliptical form — ' erected their trophy at the 
 spot from which they had put to sea.' Cf. with Bl. vi. 68, i^ ^s Kpare'iv 5ei. 
 vavdvia. The younger student may observe the difference between vavayla 
 and rauii^ia,— the former meaning a shipwreck, the latter /ro^mm^s of wreck. 
 ivtlkovTO— recovered, U. picked up; cf. i. 54. Cf. Xen. Bell. i. vii. 4, in the 
 famous papsagedescribingthebattle of ArginusBiE,8i6rioi;/cdpeaowo7-oi>!rau(i7oi/s. 
 
26o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 rpoiratov Tijs Tpoirfjs fis k. t.X. — sub. tSv veuv. v. Steph. ap. Pop. ; cf, vii. 54 ; 
 Lobeck ad Soph. Aj. 254. av^Oeo-av. Cf. 84 c. ; i. e., to Poseidon, 
 
 whose temple stood there ; cf. Strab. viii. p. 3.^5. The. promontory seems to 
 have been called Drepanum, from its shape. Gottl. 
 
 (d.) virb viiKTa — at nightfall, or wider cover of night. ats ^Sei. 
 
 K. says the dat. is naturally used here : — The ships with which they were to 
 have CO- operated ; cf. 83, a. and i. 116, &c. P. supplies airois, and says this 
 is an isolated instance of iSei with a dative. Cf. Matth. § 391. 
 
 Ohaptbk XCIII.^ — SiaXvcrai. Transitive — 'Before Cnemus and Brasidas 
 allowed the combined fleet to disperse.' Diod. xii. 49. X^K'^vos. — 
 
 October. Thirl w. i\,%ai,&.vrav—at the suggestion. airoircipao-ai. 
 
 Cf. vii. 43, 6,iT0TreipS.<Tai. toO ■n-a,paTei.xl(Tiw,TOS, and i. 61 d. P. ; and iv. 135, 
 Aireireipaaev Bpa(ri5as IToriSaias. d,cj>6\aKTOS, cf . c. 1 3, f. &KXT|irTos. 
 
 See below, 94 c. to liriKpoTeiv. ' Such was the confessed superiority 
 
 of the Athenians at sea, that while they guarded amply the coast of Attica 
 against privateers, they never imagined the possibility of an attack upon their 
 own main harbour,' Grote vi. p. 286. to inrr\pi<nov — 'fitting cloth.' 
 
 Grote, who thus follows the Schol. , who explains it as ri Kuas (J iTiKdOrjinai oi 
 ipicrffovres 3i4 rb fiTj crvin-pi^eaBai. airui' ras irvyd,!, a veiy intelligible explana- 
 tion to any boating man. They had doubtless a second object, viz. to provide 
 against the loss of force in the stroke which takes place when the oarsman sits 
 upon a slippery surface. See the Appendix to Am. Thucyd. by Dr. Bishop. 
 The jokes, however, in Aristophanes upon the subject, seem to indicate that the 
 skin of the Athenian seamen was rather more sensitive than the worthy Dr. 
 imagines. Cf. Ar. Ranm, v. 223. Bl. quotes Plut. Them, iv., GeynurTojcX^s ds 
 inr7}p4(Ttov Kal Kitnn}V avviffTeike rhv tQ>v 'A67jvai(av Sijpiov ; and Isocrat. p. 688. 
 Thirl wall (iii. 157) supposes that the sailors made these iiTiipiffm, seat covers, also 
 available for sleeping on at night. [Cf. Virg. Georg. iii. 313, Usum in castro- 
 rum et miseris velamina nautis.] It is used for a saddle-cloth or riding-pad, 
 Diod. XX. 4. TpoirwTfjpa — ' the loop whereby the oar was fas- 
 
 tened to the oar-hole in the side, and thus prevented from sUpping.' Grote, 
 u. a., who says that, especially with the oars of the Thranitse, some thong must 
 have been required to prevent the oar from slipping downwards, whether the 
 fulcrum of the oar was formed by a thowell or notch on the gunwale, or by 
 a perforation in the ship's side. ' Lorum quo remus ad scalmum (s. paxillum) 
 alligatur.' Cf Bl. ad jEsoh. Pers. 382. Leake {Att. p. 139) describes a similar 
 thong used in the modern Greek galleys. P. Euderring, Heilm. Thirlwall 
 (u. s.) calls it the thong for fastening the oar to the peg of the rowlock. Homer 
 calls them T/)07ro£ ; Od. iv. 782, ijpTiivavTO S' ^per/ict Tpoiroh iv SepfiaTivoiaLV (a 
 line repeated, viii. 53). They appear to have been also called arpotjtol, corrupted 
 in Latin into ' struppus.' [Mr. Rich (s. v.) gives » drawing of the manner of 
 fastening the oars in a Mediterranean galley of the i6th century, and quotes 
 Vitruv. X. 3, 6, andLiv. ap. Isodor. Orig. xix.4, 9]; v. Schol. aA Axist. Ach. 523. 
 «Tr€l oAt' iirb toB irp' K. T. X. — ' Nam nee aperte eos ausuros esse (adnavigare) 
 quiete (i. e. se rem non prohibentibus), neque si in aniraum induoerent, se non prae- 
 sensuros,' P. [But it is also very probable that Kad' i](rvxiav may mean 
 ' quietly' in the sense of deliberately, in cool hlood.'] For &ivb tov irp. cf. i. 35 d. ; 
 
Chap. 94.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 261 
 
 for Kad' ijtrvxlav, in the sense of 'quiete,' see i. 83, iy. 22, 117, vii. 40, 73-4, 
 viii. 27. On the use of f,i^ &v in a conditional proposition, see Jelf, 810, i, 
 814 ; Matth. § 520-3. On ToX|jifjo-ai after iwel, Jelf, 88g. The infinitives 
 seem to depend upon some verb signifying ' expectation,' to be supplied from 
 irpocrdoicla. Bekker corrects oidi-oiSi (apparently with reason, though without 
 MSS. authority) into offTe-oflre. Kal lx<ipovv. Kal, in its usual 
 
 meaning of carrying into effect a preconceived plan. (So ch. 49, xai ISpaa-av, 
 they actually did it.) xal retains this sense in the form d Kal, Kal Srj with the 
 p.p. &c. K. cf. iv. 8, vii. 60, viii. 1, 3, 27 ; cf. Jelf, 761-3. 
 X^^CTOi implies (as elsewhere in Thucyd.) that it was not his opinion that this 
 was the real cause of their abandoning their original intention. 
 Til aKpur/jpiov — i. e., poiSopov, as we learn from the next chap. This was the 
 western promontory of Salamis, only three miles distant from Nissea. The 
 fortress which stood on the peninsula bore the same name. (It is sometimes 
 written ^oiSapov, Steph. Byz. b. v.) Cf. iii. 51 ; Diod. xii. 49 ; Strab. xi. 446. 
 <|>vXaK^. Cf. ch. 69. 'A squadron maintaining a strict blockade to prevent 
 all imports and exports' (|Ut) icrir'Keii/ /iijS' ^KirXeiv fi7)Sh). 
 
 Ohaptek XCIV. — (a.) Is toIs 'ABTJvas. to convey the intelligence to 
 Athens. ij>p«KTo£ iroX4|i.ioi.. ' War-beacons, ' to distinguish them 
 
 from those used in peace. Cf. iii. 22, 80. From the long note of the Scholiast 
 it appears that they resembled those used in the middle ages, and which are 
 figured in most works on heraldry. The peace signal was borne quietly 
 [ilpe/iowTes], Schol. The war signal was shaken [KivoCvres], in token of alarm. 
 Diod., xii. 49, 4, expresses it by the word Trvptreiuv. Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 8, 
 15 ; Burip. El. 694 ; Polyb. x. 43. The classical passage, in illustration, is of 
 course the commencement of the Agamemnon of ^schylus. Cf. Herod, vii. 
 182, ix. 3. So (jypvKTapia. Soph. Tr. 379; Arist. Av. 1161 ; and the passive 
 form tppvKTwpdirdai.. Time. iii. 80. So-ov oiK. v. Oelf, 823, 
 
 obs. 1. ovK flv fiv£(i.os. Dale tr. 'It was not a wind which would 
 
 have prevented them.' There is a sort of irony implied. Tr. therefore 
 ' always supposing of course that the wind had not prevented them.' See note 
 on X^yerai in the previous chap., and K. Engelman tr. has ' der Wind wwrde 
 sie nicht gehindert haben/ 
 
 (c.) SoTTi 7ci.p 8,Ti' to a certain extent. The reading now adopted for the 
 old IffTt yd.p ire, from Abresch's emendation. OT^-youo-oi. ' not 
 
 heing water-tight.' 'Quseaquarum vim ferre non poterant.' P. cf. j3Esch. jS. 
 Th. 204 (with Blomfield's note), 793; Swpp. 135, SKa (Triyoiv. Eur. Fr. Inc. 9 ; 
 /pA. 4., 888; Plat. iJs^., 621 A. ireJoC. On foot. The objections 
 
 of Popp. and Kriig., who would read ircfj, are quite nullified by irefoiis Tropevo- 
 fihous. vii. 75, 7 . Said also of sailors proceeding by land. Orit. iii. D. ; 
 Plut. Philop. 14. (loiXXov. ' more diligently,' as often in Thxic. 
 
 Xi|jilv(i>v KX'ticrei — karbow-shuiting, and other kind of precaution. For the 
 indefinite plur. Xip-ivav. Cf. ad i. 93, b. Cf. Thuc, iv. 8, c. Diod., u. s., 
 rhi/ 5k Ueipaia KXeiSpoLi Kal <f>v\aKaU kai'ars SiaXo^SicTes (custodiis opportunis 
 locis coUooatis) &xipa<rav. Hesych. in Tiia. ?x« 5^ 6 nei.pai.eis Xip-has rpels 
 KXeuTTois. Gottl. See Leake, Athen., p. 338, sq. P. Grote vi., p. 288. 
 'The lesson was salutary to the Athenians; from henceforward Peirasus was 
 
363 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 furnished with a chain across the mouth, and a regular guard down to the end 
 of the war. Forty years afterwards, however, we shall find it just as negli- 
 gently watched, and surprised with much more boldness and dexterity by the 
 Lacedaemonian captain, Teleutias.' Cf. Xen. Hell. v. i, 19. 
 
 Chapter XOV. — (a.) The following episode is of great value (ch. 95-101). 
 Thucyd. himself descended from a Thracian ancestor, living at the time he wrote 
 his history in Thrace, and having considerable possessions and large influence 
 in the country would have ample means of acquiring full information on the 
 subject which he treats. [Cf. Thuo. iv. 104; Herod, v. 16. Marcellin. mi ot<. 
 Grote vi., p. 293. u. With regard to Macedonia, on the other hand, both 
 Miiller (Dor. i. 454, E. T.) and Gatterer consider the accounts of Herodotus to 
 be more accurate than those of Thuoydides. (Gatt. diss, de Herodoti et 
 Thucyd. Thracid, quoted by Miill.) For the Thraoians generally see Herod. 
 V. 3, 9, vii. no, viii. 116, ix. 119; Thuc. ii. 100, vii. 29, 30; Xen. Andb. vii. 
 •2, 38, and the seventh book generally. Grote, iv., p. 28. )(ei|u5vos. 
 
 Thirlwall places this expedition in October. Dodwell (Ann. Thuc.) in October, 
 or Moemaktmon. Grote in November or December. (Observe that Clinton 
 identifies Mcemaiterion with November. Diss, on Attic months, vol. ii., p. 326.) 
 The Athenians complained of the dilatoriness of Sitalkes, who ought to have 
 commenced his invasion at a better season for military operations, but, as Grote 
 observes, the number of independent chiefs over whom he had not even nominal 
 control, rendered this very difficult, if not impossible. 2i.TdX.KT|s. 
 
 Cf. ad chap. 29. "OSpiio-tis. The Odrysse seem to have belonged 
 
 to that northern swarm of barbarians who invaded Thrace after the Trojan 
 war, and their name is often found interwoven with the ancient myths. Thus 
 the Thracian singer Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian (Paus. iv. 33, 4), 
 and Orpheus is represented as their king. In Herod, iv. 92 (see Bahr's note), 
 we find them on both sides the Artiscus (now Arda) ; and the Hebrus itself is 
 said to have had its sources in their country. Their name first occurs in the 
 account of the Scythian expedition of Darius Hystaspis. While the south parts 
 of Thrace were overrun by the Persians, the Odrysians, protected by their 
 mountains, retained their independence. Teres was hence enabled to incorporate 
 many Thracian tribes with his subjects, and to extend his kingdom to the 
 Euxine, in spite of a signal defeat which he sustained in that quarter from the 
 Thyni. [Xen. Anah. vii. 2, 22.] In subsequent times they were completely 
 subjugated by Philip of Macedon. v. Cramer, vol. i., p. 286, sq. Smith's 
 Diet. Geog. o. v. iio 4iro<rx^<r€is. The accusative absolute. 
 
 (TX^/ia KoS' clXoj" /cai ;i4^/30!. 'We sometimes find an accusative without any 
 verb on which it directly depends, followed by two other accusatives of its pai-ts, 
 each with its proper verb, on the joint notion of which it depends.' Cf. Soph. 
 Ant. 21 J Jelf, § 581, 4; Matth., § 288 ; tr. of two promises, wishing to exact the 
 fulfilment of one, and himself to fulfil the other.' Engel. tr. neatly gives the 
 sense : ' Von zwei Versprechungen, die eine einzufordern, die andere selbst zu 
 erfiiUen.' Bl. cf. Hebrews vi. t8. 
 
 (b.) aJTCji {iiroo-xo|uvos. tr. 'having made him certain promises :' what the 
 nature of these promises was Thuc. has not told us. SioXXdleicv. 
 
 Cf. chap. 29. He had done so. *£\nnrov. Perdiccas ought to 
 
Chap. 96.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 263 
 
 have given a certain portion of his kingdom to Philip and to Derdas. [Of. 
 MuUer's Dor. i. 468 ; Thuo. i. 57, u., vi. 7.] From Thuo. words (chap 100 c, k 
 Ttiv ^Mttttov Tpirepov odffap apxlf ) Poppo thinks he had actucUly been put in 
 possession and reigned, but had been expelled by Perdiccas. He was now 
 probably dead, as Sitalcea purposes to restore, not him, but his son Amyntas : 
 Karaydyoi seems also to confirm this view. Iirl pao-iXcCi}. Matt., 
 
 § 586, with a view to placing him upon the throne. o4k lireT^Xei — 
 
 was not for fulfilling. The imperf. implies that he 'showed no disposition or 
 intention to fulfil his promise..' 
 
 (c.) ' A-yvuva,. Most of the modern German editors read this word with an 
 aspirate. This was the founder of Araphipolis, B.C. 437. v. Schol. [Cf. iv, 
 102, i. 57, ii. 58. For Amphipolis, see Clinton, P. H. ii. 261.] Cramer, i. 
 291 ; Thuo. i. 100 ; Arist. Eth. N.m. 7 ; Paus. Att., 29 ; Plin. H. N., iv. 10 ; 
 Acts xvii. 1. 'iUi. Cf. oh. 83. a. The delay of Sitalkes pre- 
 
 vented their sending them. 
 
 Chapter XCVI. — (a.) 6.vi<rrr\mv. Cf. ch. 68. a, 'ex sedilus evocat.' 
 op|''''|i6Vos has here its primary meaning, ' setting out from ; not the usual one 
 in Thuc, 'taking up his head-quarters at.' See note, i. 54. b. 
 Ai|iov. Cf. ch. xix. 6. Mr. Grote (chap, xxv., note) remarks that we learn 
 from the researches of modern travellers and geologists that the ideas of the 
 direction and ramifications of this great range entertained up to the present 
 time are very erroneous. It was considered to be a great belt extending from 
 the Adriatic to the Euxine, running nearly parallel with the coast of the ^gsean, 
 and with spurs branching off in a southerly direction, forming the water-shed 
 of the Hebrus, with its tributaries Artiscus, Agrianes, Contadesdus, Tearus, 
 &o., the Nestus and Strymon. The ancients considered it as the highest range 
 with which they were acquainted, though Polybius thought the elevation less 
 than that of the Alps (xxxiv. 10, 15). It was said that from its summit could be 
 seen at once the Euxine, Adriatic, the Danube, and Alps, and to see this view, 
 Philip, last king of Macedon, made the journey described by Livy (xl. 22). 
 Pliny, iv. 10, estimated its height at 6000 paces. Modem travellers consider 
 the great Balkan to be 3000 feet high. Eeemus proper, like the modern 
 Balkan, extends from Mount Scomiua to the Euxine. It is also known by the 
 name of Emineh Dagh. Horn. II. xiv. 227; Herod, iv. 49 ; Theoc. Id. vii. 76 ; 
 Strab. vii. p. 313; Virg. Georg. i. 491, ii. 489; Ov. Met. vi. 87. v. Cramer 
 i., p. 318; Smith, Diet. Geog , a. v. 6a\do-<n|s €S Ti>v Eii^eivov 
 
 irdvTov. Popp. says this is added because Etff. v. was also used for 'the 
 countries bordering on the Euxine.' Cf. Xen. Anab. v. i, 1. fi^xpi-^ ^""^ 
 6d\aTrap ttjv iv ti^ Eijf e/cy irbvTif. iireppdvTi. The dat. of reference 
 
 rather curiously employed. See Jelf, § 599, i ; Thuc. i. 24. a., ii. 49, c. ; 
 Herod, i. 14, 51, iii. 90, vi. 53, &c. |i^pT]. yirq. ievu>v S-qKovliTi.. 
 
 Schol. Hence Poppo would rather read yivri or SBvt]. K. sees no need of 
 change, and cf. Acts ii. 10. For KaT(^KT|To see i. 120. b. P. 
 
 "loTpov iroTanoO. For the account of the Thracian rivers see Herod, iv. 48, 
 
 9. 5 '-8. 
 
 (i.) r^Ttti. Cf. Herod, iv. 93. 0! deamTl^ovres. The Getse lay between 
 the Hsemus and the Danube, occupying the modem Bulgaria and part of Servia, 
 
264 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 and were equipped like their Scythian neighbours on the other side of the river, 
 with bow and arrow, on horseback. They were reckoned by the ancients 
 among the Thraoian group of nations, a notion wliich is supported by Schafarik, 
 who has written on Sclavonian antiquities. The theory which identified them 
 with the Goths of Scandinavia has been exploded. After the days of Philip of 
 Maoedon they extended over the countries now known as Wallachia and Mol- 
 davia, and became known to the Bomans under the formidable name of Dacians. 
 Mannert even thinks they stretched as far as Transylvania and Hungary. See 
 the valuable note of Bahr, on Herod, u. a. Smith's Diet. Geog. s. v. Dacia. 
 opLoo-KEvoi. ' Cultn similes.' P. cf iii. 95. twv opcivuv . . , 
 
 avTOvd|ji(i)V, In ch. ci. we read of the Autonomous inhabitants of t?ie plain. 
 Atoi. Cf. vii. 27, where we read of 1300 of this race (rov AmkoS y^mvs) who 
 arrived too late to take part in the expedition of Demosthenes against Sicily. 
 Xen. Cyr. vi. z, 10 ; Lips, ad Tac. Ann. iv. 46. Ovid, speaking of these 
 regions, says [Trist.v. 7, 19], — 
 
 Dextera non segnis fixo dare vulnera cultro, 
 Quem vinctum lateri barbarus omnis habet, 
 
 (c.) 'A7piavas koI AaiaCous. (v. Herod, v. 16.) The Pseoniaa Agrianes 
 were a considerable tribe in point of territory and population. Strabo says 
 that the Strymon had its source in their country. They were therefore probably 
 located near the foot of that part of Haemus known to the ancients as Scomius 
 and Ehodope. They were not molested by the Persians when the great removal 
 of the Pffionians took place under Darius. (Herod, u. s.) In the time of 
 Alexander the Great they were under the rule of their native princes, and did 
 him good service in repressing the incursions of the Triballi, who lay on their 
 north frontier. (Arr. E. A. i. 5.) They formed excellent light-armed troops, 
 and are frequently mentioned in the campaigns of Alexander. (Diod. Sic. xvii. ; 
 Q. Curt. i. 12, 14, ii. 13, 10 ; Polyb. ii. 65, v. 79.) v. Cramer, i. p. 274, who 
 says that this is the only passage where the name of the Laesei occurs. They 
 wei'e probably to the east of the Strymon. Smith, Diet. Geog. s. v. 
 2ko|j.(ov. p. reads SKdfi^pov (and so Heysoh.). Scopius in Pliny, ff. N. iv. 
 10 ; Soombrus; Arist. Meteor, i. 13. Cramer, i. p. 273, considers Scomius to 
 be the Ehodope of Herodotus, both being, in fact, summits of the same gi'eat 
 central chain. f'^P^ FpaaCwv. It seems certain from the context 
 
 that the Graseans were the subjects of Sitaloes, and accordingly /lexpi cannot 
 mean, as usually, ' up to a certain point of time, or place objectively.' From 
 this passage therefore, and some others, I am induced to believe that it sometimes 
 has the force of coextensive with, i. e., with that which the succeeding genitive 
 specifies. Here then it implies his empire went just so far as the Qraceans went, 
 and no farther. So in i. 7r, c. (where see note), /xexpi roOSe is, just so far as 
 this goes, and no further. Cf. i. 5T, go, c, and especially /<.ex/pl roO SiKaiov, iii. 
 82. Would not this interpretation entirely simplify that difficult passage, Kom. 
 v. 13 ? dx/" i'6iJ.ov a/iaprla ^v iv Kitr/iip is tr. 'until the la,-w sin was in the world,' 
 though the apostle's argument is, — there is no sin without law: there is sin 
 wherever there is law ; a meaning exactly given by dxpl in the above sense^ 
 ' sin was coextensive with law,' both nouns being anarthrous. I would suggest 
 a similar interpretation for another well-known passage, which has puzzled all 
 
Chap. 97.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 265 
 
 the commentators, and is altered as corrupt by Hermann and others. Ar. Poet. 
 § I a. 7) iiiv odv ^TTOTrii'io Tg Tpa7((i5(5i ;ucx/)i M'^''"" /"^'■/"'i' /"fa X6701I /ii|Ui;(ris dvai 
 (Tirovbaidiv 'riKo\oii8i}<rev, tr. ' The epos has gone along with tragedy only in this 
 one point of being the imitation of exalted characters in metrical language.' 
 This interpretation is, I think, confirmed by another passage in the same treatise, 
 dei /ih fiei^oiv, f^expl too aivS-qKo^ elyai, KaXXiwy i<TTi, where /xexpi is clearly 
 inclusive. Tr. ' tlie longer a plot be, the better it is, provided it be at the same 
 time dear.' /iex. t. a. e. = coincident with clearness. oS upC^ero. 
 
 ' apud quos popidos.' P. {jSr]. ' Having crossed the boundary, you 
 
 are at once in the territory of the autonomous Paaonians.' ijSii usually marks the 
 point of time : here the limit of space. In fact, the two are mixed together. 
 The primary notion is retained in the verb Cipl^ero. K. compares v. 67, vii. 4, 
 viii. loi ; and so Eurip. Mippol. i. ■200, 
 
 wpbs irbvTov ijSr] KeLp.^v7j XapbJvtK6v. 
 {d.) TpiPaXXovs. The Triballi, as we have seen above, lay to the N. of 
 the Agrianes. They bordered also on the Pseonians, and reached to the 
 Danube, ' extending, as far as can be determined, from the plain of Kossovo 
 in modern Servia, northwards towards the Danube,' Grote, xii. p. 31. At the 
 time of Alexander's accession, they were by far the most numerous and power- 
 ful people of Thrace. Alexander began his reign by invading their territory, 
 and having defeated them, pursued them across the Danube, and made them 
 sue for peace. They had previously defeated and wounded his father, Philip 
 (Grote, xi. p. 639). It was while fighting against the Triballi that Sitalces was 
 afterwards killed. Cf. Bahr n. ad Herod, iv. 49 ; Arist. Aves, 1528, 1626. 
 '0<rK£ov. Gatterer (in his treatise quoted above) considers that the proper 
 name of this river is"H(r/cios, OT"E<rKios, which is retained in the modern Isohar 
 or Isker River, near the Danube, and Mannert follows his view. The edd. of 
 Herod, spell it SkiJs and Kios or Kios. In Strab. xiii. p. 590, we find Sxai^s, 
 Plin. H. N. iii. 29, CEscus. Hudson reads 'OitkIov, and so Poppo, Kriiger, 
 and GoUer. Herod, represents it as rising in Mount Ehodope, amongst the 
 Pseonians, and dividing Hiemus in half, iv. 49. Cf. Cramer, i. 273, who speUs 
 it Esoius. Neo-Tos Kal 6 "Eppos. Both these rivers are men- 
 
 tioned as taking their rise in Mount Scomius or Ehodope. In the time of 
 Philip, the Nestus was the boundary of Thrace and Macedonia, and continued 
 to be so under the Roman government. It is spelt both Nestus and Nessus. 
 In the middle ages it was corrupted into Mestus, and is still called Mesto, 
 or Oarasou (Black river) by the Turks, v. Cram. i. p. 308 ; Herod, vii. 109, 
 126 ; Plin. iv. it ; Liv. xlv. 29. The Hebrus, now Maritza, is the principal 
 river of Thrace : rising in the junction of Scomius and Rhodope, it receives 
 many tributaries (v. Herod, iv. 89. 92), and falls into the ^gean near ^nus, 
 forming an estuary called by Herod. Stentoris, vii. 58; Cramer, i. p. 316; 
 Smith's Bid. Qeog. s.v. 'ifi\y.ov. Cf. Herod, i. 117, ^prip,oy oipos. 
 
 The epithet implies that species of wildness and desolation which arises from 
 the absence of human habitations. Bl. cf. the Latin secretus, and supposes 
 that Milton used a Latinism when writing by the secret top of Horeb, &c. 
 
 Chaptbe XCVII.— (ra.) 'ApS^puv. Cf. chap. 29. a. iirl eakaacav Karii- 
 iiovffa taking the line of sea-coast = Tb irapa BdXaa. Herod, ii. 6. 
 
266 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^OOK II, 
 
 aiiTi) ir«/)£irXoi)s itrrXv rj y^. ireplTKovi may be used adjeotively, or substan- 
 tively. The Schol. takes the former view, and so Abresoh. K. inclines to the 
 latter, and of. Herod, ii. 29, ri xuiplov tovto iari, iirl ^ixipas T^acrepas irX6os. 
 (We find the adj. Tp6T\oos, vi. 44.) Karcl irpv|i.vav. Cf. Soph. 
 
 PhU. nc,i. lo-TfiTai — st<md,i.c. be permanently fixed in that 
 
 quarter during the voyage, if there be no foul winds. vi)t o-Tpo^- 
 
 yi^T\- Merchantmen continued their route during the night, the men-of-war's 
 men generally landed arid slept on shore, cf. ch. 93. a. n. ; Herod, iv. 86. 
 tiiXfiivoi. eiaraXijs, Kal KoOtpos, Kal p-ri&h Ix'^" ''^ iiJ.TroUiov, Soh. of. Herod, i. 
 74. 103, ii. 34, iv. loi [where the day's journey is computed at 200 stades], 
 vi. 49, 97 ; Xen. Anah. iv. ii. 7, iii. 20. oSiji — itinere terrestri, P. 
 
 V. Jelf, § 603. 2. dvvo-ai. = reXei above. The idea implied is that 
 
 of accomplishmg with dispatch. Cf. Dionys. Perieg. 985. 
 
 rbcffov &vev6ev tojv 8(rov 'i^bofiov ijfiap oSeiJcras 
 t^ffifios Kal Kpanrvbi dv^p Ayiireiev oSIttis. 
 
 irpoo-fj^av — hroiight in. The first aorist is very rare, P. cf. Lobeck Phryn. 
 287. We find the first aor. midd. in Horn. II. viii. 54S, ^k iriXios S' 6.^avTo 
 pSas Kal iipia liijXa. Sev6ov. iv. lor. This Seuthes must not be 
 
 confounded with the Thraoian king at the time of the return of the Ten Thou- 
 sand, Xen. Anab. vii. 2. 17, iii. 7. TerpaKoo-Cwv ToXdvTwv. Diod. 
 [xii. 50], with his usual amplification, fixes the revenue of Sitalces at more than 
 J 000 talents. p.dXL<rTa 8vva|JLis — the swm total. Cf. v. 20. 0. 
 8. xpucrbs Kal dpYiipos elrj. 'So viel davon (toO <j>bpov) Gold und Silber war.' 
 P. e'iTf the opt. of indefinite frequency, 'quod de jjtotoJMiis redeuntibus pecuniia 
 sermo est,' Haack. Madv. App. § 234 ; Matth. § 528; Jelf, § 831. 4. a. Krug. 
 and Bernhardy Syiit. p. 406, give the meaping of uncertainty, may perhaps 
 come in. Others read g'ei. {rijiavrd T€ Kal Xcta. ixpavra, as P. 
 observes, are properly woven fabrics of any sort of texture ; but here, when 
 opposed to Xeta, they must mean embroidered or brocaded stuffs — he therefore 
 tr. Textilia acu picta et levia. The barbarian chiefs, as Mr. Grote remarks, 
 learnt at length to appreciate the woven fabrics, the polished and carved me- 
 tallic work, the tempered weapons, and the pottery which issued from Grecian 
 artisans. He compares them to the i<p(icrij,ad' lepd, and to the x^pi-apdv TSKrbvav 
 SalSaXa, ofiered as presents to the Delphian God, Eurip. Ion. 1141; Pindar, 
 Pyth. V. 46 ; Grote, iv. p. 8. n. ' The Circassians of the present day weave 
 mats of very great beauty, which find a ready market in Turkey and Russia,' 
 Clarke's Travels, quoted by Grote, ib. p. g. For the actual custom of offering 
 these presents, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 27; Grote, vi. p. 292. n. For X€io, cf. 
 L. and S. V. Xira, and Horn. II. viii. 441. Grote [ix. p. 196. n.] compares the 
 splendid ' regia textilia, ' and abundance of gold and silver vessels captured by 
 the Eoman general, Paulus jEmilius, along with Perseus, last King of Mace- 
 donia, V. Liv. xlv. 33-5. Cf. Xen. Anai. vi. i. 2. KOTOO-KtilT). 
 Cf. ii. 14. 'Gerathe niancherlei Art die zur hauslichen einriohtung dienen/ 
 K. irapa8\)VO<rT€iioDo-i. Many tr. qui apud regem valebant, com- 
 paring i. 138, ylyverai Tap' aiT(f /liyas. But there seems reason in Am.'s ob- 
 jection that this is to confound Suvaa-reieip and SivaaSai. ; 'reguli infra regem, 
 positi,' Gbll. Cf. Seuthes, u. loi. ' Nebenherrschen,' Kriig. ; ' Seinen 
 
Chap> 97.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 367 
 
 Vasallen,' En^el. tr. I'or the fact, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 16. K. compares 
 Soph, ap Stob. 10. 25. 
 
 (piXdpyvpov fih irS;' t6 ^ap^dpav yivos. 
 
 {d.) kOT€<rTifjo-ovTo ToivavrCov . . . Ilepo-ciiv. This contrast between the 
 Thracians and the Persians is illustrated by what Xeuophon says respecting 
 the habits of the younger Cyrus. Anah. i. 9. 22. Cf. Cyrop. viii. 14. 31, 2 ; 
 Grote, vi. p. 292, \a|ji.pdv£iv. P. prefers translating by ' sumere.' 
 
 Thirlwall thinks the remark of Thucydides more singular than the custom of 
 the Thracians. Bl. considers that among the Thracians, contrary to the practice 
 in Persia, these gifts were exacted with the utmost avarice and rapacity, and 
 that Thucydides is here speaking sarcastically, and with an intent to reproach 
 the Thracian nobility. The remark is consequently not so strange. 
 Iirl irX^ov. rip vifiCji /idWov rQ>v &Wav QptfKUV oi 'OSpicai ixp'^"'''"! Schol. 
 ' Though the custom existed among other Thracians also, the Odrysse practised 
 it more extensively. a(m — with indicative, actual result in a given 
 
 case, see i. 1 19. a. 
 
 (e.) 'lovCou KoXirov. Cf. i. 24. The name probably dates from a very 
 early period, when the lonians still inhabited the shores of the Corinthian gulf, 
 and that part of Peloponnese, known subsequently as Achaia. The name is 
 first used by ^schylus {Prom. V. 840), no trace of the name being found in 
 Homer. Herod, and Thucyd. use the term as synonymous with the Adriatic, 
 but in the latter it always applies to the narrow gulf or inlet at the 'entrance of 
 the Adriatic, vi. 30. 34, vii. 33. It was considered to commence from the A cro- 
 ceraunian promontory on the coast of Epirus, and the lapygian promontory on 
 that of Italy, Cramer, i. p. 5 . See the whole question as to its extension discussed 
 in Smith's Diet. Oeoff. s.v. SeiiT^pa. P. translates longe secundum 
 
 ab imperio Scytharum, i.e. secundum quidem k Scythico, sed tamen longe eo 
 inferius. So in Virgil, ' Longo sed proximus intervallo. ' "Were it not thus 
 emphatic, we should have simply deuT^pa ttjs Tiov 'ZicvdCiv. Blomf. thinks 
 otherwise, but brings forward no argument of weight. Engel. tr. also has hei 
 weitern in zweiter I/inie gegen das der Scythen. rai-rr^ &k i,SvvaTa, 
 
 I^Lcrovo-dai. Herod, v. 3, el 5^ uir' ivbs dpxoiro ^ tppovhi Kara, Tuurb, Hfiaxby 
 t' kv e'i'Q, Kal TToXXy Kparitrrov irdvTdiv idv^up Kard yvihp.'qv t)]V ^/j.rjy. ' The na- 
 tural state of the Thracian tribes — in the judgment of Herodotus permanent 
 and incorrigible — was that of disunion and incapacity of political association ; 
 were such association possible, he says, they would be strong enough to van- 
 quish every other nation, though Thucydides considers them as far inferior to 
 the Scythians. The Odrysian dominion had probably not reached, at the period 
 when Herod, made his inquiries, the same development which Thucydides de- 
 scribes in the third year of the Peloponnesian War, and which imparted to these 
 tribes an union partial indeed and temporary, but such as they never reached 
 either before or afterwards,' Grote, vi. p. 290. «i8ai|Jiov£a includes 
 
 all the external adjuncts of national prosperity, Herod., ia-Tiv kv vaa^ eiSai.- 
 p.oviri, V. 4, and cf. Xen. de Rep. Lac. i. 22. oiX ^'^'" ^- ^^^^> 
 
 762. 3. hi irpbs h>. Cf. Herod, iv. 50, <!Sijip ye iv Tp&s ly (rvp.- 
 
 ^dWeiv. The expression is here used to exclude comparison with Persia, which 
 contained many separate subordinate nationalities. oi (i^v oiSe — 
 
263 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [^0°^ II- 
 
 nor yet again, as in Xen. passim, Vig. vii. 8, Hoogev. de Partic. p. 486, not 
 that either I mean to say they are on a par with the rest of the world in all other 
 points of good counsel and sagacity, ibc, oix 6fJ.o{,o0vTai — as a meiosis for ' are 
 superior to,' is intolerable both in respect of the Greek and the sense. 
 
 Chapter XCVIII. — (a.) ero^na—when things were ready. Cf. oh. 3. u., 
 CTrei di us iK Tuv Swaroiy ho'i.iJ,a 9jv, cf. i. 88. a. &pas- For the 
 
 use of this verb, as applied to land forces, see i. c. ii. 3. c, 10. a., 56. a., &c. 
 MaKeSovfav. The name applied to the country occupied by the tribes dwelling 
 northward of Thessaly and Mount Olympus, eastward of the chain by which 
 Pindus is continued, and westward of the river Axius. Though it afterwards 
 received greater extensions, the original country known by this name was but 
 small, and its population peculiar. The Eponymous ancestor of mythological 
 times was Macednus, son of Lycaon, ancestor of the Arcadians, or Maeedon, 
 son of jEolus. Herodotus identifies the Macedonians with the Doric race in a 
 passage which Miiller has examined at some length [i. 56; Miill. Ilor. i. 3. 
 &o.]. These are merely attempts to form a genealogical connexion between this 
 semi-barbarous people and the rest of the Hellenic race. From the resemblance 
 of some of their customs to the lUyrians (cf. Strab. vii. p. 327), and on other 
 grounds, Mtiller, by the process of exhaustion, arrives at the conclusion that 
 they were of Illyrian descent. Mr. Grote and the writer of the article in 
 Smith's Geog. Diet, maintain the contrary, vol. iv. p. 14. n. Maunert agrees 
 with Miiller. It is clear, as Miiller shows, that thpugh their language diflFerpd 
 from the Illyrian (v. Polyb. xxviii. 8) and from the Greek, it contained many 
 forms commonly called ^olic, together with Arcadian and Thessalian words, 
 and many which, though not found in Greek, have been preserved in the cog- 
 nate Latin. The race preeminently known as the Macedonian, had their ori- 
 ginal centre at JEgss or Edessa, the modern Vodhena, and finally absorbed the 
 other sectional races, as the Eleimiots, Lyncestse, OrestK, &c., Grote, iv. p. 
 16. 'The Macedonians of the seventh and sixth centuries B.C., were an 
 aggregate only of rude inland tribes, subdivided into distinct petty principali- 
 ties, and separated from the Greeks by a wider ethnical difference even than 
 the Epirots, to whom they were analogous in character and civilization ; they 
 had some few towns, but were chiefly village residents (v. Thuo. ii. 100, iv. 
 124), The original seats of the Macedonians were in the regions east of the 
 chain of Skardus, north of the chain called the Gambunian Mountains, which 
 connects Olympus with Pindus, and which forms the norch-west boundary of 
 Thessaly, but they did not reach so far eastward as the Thermaic Gulf, appa- 
 rently not farther eastward than Mount Bermius, or about the longitude of 
 Edessa and Berrhoia. Tliey thus covered the upper portions of the course of 
 the rivers Haliakmon and Erigon, before the junction of the latter with the 
 Axius, while the upper course of the Axius, higher than this point of junction, 
 appears to have belonged to Pseonia, though the boundaries of Macedonia and 
 Pseonia cannot be distinctly marked out at any time,' Grote, iv. p. 11. Mace- 
 donia, in its proper sense, did not touch upon the sea, and must be distinguished 
 into upper and lower ; the former inhabited by people about the west range of 
 mountains extending from the north as far as Pindus ; the latter about the rivers 
 which flow into the Axius, only extending, however, as far as Pella. Prom this 
 
Chap. 9«.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. z6g 
 
 district the Macedonians extended themselves, partially driving hack the original 
 inhabitants, just as we find in later times the armed hordes of the Solavoniana 
 driving the descendants of these peoples into the Chalcidic peninsula, or the low- 
 grounds near the sea. The subdivisions of Macedonia will be noticed as they 
 occur in the foUowingchapters. The Oambunian mountains, which form the great 
 south boundary of the country, are the watershed of various rivers, whose wide 
 alluvial basins formed the homes, as they modified the character, of the several 
 tribes who peopled their banks. From them flow northwards the Aous, now Vo- 
 iussa (see Wordsworth's Greece, p. 9), whence the Parau^i took their name 
 (Cramer, i. p. 9), and the Haliacmon (now Inje Tcara). To the south, the Achelous, 
 now Aapropotamo (see chap. 102. b.). Peneus (Salempria) and Aracthus {Arta). 
 The west spur of the Cambunians forms the Pindus chain, and the east terminates 
 in Olympus [cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 4]. The other rivers of Macedon are 
 the jEstrseus (now Yistritza), flowing by Edessa and Pella, along the banks of 
 which ran the Via Egnatia, leading from Epidamnus, through Thessalonica and 
 Amphipolis, to the Euxine [v. Cramer, i. p. 80. 280 : for the pass, through 
 which the Via Egnatia, and the modern road from Durazzo to Betolia led into 
 Macedon, see Grote, iv. p. 3. n.], the Axius, now the Vardar [a corruption 
 from the Bardares of Tzetzes and Anna Comnena, hence the Vardariot cohorts 
 of the Imperial guard (Smith's iJtci. Geog. p. 336; Miill. Dor. i. p. 451)], 
 with its great tributary the Erigon, now Kutchuk. The country therefore 
 contains three wide alluvial basins, of great extent and fertility, viz., those of 
 the Axius, the Erigon, and the upper Haliacmon, which form a great conti-ast 
 as to their capacity for cultivation with the plains and valleys on the Albanian 
 or west side of Greece. These are represented respectively by the modem dis- 
 tricts of Tettovo, Bitolia, and Grevena. On the rivers of Macedon, see 
 Cousinery, quoted by Bahr. Herod, v. iii. p. 826. On the present state of our 
 knowledge of the geography of these regions, see Grote's long note at the be- 
 ginning of his twenty-fifth chapter, and the quotations throughout the chapter 
 from the travels of Col. Leake, Bou^, Grisebach, Pouqueville. 
 EepKCvqs. Now Tchengel Bagh, is the watershed of the streams which flow 
 into the Ceroinitis palua (now Lake Takinos) above Amphipolis, through which 
 flows also the Strymon, v. Thuc. v. 7 ; Arrian. Exp. Alex. i. ; Cramer, i. p. 
 289 ; and Walpole ap. Cramer, i. p. 295. Sivtwv. The Sinti lived 
 
 on the banks of the Strymon, north of the Siropaeones. Strabo says they once oc- 
 cupied the island of Lemnos, thus identifying them with the Sinties of Homer. 
 
 ^v9a fxe 'Zivries dvdpes d(pa.p KOfiltravTO TeaSvra. 
 
 n.i. 593; Odys. viii. 294; Strabo, Bpit. vii. 331, x. 457, xii. 549. Livy 
 places them on the right bank of the Strymon, xlv. 29. Their chief town was 
 Heraclea, fifty miles from Philippi. Cf. Gatterer, quoted by Cramer, i. p. 305 ; 
 Liv. xlii. 51, xlv. 29; Plin. iv. 10; MtiUer's Dor. i. p. 470. 
 Ilaiovuv. The Pseonians once occupied the greatest part of Macedonia, and 
 even a considerable portion of Thrace, extending along the coast of the .^gean 
 as far as the Euxine. It was probably the general name of the whole of 
 Northern Macedonia, from the source of the Erigonus to the Strymon. ' We 
 are not to suppose that the whole territory between Axius and Strymon was 
 continuously peopled by them : continuous population is not the character of 
 
270 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book TI. 
 
 the ancient world. The Pseonians in their north-west tribes bordered npon the 
 Macedonian Pelagonia ; in their north tribes upon the lUyrian Dardani and 
 Autariatae ; in their east, south, and south-east tribes, upon the Thracians and 
 Pierians, i. e. upon the second seats occupied by the expelled Pierians under 
 Mount Pangseus,' Grote, iv. p. 20. Homer mentions them among the allies of 
 Priam, and places them on the banks of the Axius (II. B. 849). Herodotus 
 says they were a colony of the Teucri who came from Troy (v. 13, where see 
 Bahr's note) . Livy also says that the Dardani of Ulyria once exercised domi- 
 nion over the whole of Macedonian Paeonia. Hence Niebuhr supposes them 
 to be of Pelasgian race, Som. Hist. 1. p. 53. They were divided into several 
 tribes, each probably governed by a separate chief, of. Herod, iv. 12, v. 98, 
 vii. 20. Iirl IlaCovas. The date and circumstances of this expe- 
 
 dition are unknown. 
 
 (6.) MaCSovs. N. E. of the Sinti. This tribe is not mentioned by Herodotus- 
 but they are, perhaps, to be identified with the Thracian tribe near the Ister, 
 whom he calls the Sigynnae, whom he understood to refer their origin to the 
 Medes of Asia: the probability being that they were the Masdi of Thrace. 
 Strabo calls them Maedo-Bithyni. Herod, v. 9; Strab. vii. p. 295. 316; 
 Plin. iv. II ; Liv. xxvi. 25, xl. 22, xliv. 16 ; Cramer, i. p. 306. 
 A<SpT)pov, is probably the spot now called Doiran: (v. Cramer, i. p. 276; 
 Miill. Dor. p. 460.) a Paeonian town on the frontier of Macedonia, at the foot 
 of Mt. Cercine, a branch of the great central chain of Ehodope, perhaps 
 identical with the Orbelos of Herodotus (v. 16). Cramer identifies the Lake of 
 Doiran with Lake Prasias, of which Herodotus gives such a curious account 
 in the passage quoted above: (see Gatterer's note quoted in Cramer, u. s.). Cf. 
 Herod, vii. 113. airpjlyv^ro — his army suffered no diminution, 
 
 did not fall away. Verringerung. K. Cf. chapter 34 a, 5 r c. Here the expres- 
 sion, though somewhat strange, is introduced for the sake of the verbal anti- 
 thesis — ' Keinen Ahgang, wohl aher viel Zugang,' Eng. Tr. 
 I<t>' apiray^v. The dat. is more usually found (after ^Tri) in this meaning, 
 V. Matth. § 585, 6. Perhaps after verbs of motion, when the substantive 
 denotes the action which is the end of our going, the accusative would be more 
 correct, as thai iirl vbttip, Herod, iii. 14. Uvai hrl Bripav, i. 37. 
 iJioTC K. T. X. On the fact, cf. Ar. Ach. 148, 6ffOf t6 xpijiia, Trapv6iru)v irpotrip- 
 XfToi, K.T.'K. irevTeKaCStKa iivpidSaiv. v. Diod. xii. 50. 
 
 (c.) |iaxai'po<)><Spoi., as the Dii. Cf. chap. 96, b. <t>oPep<iiTaT05. 
 
 Cf. ad chap. 3, 0. 
 
 Chapter XCIX. — {a.) £vvT|6po<JovTO kvr. A. AsK. observes, the prep, is 
 after a verb of collecting or assembling, bears reference to the place of assem- 
 bly ; iv to the fact of the completion of the union : see i. 6, c. 23, d. 51, b. 
 Bttws Jo-poXoflo-iv. On the future indie, after Swm following verbs of 
 caring, providing, considering, &c. See Matth. § 623. 2. It is in fact=dlT4i 
 rpbirif. So Thuc. vl. 11. CKtnreiv irif rpinrif rh a^iiTepov iTpen-is eS fliJiroiTai. 
 Cf. Soph. El. 1296; Phil. 64; Ajax, 557, with Wiinder'a note; Xen. Anai. 
 i. I. 4, vii. 3, &o. The idiom arises metaphysically from the tendency to vivid 
 narration and objective representation which characterizes the language. 
 
Chap. 99.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 27 1 
 
 another development of which is found in the usage of lis, Iva, &o. cum indi- 
 cativo. The grammarians have not as yet sufficiently noticed the bearing of 
 this objective tendency upon the idioms of the language. KaroL 
 
 Kopu(t>f|v — keeping along tlie height. With the genitive it would be down the 
 height, Cf. Kara tuv Kprnivdv, vii. 44. 6 Il£p8(KKas. Perdiocas I. 
 
 was the son and successor of Alexander I., called the Philhellene. For his 
 previous history in connexion with this war see i. 57, 59, 61, 63; ii. 29, 80; 
 Diod. xii. 34. In B. c. 424, we shall find him instigating Brasidas to invade 
 Macedon and Thrace (cf. iv. 79), but subsequently making peace with Athens 
 (iv. fin.), then secretly joining the league against her, but again forming an 
 alliance with Athens : siding, in fact, with either of the belligerent parties as 
 suited his interest for the time being (v. 80, 3 ; vi. 7 ; vii. 9). Clinton fixes his 
 death in the Archonship of Pisander, B. c. 413 ; 01. xciii. 3. The date of his 
 accession is doubtful, as very different periods are allotted to his reign by 
 ancient writers, v. Clinton, F. H., vol. ii. p. 223. Cf. Tab. in an. 414. 2. 
 A\)7KT|<rTa£. Oneof the four subdivisions of Upper Macedonia. Lyncestis com- 
 prehended the modem district of Filurina, and all the south part of the basin 
 of the Brigon. The district went by the names of Lyncestis and Lyncus. 
 In Livy, however, the latter appellative stands for a city on the Bevus. It lay 
 to the south of the Pelagones, and between them and the Eordsei. It was once 
 an independent kingdom, and probably became an appanage of Macedon by 
 marriage. [Cf. Thuc. iv. 83, 124; Strabo, vii. p. 326; Liv. xxxi. 33, xxvi. 25, 
 xxxii. 9. ] As the Temenidae claimed their descent from Argos, and the Kings 
 of the Epirotic Molossi pretended to a descent from the heroic .^acid race of 
 Greece, so the Princes of Lyncus claimed the Bacchiadse of Corinth for their 
 ancestors. One of these, Arrhibaeus, was on the throne when Brasidas invaded 
 Lyncus : v. Cramer, i. p. 193 ; Grote, iv. p. 15, 22. 'E\i.|iiuTai. — 
 
 Elimeia, another of these subdivisions, comprehended the modem districts of 
 Grevema, Verija, and Tjersemha. It lay to the East of Stymphalia, and was 
 originally an independent state like Lyncus, but was afterwards conquered by 
 the Macedonian Kings, to whom it became a very important acquisition, from 
 ^he fact that the passes to Epirus and Thessaly led through this province. 
 Prom the latter it was separated by the Cambunian mountains. We read in 
 Xenophon of a Derdas, Prince of Elimeia, probably a son of the Derdas men- 
 tioned here. Cf. Thuc. i. 56 ; Xen. ffell. v. -i, 28 ; Liv.xlii. 23 ; Cramer, vol. 
 i. p. 200 ; Miill. Dorians, i. p. 458. 4\Xa 'iivr\,—e. g., the Orestse. 
 
 p^ KaB* aird — sepwrate cmd independent kingdoms. 
 
 (5.) "AX^SavSpos, son of AmyntasL, and loth King of Macedon (v. Clinton, 
 v. ii. p. 22 1), succeeded his father probably soon after the subjugation of Thrace 
 by Megabazus, which tookplaceB.c. 507, and wasstill living p. c. 463, when Cimon 
 recovered Thasos. He probably lived on till B.C. 454. He is known in history 
 for his murder of the Persian envoys, his good services to the Greeks, though 
 nominally in the train of Xerxes, and his proving his Greek descent when he pre- 
 sented himself as a competitor at the Olympic games, [v. Herod, v. 17-22, 
 vii. 137, viii. 136-40, ix. 44 ; cf. Justin, vii. 2.] He no doubt added very con- 
 siderably to the dominions of his predecessors, advancing his frontiers along the 
 sea coast and to the interior. But ' to suppose that Alexander, son of Amyntas, 
 made all these conquests, is an error which is even refuted by the words of 
 
2']% NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. L^OOK II. 
 
 Thucyd. ; although it is very possible that this prince, who began his reign 
 about B.C. 488, at the time of the Persian power, and was the brother-in-law of 
 a Persian general, added considerably to the territory which he had inherited. 
 Consequently the story that Xerxes gave Alexander all the country between 
 Mounts Olympus and Haemus (Justin, vii. 4) is not entirely fabulous. During 
 the interval between the Persian and Peloponnesian wars, the territory of Ma- 
 cedon was not much enlarged. ' Miill. Dor. i. p. 464. 
 
 (6.) TT)(j.ev£Sai. On the Argive origin of the Royal gens of Macedonia, see 
 Bahr ad Herod, v. 22, who quotes the following authorities, Isocr. Philip. 
 pp. 88. 103, 4 ; Paus. vii. 8. 5 ; Thuo. ii. 99, v. 80 ; Epist. Socrat. xxviii. ; 
 Max. Tyr. xx. 8 ; Liv. xxvii. 30, to which we may add Miill. Dorians, i. 172, 
 463. cf. Herod, vii. 173, viii, 137, 8, ix. 44. 'The origin of the Macedonian 
 family, or Argeadae, from Argos, appears to have been universally recognised 
 by Grecian enquirers.' Grote, iv. p. 21. ipao-CXEvorav — esta- 
 
 blished their sovereignty over. K. IlupCas. Pieria lying to the 
 
 east and south-east of Bordaea and Elimeia, was one of the most interesting 
 parts of Macedonia, as being the traditionary birth-place of Orpheus, and first 
 seat of the Muses, and on account of the important historical events which 
 subsequently occurred there. It forms the slope of the range of mountains of 
 which Olympus is the highest peak, and is separated from Magnesia by the 
 Peneus. It coincides with the modem district of Katerina. [Cf. Herod, vii. 
 131. The name was known to Homer, II. xiv. 226, where Hera passes from 
 Olympus through Pieria and ^mathia to Thrace.] It was watered by the 
 Haliaomon, and contained the famous towns of Pydna and Methone, and the 
 poetical localities of Libethrus and Pimplea. v. Cramer, i. pp. 204 — 220. 
 ' Between the Thermaic gulf and the eastern oountei-forts of Olympus and 
 Bermius, there exists a narrow slip of plain land, or low hill, which reaches 
 from the mouth of the Peneius to the head of the Thermaic gulf; it there 
 widens into the spacious and fertile plain of Saloniohi, comprising the mouths 
 of the Haliacmon, the Axius, and the Echeidorus : the river Ludias, which 
 flows from Edessa into the marshes surrounding Pella, and which in antiquity 
 joined the Haliacmon near its mouth, has now altered its course so as to join 
 the Axius. This narrow strip between the mouths of the Peneius and the 
 Haliacmon was the original abode of the Pierian Thracians, who dwelt close to 
 the foot of Olympus, and among whom the worship of the Muses seems to have 
 been a primitive characteristic : Grecian poetry teems with local allusions and 
 epithets which appear traceable to this early fact.' Grote, iv. p. 17. 
 IIoL"Y^atov ■ Pangseum (now called Pundhar Dagh, or Castagnetz,) is a spur 
 of Khodope and Hsemus, branching off in a south-east direction, lying between 
 the Strymon and the Nestus, and forming a boundary line between Macedon 
 and Thrace, and hence assigned indiscriminately to either. It was famous for 
 its gold and silver mines, which were worked by the Pieres, Odomanti and 
 Satras; v. Herod, vii. 112, hence called xpv<r6pu>\ov Miras by Euripides (Shes. 
 919.) Of these metals no traces are said to be found in modern times. See 
 Bahr ad Herod, v. 16, and the authorities quoted. They are said to have 
 first attracted the attention of the Thasians. Diod. Sic. xvi. Pangaeum is often 
 mentioned by the poets, v. Pind. Pyth. iv. 319; jffisch. Pers. 500; Eurip. 
 Ehes. u. B. and 972 ; Virg. Georg. iv. 462 ; Lucan, Ph. i. 680. Philippi stood 
 
Chap. Ido.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 273 
 
 pit its foot. V. Cramer, i. 301, 2. ^iypryra,. v. Cramer, i. 
 
 p. 297, who quotes Strab. Epit. vii. p. 331 ; Scylax, Perip. 99; Staph. Byz. s. v. 
 Herodotus also, vii. i ii, speaks of it as one of the two fortresses of the 
 Pieres. KiSXiros. Thalgrund. K. applied to any sinuous tract of 
 
 land. V. L. and S. See Xenoplion, Hist. vi. 5, 17. ?XoSc ffTpaToneSevcrdiiepos 
 els rbv 6na8a> iciXiroc ttjs Mai/TiviKTJs, iid\a ffiveyyvs, Kal iciKKif tpr) Ix""'''"- 
 Bl. has I perceive this ref.,, and also one to Plin. Hist. N. iii. 16. ' Padus 
 gremio mentis Vesuli profluens.' 
 
 (c.) "AJiov, now Vardar. See sup. c. 98, n. on Macedonia. Horn. II. 
 ii. 849. Liv. xxxix. 54, trrcvifli — a narrow 3(rip of 
 
 land Scottio^,, 'a Strath.' Bl. frequently found in composition, as Strath- 
 eden, Strathmore, Strathfieldaay. 'HSuvas. The Edonians lay 
 
 beyond the river Axius, at the lower part of its course. They were a large and 
 powerful tribe : hence their name is constantly used by the poets as synonymous 
 with Thrace generally. 'EopSCas. Eordaea was one of the four sub- 
 
 divisions of Upper Macedonia before alluded to, and comprehended the 
 modem districts of Budja, Sarighiul, and Osirovo. It was contiguous to 
 Elimeia ; north of the Beimius, east of Lyncus, west of Edessa, in fact, the 
 basin of the Ludias, now Cora Asniac, v. MuUer's Dorians, v. i. p. 459 ; 
 Cramer, i. p. 201 ; Smith, Qeog. Diet. p. 236. Cf. Herod, vii. 185 (Bahr's 
 note) ; Thuo. iv. 128 ; Polyb. xviii. 6; Liv. xxxi. 39. Ptolemy was a native 
 of Eordsea, according to Arrian, E. A. vi. .28. ppa,\v = /JUKpdv. 
 
 Cf. i. 14, not. *v<rKav. v. Mull. Dor. i. 458. Between Strymon 
 
 and Axius. See Grote, iv. p. 23. 'AXpuairCas. Almopia or 
 
 Almonia was an ancient settlement of the Minyans. v. MUU. Dor. i. 458, 6g. 
 Plin. H. N. iv. 1 7, on the confines of Macedonia and Thessaly, apparently not 
 far from Pieria : whether, they were of Macedonian race is difficult to say. 
 Grote, iv. p. 14, 23. Cramer places Almopia near the sources of the Erigonus, 
 on the borders of lUyria, i. «. rather to the north-weat of the locality assigned 
 them by Miiller. (Cram. i. p. 272.) Tpr\<rT(ov(ai is said to be 
 
 the Attic, KpriffTomlas the Ionic orthography. P. Herod, places it near the 
 sources of the Echeidorus. Kruse says it is called now Cliristonia. Hellas, i. 
 p. 435, ap. Pop. Cf. Herod, i. 57 (Bahr's note), v. 3, vii. 124, 7, viii. 116. 
 BuroXr^av. Bisaltia includes the maritime district west of the Strymon, and 
 the land to the interior, v. Mull. Dor. i. 464. Thucyd. however makes 
 Mygdonia reach as far as the Strymon. Herod, makes the Persians enter 
 Bisaltia immediately after crossing the Strymon, viii. 1 15. Cf. viii. 116. Grote, 
 iv. p. 18, 28. 
 
 Chapteb C. — (a.) IttCovtos. The genitive absolute implying cause. Cf. 
 ch. 8. Jelf, f 710, 6. 'Apx^oos. Archelaus succeeded his 
 
 father, B. 0. 4.13 ; he reigned fourteen years, and was assassinated, B. 0. 399, 
 in the arohonship of Laches. Cf. Died. xiv. 36, 7. Plato calls him spurious, 
 and an usurper, and says he was a son of a slave of Alcetas, named Simiche. 
 Qorg. p. 471, A. V. Clinton, ii. p. 223. Cf, Miill. Dor. i. 4S3. 
 treiic. The proper word for road making, v. Wesseling ad Herod, iv. 136. 
 Tol ttXXa 8ieK<5<r|iit|<r«. Bl. says there is an ellipse of XTfli xilifsav, referring to 
 ch. 15. rd Te dXXo Sie/ciff/Hjo-e Ti)!/ X'ip'"') KO'. K- T. X. 6kt«. Cf. 
 
 S 
 
574 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Clinton's dissertation on the Kings of Macedonia, vol. ii. p. 220. Herod. Tiii. 
 139, gives the line of Macedonian Kings. The three first usually given are 
 considered by Clinton to be merely mythical. The predecessors of Archelaus 
 will therefore be Perdicoas I., Argaeus, Philippus I., Aeropus, Alcetas, 
 Amyntas I., Alexander I., Perdiccas II., Mull. Dor. 1. p. 463 ; Grote, iv. 
 
 p. n- 
 
 (6.) El8o|i4vt)v. Miiller, from the Itineraries, places Idomene fifty-three 
 miles from Therma. \I>or. i. p. 474.] It was on the borders of Pseonia, on 
 the road leading from Stobi to Thessalonica. In some modem maps we see a 
 spot marked Idomini in this locality. Cramer, i. 230. PopTuvCav 
 
 is placed by Ptolemy in .Slmathia, south of Idomene, he writes the name 
 Gordenia. Cramer, i. p. 230 ; Miill. u. s. 'AtoX(Ivtt|v : from a 
 
 passage in Steph. Byz. Dr. Arnold proposes to read Allante, cf. Plin. iv. xo, 
 35, but MuUer, Spruner, and Cramer all read Atalanta. Eipuirdv 
 
 is placed by Pliny on the Axius. \_H. N. iv. 10.] Nothing further is known 
 of its history, than that it appears in a list of towns in the seventh century. 
 Cramer, i. p. 231. 
 
 (c.) n^XXr|s. Pella, one of the most ancient and celebrated cities of Mace- 
 donia, stood at the distance of no stadia from the mouth of the Ludias, to 
 which point the river was navigable. It was on the borders of Bottisa and 
 j^mathia ; Herodotus assigning it to the former (vii. 123), Ptolemy to the 
 latter (p. 82). Philip considerably enlarged and embellished it as being his 
 native city (cf. Dem. de Cor. 83), and here Alexander also was bom. (Hence 
 ' Pellseus juvenis.' Juv. x. 169 ; Lucan, iii. 233). Its situation is exactly 
 described by Livy, xliv. 46, xlv. 29 [probably from Polybius, xxix. 3]. It was 
 afterwards colonised by Julius Csesar. Its ruins are still visible near the 
 modem Palatisa. Emipides probably resided here under the patronage of 
 Archelaus, and the scenery in its neighbourhood is supposed to have suggested 
 some passages in his Bacchce. Cramer, i. p. 223. ' Though in later times the 
 residence of the kings was transferred to marshy Pella in the maritime plain 
 beneath, yet Edessa was always retained as the regal burial-place, and as the 
 bearth to which the religious continuity of the nation (so much reverenced in 
 ancient times) was attached.' Grote, iv. p. 16. Kv^pou, a place 
 
 of no great importance, except from its being sometimes confounded with the 
 Cyrrhus in Syria. The town of Palmohaatro, about sixteen miles north-west of 
 Pella, very probably represents the site of Cyrrhus. See Leake, N. G., quoted 
 in Smith, Diet. Qeog. s. v. and Cramer, vol. i. p. 229 ; Miill. Dor. i. p. 458, n. 
 SiTfl SoKot. Cf. chap. Ixxix. f. K. says must be taken with iffi§aK\ov — wherever 
 it seemed fit. 4cr4PaXXov, a rare word for a charge of cavalry. K, 
 
 {iirb irX^jflous. The sentence is very much involved. P. seems inclined to refer 
 it to the Thracians, as though it were ' encumbered by their own numbers.' 
 K. would strike out oiroiis and read KaBiaraaav. I believe it is an elliptical 
 way of speaking — ' brought themselves into great peril when they did fight, 
 and therefore soon left it off.' (On jre/jiitXjjA/iteyoi, cf. Csesar, B. C. iii. 30, ' ne 
 duobus circvmcluderetur exercitibus'). 
 
 Chapteb CI. — (o). X<570usiiro«tTO = W70i/s irpoir^^pe, i. 57, agebat. P. 
 legan to negotiate. Unterhandelte, K. oi irap%rav rats vaviriv. Ci. 
 
Chap. 10 T.] notes ON THUCVDIDES. 275 
 
 ch. 95, c. and Grote quoted there. airicrrouvTes \i-i[, K.T.X. Here we have 
 
 an illustration of the redundant negative, which may be expressed in somewhat 
 vulgar English — ' being doubtful that he would not come. ' Ta\f\pti.9, 
 
 a rare word in Attic Greek. K. of. Thuc. iv. 25 ; Herod, i. le^ ; Xen. 
 Hell. V. 3, 2, tr. having made them tahe refuge in their fortifications. Of. our 
 expression of putting persons in a state of siege. Ilavatoi' k. t. X. 
 
 These obscure tribes of Paeonian and Thracian origin must be placed near the 
 Strymon ; but their exact locality cannot be determined. The Odomanti were 
 contiguous to, and apparently intermixed with, the Edones, Ptolemy identi- 
 fying Edonis with Odomantice. ' They were probably settled upon the whole 
 of the great mountain Orbelua, extending along the north-east of the lower 
 Strymonio plain, from about Meleniko and Demarissa/r to ZiJehna inclusive, 
 where they bordered on Pangaeus, the gold and silver mines of which they 
 worked with the Pieres and Satree.' Smith, Diet. G. a. v. Herodotus says 
 they were Pseonians, and were not conquered by the Persians, v. 6. Thuc. (v. 
 6) speaks of PoUes, their independent prince. Dribescus (Thuc. iv. 102) was 
 probably one of their towns. The Panaei are also called Edonians by Steph. 
 Byz., who places them near Amphipolis. The Dersaei are also mentioned by 
 Herodotus. [Herod, vii. no, cf. v. 11, with Bahr's notes on both passages]. 
 The Droi some think to be the same as the Derssei. Cramer, i. p. 303, sq. 
 [Mr. Grote places them in the plains north-east of the Strymon, near Mount 
 Pangaeus, and not far from Amphipolis, vi. p. 295]. 
 
 (c.) irap^crxe Xi^yov — 'praebuit oocasionem rumoris." Huds. gave rise to 
 talk ; afforded matter of discussion. Dale. Bl. quotes an example, Xen. 
 Cyrop. vi. 1, ii. We might tr. gave occasion to a rumour which even reached 
 to {itrl) those who were enemies of the Athenians. (i<) — ' as to 
 
 whether it might not be possible that, &c.,' cf. Xen. Andb. iv. 1, 13. 
 Kard TO |v|i|i.axiK6v' in accordance with the terms of the alliance existing be- 
 tween them. Cf. chap. 22, u. iir^uv. K. translates by 
 libersohummend. P. by oocupatam tenere. The Schol. explains it by iri- 
 Kelfiems. But this sense of the word, though common in Homer and Herod., 
 is never, P. says, found in Thucydides. We have it as ' halting there,' Xen. 
 Cyrop. i\. 2, 6; v. 4, 38. Cf. Acta, xix. 22. air^. So Xen. 
 Anab. i. 7, 20, ri Si iroXi air$ ivaTCTapayii,4vov iTopeiero. It is the dative 
 of the object more remotely affected by the action of the verb. The want of 
 provision affected him through the army. It is equivalent to the construction 
 where the want would be expressed as the subject of some verb having riiv 
 VTpareiav for its direct, and airifi for its remote object. Therefore I believe 
 Am.'s tr. to be a good one, though Bl. disputes it — ' when he found that the 
 army had no provisions.' 2irop8dK0v. Cf. Herod, iv. 80. 
 Poppo prefers this reading to 2irapS6Kov or SwapaSbKov. 
 TpocnroiEtrai — wins over to his views. Cf. chap. 85, d. TpidKOVTO 
 t4s irdo-os ^[Upas. v. Jelf, § 454. Cf. Thuc. iii. 66. Pijes al iraaai SiKa. 
 Herod, vii. 4. paaiXeiffavra ret irivra Irea ff ko! rpviiKovTa. So omnino in 
 Lat. Caes. B. Q. iv. 38. Eae duo omnino oivitates obsides miserunt. ' Macedonia 
 then (t. e. at this time) contained the elements of a great power afterwards 
 developed by Archelaus and Philip, though one scattered and feeble.' 
 Thirlwall. 
 
 12 
 
376 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Chaptbb CII. — (a.) 01 Z\ Iv NoditAktm. The narrative is resumed from 
 ph. 92. 'A<rri,Kov, of. ad oh. 30, a., where we learn that the 
 
 Athenians expelled their tyrant Euarohus. oiropdvT€s h. P. 
 
 couples the is with iiTTpdrevtrav, and this punctuation is adopted by GoU, Am, 
 Blomf. nrpaKoirCois. These P. thinks were the clasdwrii from 
 
 the forty triremes, ten iiri/Saraf to each being the usual complement. 
 SxpArov v. n. ad oh. 80, e. KopiJvTfflV, a small town lyjng pro- 
 
 bably between Metropolis and old jEnia. Its probable remains were seen by 
 Colonel Leake on a hill about a mile from Pr<Sdhromo. o4 SoKQuvras 
 
 P«PaCovs— ' chibice Jdei.' Cf. v. 43, e. Duk. K«vit|Ta. He had 
 
 probably been expelled by the opposite party, v. Cramer, ij. p. 33; Grote, 
 yi. p. 285. 
 
 (ft.) OlvulSas. The siege of this place was the great object of the expedi- 
 tion ; as this great and powerful town had from time immemorial, {iU ttotc) 
 sided against, the rest of Acarnania and Athens. Cf. oh. Si. i. in, c. 
 * AxcX^os. The largest and most celebrated of Grecian rivers, equally famous 
 in mythical and historical times, takes its rise in Mount Pindus, near a village 
 now called Khaliki, probably a corruption of Chalcis. [v. Dion. Perieg. 496]. 
 After flowing through the mountainous district of the Dolopians and Agrseans, 
 it entered the plain of Acarnania, and ^ffltolia, near Stratus, and discharged 
 itself into the Ionian sea, near (Bniadaa. Its waters are of a whitish yellow or 
 cream colour, hence its epithet in Hesiod 'Ax^^V^" '^' ipyvpoSiifi^v, Theog. 340 
 ^copied by Dionys. Perieg. 433),, and its modem name of Aspro-potaroo or the 
 ' White Kiver.' Homer only mentions it once, but calls it the King of Rivers, 
 [II. xxi. 194]. Dr. Wordsworth says, ' That the Achelous should have been 
 generally considered in Greece as the- symbol and synonyme of water is pro- 
 bably to be ascribed to its superiority in magnitude to the other streams of the 
 Greek continent.' [Greece, ip. 12]. Cf. Virg. Georg. i. 9, ' Poculaque inventis 
 Acheloia miscuit uvis.' (So our own poet Lovelace says, ' When flowing cups 
 pass quickly round, with no assuaging Thames.') For the classical. passages in 
 iUuatration of this symbolic use, see Macrob. Saturn, v. 18; and Elmsley ad 
 Eurip. Bacch. 519. In mythology, Achelous, as a river god, received especial 
 honours ; he is also celebrated for his rivalry with Hercules for the possession 
 of Deianira ; the horn wrenched off fiom the ' Tauriformis' god by Hercules, 
 being metamorphosed into the Cornucopia. Cf. ApoUod. ii. 7 ; Soph. Track, 
 9, 507 ; Diod. Sic. iv. 35 ; Pans. iii. 18, 9 ; Ov. Met.xx.. i, 90, &c. ; Sen. Here. 
 (Bt. 300. &V(i>6ev (liv. ' The only way of removing the difficulty is to 
 
 supply ^^wc from the preceding, and to take dvoiSev with Am. as standing for 
 ■&v,ia ' superng,' high up the river, as we find it, iv. 108. We may tr, with Goll. 
 ' auperni quidem Stratum urbem, ubi vero in mare injhiit, (Eniadas pnBterfluens, ' 
 Bl. ■ntpik.if.va.lav— surrounding with water, so as to insulate the 
 
 city. Stiabo mentions three marshy lakes in this neighbourhood. The ques- 
 tion as to whether these are alluded to by Thucyd. here is discussed by Colonel 
 Leake. N. Greece, iii. p. 573. Cf. Arrian, Aruib. vi. 14, 5. Bl. cf. the 
 description of Venice, Livy, x. a. 
 
 (c.) 'ExtvdSwv. These islands are said to have derived their name from 
 'the Echinus, or sea-urchin, in consequence of their sharp and prickly outlines. 
 Homer calls them ix^mi, II. ii, 625, and speaks of them as inhabited, and 
 
Chap. I03.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 277 
 
 sending a contingent of forty ships to the Greek force against Troy, under a, 
 distinguished warrior named Meges. Later writers mention them as rugged 
 and desolate. The chief of them was Duliohium ; Hem. Od. i. 245, ix. 24, 
 *i^- 397) ifcO-; Strabo, x. 456,; which some writers identify with Dolicha ; which 
 appears, however, to be too small to answerthe description of Homer. Nor does 
 the position tally -with the island as described by Homer. Dodwell supposes it to 
 have been submerged by a violent convulsion of nature, and says some Greek 
 sailors told him of an island seven miles long, which was submerged by the 
 ocean. Herodotus'pi. 10] alludes to the fact of 'their being gradually united to 
 the mainland. Cf. Pans. -fva.. T\, ri ; Ov. Met. vili. 588. But both of these 
 writers were ignorant of the fact, known to modem writers on physical 
 geography, that, after a certain .point, this junction of the islaiids off the mouth 
 of a river to the mainland ceases, the siiperSuous alluvial deposit being swept 
 away (as at the mouths of the Nile and Danube) by the irresistible force of the 
 deep sea. Pliny (iv. n, 19) enumerates nine of the Echinades, other writers men- 
 tion only four, as Ovid. Strabo calls them ' very numerous. ' ovS^v diri- 
 Xovo-ai. Of. o^S^j'a xp/)"""- Supra, c. 84, a. irpo<r\oi a€£. — is conatcmtly 
 making diluvial deposit. elo-i twv v/jo-wv aX lyirdpmrrai. — cmd some 
 of the isloMds have been limited with the mainland, lit., coniinentalized, made into 
 continent. Of. Herod, ii. 10, koI ovk iJKUTTa'Axc^'iov, &s jiiav Si"AKapj'avlr]s 
 Kal e^Lels h ddXaffirav TuP^'Ext-i'a'dojtf vijatav rks Tjfiiffeas ijSij ijireipov treTroly^Ke, 
 The verb has been employed by the imitators of Thucydides, vide Bl. 
 IXirls 8^ Kal irdirasi K. t. X. ' There is every reason for believing that this may 
 be the case with all, after no very great lapse of time. ' On this use of ^Xirli cf. 
 i. I, a. Tijs irpo<rx<»<re(os k. t. X. v. Jelf, § 898, 3. 
 Tu |if| <rKe8dvvuor9ai |<iv86(r|j,oi 7C7V0VTtti. — 'mutually serve to connect the 
 diluvium, in consequence of its not being dispersed.' K. and D. P. prefers the 
 reading t^ /xtJ, but Madvig observes, where the infinitive thus used expresses 
 the consequence and not the coMse, it should properly follow the verb. Cf. ch. 
 75. c. ^iySea/ios S' 9jv airols ra fiiXa. 'The woodwork served as a frame 
 to hold the bricks together.' I believe myself that the collocation shows ttjs 
 ff^oirxiiireus to be the latter of two nouns, whereof T<fi-nii-<rKeSdi'ma-6ai, is (i. e. 
 stands for) the former ; and that the dative is simply an instrumental one. Tr. 
 are, from the non- dispersion of the alhivial deposit, bound together as in a chain, 
 vapaXXa|. — ' obliquely, ' in a sort of quincimx order ; '.■.■.■ ' schrage gegen 
 einander.' K. Cf. Lobeck ad. Soph. Aj., 1087, whereas kotA (ttoIxov is in 
 parallel lines, .' | i i ! S" 8^ aXao-6ai ovtov. ' When as the 
 legend goes,' Sea. For this use of Sij see supra. Cf. Arist. Lysist. 523. The 
 verb refers to actual wandering, not, I think, as some have suggested, to mental 
 hallucination, though the latter meaning may be supported. Soph. Aj. v. 23. 
 SEi|jidT<i>v. For the best comment on this phrase see the opening of .^sch. 
 Ewmenides. Cf. Thuc. vii. 80. iirsCirovra, obscwre significantem. 
 iJTis, not i\, is used, because no particular spot is specified, ' a country such 
 that.' For this peculiar force of So-tis, in introducing the especial attribute of 
 the object, its real property, or differentia, see Jelf, § 816. b. For ir/jiv &vBee 
 Jelf, § 848. So Madvig ; irpiv 4c is only used in this way after a negative ex- 
 pressed or implied. (i^jiru — ^not oOttoi, because it is the command 
 iise?/ which is as it were here quoted, which would be of course expressed by 
 
378 IfOTES ON THUCYDIDES, [Book II. 
 
 /xi)7rw, Cf, Soph, Phil, 1409, /tTJiru ye vplv &v tuv ii/uripuy dl'jjs /iiSuVf 
 wai JlolavTos. |ic|iiacr|i|yi]s — rendered v/ndecm for him to be in. 
 
 SCaiTa — a place suffieient to support life. For this sense of SUura, nearly 
 equivalent to our 'home,' see Ariat. Eth. Nic. i. vi. ; Thuc. ii. 16. A, cf, 
 Philost. V. Herod. 562, UaiTarif (rd/ian iiriTiiSela. Compare the uaeof r/jo^f; 
 in Soph, (Ed, Col. 362 ; Phil. 32, &o, .l8Dvi<rreD(re— /oMnded a 
 
 dominion, \fy6f,fva, i.e., Thucyd. does not vouch for the stoiy. See what 
 is said supra, 0. 23, and cf. Herod, vii. 152, iyd Si dij>el\u \iyav ri, Xeyi/itva, 
 TriiBeaSai yi nh> S)v oi iravTaTeaitai 6^el\<a. cir(i)W|iCa. KovpiJTis was 
 
 its ancient name according to the Scholiast, Cf. Strabo, x. 2, 8 and 3. 
 
 Chaptek cm, — ov^lp dvT* dvSpos. The first instance of such an exchange 
 says Bl. The first recorded instance. K. P. cf. v. 3, where a similar ex- 
 change is mentioned. He observes also that i\ev8ipovs implies that the slav 
 were sold. 
 
APPENDIX I. 
 
 On Book II. c. 90. hrl riiv iavT&y •y^x. 
 
 The controversy which this passage has excited would fill a moderate volume. 
 Mr. Grote alone has devoted to it ten octavo pages of very small print. Under 
 these circumstances, I can merely give what appears to be the most plausible 
 interpretation, and reply to the objections which have been urged against it. 
 I should tr. ' The Peloponneaians getting nnder weigh at dayhreah, directed their 
 course in a colwmn fowr abreast upon their own coast, inward, in the direction 
 of the gvlf, with the right wing leading, in which order also they had been lying 
 at their moorings.' Mr. Grote, on the other hand, interprets ^Tri rijv iavrwi' 7^1/ 
 as the Athenians' own land, meaning thereby the northern shore of the gulf, 
 in the neighbourhood of Kaupactus. No one, I imagine, would naturally 
 adopt this view. It is only tolerable if the objections against the other be 
 fatal. Let us examine them. 
 
 (i.) "Though the Scholiast explains iirl by irapd, it is impossible for it to 
 have any such meaning. With an accusative iirl must mean against, with 
 hostile intent, and this meaning is inconsistent with the above interpretation.' 
 I have already intimated my belief that hostile intent is a secondary not a 
 primary meaning of iirl with the accusative [i. 30, a. 54. a]. The primary 
 meaning is ' motion on to a fixed point.' The secondary notion flows from this, 
 and is connected with the actual meeting or confronting that which is hostile 
 to us ; the actual coming into contact with opposition. That iiri followed by 
 an accusative does not of necessity connote 'hostile purpose,' may be seen by 
 many examples furnished by the Lexicons and grammars. In the present case 
 we need not go far for an instance very much to the point. Fiorn the eighty- 
 sixth chapter we learn 'jTapiir\ev<ye 5^ Kai ^op^lcov iiri Tb'Ylov t6 M.oKoKpiK6y 
 . . . ^r Si toCto /jiiv rb 'Plor <|>C\i.ov rots ' ASifaiois. I do not therefore at all 
 accept the necessity for any such meaning as ' hostile purpose.' The prepo- 
 sition I believe has its original meaning, and I compare to it our own military 
 usage of the preposition ' upon,' which does not mean ' on the top of anything,' 
 as a foreigner might suppose, but in the direction of — e. g. 'the advanced guard 
 will move upon Quatre Bras. ' It is here employed rather than irapd, because 
 the coast, as the map shows, makes a sweep upward to the north. Conse- 
 quently the fleet in advancing, iaii to5 KiXirov, would naturally seem to be 
 advancing wpon it, rather than parallel to it ; just as Phormion, u. 86, ad- 
 vanced upon the promontory of Rhium. There was also more occasion to 
 employ the accusative, as the genitive was wanted to express the general 
 direction, the ultimate object of their course iad toO kS\tov. 
 
28o APPENDIX. 
 
 Arnold has weakened his own case greatly by referring to ItI cum dativo. 
 He does not, however, by any means say what Mr. Grrote puts into his mouth ; 
 neither does he ' assign to ijrl with an accusative a sense which he himself 
 admits it only has with a dative.' On the contrary, he claims for ivi with an 
 accusative a ' mixed notion,' of which iirl with a dative forms part. On the 
 other hand, he shows no clear perception of the distinction between "motion 
 upon a point' [the accusative] and ' rest at a point, [the dative]. 
 
 (2.) 'Arnold explains rifv iavTuv yrjii by Sicyon and Corinth, because some 
 of the ships came from these places. They are too distant ; the explanation is 
 far fetched and improbable ; besides it is true of only ]>wrt of the Peloponnesian 
 ieet.' Here again Am. damages his own case. Surely a Peloponnesian fleet 
 might consider Peloponnesus as t\ iavrOiv yij, vrithout descending into particu- 
 lars. At any rate, it was quite as much so as the northern coast could be ^ 
 iavrSiv yij to the Athenians. Things are not described in ordinairy narrative as 
 in a catalogue or inventory. In ch. 39, we have the whole Peloponnesian 
 party described as oi AaxeSai-iiivioi,, because, as I have there said, ' the Lace- 
 daemonians' stood for, and symbolized to the Athenian mind the aggregate of 
 their adversaries. So we speak of the French invasion of Bussia, though it 
 was largely participated in by Germans and Italians. A somewhat similar 
 way of speaking is quite excusable here. 
 
 (3.) 'If the Peloponnesian coast had been 'hugged' by the enemy's fleet, 
 Phormion could have had no cause for alarm concerning Naupactus.' Why 
 not ? Phormion was outside of the straits, Naupactus vrithin them. Suppose 
 him to have remained outside, and the Peloponnesian fleet to have continued 
 their course to Panormus, what was to hinder them from making a sudden 
 dash across before he could double the promontory of Antirhium and come to 
 the rescue ? Besides, a glance at the map will show that a fleet sailing from 
 Khium, 'wpon the Achaean coast, i. e. towards Drepanum, would steer nearly 
 N.N.E. One or two more points of northing would put their heads in a direct 
 line for Naupactus. Phormion might well then siiippoge (vo/dcras) that they 
 Would probably make for that place. Had they been making straight for 
 Naupactus, it would, despite of what Mr. Grote says, have been a case of 
 ' seeing, ' not ' believing.' If a Prench flotilla were seen to quit Boulogne and 
 ' move upon, ' ' make for' (irXei;' ^iri), Cape Grisnez, I conceive that an English 
 fleet stationed opposite them, might well be alarmed for the safety of Dover, 
 and would not be justified in remaining at anchor. This would be particularly 
 the case if the enemy's fleet consisted of screw steamers, to which the ancient 
 triremes may be considered in some respect analogous on account of their 
 power of rowing against the wind. 
 
 These are I believe the most important objections which can be urged 
 against the interpretation of the passage which I have given. On the other 
 hand, the meaning advocated by Mr. Grote is so incompatible with the ordinary 
 usage of iaxiTuv that he has endeavoured to fortify it by a very large collection 
 of what he appears to consider similar instances. I cannot agree that the large 
 majority are at all similar. With all proper deference, I must say Mr. Grote 
 seems to have mistaken the real point at issue. It is not whether the reflexive 
 iavT&v may not be referred to more than one sort of antecedent, but whether 
 it is ever found where the antecedent would properly demand the demonstrative 
 
APPENDIX. 281 
 
 pronoun instead. In the present case, Mr. Grrote himself would readily sub- 
 stitute ainuv or iKslvwv ; in most of the cases cited by him it would be utterly 
 impossible to do so — e.g. iv. 97, el ttoi) tIs tico tSoi ix9phv iavToO: ii. 95, 
 liepdlKKas aiT<^ 6Tro(rxi/''(vos, el'ABrivaloisSiaWd.^eiei'iavTiv: Anab. iv. 7. 13., 
 Aiviai — iSdu Ttva O^ovra Cjs' pt^J/ovTa eavTbVf iirtXa/j.^dveTai ihs aiirdj' KtaKiffiav : 
 Mem. iv. 3. C4, 6 tJXios oiK iiriTpiwei rots ivSpdvois iavriv dKpijSus opav, &o. 
 In these oases if Mr. Grote alters the reflexive pronoun into the demonstrative, 
 he will obtain either no meaning at all, or one directly contrary to what the 
 author intended. But here, upon his hypothesis of the author's intention, 
 according to his own showing, a similar alteration would give the meaning with 
 certainty and clearness. In short, we want to know whether we can have the 
 reflexive pronoun in cases where we should have anticipated the demonstrative. 
 ■Nothing is proved in favour of the affirmative by producing cases where it is 
 impossible to expect the demonstrative at all. 
 
 One class of instances adduced by Mr. Grote it is perhaps desirable to notice, 
 because they involve a principle important to the younger scholar, which is not 
 very prominently brought forward in grammars and commentaries. Mr. Grote 
 justifies his loose way of taking eavrSiv here, by the fact that ^avrou and iKeivov 
 are sometimes found in the same sentence, in reference to the same person. 
 This is true ; but a very cursory examination of Mr. Grote's passages will show 
 that they do not prove much in favour of his conclusion. The first is ii. 13, 
 HepufX^s imoroir(\<ra,i, in 'ApxlSa/Mos airi? f ^tos Hiv iriyxave, p.^ TroWrficis, ij 
 airbs ISlf ^ouX6jnei'0s xop/fe<rSai Tois Aypois airov TapaKtirri kuI p^ Srjtliffri, ij 
 Kal AaKeSatp,oviar Ke\ev<rdvTuv iwl 5to/3o\^ t^ eavToB yhnfrai touto, Siaivep 
 «ai TO S71) iXaiveiv irpoeiirov hcKa IkeCvov, irporiyipeve k.t.\. But here all is 
 quite regular. Anyone acquainted with the genius of the language, will per- 
 ceive that the introduction of the word irpoeirrov completely changes the point 
 of view from which the person is regarded, and with it the pronoun by which 
 he -is designated. 6 iwcrToir-fiaas must have the reflexive, because both refer to 
 the same person ; oi irpodvovTes on the contrary would naturally speak of him 
 as iKelvm. 
 
 Again iv. 99, Oi S^ Boiuroi iireKpLvavTo, el piv iv rg BoituT/p elalv [ol'ABij- 
 TOioi], dirlovras iK rrji lavTwv &Tro^ipeirdai Toi a(j>iTepa ' el 6J ev t^ IkcCvuv, 
 airois ytyviliffKeLV ri irotTjTiov. In this most interesting passage [see Commen- 
 tary ad locum], the whole thing turns upon the fact that the dispute about 
 ■locality is described strictly from the Boeotian point of view. The Boeotian 
 herald had orders to say if Delium was theirs {eavTUv) the Athenians might 
 depart on certain terms ; if it belonged to the other party (iKeivov), they of 
 course could do as they chose with their own. 
 
 ■ In Xen. Bell. i. 1.27, eavrav refers to the generals as regarded by them- 
 selves, and iKelvoiv to the same generals, as regarded by those who had to elect 
 them. The pronouns could not be interchanged without violating the sense, 
 and neither this, nor either of the two previous passages, afford the least 
 countenance to such a misapplication of the reflexive pronoun, as Mr. Grote's 
 iranslation of the present one appears to me to exhibit. 
 
APPENDIX 11. 
 
 On the Gbebk Aoeist. 
 
 In a work published some time ago,* I endeavoured to give such an explanation 
 of the Greek Aorist as might make the subject intelligible to the young scholar. 
 I did not imagine that I was advancing any novel doctrine, or, in fact, doing 
 more than expanding and applying the principle of which the very name of 
 the tense is significant. But though some scholars of reputation have given 
 a general assent to the theory which I then maintained, others have kindly 
 favoured me with the statement of their doubts and difficulties upon the whole 
 matter. It has, therefore, for some years been my object to weigh very carefully 
 all usages of the Aorist presenting any peculiarity which my somewhat scanty 
 reading has supplied. I hope to be enabled hereafter to treat the whole subject 
 in an extended form. At present I am only anxious to give my general conclu- 
 sions, so far as they are necessary for the understanding of those allusions to 
 the subject which the foregoing notes contain. 
 
 I would propose then to arrive at the meaning of the Aorist, as a tense of th? 
 Greek Verb, by the process of exhaustion. 
 
 We can only comprehend the true mutual relation of the tenses, or times, ex- 
 pressed by the verb, by regarding them from one fixed point of view. 
 
 Such a central stand-point in time, as the individual himself is in space, is 
 found in the present. 
 
 All other tenses or times must take up their position on one side of this or the 
 other. 
 
 First then of those behind it: — 
 
 (i.) One denotes an action simply past in reference to this point : the past 
 in reference to the present. This is the proper perfect. 
 
 (2.) Another denotes an action past in a complex or two-fold way: i.e., past 
 in reference to some point of time, which is itself past in reference to the present, 
 The past in reference to the past. This is the pluperfect, 
 
 (3.) Another denotes an action in a, state of passing, and arrested at some 
 given point, which point is either the present, or past; perhaps, strictly speaking, 
 always the last, This is the imperfect. 
 
 We have next to consider those times which lie at the other side of the 
 present, 
 
 (i .) One denotes an action future in respect of the present, -without standing 
 in determinate relation to any other point of time, future in reference to the 
 present. The future, commonly so called. 
 
 * Theophrasti Chaxacteres. With Notea, psychological and critical, Longman and Co. 
 
 1852. 
 
APPENDIX. 283 
 
 (2.) Another denotes an action future in respect of the present, but past in 
 reference to some determinate point which is itself future in respect of the 
 present. The future in reference to the present, but past in reference to future 
 time. The second future, or futv/re perfect. 
 
 This is an exhaustive analysis of the notion of time, or tense, as employed in 
 the description of action, and yet we have not included the Aorist. 
 
 Or, again, to take another method of analysis: — 
 
 Every action is either complete or incomplete. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in present time. Perfect ["I have"], or present. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in past time. Pluperfect, or imperfect. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in future time. Future perfect, or future. 
 
 Here then we have a complete apparatus of tense or time for describing any 
 action in its temporal relation to any other action. When such is our object we 
 employ one of the above forms. But we may also merely mean to declare the 
 occurrence of an action without any object of the sort. Most languages employ 
 for that purpose one of the same tenses as would have been employed had the 
 expression of a temporal relation been required. The Greeks, I beheve, "far 
 more accurate speakers and thinkers than ourselves," seeing that a tense 
 properly connoting a special temporal relation, ought not to be used where none 
 such is implied, adopted a narrative tense, to serve simply as such, without any 
 connotation of the relations of time at all. This tense was the Aorist, or in- 
 definite, indeterminate tense ; and they made use of it when they merely wanted 
 to say that something had happened, without stopping to give any special infor- 
 mation concerning the relation in time of this something to anything else ; 
 when, in short, the /oci was prominent in their mind, and the time of the fact 
 altogether subordinate. 
 
 To this usage belong the great mass of Aorists which encounter us in narrative. 
 It is needless to give examples ; some few have been pointed out in the foregoing 
 notes. 
 
 But there are several particular usages of the Aorist which so strongly illus- 
 trate the principle, that it may be instructive to refer very briefly to them. 
 
 First then, we have that common and acknowledged use of the Aorist, wherein 
 it is said to resemble the imperfect, and is predicated of anything ' won t to happen . ' 
 e. g. ip\aij/e SiSfa. Eur. Med. y^pg. ri ippov^Xv iSiSa^av Antig., last line, al Sk 
 /ivptai ir6\eij, kSlv eS tis oIk^ fig.Slus Ka0li^pt.<rav. '(Ed. Col. 1535. yii«foi;s 6' firas 
 irav 6pyur6^ Saliiav oiKOLS iviSinKev. Med.'V. i^O. l*ava£. Ibid. 24^. ^Koifuire. 
 Ajaic,y. 674. Instances, indeed, are -quilte innumerable. Now to consider these 
 identical with the notion of habitual or continued action described by the imper- 
 fect, seems to me altogether fallacious and unphilosophical. They describe what 
 has happened, is happening, and will happen again. To limit the action or event 
 to any particular time would destroy the whole force of the expression. No 
 special time is connoted, and therefore we haye the true Aorist, or indetermi- 
 nate tense. The Latins conveyed the same force more clumsily by the perfect. 
 Mollivit aversos Penates. Dedmxit corpore febres. Horace. lUius immense 
 rupenmt horrea menses. Virgil, Georg. i. 49, where Forbiger observes, 'signi- 
 ficatione Aoristi Grseci pro ' rumpere solent,' quod ita explices. ' Jam aliquoties 
 rupei-unt, ideoque e^dem rerum conditione redeunte, etiam nunc rumpunt, et 
 posthac rumpent." 
 
384 appendt:!^. 
 
 In close connexion with this we have another usage of the Aorist, which is 
 Said to be nearly equivalent to the present. This occurs where the connotation 
 of pure past time is clearly inappropriate, and where the action described by 
 the Aorist is generalized so as to take in the notion of the present. Thus Dr. 
 Peile explains l/co^a, Ohoeph. v. 410, — 'I am in the predicament of one that 
 before now has beaten — and hence, a heatcTf or one that beats.* We may com- 
 pare iTTTj^a difiov (Ed. Col. 1465. 'I am in a state of terror.' iiripieaa. 
 Ajax, T. 536; Elect. 1322; Alcest. 1047; h-ev^a; S. O. T. 835. i<t>pi^a, Ajax, 
 674, and Track. 1044. Eost. § 151, notices this class of cases as one expressed 
 in all other languages by the present, and rightly I think translates them ^Aacro, 
 'Ich muss lachen.' tp/iu^a, ' Ich muss seufzen,' &c. 
 
 From tbis indefinite acceptation of the tense, refusing, as it were, to connote 
 any exact temporal relation, we find grammarians and commentators telling us 
 that it stands first for one tense, then for another, as e. g. for the Pluperfect, 
 Buttmann, Large Gr. Gr. Of this no further proof is requisite than an 
 examination of that carefully edited and popular school-book, Xenophon's 
 Anabasis, by Macmichael, Grammar School Classics, 1851. There 'we find, 
 without advancing beyond lib. i. the aorist said to be put for the future [i. 2. 2.], 
 for the pluperfect [i. 4. 5], for the perfect [i. 6. 6], indifferently with the 
 imperfect [i. 9. ig]. Now, it is impossible to conceive that the Greeks can 
 have interchanged their tenses in this wild way. What we should say is, that, 
 in any of the above cases, had the writer wished accurately to connote the time 
 of the fact, and not simply to mention it, he might have used the perfect instead 
 of the aorist, &o. It is from the wide circumference of meaning which this 
 indeterminate sense of the aorist embraces, that it seems to trespass upon the 
 province of the other teases. Nay, it does so even with regard to the future, 
 which is a source of no small difficulty and vexation to those commentators 
 Who persist in fixing upon it a definite connotation of past time. Such, for 
 instance, is its employment after verbs of promising, with an obviously fiiture 
 force, e.g., iwoffx^f^^vosadro'ts fiTj Trpiffdev ira^trafjdaL, Tplv airods KaraydyoL otKaSe, 
 Xen. Anab. i. 2. 2. khI vepl nhy roiruv inriaxcTb /ioi pov\ei(raa0ai, Ibid. ii. 
 3. 20. ovK ovv xp^ roH 6avtirov t^ fiJM^^ irUTTeiaavTas xeipov ^ovKeiaaffdai, 
 Thuc. iii. 46, said of the still pendant decision. iUis Si elvai. jroWoils diroXij- 
 tpBr/vai l^u, vi. 49, of a probable case, upon which GoU, remarks: 'Aoristus pro 
 future post ek6s, i\iri% et similia frequens est." ^ /'■'^rrip vvv fih otcrai Tvxbvra 
 fie tS>v SiKaiav Tap' ifuv iiroSi^aaSai [Eeiske e conjeot. inroSi^effBai] Kal rijv 
 dSeX^ilv iKbibaeiv, Dem. p. 842. 2 1 . Here we have of two future events, the 
 aorist and future infinitives in conjunction. In a similar manner efjrep yip re 
 Kal aiiTiK' 'OXiiftTTios oi)k iriXecraev, ix re Kal 6^i T«Xtt ffiix te /leydXif airirurav, 
 II. A. 160, we have both tenses together, and as the fact denoted by the last 
 depends upon the first, it is absurd to say that it is more certain. And in the 
 other moods, we may remark the same connexion with the future, e. g. ^eiBdc 
 iuTrvi](TaiJ,ev, Anab. iv. 6. 17, is said of a problematical event. I believe that a 
 similar absence of temporal connotation is found sometimes with respect to the 
 aor. part, rav isi>f,m\if,'(\a-a,VTav irpoUxoi'Ta, Thuc. i. 18, must, in its collo- 
 cation, be nearly equivalent to Ju/i/idp^ui/. From this it follows, not that 
 tlie aorist is indifferently substitutable for any other tense, but that it may 
 stand for any tense, where the notion of the time connoted by that tense is 
 
APPENDIX. a85 
 
 absent from the writer's thoughts. No tense limiting action to time would 
 seem so proper as the idd^aaa, John, xvii. 4, or 0! fiii, Iddyres Kal irurreiaavres, 
 XX.. 29. 
 
 From the absence of all connotation of time properly so called, comes that 
 very curious use of the aorist, to express, so to speak, acts not defined as 
 happening at any time at all. These could not properly be described, by any 
 tense specifying an actual time of occurrence, and it strongly supports our 
 theory of the aorist to find that the aorist alona is- employed for the purpose. 
 We find it accordingly, in the description of unfulfilled purposes, and intended, 
 though incomplete, actions. Seee.gi Soph. Aj. 1105-6. 
 
 MEN. SlxaM yi,p t6i>S' eirvxeiy Kxtlvavra /j.^ ; 
 TETE. KTeivoVTa,, Suviv 7 elras h Kal f^s daviiv. 
 
 Here the aorist has the sense of 'was my slayer,' i. e., in intention, though not 
 in fact. The usage perfectly agrees with our theory of the aorist. That of the 
 great Hermann does not seem very intelligible^: ' Prsesens prohibitum esse 
 facere, Aoristus fecisse sed sine effectw significat.' How to kill a man without 
 effecting' his death, seems rather a difficulty. Elmsley [HeracUdce, loooj 
 dogmatically asserts — 'Aoristus ejusque participium hanc significationem 
 respuunt.' But cf. ikreiva a' tvra, addressed to living person, I<m, v. 1291, 
 KrAvaaa, Andromeda, v. 811, KXi^pas, (Ud. Col. v. 1008, said of an action, 
 attempted, but never ca rried into execution. In Xen. Anab. ii. 6. 4, we find 
 i9araTdi9ri said of a person still alive, in fact, only sentenced to death ; and 
 Herod, vii. 10. 2, supplies us with a very curious instance, oi)k ffic aij,((>aTip'^ 
 ff^i lxwpti<r« said of what is future and hypothetical. 
 
 The general conclusion, therefore, at which we arrive is, that the aorist is 
 properly a narrative tense, not connoting any one particular determinate notion 
 of time, and that accordingly it is employed of actions or events occurring 
 under all sorts of relations of time. Hence the attempt to assign to it any 
 special temporal connotation tends to confound it with other tenses, and obscure 
 the true metaphysical conception of its nature. This is, I think, the fault of Butt- 
 mann's theory, so generally accepted, that the aorist signifies momentary action. 
 It is very true that, generally, the aorist is used to describe momentary actions. 
 But this must be so from the nature of the case, where the act is not determined 
 either in its occurrence or progress by defining its temporal relation to other 
 actions Momentary, in the sense of lasting for a moment, cannot be assigned 
 as its essential signification to the aorist. Many actions described by the 
 aorist last for a long time, and many actions lasting only for a moment, are 
 described by the other tenses. Want of space forbids the enumeration of passages 
 which I had selected in illustration. It is enough to quote Buttmann's own 
 translator, who cites Jl. A. 437-8, where the acts described by the aorist are ef 
 as long duration as those described by the imperfect. Cf. note on irpoSra^e Kal 
 iK^Xeve Thuc. iii. 112. Similarly, I do not think it right to assign, as Jelf, 
 and Mr. Shilleto [De FalsA Legatione, p. i8t), to the aorist, as its distinctive 
 sense a meaning which is admitted to be proper to the perfect, i.e., to have 
 completed an action. The latter, e.g. tr. Thuc. vi. 23, iKir\uv .... iKTrXemai, 
 to commence the iioyage, to have finished the voyage. What then is iKTetrXev- 
 Kii'ai ? Why should not the first mean noiii to be sailing, and the second speak 
 
386 Appendix. 
 
 merely in general terms, to sail i Indeed, in the second passage quoted b 
 Mr. Shilleto, he seems to adopt a similar principle of explanation, e. g. yiii. 46, 
 where he translates iXevdepoSv, 'to liberate,' iXcvBep&irai, not to apply tjie principle 
 in liberating. It is to be wished that Mr. Shilleto would turn his attention to 
 the subject, as he is of all persons best qualified to elucidate it. There are 
 many subordinate questions which would be benefited by such an investigation. 
 I do not, for instance, think the common rules about /.ti) with the imperative 
 pros, and aor. subjunctive, quite satisfactory. Can it be proved that the first 
 is always general, and the latter pwrticvla/r ! It may be particular, when fol- 
 lowed by some particular objective case, but is it so universally ? What, then, 
 are we to make of Soph. Elect, vv. 383-4, 
 
 lrp6s ravra 0pi£fou, xd/ie /ij) iroO' iarepov 
 iraBovtra |i^|u|rQ. 
 
 Is not p,T] K\iTTe rather don't he stealing now, Hibemic^, don't he after 
 stealing, and /kt) kX^^js, 'don't steal,' and, don't steal some particfular thing, 
 when that particular thing is mentioned ? 
 
 By way of conclusion, I would remark that we may answer the old stock 
 question [Elmsley ad Medea, 78] very easily on the above principles. 
 irplv Seiirveiv — 'hefore I am, sv/ppimig,' i.e., before I go to supper. 
 irplv SeSeiirvriKhai — 'hefore I have done supper,' i.e., before supper is over. 
 vplv Setimrjffai — perfectly general. Before supper time. 
 
ADDENDA ET COREIGENDA, 
 LIB. I, 
 
 Chapter 
 
 I. (a.) qu(e wiquam gesta sunt. The ref. is Bloomfield's. But the 
 parallelism is removed if we tr. ' which hmie ever been waged.' 
 VI. (a.) iv TOis irpuToi may perhaps stand as a nominative, the whole 
 three words having coalesced into one from habit, and being 
 so declined ; of. ianv Sre and similar phrases. 
 (5.) for ' distinctus/ leg. 'discinctus.' 
 
 (rf.) yet one Schol. has aUriov airtf rijs <JTri)s iyivero. It is not 
 easy to see how. 
 X. (a.) for 'participle,' leg. 'particle.' 
 XIII. («•) after Bl. read 'take ttotc with 8^ and tr. 'always, os 1 
 suppose for certain, had a mart.' 
 XXIX. (6.) for ^ci^avres, leg. feiijocres — the { has slipped in more than 
 once. 
 XXXII. (6.) ad fin., 'of. by all means. Dem. de Cor. p. 277, els t^v 
 
 imoiaav TrvXatav k. t. X.' 
 XXXIV. (5.) ad fin., 'or perhaps we Way refer Seo/t^rais to the speakers, — 
 'so that you may not in a matter of deceit he led astray by them, 
 and in a matter of open request refuse us assistance.' ' 
 XLII- (<'•) *<1 ^"•> '■''^ ^°^^ ""*'> °^ course, appertain to the infinitive, but 
 tA irKiov is the object of ^eiv.' 
 L. (o.) ad fin., ' perhaps, after all, the term is intentionally technical ; 
 ' performing the operation of the SieKTrXoCs upon the dispersed 
 ships ; — charging them over and over again.' ' 
 LXVI. (o.) for ^vfifxaffio, leg. ^uppiiaaw, and /or Ju/ipijerw, leg. (vfipri<r<ra. 
 LXIX. (c.) ad fin., /or 'supra a,' % ' supra b.' 
 LXXVIII. (6.) foi- ■§8?, leg. ijSri, and ibid., ciii. (ft). 
 XC. (c.) for iifXP^ oi, leg. o5. 
 XCVII. (6.) after 'importance,' add see Appendix II. 
 CYII. (h,) after KwMffctv, transpose 'and ?/icX\oc, &c.,' to the end of 
 the sentence. 
 CVIII, (6.) leg. ' in all amounting to.' 
 
 End of the Fikst VoLnME. 
 
LONDON : 
 
 SAVILI* AWD/EBWARBSj PBINTEBSi, GHANDOS STREBT 
 
 COVEWTGAEDEH". 
 
[JtriiT 1864.] 
 
 &EIEEAL LIST OE WORKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BT 
 
 Messrs. LONGMAN, GREEN, and CO. 
 
 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON. 
 
 Historical Works. 
 
 The HISTORY of ENGIAND from the Fall ofWolsey to the Death 
 of Elisabeth. By James AKiHoirr Pkoube, M.A. late Fellow of Exeter 
 College, Oxford. Third Edition of the First Eight Volumes. 
 
 Vols. I to TV. the Eeign of Henry VIII. Third Edition, 5d«. 
 
 Vols. V. and TI. the Reigns of Edward VI. and Mary. Third Edition, 28s. 
 
 Vols. VII. and VIII. the Reign of Elizabeth, Vols. I. and II. Third 
 Edition, 28s. 
 
 The HISTORY of ENGLAND from the Accession of James II. By 
 Lord Maoaulat. Three Editions as follows. 
 LiBEABT Editiok, 6 vols. 8vo. £4l. 
 Cabiwet Edition, 8 vols, post 8vo. 48s. 
 People's Edition, 4 vols, crown 8vo. 16s. 
 
 REVOLUTIONS in ENGLISH HISTORY. By Egbert Vaughan, 
 D.D. 3 vols. 8vo. ios. 
 
 Vol. I. Revolutions of Race, ]5s. 
 Vol II. Revolutions in Religion, 15s. 
 VoL.'III. Revolutions in Government, 15s. 
 
 The HISTORY of ENGLAND during the Eeign of George the Third.. 
 By William Masset, M.P. 4 vols. 8vo. 48s. 
 
 The CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY of ENGLAND, since the Acces- 
 sion of George III. 1760—1860. By Thomas Eeskijse Mat, O.B. 2 vols. 
 8vo. 33s. 
 
 LIVES of the QUEENS of ENGLAND, from State Papers and other 
 Documentary Sources : comprising a Domestic History of England from the- 
 Conquest to the Death of Queen Anne. By Agses Stkickland. Revised 
 Edition, with many Portraits. 8 vols, post 8vo. 60s. 
 A 
 
NEW ■WORKS PCBLISHED BY LONGMAN AND CO. 
 
 LECTUEES on the HISTORY of ENSIAND. By "William Lonq- 
 MAlf. Vol. I. from the earliest times to the Death of King Edward 11. with 
 6 Maps, a coloured Plate, and 63 Woodcuts. 8vo. IBs. 
 
 A CHRONICLE of ENGLAND, from B.C. 55 to A.d. 1485 ; written 
 and illustratecl. by J. E. Dotle. With 81 Designs engrayed on Wood, and 
 printed.in OOlomrs by B. Bvaais. 4to. 42s. 
 
 HISTORY of CIVILISATION. By Henet Thomas Bdcklb. 2 toIs. 
 
 Price £1 17s. 
 Vol. I. Ungland and France, Fourth Edition, 21s. 
 Vol. II. S^ain and-Soetland, Second Edition, 16s-. 
 
 DEMOCRACY in AMERICA. By Alexis De Tocqueville. Trans- 
 lated by Henut Eeeyi:, with an Introductory Notice by the Translator. 
 2 vols. 8vo. 21s. 
 
 The SPANISH CONQUEST in AMERICA, and its Relation to the 
 History of Slavery and to the Government of Colonies. By Akthue Helps. 
 4 vols. 8vo. £i. Vols. I. and II. 28s. Vols. III. and IV. 16s. each. 
 
 HISTORY of the REFORMATION in EUROPE in the Time of 
 Calvin. By J. H. Meelb D'Ajjbigfe, D.D. Vols. I. and II. 8vo. 28s. and 
 Vol. III. 12s. 
 
 LIBRARY HISTORY of PRANCE, in 5 vols. 8vo. By Etbe Evass 
 OBOvrai VoL.J. 14s. Vol. II. 15s. Vol. III. 18s. Vol. IV..nearly ready, 
 
 lECTURES on ^e HISTORY of FRANCE. By the late Sir James 
 Stephek, LL.D. a vols. 8vo. 24s. 
 
 The HISTORY of ©SEECE, By C. Thielwall, D.D., Lord Bishop 
 
 of St. David's. 8 vols. 8vo. £3 ;, or in 8 vols. fcp. 288. 
 
 The TALE of the GREAT PERSIAN "WAR, from the Histories of 
 Berodotns.. By the Bev. G. W. Cox, M.A. laie Scholar of Trin..Coll. Oion. 
 "Pop. 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 ANCIENT HISTORY of EGYPT, ASSYRIA, and BABYLONIA. By 
 
 the Author of 'Amy Herbert.' Eop. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 CRITICAL HISTORY of the LANGUAGE and LITERATURE of 
 
 Ancient Greece. By William MuBBs of Caldwell. B vols. Svo. £3 9s. 
 
 HISTORY of the LITERATURE of ANCIENT GREECE. By Pro- 
 fessor K. O. MuLLEE. Translated by the Eight Hon. Sir Geoeoe CoEifE- 
 WALL Lewis, Bart, and by J.iW. Donaldsoh, D.D. 3 vols.,8vo. S6s.' 
 
 HISTORY of the ROMANS undei the EMPIRE. By the Eev. 
 
 Chables Meeivale, B.D. 7 vols. 8vo. with Maps, £5. 
 
 The FALL of the ROMAN REPUBLIC ; a Short History of the Last 
 Century of the Commonwealth. By the Rev. Chables Meuitale, B.D. 
 12mo. 7«. ed. 
 
 The BIOGRAPHICAL HISTORY of PHILOSOPHY, from its Origin 
 in Greece to the Present Day. By Geoege Heney Lewes. Revised and 
 enlarged Edition. Svo. IGSi 
 
 HISTORY of the INDUCTIVE SCIENCES. By "William "Whewell, 
 D.D. P.R.S. Master of Triu. Coll, Cantata. Third Edition. 3 vols, crown 
 Svo. 24s. 
 
NEW WORKS PUBIISHED BY LONGMAN ASD CO. 3 
 
 CRITICAL and HISTOEICAl ESSAYS contributed to the Edinburgh 
 Beview. By the Eight Hon. Loed Macatlat. 
 LiBEAET Edition, 3 vols. 8vo. 36s. 
 Teavellee's Editioh-, in 1 vol. 21s. 
 In Pocket Toiumes, S vols. fcp. ais. 
 Peopie's Edition, 3 vols, crown 8vo. Ss. 
 
 EGYPT'S PXACE in TJWIVEESAL HISTORY ; an Historical Investi- 
 gation. By 0. 0. J. BuHSEN, D.D. Translated by C. H. Cotteeli, M.A. 
 With many lUnstrations. d, vols. 8vo. £5 8s. Vol. V. is nearly ready. 
 
 MATJITDER'S HISTORICAL TEEASITEY ; comprising a General In- 
 troductory Outline of Universal Histoiy, and a series of Separate -Histories, 
 Pep. Svo.lOs. 
 
 HISTORICAL and CHRONOLOGICAL ENCYCLOPJEDIA, presenting 
 in a brief and convenient form Chronological Notices of all the Great Events 
 of XTniversal History. By B. B. WooDWAED, F.S.A. Librarian to the Queen. 
 
 {In ilie press. 
 
 HISTORY of >CHEISTIAlir MISSIONS; their Agents and their Results 
 By T..W. M. MaeshaiJi. 2 vols. 8vo. 24s. 
 
 HISTORY of the EARLY CHURCH, from the ^Fiist Preaching of the 
 Gfospel to the Council of Nicffia, A.D. 325. By the Author of 'Amy Herbert.' 
 Fcp. 8vo. 4s. 6d. 
 
 HISTORY of WESLEYAN METHODISM. By Geobge Smith, 
 P.A.S. New Edition, with Portraits, in 31 parts. Price 6d. each. 
 
 HISTORY of MODERN MUSIC ; a Course of Lectures delivered at 
 the Royal Institution. By John Htjelah, Professor of Vocal Music in 
 King's College and in Queen's College, London. Post 8vo. 6s. ed. 
 
 HISTORY of MEDICINE, from the Earliest Ages to the Present 
 Time. By Edwaed Meeyon, M.D. P.G.S. Vol. I. 8vo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Biography and Memoirs. 
 
 SIR JOHN ELIOT, a Siography ; 1590—1632. By John Poestbr. 
 With Two Portraits on Steel from the Originals at Port BUot. 2 vols, 
 crown 8vo. 30s. 
 
 LETTERS and LIFE of FRANCIS BACON, including all his Occa- 
 sional Works. Collected and edited, with a Commentary, by J. Spebdihg, 
 Trin. Coll. Cantab. Vols. I. and II. 8vo. 24s. 
 
 LIFE of ROBERT STEPHENSON, F.R.S. By J. C. Jeaefreson^ 
 Barrister-at-Law; and William Pole, P.E.S. Memb. Inst. Civ. Eng. 
 With 2 Portraits and many Illustrations. 2 vols. 8vo. INearly ready. 
 
 APOLOGIA pro VITA SUA : being a Reply to a Pamphlet entitled 
 
 ' What then does Dr. Newman mean f ' By John Henex Newmajt, D.D. 
 Svo. 14s. 
 
4 NEW WORKS pubiished bt LONGMAN and CO. 
 
 LIFE of the LUKE of WELLINGTON. By the Eer. G. R. Gleig, 
 M. A. Popular Edition, carefully revised ; with copious Additions. Crown 
 8vo. 5s. 
 
 Brialmont and Gleig's Life of the Duke of 'WeUington. 4 vols. 
 8vo. with Illustrations, £2 Us. 
 
 Life of the Duke of 'Wellington, partly from the French of M. 
 Beialmont, partly from Orieinal Documents. By the Eev. G. 31 
 GlEiG, M.A. 8vo. with Portrait, 15s. 
 
 FATHER MATHEW; a Biography. By John Feakcis Maguiee, 
 M.P. Second Edition, with Portrait. Post Svo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Rome ; its Ruler and its Institutions. By the same Author. New 
 Edition in preparation. 
 
 LIFE of AMELIA WILHELMINA SIEVEKING, from the German. 
 Edited, with the Author's sanction, hy Catheeine Wih"KWOETH. Post Svo. 
 with Portrait, 125. , 
 
 FELIX MENDELSSOHN'S LETTERS from Italy and Switzerland, 
 translated by Ladt Waxlacb, Third Edition, with Notice of Meudel- 
 ssoHS-'s Life and Works, by Henry F. Choelet ; and Letters from 1833 to 
 liil, translated by Lady Wallace. New Edition, with Portrait. 2 vols, 
 crown Svo. 6s. each. 
 
 DIARIES of a LADY of QUALITY, from 1797 to 1844. Edited, with 
 Notes, by A. Hayward, Q.O. Second Edition. Post Svo. ICs. (id!. 
 
 EECOLLECTIONS of the late WILLIAM WILBERFORCE, M.P. 
 
 for the County of York during nearly 30 Years. By J. S. Haefoed, D.C.L. 
 F.E.S. Post Svo. 7s. 
 
 LIFE and CORRESPONDENCE of THEODORE PARKER. By 
 
 JoHH Weiss. With 2 Portraits and 19 Wood Engravings. 2 vols. Svo. 30s. 
 
 SOTJTHEY'S LIFE of WESLEY. Fifth Edition. Edited by the Rev. 
 C. C. SouTHET, M.A. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 THOMAS MOORE'S MEMOIRS, JOURNAL, and ICORKESPOND- 
 
 ENCE. Edited and abridged from the First Edition by Earl Eusseli,. 
 Square crown Svo. with 8 Portraits, 12s. 6d. 
 
 MEMOIR of the Rev. SYDNEY SMITH. By his Daughter, Lady 
 Holland. With a Selection from his Letters, edited by Mrs. AtrsTiN. 
 2 vols. Svo. 2Ss. 
 
 LIFE of WILLIAM WARBTJRTON, D.D. Bishop of Gloucester from 
 1760 to 1779. By the Rev. J. S. Watson, M.A. Svo. with Portrait, 18s. 
 
 FASTI EBORACENSES ; Lives of the Archbishops of York. By the 
 late Rev. W. H. Dixon, M.A. Edited and enlarged by the Rev. J. Raine, 
 M.A. In 2 vols. Vol. I. comprising the lives to the Death of Edward HI. 
 Svo. 15s. 
 
 VICISSITUDES of FAMILIES. By Sir Beenaed Burke, Ulster 
 King of Arms. FiEST, Second, and Thikd Seeies. 3 vols. 6rown Svo. 
 12». M. each. 
 
NEW "WOEKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMAN and CO. 
 
 BIOGEAPHICAL SKETCHES. By Nassau "W. Seniok. Post 8vo. 
 price 10s. 6d. 
 
 ESSAYS in ECCIESIASTICAL BIOGRAPHY. By the Eight Hon. 
 Sir J. Stephen, LL.D. Fourth Edition. 8vo. lis. 
 
 AEAGO'S BIOGRAPHIES of DISTINGUISHED SCIENTIFIC MEN. 
 Bv FKAHpois Aeago. Translated by Admiral "W'. H. Smxth, V.R.S. the 
 E«v. B. PowELi,, M.A. and E. Geant, M.A. 8vo. 18s. 
 
 HATJNDER'S BIOGEAPHICAL TREASURY: Memoirs, Sketches, and 
 Brief Notices of above 12.000 Eminent Persons of All Ages and Nations, 
 Fop. Svo. 10s. 
 
 Criticism, Philosophy, Polity, Sfc. 
 
 PAPINIAN ; a Dialogue on State Affairs between a Constitutional 
 Lawyer and a Country Gentleman about to enter Public Lite. By Geoege 
 Atkinsok", B.A. Oxon. Serjeant-at-Law. Post Svo. 5s. 
 
 On REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNMENT. By John Stuaht Mill. 
 Second Edition, Svo. 9s. 
 
 Dissertations and Diseussions. By the same Author. 2 vols. Svo. 
 
 price 24s. 
 On Liberty. By the same Author. Third Edition. Post Svo. 7s, 6rf. 
 
 Principles of Political Economy. By the same. Fifth Edition. 
 
 2 vols. Svo. 30s. 
 A System of Logic, Ratiocinative and Inductive. By tlie same. 
 
 Fifth Edition. Two vols. Svo. 25s. 
 
 Utilitarianism. By the same. Svo. 5s. 
 
 LORD BACON'S WORKS, collected and edited by E. L. Et.t.is, M.A. 
 
 J. Spedding, M.A. and D. D. Heath. Vols. I. to V. Philosophical I^ofiy 
 
 5 vols. Svo. £4 6s. Vols. VI. and VIL Literary and Professional V/orks 
 
 2 vols. £1 16s. 
 BACON'S ESSAYS with ANNOTATIONS. By E. Whately, D.D. 
 
 late Archbishop of Dublin. Sixth Edition. Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 ELEMENTS of LOGIC. By E. Whatelt, D.D. late Archbishop of 
 Dublin. Ninth Edition. Svo. 10s. 6d. crown Svo. 4s. id. 
 
 Elements of Rhetoric. By the same Author. Seventh Edition, 
 Svo. IDs. 6d. crown Svo. is. M. 
 
 English Synonymes. Edited by Archbishop Whately. 5th Edition, 
 
 Fop. Svo. 3«. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS REMAINS from the Common-place Book of the 
 late Archbishop Whately. Edited by Miss E. J. Whately. Post Svo. Cs, 
 
6 NEW 'WOEKS PUBLISHED BT LONGMAN AifD CO, 
 
 ESSAYS on the ADMINISTRATIONS of GREAT BRITAIN from 
 
 17S3 to 1830, contributed to the JEdimburgh Review by the Rlfiht Hon. Sir 
 G. C. Lewis, Bart. Edited by the Eight Hon. Sir E. Head, Bart. 8vo. 
 with Portrait, 15s, 
 
 Hy the same Autlwr. 
 
 A Dialogue on the Best Eorm of Government, is. 6d. 
 
 Essay on the Origin and Formation of the Romance lanfrnages, 
 
 price 7s. Gd. 
 
 Historical Survey of the Astronomy of the Ancients, 15s. 
 
 Inquiry into the Credibility of the Early Roman History, 2 vols, 
 price 30s. 
 
 On the Methods of Observation and Reasoning in Politics, 2 vols, 
 price 28s. 
 
 Irish Disturbances and Irish Church Question, 12s. 
 
 Remarks on the Use and Abuse of some Political Terms, 9s. 
 
 On Foreign Jurisdiction and Extradition of Criminals, 2s. 6d. 
 
 The Fables of Babrius, Greek Text with Latin Notes, Paet I. 
 6s. M. Paet II. 3s. 6d. 
 
 Suggestions for the Application of the Egyptological Method to 
 
 Modern History, Is. 
 
 An OUTLINE of the NECESSARY LAWS of THOUGHT : a Treatise 
 on Pure and Applied Logic. By the Most Eev. W. Thomson, D.D. Arch- 
 bishop of York. Crown 8vo. 5s. 6d, 
 
 The ELEMENTS of LOGIC. By Thomas Shedden, M.A. of St. 
 Peter's Coll. Cantab. Crown 8vo. \_Jiist ready. 
 
 ANALYSIS of Mr. MILL'S SYSTEM of LOGIC. By W. SiEBBiirfly 
 M.A. Pellow of Worcester College, Oxford. Post 8vo. IJnst ready. 
 
 SPEECHES of the EIGHT HON. LORD MACAULAY, corrected by 
 Himself. 8vo. 12*. 
 
 LORD MACAULAY' S SPEECHES on PARLIAMENTARY REFORM 
 
 in 1831 and 1832. 16mo. Is. 
 
 A DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By K. G. Latham, 
 M.A. M.D. E.E.S. Pounded on that of Dr. Johnsoit, as edited by the Itev. 
 H. J. Todd, with numerous Emendations and Additions. Publishingin 36 
 Parts, price 8s. 6d. each, to form 2 vols. 4to. 
 
 The English Language. By the same Author. Fifth Edition. 8vo. 
 price 18s. 
 
 Handbook of the English Language. By the same Author, Fourth 
 Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Elements of Comparative Philologi^. By the same Author, 8to. 21s. 
 
NEW "WOEKS PUEIISHED bt LONGMAN and CO., 
 
 THESATJS¥S of ENGLISH WOEBS and. PHRASES, classified and 
 arranged so as to facilitate the Expression of Ideas, and assist in Literary 
 Composition. By P. M. BoaEI, M. Di Mitii Edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6(2. 
 
 LECTURES on the SCIENCE of LANGUAGE, delivered at the Eoyal 
 Institution. By Max Mullek, M.A. Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. 
 EiEsi Series, fourth. Edition. 8vo. 12s. SECOiro Seeies, with 31 Wood- 
 outs, price ISs". 
 
 The DEBATER ; a Series, of Complete Debates, Outlines of Debates, 
 and Questions for Bisoussion. By E. RowTOlf. Ecp.Svo. 6s. 
 
 A COURSE of ENGLISH READING, adapted to every taste and 
 capacity ; or. How and What to Head. By the Eev. J. Piceoet, B.A. Ecp. 
 Svo. 6s. 
 
 MANUAL of ENGLISH LITERATURE, Historical and Critical: with 
 a Chapter on English Metres. By T. Aeh om, B.A. Prof, of Eng. Lit. Cath. 
 Univ. Ireland, Post Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 SOUTHEY'S DOCTOR, complete in One Volume. Edited by the Eev. 
 J. W. WajeteBj.B.D. Square crown Svo. 12s. ed. 
 
 HISTORICAL and CRITICAL COMMENTARY on the OLD TESTA- 
 MENT ; with a New Translation. By M. M. EAIISCH, Ph.D. Vox,. I. 
 Genesis, Svo. 18s. or adapted for the General Eeader, lis. TOL. II. JSxodus, 
 15s. or adapted for the General Reader, 12^. 
 
 A Hebrew Grammar, with Exercises. By tlie same. Pari I. Out- 
 lines with JExercises, Svo. 12s. Gd. Key, 5s. Part II. Exceptional Forms 
 and Constructions, 12s. 6d, 
 
 A NEW LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIOWAKY. By the Eev. J. T. White, 
 ?.'I.A. of Corpus Christi College, and Eev. J. B. EiDELE, SI.A. of St. Edmund 
 Hall, Oxford. Imperial Svo. iSs. 
 
 A Diamond Latin-English. Diationary, or Guide to the Meaning, 
 Quality, and Accentuation of Latin Classical Words. By the liev. J. E. 
 ElDDLE, M.A. 32mo. is. 
 
 A NEW ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON, containing all the Grreek 
 Words used by Writers of good authority. By 0. D. ToH.GE, B.A. Eourth 
 Edition. 4to. 21s. 
 
 A LEXICON, ENGLISH and GREEK, abridged for the Use of 
 Soliools from Ms'English-GreekLexicon'by the Author, C. D. ¥oiraE, B.A. 
 Square 12mo. [^Jnst ready. 
 
 A GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON. Compiled by H. G. Iiddell, D.D. 
 
 Dean of Christ Church, and' E. Scott, D.I). Master of BaJliol. Eifth Edition. 
 
 Crown 4to. 31s. Sd. 
 A. Lexicon, Greek and English, abridged from Liddeli. and, Scott's 
 
 Greek-English Lexicon. Tenth Edition. Square 12mo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 A PRACTICAL DICTIONARY of thei FRENCH and ENGLISH LAN- 
 GUAGES. By L. CoKTAWSEAtr. 7th Edition. Post Svo.lOsi Bii 
 
 Contanseau's Pocket Dictionary, French and English ; being a close 
 Abridgment of the above, by the same Author. 2nd Edition. ISmo. 5s. 
 
NEW WOEKS PTOLISHEB BY LONGMAN Airo CO. 
 
 NEW PRACTICAL DICTIONARY of the GEEMAK LANeiTAGE; 
 
 German-English and English-German. By the Eev. W. L. Biaciclet, M.A. 
 and Dr. Cael Maetin I'BIEDLAKEEE. Post 8vo. lln the press. 
 
 Miscellaneous Works and Popular Metaphysics. 
 
 BECEEATIOKS of a COUNTRY PARSON : being a Selection of the 
 Contributions of A. K. H. B. to Fraser's Magazine. Second Series. Crown 
 8vo. 3s. ed. 
 
 The Common-place Philosopher in 'Town and Country. By the same 
 Author. Crown 8to. 3s. 6d. 
 
 Leisure Hours in Town; Essays Consolatory, Jisthetical, Moral, 
 Sofcial, and Domestic. By the same. Crown Sto. 3s. &d. 
 
 The Autumn Holidays of a Country Parson. By the same Author. 
 
 1 vol. IJSfearly ready. 
 
 FRIENDS in COUNCIL ; a Series of Readings and Discourses thereon. 
 
 2 vols. fcp. 8to. 9s. 
 
 Priends in Council, Secokd Series. 2 vols, post 8vo. 14s. 
 
 Essays written in the Intervals of Business. Fcp. 8to. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Companions of My Solitude. By the same Author. Fcp. 8vo. 3s. 6it. 
 
 LORD MACAULAY'S MISCELLANEOUS WRITINGS: comprising 
 his Contributions to Knight's Quarterly Magazine, Articles from the 
 Edinburgh Eeview not included in his Critical and Jlistorical JEssays, Bic- 
 
 frapbies from the JSncyclopisdia Britannica, Miscellaneous Poems and 
 nscriptions. 2 vols. 8vo. with Portrait, 31s. 
 
 The REV. SYDNEY SMITH'S MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ; includ- 
 ing his Contributions to the Edinburgh Eeview. 
 LiBEAKT Edition. S vols. 8vo. 36s. 
 Teatelles's Editioit, in 1 vol. 2]e. 
 In Pocket Volumes. S vols. 21s. 
 People's Edition. 2 vols, crown 8vo. Ss, 
 
 Elementary Sketches of Moral Philosophy, delivered at the Eoyal 
 Institution. By the same Author. Fcp. 8vo. Is. 
 
 The Wit and Wisdom of Sydney Smith: a Selection of the most 
 memorable Passages in his Writings and Conversation. 16mo. Is. 6d. 
 
 From MATTER to SPIRIT: the Eesult of Ten Years' Experience 
 in Spirit Manifestations. By C. D. with a preface by A. B. Post 8to. 8s. Gcf. 
 
 The HISTORY of the SUPERNATURAL in All Ages and Nations, 
 and in all Churches, Christian and Pagan ; Demonstrating a Universal Faith. 
 By William Howitt. 3 vols, post 8vo. 18*. 
 
 CHAPTERS on MENTAL PHYSIOLOGY. By Sir Henrt Hollakd, 
 Bart. M.D. F.E.S. Second Edition. Post 8vo. 8s. M. 
 
NEW WOEKS PUBLISHED ET LONGMAN A3SD CO.' 9 
 
 ESSAYS selected from CONTEIBUTIONS to the Edinburgh Review. 
 By Heshx Eo&eks. Second Edition. S vols. fcp. 21». 
 
 'The Eclipse of Faith ; or, a Visit to a Religious Sceptic. By the 
 same Author. Tenth Edition. Fop. 8vo. 5s. 
 
 Defence of the Eclipse of Faith, by its Author ; a rejoinder to Dr. 
 Newman's Reply. Third Edition. Ecp. Sto. 3s. &d. 
 
 Selections from the Correspondence of E. E. H. Greyson. By the 
 
 same Author. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Fulleriana, or the Wisdom and "Wit of Thomas Fulleu, with Essay 
 on his Life and Genius. By the same Author. 16mo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Eeason and Faith, reprinted from the Edinburgh Beview. By the 
 same Author. Fourth Edition. Pop. 8vo. Is. 6(J. 
 
 An INTEODTJCTION to MENTAL PHILOSOPHY, on the Inductive 
 Method. By. J. D. MoEEiL, M.A. LL.D. 8vo. 12s. 
 
 Elements of Psychology, containing the Analysis of the Intellectual 
 Powers. By the same Author. Post Bvo. 7s. Gd. 
 
 The SENSES and the INTELLECT. By Alexander Bain, M.A. 
 Professor of Logic in the University of Aberdeen. Second Edition. 8vo. 
 price 15s. 
 
 The Emotions and the Will, by the same Author ; completing a, 
 Systematic Exposition of the Human Mind. 8vo. 15s. 
 
 On the Study of Character, including an Estimate of Phrenology. 
 By the same Author. 8vo. 9s. 
 
 HOTJES WITH THE MYSTICS : a Contribution to the History of 
 Religious Opinion. By Eobbet Aipeed Vaughah", B.A. Second Edition. 
 2 vols, crown 8vo.l2s. 
 
 PSYCHOLOGICAL INaUIEIES, or Essays intended to illustrate the 
 Influence of the Physical Organisation on the Mental Faculties. By Sir B, 
 0. Bkodie, Bart. Pop. 8vo. 6s. PaetII. Essays intended to illustrate some 
 Points in the Physical and Moral History of Man. Fop. 8vo. 5s. 
 
 The PHILOSOPHY of NECESSITY ; or Natural Law as applicable to 
 Mental, Moral, and Social Science. By CnAKiES Beat. Second Edition. 
 8vo. 9». 
 
 The Education of the Feelings and Affections. By the same Author. 
 Third EditioH. 8vo. 3s. ed. 
 
 CHEISTIANITY and COMMON SENSE. By Sir WiLLOtrGHBT 
 Jones, Bart. M.A. Trin. Coll. Cantab. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Astronomy, Meteorology, Popular Geography, <^c. 
 
 OUTLINES of ASTEONOMY. By Sir J. F. W. Heesohel, Bart. 
 M.A. Seventh Edition, revised ; with Plates and Woodcuts. 8vo. 18s. 
 
■10 NEW 'WGiBKS PTIBLISHED BY LONGMAN ATfD CO. 
 
 ABAGO'S POPiTOAR ASTRONOMY. Translated by Aamiral W. H. 
 
 Smyth, P.B.S. aud E. Gbani, m:.A. Witli 25 Plates and 358 .'Woadouts. 
 2 vols. 8vo. £2 6s. 
 
 Arago'3 TSIeteorological Essays, with Introduction by Baron Hum- 
 boldt. Translated under the superintendence of Major-General B. Sabike, 
 '&:A. SVO. ISs. 
 
 The WEATHEE-EOOK ; a Manual of Practical Meteorology. By 
 Eear- Admiral Hobekt Jitz Eoy, !E.If. ^M.S. (Third Edition, with 16 
 Diagrams. 8vo. 15s. 
 
 SAXBY'S WEASCiHEIl SYSTEM, or Lunar Influence on Weather, 
 By S. M. Saxby, E.W. Principal Instructor of STsHtal (Engineers, H.M. 
 Steam Eeserve. Second Edition. Post Svo. is. 
 
 DOVE'S LAW of STOSMS considered in connexion with the ordi- 
 nary Movements of the Atmosphere. Translated by E. H. ScoTT, M.A. 
 T.C.D. Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 CELESTIAL OBJECTS for COMMOS TELESCOPES. By the Kev. 
 
 T. W. Webb, M.A. F.B.A.S. WithMaptyf the Moon, and Woodcuts. 16mo. 7b. 
 
 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY for SCHOOLS and GENERAL READERS. 
 
 By M. F. Maitey, IiL.D. Author of 'Physical Gteographyof the Sea,' ftc. 
 Pop. Svo. with 2 Plates, 2s. M. 
 
 A DICTIONARY, Geographical, Statistical, and Historical, of the 
 various Countries, Places, and Principal Watural'Objeots in tihe World. By 
 J. E. M'CuiLOCH, Esq. WitheMaips. 2 vols. 8vo.'68s. 
 
 A GENERAL DICTIONARY of GEOGRAPHY, iDescriptiive, Physica-I, 
 
 Statistical, and Historical: fcrniing a comjileke 'Gazetteer Of the World. By 
 A. Keith Johbtstok, P.E.S.E. Svo. 30s. 
 
 A MANUAL of GEOGRAPHY, Physical, Industioal, amd Political. 
 
 By W. Hughes, P.E.G.S. Professor of Geography in Kitig's'Oollege, and in 
 Queen's College, London. With 6 Maps. jcp. Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Or in Two Parts :— Part 1. Europe, 3s. Sd. PaeiH. Asia, AMca, America, 
 Australasia, and Pol^rnesia, y^. 
 
 The Geography of British History ; a 'GteograpTiical description of 
 the British Islands at Successive Periods, from the Earliest Times to the 
 Present Day. By the same. With 6 Maps. Fqp. Svo. 8s. ed. 
 
 The BRITISH EMPIRE ; a Sketch of the Geography, Growth, Natural 
 and Political Features of the United Kixigdom, its Colonies and Dejpenden- 
 cies. By Caeoiise Beay. With 5 Haps. Pep. Svo. ?s. ed. 
 
 COLONISATION and COLONIES : a Series of Lectures delivered be- 
 fore the University of Oxford. By Heejuak MEnnrAiB, M.A. Professor of 
 Political Economy. Svo. 18s. 
 
 The AFRICANS at HOME : a popular Description of Africa and the 
 
 Africans. By the Kev. E. M. Macbeaie, M.A. Second Edition ; including 
 an Account of the Discovery of the Source of the Nile. With Map and 70 
 Woodcuts. Fop. 8vo. 5s. 
 
 MAUNDERS TREASURY of GEOGRAPHY, Physical, Historical, 
 
 Descrijrtive, and Political. Completed by W. Huemrs, P.'E;G;S. With 7 
 Maps and 16 Plates, Bop. Svo. 10s. 
 
NEW 'WOEKS- PUBLISHETJ ET LONGMAW AND CO. 11 
 
 Natural History and Popular Science. 
 
 The EIEMEHTS of PHYSICS or NATTTEAl PHILOSOPHY. By 
 
 Neil Arstott.M.D. P.E.S. Physician Extraordinary to the Queen. Sixth 
 Edition. Paei I. 8vo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 HEAT CONSIDERED as a MODE of MOTION ; a Course of Lecture^ 
 delivered at the Eoyal Institution. By Professor JoHM" TyuDAiL, P.E.S. 
 Grown 8vo. witli 'Woodouts, 12s. id. 
 
 VOLCANOS, the Character of their Phenomena, their Share in the 
 Structure and Composition of the Surfax?e of tlie Globe, &o. By G. Pouieit 
 SCEOPE, M.P. P.E.S. Second Edition. 8vo. with illustrations, 15s. 
 
 A TBEATISE on ELECTRICITY, in Theory and Practice. By A. 
 De la Bite, Prof, in the Academy of Geneva. Translated by C. V.'Walkee, 
 P.E.S. 3 vols. Svo.with "Woodcuts, £3 13s. 
 
 The COSaELATIOH of PHYSICAL EOSCES. By W. K. Gkove, 
 Q.C. V.P.E.S. Fourth Edition. 8vo. 7s. id. 
 
 The GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE; or, Monthly Journal of Geology 
 Edited by T. EuEEBT JouES, F.G.S. Professor of Geology in the E. M. 
 College, Sandhurst; assisted by J. C. 'WooD-ffAED, P.G.S. F.Z.S. British 
 Museum. 8vo. with Illustrations, price Is. 6d. monthly. 
 
 A GUIDE to, GEOLOGY. By J. Phillips, M.A. Professor of Geology 
 in the University of Oxford. Fifth Edition; with Plates and Diagrams. 
 Fcp. 8vo. 4s. 
 
 A GLOSSABT of MINERALOGY. By H. W. Bkistow, F.G.S. of 
 
 the Geological Survey of Great Britain., With 486 Figures. Crown Bvo. 12s. 
 
 PHILLIPS'S ELEMENTARY INTRODUCTION to MINERALOGY, 
 with extensiv.e Alterations and Additions, by H. 3.. Beooke, F.B.S. and W. 
 H. MiLLEE, F.G.S. PostSvo. with "Woodcuts, 18s. 
 
 VAN- DEB HOEVEN'S HANDBOOK of ZOOLOGY. Translated from 
 the Second Dutch Edition by the Eev. "W. Claek, M.D. F.E.S. 2 vols. 8vo. 
 with 24 Plates of Figures,, 60s. 
 
 The COMPARATIVE ANATOMY and PHYSIOLOGY of the VERTE- 
 toate Animals. By EicHAED Q-WBir, F.E.S. D.C.L. 2 vols. 8vo. with 
 upwards of 1,200 "Woodcuts. U» t7w press. 
 
 HOMES "WITHO'UT HANDS ; an Account of the Habitations con- 
 structed by various Animals, classed according to their Principles of Con- 
 struction. By Efiv. J. G. "Wood, MA. F.L.S. Illustrations on AVood by 
 G. Pearson, from Drawmgs byF. W. KeylandB. A. Smith. Incoui-seol 
 publication in 20 Parts, Is. each. 
 
 MANUAL ef CffiLENTEBATA. By J. Reat Geeenb, B.A. M.E.LA. 
 
 Editedby the Kev. J., A. Galbbaith, M.A. and the Eev. S. HABemoif, 
 M.D. Fcp. 8vo. with 39 "Woodcuts. 6s. 
 
 Manual of Protozoa ; with a General Introduction on the Principles of 
 Zoology. By the same Author and Editors.. Fcp. 8vo. with 16 "Woodcuts, 2s. 
 
 Manual of the Metalloids; By J. Apjjomi, M.D. F.K.S. and the 
 
 same Editors. Fop. Svo. with 38 "Woodcuts, 7s. ed. 
 
13 NEW WORKS published et LONGMAN asd CO. 
 
 THE ALPS : Sketches of Life and Nature in the Mountains. By 
 Baron H. Von Beelepsoe. Translated by the Eev. L. Stephen, M.A. 
 With 17 Illustrations. 8vo. 15s. 
 
 The SEA and its LIVING WONDERS. By Dr. G. Haetwig. 
 
 Second (English) Edition. 8vo. with many Illustrations. 18s. 
 
 The TROPICAL WORLD. By the same Author. With 8 Chromo- 
 sylographs and 172 "Woodcuts. 8vo. 21s. 
 
 SKETCHES of the NATURAL HISTORY of CEYLON. By Sir J. 
 
 Emeesow Teksbst, K.C.S. LL.D. With 82 Wood Engravings. Post 8vo. 
 price 12s. 6d. 
 
 Ceylon. By the same Author. 5th Edition ; with Maps, &c. and 90 
 AVood Engravings. 2 vols. 8vo. £2 10s. 
 
 MARVELS and MYSTERIES of INSTINCT ; or, Curiosities of Animal 
 Life. By G. Gaeeatt. Third Edition. Pop. 8vo. 7s. 
 
 HOME WALKS and HOLIDAY RAMBLES. By the Eev. C. A. 
 
 J omrs, B.A. P.L.S. Pep. 8vo. vrith 10 Illustrations, 6s. 
 
 KIRBY and SPENCE'S INTRODUCTION to ENTOMOLOGY, or 
 
 Elements of the Natural Histoiy of Insects. Seventh Edition. Crown 8vo. 
 price 6s. 
 
 MAUNDER'S TREASURY of NATURAL HISTORY, or Popular 
 Dictionary of Zoology. Revised and corrected by T. S. Coeeoxd, M.D, 
 Pep. 8vo. with 900 Woodcuts, IDs. 
 
 The TREASURY of BOTANY, on the Plan of Maunder's Treasury. 
 By J. LiNDiET, M.D. and T. MooEB, P.L.S. assisted by other Practical 
 Botanists. With 16 Plates, and many Woodcuts from designs by W. H. 
 Pitch. Pep. 8vo. [In the press. 
 
 The ROSE AMATEUR'S GUIDE. By Thomas Eivees. 8th Edition. 
 Pep. 8vo. is. 
 
 The BRITISH FLORA; comprising the Phsenogamous or Flowering 
 Plants and the Perns. By Sir W. J. Hookeh, K.H. and G. A. Walkee 
 Aesott, LL.D. 12mo. with 12 Plates, 14^. or coloured, 21s. 
 
 ERYOLOGIA BRITANNICA; containing the Mosses of Great Britain 
 and Ireland, arranged and described. By W. WiLSOir. 8vo. with 61 Plates 
 425. or coloured, £i 4s. 
 
 The INDOOR GARDENER. By Miss Maling. Fcp. 8vo. with 
 coloured Frontispiece, 5s. 
 
 LOUDON'S ENCYCLOPJEDIA of PLANTS; comprising the Specific 
 Character, Description, Culture, History, &c. of all the Plants found in 
 Great Britain, With upwards of 12,000 Woodcuts. 8vo. £S 13s. M. 
 
 Loudon's Encyolopsedia of Trees and Shrubs ; containing the Hardy 
 Trees and Shrubs of Great Britain scientiiioally and popularly described. 
 With 2,000 Woodcuts. 8vo. 50s. 
 
 HISTORY 01 the BRITISH FRESHWATER ALG.ffi:. By A. H. 
 Habball, M.D. With 100 Plates of Pigures. 2 vols. 8vo. price £1 16s. 
 
NEW WOEKS PUBLisnED EX LONGMAN and CO. 33 
 
 MATTNDER'S SCIENTIFIC and LITEEAET TEEASTJEY ; a Popular 
 Encyolopsedia of Science, Literature, and. Art. Fcp. 8vo. 10s. 
 
 A DICTIONARY of SCIENCE, LITERATURE and ART ; comprising 
 the History, Bfscription, and Scientific Principles of every Brancli of 
 Human Knowledge. Edited by W. T. Bkande, E.E.B.L. and E. Fourth 
 Edition, revised and corrected. [/« the press. 
 
 ESSAYS on SCIENTIFIC and other SUBJECTS, contributed to the 
 JEdinburgh and Quarterly Heviews. By Sir H. Holland, Bart. M.D. 
 Second Edition. 8vo. 14s. 
 
 ESSAYS from the EDINBURGH and QUARTERLY REVIEWS; 
 
 with Addresses and other pieces. By Sir J. F. "W. Heeschel, Bart, M.A. 
 8vo. 18s. 
 
 Chemistry, Medicifie, Surgery, and the Allied 
 Sciences. 
 
 A DICTIONARY of CHEMISTRY and the Allied Branches of other 
 Sciences ; founded on that of the late Dr. Ure. By Heket Watts, F.C.S. 
 assisted by eminent Contributors. 4 vols. 8vo. in course of publication in 
 Monthly Parts. Vol. I. 31s. 6d. and Vol. IL 26s. are now ready. 
 
 HANDBOOK of CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, adapted to the Unitary 
 System of Notation : Based on Dr. H. Wills' Anleitung zur chemischen 
 Analyse. By F. T. CosiseTOK, M.A. F.C.S. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.— Tables of 
 Qualitative Aw axybis to accompany the same, 2s. Zd. 
 
 A HANDBOOK of VOLUMETRICAL ANALYSIS. By Eobert H. 
 
 Scott, M.A. a?.C.D. Post 8vo. 4s. 6(2. 
 
 ELEMENTS of CHEMISTRY, Theoretical and Practical. By "William 
 A. MiLLEE, M.D. LL.D. F.E,.S. F.G.S. Professor of Chemistry, King's 
 College, London. 3 vols. 8vo. £2 12s. Paet I. Chemical Physics. 
 Third Edition enlarged, 12s. Paet II. Ikoegahio Chemistet. Second 
 Edition, 20s. Paet III. OEaASic Ohemistey. Second Edition, 20s. 
 
 A MANUAL of CHEMISTRY, Descriptive and Theoretical. By 
 William ODLitra, M.B. F.E.S. Lecturer on Chemistry at St. Bartholo- 
 mew's Hospital. Part I. 8vo. 9s. 
 
 A Course of Practical Chemistry, for the use of Medical Students. 
 By the same Author. Paet I. crown 8vo. with Woodcuts, 4s. ad. Paet II. 
 (completion) just ready. 
 
 The DIAGNOSIS and TREATMENT of the DISEASES of WOMEN ; 
 
 including the Diagnosis of Pregnancy. By Geaily Hewitt, M.D. Physician 
 to the British Lying-in Hospital. Svo. 16s. 
 
 LECTURES on the DISEASES of INFANCY and CHILDHOOD. By 
 
 Chaeles West, M.D. &o. Fourth Edition, revised and enlarged. Svo. 14s. 
 
 EXPOSITION of the SIGNS and SYMPTOMS of PREGNANCY: 
 
 with other Papers on subjeots connected with Midwifery. By AV. F- 
 MosTCtoMEEY, M.A. M.D. iVi.li.I.A. Svo. with Illustrations, 25s. 
 
Ii4 NEW WOEKS EDBiianED by LONGMAN and Ca 
 
 A SYSTEM of SUBGEEY, Theoretical and Practical. In Treatises 
 by Various Autborst arranged and edited' by T. Holmes, M.A. Gantab. 
 Assistant-Surgeon to St. George's Hospital, 4vola..Svo. 
 
 Vol. I.. G-eueral Pathology. 21s. 
 
 Vol.11, local Injuries— Diseases of the Eye. 21s. 
 
 Vol. HI. Ojierative Surgery. BiBoaaes of the Organs of Special 
 Sense, Eospiration, Circulation, Locomotion and Innorration. 21s.. 
 
 Vol. IV. Diseases of the Alimentary Canal, of the Tlriao-genitary 
 Organs, of the Thyroid, Mamma and Slcin ; with Appendix of Miscellaneous 
 Subjects, and Geueeai. Index. [Sarly in October. 
 
 LECTURES on the PEIHCIPLES and PEACTICE of PHYSIC. By 
 
 Thomas Watsoh, M.D. Physician-Extraordinary to the Queen. Fourtli 
 Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. 3 to 
 
 LECTTJEES on STTEGICAI PATHOLOGY, By J. Paget, F.K.S. Sar- 
 geon-Extraordlnary to the Queen. Edited by "W". Tubkbe, M.B. 8\"0. with 
 llTWoodouts, 21s. 
 
 A TEEATISE on the CONTIITOED EEVEES of GEEAT BEITAIN. 
 
 By C. MtTEOHisoir, M.D. Senior Physician lo the London Eever Hospital. 
 8vo. with coloured Plates, 18s. 
 
 DEMONSTBATIOITS of MICEOSCOPIC ANATOMY ; a Guide to the 
 Examination of the Animal Tissues and Plulds In Health and Disease, for 
 the use of the Medical and Veterinary Professions. Founded on a Course of 
 Lectures delivered by Dr. Haelet, Prof. In XJnlv. Coll. London. Echted by 
 G. T. Beowk, late Vet. Prof, .in the Eoyal Agrlo. Coll. Cirencester. Svo. 
 with Illustrations. [Nearly read/n. 
 
 ANATOMY, DESCEIPTIVE and SUEGICAL. By Henrt Geat, 
 
 F.E.S. "With 410 Wood Engravings from Dissections. Third Edition, by 
 T. HoiMBS, ML.A. Cantab. Eoyal- Svo. 28s. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL ANATOMY and PHYSIOLOGY of MAN. By the 
 
 late E. B. ToDD, M.D. F.B.S. and W. Bowman, P.E.S. of King's College. 
 "With numerous Illustrations. Vol. II; 8vo. 23s. 
 
 A New Edition of the FIEST VOLUME, by Dr. Liokbl S- Beale, 
 Is preparing for publication. 
 
 The GTCLOP.33DIA of ANATOMY aod- PHYSIOLOGY. Edited hy 
 the late U. B. ToDD, M.D. P.E.S. Assisted by nearly all the most eminent 
 cultivators of Physiological Science of* the present age. 5 vols. Svo. with 
 2,853 Woodcuts, £ti 6s. 
 
 A DICTIONARY of PEACTICAL MEDICINE. By J. Coplaitd, M.D. 
 F.E.S. Abridged from the larger work by the Author,, assisted by J. C. 
 Copland, l vol. 8vo. \In the 'gress. 
 
 Df, Copland's Dictionary of Eraetical Medicine, (the laiiger work). 
 
 3 vols. Svo. £5 lis. 
 
 The ■WOEKS of SIE B. C. BRODIE,, Bart. Editadi by Chablbs 
 Hawkins, F.E.C,S.E. 2 vols. Svo. lln me press. 
 
NEW "WOUES iTia3!LrssBi) bt lONGlHAJf and 'CO. 15 
 
 MEDICAI, NOTES aiad KE-EEECTIOirs. % Sir H. Hoxland, Bart. 
 MJ). Third Edition. 8to. 13s. 
 
 HOOPER'S MEDICAL DICTIONARY, or EncyclopEedia of Medical 
 Science. Ninth Edition, broufsht down to the twesent time, by Alez, 
 Hekey, m.D. 1vol. 8\-o. lln the 'press. 
 
 A MANUAL of MATERIA MEDICA and THEEaPElTajrCS, abridged 
 ftom-Dr. Bekeiea's SlemetOs liy E. J.iFabee, M.D. Cantab, assisted \!y 
 E. Bentles-, M.E.iC:S. and by E. WtaSEiS&iOTS, -l^C.S. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Br. Pereira's Elements of Materia Medioa and Therapeutics, Third 
 
 Edition. By A. S. Tat-loe, II.D. and G. O. Ehes, M.D. 3 vols. Svo.with 
 numerous Woodcuts, £'i Ws. 
 
 The Fine Arts, and Illustrated Editiane. 
 
 The -'S^W TESTAMiENT of <©TIE LCKRB :aii^ SAmOfU'S, JESilTS 
 CMitlST. Illustrated withnumerousiEnfravings on Wood'from tilio OLD 
 TilASTBES. Crown ito. pi'iee B'is. cloth, gilt top ; or ijrico £S 9s. elegantly 
 bound in morocco. [In October. 
 
 L1!51A &ESMAMOA; 'Hymns for the Sundays and Chief ^Pestivals of 
 the-Christian Tear. Translated by CATnEEisE WrsmroETH : J25 Illus- 
 trations on Wood drawn by J. Leightoit, T'.'S.A. Fcp. Ito. 21s. 
 
 'CATS' .atud PAaiilE'S M-ORAL EKEIEMB ; with Aphorisms, Adages, 
 and Proverbs rff all 'Nations : coinprising Ml Illuijliratrons on Wood "by J. 
 I/EI6eaT0If, F.S.A, with an appropriate Text by E. PiGOTT. Imperial 8vo. 
 31s. &d. 
 
 B.TJNYAN':S BHiSEIM'S PEOSSESS : with ISS Illustraitions 'on Steel 
 and Wood by C. Beskett ; and a Preface by the llev. 'C. KisgSiiet. Fcp. 
 4to. 21s. 
 
 Ibe .EISTOET of OUS IiOSD, as exemplified ™ Works 'of Art : 
 with that of His Types, St. John the Baptist, and other Persons of the Old 
 and New Testament. By Mrs. Jameson and Lady Easilake. Jieing the 
 .Bourth and concluding SSKIES af 'Sacred and tesendary Art;' with SI 
 Etobirtgs.and iSi Woodcuts. 2 v<ds. square orown 8-vo. i42s. 
 
 In the same Series, by Mrs. Jameso*. 
 Jt^leveSa Wf tbs ilajints and Uai^jws. Fourth Edition, with 19 
 Etahings and 187 Woodoults. :2 vols.'Sls. 6d. 
 
 XegeEds of the Monastic Orders. Third Edition, with 11 Etchings 
 and 83 Woodcuts, 1 vol. 21s. 
 
 ■of tbe .^ffiadomaa. Thii^d Edition, with 2F7Et(Jhings. and 165 
 Woodcuts. 1 vol. 21s. 
 
 Arts,, Manufactures., -^v. 
 
 UNCYCLOTiEMA of AECHITECTUSE, Historical, Theoretionl, and 
 
16 NEW WOEKS published by LONGMAN and CO. 
 
 TUSCAN SCULPTORS, their Lives, Works, and Times. With Dlus- 
 trations from Original Drawings and Photographs. By Chaeles C. 
 Peekiks. 2 vols, imperial 8vo. [In the press. 
 
 The ENGINEER'S HANDBOOK; explaining the Principles which 
 should guide the young Engineer in the Construction of Machinery. By 
 C. S. Lowndes. Post 8vo. 6s. 
 
 The ELEMENTS of MECHANISM, for Students of Applied Mechanics. 
 By T. M. GooDEVE, M.A.. Professor of Nat. Philos. in King's Coll. London. 
 "With 206 Woodcuts. Post 8vo. 6s. ed. 
 
 ITRE'S DICTIONARY of ARTS, MANUFACTURES, and MINES. 
 
 Ee-written and enlarged by Eobeet Hunt, P.E.S. assisted hy numerous, 
 geutlemeneminent in Science and the Arts. With 2,000 Woodcuts. 3 vols. 
 Svo. £4:. 
 
 ENCYCLOPJEDIA of CIVIL ENGINEERING, Historical. Theoretical, 
 and Practical. By E. Ceesy, C.E. With above 3,000 Woodcuts. Svo. 42s. 
 
 TREATISE on MILLS and MILLWORK. By "W. Faiebairn, C.E. 
 
 P.I1.S, With 18 Plates and 822 Woodcuts. 2 vols. Svo. 32s. or each vol. 
 separately, 16s. 
 
 Useful Information for Engineers. By the same Author. !First 
 and Second Seeies. with many Plates and Woodcuts. 2 vols, crown Svo. 21s. 
 or each vol. separately, IDs. 6d. 
 
 The Application of Cast and Wrought Iron to Building Purposes. 
 
 By the same Author. Third Edition, with Plates and Woodcuts. 
 
 [Nearly ready. 
 
 The PRACTICAL MECHANIC'S JOURNAL: An Illustrated Kecord 
 of Mechanical and Engineering Science, and Epitome of Patent Inventions. 
 4to. price Is. monthly. 
 
 The PRACTICAL DRAUGHTSMAN'S BOOK of INDUSTRIAL DE- 
 SIGN. By W. Johnson, Assoc. Inst. C.E. With many hundred Illustrations. 
 4to. 28s. ed. 
 
 The PATENTEE'S MANUAL ; a Treatise on the Law and Practice of 
 Letters Patent for the use of Patentees and Inventoi's. By J. and J. H ■ 
 Johnson. Post Svo. 7s. Bd. 
 
 The ARTISAN CLUB'S TREATISE on the STEAM ENGINE, in its 
 
 various Applications to Mines, Mills, Steam Navigation, Railways and Agri- 
 culture. By J. BOUENE, C.E. Fifth Edition ; with 37 Plates and 546 Wood- 
 cuts. 4to. 42s. 
 
 A Catechism of the Steam Engine, in its various Applications to 
 Mines, Mills, Steam Navigation, Railways, and Agriculture. By the same 
 Author. With SO Woodcuts. Pep. Svo. 6s. 
 
 The STORY of the GUNS. By Sir J. Emerson Tennbnt, K.C.S. 
 F.R.S. With 83 Woodcuts. Post Svo. 7s. 6A 
 
 The THEORY of WAR Illustrated by numerous Examples from His- 
 tory. By Lieut.-Col. P. L. MacDou&all. - Third Edition, with 10 Plans. 
 Post Svo. lOs.ed. 
 
NEW "WORKS ptTBiiSHED BY LONGMAN AKD CO. 17 
 
 COLLIERIES and COLLIERS ; A Handbook of the Law and leading. 
 Cases relating tliereto. By J. 0. Fowlee, Barrister-at-Law. Fop. 8vo. fc. 
 
 The ART of PERFUMERY ; the History and Theory of Odours, and 
 the Methods of Extracting the Aromas of Hants. By Dr. PlESSE, E.C.S. 
 Third Edition, with 63 "Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 Chemical, Natural, and Physical Magic, for Juveniles during the 
 Holidays. By the same Author. With 30 Woodcuts. Pep. 8vo. 3s. 6d. 
 
 The Lahoratory of Chemical Wonders; a Scientific Melange for 
 Toung People. By the same. Crown 8vo. 6s. Bd. 
 
 TALPA; or the Chronicles of a Clay Farm. By C. W. Hosktns, 
 Esq. With 24 Woodcuts from Designs by G. Cbuikshahk. 16mo. Ss. ed. 
 
 H,R.H. the PRINCE CONSORT'S FARMS ; An Agricultural Memoir. 
 
 By Jonif Cealmees Mobton. Dedicated by permission to Her Majesty 
 the QuEEF. With it) Wood Engravings. 4to. 62s. 6d. 
 
 Handbook of Farm Labour, Steam, "Water, "Wind, Horse Povrer, 
 Hand Power, &c. By the same Author. 16mo. Is. 6d. 
 
 Handbook of Dairy Husbandry ; comprising the General Manage- 
 ment of a Dairy Farm, &c. By the same. 16mo. Is. 6d. 
 
 LOUDON'S ENCYCLOPaiDIA of AGRICULTURE: comprising the 
 Laying-out, Improvement, and Management of Landed Property, and the 
 Cultivation and Economy of the Productions of Agriculture. With 1,100 
 Woodcuts. 8vo. 31s. 6d. 
 
 Loudon's Enoylopsedia of Gardening ; Comprising the Theory and 
 Practice of Horticulture, Floriculture, Arboriculture, and [Landscape Gar- 
 dening. With 1,000 Woodcuts. 8vo. 81s. 6d. 
 
 Loudon's Encyclopsedia of Cottage, Farm, and Villa Architecture 
 and Furniture. With more than 2,000 Woodcuts. 8vo. 42s. 
 
 HISTORY of WINDSOR GREAT PARK and WINDSOR FOREST. 
 
 By WiILiAM Mebtzies, Resident Deputy Surveyor.' Dedicated by per- 
 mission to H. M. the QuEEH. With 2 Maps, and 20 Photographs by the 
 Eael of Caithsess and Mr. BEMBBiretE. Imperial folio, £8 8s. 
 
 BAYLDON'S ART of VALUING RENTS and TILLAGES, and Claims 
 
 of Tenants upon Quitting Farms, both at Michaelmas and Lady-Day. 
 Eighth Edition, adapted to the present time by J. 0. Moeton. 
 
 Religious and Moral Works. 
 
 An EXPOSITION of the 39 ARTICLES, Historical and Doctrinal. 
 By E. Haeold Beowne, D.D. Lord Bishop of Ely. Sixth Edition, 8vo. 16s. 
 
 The Pentateuch and the Elohistic Psalms, in reply to Bishop Colenso. 
 
 By the same Author. 8vo. 2s. 
 
 Examination Questions on Bishop Browne's Exposition of the 
 
 Articles. Bythe Rev. J. GoELE, M.A. Fcp. 3s. 6d. 
 
18 NEW WORKS PmEttlSEEB BT Il01ireM4K AOT) C0. 
 
 FIVE LECTUEES on the CHARACTER of ST. SAVL:; teing the 
 Huleean Lectures for 18G2. By Uhe Eev. S. S. Howaoir, D.D. "Second 
 Edition. Svo. 9s. 
 
 A CRITICAL und GEAHMATICAL COMMEKTARY om«T. PABTI'S 
 
 Epistles. By C. J. 'Eliicott, B.D. Lord Bishop of Gloucester and Bristol. Svo. 
 
 'fialatians, Third Edition, 'Ss. 6d. 
 
 ^hesians, Third Edition, 8s. 6d. 
 
 Pastoral Epistles, Second lEaition, I'Os. M. 
 
 i^ilippiaus, Colossiaua, and Philemon, Second ^Ediliian, 10s. 63. 
 
 Thessalonians, Second Edition, 7s. 6d. 
 
 Historical Lectures on the Life of onr Lord Jesus -Christ : "being the 
 Hidsean Lectiires for 1859. By .the same. Third Edition. Svo. 10s. Sd. 
 
 The Destiny of the Creature ; and other Sermons preached before 
 the University of Camhridge. By the same. Post Svo. Bs. 
 
 The Rroad and the Narrow "Way.; Two Sermons preached "before 
 the University of Cambridge. By the same. Crown Svo. 2s. 
 
 Rev. T. H. HORNE'S INTEOBTJCTIOSr to the CRITICAL STOIDY 
 
 and Knowledge of the Holy Scriptures. Eleventh Edition, correoted and 
 extended under carelul Editorial revision. With i Maps and:22 W^oodouts 
 and Eacsimiles. 4 vols. Svo. £3 1.5s. ed. 
 
 Rev. T. H. Home's Compendious Introdnctioi^ to the Study t)I the 
 Bible, being an Analysis of flie larger woit'bythe same A.uthor. Eie-edited 
 by the E«v. John Atee, M.A. With Haps. Sea. Post Svo. 9s. 
 
 The TREASTTRT of BIBLE KWOWXiEBCliE, on the Plan of Mannder's 
 Treasuries. Bythe Eev. JoaurAxEE, jSLA. Eop.-&vo. withKfaps and lUue- 
 ^raiSons. fjit ae jw-ess. 
 
 The IG-SEEK KESTAMEBTT:; with Kotes, Grammatical 'and Ex^otical. 
 By the Bev. W. Weestee, M.A. and 'IJhe Eev. W. P. WmKWSoir, lt.A. 2 
 vols. Svo. £2-49. 
 
 Vo!L. I. the Gospels and Aets,.2tte. 
 
 Vol. Il.'the Epistles and Apoca)(?pse, 2ts. 
 
 The POTJR EXPERIMENTS in Church and State ; and the Conflicts 
 of Churches. By Lord Eobeet Montaott, M.P. Svo. 12s. 
 
 EVERY-DAY SCRIPTURE BIPFICTILTIES explained. and illustrated; 
 Gospels of St. Matthew and St. Mark. By J. E. Pjibscott, M^A. late 
 Pellow of 0. C. Coll. Cantab. Svo. 9s. 
 
 The PENTATEUCH and BOOK of ffOSHUA CriticffKy Examined. 
 By J. W. COLENSO, D.D. Lord BisUo(p of Natal. Part I. the Pentaiem/h 
 exa/tnined as an Historical Narrative. Svo. Ss. PiOiT II. fhe Acre and 
 Autliorshvp of the Pentateuch Considered, is. Gd. Paet III. the Book qf 
 Deuteronomy, Ss. Pilki IV. theJPirst lil Cliapters^ Genesis examined- attS 
 separated^ with Reniarhs on the Creation, the Fall, and'tlie Dehiffe^l^s. 6d. 
 
NEW WOEKS PUEMSHED ET LONSMAN" AUD CO. 19 
 
 The LIFE and EPISTLES of ST. PAUL. By "W. J. GoHT^Aitr.; 
 M.4. late Fellow of Trin. Coll. Cantab, and J. S. H'CfWSOir, D.D. Principal of 
 the Collegiate Institution, Liverpool. 
 
 LiBEAUT Eeitioit, with all the OriginaUlluateations,, Maps, Lanclsoapes 
 on Steel, Woodcuts, &c. 2 vols. 4to. dSs. 
 
 lUTEKMEDiATE EDiTioif, with a Selection of Maps, Plates, and Woodcuts. 
 2 vols, square crown 8vo. 31s. id. 
 
 People's Editiok, revised and condensed, with 46 Illustrations and 
 Maps. 2 vols, crown 8vo. lis. 
 
 The VOYAGE and SHIPWRECK of ST. PAUL; with Dissertations, 
 on the Ships and Navigation of the Ancients. By JisEES Smith, P.E.S. 
 Crown 8vo. Charts, 8s. 6d. 
 
 HIPPOLYTUS and his AGE ; or, the Baginnings and Prospects of 
 Christianity. By Baron BussEir, D.D. 2 vols. 8vo. 30s. 
 
 Outlines of the Philosophy of Universal History, applied to Lan- 
 guage and Religion : Containingan Account of the Alphabetical Conferences. 
 By the same Author. 2 vols. 8vo. 33s. 
 
 Analeeta Ante-Uicsena. By the same Author. 3 vols. 8vo. 42s. 
 
 THEOLOGIA GERMANIGA. Translated by Sosaknah 'Winkwokth: 
 with a Preface by the Eev. 0. KiNGSLET ; and a Letter by Baron Buksek. 
 Pop. Svo. 6s. 
 
 mSTSUCTIONS in the DOCTRINE and PRACTICE of CHRIS- 
 
 tianity, as an Introduction to Confirmation. By G. B. L. CoiIOB", D.D. 
 Lord Bishop of Caioutta, 18mo. 2s. 6i2. 
 
 ESSAYS on RELIGION and LITERATURE. By Cardinal Wise- 
 man, Dr. D. EoGK, E. H. Laikg, and other Writers. Edited by H. E. 
 MAUiriirG, D.D. Svo. 
 
 ESSAYS and REVIEWS. By the^Eev. W. Teiiple, D.D. the Eev. 
 E. Williams, B.D. the Eev. B. Powell, M.A. the Eev. H. B. Wilsok, 
 B.D. C. W. Goodwin, M.A. the Eev. M. Patxisok, B.D. and the Eev. B. 
 
 JOWEIT, M.A. llth Edition. Fcp. Svo. 6s, 
 
 MOSHEIM'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY. Murdock and Soastes's 
 Translation and Notes, re-edlted by the Eev. W. Stttbes, M.A.. 3 vols. 
 Svo. 4f5s. 
 
 The GENTILE and the JEW in the Courts of the Temple of Christ : 
 an Introduction to the Uis-tory of Christianity. Prom the German of Prof, 
 Dollihgee, 1^ the Eev. N, Daenell, MA. 2 vols. Svo. 21s. 
 
 PHYSICO-PROPHETICAL ESSAYS, on the Locality of the Eternal 
 Inheritance, its Nature and, Character ; the Essurrection Body ; and the 
 Mutual Eecogaition of Glorified Saints. By the Eev.. W. Lisiee, EjG.S. 
 Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 BISHOP JEREMY TAYLOR'S ENTIRE WORKS: With Life by 
 Bishop Hebee. Revised and corrected by the Eev, 0. P. Edeh, 10 vols. 
 Svo. £S 5s. 
 
20 jSTEW works publibheb et LONGMAN ahd CO. 
 
 PASSING THOUGHTS on RELIGION. By the Author of 'Amy 
 Herbert.' 8th Edition. Pep. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Thoughts for the Holy Week, for Young Persons. By the same 
 Author. 2d Edition. Fop. 8vo. 2s. 
 
 Night Lessons from Scripture. By the same Author. 2d Edition. 
 32mo. 3s. 
 
 Self-Examination before Confirmation. By the same Author. 32mo. 
 price Is. 6d. 
 
 Readings for a Month Preparatory to Confirmation, from Writers 
 ofthe Early and English Church. By the same. Pep. 4s. 
 
 Readings for Every Day in Lent, compiled from the Writings of 
 Bishop Jeeemt Tatloe. By the same. Fcp. Svo. 6s. 
 
 Preparation for the Holy Commnnion ; the Devotions chiefly from 
 the works of Jeeemt Taylor. By the same. 32mo. 3s. 
 
 MORNING CLOUDS. Second Edition. Fcp. Svo. 5s. 
 
 The Afternoon of Life. By the same Author. Second Edition. 
 Fcp. 5s. 
 
 Problems in Human Nature, By the same. Post Svo. 5s. 
 
 The WIFE'S MANUAL ; or, Prayers, Thoughts, and Songs on Several 
 Occasions of a Matron's Life. By the Eev. W. Calveet, M.A. Crown Svo. 
 price 10s. Gd. 
 
 SPIRITUAL SONGS for the SUNDAYS and HOLIDAYS through- 
 out the Tear. By J. S. B. Mousell, LL.D. Tlcar of Egham. Third Edition. 
 Fcp. Svo. 4s. 6d. 
 
 HYMNOLOGIA CHRISTIANA ; or. Psalms and Hymns selected and 
 arranged in the order of the Christian Seasons. By B. H. Kjennedx, D.D. 
 Prehendary of Liolifleld. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 LYRA SACRA ; Hymns, Ancient and Modern, Odes and Fragments 
 of Sacred Poetry. Edited hy the Eov. B. "W. Saviie, M.A. Fcp. Svo. 5s. 
 
 LYRA GERMANICA, translated from the German by Miss C. Wink- 
 worth. PiEST Series, Hymns for the Sundays and Chief Festivals; 
 Second Series, the Christian Life. Fcp. Svo. 5s. each Series. 
 
 Hymns from Lyra Germanica, 18mo. Is. 
 
 LYRA EUCHARISTICA; Hymns and Verses on the Holy Communion, 
 Ancient and Modern : with other Poems. Editedby the Rev. Oebt Snip- 
 lEY, M.A. Second Edition, revised and enlarged. Fcp. Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Lyra Messianioa ; Hymns and Verses on the Life of Christ, Ancient 
 and Modern ; with other Poems. By the same Editor. Fcp. Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Lyra Mystica ; Hymns and Verses on Sacred Subjects, Ancient and 
 Modern. Forming a companion volvime to the above, by the same Editor. 
 Fop. Svo. ^Nearly ready. 
 
NEW WOEKS PUBMSHED BY LONGMAN AND CO. 21 
 
 lYKA DOMESTICA; Christian Songs for Domestic Edification. 
 Translated from the Psaltery and Earp of C. J. P. Spitta, and from other 
 sources, by EicHAED Massie. Fibst and Second Seeies, fcp. 8vo. 
 price 4s. 6d. each. 
 
 The CHORAIE BOOK for ENGLAND ; a complete Hymn-Book in 
 
 accordance with the Services and Festivals of the Church of England : the 
 Hymns translated by Miss C. Winkwoeth i the tunes aiTanged by Prof. 
 
 "W. S.BENNETTaudOTTOGOIDSCHMIDT. Pcp. 4to. lOs. 6A 
 
 Congregational Edition. Fcp. 8vo. price Is. &d. 
 
 Travels, Voyages, %c. 
 
 EASTERN ETJKOPE and "WESTERN ASIA. Political and Social 
 Sketches on Eussia, Greece, and Syria. By Henbx A. Tillet. "With 6 
 Illustrations. Post 8vo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 EXPLORATIONS in SOUTH-"WEST AFRICA, from "Walvisch Bay to 
 Lake Ngami and the "Victoria Palls. By Thomas Baines. Svo. with 
 Map and Illustrations. {In Octoher. 
 
 SOUTH AMERICAN SKETCHES ; or, a Visit to Kio Janeiro, the 
 Organ Mountains, La Plata, and the Paranil. By Thomas W. Hinohlifb, 
 M.A. F.R.G.S. Post Svo. with Illustrations, 12s. m. 
 
 EXPLORATIONS in LABRADOR. By Henry Y. Hind, M.A. 
 P.R.G.S. "With Maps and Illustrations. 2 vols. Svo. 32s. 
 
 The Canadian Red River and Assinnihoine and Saskatchewan 
 
 Exploring Expeditions. By the same Author. With Maps and Illustrations. 
 2 vols. Svo. 42s. 
 
 The CAPITAL of the TYCOON ; a Narrative of a Three Years' Ees!- 
 dence in Japan. By Sir Eutheeeobd Alcock, K.C.B. 2 vols. Svo. with 
 numerous Illustrations, 42s. 
 
 LAST "WINTER in ROME and other ITALIAN CITIES. By C. 
 
 Ki. "Weid, Author of * The Pyrenees, "West and East,' &c. 1 vol. post Svo. 
 with a Portrait of ' Stella,' and Engravings on "Wood from Sketches by 
 the Author. \In fhe Autumn. 
 
 AUTUMN RAMBLES in NORTH AFRICA. By John Oemsbt, 
 
 of the Middle Temple, Author of the ' Ascent of the Grivola,' in ' Peaks, 
 Passes, and Glaciers.' With 13 Illustrations on "Wood from Sketches by the 
 Author. Post Svo. 8s. Od. 
 
 PEAKS, PASSES, and GLACIERS; a Series of Excursions by 
 Members of the Alpine Club. Edited by J. Ball, M.E.I.A. Fourth 
 Edition ; Maps, Illustrations, "Woodcuts. Square crown Svo. 21s. — Teatel- 
 IEK8' Edition, condensed, l6mo. 5s. 6d. 
 
 Second Series, edited by E. S. Kennedy, M.A. F.R.G.S. "W"ith 
 many Maps and Illustrations. 2 vols, square crown Svo. 42s. 
 
 Nineteen Maps of the Alpine Districts, from the First and 
 Second Series of Peaks, Passes, and Glaciers. Price 7s. 6d. 
 
22 NEW WOEKS pcEHSHiEB BY LONGMAW xss CO. 
 
 Hhe DOIiOMITE mOUNTAINS. Excursions through Tyrol, Carinthia, 
 Carniolai and Priuli iu 1861', 1862, and 1863. By J. GfnEEET and G. C. 
 OmmoHHii., F.E.G.S. With, numerous Htestrattons. Square crown 
 8vo. 21s. 
 
 MOITNTAINEERING in 1861; a Vacation Tonr. By Trot J. 
 Tyudall, P.R.S. Square crown 8vo. with 2' Views, 7s. ed. 
 
 A SUMMER TOTJE in the GEISONS and ITALIAK VALLEYS of 
 
 the Bernina. By Mrs. Henit PBESHEIEI.D. "With 2 Coloured Maps and 
 4 Views. Post 8vo. 10s. ed. 
 
 Alpine Byeways ; or, Light Leaves gathered in 1859 and 1860. By 
 the same Authoress. Post 8to. with Illustrations, 10s. 6d. 
 
 A LADY'S TOUE BOUND MOMTE EOSA; including Visits to the 
 Italian Valleys. With Map and Illustrations. Post 8vo. 14!S. 
 
 6TTIDE to the PYEENEES, for the use of Mountaineers. By 
 CHABiiEa Paoke. With Maps, &c. and anew Appendix. Eop. 6«. 
 
 GUIDE to the CEWTEAL ALPS, including the Bernese Oberland, 
 
 Eastern Switzerland, Lomhardy, and Western Tyrol. By John Baix, 
 
 M.E..I.A. Post 8vo. with 8 Maps, 7s. Qd, or with an Inteodttctioit on 
 
 Alpine Travelling, and on the Geology of the Alps, 8s. Gd. The iwTHODirc- 
 
 loir separately. Is. 
 
 Guide to the Western Alps. By the same Author. With an 
 Article on the .Geology of the Alps hy M. E. Desoe. Post 8vo. with Maps, 
 &o. 7s. &d. 
 
 A WEEK at the LAND'S END. By J. T. Blight ; assisted by E. 
 H. EoDD, E. Q. Couch, and J. Eaips. With Map and S8 Woodcuts. Pep. 
 8vo. 6s. 6d. 
 
 VISITS to E^EMASKABLE PLACES : Old Halls, Battle-Fields, and 
 Scenes Illustrative of Striking Passages in English Histoiy and Poetry. 
 Bj^ William BLowiti. 2 vols, square crown. 8vo. with Wood Engravings, 
 price 25s. 
 
 The EUEAL LIFE of ENGLAND. By the same Author. With 
 
 Woodcuts hy Bewick and WilUams. Medium 8vq. 12s..&d. 
 
 Works of Fiction. 
 
 LATE LAUEELS : a Tale. By the Author of ' Wheat and Tares.' 2 
 
 vols, post Svo. IBs. 
 
 GBYLL GEANGE. By the Author of ' Headlong Hall.* Post Svo. 
 price 7s. 6d. 
 
 A FIEST EEIENDSHIF. [Eepriuted from Fraser's Magazine.'] 
 Crown 8vo. 7«. 6d. 
 
 THALATTA ; or, the Great Commoner : a Political Komance. Ctown , 
 Svo. 9s. 
 
NEW WORKS BXTBLISHED BY LOiNGMAN ajsb C0i 
 
 SI 
 
 MAcAnLATVCIiord) Essays ,.....„ 3 
 
 History, of England !• 
 
 Jjaya of Ancient Kome 2* 
 
 _ Miseellaneoua Writings ...... 8 
 
 — - — : -Speechea 6 
 
 -Speeches- on Ptirllfimentary 
 
 Reform 6 
 
 MACBRAitt'» AfriGansatHome 10- 
 
 MicDOuo all's. Theory ofWar 16 
 
 McIiBoo's, Middle-CloBG Atlas of General 
 
 Geography 28 
 
 . — Physical Atlafli of Great Britain 
 
 and Ireland 28 
 
 MbCuLLocn's Dictionary: of GommoTce 26 
 
 Geographical Dictionary 10 
 
 Maouire's Life of Father Mathew 4 
 
 Rome and its Rulers ^..r. 4, 
 
 Ualino's Indoor Gardener «.. 12 
 
 Maps from Peaks, Passes, and Glaciers .... 16 
 
 Marshall's History of Christian Missions . 3 
 
 Mahsky's History of England 1 
 
 Madnder's Biographical Treasury ......... 3 
 
 p- — Geogrfl-phical Treasury 10 
 
 Historical Treasury 3 
 
 Scientific and Literary Treasuiy 13 
 
 Treasury of Knowledee 2? 
 
 Treasury of Natural History . . 12 
 
 Maurt.'s Physical Geography 10 
 
 May 's Constitutional History of England. . 1 
 
 Mblvills's Digby Grand 23 
 
 General Bounce 23 
 
 Gladiators ,., 23 
 
 Good fbr Nothing ................. 23 
 
 Holmby House... ........^ 23 
 
 Interpreter 23 
 
 — . — KateCoventry 23 
 
 Queen's Maries-. ., 23 
 
 M&ndblssohn's Letters 4 
 
 MsNziBs' "Windsor Great Paxk 17 
 
 M2BiTALfi'& CH.) Colonisation and' Colonies 10 
 
 (G.) Fall of the Roman Republic 2 
 
 Romans under the Empire 2 
 
 Mbbyon's History of Medicine S 
 
 Milks on Horse's Foot , 25 
 
 On Horpcs' Teeth 25 
 
 onHorse Shoeingi, , 26 
 
 on Stables 25 
 
 Mill on Liberty , 5 
 
 on Representative Government 5 
 
 on Utilitarianism 5 
 
 Mill's Dissertations and Discussions 5 
 
 Political Economy 5 
 
 System of Logib .-> 5 
 
 Miller' sElements of Chenuetry 13 
 
 Mowsell's Spiritual Songs 20 
 
 Montagu's Experiments in Church and 
 
 State 18 
 
 MoNTooMBRY on the Signs and Symptoms 
 
 of Pregnancy 13 
 
 Moore's Irish Melodies ». 24 
 
 Lalla Rookh 24 
 
 — Memoirs, Journal, and Correspon- 
 dence 4 
 
 ■ Poetical Worka 24 
 
 Morell's Elements of Psychology g 
 
 ■ Mental Philosophy 9 
 
 Morning Clouds 20 
 
 Morton's Handbook of Dairy Husbandry. . 17 
 
 Farm Labour 17 
 
 Prince Consort's Farms 17 
 
 Mosheim's Ecclesiastical History 19 
 
 Mollkr's (Max) Lectures on the Science of 
 
 Language 7 
 
 (K. 0.) Literature of Ancient 
 
 Greece 2 
 
 MuRcmsoN on Continued Fevers 14 
 
 Mube's Language and Literature of Greece 2 
 
 TStew Testament illustrated with "WoodTEn- 
 
 graviuMftiom the Old Masters IS 
 
 Newman 8 Apologia pro Vita Sua ..„.,,.,. 3" 
 
 NioHTiMoALB^S' Notes ottHospitalB^.*. ... .,.. .^ 27" 
 
 ODLiKo'sCourse of Practical' Chemistry .^*- 15 
 
 Manual of Chemistry ^. . . 13 
 
 Ormsoy's Rambles in Algeria and Tunis., . . 21 
 Owen's Comparative Anatomy andiPhy^o- 
 
 logy of Veitebraite, Animftlfi .,. ., , .^. ,„. . . u. 
 
 pAcKB'8.Gmde- to the Pyrenees . . , 
 
 PacstV Lectures on. Surgical Pathology.. 
 
 Parker's (Theodore) Life, by Weiss 4 
 
 Peaks, Passes, and Glaciers, 2 Series Bl 
 
 Pereira's Elements of Materia Medica. ... 15 
 
 Manual of Materia Medica 15 
 
 Perkins's Tuscan Sculptors le 
 
 Phillips's Guide to Geology ji 
 
 — Introduction to Mineralogy 11 
 
 Piessb's Art of Perfumery \j 
 
 Chemical, Natural, and Physical 
 
 Magic 17 
 
 — Laboratory of Chemical Wonders 17 
 
 Playtime with the Poets 24 
 
 Practical Mechanic's Journal 16 
 
 Prescott's Scripture Difficulties is 
 
 Problems in Human Nature 20 
 
 PYcaoFx's.Course of English Reading 7- 
 
 — CricketField ,... 25 
 
 ■ — Cricket Tutor...., , 25 
 
 Recreations of a Country Parson, Second 
 
 Series g 
 
 RiDDLE'EDiamondLatin-EuglishDictionaiy 7- 
 
 RivBRs's Rose Amateur's Guide 12 
 
 Rogers's Correspondence of Greyson 9 
 
 Eclipse of Faith 9 
 
 Defence of ditto 9 
 
 . Baanya from the Edinburgh Heview 9 
 
 FuUeriana 9 
 
 •- . Reason and Faith 9 
 
 Rooet's Thesaurus of English Words and 
 
 Phrases 
 
 RoNALDs's Fly-Fisher's Entomology 25 
 
 Rowton'b Debater ,- 7 
 
32 
 
 NEW WOUKS PUBLISHED BT LONGMAN and CO. 
 
 Saxby'b Study of Steam 26 
 
 'Weather SyBtem 10 
 
 Scott'e Handbook ofVolumetricat Analysis 13 
 
 ScBOPE on Volcanofl jl 
 
 Shkior'b BioRraphical Sketches 5 
 
 EsBaya on Fiction 23 
 
 SEWKLi'fl Amy Herbert 23 
 
 Ancient History 2 
 
 Cleve Hall 23 
 
 Earl'fl Dauehter 23 
 
 Eiperience of Life 23 
 
 ■ Gertrude 23 
 
 — Glimpse of the World 23 
 
 History of the Early Church 3 
 
 IVOTB 23 
 
 — — Katharine Aehton 23 
 
 — Laneton Parsonofie 23 
 
 Margaret PerciTal 23 
 
 Nignt Leasona from Scripture .... 20 
 
 ■ Passine Thoughts on Religion. ... 'JO 
 
 Preparation for Communion 20 
 
 Readings for Confirmation 20 
 
 Readings for licnt 20 
 
 Self-Examination before Confir- 
 mation 20 
 
 Stories and Tales 23 
 
 . Thoughts for the Holy Week 20 
 
 Uraula as 
 
 Shaw's Work on Wine 26 
 
 Shbdden's Elements of Logic 6 
 
 Short Whist 26 
 
 SrHVBKiNG's (Amelia) Life, by Winkwobth 4 
 
 Smith's (Soothttood) PhiloBophy of Health 27 
 
 (J.) Voyage and Shipwreck of St. 
 
 Paul 19 
 
 ■ CG.) Wesleyan MethodiBm 3 
 
 (Stdnet) Memoir and Letters 4 
 
 ^Miscellaneoua Works 8 
 
 Sketches of Moral Philo- 
 sophy 8 
 
 Wit and Wisdom 8 
 
 Southet's (Doctor) 7 
 
 Poetical Works 24 
 
 Stebbinq's Analysis of Mill's Logic 6 
 
 Stei'hbnson's (R.) Life by Jeaffbeson and 
 
 Pole 3 
 
 Stephen's Essays in Ecclesiastical Bio- 
 graphy 5 
 
 Lectures on the History of 
 
 France 2 
 
 Stonehenob on the Dog 25 
 
 ■ on the Greyhound 25 
 
 Stbickj-and's Queens of England 1 
 
 Taylor's (Jeremy) Works, edited by Eden 19 
 
 Tennent'b Ceylon 12 
 
 iiTaturttl History of Ceylon 12 
 
 Story of the Guns 16 
 
 Thalatta 22 
 
 Theologia Germanica '^ 
 
 Thirlwall's History of Greece ••• * 
 
 Thomson's (Archbishop) Laws of Thought 6 
 
 . (J.) Tables of Interest ..;. 27 
 
 Tilley'b Eastern Europe and Western Asia 21 
 ToDD'a CyclopBBdia of Anatomy and Phy- 
 siology • ■ • * I* 
 
 and Bowman's Anatomy and Phy- 
 siology of Man^ , 1 * 
 
 Trollope's Barchester Towers 23 
 
 Warden 23 
 
 Twiss's Law of Nations 26 
 
 Tyndall'b Lectures on Heat H 
 
 _ Mountaineering in 1861 22 
 
 Uhe's Dictionary of Arte, Manufactures, 
 
 and Mines l& 
 
 Vandeb Hobven's Handbook of Zoology-. H 
 Vauohan's (R.) Revolutions in Englifili 
 
 History 1 
 
 — CB. A.) Hours with the Mystics 9 
 
 Warburton's Life, by Watson 4 
 
 Wabter's Last of the Old Squires 23 
 
 Watson's Principles and Practice of Physic 1 4 
 
 Watte's Dictionary of Chemistry 13 
 
 Webb's Celestial Objects for Common Tele- 
 scopes in 
 
 Webster & Wilkinson's Greek Testament 18 
 
 Weld's Last Winter in Rome 21 
 
 Wellinoton's Life, by Brialuont and 
 
 Glrio 4 
 
 ^by Gleio 4 
 
 Wesley's Life,by Southey 4 
 
 West on the Diseases of Lafancy and Child- 
 hood 13 
 
 Whately's English Synonymes b 
 
 Logic 5 
 
 ^Remains 5 
 
 ^Rhetoric 6 
 
 Whewell's History of the Inductive Sci- 
 ences 2 
 
 White and Rjddlb*s Latin-English Dic- 
 tionary J 7 
 
 WiLBEBFoncB (W.) Kecollections of, by 
 
 Habpord ' i 
 
 Willich's Popular Tables 27 
 
 Wilson's Bryologia Britannica li 
 
 Wood's Homes without Hands 1 1 
 
 Woodward's Historical nnd .Chronological 
 
 Encyclopaedia 3 
 
 Yonhe's English-Greek Lexicon 7 
 
 Abridged ditto 7 
 
 Yoc7No's Nautical Dictionary 26 
 
 Yodatt on the Dog 2i 
 
 on the Horse \ 23 
 
 BPOTTISWOOBE ATfD CO., PEINTEEB, WBTV-STUEET SQTTAHE, LONDOS"